Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gillette Inc., the leading producer of grooming aids, was faced with a significant corporate strategy decision early in 1994 on whether it would continue its high-margin strategy or shift to a lower margin strategy to increase sales revenues in the face of intense generic competition. The two strategies are being considered.
Status Quo High-Margin Strategy
* Maintain profit margins at 1993 levels (In 1993, net income was $575 million on revenues of $5,750 million.) from 1994 to 2003.
* The sales/book value ratio, which was 3 in 1993, can then be expected to decline to 2.5 between 1994 and 2003.
* Reduce net profit margin to 8% from 1994 to 2003.
* The sales/book value ratio will then stay at 1993 levels from 1994 to 2003.
The book value per share at the end of 1993 is $9.75. The dividend payout ratio, which was 33% in 1993, is expected to remain unchanged from 1994 to 2003 under either strategy, as is the beta, which was 1.30 in 1993. (The T.Bond rate is 7%) After 2003, the earnings growth rate is expected to drop to 6% and the dividend payout ratio is expected to be 60% under either strategy. The beta will decline to 1.0.
a. Estimate the price/sales ratio under the status quo strategy.
b. Estimate the price/sales ratio under the low margin strategy.
c. Which strategy would you recommend and why.
d. How much would sales have to drop under the status quo strategy for the two strategies to be equivalent?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are prices of options traded on Microsoft Corporation, which pays no dividends.
|
|
Call
|
Put
|
|
|
K=85 K=90
|
K=85 K=90
|
|
1 month
|
2.75 1.00
|
4.50 7.50
|
|
3 month
|
4.00 2.75
|
5.75 9.00
|
|
6 month
|
7.75 6.00
|
8.00 12.00
|
The stock is trading at $83, and the annualized riskless rate is 3.8%. The standard deviation in In stock prices (based upon historical data) is 30%.
a. Estimate the value of a three-month call, with a strike price of 85.
b. Using the inputs from the Black-Scholes model, specify how you would replicate this call.
c. What is the implied standard deviation in this call?
d. Assume now that you buy a call with a strike price of 85 and sell a call with a strike price of 90. Draw the payoff diagram on this position.
e. Using put-call parity, estimate the value of a three-month put with a strike price of
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A new security on AT&T will entitle the investor to all dividends on AT&T over the next three years, limit upside potential to 20%, but also provide downside protection below 10%. AT&T stock is trading at $50, and three-year call and put options are traded on the exchange at the following prices
|
|
Call Options
|
Put Options
|
|
K
|
1 year
|
3 year
|
1 year
|
3 year
|
|
45
|
$8.69
|
$13.34
|
$1.99
|
$3.55
|
|
50
|
$5.86
|
$10.89
|
$3.92
|
$5.40
|
|
55
|
$3.78
|
$8.82
|
$6.59
|
$7.63
|
|
60
|
$2.35
|
$7.11
|
$9.92
|
$10.23
|
How much would you be willing to pay for this security?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluate whether the following actions are likely to increase stock market efficiency, decrease it or leave it unchanged, and explain why.
a. The government imposes a transaction tax of 1% on all stock transactions.
Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___
b. The securities exchange regulators impose a restriction on all short sales to prevent rampant speculation.
Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___
c. An options market, trading call and put options, is opened up, with options traded on many of the stocks listed on the exchange.
Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___
d. The stock market removes all restrictions on foreign investors acquiring and holding stock in companies.
Increase Efficiency___ Decrease Efficiency___ Leave unchanged___
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are examining the performance of two mutual funds. AD VALUE Fund has been in existence since January 1, 1988 and invests primarily in low Price Earnings Ratio stocks, with high dividend yields. AD GROWTH Fund has also been in existence since January 1, 1988 but it invests primarily in high growth stocks, with high PE ratios and low or no dividends. The performance of these funds over the last five years is summarized below:
|
Average from 1988-1992
|
|
|
Price Appreciation
|
Dividend Yield
|
Beta
|
|
NYSE Composite
|
13%
|
3%
|
1
|
|
AD VALUE
|
11%
|
5%
|
0.8
|
|
AD GROWTH
|
15%
|
1%
|
1.2
|
The average risk free rate during the period was 6%. The current risk free rate is 3%.
a. How well or badly did these funds perform after adjusting for risk?
b. Assume that the front-end load on each of these funds is 5% (i.e. if you put $1000 in each of these funds today, you would only be investing $950 after the initial commission). Assume also that the excess returns you have calculated in part (a) will continue into the future and that you choose to invest in the fund that outperformed the market. How many years would you have to hold this fund to break even?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just done a regression of monthly stock returns of HeavyTech Inc., a manufacturer of heavy machinery, on monthly market returns over the last five years and come up with the following regression:
RHeavyTech = 0.5% + 1.2 RM
The variance of the stock is 50% and the variance of the market is 20%. The current T.Bill rate is 3% (It was 5% one year ago). The stock is currently selling for $50, down $4 over the last year, and has paid a dividend of $2 during the last year and expects to pay a dividend of $2.50 over the next year. The NYSE composite has gone down 8% over the last year with a dividend yield of 3%. HeavyTech Inc. has a tax rate of 40%.
a. What is the expected return on HeavyTech over the next year?
b. What would you expect HeavyTech”s price to be one year from today?
c. What would you have expected HeavyTech”s stock returns to be over the last year?
d. What were the actual returns on HeavyTech over the last year?
e. HeavyTech has $100 million in equity and $5 million in debt. It plans to issue $50 million in new equity and retire $50 million in debt. Estimate the new beta.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are analyzing the beta for Hewlett Packard and have broken down the company into four broad business groups with market values and betas for each group.
|
Business Group
|
Market Value of Equity
|
Beta
|
|
Mainframes
|
$ 2.0 billion
|
1.10
|
|
Personal Computers
|
$ 2.0 billion
|
1.50
|
|
Software
|
$ 1.0 billion
|
2.00
|
|
Printers
|
$ 3.0 billion
|
1.00
|
a. Estimate the beta for Hewlett Packard as a company. Is this beta going to be equal to the beta estimated by regressing past returns on HP stock against a market index. Why or Why not?
b. If the treasury bond rate is 7.5%, estimate the cost of equity for Hewlett Packard. Estimate the cost of equity for each division. Which cost of equity would you use to value the printer division?
c. Assume that HP divests itself of the mainframe business and pays the cash out as a dividend. Estimate the beta for HP after the divestiture. (HP had $1 billion in debt outstanding.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table summarizes the percentage changes in operating income, percentage changes in revenue and betas for four pharmaceutical firms.
|
Firm
|
% Change in Revenue
|
% Change in Operating Income
|
Beta
|
|
PharmaCorp
|
27%
|
25%
|
1
|
|
SynerCorp
|
25%
|
32%
|
1.15
|
|
BioMed
|
23%
|
36%
|
1.3
|
|
Safemed
|
21%
|
40%
|
1.4
|
a. Calculate the degree of operating leverage for each of these firms.
b. Use the operating leverage to explain why these firms have different betas.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have collected returns on AnaDone Corporation (AD Corp.), a large diversified manufacturing firm, and the NYSE index for five years:
|
Year
|
AD Corp
|
NYSE
|
|
1981
|
10%
|
5%
|
|
1982
|
5%
|
15%
|
|
1983
|
-5%
|
8%
|
|
1984
|
20%
|
12%
|
|
1985
|
-5%
|
-5%
|
a. Estimate the intercept (alpha) and slope (beta) of the regression.
b. If you bought stock in AD Corp. today, how much would you expect to make as a return over the next year? [The six month T.Bill rate is 6%]
c. Looking back over the last five years, how would you evaluate AD”s performance relative to the market?
d. Assume now that you are an undiversified investor and that you have all of your money invested in AD Corporation. What would be a good measure of the risk that you are taking on? How much of this risk would you be able to eliminate if you diversify?
e. AD is planning to sell off one of its divisions. The division under consideration has assets which comprise half of the book value of AD Corporation and 20% of the market value. Its beta is twice the average beta for AD Corp (before divestment). What will the beta of AD Corporation be after divesting this division?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You run a regression of monthly returns of Mapco Inc, an oil and gas producing firm, on the S&P 500 index and come up with the following output for the period 1991 to 1995.
Intercept of the regression = 0.06%
Slope of the regression = 0.46
Standard error of X-coefficient = 0.20
R squared = 5%
There are 20 million shares outstanding and the current market price is $2 per share. The firm has $20 million in debt outstanding. (The firm has a tax rate of 36%.)
a. What would an investor in Mapco”s stock require as a return if the T.Bond rate is 6%?
b. What proportion of this firm”s risk is diversifiable?
c. Assume now that Mapco has three divisions, of equal size (in market value terms). It plans to divest itself of one of the divisions for $20 million in cash and acquire another for $50 million (It will borrow $30 million to complete this acquisition). The division it is divesting is in a business line where the average unlevered beta is 0.20 and the division it is acquiring is in a business line where the average unlevered beta is 0.80. What will the beta of Mapco be after this acquisition?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just run a regression of monthly returns of American Airlines (AMR) against the S&P 500 over the last five years. You have misplaced some of the output and are trying to derive it from what you have.
a. You know the R squared of the regression is 0.36 and that your stock has a variance of 67%. The market variance is 12%. What is the beta of AMR?
b. You also remember that AMR was not a very good investment during the period of the regression and that it did worse than expected (after adjusting for risk) by 0.39% a month for the five years of the regression. During this period, the average risk free rate was 4.84%. What was the intercept on the regression?
c. You are comparing AMR Inc. to another firm which also has an R squared of 0.48. Will the two firms have the same beta? If not, why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have run a regression of monthly returns on Amgen, a large biotechnology firm, against monthly returns on the S&P 500 index, and come up with the following output.
Rstock = 3.28%+ 1.65 RMarket R2= 0.20
The current one-year treasury bill rate is 4.8% and the current thirty-year bond rate is 6.4%. The firm has 265 million shares outstanding selling for $30 per share.
a. What is the expected return on this stock over the next year?
b. Would your expected return estimate change if the purpose was to get a discount rate to analyze a thirty-year capital budgeting project?
c. An analyst has estimated, correctly, that the stock did 51.10% better than expected, annually, during the period of the regression. Can you estimate the annualized risk free rate that she used for her estimate?
d. The firm has a debt/equity ratio of 3%, and faces a tax rate of 40%. It is planning to issue $2billion in new debt and acquire a new business for that amount with the same risk level as the firm”s existing business. What will the beta be after the acquisition?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just run a regression of monthly returns on MAD Inc., a newspaper and magazine publisher, against returns on the S&P 500 and arrived at the following result.
RMAD = – 0.05% + 1.20 RS&P
The regression has an R-squared of 22%. The current T.Bill rate is 5.5% and the current T.Bond rate is 6.5%. The riskfree rate during the period of the regression was 6%.
Answer the following questions relating to the regression.
a. Based upon the intercept, how well or badly did MAD do, relative to expectations, during the period of the regression?
b. You now realize that MAD Inc. went through a major restructuring at the end of last month (which was the last month of your regression) and made the following changes:
- The firm sold off its magazine division, which had an unlevered beta of 0.6, for $20 million.
- It borrowed an additional $20 million and bought back stock worth $40 million.
- After the sale of the division and the share repurchase, MAD Inc. had $40 million in debt and $120 million in equity outstanding.
If the firm’s tax rate is 40%, re-estimate the beta, after these changes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are trying to estimate the beta of a private firm that manufactures home appliances. You have managed to obtain betas for publicly traded firms that also manufacture home appliances.
|
Firm
|
Beta
|
Debt
|
MV of Equity
|
|
Black & Decker
|
1.4
|
$ 2,500
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Fedders Corp.
|
1.2
|
$ 5
|
$ 200
|
|
Maytag Corp.
|
1.2
|
$ 540
|
$ 2250
|
|
National Presto
|
0.7
|
$ 8
|
$ 300
|
|
Whirlpool
|
1.5
|
$ 2900
|
$ 4000
|
The private firm has a debt equity ratio of 25%, and faces a tax rate of 40%. The publicly traded firms all have marginal tax rates of 40% as well.
a. Estimate the beta for the private firm.
b. What concerns, if any, would you have about using betas of comparable firms?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been asked to estimate the cost of capital for NewTel, a telecomm firm. The firm has the following characteristics:
- There are 100 million shares outstanding trading at $250 per share.
- The firm has a book value of ten-year debt of $10 billion and interest expenses of $600 million on the debt. The firm is not rated, but it had operating income of $2.5 billion last year. Firms with an interest coverage ratio of 3.5 to 4.5 were rated BBB.
- The unlevered beta of other telecomm firms is 0.80 The treasury bond rate is 6%, and the tax rate for the firm is 35%.
a. Estimate the market value of debt for this firm
b. Based upon the synthetic rating, estimate the cost of debt for this firm.
c. Estimate the cost of capital for this firm.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Derra Foods is a specialty food retailer. In its balance sheet, the firm reports $1 billion in book value of equity and no debt, but it has operating leases on all its stores. In the most recent year, the firm made $85 million in operating lease payments and its commitments to make lease payments for the next 5 years and beyond are summarized.
|
Year
|
Operating Lease Expense
|
|
1
|
$ 90 million
|
|
2
|
$ 90 million
|
|
3
|
$ 85 million
|
|
4
|
$ 80 million
|
|
5
|
$ 80 million
|
|
10-Jun
|
$ 75 million annually
|
If the firm”s current cost of borrowing is 7%, estimate the debt value of operating leases. Estimate the book value debt to equity ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zif Software is a firm with significant research and development expenses. In the most recent year, the firm had $100 million in research and development expenses. R&D expenses are amortizable over 5 years and the R& D expenses over the last 5 years are as follows:
|
Year
|
R&D expenses
|
|
-5
|
$ 50 million
|
|
-4
|
$ 60 million
|
|
-3
|
$ 70 million
|
|
-2
|
$ 80 million
|
|
-1
|
$ 90 million
|
|
Current year
|
$ 100 million
|
Assuming a linear amortization schedule (over 5 years), estimate
a. the value of the research asset.
b. the amount of R&D amortization this year.
c. the adjustment to operating income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet for Ford Motor Company as of December 31, 1994 (in millions).
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Cash
|
$19,927
|
Accounts Payable
|
$11,635
|
|
Receivables
|
$132,904
|
Debt due within 1 year
|
$36,240
|
|
Inventory
|
$10,128
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
$2,721
|
|
Current Assets
|
$91,524
|
Current Liabilities
|
$50,596
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
$45,586
|
Short Term Debt
|
$36,200
|
|
|
|
Long Term Debt
|
$37,490
|
|
|
|
Equity
|
$12,824
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$137,110
|
The firm had revenues of $154,951 million in 1994 and cost of goods sold of $103,817 million.
a. Estimate the net working capital
b. Estimate the non-cash working capital.
c. Why is Ford’s working capital so high? If you were told that Ford Capital (the financing arm of Ford) was consolidated into this balance sheet, would that help you with your explanation?
d. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues. If you were asked to estimate the non-cash working capital needs for a new automobile factory that Ford was constructing, would you use this ratio? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are analyzing the balance sheet for Bed, Bath and Beyond, a retail firm that sells home furnishings, from February 26, 1995 (in millions).
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Cash
|
$6.50
|
Accounts Payable
|
$27.50
|
|
Receivables
|
$0.00
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
$18.60
|
|
Inventory
|
$108.40
|
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
$118.00
|
Current Liabilities
|
$46.10
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
$53.80
|
Long Term Debt
|
$16.80
|
|
Total Assets
|
$171.80
|
Equity
|
$108.90
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$171.80
|
The firm had revenues of $440.3 million in 1994 and cost of goods sold of $249.2 million.
a. Estimate the net working capital
b. Estimate the non-cash working capital.
c. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues. If you were asked to estimate the non-cash working capital needs for a new store for Bed, Bath and Beyond, would you use this ratio? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been provided with the current assets and current liabilities of a retailing firm each quarter for the last 5 years, together with the revenues in each quarter.
|
Period
|
Non-cash current assets
|
Non-debt current liabilities
|
Revenues
|
|
1990 – 1
|
$300
|
$150
|
$3,000
|
|
1990 – 2
|
$325
|
$160
|
$3,220
|
|
1990 – 3
|
$350
|
$180
|
$3,450
|
|
1990 – 4
|
$650
|
$300
|
$6,300
|
|
1991 – 1
|
$370
|
$170
|
$3,550
|
|
1991 – 2
|
$400
|
$200
|
$4,100
|
|
1991 – 3
|
$420
|
$220
|
$4,350
|
|
1991 – 4
|
$755
|
$380
|
$7,750
|
|
1992 – 1
|
$450
|
$220
|
$4,500
|
|
1992 – 2
|
$480
|
$240
|
$4,750
|
|
1992 – 3
|
$515
|
$265
|
$5,200
|
|
1992 – 4
|
$880
|
$460
|
$9,000
|
|
1993 – 1
|
$550
|
$260
|
$5,400
|
|
1993 – 2
|
$565
|
$285
|
$5,600
|
|
1993 – 3
|
$585
|
$300
|
$5,900
|
|
1993 – 4
|
$1,010
|
$500
|
$10,000
|
|
1994 – 1
|
$635
|
$330
|
$6,500
|
|
1994 – 2
|
$660
|
$340
|
$6,750
|
|
1994 – 3
|
$665
|
$340
|
$6,900
|
a. Based on this information, estimate the non-cash working capital each quarter.
b. Estimate non-cash working capital as a percent of revenues each quarter.
c. Assume that you are told that there are economies of scale, when it comes to inventories. How would you test to see if there are any? What would your conclusions be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Medtronic Inc., the world”s largest manufacturer of implantable biomedical devices, reported earnings per share in 1993 of $3.95 and paid dividends per share of $0.68. Its earnings were expected to grow 16% from 1994 to 1998, but the growth rate was expected to decline each year after that to a stable growth rate of 6% in 2003. The payout ratio was expected to remain unchanged from 1994 to 1998, after which it would increase each year to reach 60% in steady state. The stock was expected to have a beta of 1.25 from 1994 to 1998, after which the beta would decline each year to reach 1.00 by the time the firm becomes stable. (The treasury bond rate was 6.25%)
a. Assuming that the growth rate declines linearly (and the payout ratio increases linearly) from 1999 to 2003, estimate the dividends per share each year from 1994 to 2003.
b. Estimate the expected price at the end of 2003.
c. Estimate the value per share, using the three-stage dividend discount model.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-12 Payroll entries
The payroll register for Jaffrey Company for the week ended May 16 indicated the following:
|
Salaries
|
$1,250,000
|
|
Social security tax withheld
|
58,750
|
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
18,750
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
250,000
|
In addition, state and federal unemployment taxes were calculated at the rate of 5.4% and 0.8%, respectively, on $225,000 of salaries.
a. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week of May 16.
b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll tax expense incurred for the week of
May 16.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-14 Payroll internal control procedures
Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand is a fast-food restaurant specializing in hot dogs and hamburgers.
The store employs 8 full-time and 12 part-time workers. The store’s weekly payroll averages $5,600 for all 20 workers.
Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand uses a personal computer to assist in preparing paychecks.
Each week, the store’s accountant collects employee time cards and enters the hours worked into the payroll program. The payroll program calculates each employee’s pay and prints a paycheck. The accountant uses a check-signing machine to sign the paychecks.
Next, the restaurant’s owner authorizes the transfer of funds from the restaurant’s regular bank account to the payroll account.
For the week of May 12, the accountant accidentally recorded 100 hours worked instead of 40 hours for one of the full-time employees.
Does Big Howie’s Hot Dog Stand have internal controls in place to catch this error? If so, how will this error be detected?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-15 Internal control procedures
Dave’s Scooters is a small manufacturer of specialty scooters. The company employs 14 production workers and four administrative persons. The following procedures are used to process the company’s weekly payroll:
a. Whenever an employee receives a pay raise, the supervisor must fill out a wage adjustment form, which is signed by the company president. This form is used to change the employee’s wage rate in the payroll system.
b. All employees are required to record their hours worked by clocking in and out on a time clock. Employees must clock out for lunch break. Due to congestion around the time clock area at lunch time, management has not objected to having one employee clock in and out for an entire department.
c. Whenever a salaried employee is terminated, Personnel authorizes Payroll to remove the employee from the payroll system. However, this procedure is not required when an hourly worker is terminated. Hourly employees only receive a paycheck if their time cards show hours worked. The computer automatically drops an employee from the payroll system when that employee has six consecutive weeks with no hours worked.
d. Paychecks are signed by using a check-signing machine. This machine is located in the main office so that it can be easily accessed by anyone needing a check signed.
e. Dave’s Scooters maintains a separate checking account for payroll checks. Each week, the total net pay for all employees is transferred from the company’s regular bank account to the payroll account.
State whether each of the procedures is appropriate or inappropriate, after considering the principles of internal control. If a procedure is inappropriate, describe the appropriate procedure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-20 Accrued product warranty
General Motors Corporation (GM) disclosed estimated product warranty payable for comparative years as follows:
|
(in millions)
|
|
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Current estimated product warranty payable
|
$2,587
|
$2,965
|
|
Noncurrent estimated product warranty payable
|
4,202
|
4,065
|
|
Total
|
$6,789
|
$7,030
|
GM’s sales were $135,592 million in Year 2. Assume that the total paid on warranty claims during Year 2 was $3,000 million.
a. Why are short- and long-term estimated warranty liabilities separately disclosed?
b. Provide the journal entry for the Year 2 product warranty expense.
c. What two conditions must be met in order for a product warranty liability to be reported in the financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-21 Contingent liabilities
Several months ago, Ayers Industries Inc. experienced a hazardous materials spill at one of its plants. As a result, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) fined the company $240,000. The company is contesting the fine. In addition, an employee is seeking $220,000 in damages related to the spill. Lastly, a homeowner has sued the company for $310,000.
The homeowner lives 35 miles from the plant, but believes that the incident has reduced the home’s resale value by $310,000.
Ayers’ legal counsel believes that it is probable that the EPA fine will stand. In addition, counsel indicates that an out-of-court settlement of $125,000 has recently been reached with the employee. The final papers will be signed next week. Counsel believes that the homeowner’s case is much weaker and will be decided in favor of Ayers. Other litigation related to the spill is possible, but the damage amounts are uncertain.
a. Journalize the contingent liabilities associated with the hazardous materials spill. Use the account “Damage Awards and Fines” to recognize the expense for the period.
b. Prepare a note disclosure relating to this incident.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-22 Quick ratio
Gmeiner Co. had the following current assets and liabilities for two comparative years:
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 486,000
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
210,000
|
200,000
|
|
Inventory
|
375,000
|
350,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$1,071,000
|
$1,050,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
$ 145,000
|
$ 110,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
175,000
|
150,000
|
|
Accrued and other current liabilities
|
260,000
|
240,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 580,000
|
$ 500,000
|
a. Determine the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.
b. Interpret the change in the quick ratio between the two balance sheet dates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-23 Quick ratio
The current assets and current liabilities for Apple Inc. and Dell, Inc., are shown as follows at the end of a recent fiscal period:
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$11,261
|
$13,913
|
|
Short-term investments
|
14,359
|
452
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
11,560
|
10,136
|
|
Inventories
|
1,051
|
1,301
|
|
Other current assets*
|
3,447
|
3,219
|
|
Total current assets
|
$41,678
|
$29,021
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$17,738
|
$15,474
|
|
Accrued and other current liabilities
|
2,984
|
4,009
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$20,722
|
$19,483
|
|
*These represent prepaid expense and other nonquick current assets.
|
a. Determine the quick ratio for both companies.
b. Interpret the quick ratio difference between the two companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Warwick Co. during the current year:
Feb. 3. Purchased merchandise on account from Onifade Co., $410,000, terms n/30.
Mar. 3. Issued a 45-day, 6% note for $410,000 to Onifade Co., on account.
Apr. 17. Paid Onifade Co. the amount owed on the note of March 3.
June 1. Borrowed $250,000 from Aldhiezer Bank, issuing a 60-day, 7.5% note.
July 21. Purchased tools by issuing a $300,000, 60-day note to Nash Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 8%.
31. Paid Aldhiezer Bank the interest due on the note of June 1 and renewed the loan by issuing a new 30-day, 9% note for $250,000. (Journalize both the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)
Aug. 30. Paid Aldhiezer Bank the amount due on the note of July 31.
Sept. 19. Paid Nash Co. the amount due on the note of July 21.
Dec. 1. Purchased office equipment from Oso Co. for $340,000, paying $40,000 and issuing a series of ten 8% notes for $30,000 each, coming due at 30-day intervals.
12. Settled a product liability lawsuit with a customer for $165,000, payable in January.
Warwick accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.
31. Paid the amount due Oso Co. on the first note in the series issued on December 1.
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:
a. Product warranty cost, $32,500.
b. Interest on the nine remaining notes owed to Oso Co.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-2A Entries for payroll and payroll taxes
The following information about the payroll for the week ended December 30 was obtained from the records of Qualitech Co.:
|
Salaries:
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$350,000
|
Income tax withheld
|
$118,800
|
|
Warehouse salaries
|
180,000
|
Social security tax withheld
|
40,500
|
|
Office salaries
|
145,000
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
10,125
|
|
$675,000
|
U.S. savings bonds
|
14,850
|
|
|
Group insurance
|
12,150
|
|
|
|
$196,425
|
Tax rates assumed:
Social security, 6%
Medicare, 1.5%
State unemployment (employer only), 5.4%
Federal unemployment (employer only), 0.8%
Instructions
1. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on December 31, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. December 30, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on December 31. Of the total payroll for the last week of the year, $35,000 is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.
2. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 5 of the following fiscal year, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. January 5, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on January 5. Since it is a new fiscal year, all $675,000 in salaries is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-3A Wage and tax statement data on employer FICA tax
Ehrlich Co. began business on January 2, 2013. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year. Early in 2014, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W-2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.
None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5%. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records:
|
|
|
Monthly
|
|
Date First
|
Monthly
|
Income Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Employed
|
Salary
|
Withheld
|
|
Arnett
|
Nov. 16
|
$ 5,500
|
$1,008
|
|
Cruz
|
Jan. 2
|
4,800
|
833
|
|
Edwards
|
Oct. 1
|
8,000
|
1,659
|
|
Harvin
|
Dec. 1
|
6,000
|
1,133
|
|
Nicks
|
Feb. 1
|
10,000
|
2,219
|
|
Shiancoe
|
Mar. 1
|
11,600
|
2,667
|
|
Ward
|
Nov. 16
|
5,220
|
938
|
Instructions
1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement
(Form W-2) for 2013, arranging the data in the following form:
|
Gross
|
Federal Income
|
Social Security
|
Medicare
|
|
Employee
|
Earnings
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security; (b) Medicare; (c) state unemployment compensation at 5.4% on the first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-4A Payroll register
The following data for Throwback Industries Inc. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2014:
|
Hours
|
Hourly
|
|
Federal
|
|
Employee
|
Worked
|
Rate
|
|
Income Tax
|
|
Aaron
|
46
|
$68.00
|
|
$766.36
|
|
Cobb
|
41
|
62.00
|
|
553.20
|
|
Clemente
|
48
|
70.00
|
|
691.60
|
|
DiMaggio
|
35
|
56.00
|
|
411.60
|
|
Griffey, Jr.
|
45
|
62.00
|
|
618.45
|
|
Mantle
|
|
|
$1,800
|
432.00
|
|
Robinson
|
36
|
54.00
|
|
291.60
|
|
Williams
|
|
|
2000
|
440.00
|
|
Vaughn
|
42
|
62.00
|
|
533.20
|
Employees Mantle and Williams are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 1½ times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0%, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 901.
Instructions
1. Prepare a payroll register for Throwback Industries Inc. for the week ended December 7, 2014. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Employee, Total Hours, Regular Earnings, Overtime Earnings, Total Earnings, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Sales Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.
Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-5A Payroll accounts and year-end entries
The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Garcon Co. on December 1 of the current year:
|
211
|
Salaries Payable
|
—
|
218
|
Bond Deductions Payable
|
$ 3,400
|
|
212
|
Social Security Tax Payable
|
$ 9,273
|
219
|
Medical Insurance Payable
|
27,000
|
|
213
|
Medicare Tax Payable
|
2,318
|
411
|
Operations Salaries Expense
|
950,000
|
|
214
|
Employees Federal Income Tax Payable
|
15,455
|
511
|
Officers Salaries Expense
|
600,000
|
|
215
|
Employees State Income Tax Payable
|
13,909
|
512
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
150,000
|
|
216
|
State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
1,400
|
519
|
Payroll Tax Expense
|
137,951
|
|
217
|
Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
500
|
|
|
|
The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:
Dec. 2. Issued Check No. 410 for $3,400 to Jay Bank to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.
2. Issued Check No. 411 to Jay Bank for $27,046 in payment of $9,273 of social security tax, $2,318 of Medicare tax, and $15,455 of employees’ federal income tax due.
13. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Operations
|
$43,200
|
|
|
Officers
|
27,200
|
|
|
Office
|
6,800
|
$77,200
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 4,632
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
1,158
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
15,440
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
3,474
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,700
|
30,904
|
|
Medical insurance deductions
|
4,500
|
$46,296
|
|
Net amount
|
|
|
27. Issued Check No. 541 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
27. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 27: social security tax, $4,668; Medicare tax, $1,167; state unemployment tax, $225; federal unemployment tax, $75.
27. Issued Check No. 543 for $20,884 to State Department of Revenue in payment of employees’ state income tax due on December 31.
31. Issued Check No. 545 to Jay Bank for $3,400 to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.
31. Paid $45,000 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $60,000.
(Record both the payment and unfunded pension liability.)
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:
a. Salaries accrued: operations salaries, $8,560; officers salaries, $5,600; office salaries, $1,400. The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.
b. Vacation pay, $15,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-1B Liability transactions
The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Aston Martin Inc. during the current year:
Apr. 15. Borrowed $225,000 from Audi Company, issuing a 30-day, 6% note for that amount.
May 1. Purchased equipment by issuing a $320,000, 180-day note to Spyder Manufacturing Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 6%.
15. Paid Audi Company the interest due on the note of April 15 and renewed the loan by issuing a new 60-day, 8% note for $225,000. (Record both the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)
July 14. Paid Audi Company the amount due on the note of May 15.
Aug. 16. Purchased merchandise on account from Exige Co., $90,000, terms, n/30.
Sept. 15. Issued a 45-day, 6% note for $90,000 to Exige Co., on account.
Oct. 28. Paid Spyder Manufacturing Co. the amount due on the note of May 1.
30. Paid Exige Co. the amount owed on the note of September 15.
Nov. 16. Purchased store equipment from Gallardo Co. for $450,000, paying $50,000 and issuing a series of twenty 9% notes for $20,000 each, coming due at 30-day intervals.
Dec. 16. Paid the amount due Gallardo Co. on the first note in the series issued on November 16.
28. Settled a personal injury lawsuit with a customer for $87,500, to be paid in January.
Aston Martin Inc. accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:
a. Product warranty cost, $26,800.
b. Interest on the 19 remaining notes owed to Gallardo Co.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-2B Entries for payroll and payroll taxes
The following information about the payroll for the week ended December 30 was obtained from the records of Saine Co.:
|
Salaries:
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$ 625,000
|
Income tax withheld
|
$232,260
|
|
Warehouse salaries
|
240,000
|
Social security tax withheld
|
71,100
|
|
Office salaries
|
320,000
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
17,775
|
|
$1,185,000
|
U.S. savings bonds
|
35,500
|
|
|
Group insurance
|
53,325
|
|
|
|
$409,960
|
Tax rates assumed:
Social security, 6%
Medicare, 1.5%
State unemployment (employer only), 5.4%
Federal unemployment (employer only), 0.8%
Instructions
1. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on December 31, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. December 30, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on December 31. Of the total payroll for the last week of the year, $30,000 is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.
2. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 4 of the following fiscal year, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. January 4, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on January 4. Since it is a new fiscal year, all $1,185,000 in salaries is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-3B Wage and tax statement data and employer FICA tax
Jocame Inc. began business on January 2, 2013. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year. Early in 2014, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W-2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.
None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5% on salary. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records:
|
|
|
Monthly
|
|
Date First
|
Monthly
|
Income Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Employed
|
Salary
|
Withheld
|
|
Addai
|
July 16
|
$ 8,160
|
$1,704
|
|
Kasay
|
June 1
|
3,600
|
533
|
|
McGahee
|
Feb. 16
|
6,420
|
1,238
|
|
Moss
|
Jan. 1
|
4,600
|
783
|
|
Stewart
|
Dec. 1
|
4,500
|
758
|
|
Tolbert
|
Nov. 16
|
3,250
|
446
|
|
Wells
|
May 1
|
10,500
|
2,359
|
Instructions
1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement
(Form W-2) for 2013, arranging the data in the following form:
|
Gross
|
Federal Income
|
Social Security
|
Medicare
|
|
Employee
|
Earnings
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security;
(b) Medicare;
(c) state unemployment compensation at 5.4% on the first $10,000 of
each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the
first $10,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-4B Payroll register
The following data for Flexco Inc. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2014:
|
Hours
|
Hourly
|
Weekly
|
Federal
|
U.S. Savings
|
|
Employee
|
Worked
|
Rate
|
Salary
|
Income Tax
|
Bonds
|
|
Carlton
|
52
|
$50.00
|
|
$667.00
|
$ 60
|
|
Grove
|
|
|
$4,000
|
860.00
|
100
|
|
Johnson
|
36
|
52.00
|
|
355.68
|
0
|
|
Koufax
|
45
|
58.00
|
|
578.55
|
44
|
|
Maddux
|
37
|
45.00
|
|
349.65
|
62
|
|
Seaver
|
|
|
3,200
|
768.00
|
120
|
|
Spahn
|
46
|
52.00
|
|
382.20
|
0
|
|
Winn
|
48
|
50.00
|
|
572.00
|
75
|
|
Young
|
43
|
54.00
|
|
480.60
|
80
|
Employees Grove and Seaver are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 1½ times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0% of each employee’s annual earnings, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 328.
Instructions
1. Prepare a payroll register for Flexco Inc. for the week ended December 7, 2014. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Employee, Total Hours, Regular Earnings, Overtime Earnings, Total Earnings, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Sales Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.
- Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 10-5B Payroll accounts and year-end entries
The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Codigo Co. on December 1 of the current year:
|
101 Salaries Payable
|
—
|
108 Bond Deductions Payable
|
$ 2,300
|
|
102 Social Security Tax Payable
|
$2,913
|
109 Medical Insurance Payable
|
2,520
|
|
103 Medicare Tax Payable
|
728
|
201 Sales Salaries Expense
|
700,000
|
|
104 Employees Federal Income Tax Payable
|
4,490
|
301 Officers Salaries Expense
|
340,000
|
|
105 Employees State Income Tax Payable
|
4,078
|
401 Office Salaries Expense
|
125,000
|
|
106 State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
1,260
|
408 Payroll Tax Expense
|
59,491
|
|
107 Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
360
|
|
|
The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:
Dec. 1. Issued Check No. 815 to Aberderas Insurance Company for $2,520, in payment of the semiannual premium on the group medical insurance policy.
1. Issued Check No. 816 to Alvarez Bank for $8,131, in payment for $2,913 of social security tax, $728 of Medicare tax, and $4,490 of employees’ federal income tax due.
2. Issued Check No. 817 for $2,300 to Alvarez Bank to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.
12. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$14,500
|
|
|
Officers
|
7,100
|
|
|
Office
|
2,600
|
$24,200
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 1,452
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
363
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
4,308
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
1,089
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,150
|
|
|
Medical insurance deductions
|
420
|
8,782
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$15,418
|
12. Issued Check No. 822 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
12. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 12: social security tax, $1,452; Medicare tax, $363; state unemployment tax, $315; federal unemployment tax, $90.
15. Issued Check No. 830 to Alvarez Bank for $7,938, in payment of $2,904 of social security tax, $726 of Medicare tax, and $4,308 of employees’ federal income tax due.
26. Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll record follows:
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$14,250
|
|
|
Officers
|
7,250
|
|
|
Office
|
2,750
|
$24,250
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 1,455
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
364
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
4,317
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
1,091
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,150
|
8,377
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$15,873
|
Dec. 26. Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December 26: social security tax, $1,455; Medicare tax, $364; state unemployment tax, $150; federal unemployment tax, $40.
30. Issued Check No. 851 for $6,258 to State Department of Revenue, in payment of employees’ state income tax due on December 31.
30. Issued Check No. 852 to Alvarez Bank for $2,300 to purchase U.S. savings bonds for employees.
31. Paid $55,400 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $65,500. (Record both the payment and the unfunded pension liability.)
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:
a. Salaries accrued: sales salaries, $4,275; officers salaries, $2,175; office salaries, $825.
The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.
b. Vacation pay, $13,350.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 10-1 Ethics and professional conduct in business
Tonya Latirno is a certified public accountant (CPA) and staff accountant for Kennedy and Kennedy, a local CPA firm. It had been the policy of the firm to provide a holiday bonus equal to two weeks’ salary to all employees. The firm’s new management team announced on November 15 that a bonus equal to only one week’s salary would be made available to employees this year. Tonya thought that this policy was unfair because she and her coworkers planned on the full two-week bonus. The two-week bonus had been given for 10 straight years, so it seemed as though the firm had breached an implied commitment. Thus, Tonya decided that she would make up the lost bonus week by working an extra six hours of overtime per week over the next five weeks until the end of the year. Kennedy and Kennedy’s policy is to pay overtime at 150% of straight time.
Tonya’s supervisor was surprised to see overtime being reported, since there is generally very little additional or unusual client service demands at the end of the calendar year. However, the overtime was not questioned, since firm employees are on the “honor system” in reporting their overtime.
Discuss whether the firm is acting in an ethical manner by changing the bonus. Is Tonya behaving in an ethical manner?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 10-2 Recognizing pension expense
The annual examination of Felton Company’s financial statements by its external public accounting firm (auditors) is nearing completion. The following conversation took place between the controller of Felton Company (Francie) and the audit manager from the public accounting firm (Sumana).
Sumana: You know, Francie, we are about to wrap up our audit for this fiscal year. Yet, there is one item still to be resolved.
Francie: What’s that?
Sumana: Well, as you know, at the beginning of the year, Felton began a defined benefit pension plan. This plan promises your employees an annual payment when they retire, using a formula based on their salaries at retirement and their years of service. I believe that a pension expense should be recognized this year, equal to the amount of pension earned by your employees.
Francie: Wait a minute. I think you have it all wrong. The company doesn’t have apension expense until it actually pays the pension in cash when the employee retires. After all, some of these employees may not reach retirement, and if they don’t, the company doesn’t owe them anything.
Sumana: You’re not really seeing this the right way. The pension is earned by your employees during their working years. You actually make the payment much later—when they retire. It’s like one long accrual—much like incurring wages in one period and paying them in the next. Thus, I think that you should recognize the expense in the period the pension is earned by the employees.
Francie: Let me see if I’ve got this straight. I should recognize an expense this period for something that may or may not be paid to the employees in 20 or 30 years, when they finally retire. How am I supposed to determine what the expense is for the current year? The amount of the final retirement depends on many uncertainties: salary levels, employee longevity, mortality rates, and interest earned on investments to fund the pension. I don’t think that an amount can be determined, even if I accepted your arguments.
Evaluate Sumana’s position. Is she right or is Francie correct?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 10-3 Ethics and professional conduct in business
Marvin Turner was discussing summer employment with Tina Song, president of Motown
Construction Service:
Tina: I’m glad that you’re thinking about joining us for the summer. We could certainly use the help.
Marvin: Sounds good. I enjoy outdoor work, and I could use the money to help with next year’s school expenses.
Tina: I’ve got a plan that can help you out on that. As you know, I’ll pay you $14 per hour, but in addition, I’d like to pay you with cash. Since you’re only working for the summer, it really doesn’t make sense for me to go to the trouble of formally putting you on our payroll system. In fact, I do some jobs for my clients on a strictly cash basis, so it would be easy to just pay you that way.
Marvin: Well, that’s a bit unusual, but I guess money is money.
Tina: Yeah, not only that, it’s tax-free!
Marvin: What do you mean?
Tina: Didn’t you know? Any money that you receive in cash is not reported to the IRS on a W-2 form; therefore, the IRS doesn’t know about the income—hence, it’s the same as tax-free earnings.
a. Why does Tina Song want to conduct business transactions using cash (not check or credit card)?
b. How should Marvin respond to Tina’s suggestion?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 9-5 Capital and revenue expenditures
Jackie Fox owns and operates Platinum Transport Co. During the past year, Jackie incurred the following costs related to an 18-wheel truck:
1. Changed engine oil.
2. Installed a television in the sleeping compartment of the truck.
3. Installed a wind deflector on top of the cab to increase fuel mileage.
4. Modified the factory-installed turbo charger with a special-order kit designed to add 50 more horsepower to the engine performance.
5. Replaced a headlight that had burned out.
6. Replaced a shock absorber that had worn out.
7. Replaced fog and cab light bulbs.
8. Replaced the hydraulic brake system that had begun to fail during his latest trip through the Rocky Mountains.
9. Removed the old CB radio and replaced it with a newer model with a greater range.
10. Replaced the old radar detector with a newer model that is fastened to the truck with a locking device that prevents its removal.
Classify each of the costs as a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 9-22 Balance sheet presentation
List the errors you find in the following partial balance sheet:
|
Burnt Red Company Balance Sheet December 31, 2014 Assets
|
|
Total current assets
|
$350,000
|
|
|
|
Replacement
|
Accumulated
|
Book
|
|
Cost
|
Depreciation
|
Value
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment:
|
|
|
|
Land
|
$ 250,000
|
$ 50,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Buildings
|
450,000
|
160,000
|
290,000
|
|
Factory equipment
|
375,000
|
140,000
|
235,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
125,000
|
60,000
|
65,000
|
|
Patents
|
90,000
|
—
|
90,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
60,000
|
10,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total property, plant, and equipment
|
$1,350,000
|
$420,000
|
$930,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 9-23 Fixed asset turnover ratio
Verizon Communications is a major telecommunications company in the United States. Two recent balance sheets for Verizon disclosed the following information regarding fixed assets:
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
(in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
|
Plant, property, and equipment
|
$211,655
|
$229,743
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
123,944
|
137,758
|
|
$ 87,711
|
$ 91,985
|
Verizon’s revenue for Year 2 was $106,565 million. Assume the fixed asset turnover for the telecommunications industry averages approximately 1.10.
a. Determine Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio for Year 2. Round to two decimal places.
b. Interpret Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-1A Allocating payments and receipts to fixed asset accounts
The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale ceramic business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.
|
a.
|
Fee paid to attorney for title search
|
$ 2,500
|
|
b.
|
Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land
|
285,000
|
|
|
Building
|
55,000
|
|
c.
|
Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser
|
15,500
|
|
d.
|
Cost of razing and removing building
|
5,000
|
|
e.
|
Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building
|
4,000*
|
|
f.
|
Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the property .
|
29,000
|
|
g.
|
Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision
|
60,000
|
|
h.
|
Premium on one-year insurance policy during construction
|
6,000
|
|
i.
|
Cost of filling and grading land
|
12,000
|
|
j.
|
Money borrowed to pay building contractor
|
900,000*
|
|
k.
|
Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction
|
5,500
|
|
l.
|
Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers
|
32,000
|
|
m.
|
Cost of trees and shrubbery planted
|
11,000
|
|
n.
|
Cost of floodlights installed on parking lot
|
2,000
|
|
o.
|
Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction
|
2,500
|
|
p.
|
Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism damage
|
7,500*
|
|
q.
|
Payment to building contractor for new building
|
800,000
|
|
r.
|
Interest incurred on building loan during construction
|
34,500
|
|
s.
|
Refund of premium on insurance policy (h) canceled after 11 months
|
500*
|
Instructions
1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:
|
|
Land
|
|
Other
|
|
Item
|
Land
|
Improvements
|
Building
|
Accounts
|
2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.
3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.
4. What would be the effect on the income statement and balance sheet if the cost of filling and grading land of $12,000 [payment (i)] was incorrectly classified as Land Improvements rather than Land? Assume Land Improvements are depreciated over a 20-year life using the double-declining-balance method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-2A Comparing three depreciation methods
Waldum Company purchased packaging equipment on January 5, 2012, for $135,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of three years, or 18,000 operating hours, and a residual value of $13,500. The equipment was used for 8,600 hours during 2012, 5,300 hours in 2013, and 4,100 hours in 2014.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014, by (a) the straight-line method, (b) the units-of-output method, and (c) the double-declining-balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the three years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
Straight-
|
Units-of-
|
Double-Declining-
|
|
Line
|
Output
|
Balance
|
|
Year
|
Method
|
Method
|
Method
|
2. What method yields the highest depreciation expense for 2012?
3. What method yields the most depreciation over the three-year life of the equipment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-4A Depreciation by two methods; sale of fixed asset
New lithographic equipment, acquired at a cost of $800,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated residual value of $90,000. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double-declining-balance method was selected. In the first week of the fifth year, the equipment was sold for $135,000.
Instructions
1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated five years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight-line method and (b) the double-declining-balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for each schedule:
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
Depreciation,
|
Book Value,
|
|
Year
|
Expense
|
End of Year
|
End of Year
|
2. Journalize the entry to record the sale.
3. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming that the equipment was sold for $88,750 instead of $135,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-5A Transactions for fixed assets, including sale
The following transactions, adjusting entries, and closing entries were completed by Legacy Furniture Co. during a three-year period. All are related to the use of delivery equipment. The double-declining-balance method of depreciation is used.
2012 Jan. 4. Purchased a used delivery truck for $28,000, paying cash.
Nov. 2. Paid garage $675 for miscellaneous repairs to the truck.
Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the truck for the year. The estimated useful life of the truck is four years, with a residual value of $5,000 for the truck.
2013 Jan. 6. Purchased a new truck for $48,000, paying cash.
Apr. 1. Sold the used truck for $15,000. (Record depreciation to date in 2013 for the truck.)
June 11. Paid garage $450 for miscellaneous repairs to the truck.
Dec. 31. Record depreciation for the new truck. It has an estimated residual value of $9,000 and an estimated life of five years.
2014 July 1. Purchased a new truck for $54,000, paying cash.
Oct. 2. Sold the truck purchased January 6, 2013, for $16,750. (Record depreciation to date for 2014 for the truck.)
Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the remaining truck. It has an estimated residual value of $12,000 and an estimated useful life of eight years.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions and the adjusting entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-6A Amortization and depletion entries
Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:
a. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $1,600,000 on February 22. The stand of timber is estimated at 5,000,000 board feet. During the current year, 1,100,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.
b. On December 31, the company determined that $3,750,000 of goodwill was impaired.
c. Governmental and legal costs of $6,600,000 were incurred on April 3 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of 12 years. Amortization is to be for threefourths of a year.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of the amortization, depletion, or impairment for the current year for each of the foregoing items.
2. Journalize the adjusting entries required to record the amortization, depletion, or impairment for each item.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-1B Allocating payments and receipts to fixed asset accounts
The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale apparel business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.
|
a. Fee paid to attorney for title search
|
$
|
|
b. Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land
|
720,000
|
|
Building
|
60,000
|
|
c. Finder’s fee paid to real estate agency
|
23,400
|
|
d. Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser
|
15,000
|
|
e. Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision
|
75,000
|
|
f. Cost of removing building purchased with land in (b)
|
10,000
|
|
g. Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building
|
3,400*
|
|
h. Cost of filling and grading land
|
18,000
|
|
i. Premium on one-year insurance policy during construction
|
8,400
|
|
j. Money borrowed to pay building contractor
|
800,000*
|
|
k. Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the property
|
13,400
|
|
l. Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction
|
3,000
|
|
m. Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction
|
2,000
|
|
n. Cost of trees and shrubbery planted
|
14,000
|
|
o. Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers
|
21,600
|
|
p. Interest incurred on building loan during construction
|
40,000
|
|
q. Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism damage .
|
4,500*
|
|
r. Payment to building contractor for new building
|
800,000
|
|
s. Refund of premium on insurance policy (i) canceled after 10 months
|
1,400*
|
Instructions
1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:
|
|
Land
|
|
Other
|
|
Item
|
Land
|
Improvements
|
Building
|
Accounts
|
2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.
3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.
4. What would be the effect on the income statement and balance sheet if the cost of paving the parking lot of $21,600 [payment (o)] was incorrectly classified as Land rather than Land Improvements? Assume Land Improvements are depreciated over a 10-year life using the double-declining-balance method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-2B Comparing three depreciation methods
Waylander Coatings Company purchased waterproofing equipment on January 6, 2013, for $320,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of four years, or 20,000 operating hours, and a residual value of $35,000. The equipment was used for 7,200 hours during 2013, 6,400 hours in 2014, 4,400 hours in 2015, and 2,000 hours in 2016.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2014, 2015, and 2016, by (a) the straight-line method, (b) the units-of-output method, and (c) the double-declining-balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the four years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
Year
|
Straight-Line Method
|
Units-of- Output Method
|
Double-Declining- Balance Method
|
2. What method yields the highest depreciation expense for 2013?
3. What method yields the most depreciation over the four-year life of the equipment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-4B Depreciation by two methods; sale of fixed asset
New tire retreading equipment, acquired at a cost of $110,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of four years and an estimated residual value of $7,500. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double-declining-balance method was selected.
In the first week of the fourth year, the equipment was sold for $18,000.
Instructions
1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated four years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight-line method and (b) the double-declining-balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
Depreciation,
|
Book Value,
|
|
Year
|
Expense
|
End of Year
|
End of Year
|
2. Journalize the entry to record the sale.
3. Journalize the entry to record the sale, assuming that the equipment sold for $10,500 instead of $18,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-5B Transactions for fixed assets, including sale
The following transactions, adjusting entries, and closing entries were completed by Robinson Furniture Co. during a three-year period. All are related to the use of delivery equipment. The double-declining-balance method of depreciation is used.
2012 Jan. 8. Purchased a used delivery truck for $24,000, paying cash.
Mar. 7. Paid garage $900 for changing the oil, replacing the oil filter, and tuning the engine on the delivery truck.
Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the truck for the fiscal year. The estimated useful life of the truck is four years, with a residual value of $4,000 for the truck.
2013 Jan. 9. Purchased a new truck for $50,000, paying cash.
Feb. 28. Paid garage $250 to tune the engine and make other minor repairs on the used truck.
Apr. 30. Sold the used truck for $9,500. (Record depreciation to date in 2013 for the truck.)
Dec. 31. Record depreciation for the new truck. It has an estimated residual value of $12,000 and an estimated life of eight years.
2014 Sept. 1. Purchased a new truck for $58,500, paying cash.
4. Sold the truck purchased January 9, 2013, for $36,000. (Record depreciation to date for 2014 for the truck.)
Dec. 31. Recorded depreciation on the remaining truck. It has an estimated residual value of $16,000 and an estimated useful life of 10 years.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions and the adjusting entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 9-6B Amortization and depletion entries
Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:
a. On December 31, the company determined that $3,400,000 of goodwill was impaired.
b. Governmental and legal costs of $4,800,000 were incurred on September 30 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of eight years. Amortization is to be for one-fourth year.
c. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $2,975,000 on February 4. The stand of timber is estimated at 12,500,000 board feet. During the current year, 4,150,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of the amortization, depletion, or impairment for the current year for each of the foregoing items.
2. Journalize the adjusting entries to record the amortization, depletion, or impairment for each item.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 9-3 Effect of depreciation on net income
Tuttle Construction Co. specializes in building replicas of historic houses. Tim Newman, president of Tuttle Construction, is considering the purchase of various items of equipment on July 1, 2012, for $400,000. The equipment would have a useful life of five years and no residual value. In the past, all equipment has been leased. For tax purposes, Tim is considering depreciating the equipment by the straight-line method. He discussed the matter with his CPA and learned that, although the straight-line method could be elected, it was to his advantage to use the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) for tax purposes. He asked for your advice as to which method to use for tax purposes.
1. Compute depreciation for each of the years (2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, and 2017) of useful life by (a) the straight-line method and (b) MACRS. In using the straight-line method, one-half year’s depreciation should be computed for 2012 and 2017. Use the MACRS rates presented on page 417.
2. Assuming that income before depreciation and income tax is estimated to be $750,000 uniformly per year and that the income tax rate is 40%, compute the net income for each of the years 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, and 2017 if (a) the straight-line method is used and (b) MACRS is used.
3. What factors would you present for Tim’s consideration in the selection of a depreciation method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 9-5 Fixed asset turnover: three industries
The following table shows the revenues and average net fixed assets for a recent fiscal year for three different companies from three different industries: retailing, manufacturing, and communications.
|
|
Average Net
|
|
Revenues
|
Fixed Assets
|
|
(in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
|
Walmart
|
$421,849
|
$105,093
|
|
Occidental Petroleum Corporation
|
19,045
|
33,837
|
|
Comcast Corporation
|
37,937
|
23,685
|
a. For each company, determine the fixed asset turnover ratio. Round to two decimal places.
b. Explain Walmart’s ratio relative to the other two companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 10-8A Quick ratio
Nabors Company reported the following current assets and liabilities for December 31, 2014 and 2013:
|
Dec. 31, 2014
|
Dec. 31, 2013
|
|
Cash
|
$ 650
|
$ 680
|
|
Temporary investments
|
1,500
|
1,550
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
700
|
770
|
|
Inventory
|
1,250
|
1,400
|
|
Accounts payable
|
2,375
|
2,000
|
a. Compute the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.
b. Interpret the company’s quick ratio. Is the quick ratio improving or declining?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 10-8B Quick ratio
Adieu Company reported the following current assets and liabilities for December 31,
2014 and 2013:
|
Dec. 31, 2014
|
Dec. 31, 2013
|
|
Cash
|
$1,000
|
$1,140
|
|
Temporary investments
|
1,200
|
1,400
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
800
|
910
|
|
Inventory
|
2,200
|
2,300
|
|
Accounts payable
|
1,875
|
2,300
|
a. Compute the quick ratio for December 31, 2014 and 2013.
b. Interpret the company’s quick ratio. Is the quick ratio improving or declining?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-7 Current portion of long-term debt
The Coca-Cola Company reported the following information about its long-term debt in the notes to a recent financial statement (in millions):
Long-term debt is comprised of the following:
|
December 31
|
|
|
Current Year
|
preceding Year
|
|
Total long term-debt
|
$15,317
|
$5,110
|
|
Less current portion
|
(1,276)
|
(51)
|
|
Long-term debt
|
$14,041
|
$5,059
|
a. How much of the long-term debt was disclosed as a current liability on the current year’s December 31 balance sheet?
b. How much did the total current liabilities change between the preceding year and the current year as a result of the current portion of long-term debt?
c. If Coca-Cola did not issue additional long-term debt next year, what would be the total long-term debt on December 31 of the upcoming year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-9 Calculate payroll
Snyder Company has three employees—a consultant, a computer programmer, and an administrator. The following payroll information is available for each employee:
|
Consultant
|
Computer Programmer
|
Administrator
|
|
Regular earnings rate
|
$3,800 per week
|
$40 per hour
|
$44 per hour
|
|
Overtime earnings rate*
|
Not applicable
|
1.5 times hourly rate
|
2 times hourly rate
|
|
Number of withholding allowances
|
2
|
2
|
1
|
* For hourly employees, overtime is paid for hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week.
For the current pay period, the computer programmer worked 60 hours and the administrator worked 50 hours. The federal income tax withheld for all three employees, who are single, can be determined from the wage bracket withholding table in Exhibit 3 in the chapter. Assume further that the social security tax rate was 6.0%, the Medicare tax rate was 1.5%, and one withholding allowance is $70.
Determine the gross pay and the net pay for each of the three employees for the current pay period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 10-10 Summary payroll data
In the following summary of data for a payroll period, some amounts have been intentionally omitted:
|
Earnings:
|
|
|
1. At regular rate
|
?
|
|
2. At overtime rate
|
$80,000
|
|
3. Total earnings
|
|
|
Deductions:
|
?
|
|
4. Social security tax
|
32,400
|
|
5. Medicare tax
|
8,100
|
|
6. Income tax withheld
|
135,000
|
|
7. Medical insurance
|
18,900
|
|
8. Union dues
|
?
|
|
9. Total deductions
|
201,150
|
|
10. Net amount paid
|
338,850
|
|
Accounts debited:
|
|
|
11. Factory Wages
|
285,000
|
|
12. Sales Salaries
|
?
|
|
13. Office Salaries
|
120,000
|
a. Calculate the amounts omitted in lines (1), (3), (8), and (12).
b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll accrual.
c. Journalize the entry to record the payment of the payroll.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-26 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
Polo Ralph Lauren Corporation designs, markets, and distributes a variety of apparel, home decor, accessory, and fragrance products. The company’s products include such brands as Polo by Ralph Lauren, Ralph Lauren Purple Label, Ralph Lauren, Polo Jeans Co., and Chaps. Polo Ralph Lauren reported the following (in thousands) for two recent years:
|
For the Period Ending
|
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$5,660,300
|
$4,978,900
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
592,700
|
486,200
|
Assume that accounts receivable (in millions) were $576,700 at the beginning of Year 1.
a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
b. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding Ralph Lauren’s efficiency in collecting receivables?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-27 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
H.J. Heinz Company was founded in 1869 at Sharpsburg, Pennsylvania, by Henry J. Heinz. The company manufactures and markets food products throughout the world, including ketchup, condiments and sauces, frozen food, pet food, soups, and tuna. For two recent years, H.J. Heinz reported the following (in thousands):
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$10,706,588
|
$10,494,983
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,265,032
|
1,045,338
|
Assume that the accounts receivable (in thousands) were $1,171,797 at the beginning of Year 1.
a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
b. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding Heinz’s efficiency in collecting receivables?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-28 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
The Limited Brands Inc. sells women’s clothing and personal health care products through specialty retail stores including Victoria’s Secret and Bath & Body Works stores. The Limited Brands reported the following (in millions) for two recent years:
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$9,613
|
$8,632
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
267
|
249
|
Assume that accounts receivable (in millions) were $313 at the beginning of Year 1.
a. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
b. Compute the day’s sales in receivables for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
c. What conclusions can be drawn from these analyses regarding The Limited Brands’ efficiency in collecting receivables?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-1A Entries related to uncollectible accounts
The following transactions were completed by The Irvine Company during the current fiscal year ended December 31:
Feb. 8. Received 40% of the $18,000 balance owed by DeCoy Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.
May 27. Reinstated the account of Seth Nelsen, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $7,350 cash in full payment of Seth’s account.
Aug. 13. Wrote off the $6,400 balance owed by Kat Tracks Co., which has no assets.
Oct. 31. Reinstated the account of Crawford Co., which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $3,880 cash in full payment of the account.
Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Newbauer Co., $7,190; Bonneville Co., $5,500; Crow Distributors, $9,400; Fiber Optics, $1,110.
31. Based on an analysis of the $1,785,000 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $35,700 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.
Instructions
1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $26,000 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following selected T accounts and determine the new balances:
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
Bad Debt Expense
3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.
4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of ¼ of 1% of the net sales of $18,200,000 for the year, determine the following:
a. Bad debt expense for the year.
b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.
c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-3A Compare two methods of accounting for uncollectible receivables
Call Systems Company, a telephone service and supply company, has just completed its fourth year of operations. The direct write-off method of recording bad debt expense has been used during the entire period. Because of substantial increases in sales volume and the amount of uncollectible accounts, the company is considering changing to the allowance method. Information is requested as to the effect that an annual provision of 1% of sales would have had on the amount of bad debt expense reported for each of the past four years. It is also considered desirable to know what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts would have been at the end of each year. The following data have been obtained from the accounts:
|
Year of Origin of Accounts Receivable Written Off as Uncollectible
|
|
Year
|
Sales
|
Uncollectible Accounts Written Off
|
1st
|
1st
|
2nd
|
3rd
|
|
1st
|
$ 900,000
|
$ 4,500
|
$4,500
|
|
|
|
|
2nd
|
1,250,000
|
9,600
|
3,000
|
$6,600
|
|
|
|
3rd
|
1,500,000
|
12,800
|
1,000
|
3,700
|
$8,100
|
|
|
4th
|
2,200,000
|
16,550
|
|
1,500
|
4,300
|
$10,750
|
Instructions
- Assemble the desired data, using the following column headings:
|
|
Bad Debt Expense
|
|
|
|
|
Increase
|
|
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
(Decrease)
|
Balance of
|
|
Actually
|
Based on
|
in Amount
|
Allowance Account,
|
|
Year
|
Reported
|
Estimate
|
of Expense
|
End of Year
|
2. Experience during the first four years of operations indicated that the receivables were either collected within two years or had to be written off as uncollectible.
Does the estimate of 1% of sales appear to be reasonably close to the actual experience with uncollectible accounts originating during the first two years? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-4A Details of notes receivable and related entries
Flush Mate Co. wholesales bathroom fixtures. During the current fiscal year, Flush Mate Co. received the following notes:
|
Date
|
Face Amount
|
Term
|
Interest Rate
|
|
1.
|
Mar. 6
|
$80,000
|
45 days
|
5%
|
|
2.
|
Apr. 23
|
24,000
|
60 days
|
9
|
|
3.
|
July 20
|
42,000
|
120 days
|
6
|
|
4.
|
Sept. 6
|
54,000
|
90 days
|
7
|
|
5.
|
Nov. 29
|
27,000
|
60 days
|
6
|
|
6.
|
Dec. 30
|
72,000
|
30 days
|
5
|
Instructions
1. Determine for each note (a) the due date and (b) the amount of interest due at maturity, identifying each note by number.
2. Journalize the entry to record the dishonor of Note (3) on its due date.
3. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on Notes (5) and (6) on December 31.
4. Journalize the entries to record the receipt of the amounts due on Notes (5) and (6) in January
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-5A Notes receivable entries
The following data relate to notes receivable and interest for CGH Cable Co., a cable manufacturer and supplier. (All notes are dated as of the day they are received.)
Apr. 10. Received a $144,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.
May 15. Received a $270,000, 7%, 120-day note on account.
June 9. Received $145,200 on note of April 10.
Aug. 22. Received a $150,000, 4%, 45-day note on account.
Sept. 12. Received $276,300 on note of May 15.
30. Received a $210,000, 8%, 60-day note on account.
Oct. 6. Received $150,750 on note of August 22.
18. Received a 120,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.
Nov. 29. Received $212,800 on note of September 30.
Dec. 17. Received $121,000 on note of October 18.
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-6A Sales and notes receivable transactions
The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Caldemeyer Co. during the current year. Caldemeyer Co. sells and installs home and business security systems.
Jan. 3. Loaned $18,000 cash to Trina Gelhaus, receiving a 90-day, 8% note.
Feb. 10. Sold merchandise on account to Bradford & Co., $24,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $14,400.
13. Sold merchandise on account to Dry Creek Co., $60,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $54,000.
Mar. 12. Accepted a 60-day, 7% note for $24,000 from Bradford & Co. on account.
14. Accepted a 60-day, 9% note for $60,000 from Dry Creek Co. on account.
Apr. 3. Received the interest due from Trina Gelhaus and a new 120-day, 9% note as a renewal of the loan of January 3. (Record both the debit and the credit to the notes receivable account.)
May 11. Received from Bradford & Co. the amount due on the note of March 12.
13. Dry Creek Co. dishonored its note dated March 14.
July 12. Received from Dry Creek Co. the amount owed on the dishonored note, plus interest for 60 days at 12% computed on the maturity value of the note.
Aug. 1. Received from Trina Gelhaus the amount due on her note of April 3.
Oct. 5. Sold merchandise on account to Halloran Co., $13,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $8,100.
15. Received from Halloran Co. the amount of the invoice of October 5, less 2% discount.
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-1B Entries related to uncollectible accounts OBJ. 4
The following transactions were completed by The Wild Trout Gallery during the current fiscal year ended December 31:
Jan. 19. Reinstated the account of Arlene Gurley, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $2,660 cash in full payment of Arlene’s account.
Apr. 3. Wrote off the $12,750 balance owed by Premier GS Co., which is bankrupt.
July 16. Received 25% of the $22,000 balance owed by Hayden Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.
Nov. 23. Reinstated the account of Harry Carr, which had been written off two years earlier as uncollectible. Recorded the receipt of $4,000 cash in full payment.
Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Cavey Co., $3,300; Fogle Co., $8,100; Lake Furniture, $11,400; Melinda Shryer, $1,200.
31. Based on an analysis of the $2,350,000 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $60,000 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.
Instructions
1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $50,000 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following T accounts and determine the new balances:
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Bad Debt Expense
3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.
4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of ½ of 1% of the net sales of $15,800,000 for the year, determine the following:
a. Bad debt expense for the year.
b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.
c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-3B Compare two methods of accounting for uncollectible receivables
Digital Depot Company, which operates a chain of 40 electronics supply stores, has just completed its fourth year of operations. The direct write-off method of recording bad debt expense has been used during the entire period. Because of substantial increases in sales volume and the amount of uncollectible accounts, the firm is considering changing to the allowance method. Information is requested as to the effect that an annual provision of ¼% of sales would have had on the amount of bad debt expense reported for each of the past four years. It is also considered desirable to know what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts would have been at the end of each year. The following data have been obtained from the accounts:
|
Year of Origin of Accounts Receivable Written Off as Uncollectible
|
|
Year
|
Sales
|
Uncollectible Accounts Written Off
|
1st
|
2nd
|
3nd
|
4th
|
|
1st
|
$12,500,000
|
$18,000
|
$18,000
|
|
|
|
|
2nd
|
14,800,000
|
30,200
|
9,000
|
$21,200
|
|
|
|
3rd
|
18,000,000
|
39,900
|
3,600
|
9,300
|
$27,000
|
|
|
4th
|
24,000,000
|
52,600
|
|
5,100
|
12,500
|
$35,000
|
Instructions
1. Assemble the desired data, using the following column headings:
|
Bad Debt Expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Increase
|
|
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
(Decrease)
|
Balance of
|
|
Actually
|
Based on
|
in Amount
|
Allowance Account,
|
|
Year
|
Reported
|
Estimate
|
of Expense
|
End of Year
|
2. Experience during the first four years of operations indicated that the receivables were either collected within two years or had to be written off as uncollectible.
Does the estimate of ¼% of sales appear to be reasonably close to the actual experience with uncollectible accounts originating during the first two years? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-4B Details of notes receivable and related entries
Gen-X Ads Co. produces advertising videos. During the current fiscal year, Gen-X Ads Co. received the following notes:
|
Date
|
Face Amount
|
Term
|
Interest Rate
|
|
1.
|
Jan. 14
|
$33,000
|
30 days
|
4%
|
|
2.
|
Mar. 9
|
60,000
|
45 days
|
7
|
|
3.
|
July 12
|
48,000
|
90 days
|
5
|
|
4.
|
Aug. 23
|
16,000
|
75 days
|
6
|
|
5.
|
Nov. 15
|
36,000
|
60 days
|
8
|
|
6.
|
Dec. 10
|
24,000
|
60 days
|
6
|
Instructions
1. Determine for each note (a) the due date and (b) the amount of interest due at maturity, identifying each note by number.
2. Journalize the entry to record the dishonor of Note (3) on its due date.
3. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on Notes (5) and (6) on December 31.
4. Journalize the entries to record the receipt of the amounts due on Notes (5) and (6) in January and February.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-5B Notes receivable entries
The following data relate to notes receivable and interest for Owens Co., a financial services company. (All notes are dated as of the day they are received.)
Mar. 8. Received a $33,000, 5%, 60-day note on account.
31. Received an $80,000, 7%, 90-day note on account.
May 7. Received $33,275 on note of March 8.
16. Received a $72,000, 7%, 90-day note on account.
June 11. Received a $36,000, 6%, 45-day note on account.
29. Received $81,400 on note of March 31.
July 26. Received $36,270 on note of June 11.
Aug. 4. Received a $48,000, 9%, 120-day note on account.
14. Received $73,260 on note of May 16.
Dec. 2. Received $49,440 on note of August 4.
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 8-6B Sales and notes receivable transactions
The following were selected from among the transactions completed during the current year by Danix Co., an appliance wholesale company:
Jan. 21. Sold merchandise on account to Black Tie Co., $28,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $16,800.
Mar. 18. Accepted a 60-day, 6% note for $28,000 from Black Tie Co. on account.
May 17. Received from Black Tie Co. the amount due on the note of March 18.
June 15. Sold merchandise on account to Pioneer Co. for $17,700. The cost of merchandise sold was $10,600.
21. Loaned $18,000 cash to JR Stutts, receiving a 30-day, 8% note.
25. Received from Pioneer Co. the amount due on the invoice of June 15, less 1% discount.
July 21. Received the interest due from JR Stutts and a new 60-day, 9% note as a renewal of the loan of June 21. (Record both the debit and the credit to the notes receivable account.)
Sept. 19. Received from JR Stutts the amount due on her note of July 21.
22. Sold merchandise on account to Wycoff Co., $20,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $12,000.
Oct. 14. Accepted a 30-day, 6% note for $20,000 from Wycoff Co. on account.
Nov. 13. Wycoff Co. dishonored the note dated October 14.
Dec. 28. Received from Wycoff Co. the amount owed on the dishonored note, plus interest for 45 days at 8% computed on the maturity value of the note.
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 8-2 Estimate uncollectible accounts
For several years, Xtreme Co.’s sales have been on a “cash only” basis. On January 1, 2011, however, Xtreme Co. began offering credit on terms of n/30. The amount of the adjusting entry to record the estimated uncollectible receivables at the end of each year has been ½ of 1% of credit sales, which is the rate reported as the average for the industry.
Credit sales and the year-end credit balances in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts for the past four years are as follows:
|
Year
|
Credit Sales
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
2011
|
$4,000,000
|
$ 5,000
|
|
2012
|
4,400,000
|
8,250
|
|
2013
|
4,800,000
|
10,200
|
|
2014
|
5,100,000
|
14,400
|
Laurie Jones, president of Xtreme Co., is concerned that the method used to account for and write off uncollectible receivables is unsatisfactory. She has asked for your advice in the analysis of past operations in this area and for recommendations for change.
1. Determine the amount of (a) the addition to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and (b) the accounts written off for each of the four years.
2. a. Advise Laurie Jones as to whether the estimate of ½ of 1% of credit sales appears reasonable.
b. Assume that after discussing (a) with Laurie Jones, she asked you what action might be taken to determine what the balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be at December 31, 2014, and what possible changes, if any, you might recommend in accounting for uncollectible receivables. How would you respond?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 8-3 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
Best Buy is a specialty retailer of consumer electronics, including personal computers, entertainment software, and appliances. Best Buy operates retail stores in addition to the Best Buy, Media Play, On Cue, and Magnolia Hi-Fi Web sites. For two recent years, Best Buy reported the following (in millions):
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$50,272
|
$49,694
|
|
Accounts receivable at end of year
|
2,348
|
2,020
|
Assume that the accounts receivable (in millions) were $1,868 at the beginning of fiscal Year 1.
1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Best Buy’s efficiency in collecting receivables?
4. What assumption did we make about sales for the Best Buy ratio computations that might distort the ratios and therefore cause the ratios not to be comparable for Year 2 and Year 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 8-4 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
Apple Inc. designs, manufactures, and markets personal computers and related personal computing and communicating solutions for sale primarily to education, creative, consumer, and business customers. Substantially all of the company’s net sales over the last five years are from sales of its Macs, iPods, iPads, and related software and peripherals. For two recent fiscal years, Apple reported the following (in millions):
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$65,225
|
$42,905
|
|
Accounts receivable at end of year
|
5,510
|
3,361
|
Assume that the accounts receivable (in millions) were $2,422 at the beginning of fiscal Year 1.
1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Apple’s efficiency in collecting receivables?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 8-5 Accounts receivable turnover and days’ sales in receivables
Costco Wholesale Corporation operates membership warehouses that sell a variety of branded and private label products. Headquartered in Issaquah, Washington, it also sells merchandise online in the United States (Costco.com) and in Canada (Costco.ca). For two recent years, Costco reported the following (in millions):
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$77,946
|
$71,422
|
|
Accounts receivable at end of year
|
1,321
|
1,205
|
Assume that the accounts receivable (in thousands) were $1,009 at the beginning of Year 1.
1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
2. Compute the days’ sales in receivables at the end of Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
3. What conclusions can be drawn from (1) and (2) regarding Costco’s efficiency in collecting receivables?
4. Given the nature of Costco’s operations, do you believe Costco’s accounts receivable turnover ratio would be higher or lower than a typical manufacturing company, such as H.J. Heinz Company? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 8-6 Accounts receivable turnover
The accounts receivable turnover ratio will vary across companies, depending on the nature of the company’s operations. For example, an accounts receivable turnover of 6 for a retailer is unacceptable, but might be excellent for a manufacturer of specialty milling equipment. A list of well-known companies follows:
|
Alcoa Inc.
|
The Coca-Cola Company
|
Kroger
|
|
AutoZone, Inc.
|
Delta Air Lines
|
Procter & Gamble
|
|
Barnes & Noble, Inc.
|
The Home Depot
|
Walmart
|
|
Caterpillar
|
IBM
|
Whirlpool Corporation
|
1. Categorize each of the preceding companies as to whether its turnover ratio is likely
to be above or below 15.
2. Based on (1), identify a characteristic of companies with accounts receivable turnover ratios above 15.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 9-9A Fixed asset turnover ratio
Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for DePuy Company are shown below.
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
$5,510,000
|
$4,880,000
|
|
Fixed assets:
|
|
|
|
Beginning of year
|
1,600,000
|
1,450,000
|
|
End of year
|
2,200,000
|
1,600,000
|
a. Determine the fixed asset turnover ratio for 2014 and 2013.
b. Does the change in the fixed asset turnover ratio from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 9-1 Costs of acquiring fixed assets
Dick Gaines owns and operates Gaines Print Co. During February, Gaines Print Co. incurred the following costs in acquiring two printing presses. One printing press was new, and the other was used by a business that recently filed for bankruptcy.
Costs related to new printing press:
1. Fee paid to factory representative for installation
2. Freight
3. Insurance while in transit
4. New parts to replace those damaged in unloading
5. Sales tax on purchase price
6. Special foundation
Costs related to used printing press:
7. Fees paid to attorney to review purchase agreement
8. Freight
9. Installation
10. Repair of damage incurred in reconditioning the press
11. Replacement of worn-out parts
12. Vandalism repairs during installation
a. Indicate which costs incurred in acquiring the new printing press should be debited to the asset account.
b. Indicate which costs incurred in acquiring the used printing press should be debited to the asset account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-2B Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over
Cedar Springs Company completed the following selected transactions during June 2014: June 1. Established a petty cash fund of $1,000.
12. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $9,440.
The actual cash received from cash sales was $9,506.
30. Petty cash on hand was $46. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:
June 2. Store supplies, $375.
10. Express charges on merchandise purchased, $105 (Merchandise Inventory).
14. Office supplies, $85.
15. Office supplies, $90.
18. Postage stamps, $33 (Office Supplies).
20. Repair to fax, $100 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
21. Repair to office door lock, $25 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $9 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
28. Express charges on merchandise purchased, $110 (Merchandise Inventory).
30. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $13,390. The actual cash received from cash sales was $13,350.
30. Increased the petty cash fund by $200.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-3B Bank reconciliation and entries
The cash account for Stone Systems at July 31, 2014, indicated a balance of $17,750. The bank statement indicated a balance of $33,650 on July 31, 2014. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records reveals the following reconciling items:
a. Checks outstanding totaled $17,865.
b. A deposit of $9,150, representing receipts of July 31, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.
c. The bank had collected $6,095 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $5,750.
d. A check for $390 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Stone Systems as $930. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Holland Co. for the purchase of office supplies on account.
e. A check drawn for $1,810 had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $1,180.
f. Bank service charges for July amounted to $80.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation.
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Stone Systems on July 31, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-4B Bank reconciliation and entries
The cash account for Collegiate Sports Co. on November 1, 2014, indicated a balance of $81,145. During November, the total cash deposited was $293,150, and checks written totaled $307,360. The bank statement indicated a balance of $112,675 on November 30, 2014. Comparing the bank statement, the canceled checks, and the accompanying memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:
a. Checks outstanding totaled $41,840.
b. A deposit of $12,200, representing receipts of November 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.
c. A check for $7,250 had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $2,750.
d. A check for $760 returned with the statement had been recorded by Collegiate Sports Co. as $7,600. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Ramirez Co. on account.
e. The bank had collected for Collegiate Sports Co. $7,385 on a note left for collection.
The face of the note was $7,000.
f. Bank service charges for November amounted to $125.
g. A check for $2,500 from Hallen Academy was returned by the bank because of insufficient funds.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of November 30.
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Collegiate Sports Co. on November 30, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 7-2 Internal controls
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between two sales clerks, Jean Moen and Sara Cheney. Jean and Sara are employed by Turpin Meadows Electronics, a locally owned and operated electronics retail store.
Jean: Did you hear the news?
Sara: What news?
Jean: Neal and Linda were both arrested this morning.
Sara: What? Arrested? You’re putting me on
Jean: No, really! The police arrested them first thing this morning. Put them in handcuffs, read them their rights the whole works. It was unreal
Sara: What did they do?
Jean: Well, apparently they were filling out merchandise refund forms for fictitious customers and then taking the cash.
Sara: I guess I never thought of that. How did they catch them?
Jean: The store manager noticed that returns were twice that of last year and seemed to be increasing. When he confronted
Neal, he became flustered and admitted to taking the cash, apparently over $9,000 in just three months. They’re going over the last six months’ transactions to try to determine how much Linda stole. She apparently started stealing first.
Suggest appropriate control procedures that would have prevented or detected the theft of cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 7-3 Internal controls
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between the store manager of Wholesome Grocery Stores, Kara Dahl, and Lynn Shutes, president of Wholesome Grocery Stores.
Lynn: Kara, I’m concerned about this new scanning system.
Kara: What’s the problem?
Lynn: Well, how do we know the clerks are ringing up all the merchandise?
Kara: That’s one of the strong points about the system. The scanner automatically rings up each item, based on its bar code. We update the prices daily, so we’re sure that the sale is rung up for the right price.
Lynn: That’s not my concern. What keeps a clerk from pretending to scan items and then simply not charging his friends? If his friends were buying 10–15 items, it would be easy for the clerk to pass through several items with his finger over the bar code or just pass the merchandise through the scanner with the wrong side showing. It would look normal for anyone observing. In the old days, we at least could hear the cash register ringing up each sale.
Kara: I see your point.
Suggest ways that Wholesome Grocery Stores could prevent or detect the theft of merchandise as described.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 7-4 Ethics and professional conduct in business
Doris Tidwell and Jo Yost are both cash register clerks for Fuller’s Organic Markets. Tom Ward is the store manager for Fuller’s Organic Markets. The following is an excerpt of a conversation between Doris and Jo:
Doris: Jo, how long have you been working for Fuller’s Organic Markets?
Jo: Almost five years this April. You just started two weeks ago . . . right?
Doris: Yes. Do you mind if I ask you a question?
Jo: No, go ahead.
Doris: What I want to know is, have they always had this rule that if your cash register is short at the end of the day, you have to make up the shortage out of your own pocket?
Jo: Yes, as long as I’ve been working here.
Doris: Well, it’s the pits. Last week I had to pay in almost $40.
Jo: It’s not that big a deal. I just make sure that I’m not short at the end of the day.
Doris: How do you do that?
Jo: I just shortchange a few customers early in the day. There are a few jerks that deserve it anyway. Most of the time, their attention is elsewhere and they don’t think to check their change.
Doris: What happens if you’re over at the end of the day?
Jo: Tom lets me keep it as long as it doesn’t get to be too large. I’ve not been short in over a year. I usually clear about $20 to $30 extra per day.
Discuss this case from the viewpoint of proper controls and professional behavior.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 7-5 Bank reconciliation and internal control
The records of Parker Company indicate a July 31 cash balance of $10,400, which includes undeposited receipts for July 30 and 31. The cash balance on the bank statement as of July 31 is $10,575. This balance includes a note of $2,250 plus $150 interest collected by the bank but not recorded in the journal. Checks outstanding on July 31 were as follows: No. 2670, $1,050; No. 3679, $675; No. 3690, $1,650; No. 5148, $225; No. 5149, $750; and No. 5151, $800. On July 25, the cashier resigned, effective at the end of the month. Before leaving on July 31, the cashier prepared the following bank reconciliation:
|
Cash balance per books, July 31
|
|
$10,400
|
|
Add outstanding checks:
|
|
|
|
No. 5148
|
$225
|
|
|
5149
|
750
|
|
|
5151
|
800
|
1,675
|
|
|
$12,075
|
|
Less undeposited receipts
|
|
1,500
|
|
Cash balance per bank, July 31
|
|
$10,575
|
|
Deduct unrecorded note with interest
|
|
2,400
|
|
True cash, July 31
|
|
$ 8,175
|
Calculator Tape of Outstanding Checks:
0*
225+
750+
800+
1,675*
Subsequently, the owner of Parker Company discovered that the cashier had stolen an unknown amount of undeposited receipts, leaving only $1,500 to be deposited on July 31.
The owner, a close family friend, has asked your help in determining the amount that the former cashier has stolen.
1. Determine the amount the cashier stole from Parker Company. Show your computations in good form.
2. How did the cashier attempt to conceal the theft?
3. a. Identify two major weaknesses in internal controls, which allowed the cashier to steal the undeposited cash receipts.
b. Recommend improvements in internal controls, so that similar types of thefts of undeposited cash receipts can be prevented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 7-7 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio
TearLab Corp. is a health care company that specializes in developing diagnostic devices for eye disease. TearLab reported the following data (in thousands) for three recent years:
|
Year 3
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 2,726
|
$ 106
|
$ 2,565
|
|
Net cash flows from operations
|
(4,540)
|
(4,098)
|
(9,435)
|
1. Determine the monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
2. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses as of December 31, for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
3. Based on (1) and (2), comment on TearLab’s ratio of cash to monthly operating expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 8-6A Accounts receivable turnover and number of days’ sales in receivables
Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Chiro-Solutions Company are shown below.
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
$2,912,000
|
$2,958,000
|
|
Accounts receivable:
|
|
|
|
Beginning of year
|
300,000
|
280,000
|
|
End of year
|
340,000
|
300,000
|
a. Determine the accounts receivable turnover for 2014 and 2013.
b. Determine the number of days’ sales in receivables for 2014 and 2013. Round to one decimal place.
c. Does the change in accounts receivable turnover and the number of days’ sales in receivables from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 8-6B Accounts receivable turnover and number of days’ sales in receivables
Financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Robinhood Company are shown below.
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
$7,906,000
|
$6,726,000
|
|
Accounts receivable:
|
|
|
|
Beginning of year
|
600,000
|
540,000
|
|
End of year
|
580,000
|
600,000
|
a. Determine the accounts receivable turnover for 2014 and 2013.
b. Determine the number of days’ sales in receivables for 2014 and 2013. Round to one decimal place.
c. Does the change in accounts receivable turnover and the number of days’ sales in receivables from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-2 Nature of uncollectible accounts
MGM Resorts International owns and operates hotels and casinos including the MGM Grand and the Bellagio in Las Vegas, Nevada. As of a recent year, MGM reported accounts receivable of $415,654,000 and allowance for doubtful accounts of $93,760,000. Johnson & Johnson manufactures and sells a wide range of healthcare products including Band-Aids and Tylenol. As of a recent year, Johnson & Johnson reported accounts receivable of $10,114,000,000 and allowance for doubtful accounts of $340,000,000.
a. Compute the percentage of the allowance for doubtful accounts to the accounts receivable for MGM Resorts International. Round to one decimal place.
b. Compute the percentage of the allowance for doubtful accounts to the accounts receivable, for Johnson & Johnson. Round to one decimal place.
c. Discuss possible reasons for the difference in the two ratios computed in (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-6 Providing for doubtful accounts
At the end of the current year, the accounts receivable account has a debit balance of $6,125,000 and net sales for the year total $66,800,000. Determine the amount of the adjusting entry to provide for doubtful accounts under each of the following assumptions:
a. The allowance account before adjustment has a debit balance of $18,000. Bad debt expense is estimated at ¾ of 1% of net sales.
b. The allowance account before adjustment has a debit balance of $18,000. An aging of the accounts in the customer ledger indicates estimated doubtful accounts of $475,000.
c. The allowance account before adjustment has a credit balance of $10,000. Bad debt expense is estimated at ½ of 1% of net sales.
d. The allowance account before adjustment has a credit balance of $10,000. An aging of the accounts in the customer ledger indicates estimated doubtful accounts of $360,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-7 Number of days past due
Toot Auto Supply distributes new and used automobile parts to local dealers throughout the Midwest. Toot’s credit terms are n/30. As of the end of business on October 31, the following accounts receivable were past due:
|
Account
|
Due Date
|
Amount
|
|
Avalanche Auto
|
August 8
|
$12,000
|
|
Bales Auto
|
October 11
|
2,400
|
|
Derby Auto Repair
|
June 23
|
3,900
|
|
Lucky’s Auto Repair
|
September 2
|
6,600
|
|
Pit Stop Auto
|
September 19
|
1,100
|
|
Reliable Auto Repair
|
July 15
|
9,750
|
|
Trident Auto
|
August 24
|
1,800
|
|
Valley Repair & Tow
|
May 17
|
4,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-11 Estimating doubtful accounts
Traditional Bikes Co. is a wholesaler of motorcycle supplies. An aging of the company’s accounts receivable on December 31, 2014, and a historical analysis of the percentage of uncollectible accounts in each age category are as follows:
|
Balance
|
Percent Uncollectible
|
|
Age Interval
|
$ 740,000
|
½%
|
|
Not past due
|
390,000
|
2
|
|
1–30 days past due
|
85,000
|
4
|
|
31–60 days past due
|
28,000
|
14
|
|
61–90 days past due
|
42,000
|
32
|
|
91–180 days past due
|
15,000
|
80
|
|
Over 180 days past due
|
$1,300,000
|
|
Estimate what the proper balance of the allowance for doubtful accounts should be as of December 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-13 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance
Methods The following selected transactions were taken from the records of Shipway Company for the first year of its operations ending December 31, 2014:
Apr. 13. Wrote off account of Dean Sheppard, $8,450.
May 15. Received $500 as partial payment on the $7,100 account of Dan Pyle. Wrote off
the remaining balance as uncollectible.
July 27. Received $8,450 from Dean Sheppard, whose account had been written off on April 13. Reinstated the account and recorded the cash receipt.
Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (record as one journal entry):
|
Paul Chapman
|
$2,225
|
|
Duane DeRosa
|
3,550
|
|
Teresa Galloway
|
4,770
|
|
Ernie Klatt
|
1,275
|
|
Marty Richey
|
1,690
|
31. If necessary, record the year-end adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.
a. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the direct write-off method.
b. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the allowance method. Shipway Company uses the percent of credit sales method of estimating uncollectible accounts expense. Based on past history and industry averages, ¾% of credit sales are expected to be uncollectible. Shipway Company recorded $3,778,000 of credit sales during 2014.
c. How much higher (lower) would Shipway Company’s net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-14 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance methods
The following selected transactions were taken from the records of Rustic Tables Company for the year ending December 31, 2014:
June 8. Wrote off account of Kathy Quantel, $8,440.
Aug. 14. Received $3,000 as partial payment on the $12,500 account of Rosalie Oakes.
Wrote off the remaining balance as uncollectible.
Oct. 16. Received the $8,440 from Kathy Quantel, whose account had been written off on June 8. Reinstated the account and recorded the cash receipt.
Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (record as one journal entry):
|
Wade Dolan
|
$4,600
|
|
Greg Gagne
|
3,600
|
|
Amber Kisko
|
7,150
|
|
Shannon Poole
|
2,975
|
|
Niki Spence
|
6,630
|
31. If necessary, record the year-end adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.
a. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the direct write-off method.
b. Journalize the transactions for 2014 under the allowance method, assuming that the allowance account had a beginning balance of $36,000 on January 1, 2014, and the company uses the analysis of receivables method. Rustic Tables Company prepared the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:
|
Aging Class (Number
|
Receivables Balance
|
Estimated Percent of
|
|
of Days Past Due)
|
on December 31
|
Uncollectible Accounts
|
|
0–30 days
|
$320,000
|
1%
|
|
31–60 days
|
110,000
|
3
|
|
61–90 days
|
24,000
|
10
|
|
91–120 days
|
18,000
|
33
|
|
More than 120 days
|
43,000
|
75
|
|
Total receivables
|
$515,000
|
|
c. How much higher (lower) would Rustic Tables’ 2014 net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-17 Entries for bad debt expense under the direct write-off and allowance methods
Casebolt Company wrote off the following accounts receivable as uncollectible for the first year of its operations ending December 31, 2014:
|
Customer
|
Amount
|
|
Shawn Brooke
|
$ 4,650
|
|
Eve Denton
|
5,180
|
|
Art Malloy
|
11,050
|
|
Cassie Yost
|
9,120
|
|
Total
|
$30,000
|
a. Journalize the write-offs for 2014 under the direct write-off method.
b. Journalize the write-offs for 2014 under the allowance method. Also, journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts. The company recorded $5,250,000 of credit sales during 2014. Based on past history and industry averages, ¾% of credit sales are expected to be uncollectible.
c. How much higher (lower) would Casebolt Company’s 2014 net income have been under the direct write-off method than under the allowance method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-19 Determine due date and interest on notes
Determine the due date and the amount of interest due at maturity on the following notes dated in 2014:
|
Date of Note
|
Face Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term of Note
|
|
January 22
|
$55,000
|
8%
|
90 days
|
|
March 9
|
36,000
|
5
|
60 days
|
|
June 15
|
78,000
|
4
|
45 days
|
|
September 4
|
13,800
|
7
|
60 days
|
|
October 1
|
58,000
|
6
|
120 days
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-24 Entries for receipt and dishonor of notes receivable
Journalize the following transactions in the accounts of Safari Games Co., which operates a riverboat casino:
Apr. 18. Received a $60,000, 30-day, 7% note dated April 18 from Glenn Cross on account.
30. Received a $42,000, 60-day, 8% note dated April 30 from Rhoni Melville on account.
May 18. The note dated April 18 from Glenn Cross is dishonored, and the customer’s account is charged for the note, including interest.
June 29. The note dated April 30 from Rhoni Melville is dishonored, and the customer’s account is charged for the note, including interest.
Aug. 16. Cash is received for the amount due on the dishonored note dated April 18 plus interest for 90 days at 8% on the total amount debited to Glenn Cross on May 18.
Oct. 22. Wrote off against the allowance account the amount charged to Rhoni Melville on June 29 for the dishonored note dated April 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 8-25 Receivables on the balance sheet
List any errors you can find in the following partial balance sheet:
|
Napa Vino Company Balance Sheet December 31, 2014
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
$ 78,500
|
|
Notes receivable
|
|
$ 300,000
|
|
|
Less interest receivable
|
|
4,500
|
295,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
$1,200,000
|
|
|
Plus allowance for doubtful accounts
|
|
11,500
|
1,211,500
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vega Foods, Inc., has recently purchased a small mill that it intends to operate as one of its subsidiaries. The newly acquired mill has three products that it offers for sale—wheat cereal, pancake mix, and flour. Each product sells for $10 per package. Materials, labor, and other variable production costs are $4.30 per bag of wheat cereal, $5.50 per bag of pancake mix, and $3.10 per bag of flour. Sales commissions are 10% of sales for any product. All other costs are fixed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the cost of coffee beans per ounce of coffee sold. 2. Calculate the cost of cups, lids, sleeves, cream, and sugar per unit for small, medium, and large cups of coffee and in total. 3. Calculate the total labor costs for the year. 4. Prepare an income statement for The Daily Grind for the last year. You can assume that there are no inventories on hand at the end of the year. (All coffee and supplies purchased during the year are consumed.) 5. Determine whether the costs incurred by The Daily Grind are fixed, variable (with respect to number of cups of coffee sold), or mixed. 6. Use regression analysis and the high/low method to calculate the monthly fixed cost and the variable component of the utility expenses incurred by The Daily Grind. Use cups of coffee sold as the independent variable and utility expense as the dependent variable in your regression analysis. After calculating both numbers, round your final answers to two decimal places. 7. Compare the regression results with the high/low results. Which model would you suggest? 8. Calculate the contribution margin earned for each product (round to three decimal places) and the weighted-average contribution margin (round to four decimal places). 9. Assume the sales mix given in the problem. What is Daily Grind’s break-even point in terms of the number of cups of coffee sold during the year? 10. David is contemplating adding a new 20-ounce product for the coming year and discontinuing sales of the small 8-ounce cup. The new cup, lid, and sleeve cost the same as the 16-ounce cup, but cream and sugar is expected to cost $.06 per cup instead of $.04 per cup. The new extra-large cup would be priced at $2.40. David anticipates that the new sales mix would be 50% for the 12-ounce cup, 30% for the 16-ounce cup, and 20% for the new 20-ounce cup. Assume that material, labor, and overhead costs remain thesame in the upcoming year. How would this change in sales mix affect the company’s breakeven point? 11. David would like to increase sales in the second year of operations so that he may raise his salary to $50,000 (not including $15,000 of fringe benefits) while reducing his workload to 40 hours per week with two paid weeks of vacation during the year. Reducing his workload will require increasing the number of hours worked by parttime employees by 1,080 hours per year. Assume the introduction of the extra-large cup and the new sales mix as discussed in requirement 10. What level of annual sales would be required in order for David to reach his goal? 12. Write a short memo to David and discuss whether you think he will be able to reach his goal during the second year of operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Company, Inc. is a foreign corporation registered in the State of Illinois.
Where are this firm’s official offices located (geographically) to have such a
designation?
2. Using the format shown in the Study Guide and in the Homework answers:
Cohn, Dole, Wojcik, Moore, and Murphy are partners in GSU Medical
Supply Company. The partnership agreement states that Cohn is to receive
a salary of $100,000, and Dole and Wojcik are to receive salaries of $85,000
apiece. Moore is to receive a sales commission of 1% of the firm’s gross
revenues. Murphy is to receive 3% on her investment at the
beginning of the year. Sales for fiscal 2013 were $10,000,000. Murphy’s
investment at the beginning of the year was $2,000,000. After paying salaries,
commissions, and interest on investment, the remaining profits/losses are to be
allocated on a 1:2:3:4:5 basis (Cohn, Dole, Wojcik, Moore, and Murphy).
The profit for 2013 before paying salaries, commissions, and interest is $900,000
Compute the allocation of partners’ total payments for 2013.
3. The ABC Medical Practice Plan, Inc., had 10,000 of $50 par value common stock
and 3,000 shares of $100 value, 3% cumulative preferred stock outstanding for
the years 2012 and 2013. The company declared cash dividends of $9,000 and
$15,000 respectively for the years 2012 and 2013. Compute the total dividends
That would be paid to the common and preferred shareholders for each year.
NOTE: Students must use the format shown in the Study Guide and in the
Homework answers.
4. ABC Company, Inc. is a foreign corporation registered in the State of Illinois.
Where are this firm’s official offices located (geographically) to have such a
designation?
5. ABF (Adkins, Bell and Fox) partnership is dissolving. Creditors are owed
$52,000. Each partner contributed $30,000 to the business as a capital invest-
ment. Partner Adkins loaned the business $20,000, Partner Bell loaned the
business $5,000, and Partner Fox did not make any loans. There is $83,000
in the firm’s bank account after all other assets have been liquidated. Allocate
the bank balance among all of the involved parties: Creditors, Partner Adkins,
Partner Bell, and Partner Fox.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
April 1
|
|
(balance on hand)
|
|
490
|
@
|
$7.30
|
|
April 5
|
|
690
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
790
|
@
|
7.40
|
|
12
|
|
590
|
|
11
|
|
|
|
690
|
@
|
7.70
|
|
27
|
|
1,580
|
|
18
|
|
|
|
590
|
@
|
7.80
|
|
28
|
|
150
|
|
26
|
|
|
|
990
|
@
|
8.10
|
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
590
|
@
|
8.40
|
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
|
|

|
|

|
|
(a1)
|
|

|
|

|
|

|
Your answer is incorrect.
|
|
|
|
Calculate average cost per unit.(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621.)
|
Average cost per unit
|
|
$ 7.4230
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:
|
Open Show Work
|
|
|
|

|
|

|
|

|
|

|
(a2) and (b)
|
|

|
(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. (1) First-in, first-out (FIFO). (2) Last-in, first-out (LIFO). (3) Average cost.(Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)
|
|
FIFO
|
|
LIFO
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory under FIFO, LIFO and Average cost?(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)
|
|
FIFO
|
|
LIFO
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:
|
Open Show Work
Modify Show Work
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Problem 8-4
|
|

|
Hull Company’s record of transactions concerning part X for the month of April was as follows.
|
Purchases
|
|
Sales
|
|
April 1
|
|
(balance on hand)
|
|
490
|
@
|
$7.30
|
|
April 5
|
|
690
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
790
|
@
|
7.40
|
|
12
|
|
590
|
|
11
|
|
|
|
690
|
@
|
7.70
|
|
27
|
|
1,580
|
|
18
|
|
|
|
590
|
@
|
7.80
|
|
28
|
|
150
|
|
26
|
|
|
|
990
|
@
|
8.10
|
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
590
|
@
|
8.40
|
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
|
|

|
|

|
|
(a1)
|
|

|
Calculate average cost per unit.(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621.)
|
Average cost per unit
|
|
$ 7.4230
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:
|
Open Show Work
|
|
|
|

|
|

|
|

|
|
(a2) and (b)
|
|

|
(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. (1) First-in, first-out (FIFO). (2) Last-in, first-out (LIFO). (3) Average cost.(Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)
|
|
FIFO
|
|
LIFO
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory under FIFO, LIFO and Average cost?(Round average cost per unit to 4 decimal places, e.g. $2.7621 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $6,548.)
|
|
FIFO
|
|
LIFO
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok
Cancel
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Penn Company was formed on July 1, 2012. It was authorized to issue309,700shares of $12par value common stock and104,100shares of9% $25par value, cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock. Penn Company has a July 1–June 30 fiscal year.
The following information relates to the stockholders’ equity accounts of Penn Company.
Common Stock
Prior to the 2014–2015 fiscal year, Penn Company had115,100shares of outstanding common stock issued as follows.
| 1. |
|
91,700shares were issued for cash on July 1, 2012, at $32per share. |
| 2. |
|
On July 24, 2012,5,000shares were exchanged for a plot of land which cost the seller $79,400in 2006 and had an estimated fair value of $228,100on July 24, 2012. |
| 3. |
|
18,400shares were issued on March 1, 2013, for $41per share. |
During the 2014–2015 fiscal year, the following transactions regarding common stock took place.
| November30,2014 |
|
Penn purchased2,900shares of its own stock on the open market at $38per share. Penn uses the cost method for treasury stock. |
| December15,2014 |
|
Penn declared a4% stock dividend for stockholders of record on January 15, 2015, to be issued on January 31, 2015. Penn was having a liquidity problem and could not afford a cash dividend at the time. Penn’s common stock was selling at $52per share on December 15, 2014. |
| June20,2015 |
|
Penn sold420shares of its own common stock that it had purchased on November 30, 2014, for $21,400. |
Preferred Stock
Penn issued40,300shares of preferred stock at $44per share on July 1, 2013.
Cash Dividends
Penn has followed a schedule of declaring cash dividends in December and June, with payment being made to stockholders of record in the following month. The cash dividends which have been declared since inception of the company through June 30, 2015, are shown below.
Declaration Date |
|
Common Stock |
|
Preferred Stock |
| 12/15/13 |
|
$0.38per share |
|
$1per share |
| 6/15/14 |
|
$0.38per share |
|
$1per share |
| 12/15/14 |
|
|
|
$1per share |
No cash dividends were declared during June 2015 due to the company’s liquidity problems.
Retained Earnings
As of June 30, 2014, Penn’s retained earnings account had a balance of $708,900. For the fiscal year ending June 30, 2015, Penn reported net income of $42,200.
Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet, for Penn Company as of June 30, 2015, as it should appear in its annual report to the shareholders.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
 |
Your answer is partially correct. |
Assume that
Amazon.comhas a stock-option plan for top management. Each stock option represents the right to purchase a share of Amazon $1 par value common stock in the future at a price equal to the fair value of the stock at the date of the grant. Amazon has 5,000 stock options outstanding, which were granted at the beginning of 2014. The following data relate to the option grant.
| Exercise price for options |
|
$40 |
| Market price at grant date (January 1, 2014) |
|
$40 |
| Fair value of options at grant date (January 1, 2014) |
|
$6 |
| Service period |
|
5 years |
(a)Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the stock-option plan.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)
| Date |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| 1/1/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
| 12/31/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
(b)Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted stock were granted at the beginning of 2012.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)
| Date |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| 1/1/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
| 12/31/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
(c)Now assume that the market price of Amazon stock on the grant date was $45 per share. Prepare the journal entries for the first year of the plan assuming that, rather than options, 700 shares of restricted stock were granted at the beginning of 2012.
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.)
| Date |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| 1/10/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
| 12/31/14 |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
 |
 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-16 Bank reconciliation
Identify each of the following reconciling items as: (a) an addition to the cash balance according to the bank statement, (b) a deduction from the cash balance according to the bank statement, (c) an addition to the cash balance according to the company’s records, or (d) a deduction from the cash balance according to the company’s records. (None of the transactions reported by bank debit and credit memos have been recorded by the company.)
1. Bank service charges, $30.
2. Check of a customer returned by bank to company because of insufficient funds, $1,750.
3. Check for $390 incorrectly recorded by the company as $930.
4. Check for $50 incorrectly charged by bank as $500.
5. Deposit in transit, $9,700.
6. Outstanding checks, $33,110.
7. Note collected by bank, $24,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-18 Bank reconciliation
The following data were accumulated for use in reconciling the bank account of Allenby Co. for August:
1. Cash balance according to the company’s records at August 31, $31,080.
2. Cash balance according to the bank statement at August 31, $38,280.
3. Checks outstanding, $12,460.
4. Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $5,850.
5. A check for $180 in payment of an account was erroneously recorded in the check register as $810.
6. Bank debit memo for service charges, $40.
a. Prepare a bank reconciliation, using the format shown in Exhibit 7.
b. If the balance sheet were prepared for Allenby Co. on August 31, what amount should be reported for cash?
c. Must a bank reconciliation always balance (reconcile)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-21 Bank reconciliation
An accounting clerk for Chesner Co. prepared the following bank reconciliation:
|
Cash balance according to company’s records
|
|
$11,100
|
|
Add: Outstanding checks
|
$ 3,585
|
|
|
Error by Chesner Co. in recording Check
|
|
|
|
No. 1056 as $950 instead of $590
|
360
|
|
|
Note for $12,000 collected by bank, including interest
|
12,480
|
16,425
|
|
Deduct: Deposit in transit on July 31
|
$ 7,200
|
$27,525
|
|
Bank service charges
|
25
|
|
|
Cash balance according to bank statement
|
|
7,225
|
|
|
|
$20,300
|
a. From the data in the above bank reconciliation, prepare a new bank reconciliation for Chesner Co., using the format shown in the illustrative problem.
b. If a balance sheet were prepared for Chesner Co. on July 31, 2014, what amount should be reported for cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-22 Bank reconciliation
Identify the errors in the following bank reconciliation:
|
Poway Co. Bank Reconciliation For the Month Ended June 30, 2014
|
|
Cash balance according to bank statement
|
|
|
$16,185
|
|
Add outstanding checks:
|
|
|
|
|
No. 1067
|
|
$ 575
|
|
|
1106
|
|
470
|
|
|
1110
|
|
1,050
|
|
|
1113
|
|
910
|
3,005
|
|
|
|
$19,190
|
|
Deduct deposit of June 30, not recorded by bank
|
|
|
6,600
|
|
Adjusted balance
|
|
|
$12,590
|
|
Cash balance according to company’s records
|
|
|
$ 8,985
|
|
Add: Proceeds of note collected by bank:
|
|
|
|
|
Principal
|
$6,000
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
300
|
$6,300
|
|
|
Service charges
|
|
15
|
6,315
|
|
|
|
$15,300
|
|
Deduct: Check returned because of insufficient funds
|
|
$ 890
|
|
|
Error in recording June 17 deposit of $7,150 as $1,750
|
|
5,400
|
|
|
Adjusted balance
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-23 Using bank reconciliation to determine cash receipts stolen
Alaska Impressions Co. records all cash receipts on the basis of its cash register tapes.
Alaska Impressions Co. discovered during October 2014 that one of its sales clerks had stolen an undetermined amount of cash receipts by taking the daily deposits to the bank.
The following data have been gathered for October:
|
Cash in bank according to the general ledger
|
$11,680
|
|
Cash according to the October 31, 2014, bank statement
|
13,275
|
|
Outstanding checks as of October 31, 2014
|
3,670
|
|
Bank service charge for October
|
40
|
|
Note receivable, including interest collected by bank in October
|
2,100
|
No deposits were in transit on October 31.
a. Determine the amount of cash receipts stolen by the sales clerk.
b. What accounting controls would have prevented or detected this theft?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-25 Variation in cash flows
Mattel, Inc., designs, manufactures, and markets toy products worldwide. Mattel’s toys include Barbie™ fashion dolls and accessories, Hot Wheels™, and Fisher-Price brands.
For a recent year, Mattel reported the following net cash flows from operating activities (in thousands):
|
First quarter ending March 31
|
$ (41,844)
|
|
Second quarter ending June 30
|
(184,934)
|
|
Third quarter ending September 30
|
(55,548)
|
|
Fourth quarter ending December 31
|
955,600
|
Explain why Mattel reported negative net cash flows from operating activities during the first three quarters and a large positive cash flow for the fourth quarter, with overall net positive cash flow for the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-27 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio
Capstone Turbine Corporation produces and sells turbine generators for such applications as charging electric, hybrid vehicles. Capstone Turbine reported the following financial data for a recent year (in thousands):
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
$(21,899)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
33,456
|
a. Determine the monthly cash expenses. Round to one decimal place.
b. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses. Round to one decimal place.
c. Based on your analysis, do you believe that Capstone Turbine will remain in business?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-28 Cash to monthly cash expenses ratio
Allos Therapeutics, Inc., is a biopharmaceutical company that develops drugs for the treatment of cancer. Allos Therapeutics reported the following financial data (in thousands) for three recent years:
|
For Years Ended December 31
|
|
|
|
Year 3
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 48,402
|
$141,423
|
$ 30,696
|
|
Net cash flows from operations
|
(63,656)
|
(62,199)
|
(42,850)
|
a. Determine the monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
b. Determine the ratio of cash to monthly cash expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1 as of December 31. Round to one decimal place.
c. Based on (a) and (b), comment on Allos Therapeutics’ ratio of cash to monthly operating expenses for Year 3, Year 2, and Year 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-1A Evaluating internal control of cash
The following procedures were recently installed by Raspberry Creek Company:
a. After necessary approvals have been obtained for the payment of a voucher, the treasurer signs and mails the check. The treasurer then stamps the voucher and supporting documentation as paid and returns the voucher and supporting documentation to the accounts payable clerk for filing.
b. The accounts payable clerk prepares a voucher for each disbursement. The voucher along with the supporting documentation is forwarded to the treasurer’s office for approval.
c. Along with petty cash expense receipts for postage, office supplies, etc., several postdated employee checks are in the petty cash fund.
d. At the end of the day, cash register clerks are required to use their own funds to make up any cash shortages in their registers.
e. At the end of each day, all cash receipts are placed in the bank’s night depository.
f. At the end of each day, an accounting clerk compares the duplicate copy of the daily cash deposit slip with the deposit receipt obtained from the bank.
g. All mail is opened by the mail clerk, who forwards all cash remittances to the cashier.
The cashier prepares a listing of the cash receipts and forwards a copy of the list to the accounts receivable clerk for recording in the accounts.
h. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier, who works under the supervision of the treasurer.
Instructions
Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control over cash represents (1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-2A Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over
Picasso Restoration Company completed the following selected transactions during May 2014:
May 1. Established a petty cash fund of $800.
10. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $3,345. The actual cash received from cash sales was $3,358.
31. Petty cash on hand was $275. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:
May 3. Store supplies, $290.
7. Express charges on merchandise sold, $70 (Delivery Expense).
9. Office supplies, $12.
13. Office supplies, $25.
19. Postage stamps, $18 (Office Supplies).
21. Repair to office file cabinet lock, $20 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
May 22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $16 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
24. Express charges on merchandise sold, $40 (Delivery Expense).
30. Office supplies, $10.
May 31. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $6,155. The actual cash received from cash sales was $6,125.
31. Decreased the petty cash fund by $50.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-3A Bank reconciliation and entries
The cash account for Remedy Medical Co. at April 30, 2014, indicated a balance of $18,885.
The bank statement indicated a balance of $23,775 on April 30, 2014. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:
a. Checks outstanding totaled $7,840.
b. A deposit of $3,580, representing receipts of April 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.
c. The bank collected $3,780 on a note left for collection. The face of note was $3,600.
d. A check for $770 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Remedy Medical Co. as $700. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Copelin Co. for a purchase on account.
e. A check drawn for $330 had been erroneously charged by the bank as $3,300.
f. Bank service charges for April amounted to $110.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation.
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Remedy Medical Co. on April 30, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-4A Bank reconciliation and entries
The cash account for Fit Bike Co. at August 1, 2014, indicated a balance of $12,190.
During August, the total cash deposited was $28,100 and checks written totaled $33,010.
The bank statement indicated a balance of $12,550 on August 31. Comparing the bank statement, the canceled checks, and the accompanying memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:
a. Checks outstanding totaled $7,440.
b. A deposit of $2,880, representing receipts of August 31, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.
c. The bank had collected for Fit Bike Co. $2,080 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $2,000.
d. A check for $580 returned with the statement had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $850.
e. A check for $640 returned with the statement had been recorded by Fit Bike Co. as $460. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Brown Co. on account.
f. Bank service charges for August amounted to $20.
g. A check for $900 from Murdock Co. was returned by the bank due to insufficient funds.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of August 31.
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Fit Bike Co. on August 31, 2014, what amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 7-1B Evaluating internal control of cash
The following procedures were recently installed by The China Shop:
a. All sales are rung up on the cash register, and a receipt is given to the customer. All sales are recorded on a record locked inside the cash register.
b. Each cashier is assigned a separate cash register drawer to which no other cashier has access.
c. At the end of a shift, each cashier counts the cash in his or her cash register, unlocks the cash register record, and compares the amount of cash with the amount on the record to determine cash shortages and overages.
d. Checks received through the mail are given daily to the accounts receivable clerk for recording collections on account and for depositing in the bank.
e. Vouchers and all supporting documents are perforated with a PAID designation after being paid by the treasurer.
f. Disbursements are made from the petty cash fund only after a petty cash receipt has been completed and signed by the payee.
g. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier.
Instructions
Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control over cash represents
(1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost-Based Pricing
P 2. Centered Publishing Company specializes in health awareness books. Because the field of health awareness is very competitive, Jay Rosenbek, the company’s president, maintains a strict policy about selecting manuscripts to publish. Rosenbek wants to publish only books whose projected earnings are 20 percent above total projected costs. Three titles were accepted for publication during the year. The authors of those books are Tone, Tyme, and Klay. Projected costs for each book and allocation percentages for common costs are shown here.
|
Cost Categories
|
Tone Book
|
Tyme Book
|
Klay Book
|
Projected Costs
|
|
Direct labor
|
$146,250
|
$243,750
|
$97,500
|
$487,500
|
|
Royalty costs
|
$36,000
|
$60,000
|
$24,000
|
120,000
|
|
Printing costs
|
$74,580
|
$124,300
|
$49,720
|
248,600
|
|
Supplies
|
$10,260
|
$17,100
|
$6,840
|
34,200
|
|
Variable production costs
|
$42,600
|
$71,000
|
$28,400
|
142,000
|
|
Fixed production costs
|
35%
|
40%
|
25%
|
168,000
|
|
Distribution costs
|
30%
|
50%
|
20%
|
194,000
|
|
Marketing costs
|
$61,670
|
$90,060
|
$42,270
|
194,000
|
|
General and administrative
|
35%
|
40%
|
25%
|
52,400
|
|
costs
|
|
|
|
|
Expected sales for the year are as follows: Tone, 26,000 copies; Tyme, 32,000 copies; and Klay, 20,000 copies.
Required
1. Prepare a cost analysis that computes the desired profit for each of the three books and in total.
2. Use gross margin pricing to compute the selling price for each book. (Hint: Treat royalty costs as production costs.)
3. If the competition’s average selling price for a book similar to Klay’s is $22, should this influence the pricing decision? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Time and Materials Pricing in a Service Business
P 3. Ace Maintenance, Inc., repairs heavy construction equipment and vehicles. Recently, the Shanti Construction Company had one of its giant earthmovers overhauled and its tires replaced. Repair work for a vehicle of that size usually takes from one week to ten days. The vehicle must be lifted up so that maintenance workers can gain access to the engine. Parts are normally so large that a crane must be used to put them into place.
The company uses the time and materials pricing system and data from the previous year to compute markup percentages for overhead related to parts and materials and overhead related to direct labor. It adds markups of 130 percent to the cost of materials and parts and 140 percent to the cost of direct labor to cover overhead and profit. The following materials, parts, and direct labor are needed to repair the giant earthmover:
|
Quantity
|
Unit Price
|
Hours
|
Hourly Rate
|
|
Materials and parts
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
24 Spark plugs
|
$ 3.40
|
42 Mechanic hours
|
$18.20
|
|
20 Oil, quarts
|
2.90
|
54 Assistant mechanic
|
12.00
|
|
12 Hoses
|
11.60
|
hours
|
|
|
1 Water pump
|
764.00
|
|
|
|
30 Coolant, quarts
|
6.50
|
|
|
|
18 Clamps
|
5.90
|
|
|
|
1 Distributor cap
|
128.40
|
|
|
|
1 Carburetor
|
214.10
|
|
|
|
4 Tires
|
820.00
|
|
|
Required
Prepare a complete billing for this job. Include itemized amounts for each type of materials, parts, and direct labor. Follow the time and materials pricing approach, and show the total price for the job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hillyard Company, an office supplies specialty store, prepares its master budget on a quarterly basis. The following data have been assembled to assist in preparing the master budget for the first quarter:
- As of December 31, (the end of the prior quarter), the company’s general ledger showed the following account balances:
Cash $48,000 (debit)
Accounts receivable $224,000 (debit)
Inventory $60,000 (debit)
Buildings and equipment, net $370,000 (debit)
Accounts payable $93,000 (credit)
Capital stock $500,000 (credit)
Retained earnings $109,000 (credit)
- Actual sales for December and budgeted sales for the next four months are as follows: December $280,000, January $400,000, February $600,000, March $300,000 and April $200,000.
- Sales are 20% for cash and 80% on credit. All payments on credit sales are collected in the month following sale. The accounts receivable at December 31 are a result of December credit sales.
- The company’s gross margin is 40% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 60% of sales.)
- Monthly expenses are budgeted as follows: salaries and wages, $27,000 per month; advertising, $70,000 per month; shipping, 5% of sales; other expenses, 3% of sales. Depreciation, including depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter, will be $42,000 per quarter.
- Each month’s ending inventory should equal 25% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.
- One half of the month’s inventory purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid in the following month.
- During February, the company will purchase a new copy machine for $1,700 cash. During March, other equipment will be purchased for cash at a cost of $84,500.
- During January, the company will declare and pay $45,000 in cash dividends.
- Management wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $30,000. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seagren Industries Inc. manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.
Cutting Department
Production Data—July
Plant 1 T12-Tables
Plant 2 C10-Chairs
Work in process units, July 1
–0–
–0–
Units started into production
19,000
16,000
Work in process units, July 31
3,000
500
Work in process percent complete
60
80
Cost Data—July
Work in process, July 1
–0–??$
–0–??$
Materials
380,000
288,000
Labor
234,200
110,000
Overhead
104,000
96,700
Total
$718,200
$494,700
Instructions
(a)
For each plant:
1.
Compute the physical units of production.
2.
Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.
3.
Determine the unit costs of production.
4.
Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.
(b)
Prepare the production cost report for Plant 1 for July 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation’s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations.
| Net income |
$3,374,960 |
| Common shares issued and outstanding: |
|
Beginning of year
|
1,285,000 |
End of year
|
1,200,000 |
Average
|
1,242,500 |
| Earnings per share: |
|
|
|
| $3,374,960 |
= $2.72 per share |
| 1,242,500 |
You have developed the following additional information.
- There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares.
- There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares.
- There are no convertible debt securities.
- Activity in common shares during the year was as follows.
| Outstanding, Jan. 1 |
1,285,000 |
| Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 |
1,035,000 |
| Shares reissued, Dec. 1 |
1,165,000 |
| Outstanding, Dec. 31 |
1,200,000 |
Questions:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACT B415F (Jan 2014) TMA 1 You are an independent tax advisor and one of your clients, Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited, has provided you with the following information. Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited was incorporated in Hong Kong in 2002. The company was formed to take over the partnership business owned by the Cheung’s brothers, Albert Cheung and Bernard Cheung. Albert and Bernard each owns 40% of the shares of the company and the remaining 20% of the shares are owned by their sister, Crystal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Attached is the trial balance of James Appliance Company, for the year ended December 31, 2012. It isn’t the final trial balance, but it does contain all the adjustments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| except those relevant to the investments held by the company. JAMES’ POLICY IS TO ACCRUE INCOME GENERATED FROM CASH DIVIDENDS ON THE DECLARATION |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| DATE. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| A. |
No entries had been made to the Investment account during 2012. The detail to support the balance on your trial balance follows: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost |
FV (per share) as of 12/31/2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
100 shares of $4 ABD Corp. Preferred Stock |
|
|
$4,450 |
|
43 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
300 shares of Banana Tabulators, Inc. Common |
|
|
9,450 |
|
24 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Five $1000 bonds of HAL Corporation (8% coupon rate, interest |
5,000 |
|
96 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
payable 6/1 and 12/1, maturity 12/1/2020) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
100 shares Consolidated Bell Common |
|
|
|
7,400 |
|
70 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,000 shares of Red & Black Transportation Corp. Common Stock |
25,000 |
|
23.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
|
|
|
|
|
$51,300 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| The ABD preferred stock was purchased for cash income. This stock is readily marketable, but there is no intention of selling this stock any time in the near future. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ABD declared the full stated dividend on December 15, 2012 and it is due to be paid January 16, 2013. James Corp. owns 40% of ABD’s preferred stock, and ABD’s |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| net income for the year was $24,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| The Banana Tabulator stock was originally purchased 3 years ago with the expectation that it would grow sharply in value; the recent fall in the fair value of the stock is |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| due, according to James’ stock advisor, on a temporary depression in the tabulator market so its value is expected to eventually recover. It is now the intention of the |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| owner to hold on to this security for probably two or three more years. No cash dividends were declared or paid this year by Banana Tabulator. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| The HAL bonds and the Consolidated Bell common stock were both purchased in 2010 with excess cash and to generate income. If additional cash is needed, it is |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| likely that either security could be sold in the next year. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Interest was paid from the HAL bonds on schedule. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Consolidated Bell declared a stock dividend and distributed 20 shares of common stock to James on September 15, 2012, when the fair market value of the common |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| stock was at 72. On October 2, the corporation sold the 20 shares of stock from the stock dividend at 71.50 and total commissions from the sale were $30. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Consolidated Bell declared a cash dividend of $6.00 per share on December 5, 2012, which is payable January 7, 2013. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Red & Black Transportation, Inc. provides the majority of the transportation for James’ inventory and the owner sits on R&B’s Board of Directors. R&B has currently |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| issued and outstanding 3,000 shares of voting common stock and James paid book value for the stock. This year R&B reported $42,000 in net income. On November |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 10 it declared a total of $12,000 in cash dividends to all its shareholders. Date of record was November 30 and date of payment was December 9, 2012. There is no |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| intention on the part of management to sell any of this stock in the foreseeable future. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| B. |
These new securities were purchased in 2012: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
On September 1, 2012, James purchased 1,600 shares of Fermi Wholesale Television Incorporated, which is one of James’ major suppliers. At the time of |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the purchase, Fermi had issued and outstanding 6,400 shares of voting common stock. The business paid $25.25 per share. Total commissions on the |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
purchase were $200. Fermi’s total net loss for 2012 was $27,000, which was incurred evenly throughout the year. Fermi declared no dividends during 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and the fair value of the stock was 24 by the end of the year. There is no intention to sell any Fermi common stock any time soon. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2 |
On June 1, 2012, the company purchased five $1,000 bonds issued by the City School District. These bonds were purchased at 105 plus purchased interest. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$100 in commissions and taxes were paid on the trade. The contract rate on these bonds is 6% with interest payable on 4/1 and 10/1; these bonds mature |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4/1/2017. It is the intention of management to hold these bonds until they mature. On December 31, 2012, these bonds had a fair value of 104. James uses Straight-Line (SL) method to amortize premiums and discounts on its debt investments when appropriate. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3 |
On October 15, 2012, 100 shares of Granny Smith common stock were purchased at 35; commissions and taxes paid on the transaction were $125. This stock |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
trades OTC and is regularly reported on NASDAQ. Management plans to sell its holding in Granny Smith to take advantage of short-term price increases that |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
management believes will occur in the first couple months of 2013. On November 30, when the stock was trading at 50, it split 2:1. James sold 50 shares of the |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
shares it received from the split at 24.25 on December 28, 2012. The fees to transact the sale were $75. A cash dividend of $1 a share was declared December |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20, 2012, with a date of record of January 12, 2013, and a date of distribution of January 23, 2013. On December 31, 2012, the fair value of Granny Smith was |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
26 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| C. |
The prepaid expenses include a $3,000 annual premium paid for a whole-life insurance policy on the life of the owner of the corporation with the |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
corporation as beneficiary. The policy was dated March 1, 2012, and, according to the information from the insurance company, as of December 31, 2012, |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the investment portion of the $3,000 premium was $1,000. This is the first year the insurance policy has been in effect. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
“Concepts for Analysis” CA24-2 in Ch. 24 of Intermediate Accounting. –
(the first 3 items only.)
|
|
(disclosures Required in Various Situations)
Ace Inc. produces electronic components for sale to manufacturers of radios, television sets, and digital sound systems. In connection with her examination of Ace’s financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2013, Gloria Rodd, CPA, completed field work 2 weeks ago. Ms. Rodd now is evaluating the significance of the following items prior to preparing her auditor’s report. Except as noted, none of these items have been disclosed in the financial statements or notes.
Item 1
A 10-year loan agreement, which the company entered into 3 years ago, provides that dividend payments may not exceed net income earned after taxes subsequent to the date of the agreement. The balance of retained earnings at the date of the loan agreement was $420,000. From that date through December 31, 2013, net income after taxes has totaled $570,000 and cash dividends have totaled $320,000. On the basis of these data, the staff auditor assigned to this review concluded that there was no retained earnings restriction at December 31, 2013.
Item 2
Recently Ace interrupted its policy of paying cash dividends quarterly to its stockholders. Dividends were paid regularly through 2012, discontinued for all of 2013 to finance purchase of equipment for the company’s new plant, and resumed in the first quarter of 2014. In the annual report, dividend policy is to be discussed in the president’s letter to stockholders.
Item 3
A major electronics firm has introduced a line of products that will compete directly with Ace’s primary line, now being produced in the specially designed new plant. Because of manufacturing innovations, the competitor’s line will be of comparable quality but priced 50% below Ace’s line. The competitor announced its new line during the week following completion of field work. Ms. Rodd read the announcement in the newspaper and discussed the situation by telephone with Ace executives. Ace will meet the lower prices that are high enough to cover variable manufacturing and selling expenses but will permit recovery of only a portion of fixed costs.
Item 4
The company’s new manufacturing plant building, which cost $2,400,000 and has an estimated life of 25 years, is leased from Wichita National Bank at an annual rental of $600,000. The company is obligated to pay property taxes, insurance, and maintenance. At the conclusion of its 10-year noncancelable lease, the company has the option of purchasing the property for $1. In Ace’s income statement, the rental payment is reported on a separate line.
Instructions
For each of the above items, discuss any additional disclosures in the financial statements and notes that the auditor should recommend to her client. (The cumulative effect of the four items should not be considered.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Rider makes three types of electric scooters. The company?s total fixed cost is $1,080,000,000. Selling prices, variable cost, and sales percentages for each type of scooter follow:
Selling Price Variable Cost
Percent of
Total Unit Sales
Mod $2,200 $1,900 30
Rad 3,700 3,000 50
X-treme 6,000 5,000 20
a. What is Green Rider?s break-even point in units and sales dollars?
b. If the company has an after-tax income goal of $1 billion and the tax rate is 50 percent,
how many units of each type of scooter must be sold for the goal to be reached
at the current sales mix?
c. Assume the sales mix shifts to 50 percent Mod, 40 percent Rad, and 10 percent
X-treme. How does this change affect your answer to (a)?
d. If Green Rider sold more X-treme scooters and fewer Mod scooters, how would your answers to (a) and (b) change? No calculations are needed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Theories should be evaluated against a criteria for evaluating knowledge.
a) Identify a set of criteria for evaluating accounting theories. Drawing on your understanding of accounting as a system of measurement;
b) Apply the criteria from part a) to the historical cost approach to accounting measurement.
c) Explain whether you think historical cost accounting is a sound system of measurement.
Question 2 – 10 marks (1,000 words)
Subject Learning Outcome(s):Be able to compare and contrast the diverse perspectives which can be used to explain historically the development of accounting; Be able to engage in the accounting discourse including critical analysis of its reflexive role in society
a) Describe the key historical events that have shaped the development of accounting between 1900 – 2014.
b) How do these events support the notion accounting is socially constructed?
c) What arguments and evidence is there to suggest that accounting can influence society?
d) Which perspective do you agree with? Justify your position.
Marking Criteria
Question 1:
| Criteria |
Fail |
Pass |
Credit |
Distinction/High Distinction |
Mark |
Identification of a set criteria for evaluating theories Application of criteria to historical cost accounting that draws on knowledge of accounting as a system of measurement |
Criteria not identified or ineffective/incorrect criteria provided No application of criteria. Answer limited to a general discussion of historical cost accounting with no reference to measurement theory |
Some criteria provided but other relevant criteria missing. Basic application of the some of the criteria to HCA. Response may also include a discussion of HCA with minimal reference to measurement concepts. |
Most relevant criteria identified with some description of each. Each criteria applied with some critical evaluation of HCA as a system of measurement. |
All of the relevant criteria are clearly described. Each criteria is used to critically evaluate HCA drawing on elements of measurement theory to support the answer. |
/3 /3 |
| Critical Capacity:Has the student thoroughly evaluated HCA as a system of measurement? |
Response provided no evidence of critical thought in relation to HCA as a system of measurement. |
Response limited to a list of pros and cons with minimal evidence of independent critical thinking. |
Response provides a clear evaluation of HCA as a system of measurement that is largely drawn from source material. |
Response provides a deep and critical analysis of HCA as a system of measurement and demonstrates ability to provide independent and original thought. |
/2 |
Academic Writing: Is the answer easy to follow and understand? Use of source material Adherence to referencing guidelines |
Poor grammar and expression. Very difficult to follow. Weak use of resources, if at all. Inadequate or no evidence of reading. No proper use of APA in-text referencing. |
An adequate style, answer is structured satisfactorily. Limited but appropriate source consultation and background reading. Reference list provided, but not in proper format. Some in-text referencing provided but incorrect formatting. |
Clear expression and structure. Breadth of reading of appropriate sources. Reference list and in-text referencing performed largely in accordance with the guidelines. |
Advanced expression and clear communication. Answer is logically structured with arguments coherently developed and supported. Broad use of sources going beyond prescribed materials. Reference list included with correct adherence to referencing guidelines. Proper in-text referencing is provided. |
/2 |
Question 2:
| Criteria |
Fail |
Pass |
Credit |
Distinction/High Distinction |
Mark |
Identification of the key historical events that have shaped accounting Application and evaluation of the ‘socially constructed’ perspective of accounting history to the key events. Application and evaluation of the ‘socially constructing’ perspective of accounting history to the key events. |
No historical events, or most of the crucial events are not addressed No clear application of the socially constructed perspective of history to the events identified. No clear application of the socially constructing perspective of history to the events identified. |
A basic chronology of events is provided with little discussion of significance to accounting. Basic articulation and application of the socially constructed perspective with a few events being used to support the perspective. Limited evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective. Basic articulation and application of the socially constructing perspective with very few events being used to support the perspective. Limited evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective. |
Most of the key events are identified with a reasonable discussion of the relevance to accounting. Clear application of the perspective to most of the events with some evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective of history. Clear application of the perspective to most of the events with some evaluation of the effectiveness of the perspective of history. |
All of the key events that are identified, along with a clear discussion of the relevance of these events to accounting. Each of the key events are applied to the socially constructing perspective, with the response demonstrating strong ability to evaluate the perspective of history. Each of the key events are applied to the socially constructing perspective, with the response demonstrating a strong ability to evaluate the perspective of history. |
/2 2/ /2 |
Critical Capacity: Does the response demonstrate any critical evaluation of the perspectives used to interpret accounting history? |
Response provides no evidence of critical thought in relation to the two perspectives of history. |
Some evidence of basic critical thought in relation to the two perspectives that is based on only one source. |
Response provides a clear analysis and evaluation of the two perspectives that draws on a variety of source material. |
Response provides a clear, deep and critical analysis of the two perspectives of history that draws on source material as well as the students own thoughts. |
/2 |
Academic Writing: Is the answer easy to follow and understand? Use of source material Adherence to referencing guidelines |
Poor grammar and expression. Very difficult to follow. Weak use of resources, if at all. Inadequate or no evidence of reading. No proper use of APA in-text referencing. |
An adequate style, answer is structured satisfactorily. Limited but appropriate source consultation and background reading. Reference list provided, but not in proper format. Some in-text referencing provided but incorrect formatting. |
Clear expression and structure. Breadth of reading of appropriate sources. Reference list and in-text referencing performed largely in accordance with the guidelines. |
Advanced expression and clear communication. Answer is logically structured with arguments coherently developed and supported. Broad use of sources going beyond prescribed materials. Reference list included with correct adherence to referencing guidelines. Proper in-text referencing is provided. |
/2 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exam I Problem. 1 Recapture of Depreciation (20%) T-Square Corporation purchases nonresidential real property on May 1, 2000 for $650,000. Straight-line depreciation is taken in the amount of $223,611 before the property is sold on October 1, 2013 for $1,500,000. Required: Determine ordinary income under § 1250, ordinary income under § 291 and § 1231 gain. Conclude with a schedule showing how the recognized gain is accounted for. Use the 4 step method as illustrated in chapter 17 of your text. Exam I Problem.2 Consequence to Shareholder Sale or Exchange Treatment (20%) During the current year, Elm Corporation is liquidated and distributes its only asset, land, to Jimmy, the sole shareholder. On the date of distribution, the land has a basis of $200,000, a fair market value of $550,000, and is subject to a liability of $300,000. Jimmy, who takes the land subject to the liability, has a basis of $75,000 in the Elm stock. Required: Determine Jimmy’s Recognized Gain or Loss. Prepare a schedule showing your computation in good form. (Hint, all you need to do is label 5 lines with appropriate amounts that produce the correct amount.) Print Name:______________________________________________________________ Sign:___________________________________________________________________ Date:___________________________________________________ 12. Vinnie owns 100% of the stock of Lime Corporation. In the current year Vinnie transfers an installment obligation, tax basis of $150,000 and fair market value of $300,000, for additional stock in Lime worth $300,000. A. Vinnie recognizes no taxable gain on the transfer. B. Vinnie has a taxable gain of $150,000. C. Vinnie has a taxable gain of $300,000. D. Vinnie has a basis of $300,000 in the additional stock she received in Lime Corporation. E. None of the above. 15. Willace incorporates his business by transferring property with a basis of $200,000 for 200 shares of stock. The stock qualifies as § 1244 stock. Willace later gives 100 shares to his daughter, Louisa, when the stock was worth $400,000. Eventually the business fails, and the corporation becomes bankrupt in the current year. Willace files a joint return in the current year. Louisa files as a single person. With respect to the worthless stock: A. Willace has ordinary loss of $200,000. B. Louisa has an ordinary loss of $100,000. C. Willace has a capital loss of $100,000. D. Willace has ordinary loss of $100,000. E. None of the above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 2(15 marks)
A firm operates a process, the details of which for the period were as follows.There was no opening work-in-progress.During the period 8,250 units were received from the previous process at a value of $453,750, labour and overheads were $350,060 and material introduced was $24,750.At the end of the period, the closing work-in-progress was 1,600 units, which were 100% complete in respect of materials, and 60% complete in respect of labour and overheads.The balance of units were transferred to finished goods.
Requirements:
a)Calculate the number of equivalent units produced.
(3 marks)
b)Calculate the cost per equivalent unit.
(2 marks)
c)Prepare the process account
(7 marks)
d)Distinguish between joint products, and by-products, and briefly explain the difference, in accounting treatment between them
(3 marks)
(Total 15 marks).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Question 3(10 marks)
The management of Springer plc is considering next year’s production and purchase budget.
One of the components produced by the company, which is incorporated into another product before being sold, has budgeted manufacturing costs as follows:
$
Direct Material14
Direct labour (4 hours at $3 per hour)12
Variable overhead (4 hours at $2 per hour)8
Fixed overheads (4 hours at $5 per hour)20
Total Cost$54per unit
Trigger plc has offered to supply the above component at a guaranteed price of $50 per unit.
Required:
a)Considering cost criteria only, advise management whether the above component should be purchased from Trigger plc.Any calculation should be shown and assumptions made, or aspects which may require further investigation should be clearly stated.
(6 marks)
b)Explain how your advice would be affected by the following:
“As a result of recent government legislation if Springer plc continues to manufacture this component, the company will incur additional inspection and testing expenses of $56,000 per annum, which are not included in the above budgeted manufacturing costs.”
(4 marks)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Perfect Pies (PP)ltd makes pies, pastries and pizzas, which it sells to retailers under its own brand name and also supplies a major super market chain. It has two sites: the bakery and its head office at Darlington, and a distribution depot in Wolverhampton.
PP’s year end is 31 March 2013 and its accounts are required to be ready for publication by 31 May 2013. It is now 8th May and the final audit work is due to be completed by 16th May. The manager in charge of the audit is reviewing the audit file with a view to identifying any unresolved problems.
(You may assume an interim audit has been performed and that its results were satisfactory except for any deficiencies specifically mentioned in the case study.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please watch vedio first, and finish all questions.please watch vedio first, and finish all questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Technology Assignment (parts 1 and 2)
In addition to assessing your performance in this course, an assignment will be used to assess the accounting program’s achievement of program outcomes for the Technology Fluency (TECH) Core Learning Area (CLA), as described in the university’s Program Assessment Plan.
The TECH CLA is defined as follows: Demonstrate an understanding of information technology broadly enough to apply technology productively to academic studies, work, and everyday life. The accounting program outcomes are defined as the ability to utilize technology to facilitate and enhance the accessing, reporting, and critical analysis of accounting information and processes to improve the timing, accuracy, and quality of enterprise decision making.
Part 1 of this project will be a written analysis of the requirements needed to automate a firm’s accounting information system. Part 2 of this project will be an executive summary of part 1, done in Microsoft PowerPoint.
Project Description
Learning objective: Demonstrate an understanding of essential accounting information systems, standards, and controls.
Assume you are a CPA with a small local practice. You have three professional employees, all relatively new CPAs, and an office manager. Your practice consists primarily of tax and write-up work. You have a new client—a homeowners’ association consisting of 150 homeowners—and you have contracted to perform the following services:
- billing: Each quarter, you will send each homeowner an itemized bill. Dues are $50 per month ($150 per quarter). Late fees are one percent per month of the unpaid balance. The bills will be mailed the first day of the last month of the quarter. Payment is due by the end of the quarter.
- collection: You rent a post office box and will receive the checks there. You are responsible for depositing the checks (you have opened a checking account for the association).
- payment: You will write about five checks a month. Besides your own monthly fee, there are monthly checks to a lawn maintenance company and a refuse removal company. There are also checks written for taxes, postage, supplies, and the like.
- reporting: You will be responsible for reporting on all collections, all checks written, outstanding homeowners’ balances, and quarterly financial statements.
- tax payment: You will be responsible for preparing the association’s federal and state tax returns.
- advising: You will be responsible for advising the board on an as-needed basis, especially in the areas of budgeting, purchasing, and investment.
You are hoping to expand this new area of your practice. You want to computerize the main functions of this system, concentrating especially on the billing and reporting aspects. Assume that the tax preparation, financial statements, and checking account will not be computerized initially; only the billing and collections portions will be computerized for now.
Required: Using the methodology developed in this course, document and illustrate the system (describe inputs, outputs, controls, and so on); don’t overlook manual functions. Consider what reports will be necessary; what kinds of documents/forms will be needed (such as invoices and receipts); and what the reports, documents, and forms will look like. Design at least three documents (reports and/or forms), and provide them as appendices.
Include a discussion about problem areas that could arise, assuming that you will eventually have many more clients and several more employees.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Johnson Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
|
|
| ABC Corporation is a new company that buys and sells office supplies. Business began on January 1, 2012. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Given on the first two tabs are ABC’s 12/31/12 Unadjusted Trial Balance and a list of needed adjustments. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Make all 12 adjustments on the “Adjusting Journal Entries” tab. Remember to include a description under each journal entry. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. Post the adjustments to the general ledger on the “12-31-12 T-Accounts” tab. You may have to add T-Accounts for new accounts. |
|
|
|
| Link your T-Account entries to your Journal Entries. PLEASE NOTE THAT THE “BB” (BEGINNING BALANCES) FOR THE |
|
|
|
| T-ACCOUNTS REPRESENT THE BALANCES AS OF 12/1/12. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3. Once the 12/31/12 T-Accounts are complete, prepare the Adjusted Trial Balance. There may be some accounts with zero dollars, and you |
|
|
|
| may have to insert lines for new accounts. Link the Adjusted Trial Balance to your T-Accounts. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4. Use the Adjusted Trial Balance numbers to complete the Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheet. |
|
|
|
| For purposes of the Income Statement, prepare using the multiple step format and assume that Rent Revenue, any Unrealized Holding Gains/Losses, |
|
|
| Interest Expense, Interest Revenue, and any other Gains/Losses are NOT part of the major central ongoing operations of the company. For purposes |
|
|
| of the Balance Sheet, be sure to prepare a classifed Balance Sheet. Link your financial statements to your Adjusted Trial Balance. |
|
|
|
| If necessary, review financial statement preparation in Chapters 4 and 5 of your textbook for a quick refresher. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 5. When the Financial Statements are complete, make the closing entries on the “Closing Entries” tab. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 6. When closing entries have been made, post the entries to the general ledger on the “Post-Close T-Accounts” tab. Make sure your adjusting |
|
|
|
| journal entries are also on your After-Close T-Accounts. They will not automatically flow from tab-to-tab. (Helpful hint: After you have completed |
|
|
| and posted all of your adjusting entries, you can make a duplicate copy of your “12-31-12 T-Accounts” tab to replace the existing blank |
|
|
|
| “Post-Close T Accounts”when posting your closing entries.) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 7. The final step is the Post-Closing Trial Balance, which will use the ending balances from the 1/1/13 T-Accounts. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 8. Double-check your work. Here are a few things to check for: |
|
|
|
| -Adjusted Trial Balance: Make sure debit column and credit column total to the same figure at the bottom. |
|
|
|
| -Net income from the income statement will flow through to the Statement of Retained Earnings. |
|
|
|
| -Ending Retained Earnings from the Statement of Retained Earnings will flow through to the Balance Sheet. |
|
|
|
| -The Post-Closing Trial Balance should not have any revenue, expense, gain, or loss accounts. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 1: Gross profit = $465,250. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 2: Income before income taxes = $290,298. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 3: Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity = $988,302. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 4: Adjusted Trial Balance debit and credit columns total $1,542,219. |
|
|
|
| -Remember: Neatness matters in Financial Statements. Print or Print Preview before submitting to make sure your statements are neat. |
|
|
|
| Otherwise, management may send back to you for revision! |
|
|
|
| -Include your work at the bottom of each tab as needed. |
|
|
|
| -Ask questions prior to the day/night before the due date. The due date is clearly indicated on the course schedule. |
|
|
|
| -Utilize formulas and worksheet linkings in your financial statements to improve accuracy and save time in completing the assignment. |
|
|
|
| -Please take advantage of Excel by using formulas to calculate groups of numbers (i.e. “Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity”). |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Final comments: This project is intended to make sure that you understand the accounting cycle as well as several key financial accounting transactions that you have |
|
|
|
| studied during your Intermediate Accounting series. It is very important to take the necessary time on this project to master these concepts. The concepts mastered in this |
|
|
|
| comprehensive problem will serve you well in the rest of your accounting curriculum. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Please present an Income Statement for the latter year. 2. Please present a Statement of Retained Earnings for the latter year. 3. Please present a Statement of Owners Equity for the latter year. 4. Please present a Statement of (Net) Cash Flow for the latter year. 5. Please perform a vertical analysis for the latter year Income Statement. Be sure to explain what your vertical analysis figures “tell us”. 6. Please perform a Balance Sheet vertical analysis for the years presented. Be sure to explain what your vertical analysis figures “tell us”. Then perform an appropriate horizontal analysis for the Balance Sheet figures as presented. 7. Please perform an analysis of the firm’s Profitablity, Asset Utilization, Liquidity, and Solvency for the latter year. Bemire-to-explain-what-yew 8. Please specify thetapital Structure for the years presented. Which of the years presented has the more optimal Capital Structure, and why ? What is the Weighted Average Cost of Capital for the latter year ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
has to be an australian standard assgiment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
solution for this case study
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision to Eliminate an Unprofitable Product
P 8. Seven months ago, Naib Publishing Company published its first book (Book N). Since then, Naib has added four more books to its product list (Books S, Q, X, and H). Management is considering proposals for three more new books, but editorial capacity limits the company to producing only seven books annually. Before deciding which of the proposed books to publish, management wants you to evaluate the performance of its existing book list. Recent revenue and cost data are as follows:
|
Naib Publishing Company
Product Profit and Loss Summary
For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Book N
|
Book S
|
Book Q
|
Book X
|
Book H
|
Company Totals
|
|
Sales
|
$813,800
|
$782,000
|
$634,200
|
$944,100
|
$707,000
|
$3,881,100
|
|
Less variable costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Materials and binding
|
$325,520
|
$312,800
|
$190,260
|
$283,230
|
$212,100
|
$1,323,910
|
|
Editorial services
|
71,380
|
88,200
|
73,420
|
57,205
|
80,700
|
370,905
|
|
Author royalties
|
130,208
|
125,120
|
101,472
|
151,056
|
113,120
|
620,976
|
|
Sales commissions
|
162,760
|
156,400
|
95,130
|
141,615
|
141,400
|
697,305
|
|
Other selling costs
|
50,682
|
44,740
|
21,708
|
18,334
|
60,700
|
196,164
|
|
Total variable costs
|
$740,550
|
$727,260
|
$481,990
|
$651,440
|
$608,020
|
$3,209,260
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 73,250
|
$ 54,740
|
$152,210
|
$292,660
|
$ 98,980
|
$ 671,840
|
|
Less total fixed costs
|
97,250
|
81,240
|
89,610
|
100,460
|
82,680
|
451,240
|
|
Operating income loss
|
($ 24,000)
|
($ 26,500)
|
$ 62,600
|
$192,200
|
$ 16,300
|
$ 220,600
|
|
Direct fixed costs included
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in total fixed costs above
|
$ 51,200
|
$ 65,100
|
$ 49,400
|
$ 69,100
|
$ 58,800
|
$ 293,600
|
Projected data for the three proposed new books are as follows: Book P, sales, $450,000, and contribution margin, $45,000; Book T, sales, $725,000, and contribution margin, ($25,200); Book R, sales, $913,200, and contribution margin, $115,500. Projected direct fixed costs are Book P, $5,000; Book T, $6,000; Book R, $40,000.
Required
1. Analyze the performance of the five books that the company is currently publishing.
2. Should Naib Publishing Company eliminate any of its present products? If so, which one(s)?
3. Identify the new books you would use to replace those eliminated. Justify your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Decision
P 9. Dr. Massy, who specializes in internal medicine, wants to analyze his sales mix to find out how the time of his physician assistant, Consuela Ortiz, can be used to generate the highest operating income.
Ortiz sees patients in Dr. Massy’s office, consults with patients over the telephone, and conducts a daily weight-loss support group attended by up to 50 patients. Statistics for the three services are as follows:
|
Office Visits
|
Phone Calls
|
Weight-Loss Support Group
|
|
Maximum number of patient
|
|
|
|
|
billings per day
|
20
|
40
|
50
|
|
Hours per billing
|
0.25
|
0.10
|
1.0
|
|
Billing rate
|
$50
|
$25
|
$10
|
|
Variable costs
|
$25
|
$12
|
$5
|
Ortiz works seven hours a day.
Required
1. Determine the best sales mix. Rank the services offered in order of their profitability.
2. Based on the ranking in requirement 1, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? (Hint: Remember to consider the maximum number of patient billings per day.) What would be the daily total contribution margin generated by Ortiz?
3. Dr. Massy knows that the daily 60-minute meeting of the weight-loss support group has 50 patients and should continue to be offered. If the new ranking for the services is (1) weight-loss support group, (2) phone calls, and (3) office visits, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? What would be the total contribution margin generated by Ortiz, assuming the weight-loss support group has the maximum number of patient billings?
4. Which ranking would you recommend? What additional amount of total contribution margin would be generated if your recommendation were to be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sell or Process-Further Decision
P 10. Marketeers, Inc., developed a promotional program for a large shopping center in Sunset Living, Arizona, a few years ago. Having invested $360,000 in developing the original promotion campaign, the firm is ready to present its client with an add-on contract offer that includes the original promotion areas of (1) a TV advertising campaign, (2) a series of brochures for mass mailing, and (3) a special rotating BIG SALE schedule for 10 of the 28 tenants in the shopping center. Presented below are the revenue terms from the original contract with the shopping center and the offer for the add-on contract, which extends the original contract terms.
|
Original Contract Terms
|
Extended Contract Including
Add-On Terms
|
|
TV advertising campaign
|
$520,000
|
$ 580,000
|
|
Brochure series
|
210,000
|
230,000
|
|
Rotating BIG SALE schedule
|
170,000
|
190,000
|
|
Totals
|
$900,000
|
$1,000,000
|
Marketeers, Inc., estimates that the following additional costs will be incurred by extending the contract:
|
TV Campaign
|
Brochures
|
BIG SALE Schedule
|
|
Direct labor
|
$30,000
|
$ 9,000
|
$7,000
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
22,000
|
14,000
|
6,000
|
|
Fixed overhead costs*
|
12,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
Required
1. Compute the costs that will be incurred for each part of the add-on portion of the contract.
2. Should Marketeers, Inc., offer the add-on contract, or should it ask for a final settlement check based on the original contract only? Defend your answer.
3. If management of the shopping center indicates that the terms of the add-on contract are negotiable, how should Marketeers, Inc., respond?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Defining and Identifying Relevant Information
C 1. Bob’s Burgers is in the fast-food restaurant business. One component of its marketing strategy is to increase sales by expanding in foreign markets. It uses both financial and nonfinancial quantitative and qualitative information when deciding whether to open restaurants abroad. Bob’s decided to open a restaurant in Prague (Czech Republic) five years ago. The following information helped the managers in making that decision:
Financial Quantitative Information
Operating information
Estimated food, labor, and other operating costs (e.g., taxes, insurance, utilities, and supplies)
Estimated selling price for each food item
Capital investment information
Cost of land, building, equipment, and furniture
Financing options and amounts
Nonfinancial Quantitative Information
Estimated daily number of customers, hamburgers to be sold, and number of employees
High-traffic time periods
Income of people living in the area
Ratio of population to number of restaurants in the market area
Traffic counts in front of similar restaurants in the area
Qualitative Information
Government regulations, taxes, duties, tariffs, political involvement in business operations
Property ownership restrictions
Site visibility
Accessibility of store location
Training process for local managers
Hiring process for employees
Local customs and practices
Bob’s Burgers has hired you as a consultant and given you an income statement comparing the operating incomes of its five restaurants in Eastern Europe.
You have noticed that the Prague location is operating at a loss (including
Un-allocated fixed costs) and must decide whether to recommend closing that restaurant.
Review the information used in making the decision to open the restaurant.
Identify the types of information that would also be relevant in deciding whether to close the restaurant. What period or periods of time should be reviewed in making your decision? What additional information would be relevant in making your decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying Relevant Decision Information
C 2. Select two destinations for a one-week vacation, and gather information about them from brochures, magazines, travel agents, the Internet, and friends. Then list the relevant quantitative and qualitative information in order of its importance to your decision. Analyze the information, and select a destination.
Which factors were most important to your decision? Why? Which were least important? Why? How would the process of identifying relevant information differ if the president of your company asked you to prepare a budget for the next training meeting, to be held at a location of your choice?
Your instructor will divide the class into groups and ask each group to discuss this case. One student from each group will summarize his or her group’s findings and debrief the entire class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics of a Make-or-Buy Decision
C 3. Tilly Issac is the assistant controller for Tagwell Corporation, a leading producer of home appliances. Her friend Zack Marsh is the supervisor of the firm’s Cookware Department. Marsh has the authority to decide whether parts are purchased from outside vendors or manufactured in his department. Issac recently conducted an internal audit of the parts being manufactured in the Cookware Department, including a comparison of the prices currently charged by vendors for similar parts. She found more than a dozen parts that could be purchased for less than they cost the company to produce. When she approached Marsh about the situation, he replied that if those parts were purchased from outside vendors, two automated machines would be idle for several hours a week. Increased machine idle time would have a negative effect on his performance evaluation and could reduce his yearly bonus. He reminded Issac that he was in charge of the decision to make or purchase those parts and asked her not to pursue the matter any further.
What should Issac do in this situation? Discuss her options.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
C 4. Metallica Can Opener Company is a subsidiary of Maltz Appliances, Inc. The can opener that Metallica produces is in strong demand. Sales this year are expected to be 1,000,000 units. Full plant capacity is 1,150,000 units, but 1,000,000 units are considered normal capacity for the current year. The following unit price and cost breakdown is applicable:
|
Per Unit
|
|
Sales price
|
$22.50
|
|
Less manufacturing costs
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 6.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
2.50
|
|
Overhead, variable
|
3.50
|
|
Overhead, fixed
|
1.50
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$13.50
|
|
Gross margin
|
$ 9.00
|
|
Less selling and administrative expenses
|
|
|
Selling, variable
|
$ 1.50
|
|
Selling, fixed
|
1.00
|
|
Administrative, fixed
|
1.25
|
|
Packaging, variable*
|
0.75
|
|
Total selling and administrative expenses
|
$ 4.50
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 4.50
|
*Three types of packaging are available: deluxe, $0.75 per unit; plain, $0.50 per unit; and bulk pack, $0.25 per unit.
During November, the company received three requests for special orders from large chain-store companies. Those orders are not part of the budgeted 1,000,000 units for this year, but company officials think that sufficient capacity exists for one order to be accepted. Orders received and their terms are as follows: Order 1, 75,000 can openers @ $20.00 per unit, deluxe packaging; Order 2, 90,000 can openers @ $18.00 per unit, plain packaging; Order 3, 125,000 can openers @ $15.75 per unit, bulk packaging.
Because the orders were placed directly with company officials, no variable selling costs will be incurred
1. Analyze the profitability of each of the three special orders.
2. Which special order should be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision to Add a New Department
C 5. The management at Transco Company is considering a proposal to install a third production department in its factory building. With the company’s existing production setup, direct materials are processed through the Mixing Department to produce Materials A and B in equal proportions. The Shaping Department then processes Material A to yield Product C. Material B is sold as is at $20.25 per pound. Product C has a selling price of $100.00 per pound. There is a proposal to add a Baking Department to process Material B into Product D. It is expected that any quantity of Product D can be sold for $30.00 per pound.
Costs per pound under this proposal appear at the top of the next page.
|
Mixing Department
(Materials A and B)
|
Shaping Department
(Product C)
|
Baking Department
(Product D)
|
|
Costs from Mixing
|
|
|
|
|
Department
|
—
|
$52.80
|
$13.20
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20.00
|
—
|
—
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.00
|
9.00
|
3.50
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4.00
|
8.00
|
4.00
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Traceable (direct,
|
|
|
|
|
avoidable)
|
2.25
|
2.25
|
1.80
|
|
Allocated (common,
|
|
|
|
|
unavoidable)
|
0.75
|
0.75
|
0.75
|
|
$33.00
|
$72.80
|
$23.25
|
1. If (a) sales and production levels are expected to remain constant in the foreseeable future and (b) there are no foreseeable alternative uses for the factory space, should Transco Company add a Baking Department and produce Product D, if 100,000 pounds of D can be sold? Show calculations of incremental revenues and costs to support your answer.
2. List at least two qualitative reasons why Transco Company may not want to install a Baking Department and produce Product D, even if this decision appears profitable.
3. List at least two qualitative reasons why Transco Company may want to install a Baking Department and produce Product D, even if it appears that this decision is unprofitable. (CMA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricing Policy Objectives
E 1. Old Denim, Ltd., is an international clothing company that retails medium priced goods. Its retail outlets are located throughout the United States, France, Germany, and Great Britain. Management wants to maintain the company’s image of providing the highest possible quality at the lowest possible prices. Selling prices are developed to draw customers away from competitors’ stores. First of- the-month sales are regularly held at all stores, and customers are accustomed to this practice. Company buyers are carefully trained to seek out quality goods at inexpensive prices. Sales are targeted to increase a minimum of 5 percent per year. All sales should yield a 15 percent return on assets. Sales personnel are expected to wear Old Denim clothing while working, and all personnel can purchase clothing at 10 percent above cost. All stores are required to be clean and well organized. Competitors’ prices are checked daily. Identify the pricing policy objectives of Old Denim, Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
External and Internal Pricing Factors
E 2. Mobile Battery features more than a dozen brands of batteries in many sizes. Two of the brands are Power Plus and Super Power. The following information about the two brands was obtained:
|
Power Plus
|
Super Power
|
|
Selling price:
|
|
|
|
Battery, installed
|
$120
|
$110
|
|
Cost per battery
|
100
|
70
|
As shown, selling prices include installation costs. Each battery costs $10 to install.
1. Compute each brand’s net unit selling price after installation.
2. Was cost the main consideration in setting those prices?
3. What other factors could have influenced those prices?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Traditional Economic Pricing Theory
E 3. Texaza, a product design firm, has just completed a contract to develop a wireless phone keychain. The phone keychain needs to be recharged only once a week and can be used worldwide. Initial fixed costs for this product are $4,000. The designers estimate that the product will break even at the $5,000/100-unit mark. Total revenues will again equal total costs at the $25,000/900-unit point. Marginal cost is expected to equal marginal revenue when 550 units are sold.
1. Sketch total revenue and total cost curves for this product. Mark the vertical axis at each $5,000 increment and the horizontal axis at each 100-unit increment.
2. Based on your total revenue and total cost curves in 1, at what unit selling price will profits be maximized?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Price Determination
E 5. Turley Industries has just patented a new toothpaste called Sparkle for lasting protection against tooth decay. The company’s controller has developed the following annual information for use in price determination meetings:
|
Variable production costs
|
$ 900,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
500,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
200,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
125,000
|
|
Desired profit
|
375,000
|
|
Cost of assets employed
|
1,000,000
|
Annual demand for the product is expected to be 500,000 tubes. On average, the company now earns an 8 percent return on assets.
1. Compute the projected unit cost for one tube of Sparkle.
2. Using gross margin pricing, compute the markup percentage and selling price for one tube.
3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the unit price for one tube.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricing a Service
E 6. Texas has just passed a law making it mandatory to have every head of cattle inspected at least once a year for a variety of communicable diseases. Big Springs Enterprises is considering entering this inspection business. After extensive studies, Tex Autry, the owner of Big Springs Enterprises, has developed the following annual projections:
|
Direct service labor
|
$525,000
|
|
Variable service overhead costs
|
250,000
|
|
Fixed service overhead costs
|
225,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
142,500
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
157,500
|
|
Minimum desired profit
|
120,000
|
|
Cost of assets employed
|
750,000
|
Autry believes his company could inspect 250,000 head of cattle per year. On average, the company now earns a 16 percent return on assets.
1. Compute the projected cost of inspecting each head of cattle.
2. Determine the price to charge for inspecting each head of cattle. Use gross margin pricing.
3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the unit price to charge for this inspection service.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost-based Pricing
E 7. Hometown Bank is determining the price for its newest mini debit card. The card can be used at any retail outlet with a swipe reader and is small enough to attach to a key chain—no PIN number or signature is required. Sigrid Olmo has developed the following annual information for use in upcoming price determination meetings:
|
Variable processing costs
|
$50 million
|
|
Fixed processing costs
|
36 million
|
|
Selling expenses (fixed)
|
10 million
|
|
General and administrative expenses (fixed)
|
4 million
|
|
Desired profit
|
3 billion
|
|
Cost of assets employed
|
10 billion
|
Annual usage is expected to be 10 billion transactions. On average, the company now earns a 6 percent return on assets.
1. Compute the projected cost of one transaction.
2. Using gross margin pricing, compute the price to charge per transaction.
3. Using return on assets pricing, compute the price to charge per transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Time and Materials Pricing
E 9. Cruz’s Home Remodeling Service specializes in refurbishing older homes. Last week Cruz was asked to bid on a remodeling job for the town’s mayor. His list of materials and labor needed to complete the job is as follows:
|
Materials
|
Labor
|
|
Lumber
|
$ 6,500
|
Carpenter
|
$2,000
|
|
Nails/bolts
|
160
|
Floor specialist
|
1,300
|
|
Paint
|
1,420
|
Painter
|
1,500
|
|
Glass
|
2,890
|
Supervisor
|
1,420
|
|
Doors
|
730
|
Helpers
|
1,680
|
|
Hardware
|
600
|
Total
|
$7,900
|
|
Supplies
|
400
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$12,700
|
|
|
The company uses an overhead markup percentage for materials (60 percent) and for labor (40 percent). Those markups cover all operating costs. In addition, Cruz expects to make at least a 25 percent profit on all jobs. Compute the price that Cruz should quote for the mayor’s job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Target Costing
E 12. Suppose that Ikea, the Swedish retailer, is developing a new chair targeted to sell for less than $100 and that it is considering the two production alternatives that follow. Rank the alternatives, assuming that the company’s minimum desired profit is 30 percent over total production costs.
|
Alternative A
|
Alternative B
|
|
Direct material costs
|
$35
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
1 hour at $12 per hour
|
2 hours at $8 per hour
|
|
Overhead costs
|
200 percent of direct
labor costs
|
$2 per dollar of direct
materials
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Target Costing E 13. Management at Fox Valley Machine Tool Co. is considering the development of a new automated drill press called the AutoDrill. After conferring with the design engineers, the controller”s staff assembled the following data about this product: Target selling price $6,000 per unit Desired profit percentage 20% of total unit cost Projected unit demand 4,500 units Activity-based cost rates Materials handling 5% of direct materials and purchased parts cost Engineering $300 per unit for Auto Drill Production and assembly $50 per machine hour Delivery $570 per unit for Auto Drill Marketing $400 per unit for Auto Drill Per-unit data Direct materials cost $1,620 Purchased parts cost $200 Manufacturing labor Hours 6 Hourly labor rate $14 Assembly labor Hours 10 Hourly labor rate $15 Machine hours 30 1. Compute the product”s target cost. 2. Compute the product”s projected unit cost based on the design engineers” estimates. 3. Should management produce and market the Auto Drill? Defend your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transfer Price Comparison
E 14. Mary Janus is developing a transfer price for the housing section of an automatic pool-cleaning device. The housing for the device is made in Department A. It is then passed on to Department D, where final assembly occurs. Unit costs for the housing are as follows:
|
Cost Categories
|
Unit Costs
|
|
Direct materials
|
$5.20
|
|
Direct labor
|
2.30
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.30
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
2.60
|
|
Profit markup, 20% of cost
|
?
|
An outside vendor can supply the housing for $13.00 per unit.
1. Develop a cost-plus transfer price for the housing.
2. What should the transfer price be? Support your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transfer Pricing
E 15. Patch Watch Company’s Seconds Store offers refurbished or factory seconds time-keeping products to the public at substantially reduced prices. The factory controller is developing transfer price alternatives to present to management to determine the best price to use when transferring products from the factory to the store, using the following data:
|
Unit price if sold to outside retailers
|
$25
|
|
Variable product cost per unit
|
10
|
|
Fixed product cost per unit
|
5
|
|
Seconds store profit markup
|
40%
|
1. What is the market-based transfer price alternative?
2. What is the minimum transfer price alternative?
3. Compute the cost-plus transfer price alternative assuming cost includes variable costs only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricing Decision
P 1. Ed Vetz & Company specializes in the assembly of home appliances. One division focuses most of its efforts on assembling a standard toaster oven. Projected costs of this product are as follows:
|
Cost Description
|
Budgeted Costs
|
|
Toaster casings
|
$ 960,000
|
|
Electrical components
|
2,244,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
3,648,000
|
|
Variable indirect assembly costs
|
780,000
|
|
Fixed indirect assembly costs
|
1,740,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
1,536,000
|
|
General operating expenses
|
840,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
816,000
|
The projected costs are based on an estimated demand of 600,000 toaster ovens per year. The company wants to make a $1,260,000 profit. Competitors have just published their wholesale prices for the coming year. They range from $21.60 to $22.64 per oven. The Vetz toaster oven is known for its high quality and modern look. It competes with products at the top end of the price range. Even with its reputation, however, every $.20 increase above the top competitor’s price causes a drop in demand of 60,000 units below the original estimate. Assume that all price changes are in $.20 increments.
Required
1. Prepare a schedule of total projected costs and unit costs.
2. Use gross margin pricing to compute the anticipated selling price.
3. Based on competitors’ prices, what should the Vetz toaster sell for (assume a constant unit cost)? Defend your answer.
4. Would your pricing structure in requirement 3 change if the company had only limited competition at its quality level? If so, in what direction? Explain why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Decision
SE 8. Snow, Inc., makes three kinds of snowboards, but it has a limited number of machine hours available to make them. Product line data are as follows:
|
Wood
|
Plastic
|
Graphite
|
|
Machine hours per unit
|
1.25
|
1.0
|
1.5
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$100
|
$120
|
$200
|
|
Variable manufacturing cost per unit
|
$45
|
$50
|
$100
|
|
Variable selling costs per unit
|
$15
|
$26
|
$36
|
In what order should the snowboard product lines be produced?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sell or Process-Further Decision
SE 10. In an attempt to provide superb customer service, Richard V. Meats is considering the expansion of its product offerings from whole hams and turkeys to complete ham and turkey dinners. Each dinner would include a carved ham or turkey, two side dishes, and six rolls or cornbread. The accountant for Richard V. Meats has compiled the following relevant information:
|
Sales Revenue if No Additional
|
Sales Revenue
if Processed
|
Additional
Processing
|
|
Product
|
Service
|
Further
|
Costs
|
|
Ham
|
$30
|
$50
|
$15
|
|
Turkey
|
20
|
35
|
15
|
A cooked, uncarved ham costs Richard V. Meats $20 to produce, and a cooked, un-carved turkey costs $15 to prepare. Use incremental analysis to determine which products Richard V. Meats should offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Incremental Analysis
E 1. Max Wayco, the business manager for Essey Industries, must select a new computer system for his assistant. Rental of Model A, which is similar to the model now being used, is $2,200 per year. Model B is a deluxe system that rents for $2,900 per year and will require a new desk for the assistant. The annual desk rental charge is $750. The assistant’s salary of $1,200 per month will not change. If Model B is rented, $280 in annual software training costs will be incurred. Model B has greater capacity and is expected to save $1,550 per year in part-time wages. Upkeep and operating costs will not differ between the two models.
1. Identify the relevant data in this problem.
2. Prepare an incremental analysis to aid the business manager in his decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Incremental Analysis
E 2. The managers of Lennox Company must decide which of two mill blade grinders—Y or Z—to buy. The grinders have the same purchase price but different revenue and cost characteristics. The company currently owns Grinder X, which it bought three years ago for $15,000 and which has accumulated depreciation of $9,000 and a book value of $6,000. Grinder X is now obsolete as a result of advances in technology and cannot be sold or traded in.
The accountant has collected the following annual revenue and operating cost estimates for the two new machines:
|
Grinder Y
|
Grinder Z
|
|
Increase in revenue
|
$16,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Increase in annual operating costs
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
4,800
|
4,800
|
|
Direct labor
|
3,000
|
4,100
|
|
Variable overhead
|
2,100
|
3,000
|
|
Fixed overhead (depreciation included)
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
1. Identify the relevant data in this problem.
2. Prepare an incremental analysis to aid the managers in their decision.
3. Should the company purchase Grinder Y or Grinder Z?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
E 5. Antiquities, Ltd., produces antique-looking books. Management has just received a request for a special order for 2,000 books and must decide whether to accept it. Venus Company, the purchaser, is offering to pay $25.00 per book, which includes $3.00 per book for shipping costs.
The variable production costs per book include $9.20 for direct materials, $4.00 for direct labor, and $3.80 for variable overhead. The current year’s production is 22,000 books, and maximum capacity is 25,000 books. Fixed costs, including overhead, advertising, and selling and administrative costs, total $80,000. The usual selling price is $25.00 per book. Shipping costs, which are additional, average $3.00 per book.
Determine whether Antiquities should accept the special order.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
E 6. Jens Sporting Goods, Inc., manufactures a complete line of sporting equipment. Leiden Enterprises operates a large chain of discount stores. Leiden has approached Jens with a special order for 30,000 deluxe baseballs. Instead of being packaged separately, the balls are to be packed in boxes containing 500 baseballs each. Leiden is willing to pay $2.45 per baseball. Jens knows that annual expected production is 400,000 baseballs. It also knows that the current year’s production is 410,000 baseballs and that the maximum production capacity is 450,000 baseballs.
The following additional information is available:
|
Standard unit cost data for 400,000 baseballs
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 0.90
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.60
|
|
Overhead:
|
|
|
Variable
|
0.50
|
|
Fixed ($100,000 ÷400,000)
|
0.25
|
|
Packaging per unit
|
0.30
|
|
Advertising ($60,000÷400,000)
|
0.15
|
|
Other fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
|
|
($120,000÷400,000)
|
0.30
|
|
Product unit cost
|
$ 3.00
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$ 4.00
|
|
Total estimated bulk packaging costs for special order
|
|
|
(30,000 baseballs: 500 per box)
|
$2,500
|
1. Should Jens Sporting Goods, Inc., accept Leiden’s offer?
2. What would be the minimum order price per baseball if Jens would like to earn a profit of $3,000 from the special order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elimination of Unprofitable Segment Decision
E 8. Guld’s Glass, Inc., has three divisions: Commercial, Nonprofit, and Residential. The segmented income statement for last year revealed the following:
|
Guld’s Glass, Inc.
Divisional Profit Summary and Decision Analysis
|
|
Commercial
Division
|
Nonprofit
Division
|
Residential
Division
|
Total
Company
|
|
Sales
|
$290,000
|
$ 533,000
|
$837,000
|
$1,660,000
|
|
Less variable costs
|
147,000
|
435,000
|
472,000
|
1,054,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$143,000
|
$ 98,000
|
$365,000
|
$ 606,000
|
|
Less direct fixed costs
|
124,000
|
106,000
|
139,000
|
369,000
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ 19,000
|
($ 8,000)
|
$226,000
|
$ 237,000
|
|
Less common fixed costs
|
|
|
|
168,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
|
|
$ 69,000
|
1. How will Guld’s Glass be affected if the Nonprofit Division is dropped?
2. Assume the elimination of the Nonprofit Division causes the sales of the Residential Division to decrease by 10 percent. How will Guld’s Glass be affected if the Nonprofit Division is dropped?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elimination of Unprofitable Segment Decision
E 9. URL Services has two divisions: Basic Web Pages and Custom Web Pages. Ricky Vega, manager of Custom Web Pages, wants to find out why Custom Web Pages is not profitable. He has prepared the reports that appear on the next page.
1. How will URL Services be affected if the Custom Web Pages Division is eliminated?
2. How will URL Services be affected if the Design segment of Custom Web Pages is eliminated?
3. What should Ricky Vega do? What additional information would be helpful to him in making the decision?
|
URL Services
Segmented Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Basic
Web Pages (1,000 units)
|
Custom
Web Pages
(200 units)
|
Total
Company
|
|
Service revenue
|
$200,000
|
$ 150,000
|
$350,000
|
|
Less variable costs
|
|
|
|
|
Direct professional labor:
|
|
|
|
|
Direct professional labor:
|
$ 32,000
|
$ 80,000
|
$112,000
|
|
Direct professional labor:
|
30,000
|
4,000
|
34,000
|
|
maintain
|
15,000
|
36,000
|
51,000
|
|
Total variable costs
|
$ 77,000
|
$ 120,000
|
$197,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$123,000
|
$ 30,000
|
$153,000
|
|
Less direct fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation on computer
|
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
$ 6,000
|
$ 12,000
|
$ 18,000
|
|
Depreciation on servers
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
|
Total direct fixed costs
|
$ 16,000
|
$ 32,000
|
$ 48,000
|
|
Segment margin
|
$107,000
|
($ 2,000)
|
$105,000
|
|
Less common fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
Building rent
|
|
|
$ 24,000
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
1,000
|
|
Insurance
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
Telephone
|
|
|
1,500
|
|
Website rental
|
|
|
500
|
|
Total common fixed costs
|
|
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
|
$ 75,000
|
|
Custom Web Pages Division
URL Services
Segment Profitability Decision
Incremental Analysis
|
|
Design
|
Install
|
Maintain
|
Total
|
|
Service revenue
|
$60,000
|
$25,000
|
$65,000
|
$150,000
|
|
Less variable costs
|
80,000
|
4,000
|
36,000
|
120,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
($20,000)
|
$21,000
|
$29,000
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Less direct fixed costs
|
6,000
|
13,000
|
13,000
|
32,000
|
|
Segment margin
|
($26,000)
|
$ 8,000
|
$16,000
|
($ 2,000)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scarce Resource Usage
E 10. EZ, Inc. manufactures two products that require both machine processing and labor operations. Although there is unlimited demand for both products, EZ could devote all its capacities to a single product. Unit prices, cost data, and processing requirements follow.
|
Product E
|
Product Z
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$70
|
$230
|
|
Unit variable costs
|
$30
|
$90
|
|
Machine hours per unit
|
0.4
|
1.4
|
|
Labor hours per unit
|
2.0
|
6.0
|
Next year, the company will be limited to 160,000 machine hours and 120,000 labor hours. Fixed costs for the year are $1,500,000.
1. Compute the most profitable combination of products to be produced next year.
2. Prepare an income statement using the contribution margin format for the product volume computed in 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Decision
E 11. Grady Enterprises manufactures three computer games. They are called Rising Star, Ghost Master, and Road Warrior. The product line data are as follows:
|
Rising Star
|
Ghost Master
|
Road Warrior
|
|
Current unit sales demand
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
18,000
|
|
Machine hours per unit
|
2.0
|
1.0
|
2.5
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$24.00
|
$18.00
|
$32.00
|
|
Unit variable manufacturing costs
|
$12.50
|
$10.00
|
$18.75
|
|
Unit variable selling costs
|
$6.50
|
$5.00
|
$6.25
|
The current production capacity is 110,000 machine hours.
1. Which computer game should be manufactured first? Which should be manufactured second? Which last?
2. How many of each type of computer game should be manufactured and sold to maximize the company’s contribution margin based on the current production activity of 110,000 machine hours? What is the total contribution margin for that combination?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Decision
E 12. Web Services, a small company owned by Simon Orozco, provides web page services to small businesses. His services include the preparation of basic pages and custom pages.
The following summary of information will be used to make several short-run decisions for Web Services:
|
Basic Pages
|
Custom Pages
|
|
Service revenue per page
|
$200
|
$750
|
|
Variable costs per page
|
77
|
600
|
|
Contribution margin per page
|
$123
|
$150
|
Total annual fixed costs are $78,000.
One of Web Services’ two graphic designers, Taylor Campbell, is planning to take maternity leave in July and August. As a result, there will be only one designer available to perform the work, and design labor hours will be a resource constraint. Orozco plans to help the other designer complete the projected 160 orders for basic pages and 30 orders for custom pages for those two months. However, he wants to know which type of page Web Services should advertise and market. Although custom pages have a higher contribution margin per service, each custom page requires 12.5 design hours, whereas basic pages require only 1 design hour per page. On which page type should his company focus? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sell or Process-Further Decision
E 13. H & L Beef Products, Inc., processes cattle. It can sell the meat as sides of beef or process it further into final cuts (steaks, roasts, and hamburger). As part of the company’s strategic plan, management is looking for new markets for meat or meat by-products. The production process currently separates hides and bones for sale to other manufacturers. However, management is considering whether it would be profitable to process the hides into leather and the bones into fertilizer. The costs of the cattle and of transporting, hanging, storing, and cutting sides of beef are $125,000. The company’s accountant provided these data:
|
Product
|
Sales Revenue if Sold at Split-Off
|
Sales Revenue if Sold After
Further Processing
|
Additional
Processing Costs
|
|
Meat
|
$100,000
|
$200,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Bones
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
15,000
|
|
Hides
|
50,000
|
55,000
|
10,000
|
Should the products be processed further? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sell or Process-Further Decision
E 14. Six Star Pizza manufactures frozen pizzas and calzones and sells them for $4 each. It is currently considering a proposal to manufacture and sell fully prepared products. The following relevant information has been gathered by management:
|
Product
|
Sales Revenue if No
Additional Processing
|
Sales Revenue if
Processed Further
|
Additional
Processing Costs
|
|
Pizza
|
$4
|
$ 8
|
$5
|
|
Calzone
|
4
|
10
|
5
|
Use incremental analysis to determine which products Six Star should offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Outsourcing Decision
P 1. Stainless Refrigerator Company purchases ice makers and installs them in its products. The ice makers cost $138 per case, and each case contains 12 ice makers. The supplier recently gave advance notice that the price will rise by 50 percent immediately. Stainless Refrigerator Company has idle equipment that with only a few minor changes could be used to produce similar ice makers.
Cost estimates have been prepared under the assumption that the company could make the product itself. Direct materials would cost $100.80 per 12 ice makers. Direct labor required would be 10 minutes per ice maker at a labor rate of $18.00 per hour. Variable overhead would be $4.60 per ice maker. Fixed overhead, which would be incurred under either decision alternative, would be $32,420 a year for depreciation and $234,000 a year for other costs. Production and usage are estimated at 75,000 ice makers a year. (Assume that any idle equipment cannot be used for any other purpose.)
Required
1. Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether the ice makers should be made within the company or purchased from the outside supplier at the higher price.
2. Compute the variable unit cost to (a) make one ice maker and (b) buy one ice maker.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
P 2. On March 26, Sinker Industries received a special order request for 120 ten-foot aluminum fishing boats. Operating on a fiscal year ending May 31, the company already has orders that will allow it to produce at budget levels for the period. However, extra capacity exists to produce the 120 additional boats. The terms of the special order call for a selling price of $675 per boat, and the customer will pay all shipping costs. No sales personnel were involved in soliciting the order.
The ten-foot fishing boat has the following cost estimates: direct materials, aluminum, two 4
8 sheets at $155 per sheet; direct labor, 14 hours at $15.00 per hour; variable overhead, $7.25 per direct labor hour; fixed overhead, $4.50 per direct labor hour; variable selling expenses, $46.50 per boat; and variable shipping expenses, $57.50 per boat.
Required
1. Prepare an analysis for the management of Sinker Industries to use in deciding whether to accept or reject the special order. What decision should be made?
2. To make an $8,000 profit on this order, what would be the lowest possible price that Sinker Industries could charge per boat?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Segment Profitability Decision
P 3. Sports, Inc., is a nationwide distributor of sporting equipment. The corporate president, Wesley Coldwell, is dissatisfied with corporate operating results, particularly those of the Spring Branch, and has asked the controller for more information. The controller prepared the following segmented income statement (in thousands of dollars) for the Spring Branch:
|
Sports, Inc., Spring Branch
Segmented Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31
(Amounts in Thousands)
|
|
Football Line
|
Baseball Line
|
Basketball Line
|
Spring Branch
|
|
Sales
|
$3,500
|
$2,500
|
$2,059
|
$8,059
|
|
Less variable costs
|
2,900
|
2,395
|
1,800
|
7,095
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 600
|
$ 105
|
$ 259
|
$ 964
|
|
Less direct fixed costs
|
300
|
150
|
159
|
609
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ 300
|
($ 45)
|
$ 100
|
$ 355
|
|
Less common fixed costs
|
|
|
|
450
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
|
|
|
($ 95)
|
Coldwell is considering adding a new product line, Kite Surfing. The controller estimates that adding this line to the Spring Branch will increase sales by $300,000, variable costs by $150,000, and direct fixed costs by $20,000. The new product line will have no effect on common fixed costs.
Required
1. How will operating income be affected if the Baseball line is dropped?
2. How will operating income be affected if the Baseball line is kept and a Kite Surfing line is added?
3. If the Baseball line is dropped and the Kite Surfing line is added, sales of the Football line will decrease by 10 percent and sales of the Basketball line will decrease by 5 percent. How will those changes affect operating income?
4. What decision do you recommend? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Decision
P 4. Management at Generic Chemical Company is evaluating its product mix in an attempt to maximize profits. For the past two years, Generic has produced four products, and all have large markets in which to expand market share. Heinz Bexer, Generic’s controller, has gathered data from current operations and wants you to analyze them for him. Sales and operating data are as follows:
|
Product AZ1
|
Product BY7
|
Product CX5
|
Product DW9
|
|
Variable production costs
|
$71,000
|
$91,000
|
$91,920
|
$97,440
|
|
Variable selling costs
|
$10,200
|
$5,400
|
$12,480
|
$30,160
|
|
Fixed production costs
|
$20,400
|
$21,600
|
$29,120
|
$18,480
|
|
Fixed administrative costs
|
$3,400
|
$5,400
|
$6,240
|
$10,080
|
|
Total sales
|
$122,000
|
$136,000
|
$156,400
|
$161,200
|
|
Units produced and sold
|
85,000
|
45,000
|
26,000
|
14,000
|
|
Machine hours used*
|
17,000
|
18,000
|
20,800
|
16,800
|
Required
1. Compute the machine hours needed to produce one unit of each product.
2. Determine the contribution margin per machine hour for each product.
3. Which product line(s) should be targeted for market share expansion?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sell or Process-Further Decision
P 5. Bagels, Inc., produces and sells 20 types of bagels by the dozen. Bagels are priced at $6.00 per dozen (or $0.50 each) and cost $0.20 per unit to produce. The company is considering processing the bagels further into two products: bagels with cream cheese and bagel sandwiches. It would cost an additional $0.50 per unit to produce bagels with cream cheese, and the new selling price would be $2.50 each. It would cost an additional $1.00 per sandwich to produce bagel sandwiches, and the new selling price would be $3.50 each.
Required
1. Identify the relevant per unit costs and revenues for the alternatives. Are there any sunk costs?
2. Based on the information in requirement 1, should Bagels, Inc., expand its product offerings?
3. Suppose that Bagels, Inc., did expand its product line to include bagels with cream cheese and bagel sandwiches. Based on customer feedback, the company determined that it could further process those two products into bagels with cream cheese and fruit and bagel sandwiches with cheese. The company’s accountant compiled the following information:
|
Product
(per unit)
|
Sales Revenue
if Sold with No
Further Processing
|
Sales Revenue
if Processed
Further
|
Additional
Processing
Costs
|
|
Bagels with
|
|
|
|
|
cream cheese
|
$2.50
|
$3.50
|
Fruit: $1.00
|
|
Bagel sandwiches
|
$3.50
|
$4.50
|
Cheese: $0.50
|
Perform an incremental analysis to determine if Bagels, Inc., should process its products further. Explain your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Outsourcing Decision
P 6. Three Brothers Restaurant purchases cheesecakes and offers them as dessert items on its menu. The cheesecakes cost $24 each, and a cake contains 8 pieces. The supplier recently gave advance notice that the price will rise by 20 percent immediately. Three Brothers Restaurant has idle equipment that with only a few minor changes could be used to produce similar cheesecakes.
Cost estimates have been prepared under the assumption that the company could make the product itself. Direct materials would cost $7.00 per cheesecake. Direct labor required would be 0.5 hour per cheesecake at a labor rate of $24.00 per hour. Variable overhead would be $9.00 per cheesecake. Fixed overhead, which would be incurred under either decision alternative, would be $35,200 a year for depreciation and $230,000 a year for other costs. Production and usage are estimated at 3,600 cheesecakes a year. (Assume that any idle equipment cannot be used for any other purpose.)
Required
1. Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether the cheesecakes should be made within the company or purchased from the outside supplier at the higher price.
2. Compute the variable unit cost to (a) make one cheesecake and (b) buy one cheesecake.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
P 7. Keystone Resorts, Ltd., has approached Crystal Printers, Inc., with a special order to produce 300,000 two-page brochures. Most of Crystal’s work consists of recurring short-run orders. Keystone Resorts is offering a one-time order, and Crystal has the capacity to handle the order over a two-month period. The management of Keystone Resorts has stated that the company would be unwilling to pay more than $48 per 1,000 brochures. Crystal Printers’ controller assembled the following cost data for this decision analysis: Direct materials (paper) would be $26.80 per 1,000 brochures; direct labor costs would be $6.80 per 1,000 brochures; direct materials (ink) would be $4.40 per 1,000 brochures; variable production overhead would be $6.20 per 1,000 brochures; machine maintenance (fixed cost) is $1.00 per direct labor dollar. Other fixed production overhead amounts to $2.40 per direct labor dollar. Variable packing costs would be $4.30 per 1,000 brochures. Also, the share of general and administrative expenses (fixed costs) to be allocated would be $5.25 per direct labor dollar.
Required
1. Prepare an analysis for Crystal Printers’ management to use in deciding whether to accept or reject Keystone Resorts’ offer. What decision should be made?
2. What is the lowest possible price Crystal Printers can charge per thousand and still make a $6,000 profit on the order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Outsourcing Decision
SE 3. Marc Company assembles products from a group of interconnecting parts. The company produces some of the parts and buys some from outside vendors. The vendor for Part X has just increased its price by 35 percent, to $10 per unit for the first 5,000 units and $9 per additional unit ordered each year. The company uses 7,500 units of Part X each year. Unit costs if the company makes the part are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$3.50
|
|
Direct labor
|
2.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4.00
|
|
Variable selling costs for the assembled product
|
3.75
|
Should Marc continue to purchase Part X or begin making it?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Order Decision
SE 6. Smith Accounting Services is considering a special order that it received from one of its corporate clients. The special order calls for Smith to prepare the individual tax returns of the corporation’s four-largest shareholders. The company has idle capacity that could be used to complete the special order. The following data have been gathered about the preparation of individual tax returns:
|
Materials cost per page
|
$1
|
|
Average hourly labor rate
|
$60
|
|
Standard hours per return
|
4
|
|
Standard pages per return
|
10
|
|
Variable overhead cost per page
|
$0.50
|
|
Fixed overhead cost per page
|
$0.50
|
Smith Accounting Services would be satisfied with a $40 gross profit per return. Compute the minimum bid price for the entire order.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing Standard Costs
E 2. Normal Corporation uses standard costing and is in the process of updating its direct materials and direct labor standards for Product 20B. The following data have been accumulated:
Direct materials In the previous period, 20,500 units were produced, and 32,800 square yards of direct materials at a cost of $122,344 were used to produce them.
Direct labor During the previous period, 57,400 direct labor hours were worked—34,850 hours on machine H and 22,550 hours on machine K. Machine H operators earned $9.40 per hour, and machine K operators earned $9.20 per hour last period. A new labor union contract calls for a 10 percent increase in labor rates for the coming period.
Using this information as the basis for the new standards, compute the direct materials quantity and price standards and the direct labor time and rate standards for each machine for the coming accounting period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing a Standard Unit Cost
E 3. Weather Aerodynamics, Inc., makes electronically equipped weather-detecting balloons for university meteorology departments. Because of recent nationwide inflation, the company’s management has ordered that standard costs be recomputed. New direct materials price standards are $700 per set for electronic components and $14.00 per square meter for heavy-duty canvas. Direct materials quantity standards include one set of electronic components and 100 square meters of heavy-duty canvas per balloon. Direct labor time standards are 26 hours per balloon for the Electronics Department and 21 hours per balloon for the Assembly Department. Direct labor rate standards are $21 per hour for the Electronics Department and $18 per hour for the Assembly Department. Standard overhead rates are $16 per direct labor hour for the standard variable overhead rate and $12 per direct labor hour for the standard fixed overhead rate. Using these production standards, compute the standard unit cost of one weather balloon.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and Using Standard Costs
P 1. Prefabricated houses are the specialty of Affordable Homes, Inc., of Corsicana, Texas. Although Affordable Homes produces many models, the company’s best-selling model is the Welcome Home, a three-bedroom, 1,400-square-foot house with an impressive front entrance. Last year, the standard costs for the six basic direct materials used in manufacturing the entrance were as follows:
wood framing materials, $2,140; deluxe front door, $480; door hardware, $260; exterior siding, $710; electrical materials, $580; and interior finishing materials, $1,520. Three types of direct labor are used to build the entrance: carpenter, 30 hours at $12 per hour; door specialist, 4 hours at $14 per hour; and electrician, 8 hours at $16 per hour. Last year, the company used an overhead rate of 40 percent of total direct materials cost.
This year, the cost of wood framing materials is expected to increase by 20 percent, and a deluxe front door will cost $496. The cost of the door hardware will increase by 10 percent, and the cost of electrical materials will increase by 20 percent. Exterior siding cost should decrease by $16 per unit. The cost of interior finishing materials is expected to remain the same. The carpenter’s wages will increase by $1 per hour, and the door specialist’s wages should remain the same. The electrician’s wages will increase by $0.50 per hour. Finally, the overhead rate will decrease to 25 percent of total direct materials cost.
Required
1. Compute the total standard cost of direct materials per entrance for last year.
2. Using your answer to requirement 1, compute the total standard unit cost per entrance for last year.
3. Compute the total standard unit cost per entrance for this year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a Flexible Budget and Evaluating Performance
P 2. Home Products Company manufactures a complete line of kitchen glassware. The Beverage Division specializes in 12-ounce drinking glasses. Erin Fisher, the superintendent of the Beverage Division, asked the controller to prepare a report of her division’s performance in April. The following report was handed to her a few days later:
|
Budgeted
|
Actual
|
Difference Under
|
|
Cost Category
|
Costs*
|
Costs
|
(Over) Budget
|
|
(Variable Unit Cost)
|
$ 5,000
|
$ 4,975
|
$ 25
|
|
Direct materials ($0.10)
|
6,000
|
5,850
|
150
|
|
Direct labor ($0.12)
|
|
|
|
|
Variable overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor ($0.03)
|
1,500
|
1,290
|
210
|
|
Supplies ($0.02)
|
1,000
|
960
|
40
|
|
Heat and power ($0.03)
|
1,500
|
1,325
|
175
|
|
Other ($0.05)
|
2,500
|
2,340
|
160
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Heat and power
|
3,500
|
3,500
|
—
|
|
Depreciation
|
4,200
|
4,200
|
—
|
|
Insurance and taxes
|
1,200
|
1,200
|
—
|
|
Other
|
1,600
|
1,600
|
—
|
|
Totals
|
$28,000
|
$27,240
|
$760
|
|
|
|
|
|
In discussing the report with the controller, Fisher stated, “Profits have been decreasing in recent months, but this report indicates that our production process is operating efficiently.”
Required
1. Prepare a flexible budget for the Beverage Division using production levels of 45,000 units, 50,000 units, and 55,000 units.
2. What is the flexible budget formula?
3. Assume that the Beverage Division produced 46,560 units in April and that all fixed costs remained constant. Prepare a revised performance report similar to the one above, using actual production in units as a basis for the budget column.
4. Which report is more meaningful for performance evaluation, the original one above or the revised one? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variances
P 3. Winners Trophy Company produces a variety of athletic awards, most of them in the form of trophies. Its deluxe trophy stands 3 feet tall above the base. The company’s direct materials standards for the deluxe trophy include 1 pound of metal and 8 ounces of wood for the base. Standard prices for the year were $3.30 per pound of metal and $0.45 per ounce of wood. Direct labor standards for the deluxe trophy specify 0.2 hour of direct labor in the Molding Department and 0.4 hour in the Trimming/Finishing Department. Standard direct labor rates are $10.75 per hour in the Molding Department and $12.00 per hour in the Trimming/Finishing Department. During January, the company made 16,400 deluxe trophies. Actual production data are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
Metal
|
16,640 pounds @ $3.25 per pound
|
|
Wood
|
131,400 ounces @ $0.48 per ounce
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
Molding
|
3,400 hours @ $10.60 per hour
|
|
Trimming Finishing
|
6,540 hours @ $12.10 per hour
|
Required
1. Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for metal and wood.
2. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for the Molding and the Trimming/Finishing Departments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead Variances
P 4. The Doormat Division of Clean Sweep Company produces all-vinyl mats. Each doormat calls for 0.4 meter of vinyl material; the material should cost $3.10 per meter. Standard direct labor hours and labor cost per doormat are 0.2 hour and $1.84 (0.2 hour×$9.20 per hour), respectively. Currently, the division’s standard variable overhead rate is $1.50 per direct labor hour, and its standard fixed overhead rate is $0.80 per direct labor hour.
In August, the division manufactured and sold 60,000 doormats. During the month, it used 25,200 meters of vinyl material; the total cost of the material was $73,080. The total actual overhead costs for August were $28,200, of which $18,200 was variable. The total number of direct labor hours worked was 10,800, and the factory payroll for direct labor for the month was $95,040. Budgeted fixed overhead for August was $9,280. Normal monthly capacity for the year was set at 58,000 doormats.
Required
1. Compute for August the (a) direct materials price variance, (b) direct materials quantity variance, (c) direct labor rate variance, (d) direct labor efficiency variance, (e) variable overhead spending variance, (f) variable overhead efficiency variance, (g) fixed overhead budget variance, and (h) fixed overhead volume variance.
2. Prepare a performance report based on your variance analysis, and suggest possible causes for each variance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead Variances
P 5. Celine Corporation’s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly cost variance report. George Celine, the corporation’s president, has asked you to complete the report. The following data are available to you (capacities are expressed in machine hours):
|
Actual machine hours
|
17,100
|
|
Standard machine hours allowed
|
17,500
|
|
Actual variable overhead
|
a
|
|
Standard variable overhead rate
|
$2.50
|
|
Variable overhead spending variance
|
$250 (F)
|
|
Variable overhead efficiency variance
|
b
|
|
Actual fixed overhead
|
c
|
|
Budgeted fixed overhead
|
$153,000
|
|
Fixed overhead budget variance
|
$1,300 (U)
|
|
Fixed overhead volume variance
|
$4,500 (F)
|
|
Normal capacity in machine hours
|
d
|
|
Standard fixed overhead rate
|
e
|
|
Fixed overhead applied
|
f
|
Required
Analyze the data and fill in the missing amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible Budgets and Performance Evaluation
P 7. Cassen Realtors, Inc., specializes in the sale of residential properties. It earns its revenue by charging a percentage of the sales price. Commissions for sales persons, listing agents, and listing companies are its main costs. Business has improved steadily over the last 10 years. Bonnie Cassen, the managing partner of Cassen Realtors, receives a report summarizing the company’s performance each year. The report for the most recent year appears below.
|
Cassen Realtors, Inc. Performance Report For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Budgeted*
|
Actual†
|
Difference Under (Over) Budget
|
|
Total selling fees
|
$2,052,000
|
$2,242,200
|
($190,200)
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
|
|
Sales commissions
|
$1,102,950
|
$1,205,183
|
($102,233)
|
|
Automobile
|
36,000
|
39,560
|
(3,560)
|
|
Advertising
|
93,600
|
103,450
|
(9,850)
|
|
Home repairs
|
77,400
|
89,240
|
(11,840)
|
|
General overhead
|
656,100
|
716,970
|
(60,870)
|
|
$1,966,050
|
$2,154,403
|
($188,353)
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
General overhead
|
60,000
|
62,300
|
(2,300)
|
|
Total costs
|
$2,026,050
|
$2,216,703
|
($190,653)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 25,950
|
$ 25,497
|
$ 453
|
Required
1. Analyze the performance report. What does it say about the company’s performance? Is the performance report reliable? Explain your answer.
2. Calculate the budgeted selling fee and budgeted variable costs per home sale.
3. Prepare a performance report using a flexible budget based on the actual number of home sales.
4. Analyze the report you prepared in requirement 3. What does it say about the company’s performance? Is the report reliable? Explain your answer.
5. What recommendations would you make to improve the company’s performance next year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Materials and Direct Labor Variances
P 8. Fruit Packaging Company makes plastic baskets for food wholesalers. Each basket requires 0.8 gram of liquid plastic and 0.6 gram of an additive that includes color and hardening agents. The standard prices are $0.15 per gram of liquid plastic and $0.09 per gram of additive. Two kinds of direct labor—molding and trimming/packing—are required to make the baskets. The direct labor time and rate standards for a batch of 100 baskets are as follows: molding, 1.0 hour per batch at an hourly rate of $12; and trimming/packing, 1.2 hours per batch at $10 per hour.
During the year, the company produced 48,000 baskets. It used 38,600 grams of liquid plastic at a total cost of $5,404 and 28,950 grams of additive at $2,895. Actual direct labor included 480 hours for molding at a total cost of $5,664 and 560 hours for trimming/packing at $5,656.
Required
1. Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for both the liquid plastic and the additive.
2. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for the molding and trimming packing processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing Variances and Evaluating Performance
P 9. Last year, Biomed Laboratories, Inc., researched and perfected a cure for the common cold. Called Cold-Gone, the product sells for $28.00 per package, each of which contains five tablets. Standard unit costs for this product were developed late last year for use this year. Per package, the standard unit costs were as follows:
chemical ingredients, 6 ounces at $1.00 per ounce; packaging, $1.20; direct labor, 0.8 hour at $14.00 per hour; standard variable overhead, $4.00 per direct labor hour; and standard fixed overhead, $6.40 per direct labor hour. Normal capacity is 46,875 units per week. In the first quarter of this year, demand for the new product rose well beyond the expectations of management. During those three months, the peak season for colds, the company produced and sold over 500,000 packages of Cold-Gone.
During the first week in April, it produced 50,000 packages but used materials for 50,200 packages costing $60,240. It also used 305,000 ounces of chemical ingredients costing $292,800. The total cost of direct labor for the week was $579,600; direct labor hours totaled 40,250. Total variable overhead was $161,100, and total fixed overhead was $242,000. Budgeted fixed overhead for the week was $240,000.
Required
1. Compute for the first week of April (a) all direct materials price variances, (b) all direct materials quantity variances, (c) the direct labor rate variance, (d) the direct labor efficiency variance, (e) the variable overhead spending variance, (f) the variable overhead efficiency variance, (g) the fixed overhead budget variance, and (h) the fixed overhead volume variance.
2. Prepare a performance report based on your variance analysis, and suggest possible causes for each significant variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead Variances
P 10. Meantime Corporation’s accountant left for vacation before completing the monthly cost variance report. Gillian Thornton, the corporation’s president, has asked you to complete the report. The following data are available to you:
|
Actual machine hours
|
20,100
|
|
Standard machine hours allowed
|
20,500
|
|
Actual variable overhead
|
a
|
|
Standard variable overhead rate
|
$2.00
|
|
Variable overhead spending variance
|
$200 (F)
|
|
Variable overhead efficiency variance
|
b
|
|
Actual fixed overhead
|
c
|
|
Budgeted fixed overhead
|
$153,000
|
|
Fixed overhead budget variance
|
$500 (U)
|
|
Fixed overhead volume variance
|
$750 (F)
|
|
Normal capacity in machine hours
|
d
|
|
Standard fixed overhead rate
|
e
|
|
Fixed overhead applied
|
f
|
Required
Analyze the data and fill in the missing amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An Ethical Question Involving Standard Costs
C 1. Taylor Industries, Inc., develops standard costs for all its direct materials, direct labor, and overhead costs. It uses these costs to price products, cost inventories, and evaluate the performance of purchasing and production managers. It updates the standard costs whenever costs, prices, or rates change by 3 percent or more. It also reviews and updates all standard costs each December; this practice provides current standards that are appropriate for use in valuing year-end inventories on the company’s financial statements.
Jody Elgar is in charge of standard costing at Taylor Industries. On November 30, she received a memo from the chief financial officer informing her that Taylor Industries was considering purchasing another company and that she and her staff were to postpone adjusting standard costs until late February; they were instead to concentrate on analyzing the proposed purchase.
In the third week of November, prices on more than 20 of Taylor Industries’ direct materials had been reduced by 10 percent or more, and a new labor union contract had reduced several categories of labor rates. A revision of standard costs in December would have resulted in lower valuations of inventories, higher cost of goods sold because of inventory write-downs, and lower net income for the year. Elgar believed that the company was facing an operating loss and that the assignment to evaluate the proposed purchase was designed primarily to keep her staff from revising and lowering standard costs. She questioned the chief financial officer about the assignment and reiterated the need for updating the standard costs, but she was again told to ignore the update and concentrate on the proposed purchase. Elgar and her staff were relieved of the evaluation assignment in early February. The purchase never materialized.
Assess Jody Elgar’s actions in this situation. Did she follow all ethical paths to solving the problem? What are the consequences of failing to adjust the standard costs?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard Costs and Variance Analysis
C 2. Domino’s Pizza is a major purveyor of home-delivered pizzas. Although customers can pick up their orders at the shops where Domino’s makes its pizzas, employees deliver most orders to customers’ homes, and they use their own cars to do it.
Specify what standard costing for a Domino’s pizza shop would entail. Where would you obtain the information for determining the cost standards? In what ways would the standards help in managing a pizza shop? If necessary to gain a better understanding of the operation, visit a pizzeria. (It does not have to be a Domino’s.)
Your instructor will divide the class into groups to discuss the case. Summarize your group’s discussion, and select one person from your group to report the group’s findings to the class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing Performance Reports
C 3. Troy Corrente, the president of Forest Valley Spa, is concerned about the spa’s operating performance during March. He budgeted his costs carefully so that he could reduce the annual membership fees. He now needs to evaluate those costs to make sure that the spa’s profits are at the level he expected. He has asked you, the spa’s controller, to prepare a performance report on labor and overhead costs for March. He also wants you to analyze the report and suggest possible causes for any problems that you find. He wants to attend to any problems quickly, so he has asked you to submit your report as soon as possible. The following information for the month is available to you:
|
Variable costs
|
Budgeted Costs
|
Actual Costs
|
|
Operating labor
|
$10,880
|
$12,150
|
|
Utilities
|
2,880
|
3,360
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
5,760
|
7,140
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
|
Depreciation, equipment
|
2,600
|
2,680
|
|
Rent
|
3,280
|
3,280
|
|
Other
|
1,704
|
1,860
|
|
Totals
|
$27,104
|
$30,470
|
Corrente’s budget allows for eight employees to work 160 hours each per month. During March, nine employees worked an average of 150 hours each.
1. Answer the following questions:
a. Why are you preparing this performance report?
b. Who will use the report?
c. What information do you need to develop the report? How will you obtain that information?
d. When are the performance report and the analysis needed?
2. With the limited information available to you, compute the labor rate variance, the labor efficiency variance, and the variable and fixed overhead variances.
3. Prepare a performance report for the spa for March. Analyze the report, and suggest causes for any problems that you find.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Developing a Flexible Budget and Analyzing Overhead Variances
C 4. Ezelda Marva is the controller at FH Industries. She has asked you, her new assistant, to analyze the following data related to projected and actual overhead costs for October:
|
Standard Variable Costs per Machine Hour (MH)
|
Actual Variable Costs in October
|
|
Indirect materials
|
|
|
|
and supplies
|
$1.10
|
$ 2,380
|
|
Indirect machine setup labor
|
2.50
|
5,090
|
|
Materials handling
|
1.40
|
3,950
|
|
Maintenance and repairs
|
1.50
|
2,980
|
|
Utilities
|
0.80
|
1,490
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
0.10
|
200
|
|
Totals
|
$7.40
|
$16,090
|
|
Budgeted Fixed Overhead
|
Actual Fixed Overhead in October
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
$ 3,630
|
$ 3,630
|
|
Machine depreciation
|
8,360
|
8,580
|
|
Other
|
1,210
|
1,220
|
|
Totals
|
$13,200
|
$13,430
|
For October, the number of good units produced was used to compute the 2,100 standard machine hours allowed.
1. Prepare a monthly flexible budget for operating activity at 2,000 machine hours, 2,200 machine hours, and 2,500 machine hours.
2. Develop a flexible budget formula.
3. The company’s normal operating capacity is 2,200 machine hours per month. Compute the fixed overhead rate at this level of activity. Then break the rate down into rates for each element of fixed overhead.
4. Prepare a detailed comparative cost analysis for October. Include all variable and fixed overhead costs. Format your analysis by using columns for the following five elements: cost category, cost per machine hour, costs applied, actual costs incurred, and variance.
5. Develop an overhead variance analysis for October that identifies the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances.
6. Prepare an analysis of the variances. Could a manager control some of the fixed costs? Defend your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard Costing in a Service Company
C 5. Annuity Life Insurance Company (ALIC) markets several types of life insurance policies, but P20A—a permanent, 20-year life annuity policy—is its most popular. This policy sells in $10,000 increments and features variable percentages of whole life insurance and single-payment annuities, depending on the policyholder’s needs and age. ALIC devotes an entire department to supporting and marketing the P20A policy. Because both the support staff and the sales persons contribute to each P20A policy, ALIC categorizes them as direct labor for purposes of variance analysis, cost control, and performance evaluation. For unit costing, each $10,000 increment is considered one unit; thus, a $90,000 policy is counted as nine units. Standard unit cost information for January is as follows:
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
Policy support staff
|
$ 36.00
|
|
3 hours at $12.00 per hour
|
|
|
Policy sales person
|
|
|
8.5 hours at $14.20 per hour
|
120.70
|
|
Operating overhead
|
|
|
Variable operating overhead
|
|
|
11.5 hours at $26.00 per hour
|
299.00
|
|
Fixed operating overhead
|
|
|
11.5 hours at $18.00 per hour
|
207.00
|
|
Standard unit cost
|
$662.70
|
Actual costs incurred for the 265 units sold during January were as follows:
|
Direct labor
|
|
Policy support staff
|
|
848 hours at $12.50 per hour
|
$10,600
|
|
Policy sales persons
|
|
|
2,252.5 hours at $14.00 per hour
|
31,535
|
|
Operating overhead
|
|
|
Variable operating overhead
|
78,440
|
|
Fixed operating overhead
|
53,400
|
Normal monthly capacity is 260 units, and the budgeted fixed operating overhead for January was $53,820.
1. Compute the standard hours allowed in January for policy support staff and policy sales persons.
2. What should the total standard costs for January have been? What were the total actual costs that the company incurred in January? Compute the total cost variance for the month.
3. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for policy support staff and policy sales persons.
4. Compute the variable and fixed operating overhead variances for January.
5. Identify possible causes for each variance and suggest possible solutions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company (Continuing Case)
C 6. In this segment of our continuing case, assume that you have been using standard costing to plan and control costs at your cookie store. In a meeting with your budget team, which includes managers and employees from the Purchasing, Product Design, and Production departments, you ask all team members to describe any operating problems they encountered in the last quarter. You explain that you will use this information to analyze the causes of significant cost variances that occurred during the quarter.
For each of the following situations, identify the direct materials and/or direct labor variance(s) that could be affected, and indicate whether the variances are favorable or unfavorable:
1. The production department uses highly skilled, highly paid workers.
2. Machines were improperly adjusted.
3. Direct labor personnel worked more carefully than they had in the past to manufacture the product.
4. The Product Design Department replaced a direct material with one that was less expensive and of lower quality.
5. The Purchasing Department bought higher-quality materials at a higher price.
6. A major supplier used a less-expensive mode of transportation to deliver the raw materials.
7. Work was halted for 2 hours because of a power failure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using Incremental Analysis
SE 2. Pices Corporation has assembled the following information related to the purchase of a new automated postage machine:
|
Posen Machine
|
Value Machine
|
|
Increase in revenue
|
$44,200
|
$49,300
|
|
Increase in annual operating costs
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
12,200
|
12,200
|
|
Direct labor
|
10,200
|
10,600
|
|
Variable overhead
|
24,500
|
26,900
|
|
Fixed overhead (including depreciation)
|
12,400
|
12,400
|
Using incremental analysis and only relevant information, compute the difference in favor of the Value machine.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Investment Center Performance
E 12. Momence Associates is evaluating the performance of three divisions: Maple, Oaks, and Juniper. Using the following data, compute the return on investment and residual income for each division, compare the divisions’ performance, and comment on the factors that influenced performance:
|
Maple
|
Oaks
|
Juniper
|
|
Sales
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$10,000
|
$10,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Assets invested
|
$25,000
|
$12,500
|
$25,000
|
|
Desired ROI
|
40%
|
40%
|
40%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Economic Value Added
E 13. Leesburg, LLP, is evaluating the performance of three divisions: Lake, Sumter, and Poe. Using the data that appear on the next page, compute the economic value added by each division, and comment on each division’s performance.
|
Lake
|
Sumter
|
Poe
|
|
Sales
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
|
After-tax operating income
|
$10,000
|
$10,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$25,000
|
$12,500
|
$25,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$5,000
|
$5,000
|
$5,000
|
|
Cost of capital
|
15%
|
15%
|
15%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goal Congruence
E 15. Serious Toys, Inc., has adopted the balanced scorecard to motivate its managers to work toward the companywide goal of leading its industry in innovation. Identify the four stakeholder perspectives that would link to the following objectives, measures, and targets:
|
Objective
|
Measure
|
Target
|
|
Profitable
|
New product RI
|
New-product RI of
|
|
new products
|
|
at least $100,000
|
|
Work force with cutting edge skills
|
Percentage of employees cross- trained on work-group tasks
|
group cross-trained on new tasks within 10 days
|
|
Agile production
|
Time to market
|
Time to market less
|
|
processes
|
(the time between
|
than 6 months for
|
|
a product idea
|
80% of product
|
|
and its first sales)
|
introductions
|
|
Successful product
|
New-product
|
Capture 75% of new
|
|
introductions
|
market share
|
product market
|
|
|
within 6 months
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating Cost Center Performance
P 1. Beverage Products, LLC, manufactures metal beverage containers. The division that manufactures soft-drink beverage cans for the North American market has two plants that operate 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The plants are evaluated as cost centers. Small tools and supplies are considered variable overhead. Depreciation and rent are considered fixed overhead. The master budget for a plant and the operating results of the two North American plants, East Coast and West Coast, are as follows:
|
Center costs
|
Master Budget
|
East Coast
|
West Coast
|
|
Rolled aluminum ($0.01)
|
$4,000,000
|
$3,492,000
|
$5,040,000
|
|
Lids ($0.005)
|
2,000,000
|
1,980,000
|
2,016,000
|
|
Direct labor ($0.0025)
|
1,000,000
|
864,000
|
1,260,000
|
|
Small tools and supplies ($0.0013)
|
520,000
|
432,000
|
588,000
|
|
Depreciation and rent
|
480,000
|
480,000
|
480,000
|
|
Total cost
|
$8,000,000
|
$7,248,000
|
$9,384,000
|
|
Performance measures
|
|
|
|
|
Cans processed per hour
|
45,662
|
41,096
|
47,945
|
|
Average daily pounds of scrap metal
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
|
Cans processed (in millions)
|
400
|
360
|
420
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Prepare a performance report for the East Coast plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.
2. Prepare a performance report for the West Coast plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.
3. Compare the two plants, and comment on their performance.
4. Explain why a flexible budget should be prepared. Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements
P 2. Roofing tile is the major product of the Tops Corporation. The company had a particularly good year, as shown by its operating data. It sold 88,400 cases of tile. Variable cost of goods sold was $848,640; variable selling expenses were $132,600; fixed overhead was $166,680; fixed selling expenses were $152,048; and fixed administrative expenses were $96,450. Selling price was $18 per case. There were no partially completed jobs in process at the beginning or the end of the year. Finished goods inventory had been used up at the end of the previous year.
Required
1. Prepare the calendar year-end income statement for the Tops Corporation using the traditional reporting format.
2. Prepare the calendar year-end income statement for the Tops Corporation using the variable costing format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating Profit Center and Investment Center Performance
P 3. Bobbie Howell, the managing partner of the law firm Howell, Bagan, and Clark, LLP, makes asset acquisition and disposal decisions for the firm. As managing partner, she supervises the partners in charge of the firm’s three branch offices. Those partners have the authority to make employee compensation decisions. The partners’ compensation depends on the profitability of their branch office. Victoria Smith manages the City Branch, which has the following master budget and actual results for the year:
|
Master Budget
|
Actual Results
|
|
Billed hours
|
5,000
|
4,900
|
|
Revenue
|
$250,000
|
$254,800
|
|
Controllable variable costs
|
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
120,000
|
137,200
|
|
Variable overhead
|
40,000
|
34,300
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 90,000
|
$ 83,300
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Rent
|
30,000
|
30,000
|
|
Other administrative expenses
|
45,000
|
42,000
|
|
Branch operating income
|
$ 15,000
|
$ 11,300
|
Required
1.Assume that the City Branch is a profit center. Prepare a performance report that includes a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.
2. Evaluate Victoria Smith’s performance as manager of the City Branch.
3. Assume that the branch managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the branches are thus investment centers. City Branch is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 30 percent on average invested assets of $40,000.
a. Compute the branch’s return on investment and residual income.
b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Victoria Smith’s performance as branch manager.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment and Economic Value Added
P 5. The balance sheet for the New Products Division of NuBone Corporation showed invested assets of $200,000 at the beginning of the year and $300,000 at the end of the year. During the year, the division’s operating income was $12,500 on sales of $500,000.
Required
1. Compute the division’s residual income if the desired ROI is 6 percent.
2. Compute the following performance measures for the division: (a) profit margin, (b) asset turnover, and (c) return on investment
3. Recompute the division’s ROI under each of the following independent assumptions:
a. Sales increase from $500,000 to $600,000, causing operating income to rise from $12,500 to $30,000.
b. Invested assets at the beginning of the year are reduced from $200,000 to $100,000.
c. Operating expenses are reduced, causing operating income to rise from $12,500 to $20,000.
4. Compute NuBone’s EVA if total corporate assets are $500,000, current liabilities are $80,000, after-tax operating income is $50,000, and the cost of capital is 8 percent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating Cost Center Performance
P 6. Plastic Products, LLC, manufactures plastic beverage bottles. The division that manufactures water bottles for the North American market has two plants that operate 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The plants are evaluated as cost centers. Small tools and supplies are considered variable overhead. Depreciation and rent are considered fixed overhead. The master budget for a plant and the operating results of the two North American plants, North and South, are as follows:
|
Center costs
|
Master Budget
|
North Actual
|
South Actual
|
|
Plastic pellets ($0.009)
|
$4,500,000
|
$3,880,000
|
$5,500,000
|
|
Caps ($0.004)
|
2,000,000
|
1,990,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Direct labor ($0.002)
|
1,000,000
|
865,000
|
1,240,000
|
|
Small tools and
|
|
|
|
|
supplies ($0.0005)
|
250,000
|
198,000
|
280,000
|
|
Depreciation and rent
|
450,000
|
440,000
|
480,000
|
|
Total cost
|
$8,200,000
|
$7,373,000
|
$9,500,000
|
|
Performance measures
|
|
Bottles processed per hour
|
69,450
|
62,000
|
70,250
|
|
Average daily pounds of scrap
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
|
Bottles processed (in millions)
|
500
|
450
|
520
|
Required
1. Prepare a performance report for the North plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.
2. Prepare a performance report for the South plant. Include a flexible budget and variance analysis.
3. Compare the two plants, and comment on their performance.
4. Explain why a flexible budget should be prepared.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Traditional and Variable Costing Income Statements
P 7. Interior designers often use the deluxe carpet products of Lux Mills, Inc. The Maricopa blend is the company’s top product line. In March, Lux produced and sold 174,900 square yards of Maricopa blend. Factory operating data for the month included variable cost of goods sold of $2,623,500 and fixed overhead of $346,875. Other expenses were variable selling expenses, $166,155; fixed selling expenses, $148,665; and fixed general and administrative expenses, $231,500. Total sales revenue equaled $3,935,250. All production took place in March, and there was no work in process at month end. Goods are usually shipped when completed.
Required
1. Prepare the March income statement for Lux Mills, Inc., using the traditional reporting format.
2. Prepare the March income statement for Lux Mills, Inc., using the variable costing format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment and Residual Income
P 8. Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month:
|
Master Budget
|
Actual Results
|
|
Tickets sold
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
|
Revenue–tickets
|
$ 840,000
|
$ 880,000
|
|
Revenue–concessions
|
480,000
|
330,000
|
|
Total revenue
|
$1,320,000
|
$1,210,000
|
|
Controllable variable costs
|
|
|
|
Concessions
|
120,000
|
99,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
420,000
|
330,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
540,000
|
550,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 240,000
|
$ 231,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Rent
|
55,000
|
55,000
|
|
Other administrative expenses
|
45,000
|
50,000
|
|
Theater operating income
|
$ 140,000
|
$ 126,000
|
Required
1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.
2. Evaluate Burgman’s performance as manager of the Park Theater.
3. Assume that the managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the theaters are thus investment centers. Park Theater is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 6 percent on average invested assets of $2,000,000.
a. Compute the theater’s return on investment and residual income.
b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Burgman’s performance as manager.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment and Residual Income
P 9. The financial results for the past two years for ABB Company, follow.
|
ABB Company
Balance Sheet
December 31
|
|
|
This Year
|
Last Year
|
|
Cash
|
Assets
|
$ 9,000
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
40,000
|
50,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
30,000
|
25,000
|
|
Other current
|
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
|
120,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$200,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 10,000
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Long-term Liabilities
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
170,000
|
160,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$200,000
|
$180,000
|
|
ABB Company
Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
This Year
|
Last Year
|
|
Sales
|
$250,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
150,000
|
115,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
30,000
|
25,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 70,000
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Income taxes expense
|
21,000
|
18,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 49,000
|
$ 42,000
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1.Compute the company’s profit margin, asset turnover, and return on investment for this year and last year. Beginning total assets for last year were $160,000. Round to two decimal places.
2. The desired return on investment for the company has been set at 10 percent. Compute ABB’s residual income for this year and last year.
3. The cost of capital for the company is 5 percent. Compute the company’s economic value added for this year and last year.
4. Before drawing conclusions about this company’s performance, what additional information would you want?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balanced Scorecard Results
C 1. IT, Inc., has adopted the balanced scorecard approach to motivate the managers of its product divisions to work toward the companywide goal of leading its industry in innovation. The corporation’s selected performance measures and scorecard results are as follows:
|
|
Division
|
|
Performance
|
|
Measure
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
Target
|
|
New product ROI
|
80%
|
75%
|
70%
|
75%
|
|
Employees cross-trained in new tasks
|
|
|
|
|
|
within 30 days
|
95
|
96
|
94
|
100
|
|
New product’s time to market less than
|
|
|
|
|
|
one year
|
85
|
90
|
86
|
80
|
|
New product’s market share one year
|
|
|
|
|
|
after introduction
|
50
|
100
|
80
|
80
|
Can you effectively compare the performance of the three divisions against the targets? What other measures mentioned in this chapter are needed to evaluate performance effectively?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Responsibility Centers
C 2. Wood4Fun makes wooden playground equipment for the institutional and consumer markets. The company strives for low-cost, high-quality production because it operates in a highly competitive market in which product price is set by the marketplace and is not based on production costs. The company is organized into responsibility centers. The vice president of manufacturing is responsible for three manufacturing plants. The vice president of sales is responsible for four sales regions. Recently, these two vice presidents began to disagree about whether the manufacturing plants are cost centers or profit centers. The vice president of manufacturing views the plants as cost centers because the managers of the plants control only product-related costs. The vice president of sales believes the plants are profit centers because product quality and product cost strongly affect company profits.
1. Identify the controllable performance that Wood4Fun values and wants to measure. Give at least three examples of performance measures that Wood4- Fun could use to monitor such performance.
2. For the manufacturing plants, what type of responsibility center is most consistent with the controllable performance Wood4Fun wants to measure?
3. For the sales regions, what type of responsibility center is most appropriate?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Types of Responsibility Centers
C 3. Yuma Foods acquired Aldo’s Tortillas several years ago. Aldo’s has continued to operate as an independent company, except that Yuma Foods has exclusive authority over capital investments, production quantity, and pricing decisions because Yuma has been Aldo’s only customer since the acquisition. Yuma uses return on investment to evaluate the performance of Aldo’s manager. The most recent performance report is as follows:
|
Yuma Foods
Performance Report for Aldo’s Tortillas
For the Year Ended June 30
|
|
Sales
|
$6,000
|
|
Variable cost of goods sold
|
3,000
|
|
Variable administrative expenses
|
1,000
|
|
Variable corporate expenses (% of sales)
|
600
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$1,400
|
|
Fixed overhead (includes depreciation of $100)
|
400
|
|
Fixed administrative expenses
|
500
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 500
|
|
Average assets invested
|
$5,500
|
|
Return on investment
|
9.09%
|
1. Analyze the items listed in the performance report, and identify the items that Aldo controls and those that Yuma controls. In your opinion, what type of responsibility center is Aldo’s Tortillas? Explain your response.
2. Prepare a revised performance report for Aldo’s Tortillas and an accompanying memo to the president of Yuma Foods that explains why it is important to change the content of the report. Cite some basic principles of responsibility accounting to support your recommendation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Economic Value Added and Performance
C 4. Sevilla Consulting offers environmental consulting services worldwide. The managers of branch offices are rewarded for superior performance with bonuses based on the economic value that the office adds to the company. Last year’s operating results for the entire company and for its three offices, expressed in millions of U.S. dollars, are as follows:
|
Worldwide
|
Europe
|
Americas
|
Asia
|
|
Cost of capital
|
9%
|
10%
|
8%
|
12%
|
|
Total assets
|
$210
|
$70
|
$70
|
$70
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$80
|
$10
|
$40
|
$30
|
|
After-tax operating income
|
$15
|
$5
|
$5
|
$5
|
1. Compute the economic value added for each office worldwide. What factors affect each office’s economic value added? How can an office improve its economic value added?
2. If managers’ bonuses are based on economic value added to office performance, what specific actions will managers be motivated to take?
3. Is economic value added the only performance measure needed to evaluate investment centers adequately? Explain your response.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company (Continuing Case)
C 6. As we continue with this case, assume that your cookie store is now part of a national chain. The store has been consistently profitable, and sales remain satisfactory despite a temporary economic downturn in your area.
At the first of the year, corporate headquarters set a targeted return on investment of 20 percent for your store. The store currently averages $140,000 in invested assets (beginning invested assets, $130,000; ending invested assets, $150,000) and is projected to have an operating income of $30,800. You are considering whether to take one or both of the following actions before the end of the year:
- Hold off recording and paying $5,000 in bills owed until the start of the next fiscal year.
- Write down to zero value $3,000 in store inventory (nonperishable containers) that you have been unable to sell.
Currently, your bonus is based on store profits. Next year, corporate headquarters is changing its performance incentive program so that bonuses will be based on a store’s actual return on investment.
1.What effect would each of the actions that you are considering have on the store’s operating income this year? (Hint: Use Figure 8-3 to trace the effects.) In your opinion, is either action unethical?
2. Independent of question 1, how would the inventory write-down affect next year’s income and return on investment if the inventory is sold for $4,000 next year, when corporate headquarters changes its performance incentive plan for store managers? In your opinion, do you have an ethical dilemma?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing a Standard Unit Cost
SE 3. Using the information that follows, compute the standard unit cost of Product MZW:
|
Direct materials quantity standard
|
5 pounds per unit
|
|
Direct materials price standard
|
$10.20 per pound
|
|
Direct labor time standard
|
0.2 hour per unit
|
|
Direct labor rate standard
|
$10.75 per hour
|
|
Variable overhead rate standard
|
$7.00 per machine hour
|
|
Fixed overhead rate standard
|
$11.00 per machine hour
|
|
Machine hour standard
|
3 hours per unit
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing Cost Variances
SE 4. Garden Metal Works produces lawn sculptures. The company analyzes only variances that differ by more than 5 percent from the standard cost. The controller computed the following direct labor efficiency variances for March:
|
Direct Labor Efficiency Variance
|
Standard Direct Labor Cost
|
|
Product 4
|
$1,240 (U)
|
$26,200
|
|
Product 6
|
3,290 (F)
|
41,700
|
|
Product 7
|
2,030 (U)
|
34,300
|
|
Product 9
|
1,620 (F)
|
32,560
|
|
Product 12
|
2,810 (U)
|
59,740
|
For each product, determine the variance as a percentage of the standard cost (round to one decimal place). Then identify the products whose variances should be analyzed and suggest possible causes for the variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead Variances
SE 8. Weather all Products uses standard costing. The following information about overhead was generated during August:
|
Standard variable overhead rate
|
$3.00 per machine hour
|
|
Standard fixed overhead rate
|
$3.10 per machine hour
|
|
Actual variable overhead costs
|
$680,100
|
|
Actual fixed overhead costs
|
$698,800
|
|
Budgeted fixed overhead costs
|
$700,000
|
|
Standard machine hours per unit produced
|
12
|
|
Good units produced
|
18,940
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
228,400
|
Compute the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating Managerial Performance
SE 10. Raul Tempest, the controller at GoTo Products, gave Jim Dodds, the production manager, a report containing the following information:
|
Actual Cost
|
Standard Cost
|
Variance
|
|
Direct materials
|
$40,200
|
$38,200
|
$2,000 (U)
|
|
Direct labor
|
17,550
|
17,000
|
550 (U)
|
|
Variable overhead
|
52,860
|
50,000
|
2,860 (U)
|
Tempest asked for a response. If you were Dodds, how would you respond? What additional information might you need to prepare your response?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hector Corporation is a manufacturing company with annual sales of $25 million. Its budget committee has created the following policy that the company uses each year in developing its master budget for the following calendar year:
|
May
|
The company’s controller and other members of the budget committee meet to discuss plans and objectives for next year.
The controller conveys all relevant information from this meeting to division managers and department heads.
|
|
June
|
Division managers, department heads, and the controller meet to discuss the corporate plans and objectives for next year. Theydevelop a timetable for developing next year’s budget data.
|
|
July
|
Division managers and department heads develop budget data. The vice president of sales provides them with final sales estimates, and they complete monthly sales estimates for each product line.
|
|
August
|
Estimates of next year’s monthly production activity and inventory levels are completed. Division managers and departmentheads communicate these estimates to the controller,who distributes them to other operating areas.
|
|
September
|
All operating areas submit their revised budget data. The controller integrates their labor requirements, direct materials requirements, unit cost estimates, cash requirements, and profit estimates into a preliminary master budget.
|
|
October
|
The budget committee meets to discuss the preliminary master budget and to make any necessary corrections, additions, or deletions. The controller incorporates all authorized changes into a final draft of the master budget.
|
|
November
|
The controller submits the final draft to the budget committee for approval. If the committee approves it, it is distributed to all corporate officers, division managers, and department heads.
|
1. Comment on this policy.
2. What changes would you recommend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Considerations in Budgeting
Javier Gonzales is the manager of the Repairs and Maintenance Department of JG Industries. He is responsible for preparing his department’s annual budget. Most managers in the company inflate their budget numbers by at least 10 percent because their bonuses depend upon how much below budget their departments operate. Gonzales turned in the following information for his department’s budget for next year to the company’s budget committee:
|
Budget This Year
|
Actual This Year
|
Budget Next Year
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 20,000
|
$ 16,000
|
$ 24,000
|
|
Labor
|
80,000
|
82,000
|
96,000
|
|
Utilities
|
8,500
|
8,000
|
10,200
|
|
Tools
|
12,500
|
9,000
|
15,000
|
|
Hand-carried
equipment
|
25,000
|
16,400
|
30,000
|
|
Cleaning materials
|
4,600
|
4,200
|
5,520
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
2,000
|
2,100
|
2,400
|
|
Totals
|
$152,600
|
$137,700
|
$183,120
|
Because the figures for next year are 20 percent above those in this year’s budget, the budget committee questioned them. Gonzales defended them by saying that he expects a significant increase in activity in his department next year.
What do you think are the real reasons for the increase in the budgeted amounts? What ethical considerations enter into this situation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting for Cash Flows
The nature of a company’s business affects its need to budget for cash flows. H&R Block is a service company whose main business is preparing tax returns. Most tax returns are prepared after January 31 and before April 15. For a fee and interest, the company will advance cash to clients who are due refunds. The clients are expected to repay the cash advances when they receive their refunds. Although H&R Block has some revenues throughout the year, it devotes most of the nontax season to training potential employees in tax preparation procedures and to laying the groundwork for the next tax season.
Toys “R” Us is a toy retailer whose sales are concentrated in October, November, and December of one year and January of the next year. Sales continue at a steady but low level during the rest of the year. The company purchases most of its inventory between July and September.
Johnson & Johnson sells the many health care products that it manufactures to retailers, and the retailers sell them to the final customer. Johnson & Johnson offers retailers credit terms.
Discuss the nature of cash receipts and cash disbursements over a calendar year in the three companies we have just described. What are some key estimates that the management of these companies must make when preparing a cash budget?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting Procedures
Since Rood Enterprises inaugurated participative budgeting 10 years ago, everyone in the organization—from maintenance personnel to the president’s staff—has had a voice in the budgeting process. Until recently, participative budgeting has worked in the best interests of the company as a whole. Now, however, it is becoming evident that some managers are using the practice solely to benefit their own divisions. The budget committee has therefore asked you, the company’s controller, to analyze this year’s divisional budgets carefully before incorporating them into the company’s master budget.
The Motor Division was the first of the company’s six divisions to submit its budget request for next year. The division’s budgeted income statement appears at the top of the next page.
|
Rood Enterprises Motor Division Budgeted Income Statement For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
Budget for This Year
|
Budget for Next Year
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Net sales
|
|
|
|
|
Radios
|
$ 850,000
|
$ 910,000
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Appliances
|
680,000
|
740,000
|
60,000
|
|
Telephones
|
270,000
|
305,000
|
35,000
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
84,400
|
90,000
|
5,600
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,884,400
|
$2,045,000
|
$160,600
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
750,960
|
717,500*
|
(33,460)
|
|
Gross margin
|
$1,133,440
|
$1,327,500
|
$194,060
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Wages
|
|
|
|
|
Warehouse
|
$ 94,500
|
$ 102,250
|
$ 7,750
|
|
Purchasing
|
77,800
|
84,000
|
6,200
|
|
Delivery/shipping
|
69,400
|
74,780
|
5,380
|
|
Maintenance
|
42,650
|
45,670
|
3,020
|
|
Salaries
|
|
|
|
|
Supervisory
|
60,000
|
92,250
|
32,250
|
|
Executive
|
130,000
|
164,000
|
34,000
|
|
Purchases, supplies
|
17,400
|
20,500
|
3,100
|
|
Maintenance
|
72,400
|
82,000
|
9,600
|
|
Depreciation
|
62,000
|
74,750†
|
12,750
|
|
Building rent
|
96,000
|
102,500
|
6,500
|
|
Sales commissions
|
188,440
|
204,500
|
16,060
|
|
Insurance
|
|
|
|
|
Fire
|
12,670
|
20,500
|
7,830
|
|
Liability
|
18,200
|
20,500
|
2,300
|
|
Utilities
|
14,100
|
15,375
|
1,275
|
|
Taxes
|
|
|
|
|
Property
|
16,600
|
18,450
|
1,850
|
|
Payroll
|
26,520
|
41,000
|
14,480
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
4,610
|
10,250
|
5,640
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
$1,003,290
|
$1,173,275
|
$169,985
|
|
Income from operations
|
$ 130,150
|
$ 154,225
|
$ 24,075
|
*Less expensive merchandise will be purchased in the next year to boost profits. †Depreciation is increased because additional equipment must be bought to handle increased sales.
1. Recast the Motor Division’s budgeted income statement in the following format (round percentages to two places):
|
Budget for This Year
|
Budget for Next Year
|
|
Account
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Net Sales
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Net Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.Actual results for this year revealed the following information about revenues and cost of goods sold:
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Net Sales
|
|
Net sales
|
|
|
|
Radios
|
$ 780,000
|
43.94
|
|
Appliances
|
640,000
|
36.06
|
|
Telephones
|
280,000
|
15.77
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
75,000
|
4.23
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,775,000
|
100.00
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
763,425
|
43.01
|
|
Gross margin
|
$1,011,575
|
56.99
|
On the basis of this information and your analysis in 1, what do you think the budget committee should say to the managers of the Motor Division? Identify any specific areas of the budget that may need to be revised, and explain why the revision is needed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Budgeting Process
C 5. Refer to our development of Frame craft Company’s master budget in this chapter. Suppose that because of a new customer in Canada, the company’s management has decided to increase budgeted sales in the first quarter by 5,000 units. The expenses for this sale will include direct materials, direct labor, variable overhead, and variable selling and administrative expenses. The delivery expense for the Canadian customer will be $0.18 per unit rather than the regular $0.08 per unit. The desired units of beginning finished goods inventory will remain at 1,000 units.
1. Using an Excel spreadsheet, revise Frame craft Company’s budgeted income statement and the operating budgets that support it to reflect the changes described above. (Round manufactured cost per unit to three decimals.)
2. What was the change in income from operations? Would you recommend accepting the order from the Canadian customer? If so, why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company (Continuing Case)
C 6. In this segment of our continuing case, you have decided to open a store where you will sell your company’s cookies, as well as coffee, tea, and other beverages. You believe that the store will be able to provide excellent service and undersell the local competition. To fund operations, you are applying for a loan from the Small Business Administration. The loan application requires you to submit two financial budgets—a pro forma income statement and a pro forma balance sheet—within six weeks.
How do the four w’s of preparing an accounting report apply in this situation— that is, why are you preparing these financial budgets, who needs them, what information do you need to prepare them, and when are they due?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balanced Scorecard
SE 1. One of your college’s overall goals is customer satisfaction. In light of that goal, match each of the following stakeholders’ perspectives with the appropriate objective:
|
Perspective
|
Objective
|
|
1. Financial (investors)
|
a. Customer satisfaction means that the faculty (employees) engages in cutting-edge research.
|
|
2. Learning and growth
|
b. Customer satisfaction means that students receive their degrees in four years.
|
|
3. Internal business processes
|
c. Customer satisfaction means that the college has a winning athletics program.
|
|
4. Customers
|
d. Customer satisfaction means that fund-raising campaigns are successful.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Responsibility Centers
SE 2. Identify each of the following as a cost center, a discretionary cost center, a revenue center, a profit center, or an investment center:
1. The manager of center A is responsible for generating cash inflows and incurring costs with the goal of making money for the company. The manager has no responsibility for assets.
2. Center B produces a product that is not sold to an external party but transferred to another center for further processing.
3. The manager of center C is responsible for the telephone order operations of a large retailer.
4. Center D designs, produces, and sells products to external parties. The manager makes both long-term and short-term decisions.
5. Center E provides human resource support for the other centers in the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Profit Center Performance Report
SE 5. Complete this performance report for profit center P for the month ended December 31:
|
Actual Results
|
Variance
|
Master Budget
|
|
Sales
|
$ ?
|
$ 20 (F)
|
$ 120
|
|
Controllable variable costs
|
|
|
|
|
Variable cost of goods sold
|
25
|
10 (U)
|
?
|
|
Variable selling and
|
|
|
|
|
administrative expenses
|
15
|
?
|
5
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$100
|
$ ?
|
$ 100
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
?
|
20 (F)
|
60
|
|
Profit center operating income
|
$ 60
|
$ 20 (F)
|
$ ?
|
|
Performance measures
|
|
Number of orders processed
|
50
|
20 (F)
|
?
|
|
Average daily sales
|
$?
|
$0.68 (F)
|
$4.00
|
|
Number of units sold
|
100
|
40 (F)
|
?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment
SE 6. Complete the profit margin, asset turnover, and return on investment calculations for investment centers D and V
|
Subsidiary D
|
Subsidiary V
|
|
Sales
|
$1,650
|
$2,840
|
|
Operating income
|
$180
|
$210
|
|
Average assets invested
|
$940
|
$1,250
|
|
Profit margin
|
?
|
7.39%
|
|
Asset turnover
|
1.76 times
|
?
|
|
ROI
|
?
|
?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment
SE 7. Complete the average assets invested, profit margin, asset turnover, and return on investment calculations for investment centers J and K on the next page.
|
Subsidiary J
|
Subsidiary K
|
|
Sales
|
$2,000
|
$2,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$500
|
$800
|
|
Beginning assets invested
|
$4,000
|
$500
|
|
Ending assets invested
|
$6,000
|
$1,500
|
|
Average assets invested
|
$?
|
$?
|
|
Profit margin
|
25%
|
?
|
|
Asset turnover
|
?
|
2 times
|
|
ROI
|
?
|
?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Residual Income
SE 8. Complete the operating income, ending assets invested, average assets invested, and residual income calculations for investment centers H and F:
|
Subsidiary H
|
Subsidiary F
|
|
Sales
|
$20,000
|
$25,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$1,500
|
$?
|
|
Beginning assets invested
|
$4,000
|
$500
|
|
Ending assets invested
|
$6,000
|
$?
|
|
Average assets invested
|
$?
|
$1,000
|
|
Desired ROI
|
20%
|
20%
|
|
Residual income
|
$?
|
$600
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Economic Value Added
SE 9. Complete the current liabilities, total assets
current liabilities, and economic value added calculations for investment centers M and N:
|
Subsidiary M
|
Subsidiary N
|
|
Sales
|
$15,000
|
$18,000
|
|
After-tax operating income
|
$1,000
|
$1,100
|
|
Total assets
|
$4,000
|
$5,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$1,000
|
$?
|
|
Total assets current
|
|
|
|
liabilities
|
$?
|
$3,500
|
|
Cost of capital
|
15%
|
15%
|
|
Economic value added
|
$?
|
$?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balanced Scorecard
E 1. Biggs Industries is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compiled the following list of possible performance measures. Select the balanced scorecard perspective that best matches each performance measure.
|
Performance Measure
|
Balanced Scorecard Perspective
|
|
1. Residual income
|
a. Financial (investors)
|
|
2. Customer satisfaction rating
|
b. Learning and growth (employees)
|
|
3. Employee absentee rate
|
c. Internal business processes
|
|
4. Growth in profits
|
d. Customers
|
|
5. On-time deliveries
|
|
6. Manufacturing processing time
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balanced Scorecard
E 2. Valient Online Products is considering adopting the balanced scorecard and has compiled the following list of possible performance measures. Select the balanced scorecard perspective that best matches each performance measure.
|
Performance Measure
|
Balanced Scorecard Perspective
|
|
1. Economic value added
|
a. Financial (investors)
|
|
2. Employee turnover
|
b. Learning and growth (employees)
|
|
3. Average daily sales
|
c. Internal business processes
|
|
4. Defect-free units
|
d. Customers
|
|
5. Number of repeat customer visits
|
|
6. Employee training hours
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Measures
E 3. Beva Washington wants to measure her division’s product quality. Link an appropriate performance measure with each balanced scorecard perspective.
|
Product Quality
|
Possible Performance Measures
|
|
1. Financial (investors)
|
a. Number of defective products
|
|
2. Learning and growth
|
returned
|
|
(employees)
|
b. Number of products failing
|
|
3. Internal business processes
|
inspection
|
|
4. Customers
|
c. Increased market share
|
|
d. Savings from employee suggestions
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Measures
E 4. Sam Yu wants to measure customer satisfaction within his region. Link an appropriate performance measure with each balanced scorecard perspective.
|
Customer Satisfaction
|
Possible Performance Measures
|
|
1. Financial (investors)
|
a. Number of staff promotions
|
|
2. Learning and growth
|
b. Number of repeat customers
|
|
(employees)
|
c. Number of process improvements
|
|
3. Internal business processes
|
d. Percentage sales increase over last
|
|
4. Customers
|
period
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable Costing Income Statement
E 9. Vegan, LLC, owns a chain of gourmet vegetarian take-out markets. Last month, Store Q generated the following information: sales, $890,000; direct materials, $220,000; direct labor, $97,000; variable overhead, $150,000; fixed overhead, $130,000; variable selling and administrative expenses, $44,500; and fixed selling expenses, $82,300. There were no beginning or ending inventories. Average daily sales (25 business days) were $35,600. Customer orders processed totaled 15,000.
Vegan had budgeted monthly sales of $900,000; direct materials, $210,000; direct labor, $100,000; variable overhead, $140,000; fixed overhead, $140,000; variable selling and administrative expenses, $45,000; and fixed selling expenses, $60,000. Store Q had been projected to do $36,000 in daily sales and process 16,000 customer orders. Using this information, prepare a performance report for Store Q.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable Costing Income Statement
E 10. The income statement in the traditional reporting format for Green Products, Inc., for the year ended December 31, is as follows:
|
Sales
|
$296,400
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
112,750
|
|
Gross margin
|
$183,650
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
|
Variable
|
69,820
|
|
Fixed
|
36,980
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
27,410
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 49,440
|
Total fixed manufacturing costs for the year were $16,750. All administrative expenses are considered to be fixed.
Using this information, prepare an income statement for Green Products, Inc., for the year ended December 31, using the variable costing format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Report for a Cost Center
E 11. Archer, LLC, owns a blueberry processing plant. Last month, the plant generated the following information: blueberries processed, 50,000 pounds; direct materials, $50,000; direct labor, $10,000; variable overhead, $12,000; and fixed overhead, $13,000. There were no beginning or ending inventories. Average daily pounds processed (25 business days) were 2,000. Average rate of processing was 250 pounds per hour.
At the beginning of the month, Archer had budgeted costs of blueberries, $45,000; direct labor, $10,000; variable overhead, $14,000; and fixed overhead, $14,000. The monthly master budget was based on producing 50,000 pounds of blueberries each month. This means that the plant had been projected to process 2,000 pounds daily at the rate of 240 pounds per hour.
Using this information, prepare a performance report for the month for the blueberry processing plant. Include a flexible budget and a computation of variances in your report. Indicate whether the variances are favorable (F) or un favorable (U) to the performance of the plant.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
C-V-P Analysis Applied
Refer to the information in C 3. In January 2011, Sophia Callas, the president of Datura, Ltd., conducted a strategic planning meeting. During the meeting, Phillipe Mazzeo, vice president of distribution, noted that because of a new contract with an international shipping line, the company’s fixed distribution costs for 2011 would be reduced by 10 percent and its variable distribution costs by 4 percent. Gino Roma, vice president of sales, offered the following information:
We plan to sell 15,000 sets of pottery again in 2011, but based on review of the competition, we are going to lower the selling price to €890 per set. To encourage increased sales, we will raise sales commissions to 12 percent of the selling price.
Sophia Callas is concerned that the changes described by Roma and Mazzeo may not improve operating income sufficiently in 2011. If operating income does not increase by at least 10 percent, she will want to find other ways to reduce the company’s costs. She asks you to evaluate the situation in a written report. Because it is already January of 2011 and changes need to be made quickly, she requests your report within five days.
1. Prepare a budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011. Your report should show the budgeted (estimated) operating income based on the information provided above and in C 3. Will the changes improve operating income sufficiently? Explain.
2. In preparation for writing your report, answer the following questions:
a. Why are you preparing the report?
b. Who needs the report?
c. What sources of information will you use?
d. When is the report due?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning Future Sales
As noted in C 3, Datura, Ltd., sold 15,000 sets of pottery in 2010. As noted in C 4, in 2011, Datura’s strategic planning team targeted sales of 15,000 sets of pottery, reduced the selling price to €890 per set, increased sales commissions to 12 percent of the selling price, and decreased fixed distribution costs by 10 percent and variable distribution costs by 4 percent. It was assumed that all other costs would stay the same.
Based on an analysis of these changes, Sophia Callas, Datura’s president, is concerned that the proposed strategic plan will not meet her goal of increasing Datura’s operating income by 10 percent over last year’s income and that the operating income will be less than last year’s income. She has come to you for spreadsheet analysis of the proposed strategic plan and for analysis of a special order she just received from an Australian distributor for 4,500 sets of pottery. The order’s selling price, variable purchases cost per unit, sales commission, and total fixed costs will be the same as for the rest of the business, but the variable distribution costs will be €160 per unit.
Using an Excel spreadsheet, complete the following tasks:
1. Calculate the targeted operating income for 2011 using just the proposed strategic plan.
2. Prepare a budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011 based on just the strategic plan. Do you agree with Datura’s president that the company’s projected operating income for 2011 will be less than the operating income for 2010? Explain your answer.
3. Calculate the total contribution margin from the Australian sales.
4. Prepare a revised budgeted contribution margin income statement for 2011 that includes the Australian order. (Hint: Combine the information from 2 and 3 above.)
5. Does Datura need the Australian sales to achieve its targeted operating income for 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company
In this segment of our continuing “cookie company” case, you will classify the costs of the business as variable, fixed, or mixed; use the high-low method to evaluate utility costs; and prepare a contribution margin income statement.
1.Review your cookie recipe and the overhead costs you identified in Chapter 16, and classify the costs as variable, fixed, or mixed costs.
2. Obtain your electric bills for three months, and use the high-low method’s cost formula to determine the monthly cost of electricity—that is, monthly electric cost =variable rate per kilowatt-hour + monthly fixed cost. If you do not receive an electric bill, use the following information:
|
Month
|
Kilowatt-Hours Used
|
Electric Costs
|
|
August
|
1,439
|
$202
|
|
September
|
1,866
|
230
|
|
October
|
1,146
|
158
|
3. Prepare a daily contribution margin income statement based on the following assumptions:
Cookie Company makes only one kind of cookie and sells it for $1.00 per unit. The company projects sales of 500 units per day. Projected daily costs are as follows:
|
Type of Cost
|
Manufacturing
|
Nonmanufacturing
|
|
Variable
|
$100
|
$50
|
|
Non variable
|
120
|
60
|
a. What is the contribution margin ratio?
b. What volume, in terms of units, must the company sell to break even each day?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production Budget
Isobel Law, the controller for Aberdeen Lock Company, is preparing a production budget for the year. The company’s policy is to maintain a finished goods inventory equal to one-half of the following month’s sales. Sales of 7,000 locks are budgeted for April. Complete the monthly production budget for the first quarter:
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
Sales in units
|
5,000
|
4,000
|
6,000
|
|
Add desired units of ending
|
|
|
|
|
finished goods inventory
|
2,000
|
?
|
?
|
|
Desired total units
|
7,000
|
|
|
|
Less desired units of beginning
|
|
|
|
|
finished goods inventory
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total production units
|
4,500
|
?
|
?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
The projections of direct materials purchases that follow are for the Stromboli Corporation.
|
Purchases on Account
|
Cash Purchases
|
|
December, 2010
|
$40,000
|
$20,000
|
|
January, 2011
|
60,000
|
30,000
|
|
February, 2011
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
March, 2011
|
70,000
|
35,000
|
The company pays for 60 percent of purchases on account in the month of purchase and 40 percent in the month following the purchase. Prepare a monthly schedule of expected cash payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
Alberta Limited needs a cash budget for the month of November. The following information is available:
a. The cash balance on November 1 is $6,000.
b. Sales for October and November are $80,000 and $60,000, respectively. Cash collections on sales are 30 percent in the month of sale and 65 percent in the month after the sale; 5 percent of sales are uncollectible.
c. General expenses budgeted for November are $25,000 (depreciation represents $2,000 of this amount).
d. Inventory purchases will total $30,000 in October and $40,000 in November. The company pays for half of its inventory purchases in the month of purchase and for the other half the month after purchase.
e. The company will pay $4,000 in cash for office furniture in November. Sales commissions for November are budgeted at $12,000.
f. The company maintains a minimum ending cash balance of $4,000 and can borrow from the bank in multiples of $100. All loans are repaid after 60 days.
Prepare a cash budget for Alberta Limited for the month of November.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Budget
Quarterly and annual sales for this year for Steen Manufacturing Company follow. Prepare a sales budget for next year for the company based on the estimated percentage increases shown by product class. Show both quarterly and annual totals for each product class.
|
Steen Manufacturing Company
Actual Sales Revenue
For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Product Class
|
January– March
|
April– June
|
July– September
|
October– December
|
Annual by Totals
|
Estimated Percent Increases by Product Class
|
|
Marine
products
|
$ 44,500
|
$ 45,500
|
$ 48,200
|
$ 47,900
|
$ 186,100
|
10%
|
|
Mountain
products
|
36,900
|
32,600
|
34,100
|
37,200
|
140,800
|
5%
|
|
River
products
|
29,800
|
29,700
|
29,100
|
27,500
|
116,100
|
30%
|
|
Hiking
products
|
38,800
|
37,600
|
36,900
|
39,700
|
153,000
|
15%
|
|
Running
products
|
47,700
|
48,200
|
49,400
|
49,900
|
195,200
|
25%
|
|
Biking
products
|
65,400
|
65,900
|
66,600
|
67,300
|
265,200
|
20%
|
|
Totals
|
$263,100
|
$259,500
|
$264,300
|
$269,500
|
$1,056,400
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Labor Budget
Paige Metals Company has two departments—Cutting and Grinding—and manufactures three products. Budgeted unit production for the coming year is 21,000 of Product T, 36,000 of Product M, and 30,000 of Product B. The company is currently analyzing direct labor hour requirements for the coming year. Data for each department are as follows:
|
Estimated hours per unit
|
Cutting
|
Grinding
|
|
Product T
|
1.1
|
0.5
|
|
Product M
|
0.6
|
2.9
|
|
Product B
|
3.2
|
1.0
|
|
Hourly labor rate
|
$9
|
$7
|
Prepare a direct labor budget for the coming year that shows the budgeted direct labor costs for each department and for the company as a whole.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead Budget
Carole Dahl is chief financial officer of the Phoenix Division of Dahl Corporation, a multinational company with three operating divisions. As part of the budgeting process, Dahl’s staff is developing the overhead budget for next year. The division estimates that it will manufacture 50,000 units during the year. The budgeted cost information is as follows:
|
Variable Rate per Unit
|
Total Fixed Costs
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$1.00
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
4.00
|
|
|
Supplies
|
0.40
|
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
3.00
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Electricity
|
0.10
|
20,000
|
|
Factory supervision
|
|
180,000
|
|
Insurance
|
|
25,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
|
35,000
|
|
Depreciation–machinery
|
|
82,000
|
|
Depreciation–building
|
|
72,000
|
Using these data, prepare the division’s overhead budget for next year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Collections
Dacahr Bros., Inc., is an automobile maintenance and repair company with outlets throughout the western United States. Henley Turlington, the company controller, is starting to assemble the cash budget for the fourth quarter. Projected sales for the quarter are as follows:
|
On Account
|
Cash
|
|
October
|
$452,000
|
$196,800
|
|
November
|
590,000
|
214,000
|
|
December
|
720,500
|
218,400
|
Cash collection records pertaining to sales on account indicate the following collection pattern:
|
Month of sale
|
40%
|
|
First month following sale
|
30
|
|
Second month following sale
|
28
|
|
Uncollectible
|
2
|
Sales on account during August were $346,000. During September, sales on account were $395,000.
Compute the amount of cash to be collected from customers during each month of the fourth quarter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Collections
XYZ Company collects payment on 50 percent of credit sales in the month of sale, 40 percent in the month following sale, and 5 percent in the second month following the sale. Its sales budget is as follows:
|
Month
|
Cash Sales
|
Credit Sales
|
|
May
|
$20,000
|
$ 40,000
|
|
June
|
40,000
|
60,000
|
|
July
|
60,000
|
80,000
|
|
August
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
Compute XYZ Company’s total cash collections in July and its total cash collections in August.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
SABA Enterprises needs a cash budget for the month of June. The following information is available:
a. The cash balance on June 1 is $4,000.
b. Sales for May and June are $50,000 and $40,000, respectively. Cash collections on sales are 40 percent in the month of sale and 50 percent in the month after the sale; 10 percent of sales are uncollectible.
c. General expenses budgeted for June are $20,000 (depreciation represents $1,000 of this amount).
d. Inventory purchases will total $40,000 in May and $30,000 in June. The company pays for half of its inventory purchases in the month of purchase and for the other half the month after purchase.
e. The company will pay $5,000 in cash for office furniture in June. Sales commissions for June are budgeted at $6,000.
f. The company maintains a minimum ending cash balance of $4,000 and can borrow from the bank in multiples of $100. All loans are repaid after 60 days.
Prepare a cash budget for SABA Enterprises for the month of June.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
Tex Kinkaid’s dream was to develop the biggest produce operation with the widest selection of fresh fruits and vegetables in northern Texas. Within three years of opening Mini garden Produce, Inc., Kincaid accomplished his objective. Kinkaid has asked you to prepare monthly cash budgets for Mini garden Produce for the quarter ended September 30.
Credit sales to retailers in the area constitute 80 percent of Mini garden Produce’s business; cash sales to customers at the company’s retail outlet make up the other 20 percent. Collection records indicate that Mini garden Produce collects payment on 50 percent of all credit sales during the month of sale, 30 percent in the month after the sale, and 20 percent in the second month after the sale.
The company’s total sales in May were $66,000; in June, they were $67,500. Anticipated sales in July are $69,500; in August, $76,250; and in September, $84,250. The company’s purchases are expected to total $43,700 in July, $48,925 in August, and $55,725 in September. The company pays for all purchases in cash.
Projected monthly costs for the quarter include $1,040 for heat, light, and power; $375 for bank fees; $1,925 for rent; $1,120 for supplies; $1,705 for depreciation of equipment; $1,285 for equipment repairs; and $475 for miscellaneous expenses. Other projected costs for the quarter are salaries and wages of $18,370 in July, $19,200 in August, and $20,300 in September.
The company’s cash balance at June 30 was $2,745. It has a policy of maintaining a minimum monthly cash balance of $1,500.
1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Mini garden Produce, Inc., for the quarter ended September 30.
2. Should Mini garden Produce anticipate taking out a loan during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted Income Statement
Delft House, Inc., a multinational company based in Amsterdam, organizes and coordinates art shows and auctions throughout the world. Its budgeted and actual costs for last year are as follows:
|
Budgeted Cost
|
Actual Cost
|
|
Salaries expense, staging
|
€ 480,000
|
€ 512,800
|
|
Salaries expense, executive
|
380,000
|
447,200
|
|
Travel costs
|
640,000
|
652,020
|
|
Auctioneer services
|
540,000
|
449,820
|
|
Space rental costs
|
251,000
|
246,580
|
|
Printing costs
|
192,000
|
182,500
|
|
Advertising expense
|
169,000
|
183,280
|
|
Insurance, merchandise
|
84,800
|
77,300
|
|
Insurance, liability
|
64,000
|
67,100
|
|
Home office costs
|
209,200
|
219,880
|
|
Shipping costs
|
105,000
|
112,560
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
25,000
|
25,828
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
€3,140,000
|
€3,176,868
|
|
Net receipts
|
€6,200,000
|
€6,369,200
|
Delft House, Inc., has budgeted the following fixed costs for the coming year: executive salaries, €440,000; advertising expense, €190,000; merchandise insurance, €80,000; and liability insurance, €68,000. Additional information pertaining to the operations of Delft House, Inc., in the coming years is as follows:
a. Net receipts are estimated at €6,400,000.
b. Salaries expense for staging will increase 20 percent over the actual figures for the last year.
c. Travel costs are expected to be 11 percent of net receipts.
d. Auctioneer services will be billed at 9.5 percent of net receipts.
e. Space rental costs will be 20 percent higher than the amount budgeted in the last year.
f. Printing costs are expected to be €190,000.
g. Home office costs are budgeted for €230,000.
h. Shipping costs are expected to be 20 percent higher than the amount budgeted in the last year.
i. Miscellaneous expenses for the coming year will be budgeted at €28,000.
Because the company sells only services, it has expenses only and no cost of sales.
(Net receipts equal gross margin.)
1. Using a 40 percent income tax rate, prepare the company’s budgeted income statement for the coming year.
2. Should the budget committee be worried about the trend in the company’s operations? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing Operating Budgets
The principal product of Yangsoo Enterprises, Inc., is a multipurpose hammer that carries a lifetime guarantee. Listed next are cost and production data for the Yangsoo hammer.
Direct materials
Anodized steel: 2 kilograms per hammer at $1.60 per kilogram
Leather strapping for the handle: 0.5 square meter per hammer at $4.40 per square meter
Direct labor
Forging operation: $12.50 per labor hour; 6 minutes per hammer
Leather-wrapping operation: $12.00 per direct labor hour; 12 minutes per hammer Overhead
Forging operation: rate equals 70 percent of department’s direct labor dollars
Leather-wrapping operation: rate equals 50 percent of department’s direct labor dollars In October, November, and December, Yangsoo Enterprises expects to produce 108,000, 104,000, and 100,000 hammers, respectively. The company has no beginning or ending balances of direct materials inventory or work in process inventory for the year.
Required
1. For the three-month period ending December 31, prepare monthly production cost information for the Yangsoo hammer. Classify the costs as direct materials, direct labor, or overhead, and show your computations.
2. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured budget for the hammer. Show monthly cost data and combined totals for the quarter for each cost category.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Cash Budget
Felasco Nurseries, Inc.has been in business for six years and has four divisions. Ethan Poulis, the corporation’s controller, has been asked to prepare a cash budget for the Southern Division for the first quarter. Projected data supporting this budget follow.
|
Sales (60% on credit)
|
Purchases
|
|
November
|
$160,000
|
December
|
$ 86,800
|
|
December
|
200,000
|
January
|
124,700
|
|
January
|
120,000
|
February
|
99,440
|
|
February
|
160,000
|
March
|
104,800
|
|
March
|
140,000
|
|
|
Collection records of accounts receivable have shown that 30 percent of all credit sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent in the month following the sale, and 8 percent in the second month following the sale; 2 percent of the sales are uncollectible. All purchases are paid for in the month after the purchase. Salaries and wages are projected to be $25,200 in January, $33,200 in February, and $21,200 in March. Estimated monthly costs are utilities, $4,220; collection fees, $1,700; rent, $5,300; equipment depreciation, $5,440; supplies, $2,480; small tools, $3,140; and miscellaneous, $1,900.
Each of the corporation’s divisions maintains a $6,000 minimum cash balance. As of December 31, the Southern Division had a cash balance of $9,600.
Required
1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Felasco Nurseries’ Southern Division for the first quarter.
2. Should Felasco Nurseries anticipate taking out a loan for the Southern Division during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
Security Services Company provides security monitoring services. It employs five security specialists. Each specialist works an average of 160 hours a month. The company’s controller has compiled the following information:
|
Actual Data for Last Year
|
Forecasted Data for Next Year
|
|
Security
|
November
|
December
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
billings (sales)
|
$30,000
|
$35,000
|
$25,000
|
$20,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Selling and
administrative
|
10,000
|
11,000
|
9,000
|
8,000
|
10,500
|
|
expenses
Operating
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
supplies
Service
|
2,500
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
|
overhead
|
3,000
|
3,500
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
Sixty percent of the client billings are cash sales collected during the month of sale; 30 percent are collected in the first month following the sale; and 10 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. Operating supplies are paid for in the month of purchase. Selling and administrative expenses and service overhead are paid in the month following the cost’s incurrence.
The company has a bank loan of $12,000 at a 12 percent annual interest rate. Interest is paid monthly, and $2,000 of the loan principal is due on February 28. Income taxes of $4,500 for the last calendar year are due and payable on March 15. The five security specialists each earn $8.50 an hour, and all payroll-related employee benefit costs are included in service overhead. The company anticipates no capital expenditures for the first quarter of the coming year. It expects its cash balance on December 31 to be $13,000.
Required
Prepare a monthly cash budget for Security Services Company for the three month period ended March 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted Income Statement and Budgeted Balance Sheet
Moon trust Bank has asked the president of Wish ware Products, Inc., for a budgeted income statement and budgeted balance sheet for the quarter ended June 30. These pro forma financial statements are needed to support Wish ware Products’ request for a loan.
Wish ware Products routinely prepares a quarterly master budget. The operating budgets prepared for the quarter ending June 30 have provided the following information: Projected sales for April are $220,400; for May, $164,220; and for June, $165,980. Direct materials purchases for the period are estimated at $96,840; direct materials usage, at $102,710; direct labor expenses, at $71,460; overhead, at $79,940; selling and administrative expenses, at $143,740; capital expenditures, at $125,000 (to be spent on June 29); cost of goods manufactured, at $252,880; and cost of goods sold, at $251,700.
Balance sheet account balances at March 31 were as follows: Accounts Receivable, $26,500; Materials Inventory, $23,910; Work in Process Inventory, $31,620; Finished Goods Inventory, $36,220; Prepaid Expenses, $7,200; Plant, Furniture, and Fixtures, $498,600; Accumulated Depreciation–Plant, Furniture, and Fixtures, $141,162; Patents, $90,600; Accounts Payable, $39,600; Notes Payable, $105,500; Common Stock, $250,000; and Retained Earnings, $207,158.
Projected monthly cash balances for the second quarter are as follows: April 30, $20,490; May 31, $35,610; and June 30, $45,400. During the quarter, accounts receivable are expected to increase by 30 percent, patents to go up by $6,500, prepaid expenses to remain constant, and accounts payable to go down by 10 percent (Wish ware Products will make a $5,000 payment on a note payable, $4,100 of which is principal reduction). The federal income tax rate is 34 percent, and the second quarter’s tax is paid in July. Depreciation for the quarter will be $6,420, which is included in the overhead budget. The company will pay no dividends.
Required
1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the quarter ended June 30. Round answers to the nearest dollar.
2. Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Budget
FM Company provides fraud monitoring services. It employs four fraud specialists. Each specialist works an average of 200 hours a month. The company’s controller has compiled the following information:
|
Actual Data for Last Year
|
Forecasted Data for Next Year
|
|
November
|
December
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
Billings (sales)
|
$100,000
|
$80,000
|
$60,000
|
50,000
|
$70,000
|
|
Selling and
administrative
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
expenses
|
15,000
|
12,000
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
10,000
|
|
Operating
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
supplies
|
2,500
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
|
Service
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
overhead
|
14,000
|
13,500
|
13,000
|
12,500
|
13,000
|
Seventy percent of the client billings are cash sales collected during the month of sale; 20 percent are collected in the first month following the sale; and 10 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. Operating supplies are paid in the month of purchase. Selling and administrative expenses and service overhead are paid in the month the cost is incurred.
The company has a bank loan of $12,000 at a 6 percent annual interest rate. Interest is paid monthly, and $2,000 of the loan principal is due on February 28. Income taxes of $6,500 for last calendar year are due and payable on March 15. The four security specialists each earn $48.00 an hour, and all payroll-related employee benefit costs are included in service overhead. The company anticipates no capital expenditures for the first quarter of the coming year. It expects its cash balance on December 31 to be $10,000.
Required
Prepare a monthly cash budget for FM Company for the three-month period ended March 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted Income Statement and Budgeted Balance Sheet
Stillwater Video Company, Inc., produces and markets two popular video games, High Range and Star Boundary. The closing account balances on the company’s balance sheet for last year are as follows: Cash, $18,735; Accounts Receivable, $19,900; Materials Inventory, $18,510; Work in Process Inventory, $24,680; Finished Goods Inventory, $21,940; Prepaid Expenses, $3,420; Plant and Equipment, $262,800; Accumulated Depreciation–Plant and Equipment, $55,845; Other Assets, $9,480; Accounts Payable, $52,640; Mortgage Payable, $70,000; Common Stock, $90,000; and Retained Earnings, $110,980.
Operating budgets for the first quarter of the coming year show the following estimated costs: direct materials purchases, $58,100; direct materials usage, $62,400; direct labor expense, $42,880; overhead, $51,910; selling expenses, $35,820; general and administrative expenses, $60,240; cost of goods manufactured, $163,990; and cost of goods sold, $165,440. Estimated ending cash balances are as follows: January, $34,610; February, $60,190; and March, $54,802. The company will have no capital expenditures during the quarter.
Sales are projected to be $125,200 in January, $105,100 in February, and $112,600 in March. Accounts receivable are expected to double during the quarter, and accounts payable are expected to decrease by 20 percent. Mortgage payments for the quarter will total $6,000, of which $2,000 will be interest expense. Prepaid expenses are expected to go up by $20,000, and other assets are projected to increase by 50 percent over the budget period. Depreciation for plant and equipment (already included in the overhead budget) averages 5 percent of total plant and equipment per year. Federal income taxes (34 percent of profits) are payable in April. The company pays no dividends.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Analysis and Pricing
Mc Lennon Company has a plant capacity of 100,000 units per year, but its budget for this year indicates that only 60,000 units will be produced and sold. The entire budget for this year is as follows:
|
Sales (60,000 units at $4)
|
|
$240,000
|
|
Less cost of goods produced (based on
|
|
|
|
production of 60,000 units)
|
|
|
|
Direct materials (variable)
|
60,000
|
|
Direct labor (variable)
|
30,000
|
|
|
Variable over head costs
|
45,000
|
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
75,000
|
|
|
Total cost of goods produced
|
|
$210,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Less selling and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
Selling (fixed)
|
$24,000
|
|
|
Administrative (fixed)
|
$36,000
|
|
|
Total selling and administrative expenses
|
|
60,000
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
|
($30,000)
|
1. Given the budgeted selling price and cost data, how many units would McLennon have to sell to break even? (Hint: Be sure to consider selling and administrative expenses.)
2. Market research indicates that if Mc Lennon were to drop its selling price to $3.80 per unit, it could sell 100,000 units. Would you recommend the drop in price? What would the new operating income or loss be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Point for Multiple Products
Saline Aquarium, Inc. manufactures and sells aquariums, water pumps, and air filters. The sales mix is 1:2:2 (i.e., for every one aquarium sold, two water pumps and two air filters are sold). Using the contribution margin approach, find the breakeven point in units for each product. The company’s fixed costs are $26,000. Other information is as follows:
|
Selling Price per Unit
|
Variable Costs per Unit
|
|
Aquariums
|
$60
|
$25
|
|
Water pumps
|
20
|
$12
|
|
Air filters
|
10
|
3
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Point for Multiple Products
Hamburgers and More, Inc., sells hamburgers, drinks, and fries. The sales mix is 1:3:2 (i.e., for every one hamburger sold, three drinks and two fries are sold). Using the contribution margin approach, find the breakeven point in units for each product. The company’s fixed costs are $2,040. Other information is as follows:
|
Selling Price per Unit
|
Variable Costs per Unit
|
|
Hamburgers
|
$0.99
|
$0.27
|
|
Drinks
|
$1
|
$0
|
|
Fries
|
$1
|
$0
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales Mix Analysis
Ella Mae Simpson is the owner of a hairdressing salon in Palm Coast, Florida. Her salon provides three basic services: shampoo and set, permanents, and cut and blow dry. The following are its operating results from the past quarter:
|
Type of Service
|
Number of Customers
|
Total Sales
|
Contribution Margin in Dollars
|
|
Shampoo and set
|
$1,200.00
|
$24,000.00
|
$14,700
|
|
Permanents
|
$420
|
$21,000
|
15,120
|
|
Cut and blow dry
|
$1,000
|
$15,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
2,620
|
$60,000
|
$39,820
|
|
Profit
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
9,820
|
Compute the breakeven point in units based on the weighted-average contribution margin for the sales mix.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contribution Margin and Profit Planning
Target Systems, Inc., makes heat-seeking missiles. It has recently been offered a government contract from which it may realize a profit. The contract purchase price is $130,000 per missile, but the number of units to be purchased has not yet been decided. The company’s fixed costs are budgeted at $3,973,500, and variable costs are $68,500 per unit.
1. Compute the number of units the company should agree to make at the stated contract price to earn a profit of $1,500,000.
2. Using a lighter material, the variable unit cost can be reduced by $1,730, but total fixed overhead will increase by $27,500. How many units must be produced to make $1,500,000 in profit?
3. Given the figures in 2, how many additional units must be produced to increase profit by $1,264,600?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning Future Sales
Short-term automobile rentals are the specialty of ASAP Auto Rentals, Inc. Average variable operating costs have been $12.50 per day per automobile. The company owns 60 automobiles. Fixed operating costs for the next year are expected to be $145,500. Average daily rental revenue per automobile is expected to be $34.50. Management would like to earn a profit of $47,000 during the year.
1. Calculate the total number of daily rentals the company must have during the year to earn the targeted profit.
2. On the basis of your answer to 1, determine the average number of days each automobile must be rented.
3. Determine the total revenue needed to achieve the targeted profit of $47,000.
4. What would the total rental revenue be if fixed operating costs could be lowered by $5,180 and the targeted profit increased to $70,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Behavior in a Service Business
Luke Ricci, CPA, is the owner of a firm that provides tax services. The firm charges $50 per return for the direct professional labor involved in preparing standard short-form tax returns. In January, the firm prepared 850 such returns in February, 1,000; and in March, 700. Service overhead (telephone and utilities, depreciation on equipment and building, tax forms, office supplies, and wages of clerical personnel) for January was $18,500; for February, $20,000; and for March, $17,000.
1. Determine the variable and fixed cost components of the firm’s Service Overhead account.
2. What would the estimated total cost per tax return be if the firm prepares 825 standard short-form tax returns in April?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Behavior and Projection for a Service Business
Power Brite Painting Company specializes in refurbishing exterior painted surfaces that have been hard hit by humidity and insect debris. It uses a special technique, called pressure cleaning, before priming and painting the surface. The refurbishing process involves the following steps:
1. Unskilled laborers trim all trees and bushes within two feet of the structure.
2. Skilled laborers clean the building with a high-pressure cleaning machine, using about 6 gallons of chlorine per job.
3. Unskilled laborers apply a coat of primer.
4. Skilled laborers apply oil-based exterior paint to the entire surface.
On average, skilled laborers work 12 hours per job, and unskilled laborers work 8 hours. The refurbishing process generated the following operating results during the year on 628 jobs:
|
Skilled labor
|
$20 per hour
|
|
Unskilled labor
|
$8 per hour
|
|
Gallons of chlorine used
|
3,768 gallons at $5.50 per gallon
|
|
Paint primer
|
7,536 gallons at $15.50 per gallon
|
|
Paint
|
6,280 gallons at $16 per gallon
|
|
Depreciation of paint-spraying
|
$600 per month depreciation
|
|
equipment
|
|
|
Lease of two vans
|
$800 per month total
|
|
Rent on storage building
|
$450 per month
|
Data on utilities for the year are as follows:
|
Month
|
Number of Jobs
|
Cost
|
Hours Worked
|
|
January
|
42
|
$3,950
|
$840
|
|
February
|
37
|
3,550
|
$740
|
|
March
|
44
|
4,090
|
880
|
|
April
|
49
|
4,410
|
$980
|
|
May
|
54
|
4,720
|
1,080
|
|
June
|
62
|
5,240
|
$1,240
|
|
July
|
71
|
$5,820
|
1,420
|
|
August
|
73
|
$5,890
|
$1,460
|
|
September
|
63
|
5,370
|
1,260
|
|
October
|
48
|
$4,340
|
960
|
|
November
|
45
|
4,210
|
900
|
|
December
|
40
|
3,830
|
800
|
|
Totals
|
628
|
$55,420
|
12,560
|
Required
1. Classify the costs as variable, fixed, or mixed.
2. Using the high-low method, separate mixed costs into their variable and fixed components. Use total hours worked as the basis.
3. Compute the average cost per job for the year. (Hint: Divide the total of all costs for the year by the number of jobs completed.)
4. Project the average cost per job for next year if variable costs per job increase 20 percent.
5. Why can actual utility costs vary from the amount computed using the utilities cost formula (requirement 2)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Analysis
Luce & Morgan, a law firm in downtown Jefferson City, is considering opening a legal clinic for middle- and low-income clients. The clinic would bill at a rate of $18 per hour. It would employ law students as paraprofessional help and pay them $9 per hour. Other variable costs are anticipated to be $5.40 per hour, and annual fixed costs are expected to total $27,000.
Required
1. Compute the breakeven point in billable hours.
2. Compute the breakeven point in total billings.
3. Find the new breakeven point in total billings if fixed costs should go up by $2,340.
4. Using the original figures, compute the breakeven point in total billings if the billing rate decreases by $1 per hour, variable costs decrease by $0.40 per hour, and fixed costs go down by $3,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning Future Sales: Contribution Margin Approach
Icon Industries is considering a new product for its Trophy Division. The product, which would feature an alligator, is expected to have global market appeal and to become the mascot for many high school and university athletic teams. Expected variable unit costs are as follows: direct materials, $18.50; direct labor, $4.25; production supplies, $1.10; selling costs, $2.80; and other, $1.95. Annual fixed costs are depreciation, building, and equipment, $36,000; advertising, $45,000; and other, $11,400. Icon Industries plans to sell the product for $55.00.
Required
1.Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of units the company must sell to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $70,224.
2. Using the same data, compute the number of units that must be sold to earn a profit of $139,520 if advertising costs rise by $40,000.
3. Using the original information and sales of 10,000 units, compute the selling price the company must use to make a profit of $131,600. (Hint: Calculate contribution margin per unit first.)
4. According to the vice president of marketing, Albert Flora, the most optimistic annual sales estimate for the product would be 15,000 units, and the highest competitive selling price the company can charge is $52 per unit. How much more can be spent on fixed advertising costs if the selling price is $52, if the variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for 15,000 unit sales is $251,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales
Write Company has a maximum capacity of 200,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $12 per unit. Fixed overhead is $600,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $23 per unit.
Required
1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?
2. How many units must Write Company sell to earn a profit of $240,000 per year?
3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 160,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $841,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $23 per unit.
a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?
b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 130,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $210,000 this year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning Future Sales for a Service Business
Lending Hand Financial Corporation is a subsidiary of Gracey Enterprises. Its main business is processing loan applications. Last year, Bettina Brent, the manager of the corporation’s loan department, established a policy of charging a $250 fee for every loan application processed. Next year’s variable costs have been projected as follows: loan consultant’s wages, $15.50 per hour (a loan application takes 5 hours to process); supplies, $2.40 per application; and other variable costs, $5.60 per application. Annual fixed costs include depreciation of equipment, $8,500; building rental, $14,000; promotional costs, $12,500; and other fixed costs, $8,099.
Required
1. Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of loan applications the company must process to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $14,476.
2. Using the same approach and assuming promotional costs increase by $5,662, compute the number of applications the company must process to earn a profit of $20,000.
3. Assuming the original information and the processing of 500 applications, compute the loan application fee the company must charge if the targeted profit is $41,651.
4. Brent’s staff can handle a maximum of 750 loan applications. How much more can be spent on promotional costs if the highest fee tolerable to the customer is $280, if variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for the loan applications is $50,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mixed Costs
Officials of the Hidden Hills Golf and Tennis Club are in the process of preparing a budget for the year ending December 31. Because Ramon Saud, the club treasurer, has had difficulty with two expense items, the process has been delayed by more than four weeks. The two items are mixed costs—expenses for electricity and for repairs and maintenance—and Saud has been having trouble breaking them down into their variable and fixed components. An accountant friend has suggested that he use the high-low method to divide the costs into their variable and fixed parts. The spending patterns and activity measures related to each cost during the past year are as follows:
|
Electricity Expense
|
Repairs and Maintenance
|
|
Month
|
Amount
|
Kilowatt- Hours
|
Amount
|
Labor Hours
|
|
January
|
$ 7,500
|
210,000
|
$ 7,578
|
220
|
|
February
|
8,255
|
240,200
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
March
|
8,165
|
236,600
|
7,304
|
210
|
|
April
|
8,960
|
268,400
|
7,030
|
200
|
|
May
|
7,520
|
210,800
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
June
|
7,025
|
191,000
|
8,126
|
240
|
|
July
|
6,970
|
188,800
|
8,400
|
250
|
|
August
|
6,990
|
189,600
|
8,674
|
260
|
|
September
|
7,055
|
192,200
|
8,948
|
270
|
|
October
|
7,135
|
195,400
|
8,674
|
260
|
|
November
|
8,560
|
252,400
|
8,126
|
240
|
|
December
|
8,415
|
246,600
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
Totals
|
$92,550
|
2,622,000
|
$96,416
|
2,840
|
Required
1. Using the high-low method, compute the variable cost rates used last year for each expense. What was the monthly fixed cost for electricity and for repairs and maintenance?
2. Compute the total variable cost and total fixed cost for each expense category for last year.
3. Saud believes that in the coming year, the electricity rate will increase by $0.005 and the repairs rate, by $1.20. Usage of all items and their fixed cost amounts will remain constant. Compute the projected total cost for each category. How will the cost increases affect the club’s profits and cash flow?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mixed Costs
Officials of the Hidden Hills Golf and Tennis Club are in the process of preparing a budget for the year ending December 31. Because Ramon Saud, the club treasurer, has had difficulty with two expense items, the process has been delayed by more than four weeks. The two items are mixed costs—expenses for electricity and for repairs and maintenance—and Saud has been having trouble breaking them down into their variable and fixed components. An accountant friend has suggested that he use the high-low method to divide the costs into their variable and fixed parts. The spending patterns and activity measures related to each cost during the past year are as follows:
|
Electricity Expense
|
Repairs and Maintenance
|
|
Month
|
Amount
|
Kilowatt- Hours
|
Amount
|
Labor Hours
|
|
January
|
$ 7,500
|
210,000
|
$ 7,578
|
220
|
|
February
|
8,255
|
240,200
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
March
|
8,165
|
236,600
|
7,304
|
210
|
|
April
|
8,960
|
268,400
|
7,030
|
200
|
|
May
|
7,520
|
210,800
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
June
|
7,025
|
191,000
|
8,126
|
240
|
|
July
|
6,970
|
188,800
|
8,400
|
250
|
|
August
|
6,990
|
189,600
|
8,674
|
260
|
|
September
|
7,055
|
192,200
|
8,948
|
270
|
|
October
|
7,135
|
195,400
|
8,674
|
260
|
|
November
|
8,560
|
252,400
|
8,126
|
240
|
|
December
|
8,415
|
246,600
|
7,852
|
230
|
|
Totals
|
$92,550
|
2,622,000
|
$96,416
|
2,840
|
Required
1. Using the high-low method, compute the variable cost rates used last year for each expense. What was the monthly fixed cost for electricity and for repairs and maintenance?
2. Compute the total variable cost and total fixed cost for each expense category for last year.
3. Saud believes that in the coming year, the electricity rate will increase by $0.005 and the repairs rate, by $1.20. Usage of all items and their fixed cost amounts will remain constant. Compute the projected total cost for each category. How will the cost increases affect the club’s profits and cash flow?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Analysis
At the beginning of each year, the Accounting Department at Moon Glow Lighting, Ltd., must find the point at which projected sales revenue will equal total budgeted variable and fixed costs. The company produces custom-made, low voltage outdoor lighting systems. Each system sells for an average of $435. Variable costs per unit are $210. Total fixed costs for the year are estimated to be $166,500.
Required
1. Compute the breakeven point in sales units.
2. Compute the breakeven point in sales dollars.
3. Find the new breakeven point in sales units if the fixed costs go up by $10,125.
4. Using the original figures, compute the breakeven point in sales units if the selling price decreases to $425 per unit, fixed costs go up by $15,200, and variable costs decrease by $15 per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales
Peerless Company has a maximum capacity of 500,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $25 per unit. Fixed overhead is $900,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $36 per unit.
Required
1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?
2. How many units must Peerless Company sell to earn a profit of $600,000 per year?
3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 400,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $1,000,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $36 per unit.
a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?
b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 370,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $300,000 this year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning Future Sales for a Service Business
Home Mortgage Inc.’s primary business is processing mortgage loan applications. Last year, Jenna Jason, the manager of the mortgage application department, established a policy of charging a $500 fee for every loan application processed. Next year’s variable costs have been projected as follows: mortgage processor wages, $30 per hour (a mortgage application takes 3 hours to process); supplies, $10 per application; and other variable costs, $15 per application. Annual fixed costs include depreciation of equipment, $5,000; building rental, $34,000; promotional costs, $45,000; and other fixed costs, $20,000.
Required
1. Using the contribution margin approach, compute the number of loan applications the company must process to (a) break even and (b) earn a profit of $50,000.
2. Using the same approach and assuming promotional costs increase by $5,400, compute the number of applications the company must process to earn a profit of $60,000.
3. Assuming the original information and the processing of 500 applications, compute the loan application fee the company must charge if the targeted profit is $40,000.
4. Jason’s staff can handle a maximum of 750 loan applications. How much more can be spent on promotional costs if the highest fee tolerable to the customer is $400, if variable costs cannot be reduced, and if the targeted profit for the loan applications is $50,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breaking Even and Ethics
Lesley Chomski is the supervisor of the New Product Division of MCO Corporation. Her annual bonus is based on the success of new products and is computed on the number of sales that exceed each new product’s projected breakeven point. In reviewing the computations supporting her most recent bonus, Chomski found that although an order for 7,500 units of a new product called R56 had been refused by a customer and returned to the company, the order had been included in the bonus calculations. She later discovered that the company’s accountant had labeled the return an overhead expense and had charged the entire cost of the returned order to the plant wide Overhead account. The result was that product R56 appeared to exceed breakeven by more than 5,000 units and Chomski’s bonus from this product amounted to over $1,000. What actions should Chomski take? Be prepared to discuss your response in class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Behavior and Contribution Margin
Visit a local fast-food restaurant. Observe all aspects of the operation and take notes on the entire process. Describe the procedures used to take, process, and fill an order and deliver the order to the customer. Based on your observations, make a list of the costs incurred by the operation. Identify at least three variable costs and three fixed costs. Can you identify any potential mixed costs? Why is the restaurant willing to sell a large drink for only a few cents more than a medium drink? How is the restaurant able to offer a “value meal” (e.g., sandwich, drink, and fries) for considerably less than those items would cost if they were bought separately? Bring your notes to class and be prepared to discuss your findings.
Your instructor will divide the class into groups to discuss the case. Summarize your group’s discussion, and ask one member of the group to present the summary to the rest of the class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
C-V-P Analysis
Based in Italy, Datura, Ltd., is an international importer-exporter of pottery with distribution centers in the United States, Europe, and Australia. The company was very successful in its early years, but its profitability has since declined. As a member of a management team selected to gather information for Datura’s next strategic planning meeting, you have been asked to review its most recent contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010, which appears below.
|
Datura, Ltd.
Contribution Margin Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
€13,500,000
|
|
Less variable costs
|
|
|
|
Purchases
|
€6,000,000
|
|
|
Distribution
|
2,115,000
|
|
|
Sales commissions
|
1,410,000
|
|
|
Total variable costs
|
|
9,525,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
€ 3,975,000
|
|
Less fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Distribution
|
€ 985,000
|
|
|
Selling
|
1,184,000
|
|
|
General and administrative
|
871,875
|
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
|
3,040,875
|
|
Operating income
|
|
€ 934,125
|
In 2010, Datura sold 15,000 sets of pottery.
1. For each set of pottery sold in 2010, calculate the (a) selling price, (b) variable purchases cost, (c) variable distribution cost, (d) variable sales commission, and (e) contribution margin.
2. Calculate the breakeven point in units and in sales euros.
3. Historically, Datura’s variable costs have been about 60 percent of sales. What was the ratio of variable costs to sales in 2010? List three actions Datura could take to correct the difference.
4. How would fixed costs have been affected if Datura had sold only 14,000 sets of pottery in 2010?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity-Based Costing
Boulware Products, Inc. produces printers for wholesale distributors. It has just completed packaging an order from Shawl Company for 450 printers. Before the order is shipped, the controller wants to compare the unit costs computed under the company’s new activity-based costing system with the unit costs computed under its traditional costing system. Boulware’s traditional costing system assigned overhead costs at a rate of 240 percent of direct labor cost.
Data for the Shawl order are as follows: direct materials, $17,552; purchased parts, $14,856; direct labor hours, 140; and average direct labor pay rate per hour, $17.
Data for activity-based costing related to processing direct materials and purchased parts for the Shawl order are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Activity Cost Rate
|
Activity Usage
|
|
Engineering
|
Engineering
|
$28 per engineering
|
18 engineering
|
|
systems design
|
hours
|
hour
|
hours
|
|
Setup
|
Number of
|
$36 per setup
|
12 setups
|
|
|
setups
|
|
82 machine
|
|
Parts production
|
Machine hours
|
$37 per machine hour
|
hours
|
|
Product assembly
|
Assembly hours
|
$42 per assembly hour
|
96 assembly hours
|
|
Packaging
|
Number of
|
$5.60 per package
|
150 packages
|
|
|
packages
|
|
|
|
Building
|
Machine hours
|
$10 per machine
|
82 machine
|
|
occupancy
|
|
hour
|
hours
|
Required
1. Use the traditional costing approach to compute the total cost and the product unit cost of the Shawl order.
2. Using the cost hierarchy, identify each activity as unit level, batch level, product level, or facility level.
3. Prepare a bill of activities for the activity costs.
4. Use ABC to compute the total cost and product unit cost of the Shawl order.
5. What is the difference between the product unit cost you computed using the traditional approach and the one you computed using ABC? Does the use of ABC guarantee cost reduction for every order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity Cost Rates
Noir Company produces four versions of its model J17-21 bicycle seat. The four versions have different shapes, but their processing operations and production costs are identical. During July, these costs were incurred:
|
Direct materials
|
|
Leather
|
$25,430
|
|
Metal frame
|
39,180
|
|
Bolts
|
3,010
|
|
Materials handling
|
|
|
Labor
|
8,232
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
4,410
|
|
Electrical power
|
2,460
|
|
Maintenance
|
5,184
|
|
Assembly
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
Engineering design
|
4,116
|
|
Labor
|
1,176
|
|
Electrical power
|
7,644
|
|
Engineering overhead
|
|
|
Overhead
|
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
7,056
|
|
Indirect labor
|
30,870
|
|
Supervision
|
17,640
|
|
Operating supplies
|
4,410
|
|
Electrical power
|
10,584
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
21,168
|
|
Building occupancy overhead
|
52,920
|
July’s output totaled 29,400 units. Each unit requires three machine hours of effort. Materials handling costs are allocated to the products based on direct materials cost, engineering design costs are allocated based on units produced, and overhead is allocated based on machine hours. Assembly costs are allocated based on direct labor hours, which are estimated at 882 for July.
During July, Noir Company completed 520 bicycle seats for Job 142. The activity usage for Job 142 was as follows: direct materials, $1,150; direct labor hours, 15.
Required
1.Compute the following activity cost rates: (a) materials handling cost rate; (b) assembly cost rate, (c) engineering design cost rate, and (d) overhead rate.
2. Prepare a bill of activities for Job 142.
3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job’s total cost and product unit cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct and Indirect Costs in Lean and Traditional Manufacturing Environments
Funz Company, which produces wooden toys, is about to adopt a lean operating environment. In anticipation of the change, Letty Hernandez, Funz’s controller, prepared the following list of costs for December:
|
Wood
|
$1,200
|
Insurance–plant
|
$ 324
|
|
Bolts
|
32
|
President’s salary
|
4,000
|
|
Small tools
|
54
|
Engineering labor
|
2,700
|
|
Depreciation–plant
|
450
|
Utilities
|
1,250
|
|
Depreciation–machinery
|
275
|
Building occupancy
|
1,740
|
|
Direct labor
|
2,675
|
Supervision
|
2,686
|
|
Indirect labor
|
890
|
Operating supplies
|
254
|
|
Purchased parts
|
58
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
198
|
|
Materials handling
|
74
|
Employee benefits
|
2,654
|
Required
1. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a traditional manufacturing setting.
2. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a lean environment.
3. Assume that the costs incurred in the lean environment are for a work cell that completed 1,250 toy cars in December. Compute the total direct cost and the direct cost per unit for the cars produced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Back flush Costing
Automotive Parts Company produces 12 parts for car bodies and sells them to three automobile assembly companies in the United States. The company implemented lean operating and costing procedures three years ago. Overhead is applied at a rate of $26 per work cell hour used. All direct materials and purchased parts are used as they are received.
One of the company’s work cells produces automobile fenders that are completely detailed and ready to install when received by the customer. The cell is operated by four employees and involves a flexible manufacturing system with 14 workstations. Operating details for February for this cell are as follows:
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
—
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
$420
|
|
Cost of direct materials purchased
|
|
|
on account and used
|
$213,400
|
|
Cost of parts purchased on account
|
|
|
and used
|
$111,250
|
|
Direct labor costs incurred
|
$26,450
|
|
Overhead costs assigned
|
?
|
|
Work cell hours used
|
8,260
|
|
Costs of goods completed during
|
|
|
February
|
$564,650
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
$1,210
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
$670
|
Required
1. Using T accounts, show the cost flows through a back flush costing system.
2. Using T accounts, show the cost flows through a traditional costing system.
3. What is the total cost of goods sold for the month?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain and Process Value Analysis
Direct Marketing Inc. (DMI) offers database marketing strategies to help companies increase their sales. DMI’s basic package of services includes the design of a mailing piece (either a Direct Mailer or a Store Mailer), creation and maintenance of marketing databases containing information about the client’s target group, and a production process that prints a promotional piece and prepares it for mailing. In its marketing strategies, DMI targets working women ages 25 to 54 who are married with children and who have an annual household income in excess of $50,000. DMI has adopted activity-based management, and its controller is in the process of developing an ABC system. The controller has identified the following primary activities of the company:
|
Use database of customers
|
Accounting
|
|
Service sales
|
Mailer assembly
|
|
Deliver mailers to post office
|
Process orders
|
|
Supplies storage
|
Purchase supplies
|
|
Client follow-up
|
Design mailer
|
|
Database research trends
|
Building maintenance
|
|
Schedule order processing
|
Processing cleanup
|
|
Personnel
|
Mailer rework
|
Required
1. Identify the activities that do not add value to DMI’s services.
2. Assist the controller’s analysis by grouping the value-adding activities into the activity areas of the value chain
3. State whether each non-value-adding activity is necessary or unnecessary. Suggest how each unnecessary activity could be reduced or eliminated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity-Based Costing
Kauli Company produces cellular phones. It has just completed an order for 10,000 phones placed by Stay Connect, Ltd. Kauli recently shifted to an activity based costing system, and its controller is interested in the impact that the ABC system had on the Stay Connect order. Data for that order are as follows: direct materials, $36,950; purchased parts, $21,100; direct labor hours, 220; average direct labor pay rate per hour, $15.
Under Kauli’s traditional costing system, overhead costs were assigned at a rate of 270 percent of direct labor cost.
Data for activity-based costing for the Stay Connect order are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Activity Cost Rate
|
Activity Usage
|
|
Electrical
|
Engineering hours
|
$19 per engineering
|
32 engineering
|
|
engineering design
|
|
hour
|
hours
|
|
Setup
|
Number of setups
|
$29 per setup
|
11 setups
|
|
Parts production
|
Machine hours
|
$26 per machine
|
134 machine
|
|
|
|
hour
|
hours
|
|
Product testing
|
Number of tests
|
$32 per test
|
52 tests
|
|
Packaging
|
Number of
|
$0.0374 per package
|
10,000
|
|
|
packages
|
|
packages
|
|
Building occupancy
|
Machine hours
|
$9.80 per machine
|
134 machine
|
|
|
|
hour
|
hours
|
|
Assembly
|
Direct labor hours
|
$15 per direct labor
|
220 direct
|
|
|
hour
|
labor hours
|
Required
1. Use the traditional costing approach to compute the total cost and the product unit cost of the Stay Connect order.
2. Using the cost hierarchy, identify each activity as unit level, batch level, product level, or facility level.
3. Prepare a bill of activities for the activity costs.
4. Use ABC to compute the total cost and product unit cost of the Stay Connect order.
5. What is the difference between the product unit cost you computed using the traditional approach and the one you computed using ABC? Does the use of ABC guarantee cost reduction for every order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity Cost Rates
Meanwhile Company produces three models of aluminum skateboards. The models have minor differences, but their processing operations and production costs are identical. During June, these costs were incurred:
|
Direct materials
|
|
Aluminum frame
|
$162,524
|
|
Bolts
|
3,876
|
|
Purchased parts
|
|
|
Wheels
|
74,934
|
|
Decals
|
5,066
|
|
Materials handling (assigned based on direct materials cost)
|
|
Labor
|
17,068
|
|
Utilities
|
4,438
|
|
Maintenance
|
914
|
|
Depreciation
|
876
|
|
Assembly line (assigned based on labor hours)
|
|
Labor
|
Labor
|
|
Setup (assigned based on number of setups)
|
|
Labor
|
6,385
|
|
Supplies
|
762
|
|
Overhead
|
3,953
|
|
Product testing (assigned based on number of tests)
|
|
Labor
|
2,765
|
|
Supplies
|
435
|
|
Building occupancy (assigned based on machine hours)
|
|
Insurance
|
5,767
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,452
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
3,781
|
For June, output totaled 32,000 skateboards. Each board required 1.5 machine hours of effort. During June, Mean while’s assembly line worked 2,304 hours, performed 370 setups and 64,000 product tests, and completed an order for 1,000 skateboards placed by Whatever Toys Company. The job incurred costs of $5,200 for direct materials and $2,500 for purchased parts. It required 3 setups, 2,000 tests, and 72 assembly line hours.
Required
1. Compute the following activity cost rates:
a. Materials handling cost rate
b. Assembly line cost rate
c. Setup cost rate
d. Product testing cost rate
e. Building occupancy cost rate
2. Prepare a bill of activities for the Whatever Toys job.
3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job’s total cost and product unit cost. (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct and Indirect Costs in Lean and Traditional Manufacturing Environments
Caffene Company, which processes coffee beans into ground coffee, is about to adopt a lean operating environment. In anticipation of the change, Hattie Peralto, Caffene’s controller, prepared the following list of costs for the month:
|
Coffee beans
|
$5,000
|
Insurance–plant
|
$ 300
|
|
Bags
|
100
|
President’s salary
|
4,000
|
|
Small tools
|
80
|
Engineering labor
|
1,700
|
|
Depreciation–plant
|
400
|
Utilities
|
1,250
|
|
Depreciation–grinder
|
200
|
Building occupancy
|
1,940
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,000
|
Supervision
|
400
|
|
Indirect labor
|
300
|
Operating supplies
|
205
|
|
Labels
|
20
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
120
|
|
Materials handling
|
75
|
Employee benefits
|
500
|
Required
1. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a traditional manufacturing setting.
2. Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in a just-in-time (JIT) environment.
3. Assume that the costs incurred in the JIT environment are for a work cell that completed 5,000 1-pound bags of coffee during the month. Compute the total direct cost and the direct cost per unit for the bags produced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Back flush Costing
Reilly Corporation produces metal fasteners using six work cells, one for each of its product lines. It implemented just-in-time operations and costing methods two years ago. Overhead is assigned using a rate of $14 per machine hour for the Machine Snap Work Cell. There were no beginning inventories on April 1. All direct materials and purchased parts are used as they are received. Operating details for April for the Machine Snap Work Cell are as follows:
|
Cost of direct materials purchased on account and used
|
$104,500
|
|
Cost of parts purchased on account and used
|
$78,900
|
|
Direct labor costs incurred
|
$39,000
|
|
Overhead costs assigned
|
?
|
|
Machine hours used
|
12,220
|
|
Costs of goods completed during April
|
$392,540
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
$940
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
$1,020
|
Required
1. Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through a back flush costing system.
2. Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through a traditional costing system.
3. What is the total cost of goods sold for April using a traditional costing system?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABM and ABC in a Service Business
MUF, a CPA firm, has provided audit and tax services to businesses in the London area for over 50 years. Recently, the firm decided to use ABM and activity-based costing to assign its overhead costs to those service functions. Gemma Fior, the company’s controller, is interested in seeing how the change from the traditional to the activity-based costing approach affects the average cost per audit job. The following information has been provided to assist in the comparison:
|
Total direct labor costs
|
£400,000
|
|
Other direct costs
|
120,000
|
|
Total direct costs
|
£520,000
|
The traditional costing approach assigned overhead costs at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor costs.
Data for activity-based costing of the audit function are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Activity Cost Rate
|
Activity Usage
|
|
Professional
|
Number of
|
£2,000 per
|
50 employees
|
|
development
|
employees
|
employee
|
|
|
Administration
|
Number of jobs
|
£1,000 per job
|
50 jobs
|
|
Client
|
Number of new
|
£5,000 per new
|
29 new clients
|
|
development
|
clients
|
client
|
|
1. Using direct labor cost as the cost driver, calculate the total costs for the audit function. What is the average cost per job?
2. Using activity-based costing to assign overhead, calculate the total costs for the audit function. What is the average cost per job?
3. Calculate the difference in total costs between the two approaches. Why would activity-based costing be the better approach for assigning over head to the audit function?
4. Your instructor will divide the class into groups to work through the case. One student from each group should present the group’s findings to the class.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC and Selling and Administrative Expenses
Sandee Star, the owner of Star Bakery, wants to know the profitability of each of her bakery’s customer groups. She is especially interested in the State Institutions customer group, which is one of the company’s largest. Currently, the bakery is selling doughnuts and snack foods to ten state institutions in three states. The controller has prepared the following income statement for the State Institutions customer group:
|
Star Bakery
Income Statement for State Institutions Customer Group
For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Sales ($5 per case × 50,000 cases)
|
$250,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold ($3.50 per case ×50,000 cases)
|
175,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
$75,000
|
|
Less: Selling and administrative activity costs
|
94,750
|
|
Operating income (loss) contributed by State Institutions
|
|
|
customer group
|
($19,750)
|
|
Activity
|
Activity Cost Rate
|
Actual Cost Driver Level
|
Activity Cost
|
|
Make sales calls
|
$60 per sales call
|
60 sales calls
|
$3,600
|
|
Prepare sales orders
|
10 per sales order
|
900 sales orders
|
9,000
|
|
Handle inquiries
|
5 per minute
|
1,000 minutes
|
5,000
|
|
Ship products
|
1 per case sold
|
50,000 cases
|
50,000
|
|
Process invoices
|
20 per invoice
|
950 invoices
|
19,000
|
|
Process credits
|
20 per notice
|
40 notices
|
800
|
|
Process billings and collections
|
7 per billing
|
1,050 billings
|
7,350
|
|
Total selling and administrative activity costs
|
$94,750
|
The controller has also provided budgeted information about selling and administrative activities for the State Institutions customer group. For this year, the planned activity cost rates and the annual cost driver levels for each selling and administrative activity are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Planned Activity Cost Rate
|
Planned Annual Cost Driver Level
|
|
Make sales calls
|
$60 per sales call
|
59 sales calls
|
|
Prepare sales orders
|
10 per sales order
|
850 sales orders
|
|
Handle inquiries
|
5.10 per minute
|
1,000 minutes
|
|
Ship products
|
0.60 per case sold
|
50,000 cases
|
|
Process invoices
|
1 per invoice
|
500 invoices
|
|
Process credits
|
10 per notice
|
5 notices
|
|
Process billings and
|
4 per billing
|
600 billings
|
|
collections
|
You have been called in as a consultant on the State Institutions customer group.
1. Calculate the planned activity cost for each activity.
2. Calculate the differences between the planned activity cost and the State Institutions customer group’s activity costs for this year.
3. From your evaluation of the differences calculated in 2 and your review of the income statement, identify the non-value-adding activities and state which selling and administrative activities should be examined.
4. What actions might the company take to reduce the costs of non-value adding selling and administrative activities?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC in Planning and Control
Refer to the income statement in C 2 for the State Institutions customer group for the year ended December 31. Sandee Star, the owner of Star Bakery, is in the process of budgeting income for next year. She has asked the controller to prepare a budgeted income statement for the State Institutions customer group. She estimates that the selling price per case, the number of cases sold, the cost of goods sold per case, and the activity costs for making sales calls, preparing sales orders, and handling inquiries will remain the same next year. She has contracted with a new freight company to ship the 50,000 cases at $0.60 per case sold. She has also analyzed the procedures for invoicing, processing credits, billing, and collecting and has decided that it would be less expensive for a customer service agency to do the work. The agency will charge the bakery 1.5 percent of the total sales revenue.
1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the State Institutions customer group for next year; the year ends December 31.
2. Assuming that the planned activity cost rate and planned annual cost driver level for each selling and administrative activity remain the same next year, calculate the planned activity cost for each activity.
3. Calculate the differences between the planned activity costs (determined in 2) and the State Institutions customer group’s budgeted activity costs for next year (determined in 1) .4. Evaluate the results of changing freight companies and outsourcing the customer service activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lean in a Service Business
The initiation banquet for new members of your business club is being held at an excellent restaurant. You are sitting next to two college students who are majoring in marketing. In discussing the accounting course they are taking, they mention that they are having difficulty understanding the lean philosophy. They have read that the elements of a company’s operating system support the concepts of simplicity, continuous improvement, waste reduction, timeliness, and efficiency. They realize that to understand lean thinking in a complex manufacturing environment, they must first understand lean in a simpler context. They ask you to explain the philosophy and provide an example. Briefly explain the lean philosophy. Apply the elements of a JIT operating system to the restaurant where the banquet is being held. Do you believe the lean philosophy applies in all restaurant operations? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activities, Cost Drivers, and JIT
Fifteen years ago, Bruce Sable, together with 10 financial supporters, founded Sable Corporation. Located in Atlanta, the company originally manufactured roller skates, but 12 years ago, on the advice of its marketing department, it switched to making skateboards. More than 4 million skateboards later, Sable Corporation finds itself an industry leader in both volume and quality. To retain market share, it has decided to automate its manufacturing process. It has ordered flexible manufacturing systems for wheel assembly and board shaping. Manual operations will be retained for board decorating because some hand painting is involved. All operations will be converted to a just-in-time environment.
Bruce Sable wants to know how the JIT approach will affect the company’s product costing practices and has called you in as a consultant.
1. Summarize the elements of a JIT environment.
2. How will the automated systems change product costing?
3. What are some cost drivers that the company should employ? In what situations should it employ them?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company
As we continue with this case, assume that your company has been using a continuous manufacturing process to make chocolate chip cookies. Demand has been so great that the company has built a special plant that makes only custom ordered cookies. The cookies are shaped by machines but vary according to the customer’s specific instructions. Ten basic sizes of cookies are produced and then customized. Slight variations in machine setup produce the different sizes.
In the past six months, several problems have developed. Even though a computer- controlled machine is used in the manufacturing process, the company’s backlog is growing rapidly, and customers are complaining that delivery is too slow. Quality is declining because cookies are being pushed through production without proper inspection. Working capital is tied up in excessive amounts of inventory and storage space. Workers are complaining about the pressure to produce the backlogged orders. Machine breakdowns are increasing. Production control reports are not useful because they are not timely and contain irrelevant information. The company’s profitability and cash flow are suffering.
Assume that you have been appointed CEO and that the company has asked you to analyze its problems. The board of directors asks that you complete your preliminary analysis quickly so that you can present it to the board at its midyear meeting.
1. In memo form, prepare a preliminary report recommending specific changes in the manufacturing processes.
2. In preparing the report, answer the following questions:
a. Why are you preparing the report? What is its purpose?
b. Who is the audience for this report?
c. What kinds of information do you need to prepare the report, and where will you find it (i.e., what sources will you use)?
d. When do you need to obtain the information?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identification of Variable, Fixed, and Mixed Costs
Identify the following as (a) fixed costs, (b) variable costs, or (c) mixed costs:
|
1. Direct materials
|
4. Personnel manager’s salary
|
|
2. Electricity
|
5. Factory building rent
|
|
3. Operating supplies
|
Mixed Costs: High-Low Method
Using the high-low method and the following information, compute the monthly variable cost per telephone hour and total fixed costs for Sadiko Corporation
|
Month
|
Telephone Hours Used
|
Telephone Costs
|
|
April
|
96
|
$4,350
|
|
May
|
93
|
$4,230
|
|
June
|
105
|
4,710
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identification of Variable and Fixed Costs
Indicate whether each of the following costs of productive output is usually (a) variable or (b) fixed:
1. Packing materials for stereo components
2. Real estate taxes
3. Gasoline for a delivery truck
4. Property insurance
5. Depreciation expense of buildings (calculated with the straight-line method)
6. Supplies
7. Indirect materials
8. Bottles used to package liquids
9. License fees for company cars
10. Wiring used in radios
11. Machine helper’s wages
12. Wood used in bookcases
13. City operating license
14. Machine depreciation based on machine hours used
15. Machine operator’s hourly wages
16. Cost of required outside inspection of each unit produced
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable Cost Analysis
Zero Time Oil Change has been in business for six months. The company pays $0.50 per quart for the oil it uses in servicing cars. Each job requires an average of 4 quarts of oil. The company estimates that in the next three months, it will service 240, 288, and 360 cars.
1.Compute the cost of oil for each of the three months and the total cost for all three months.
|
Month
|
Volume in Machine Hours
|
Electricity Cost
|
|
July
|
6,000
|
$60,000
|
|
August
|
5,000
|
53,000
|
|
September
|
4,500
|
49,500
|
|
October
|
4,000
|
46,000
|
|
November
|
3,500
|
42,500
|
|
December
|
3,000
|
39,000
|
|
Six-month total
|
26,000
|
$290,000
|
Using the high-low method, determine the variable electricity cost per machine hour and the monthly fixed electricity cost. Estimate the total variable electricity costs and fixed electricity costs if 4,800 machine hours are projected to be used next month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contribution Margin Income Statement and Ratio
Senora Company manufactures a single product that sells for $110 per unit. The company projects sales of 500 units per month. Projected costs are as follows:
|
Type of Cost
|
Manufacturing
|
Non manufacturing
|
|
Variable
|
$10,000
|
$5,000
|
|
Non variable
|
12,500
|
$7,500
|
1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the month.
2. What is the contribution margin ratio?
3. What volume, in terms of units, must the company sell to break even?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contribution Margin Income Statement and C-V-P Analysis
Using the data in the contribution margin income statement for Sedona, Inc., that appears at the top of the next page, calculate (1) selling price per unit, (2) variable costs per unit, and (3) breakeven point in units and in sales dollars.
|
Sedona, Inc. Contribution Margin Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31
|
|
Sales (10,000 units)
|
|
$16,000,000
|
|
Less variable costs
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
8,000,000
|
|
|
Selling, administrative, and general
|
$4,000,000
|
|
|
Total variable costs
|
|
12,000,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
$4,000,000
|
|
Less fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
$1,200,000
|
|
|
Selling, administrative, and general
|
800,000
|
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
$2,000,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement and other selected data for the Boyer Company are shown below:
|
BOYER COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
$19,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
$ 2,300
|
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
12,000
|
14,300
|
|
Operating income
|
|
4,700
|
|
Loss on sale of land
|
|
1,500
|
|
Income before tax expense
|
|
3,200
|
|
|
Tax expense
|
|
1,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$2,200
|
|
Supplemental information:
|
|
|
|
|
a. Dividends declared and paid
|
|
$ 800
|
|
|
b. Land purchased
|
|
3,000
|
|
c. Land sold
|
|
500
|
|
d. Equipment purchased
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
e. Bonds payable retired
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
f. Common stock sold
|
|
1,400
|
|
g. Land acquired in exchange for common stock
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
h. Increase in accounts receivable
|
|
400
|
|
|
i. Increase in inventories
|
|
800
|
|
|
j. Increase in accounts payable
|
|
500
|
|
|
k. Decrease in income taxes payable
|
|
400
|
|
Required a. Prepare a schedule of change from an accrual basis to a cash basis income statement.
b. Using the schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis income statement computed in (a), present the cash provided by operations, using (1) the direct approach and (2) the indirect approach.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sampson Company’s balance sheet for December 31, 2002, as well as the income statement, for the year ended December 31, 2002, are on the following page.
Required a. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, using the indirect method for net cash flow from operating activities.
b. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, using the direct method for net cash flow from operating activities.
c. Comment on significant items disclosed in the statement of cash flows.
|
SAMPSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 38,000
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Net receivables
|
72,000
|
65,000
|
|
Inventory
|
98,000
|
85,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
195,000
|
180,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(45,000)
|
(35,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$358,000
|
$355,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 85,000
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities (related to cost of sales)
|
44,000
|
61,000
|
|
Mortgage payable
|
11,000
|
—
|
|
Common stock
|
180,000
|
174,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
38,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$358,000
|
$355,000
|
|
|
|
|
SAMPSON COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Net sales
|
|
$145,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
|
108,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
37,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
|
6,000
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
|
31,000
|
|
Tax expense
|
|
12,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 19,000
|
Other data:
1. Dividends paid in cash during 2002 were $21,000.
2. Depreciation is included in the cost of sales.
3. The change in the accumulated depreciation account is the depreciation expense for the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Arrowbell Company is a growing company. Two years ago, it decided to expand in order to increase its production capacity. The company anticipates that the expansion program can be completed in another two years. Financial information for Arrowbell is on the following pages.
Required a. Comment on the short-term debt position, including computations of current ratio, acid-test ratio, cash ratio, and operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable.
b. If you were a supplier to this company, what would you be concerned about?
c. Comment on the long-term debt position, including computations of the debt ratio, debt/equity, debt to tangible net worth, and operating cash flow/total debt. Review the statement of operating cash flows.
d. If you were a banker, what would you be concerned about if this company approached you for a long-term loan to continue its expansion program?
e. What should management consider doing at this point in regard to the company’s expansion program?
|
ARROWBELL COMPANY Sales and Net Income
|
|
Year
|
Sales
|
Net Income
|
|
1998
|
$2,568,660
|
$145,800
|
|
1999
|
2,660,455
|
101,600
|
|
2000
|
2,550,180
|
52,650
|
|
2001
|
2,625,280
|
86,800
|
|
2002
|
3,680,650
|
151,490
|
|
|
|
|
ARROWBELL COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 250,480
|
$ 260,155
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
760,950
|
690,550
|
|
Inventories at lower-of-cost-or-market
|
725,318
|
628,238
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
18,555
|
20,250
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,755,303
|
1,599,193
|
|
Plant and equipment:
|
|
|
|
Land, buildings, machinery, and equipment
|
3,150,165
|
2,646,070
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
650,180
|
525,650
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
2,499,985
|
2,120,420
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash surrender value of life insurance
|
20,650
|
18,180
|
|
Other
|
40,660
|
38,918
|
|
Total other assets
|
61,310
|
57,098
|
|
Total assets
|
$4,316,598
|
$3,776,711
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Notes and mortgages payable, current portion
|
$ 915,180
|
$ 550,155
|
|
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
|
1,160,111
|
851,080
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
2,075,291
|
1,401,235
|
|
Long-term notes and mortgages payable,
|
|
|
|
less current portion above
|
550,000
|
775,659
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,625,291
|
2,176,894
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Capital stock, par value $1.00; authorized,
|
|
|
|
800,000; issued and outstanding,
|
|
|
|
600,000 (1997 and 1996)
|
600,000
|
600,000
|
|
Paid in excess of par
|
890,000
|
890,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
201,307
|
109,817
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
1,691,307
|
1,599,817
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$4,316,598
|
$3,776,711
|
|
|
|
|
ARROWBELL COMPANY Statement of Cash Flows For Years Ended December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$151,490
|
$ 86,800
|
|
Noncash expenses, revenues, losses,
|
|
|
|
and gains included in income:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
134,755
|
102,180
|
|
Increase in accounts receivable
|
(70,400)
|
(10,180)
|
|
Increase in inventories
|
(97,080)
|
(15,349)
|
|
Decrease in prepaid expenses
|
|
|
|
in 2002, increase in 2001
|
1,695
|
(1,058)
|
|
Increase in accounts payable
|
|
|
|
and accrued liabilities
|
309,031
|
15,265
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
429,491
|
177,658
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Proceeds from retirement of
|
|
|
|
property, plant, and equipment
|
10,115
|
3,865
|
|
Purchases of property, plant, and equipment
|
(524,435)
|
(218,650)
|
|
Increase in cash surrender
|
|
|
|
value of life insurance
|
(2,470)
|
(1,848)
|
|
Other
|
(1,742)
|
(1,630)
|
|
Net cash used for investing activities
|
(518,532)
|
(218,263)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Retirement of long-term debt
|
(225,659)
|
(50,000)
|
|
Increase in notes and mortgages payable
|
365,025
|
159,155
|
|
Cash dividends
|
(60,000)
|
(60,000)
|
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
79,366
|
49,155
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash
|
$ (9,675)
|
$ 8,550
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance sheet for December 31, 2002, income statement for the year ended December 31, 2002, and the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, of the Bernett Company are on the next two pages.
The president of the Bernett Company cannot understand why Bernett is having trouble paying current obligations. He notes that business has been very good, as sales have more than doubled, and the company achieved a profit of $69,000 in 2002.
Required:
a. Comment on the statement of cash flows.
b. Compute the following liquidity ratios for 2002:
1. Current ratio
2. Acid-test ratio
3. Operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable
4. Cash ratio
c. Compute the following debt ratios for 2002:
1. Times interest earned
2. Debt ratio
3. Operating cash flow/total debt
d. Compute the following profitability ratios for 2002:
1. Return on assets (using average assets)
2. Return on common equity (using average common equity)
e. Compute the following investor ratio for 2002: Operating cash flow/cash dividends.
f. Give your opinion as to the liquidity of Bernett.
g. Give your opinion as to the debt position of Bernett.
h. Give your opinion as to the profitability of Bernett.
i. Give your opinion as to the investor ratio.
j. Give your opinion of the alternatives Bernett has in order to ensure that it can pay bills as they come due.
|
BERNETT COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,000
|
$ 28,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
92,000
|
70,000
|
|
Inventory
|
130,000
|
85,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
4,000
|
6,000
|
|
Land
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
|
Building
|
170,000
|
30,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(20,000)
|
(10,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$411,000
|
$219,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 49,000
|
$ 44,000
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
5,000
|
4,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
Bonds payable (current $10,000 at 12/31/02)
|
175,000
|
20,000
|
|
Common stock
|
106,000
|
96,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$411,000
|
$219,000
|
|
|
|
|
BERNETT COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Sales
|
|
$500,000
|
|
Less expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
(includes depreciation of $4,000)
|
|
310,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
(includes depreciation of $6,000)
|
|
80,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
11,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
401,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
99,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
30,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 69,000
|
|
BERNETT COMPANY Statement of Cash Flows For the Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 69,000
|
|
|
Noncash expenses, revenues, losses and gains
|
|
|
included in income:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
10,000
|
|
|
Increase in receivables
|
(22,000)
|
|
|
Increase in inventory
|
(45,000)
|
|
|
Decrease in prepaid expenses
|
2,000
|
|
|
Increase in accounts payable
|
5,000
|
|
|
Increase in income taxes payable
|
1,000
|
|
|
Increase in accrued liabilities
|
1,000
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
|
$ 21,000
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Increase in land
|
$ (20,000)
|
|
|
Increase in buildings
|
(140,000)
|
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
|
(160,000)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Bond payable increase
|
$ 155,000
|
|
|
Common stock increase
|
10,000
|
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(49,000)
|
|
|
Net cash provided by financing activities:
|
|
116,000
|
|
Net decrease in cash
|
|
($23,000)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Szabo Company presented the following data with the 2002 financial statements:
|
SZABO COMPANY Statements of Cash Flows Years Ended December 31, 2002, 2001, and 2000
|
|
2002
|
2001
|
2000
|
|
Increase (Decrease) in Cash:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$173,233
|
$176,446
|
$158,702
|
|
Cash paid to suppliers
|
|
|
|
|
and employees
|
(150,668)
|
(157,073)
|
(144,060)
|
|
Interest received
|
132
|
105
|
89
|
|
Interest paid
|
(191)
|
(389)
|
(777)
|
|
Income taxes paid
|
(6,626)
|
(4,754)
|
(845)
|
|
Net cash provided by operations
|
15,880
|
14,335
|
13,109
|
|
Cash flows from investing
|
|
|
|
|
activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
(8,988)
|
(5,387)
|
(6,781)
|
|
Proceeds from property, plant,
|
|
|
|
|
and equipment disposals
|
1,215
|
114
|
123
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(7,773)
|
(5,273)
|
(6,658)
|
|
Cash flows from financing
|
|
|
|
|
activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in
|
|
|
|
|
short-term debt
|
—
|
5,100
|
7,200
|
|
Increase in long-term debt
|
4,100
|
3,700
|
5,200
|
|
Dividends paid
|
(6,050)
|
(8,200)
|
(8,000)
|
|
Purchase of common stock
|
(8,233)
|
(3,109)
|
(70)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(10,183)
|
(2,509)
|
4,330
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash
|
|
|
|
|
and cash equivalents
|
(2,076)
|
6,553
|
10,781
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at
|
|
|
|
|
beginning of year
|
24,885
|
18,332
|
7,551
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at
|
|
|
|
|
end of year
|
$ 22,809
|
$ 24,885
|
$ 18,332
|
|
|
|
|
Reconciliation of Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
|
2002
|
2001
|
2000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 7,610
|
$ 3,242
|
$ 506
|
|
Provision for depreciation
|
|
|
|
|
and amortization
|
12,000
|
9,700
|
9,000
|
|
Provision for losses on accounts
|
|
|
|
|
receivable
|
170
|
163
|
140
|
|
Gain on property, plant,
|
|
|
|
|
and equipment disposals
|
(2,000)
|
(1,120)
|
(1,500)
|
|
Changes in operating assets
|
|
|
|
|
and liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
(2,000)
|
(1,750)
|
(1,600)
|
|
Inventories
|
(3,100)
|
(2,700)
|
(2,300)
|
|
Other assets
|
—
|
—
|
(57)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
—
|
5,100
|
7,200
|
|
Accrued income taxes
|
1,200
|
—
|
—
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
2,000
|
1,700
|
1,720
|
|
Net cash provided by
|
|
|
|
|
operating activities
|
$15,880
|
$14,335
|
$13,109
|
Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows with a three-year total column for 2000–2002.
b. Comment on significant trends you detect in the statement prepared in (a).
c. Prepare a statement of cash flows, with inflow/outflow for the year ended December 31, 2002.
d. Comment on significant trends you detect in the statement prepared in (c).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following data for three different companies:
|
|
($000 Omitted)
|
|
|
Owens
|
Arrow
|
Alpha
|
|
Net cash provided (used) by:
|
|
Operating activities
|
$(2,000)
|
$2,700
|
$(3,000)
|
|
Investing activities
|
(6,000)
|
(600)
|
(400)
|
|
Financing activities
|
9,000
|
(400)
|
(2,600)
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash
|
$ 1,000
|
$1,700
|
$(6,000)
|
The patterns of cash flows for these firms differ. One firm is a growth firm that is expanding rapidly, another firm is in danger of bankruptcy, while another firm is an older firm that is expanding slowly.
Required Select the growth firm, the firm in danger of bankruptcy, and the firm that is the older firm expanding slowly. Explain your selection.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Webster Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, was prepared using the indirect method, and it included the following items:
|
Net income
|
$100,000
|
|
Noncash adjustments:
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
20,000
|
|
Decrease in accounts receivable
|
8,000
|
|
Decrease in inventory
|
25,000
|
|
Increase in accounts payable
|
10,000
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
$163,000
|
Note: Webster Corporation reported revenues from customers of $150,000 in its 2002 income statement.
Required:
a. What amount of cash did Webster receive from customers during the year ended December 31, 2002?
b. Did depreciation expense provide cash inflow? Comment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Indicate which of the following accounting policies are conservative by placing an X under Yes or No. Assume inflationary conditions exist.
|
Conservative
|
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
a.LIFO inventory
|
________
|
________
|
|
b. FIFO inventory
|
________
|
________
|
|
c. Completed-contract method
|
________
|
________
|
|
d. Percentage-of-completion method
|
________
|
________
|
|
e. Accelerated depreciation method
|
________
|
________
|
|
f. Straight-line depreciation method
|
________
|
________
|
|
g. A relatively short estimated life for a fixed asset
|
________
|
________
|
|
h. Short period for expensing intangibles
|
________
|
________
|
|
i.Amortization of goodwill over 5 years
|
________
|
________
|
|
j. High interest rate used to compute the present value of accumulated benefit obligation
|
________
|
________
|
|
k. High rate of compensation increase used in computing the projected benefit obligation
|
________
|
________
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Thorpe Company is a wholesale distributor of professional equipment and supplies.
The company’s sales have averaged about $900,000 annually for the three-year period 1999-2001. The firm’s total assets at the end of 2001 amounted to $850,000.
The president of the Thorpe Company has asked the controller to prepare a report that summarizes the financial aspects of the company’s operations for the past three years.
This report will be presented to the board of directors at its next meeting.
In addition to comparative financial statements, the controller has decided to present a number of relevant financial ratios that can assist in the identification and interpretation of trends. At the request of the controller, the accounting staff has calculated the following ratios for the three-year period 1999–2001:
|
Ratio
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Current ratio
|
2.00
|
2.13
|
2.18
|
|
Acid-test (quick) ratio
|
1.20
|
1.10
|
0.97
|
|
Accounts receivable turnover
|
9.72
|
8.57
|
7.13
|
|
Inventory turnover
|
5.25
|
4.80
|
3.80
|
|
Percent of total debt to total assets
|
44.00%
|
41.00%
|
38.00%
|
|
Percent of long-term debt to
|
|
|
|
|
total assets
|
25.00%
|
22.00%
|
19.00%
|
|
Sales to fixed assets (fixed
|
|
|
|
|
asset turnover)
|
1.75
|
1.88
|
1.99
|
|
Sales as a percent of 1999 sales
|
100.00%
|
103.00%
|
106.00%
|
|
Gross profit percentage
|
40.0%
|
33.6%
|
38.5%
|
|
Net income to sales
|
7.8%
|
7.8%
|
8.0%
|
|
Return on total assets
|
8.5%
|
8.6%
|
8.7%
|
|
Return on stockholders’ equity
|
15.1%
|
14.6%
|
14.1%
|
In preparing his report, the controller has decided first to examine the financial ratios independently of any other data to determine if the ratios themselves reveal any significant trends over the three-year period.
Required a. The current ratio is increasing, while the acid-test (quick) ratio is decreasing. Using the ratios provided, identify and explain the contributing factor(s) for this apparently divergent trend.
b. In terms of the ratios provided, what conclusion(s) can be drawn regarding the company’s use of financial leverage during the 1999–2001 period?
c. Using the ratios provided, what conclusion(s) can be drawn regarding the company’s net investment in plant and equipment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
L. Konrath Company is considering extending credit to D. Hawk Company. Konrath estimated that sales to D. Hawk Company would amount to $2,000,000 each year. L. Konrath Company, a wholesaler, sells throughout the Midwest. D. Hawk Company, a retail chain operation, has a number of stores in the Midwest. L. Konrath Company has had a gross profit of approximately 60% in recent years and expects to have a similar gross profit on the D.
Hawk Company order. The D. Hawk Company order is approximately 15% of L. Konrath Company”s present sales. Data from recent statements of D. Hawk Company are shown on the next page.
|
(In millions)
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 2.6
|
$ 1.8
|
$ 1.6
|
|
Government securities (cost)
|
.4
|
.2
|
—
|
|
Accounts and notes receivable (net)
|
8.0
|
8.5
|
8.5
|
|
Inventories
|
2.8
|
3.2
|
2.8
|
|
Prepaid assets
|
.7
|
.6
|
.6
|
|
Total current assets
|
14.5
|
14.3
|
13.5
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment (net)
|
4.3
|
5.4
|
5.9
|
|
Total assets
|
$18.8
|
$19.7
|
$19.4
|
|
Liabilities and Equities
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 6.9
|
$ 8.5
|
$ 9.3
|
|
Long-term debt, 6%
|
3.0
|
2.0
|
1.0
|
|
Total liabilities
|
9.9
|
10.5
|
10.3
|
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
8.9
|
9.2
|
9.1
|
|
Total liabilities and equities
|
$18.8
|
$19.7
|
$19.4
|
|
Income
|
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$24.2
|
$24.5
|
$24.9
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
16.9
|
17.2
|
18.0
|
|
Gross margin
|
7.3
|
7.3
|
6.9
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
6.6
|
6.8
|
7.3
|
|
Earnings (loss) before taxes
|
.7
|
.5
|
(.4)
|
|
Income taxes
|
.3
|
.2
|
(.2)
|
|
Net income
|
$ .4
|
$ .3
|
$ (.2)
|
Required a.Calculate the following for D. Hawk Company for 2001:
1. Rate of return on total assets
2. Acid-test ratio
3. Return on sales
4. Current ratio
5. Inventory turnover
b. As part of the analysis to determine whether or not Konrath should extend credit to Hawk, assume the ratios were calculated from Hawk Company statements. For each ratio, indicate whether it is a favorable, unfavorable, or neutral statistic in the decision to grant Hawk credit. Briefly explain your choice in each case.
|
Ratio
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Rate of return on total assets
|
1.96%
|
1.12%
|
(.87)%
|
|
Return on sales
|
1.69%
|
.99%
|
(.69)%
|
|
Acid-test ratio
|
1.73
|
1.36
|
1.19
|
|
Current ratio
|
2.39
|
1.92
|
1.67
|
|
Inventory turnover (times per year)
|
4.41
|
4.32
|
4.52
|
|
Equity relationships:
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
36.0%
|
43.0%
|
48.0%
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
16.0
|
10.5
|
5.0
|
|
Shareholders
|
48.0
|
46.5
|
47.0
|
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
|
Asset relationships:
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
77.0%
|
72.5%
|
69.5%
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
23.0
|
27.5
|
30.5
|
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
c. Would you grant credit to D. Hawk Company? Support your answer with facts given in the problem.
d. What additional information, if any, would you want before making a final decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your company is considering the possible acquisition of Growth Inc. Financial statements of Growth Inc. are shown below and on the following page.
|
GROWTH INC. Balance Sheet December 31, 2001 and 2000
|
|
2001
|
2002
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, less allowance
|
|
|
|
of $750 for doubtful accounts
|
99,021
|
83,575
|
|
Inventories, FIFO
|
63,414
|
74,890
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
834
|
1,170
|
|
Total current assets
|
227,615
|
171,599
|
|
Investments and other assets
|
379
|
175
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment:
|
|
|
|
Land and land improvements
|
6,990
|
6,400
|
|
Buildings
|
63,280
|
59,259
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
182,000
|
156,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
252,270
|
221,659
|
|
Net property, plant, and equipment
|
110,000
|
98,000
|
|
Total assets
|
142,270
|
123,659
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
$370,264
|
$295,433
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 32,730
|
$ 26,850
|
|
Federal income taxes
|
5,300
|
4,800
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
30,200
|
24,500
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
5,500
|
5,500
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
73,730
|
61,650
|
|
Long-term debt
|
76,750
|
41,900
|
|
Other long-term liabilities
|
5,700
|
4,300
|
|
Deferred federal income taxes
|
16,000
|
12,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
172,180
|
119,850
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
44,000
|
43,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
154,084
|
132,083
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
198,084
|
175,583
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 370,264
|
$ 295,433
|
|
GROWTH INC. Statement of Income Years Ended December 31, 2001, 2000, and 1999
|
|
2001
|
2000
|
1999
|
|
Revenues
|
$578,530
|
$523,249
|
$556,549
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
495,651
|
457,527
|
482,358
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative
|
35,433
|
30,619
|
29,582
|
|
Interest and debt expense
|
4,308
|
3,951
|
2,630
|
|
535,392
|
492,097
|
514,570
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
43,138
|
31,152
|
41,979
|
|
Provision for income taxes
|
20,120
|
12,680
|
17,400
|
|
Net income
|
$ 23,018
|
$ 18,472
|
$ 24,579
|
|
Net income per share
|
$ 2.27
|
$ 1.85
|
$ 2.43
|
Partial footnotes: Under the LIFO method, inventories have been reduced by approximately $35,300 and $41,100 at December 31, 2001 and 2000, respectively, from current cost, which would be reported under the first-in, first-out method.
The effective tax rates were 36.6%, 30.7%, and 31.4%, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2001, 2000, and 1999.
Required a. Compute the following for 2001, without considering the LIFO reserve:
Liquidity
1. Days’ sales in inventory
2. Merchandise inventory turnover
3. Inventory turnover in days
4. Operating cycle
5. Working capital
6. Current ratio
7. Acid-test ratio
8. Cash ratio
Debt
1. Debt ratio
2. Debt/equity ratio
3. Times interest earned
Profitability
1. Net profit margin
2. Total asset turnover
3. Return on assets
4. Return on total equity
b. Compute the ratios in part (a), considering the LIFO reserve.
c. Comment on the apparent liquidity, debt, and profitability, considering both sets of ratios.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Required For each of the following numbered items, you are to select the lettered item(s) that indicate(s) its effect(s) on the corporation’s statements. If more than one effect is applicable to a particular item, be sure to indicate all applicable letters. (Assume that the state statutes do not permit declaration of no liquidating dividends except from earnings.)
|
Item
|
Effects
|
|
1.Declaration of a cash
|
a. Reduces working capital
|
|
dividend due in one month
|
B .Increases working capital
|
|
on noncumulative preferred
|
c. Reduces current ratio
|
|
d.Increases current ratio
|
|
2.Declaration and payment
|
e. Reduces the dollar amount of
|
|
of an ordinary stock
|
total capital stock
|
|
f.Increases the dollar amount of
|
|
3.Receipt of a cash dividend,
|
total capital stock
|
|
not previously recorded,
|
g. Reduces total retained
|
|
on stock of another
|
earnings
|
|
h.Increases total retained
|
|
4.Passing of a dividend on
|
earnings
|
|
cumulative preferred
|
i.Reduces equity per share
|
|
stocks.of
|
common stock
|
|
5.Receipt of preferred
|
j. Reduces equity of each
|
|
shares as a dividend on
|
common stockholder
|
|
stock held as a temporary
|
|
|
investment. This was not
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Argo Sales Corporation has in recent prior years maintained the following relationships among the data on its financial statements:
|
Gross profit rate on net sales
|
40%
|
|
Net profit rate on net sales
|
10%
|
|
Rate of selling expenses to net sales
|
20%
|
|
Accounts receivable turnover
|
8 per year
|
|
Inventory turnover
|
6 per year
|
|
Acid-test ratio
|
2 to 1
|
|
Current ratio
|
3 to 1
|
|
Quick-asset composition: 8% cash, 32%
|
|
|
marketable securities, 60% accounts
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
|
Asset turnover
|
2 per year
|
|
Ratio of total assets to intangible assets
|
20 to 1
|
|
Ratio of accumulated depreciation to
|
|
|
cost of fixed assets
|
1 to 3
|
|
Ratio of accounts receivable to accounts
|
|
|
Payable
|
1.5 to 1
|
|
Ratio of working capital to stockholders’ equity
|
1 to 1.6
|
|
Ratio of total debt to stockholders’ equity
|
1 to 2
|
The corporation had a net income of $120,000 for 2001, which resulted in earnings of $5.20 per share of common stock. Additional information includes the following:
Capital stock authorized, issued (all in 1970), and outstanding:
Common, $10 per share par value, issued at 10% premium.
Preferred, 6% nonparticipating, $100 per share par value, issued at a 10% premium.
Market value per share of common at December 31, 2001: $78.
Preferred dividends paid in 2001: $3,000. Times interest earned in 2001: 33.
The amounts of the following were the same at December 31, 2001, as at January 1, 2001: inventory, accounts receivable, 5% bonds payable—due 2010, and total stockholders’ equity.
All purchases and sales were on account.
Required a. Prepare in good form the condensed balance sheet and income statement for the year ending December 31, 2001, presenting the amounts you would expect to appear on Argo’s financial statements (ignoring income taxes). Major captions appearing on Argo’s balance sheet are current assets, fixed assets, intangible assets, current liabilities, long-term liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. In addition to the accounts divulged in the problem, you should include accounts for prepaid expenses, accrued expenses, and administrative expenses. Supporting computations should be in good form.
b. Compute the following for 2001. (Show your computations.):
1. Rate of return on stockholders’ equity
2. Price/earnings ratio for common stock
3. Dividends paid per share of common stock
4. Dividends paid per share of preferred stock
5. Yield on common stock
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Warford Corporation was formed five years ago through a public subscription of common stock. Lucinda Street, who owns 15% of the common stock, was one of the organizers of Warford and is its current president. The company has been successful but currently is experiencing a shortage of funds. On June 10, Street approached Bell National Bank, asking for a 24-month extension on two $30,000 notes, which are due on June 30, 2001, and September 30, 2001. Another note of $7,000 is due on December 31, 2001, but Street expects no difficulty in paying this note on its due date. Street explained that Warford’s cash flow problems are due primarily to the company’s desire to finance a $300,000 plant expansion over the next two fiscal years through internally generated funds.
The commercial loan officer of Bell National Bank requested financial reports for the last two fiscal years. These reports are reproduced below and on the following page.
|
WARFORD CORPORATION Statement of Financial Position March 31
|
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 12,500
|
$ 16,400
|
|
Notes receivable
|
104,000
|
112,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
68,500
|
81,600
|
|
Inventories (at cost)
|
50,000
|
80,000
|
|
Plant and equipment (net of depreciation)
|
646,000
|
680,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$881,000
|
$970,000
|
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 72,000
|
$ 69,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
54,500
|
67,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
6,000
|
9,000
|
|
Common stock (60,000 shares, $10 par)
|
600,000
|
600,000
|
|
Retained earnings**
|
148,500
|
225,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$881,000
|
$970,000
|
Cash dividends were paid at the rate of $1.00 per share in fiscal year 2000 and $1.25 per share in fiscal
year 2001.
|
WARFORD CORPORATION Income Statement For the Fiscal Years Ended March 31, 2000 and 2001
|
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Sales
|
$2,700,000
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold*
|
1,720,000
|
1,902,500
|
|
Gross profit
|
980,000
|
1,097,500
|
|
Operating expenses
|
780,000
|
845,000
|
|
Net income before taxes
|
200,000
|
252,500
|
|
Income taxes (40%)
|
80,000
|
101,000
|
|
Income after taxes
|
$ 120,000
|
$ 151,500
|
Depreciation charges on the plant and equipment of $100,000 and $102,500 for fiscal years ended March
31, 2000 and 2001, respectively, are included in cost of goods sold.
Required a.Calculate the following items for Warford Corporation:
1. Current ratio for fiscal years 2000 and 2001
2. Acid-test (quick) ratio for fiscal years 2000 and 2001
3. Inventory turnover for fiscal year 2001
4. Return on assets for fiscal years 2000 and 2001
5. Percentage change in sales, cost of goods sold, gross profit, and net income after taxes from fiscal year 2000 to 2001
b.Identify and explain what other financial reports and/or financial analyses might be helpful to the commercial loan officer of Bell National Bank in evaluating Street’s request for a time extension on Warford’s notes.
c.Assume that the percentage changes experienced in fiscal year 2001, as compared with fiscal year 2000 for sales, cost of goods sold, gross profit, and net income after taxes, will be repeated in each of the next two years. Is Warford’s desire to finance the plant expansion from internally generated funds realistic? Explain.
d. Should Bell National Bank grant the extension on Warford’s notes, considering Street’s statement about financing the plant expansion through internally generated funds? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data apply to items (a) through (g):
|
JOHANSON COMPANY Statement of Financial Position December 31, 2000 and 2001
|
|
(In thousands)
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and temporary investments
|
$ 380
|
$ 400
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
1,500
|
1,700
|
|
Inventories
|
2,120
|
2,200
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,000
|
4,300
|
|
Long-term assets:
|
|
|
|
Land
|
500
|
500
|
|
Building and equipment (net)
|
4,000
|
4,700
|
|
Total long-term assets
|
4,500
|
5,200
|
|
Total assets
|
$8,500
|
$9,500
|
|
Liabilities and Equities
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 700
|
$1,400
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
500
|
1,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,200
|
2,400
|
|
Long-term debt
|
4,000
|
3,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
5,200
|
5,400
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
3,000
|
3,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
300
|
1,100
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
3,300
|
4,100
|
|
Total liabilities and equities
|
$8,500
|
$9,500
|
|
|
|
|
JOHANSON COMPANY Statement of Income and Retained Earnings For the Year Ended December 31, 2001
|
|
(In thousands)
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
|
$28,800
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
$15,120
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
7,180
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
4,100
|
|
|
Interest
|
400
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
800
|
27,600
|
|
Net income
|
|
1,200
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1
|
|
300
|
|
Subtotal
|
|
1,500
|
|
Cash dividends declared and paid
|
|
400
|
|
Retained earnings, December 31
|
|
$ 1,100
|
Answer the following multiple-choice questions:
Required:
Answer the following multiple-choice questions:
a. The acid-test ratio for 2001 is
1. 1.1 to 1
2. .9 to 1
3.1. 8 to 1
4. .2 to 1
5. .17 to 1
b.The average number of days’ sales outstanding in 2001 is
1.18 days 4. 4.4 days
2.360 days 5. 80 days
3.20 days
c.The times interest earned ratio for 2001 is
1. 3.0 times
2. 1.0 times
3.72. 0 times
4. 2.0 times
5. 6.0 times
d.The asset turnover in 2001 is
1. 3.2 times
2. 1.7 times
3.. 4 times
4. 1.1 times
5. .13 times
e.The inventory turnover in 2001 is
1. 13.6 times
2. 12.5 times
3.. 9 times
4. 7.0 times
5. 51.4 times
f.The operating income margin in 2001 is
1. 2.7%
2. 91.7%
3.52. 5%
4. 95.8%
5. 8.3%
g.The dividend payout ratio in 2001 is
1.100%
2.36%
3.20%
4. 8.8%
5. 33.3%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The statement of financial position for Paragon Corporation at November 30, 2001, the end of its current fiscal year, is presented below. The market price of the company’s common stock was $4 per share on November 30, 2001.
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
In thousands
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 6,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 7,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
400
|
6,600
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
|
16,000
|
|
|
Supplies on hand
|
|
400
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
|
1,000
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
27,500
|
|
|
Building
|
36,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
13,500
|
22,500
|
|
|
Total property, plant, and equipment
|
|
|
50,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
|
$80,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 6,400
|
|
|
Accrued interest payable
|
800
|
|
|
Accrued income taxes payable
|
2,200
|
|
|
Accrued wages payable
|
600
|
|
|
Deposits received from customers
|
2,000
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
$12,000
|
|
Long-term debt:
|
|
|
|
Bonds payable—20-year, 8% convertible
|
|
|
|
debentures due December 1, 2007 (Note 7)
|
20,000
|
|
|
Less: Unamortized discount
|
200
|
19,800
|
|
Total liabilities
|
|
31,800
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Common stock—authorized 40,000,000 shares
|
|
|
of $1 par value; 20,000,000 shares issued
|
|
|
|
and outstanding
|
20,000
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
12,200
|
|
|
Total paid-in capital
|
32,200
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
16,000
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
48,200
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$80,000
|
All items are to be considered independent of one another, and any transactions given in the items are to be considered the only transactions to affect Paragon Corporation during the just-completed current or coming fiscal year. Average balance sheet account balances are used in computing ratios involving income statement accounts. Ending balance sheet account balances are used in computing ratios involving only balance sheet items.
Required Answer the following multiple-choice questions:
a.If Paragon paid back all of the deposits received from customers, its current ratio would be
1. 2.50 to 1.00
2. 2.80 to 1.00
3. 2.33 to 1.00
4. 3.00 to 1.00
5. 2.29 to 1.00
b.If Paragon paid back all of the deposits received from customers, its quick (acid- test) ratio would be
1. 1.06 to 1.00
2. 1.00 to 1.00
3. 0.88 to 1.00
4. 1.26 to 1.00
5. 1.20 to 1.00
c.A 2-for-1 common stock split by Paragon would
1. Result in each $1,000 bond being convertible into 600 new shares of Paragon common stock
2. Decrease the retained earnings due to the capitalization of retained earnings
3. Not affect the number of common shares outstanding
4. Increase the total paid-in capital
5. Increase the total stockholders’ equity
d. Paragon Corporation’s building is being depreciated using the straight-line method, salvage value of $6,000,000, and life of 20 years.
The number of years the building has been depreciated by Paragon as of November 30, 2001, is
1. 7.5 years
2.12. 5 years
3.9. 0 years
4. 15.0 years
5. None of these.
e.Paragon’ s book value per share of common stock as of November 30, 2001, is
1.$4.00
2.$1. 61
3.$1. 00
4. $2.41
5. None of these
f.If, during the current fiscal year ending November 30, 2001, Paragon had sales of $90,000,000 with a gross profit of 20% and an inventory turnover of five times per year, the merchandise inventory balance on December 1, 2000, was
1.$14,400,000
2.$12,800,000
3.$18,000,000
4. $20,000,000
5. $16,000,000
g.If Paragon has a payout ratio of 80% and declared and paid $4,000,000 of cash dividends during the current fiscal year ended November 30, 2001, the retained earnings balance on December 1, 2000, was
1.$20,000,000
2.$17,000,000
3.$15,000,000
4. $11,000,000
5. None of these
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elements of a Lean Operating Environment
The following numbered items are concepts that underlie value-based systems, such as ABM and lean. Match each concept to the related lettered element(s) of a lean operating environment.
1. Business processes are simplified.
2. The quality of the product or service is critical.
3. Employees are cross-trained.
4. Large inventories waste resources and may hide bad work.
5. Goods should be produced only when needed.
6. Equipment downtime is minimized.
a. Minimum inventory levels
b. Pull-through production
c. Quick machine setups and flexible work cells
d. A multi skilled work force
e. High levels of product quality
f. Effective preventive maintenance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct and Indirect Costs in JIT and Traditional Manufacturing Environments
The cost categories in this list are typical of many manufacturing operations:
|
Direct materials:
|
Direct labor
|
Depreciation–machinery
|
|
Sheet steel
|
Engineering labor
|
Supervisory salaries
|
|
Iron castings
|
Indirect labor
|
Electrical power
|
|
Assembly parts:
|
Operating supplies
|
Insurance and taxes–plant
|
|
Part 24RE6
|
Small tools
|
President’s salary
|
|
Part 15RF8
|
Depreciation–plant
|
Employee benefits
|
Identify each cost as direct or indirect, assuming that it was incurred in (1) a traditional manufacturing setting and (2) a JIT environment. State the reasons for changes in classification.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Back flush Costing
Good Morning Enterprises produces digital alarm clocks. It has a just-in-time assembly process and uses back flush costing to record production costs. Overhead is assigned at a rate of $17 per assembly labor hour. There were no beginning inventories in March. During March, the following operating data were generated:
|
Cost of direct materials purchased and used
|
$53,200
|
|
Direct labor costs incurred
|
$27,300
|
|
Overhead costs assigned
|
?
|
|
Assembly hours worked
|
3,840 hours
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
$1,050
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
$960
|
Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through the back flush costing system. What is the total cost of goods sold in March?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparison of ABM and Lean
The following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their companies’ activity-based systems. Identify the manager who works for a company that emphasizes ABM and the one who works for a company that emphasizes a lean system.
Manager 1: We try to manage our resources effectively by monitoring operating activities. We analyze all major operating activities, and we focus on reducing or eliminating the ones that don’t add value to our products. Our product costs are more accurate since we allocate activity costs to products and services.
Manager 2: We’re very concerned with eliminating waste to reduce costs. We’ve designed our operations in flexible work cells to reduce the time it takes to move, store, queue, and inspect materials. We’ve also reduced our inventories by buying and using materials only when we need them.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to inventory for the year ended December 31, 2000:
|
Date
|
Description
|
Number of Units
|
Cost per unit
|
Total Cost
|
|
January 1
|
Beginning inventory
|
400
|
$5.00
|
$ 2,000
|
|
March 1
|
Purchase
|
1,000
|
6.00
|
6,000
|
|
August 1
|
Purchase
|
200
|
7.00
|
1,400
|
|
November 1
|
Purchase
|
200
|
7.50
|
1,500
|
|
1,800
|
|
$10,900
|
A physical inventory on December 31, 2000, indicates that 400 units are on hand and that they came from the March 1 purchase.
Required Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended December 31, 2000, and the ending inventory under the following cost assumptions:
a. First-in, first-out (FIFO) c. Average cost (weighted average)
b. Last-in, first-out (LIFO) d. Specific identification
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to inventory for the year ended December 31, 2001. A physical inventory on December 31, 2001, indicates that 600 units are on hand and that they came from the July 1 purchase.
|
Date
|
Description
|
Number of Units
|
Cost Per Unit
|
Total Cost
|
|
January 1
|
Beginning inventory
|
1,000
|
$4.00
|
$ 4,000
|
|
February 20
|
Purchase
|
800
|
4.50
|
3,600
|
|
April 1
|
Purchase
|
900
|
4.75
|
4,275
|
|
July 1
|
Purchase
|
700
|
5.00
|
3,500
|
|
October 22
|
Purchase
|
500
|
4.90
|
2,450
|
|
December 10
|
Purchase
|
500
|
5.00
|
2,500
|
|
|
4,400
|
|
$20,325
|
Required Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended December 31, 2001, and the ending inventory under the following cost assumptions:
a. First-in, first-out (FIFO)
b. Last-in, first-out (LIFO)
c. Average cost (weighted average)
d. Specific identification
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The J.A. Appliance Company has supplied you with the following data regarding working capital and sales for the years 2001, 2000, and 1999.
|
2001
|
2000
|
1999
|
|
Working capital
|
$270,000
|
$260,000
|
$240,000
|
|
Sales
|
$650,000
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Industry average for the ratio
|
|
|
|
|
sales to working capital
|
4.10 times
|
4.05 times
|
4.00 times
|
Required a. Compute the sales to working capital ratio for each year.
b. Comment on the sales to working capital ratio for J.A. Appliance in relation to the industry average and what this may indicate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Depoole Company manufactures industrial products and employs a calendar year for financial reporting purposes. Items (a) through (e) present several of Depoole’s transactions during 2001. The total of cash equivalents, marketable securities, and net receivables exceeded total current liabilities both before and after each transaction described. Depoole has positive profits in 2001 and a credit balance throughout 2001 in its retained earnings account.
Required Answer the following multiple-choice questions.
a. Payment of a trade account payable of $64,500 would:
1. Increase the current ratio, but the acid-test ratio would not be affected.
2. Increase the acid-test ratio, but the current ratio would not be affected.
3. Increase both the current and acid-test ratios.
4. Decrease both the current and acid-test ratios.
5. Have no effect on the current and acid-test ratios.
b. The purchase of raw materials for $85,000 on open account would:
1. Increase the current ratio.
2. Decrease the current ratio.
3. Increase net working capital.
4. Decrease net working capital.
5. Increase both the current ratio and net working capital.
c. The collection of a current accounts receivable of $29,000 would:
1. Increase the current ratio.
2. Decrease the current ratio.
3. Increase the acid-test ratio.
4. Decrease the acid-test ratio.
5. Not affect the current or acid-test ratios.
d. Obsolete inventory of $125,000 was written off during 2001. This would:
1. Decrease the acid-test ratio
2. Increase the acid-test ratio3. Increase net working capital.
4. Decrease the current ratio.
5. Decrease both the current and acid-test ratios.
e. The early liquidation of a long-term note with cash would:
1. Affect the current ratio to a greater degree than the acid-test ratio.
2. Affect the acid-test ratio to a greater degree than the current ratio.
3. Affect the current and acid-test ratios to the same degree.
4. Affect the current ratio, but not the acid-test ratio.
5. Affect the acid-test ratio, but not the current ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following operating figures:
|
Net sales
|
|
|
Cost and deductions:
|
|
|
Cost of sales
|
792,755
|
|
Selling and administration
|
264,566
|
|
Interest expense, net
|
4,311
|
|
Income taxes
|
5,059
|
|
1,066,691
|
|
$ 12,452
|
Note: Depreciation expense totals $40,000.
Required a. Compute the times interest earned.
b. Compute the cash basis times interest earned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Jones Petro Company reports the following consolidated statement of income:
|
Operating revenues
|
$2,989
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of rentals and royalties
|
543
|
|
Cost of sales
|
314
|
|
Selling, service, administrative,
|
|
|
|
and general expense
|
1,424
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
2,281
|
|
Operating income
|
708
|
|
Other income
|
27
|
|
Other deductions (interest)
|
60
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
675
|
|
Income taxes
|
309
|
|
Income before outside shareholders’ interests
|
366
|
|
Outside shareholders’ interests
|
66
|
|
Net income
|
$ 300
|
Note: Depreciation expense totals $200; operating lease payments total $150; and preferred dividends total
$50. Assume that 1/3 of operating lease payments is for interest.
Required a. Compute the times interest earned.
b. Compute the fixed charge coverage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sherwill statement of consolidated income is as follows:
|
Net sales
|
$658
|
|
Other income
|
8
|
|
666
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
418
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
196
|
|
Interest
|
16
|
|
630
|
|
Income before income taxes and extraordinary charges
|
36
|
|
Income taxes
|
18
|
|
Income before extraordinary charge
|
18
|
|
Extraordinary charge—losses on tornado damage (net)
|
4
|
|
Net income
|
$ 14
|
Note: Depreciation expense totals $200; operating lease payments total $150; and preferred dividends total
$50. Assume that 1/3 of operating lease payments is for interest.
Required a. Compute the times interest earned.
b. Compute the fixed charge coverage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Kaufman Company balance sheet is shown on the next page.
Requireda. Compute the debt ratio.
b. Compute the debt/equity ratio.
c. Compute the ratio of total debt to tangible net worth.
d. Comment on the amount of debt that the Kaufman Company has.
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 13,445
|
|
Short-term investments—at cost (approximate market)
|
5,239
|
|
Trade accounts receivable, less allowance of $ 1,590
|
88,337
|
|
Inventories—at lower of cost (average method) or market:
|
|
|
Finished merchandise
|
$113,879
|
|
Work in process, raw materials and supplies
|
47,036
|
|
160,915
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
8,221
|
|
Total current assets
|
276,157
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
Receivables, advances, and other assets
|
4,473
|
|
Intangibles
|
2,324
|
|
Total other assets
|
6,797
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment:
|
|
|
Land
|
5,981
|
|
Buildings
|
78,908
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
162,425
|
|
247,314
|
|
Less allowances for depreciation
|
106,067
|
|
Net property, plant, and equipment
|
141,247
|
|
Total assets
|
$424,201
|
|
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
$ 2,817
|
|
Trade accounts payable
|
23,720
|
|
Pension, interest, and other accruals
|
33,219
|
|
Taxes, other than income taxes
|
4,736
|
|
Income taxes
|
3,409
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
67,901
|
|
Long-term debt, 12% debentures
|
86,235
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
8,768
|
|
Minority interest in subsidiaries
|
12,075
|
|
Total liabilities
|
174,979
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
Serial preferred
|
9,154
|
|
Common $5.25 par value
|
33,540
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
3,506
|
|
Retained earnings
|
203,712
|
|
249,912
|
|
Less cost of common shares in treasury
|
690
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
249,222
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
$424,201
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios. This problem will consider the direction of such an impact.
|
Ratio Transaction
|
Times Interest Earned
|
Debt Ratio
|
Debt/ Equity Ratio
|
Debt to Tangible Net Worth
|
|
a. Purchase of buildings financed by mortgage.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
b. Purchase of inventory on short-term loan at 1% over prime rate.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
c. Declaration and payment of cash dividend.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
d. Declaration and payment of stock dividend.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
e. Firm increases profits by cutting cost of sales.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
f. Appropriation of retained earnings.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
g. Sale of common stock.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
h. Repayment of long-term bank loan.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
i. Conversion of bonds to common stock outstanding.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
|
j. Sale of inventory at greater than cost.
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
______
|
Required Indicate the effect of each of the transactions on the ratios listed. Use + to indicate an increase, -to indicate a decrease, and 0 to indicate no effect.
Assume an initial times interest earned of more than 1, and a debt ratio, debt/equity ratio, and a total debt to tangible net worth of less than 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mr. Parks has asked you to advise him on the long-term debt-paying ability of the Arodex Company. He provides you with the following ratios:
|
2001
|
2000
|
1999
|
|
8.2
|
6.0
|
5.5
|
|
40%
|
39%
|
40%
|
|
80%
|
81%
|
81%
|
Required a. Give the implications and the limitations of each item separately and
then the collective influence that could be drawn from them about the
Arodex Company’s long-term debt position.
b. What warnings should you offer Mr. Parks about the limitations of
ratio analysis for the purpose stated here?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the year ended June 30, 2001, A.E.G. Enterprises presented the financial statements shown on the next page.
Early in the new fiscal year, the officers of the firm formalized a substantial expansion plan. The plan will increase fixed assets by $190,000,000. In addition, extra inventory will be needed to support expanded production. The increase in inventory is purported to be $10,000,000.
|
A.E.G. ENTERPRISES
Balance Sheet for June 30, 2001 (In thousands)
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 50,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
60,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
106,000
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
$504,000
|
|
|
Less: accumulated depreciation
|
140,000
|
364,000
|
|
Patents and other intangible assets
|
|
20,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$600,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 46,000
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
15,000
|
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
32,000
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
$ 93,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
100,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Preferred stock ($100 par, 10% cumulative, 500,000 shares
|
|
|
|
authorized and issued)
|
|
50,000
|
|
Common stock ($1 par, 200,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
100,000,000 issued)
|
|
100,000
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
|
120,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
137,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$600,000
|
|
|
|
|
A.E.G. ENTERPRISES
Income Statement
For the Year Ended June 30, 2001
(In thousands except earnings per share)
|
|
Sales
|
|
$936,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
|
671,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$265,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
Selling
|
$ 62,000
|
|
|
General
|
41,000
|
103,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
$162,000
|
|
Other items:
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
20,000
|
|
Earnings before provision for income tax
|
|
$142,000
|
|
Provision for income tax
|
|
56,800
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 85,200
|
|
Earnings per share
|
|
$ .83
|
The firm’s investment bankers have suggested the following three alternative financing plans:
Plan A: Sell preferred stock at par.
Plan B: Sell common stock at $10 per share.
Plan C: Sell long-term bonds, due in 20 years, at par ($1,000), with a stated interest rate of 16%.
Required a. For the year ended June 30, 2001, compute:
1. Times interest earned
2. Debt ratio
3. Debt/equity ratio
4. Debt to tangible net worth ratio
b. Assuming the same financial results and statement balances, except for the increased assets and financing, compute the same ratios as in (a) under each financing alternative. Do not attempt to adjust retained earnings for the next year’s profits.
c. Changes in earnings and number of shares will give the following earnings per share: Plan A—.73 Plan B—.69 Plan C—.73. Based on the information given, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative.
d. Why does the 10% preferred stock cost the company more than the 16% bonds?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The consolidated statement of earnings of Anonymous Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2001 is as follows:
|
Net sales
|
$1,550,010,000
|
|
Other income, net
|
10,898,000
|
|
1,560,908,000
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,237,403,000
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
32,229,000
|
|
Selling, general and administrative
|
178,850,000
|
|
Interest
|
37,646,000
|
|
1,486,128,000
|
|
Earnings from continuing operations before
|
|
|
income taxes and equity earnings
|
74,780,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
37,394,000
|
|
Earnings from continuing operations before equity earnings
|
37,386,000
|
|
Equity in net earnings of unconsolidated
|
|
|
subsidiaries and affiliated companies
|
27,749,000
|
|
Earnings from continuing operations
|
65,135,000
|
|
Earnings (losses) from discontinued operations,
|
|
|
net of applicable income taxes
|
6,392,000
|
|
Net earnings
|
$ 71,527,000
|
Required a. Compute the times interest earned for 2001.
b. Compute the times interest earned for 2001, including the equity income in the coverage.
c. What is the impact of including equity earnings from the coverage?
Why should equity income be excluded from the times interest earned coverage?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Allen Company and the Barker Company are competitors in the same industry.
Selected financial data from their 2001 statements are shown below.
|
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2001
|
|
Allen
|
Barker
|
|
Company
|
Company
|
|
Cash
|
$ 10,000
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
45,000
|
120,000
|
|
Inventory
|
70,000
|
190,000
|
|
Investments
|
40,000
|
100,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
11,000
|
20,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
180,000
|
520,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$356,000
|
$985,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 60,000
|
$165,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
410,000
|
|
Preferred stock, $1 par
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
Common Stock, $10 par
|
100,000
|
280,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
46,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total liabilities and capital
|
$356,000
|
$985,000
|
|
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2001
|
|
Allen Company
|
Barker Company
|
|
Sales
|
$1,050,000
|
$2,800,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
725,000
|
2,050,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
230,000
|
580,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
10,000
|
32,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
42,000
|
65,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 43,000
|
$ 73,000
|
|
Industry Averages:
|
|
|
|
Times interest earned
|
|
7.2 times
|
|
Debt ratio
|
|
40.3%
|
|
Debt/equity
|
|
66.6%
|
|
Debt to tangible net worth
|
|
72.7%
|
|
|
|
|
Required a. Compute the following ratios for each company:
1. Times interest earned 3. Debt/equity ratio
2. Debt ratio 4. Debt to tangible net worth
b. Is Barker Company in a position to take on additional long-term debt? Explain.
c. Which company has the better long-term debt position? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Zaro Company’s balance sheet for December 31, 2002, income statement for the year ended December 31, 2002, and the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, are shown below and on the following page.
|
ZARO COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002
|
2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 30,000
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
75,000
|
87,000
|
|
Inventory
|
90,000
|
105,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
|
Land
|
25,000
|
25,000
|
|
Building and equipment
|
122,000
|
120,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(92,000)
|
(80,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$253,000
|
$274,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 25,500
|
$ 32,000
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
|
Bonds payable (current $20,000 at 12/31/02)
|
90,000
|
95,000
|
|
Common stock
|
85,000
|
85,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
45,000
|
54,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$253,000
|
$274,000
|
|
ZARO COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
|
Less expense:
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold (includes depreciation of $5,000)
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
|
(includes depreciation expenses of $7,000)
|
78,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
8,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
$366,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
34,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
14,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 20,000
|
|
ZARO COMPANY Statement of Cash Flows For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 20,000
|
|
|
Noncash expenses, revenues, losses, and
|
|
|
|
gains included in income:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
12,000
|
|
|
Decrease in accounts receivable
|
12,000
|
|
|
Decrease in inventory
|
15,000
|
|
|
Increase in prepaid expenses
|
(1,000)
|
|
|
Decrease in accounts payable
|
(6,500)
|
|
|
Decrease in income taxes payable
|
(500)
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
|
$ 51,000
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Increase in buildings and equipment
|
$ (2,000)
|
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
|
(2,000)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Decrease in bonds payable
|
$ (5,000)
|
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(29,000)
|
|
|
Net cash used for financing activities:
|
|
(34,000)
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
|
$ 15,000
|
The president of the Zaro Company cannot understand how the company was able to pay cash dividends that were greater than net income and at the same time increase the cash balance. He notes that business was down slightly in 2002.
Required
a. Comment on the statement of cash flows.
b. Compute the following liquidity ratios for 2002:
1. Current ratio
2. Acid-test ratio
3. Operating cash flow/current maturities of long-term debt and current notes payable
4. Cash ratio
c. Compute the following debt ratios for 2002:
1. Times interest earned
2. Debt ratio
d. Compute the following profitability ratios for 2002:
1. Return on assets (using average assets)
2. Return on common equity (using average common equity)
e. Give your opinion as to the liquidity of Zaro.
f. Give your opinion as to the debt position of Zaro.
g. Give your opinion as to the profitability of Zaro.
h. Explain to the president how Zaro was able to pay cash dividends that were greater than net income and at the same time increase the cash balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Ladies Store presented the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002, shown below.
|
THE LADIES STORE Statement of Cash Flows For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Cash received:
|
|
|
From sales to customers
|
$150,000
|
|
From sales of bonds
|
100,000
|
|
From issuance of notes payable
|
40,000
|
|
From interest on bonds
|
5,000
|
|
Total cash received
|
295,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
For merchandise purchases
|
110,000
|
|
For purchase of truck
|
20,000
|
|
For purchase of investment
|
80,000
|
|
For purchase of equipment
|
45,000
|
|
For interest
|
2,000
|
|
For income taxes
|
15,000
|
|
Total cash payments
|
272,000
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
$ 23,000
|
Note: Depreciation expense was $15,000.
Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form.
b. Comment on the major flows of cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer the following multiple-choice questions:
a. Which of the following could lead to cash flow problems?
1. Tightening of credit by suppliers
2. Easing of credit by suppliers
3. Reduction of inventory
4. Improved quality of accounts receivable
5. Selling of bonds
b. Which of the following would not contribute to bankruptcy of a profitable firm?
1. Substantial increase in inventory
2. Substantial increase in receivables
3. Substantial decrease in accounts payable
4. Substantial decrease in notes payable
5. Substantial decrease in receivables
c. Which of the following current asset or current liability accounts is not included in the computation of cash flows from operating activities?
1. Change in accounts receivable
2. Change in inventory
3. Change in accounts payable
4. Change in accrued wages
5. Change in notes payable to banks
d. Which of the following items is not included in the adjustment of net income to cash flows from operating activities?
1. Increase in deferred taxes
2. Amortization of goodwill
3. Depreciation expense for the period
4. Amortization of premium on bonds payable
5. Proceeds from selling land
e. Which of the following represents an internal source of cash?
1. Cash inflows from financing activities
2. Cash inflows from investing activities
3. Cash inflows from selling land
4. Cash inflows from operating activities
5. Cash inflows from issuing stock
f. How would revenue from services be classified?
1. Investing inflow
2. Investing outflow
3. Operating inflow
4. Operating outflow
5. Financing outflow
g. What type of account is inventory?
1. Investing
2. Financing
3. Operating
4. Noncash
5. Sometimes operating and sometimes investing
h. How would short-term investments in marketable securities be classified?
1. Operating activities
2. Financing activities
3. Investing activities
4. Noncash activities
5. Cash and cash equivalents
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following material relates to the Darrow Company:
|
|
Cash Flows classification
|
Effect on Cash
|
|
|
Operating Activity
|
Investing Activity
|
Financing Activity
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Noncash Trans- actions
|
|
a. Net loss
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
b. Increase in inventory
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
c. Decrease in receivables
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
d. Increase in prepaid insurance
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
e. Issuance of common stock
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
f. Acquisition of land, using notes payable
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
g. Purchase of land, using cash
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
h. Paid cash dividend
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
i. Payment of income taxes
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
j. Retirement of bonds, using cash
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
k. Sale of equipment for cash
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Required Place an X in the appropriate columns for each of the situations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Cash Flows Classification
|
Effect on Cash
|
|
|
Operating Activity
|
Investing Activity
|
Financing Activity
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Noncash Trans- actions
|
|
a. Net income
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
b. Paid cash dividend
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
c. Increase in receivables
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
d. Retirement of debt—paying cash
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
e. Purchase of treasury stock
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
f. Purchase of equipment
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
g. Sale of equipment
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
h. Decrease in inventory
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
i. Acquisition of land, using common stock
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
j. Retired bonds, using common stock
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
k. Decrease in accounts payable
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Required Place an X in the appropriate columns for each of the situations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The BBB Company balance sheet and income statement follow:
|
BBB COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 2002 and 2001
|
|
2002
|
2003
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 4,500
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
6,800
|
7,200
|
|
Inventories
|
7,500
|
8,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
21,300
|
21,200
|
|
Land
|
11,000
|
12,000
|
|
Equipment
|
24,000
|
20,500
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
(3,800)
|
(3,000)
|
|
Building
|
70,000
|
70,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—building
|
(14,000)
|
(12,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$108,500
|
$108,700
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 7,800
|
$ 7,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
1,050
|
1,000
|
|
Taxes payable
|
500
|
1,500
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
9,350
|
9,500
|
|
Bonds payable
|
30,000
|
30,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par
|
32,000
|
30,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
21,000
|
19,200
|
|
Retained earnings
|
16,150
|
20,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$108,500
|
$108,700
|
|
|
|
|
BBB COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
Sales
|
|
$38,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
$ 2,800
|
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
35,000
|
37,800
|
|
Operating income
|
|
200
|
|
Gain on sale of land
|
|
800
|
|
Income before tax expense
|
|
1,000
|
|
Tax expense
|
|
500
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 500
|
|
Supplemental information:
|
|
|
|
Dividends declared and paid
|
$ 4,350
|
|
|
Land sold for cash
|
1,800
|
|
|
Equipment purchased for cash
|
3,500
|
|
|
Common stock sold for cash
|
3,800
|
|
Required a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2002.
(Present the cash flows from operations, using the indirect method.)
b. Comment on the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement and other selected data for the Frish Company are shown below:
|
FRISH COMPANY Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2002
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$640,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
360,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
43,000
|
|
Other expense
|
2,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
405,000
|
|
Income before income tax
|
235,000
|
|
Income tax
|
92,000
|
|
Net income
|
$143,000
|
|
Other data:
|
|
|
a. Cost of goods sold, including depreciation expense of $15,000
|
|
|
b. Selling and administrative expense,
including depreciation expense of $5,000
|
|
|
c. Other expense, representing amortization of goodwill, $3,000, and
amortization of bond premium, $1,000
|
|
|
d. Increase in accounts receivable
|
$ 27,000
|
|
e. Increase in accounts payable
|
15,000
|
|
f. Increase in inventories
|
35,000
|
|
g. Decrease in prepaid expenses
|
1,000
|
|
h. Increase in accrued liabilities
|
3,000
|
|
i. Decrease in income taxes payable
|
10,000
|
Required a. Prepare a schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis
income statement.
b. Using the schedule of change from accrual basis to cash basis income
statement computed in (a), present the cash provided by operations,
using (1) the direct approach and (2) the indirect approach.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Aggarwal Company has had 10,000 shares of 10%, $100 par-value preferred stock and 80,000 shares of $5 stated-value common stock outstanding for the last three years.
During that period, dividends paid totaled $0, $200,000, and $220,000 for each year, respectively.
Required Compute the amount of dividends that must have been paid to preferred stockholders and common stockholders in each of the three years, given the following four independent assumptions:
a. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and cumulative.
b. Preferred stock participates up to 12% of its par value and is cumulative.
c. Preferred stock is fully participating and cumulative.
d. Preferred stock is nonparticipating and noncumulative.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for Decher Automotives covers the year ended 2000:
|
Administrative expense
|
$ 62,000
|
|
Dividend income
|
10,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
100,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
20,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 1/1
|
650,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 12/31
|
440,000
|
|
Flood loss (net of tax)
|
30,000
|
|
Purchases
|
460,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,000,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
43,000
|
Required
a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.
b. Assuming that 100,000 shares of common stock are outstanding, calculate the earnings per share before extraordinary items and the net earnings per share.
c. Prepare a single-step income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for Lesky Corporation covers the year ended December 1,2000.
|
LESKY CORPORATION Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2000
|
|
|
Revenue:
|
|
|
|
Revenues from sales
|
$362,000
|
|
Rental income
|
|
1,000
|
|
Interest
|
|
2,400
|
|
Total revenue
|
|
365,400
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
$242,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
47,000
|
|
|
Administrative and general expenses
|
11,400
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
2,200
|
|
|
Federal and state income taxes
|
20,300
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
322,900
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 42,500
|
Required Change this statement to a multiple-step format, as illustrated in this chapter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounts of Consolidated Can contain the following amounts at December 31, 2000:
|
Cost of products sold
|
$410,000
|
|
Dividends
|
3,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain (net of tax)
|
1,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
9,300
|
|
Interest expense
|
8,700
|
|
Other income
|
1,600
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1
|
270,000
|
|
Sales
|
480,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
42,000
|
Required Prepare a multiple-step income statement combined with a reconciliation of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items are from Taper line Corporation on December 31, 2000. Assume a flat 40% corporate tax rate on all items, including the casualty loss.
|
Sales
|
$670,000
|
|
Rental income
|
3,600
|
|
Gain on the sale of fixed assets
|
3,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
110,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
97,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,900
|
|
Depreciation for the period
|
10,000
|
|
Extraordinary item (casualty loss—pretax)
|
30,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
300,000
|
|
Common stock (30,000 shares outstanding)
|
150,000
|
Required
a. Prepared a single-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2000. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.
b. Prepare a multiple-step income statement. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement of Rawl Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 shows:
|
Net sales
|
$360,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
190,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
170,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
80,000
|
|
Income before unusual write-offs
|
90,000
|
|
Provision for unusual write-offs
|
50,000
|
|
Earnings from operations before income taxes
|
40,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
20,000
|
|
Net earnings from operations before extraordinary charge
|
20,000
|
|
Extraordinary charge, net of tax of $10,000
|
(50,000)
|
|
Net earnings (loss)
|
$(30,000)
|
Required. Compute the net earnings remaining after removing unusual write-off stand the extraordinary charge. Remove these items net of tax. Estimate the tax rate for unusual write-offs based on the taxes on operating income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information applies to Bowling Green Metals Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2000.
|
Total revenues from regular operations
|
$832,000
|
|
Total expenses from regular operations
|
776,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain, net of applicable income taxes
|
30,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
20,000
|
|
Number of shares of common stock
|
|
outstanding during the year
|
10,000
|
Required . Compute earnings per share before extraordinary items and net earnings.
Show how this might be presented in the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You were recently hired as the assistant treasurer for Victor, Inc. Yesterday the treasurer was injured in a bicycle accident and is now hospitalized, unconscious. Your boss, Mr. Fernandes, just informed you that the financial statements are due today. Searching through the treasurer’s desk, you find the following notes:
a.Income from continuing operations, based on computation, s isd on$e4 00s,0o0 0. Far No taxes are accounted for yet. The tax rate is 30%.
b. Dividends declared and paid were $20,000. During the year, 100,000 shares of stock were outstanding.
c. The corporation experienced an uninsured $20,000 pretax loss from a freak hailstorm.
Such a storm is considered to be unusual and infrequent.
d. The company decided to change its inventory pricing method from average cost to the FIFO method. The effect of this change is to increase prior years’ income by $30,000 pretax. The FIFO method has been used for 2000. (Hint: This adjustment should be placed just prior to net income.)
e. In 2000, the company settled a lawsuit against it for $10,000 pretax. The settlement was not previously accrued and is due for payment in February 2001.
f. In 2000, the firm sold a portion of its long-term securities at a gain of $30,000 pretax.
g. The corporation disposed of its consumer products division in August 2000, at a loss of $90,000 pretax. The loss from operations through August was $60,000 pretax.
Required Prepare an income statement for 2000, in good form, starting with income from continuing operations. Compute earnings per share for income from continuing operations, discontinued operations, extraordinary loss, cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle, and net income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
List where each of the following items may appear. Choose from (A) income statement, (B) balance sheet, or (C) reconciliation of retained earnings.
a. Dividends paid
b. Notes payable
c. Minority share of earnings
d. Accrued payrolls
e. Loss on disposal of equipment
f. Minority interest in consoli-dated subsidiary
g. Adjustments of prior periods
h. Redeemable preferred stock
i. Treasury stock
j. Extraordinary loss
k. Unrealized exchange gains and losses
l. Equity in net income of affiliates
m. Goodwill
n. Unrealized decline in market value of equity investment
o. Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
p. Common stock
q. Costs of good sold
r. Supplies
s. Land
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Uranium Mining Company, founded in 1970 to mine and market uranium, purchased a mine in 1971 for $900 million. It estimated that the uranium had a market value of $150 per ounce. By 2000, the market value had increased to $300 per ounce. Records for 2000 indicate the following:
|
Production
|
200,000 ounces
|
|
Sales
|
230,000 ounces
|
|
Deliveries
|
190,000 ounces
|
|
Cash collection
|
210,000 ounces
|
|
Costs of production including depletion*
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Selling expense
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$1,250,000
|
|
Tax rate
|
50%
|
*Production cost per ounce has remained constant over the last few years, and the company has maintained the same production level.
Required a.Compute the income for 2000, using each of the following bases:
1. Receipt of cash
2. Point of sale
3. End of production
4. Based on delivery
b. Comment on when each of the methods should be used. Which method should be used by Uranium Mining Company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Each of the following statements represents a decision made by the accountant of Growth Industries:
- A tornado destroyed $200,000 in uninsured inventory. This loss is included in the cost of goods sold.
- Land was purchased ten years ago for $50,000. The accountant adjusts the land account to $100,000, which is the estimated current value.
- The cost of machinery and equipment is charged to a fixed asset account. The machinery and equipment will be expensed over the period of use.
- The value of equipment increased this year, so no depreciation of equipment was recorded this year.
- During the year, inventory that cost $5,000 was stolen by employees. This loss has been included in the cost of goods sold for the financial statements. The total amount of the cost of goods sold was $1,000,000.
- The president of the company, who owns the business, used company funds to buy a car for personal use. The car was recorded on the company’s books.
Required .State whether you agree or disagree with each decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for Gaffney Corporation covers the year ended December 31, 2000:
|
GAFFNEY CORPORATION Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2000
|
|
Revenue:
|
|
|
|
Revenues from sales
|
|
$450,000
|
|
Other
|
|
5,000
|
|
Total revenue
|
|
455,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
$280,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
50,000
|
|
|
Administrative and general expenses
|
20,000
|
|
|
Federal and state income taxes
|
30,000
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
380,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
75,000
|
|
Other comprehensive income
|
|
|
|
Available-for-sale securities adjustment,
|
|
|
net of $5,000 income tax
|
$ 7,000
|
|
|
Foreign currency translation adjustment,
|
|
|
net of $3,000 income tax
|
8,000
|
|
|
Other comprehensive income
|
|
15,000
|
|
Comprehensive income
|
|
$ 90,000
|
Required a.Will net income or comprehensive income tends to be more volatile? Comment.
b. Which income figure will be used to compute earnings per share?
c. What is the total tax expense reported?
d. Will the items within other comprehensive income always net out as an addition to net income? Comment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Hawk Company wants to determine the liquidity of its receivables. It has supplied you with the following data regarding selected accounts for December 31, 2000, and 1999:
|
2000
|
1999
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,180,178
|
$2,200,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance for losses and discounts
|
|
Beginning of year (allowance for losses and
|
|
|
discounts, 2000—$12,300; 1999—$7,180)
|
240,360
|
230,180
|
|
End of year (allowance for losses and
|
|
|
discounts, 2000—$11,180; 1999—$12,300)
|
220,385
|
240,360
|
Required a. Compute the number of days’ sales in receivables at December 31, 2000, and 1999.
b. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for 2000 and 1999. (Use year-end gross receivables.)
c. Comment on the liquidity of the Hawk Company receivables.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mr. Williams, the owner of Williams Produce, wants to maintain control over accounts receivable. He understands that days’ sales in receivables and accounts receivable turnover will give a good indication of how well receivables are being managed. Williams Produce does 60% of its business during June, July, and August. Mr. Williams provided the pertinent data:
|
For Year Ended
|
For Year
|
|
December 31,
|
Ended
|
|
2000
|
July 31, 2000
|
|
Net sales
|
$800,000
|
$790,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts
|
|
Beginning of period (allowance
|
|
|
January 1, $3,000; August 1, $4,000)
|
50,000
|
89,000
|
|
End of period (allowance December 31,
|
|
|
$3,500; July 31, $4,100)
|
55,400
|
90,150
|
Required a. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for July 31, 2000, and December 31, 2000, based on the accompanying data.
b. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for the period ended July
31, 2000, and December 31, 2000. (Use year-end gross receivables.)
c. Comment on the results from (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The L. Solomon Company would like to compare its days’ sales in receivables with that of a competitor, L. Konrath Company. Both companies have had similar sales results in the past, but the L. Konrath Company has had better profit results. The L. Solomon Company suspects that one reason for the better profit results is that the L. Konrath Company did a better job of managing receivables. The L. Solomon Company uses a calendar year that ends on December 31, while the L. Konrath Company uses a fiscal year that ends on July 31. Information related to sales and receivables of the two companies follows:
|
For Year Ended December 31, 20XX
|
|
L. Solomon Company
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $8,000
|
110,000
|
|
L. Konrath Company Net sales Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $4,000
|
|
L. Konrath Company
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,850,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $4,000
|
60,000
|
Required a. Compute the days’ sales in receivables for both companies. (Use yearend gross receivables.) b. Comment on the results.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following inventory and sales data for this year for the G. Rabbit Company are:
|
End
|
Beginning
|
|
of Year
|
of Year
|
|
Net sales
|
$3,150,000
|
|
|
Gross receivables
|
180,000
|
$160,000
|
|
Inventory
|
480,000
|
390,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,250,000
|
|
Required Using the above data from the G. Rabbit Company, compute:
a. The accounts receivable turnover in days
b. The inventory turnover in days
c. The operating cycle
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A partial balance sheet and income statement for the King Corporation are shown below and on the next page.
|
KING CORPORATION Partial Balance Sheet December 31, 2001
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 33,493
|
|
Marketable securities
|
215,147
|
|
Trade receivables, less allowance of $6,000
|
255,000
|
|
Inventories, LIFO
|
523,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
26,180
|
|
Total current assets
|
$1,052,820
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Trade accounts payable
|
$ 103,689
|
|
Notes payable (primarily to banks) and commercial paper
|
210,381
|
|
Accrued expenses and other liabilities
|
120,602
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
3,120
|
|
Current maturities of long-term debt
|
22,050
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 459,842
|
Required Compute the following:
a. Working capital.
b. Current ratio
c. Acid-test ratio
d. Cash ratio
e. Days’ sales in receivables
f. Accounts receivable turnover in days
g. Days’ sales in inventory
h. Inventory turnover in days
i. Operating cycle
|
KING CORPORATION Partial Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2001
|
|
Net sales
|
$3,050,600
|
|
Miscellaneous income
|
45,060
|
|
$3,095,660
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of sales
|
2,185,100
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
350,265
|
|
Interest expense
|
45,600
|
|
Income taxes
|
300,000
|
|
2,880,965
|
|
Net income
|
$ 214,695
|
Note: The trade receivables at December 31, 2000, were $280,000, net of an allowance of $8,000, for a gross receivables figure of $288,000. The inventory at
December 31, 2000, was $565,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Individual transactions often have a significant impact on ratios. This problem will consider the direction of such an impact.
|
Total Current Assets
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
Net Working Capital
|
Current Ratio
|
|
a. Cash is acquired through issuance of additional common stock.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
b. Merchandise is sold for cash. (Assume a profit.)
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
c. A fixed asset is sold for more than book value.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
d. Payment is made to trade creditors for previous purchases.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
e. A cash dividend is declared and paid.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
f. A stock dividend is declared and paid.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
g. Cash is obtained through long-term bank loans.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
h. A profitable firm increases its fixed assets depreciation allowance account.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
i. Current operating expenses are paid.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
j. Ten-year notes are issued to pay off accounts payable.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
k. Accounts receivable are collected.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
l. Equipment is purchased with short-term notes.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
m. Merchandise is purchased on credit.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
n. The estimated taxes payable are increased.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
o. Marketable securities are sold below cost.
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Required Indicate the effects of the transactions listed above on each of the following: total current assets, total current liabilities, net working capital, and current ratio. Use ??to indicate an increase, -?to indicate a decrease, and 0 to indicate no effect. Assume an initial current ratio of more than 1 to 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial data were taken from the annual financial statements of the Smith Corporation:
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
|
Current assets
|
$450,000
|
$400,000
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
390,000
|
300,000
|
340,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,450,000
|
1,500,000
|
1,400,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,180,000
|
1,020,000
|
1,120,000
|
|
Inventory
|
280,000
|
200,000
|
250,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
105,000
|
Required a. Based on these data, calculate the following for 2000 and 2001:
1. Working capital
2. Current ratio
3. Acid-test ratio
4. Accounts receivable turnover
5. Merchandise inventory turnover
6. Inventory turnover in days
b. Evaluate the results of your computations in regard to the short-term liquidity of the firm.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Anne Elizabeth Corporation is engaged in the business of making toys. A high percentage of its products are sold to consumers during November and December. Therefore, retailers need to have the toys in stock prior to November. The corporation produces on a relatively stable basis during the year in order to retain its skilled employees and to minimize its investment in plant and equipment. The seasonal nature of its business requires a substantial capacity to store inventory.
The gross receivables balance at April 30, 2000, was $75,000, and the inventory balance was $350,000 on this date. Sales for the year ended April 30, 2001, totaled $4,000,000, and the cost of goods sold totaled $1,800,000. The Anne Elizabeth Corporation uses a natural business year that ends on April 30.
Inventory and accounts receivable data are given in the following table for the year ended April 30, 2001.
|
Month-End Balance
|
|
Month
|
Gross Receivables
|
Inventory
|
|
May, 2000
|
$ 60,000
|
$525,000
|
|
June, 2000
|
40,000
|
650,000
|
|
July, 2000
|
50,000
|
775,000
|
|
August, 2000
|
60,000
|
900,000
|
|
September, 2000
|
200,000
|
975,000
|
|
October, 2000
|
800,000
|
700,000
|
|
November, 2000
|
1,500,000
|
400,000
|
|
December, 2000
|
1,800,000
|
25,000
|
|
January, 2001
|
1,000,000
|
100,000
|
|
February, 2001
|
600,000
|
150,000
|
|
March, 2001
|
200,000
|
275,000
|
|
April, 2001
|
50,000
|
400,000
|
Required a. Using averages based on the yearend figures, compute the following:
1. Accounts receivable turnover in days
2. Accounts receivable turnover per year
3. Inventory turnover in days
4. Inventory turnover per year
b. Using averages based on monthly figures, compute the following:
1. Accounts receivable turnover in days
2. Accounts receivable turnover per year
3. Inventory turnover in days
4. Inventory turnover per year
c. Comment on the difference between the ratios computed in (a) and (b).
d. Compute the days’ sales in receivables.
e. Compute the days’ sales in inventory.
f. How realistic are the days’ sales in receivables and the days’ sales in inventory that were computed in (d) and (e)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. The following table presents sales forecasts for Golden Gelt Giftware. The unit price is $40. The unit cost of the giftware is $25.
|
Year
|
Unit Sales
|
|
1
|
22,000
|
|
2
|
30,000
|
|
3
|
14,000
|
|
4
|
5,000
|
|
Thereafter
|
0
|
It is expected that net working capital will amount to 25 percent of sales in the following year. For example, the store will need an initial (Year 0) investment in working capital of.25 x 22,000 x $40 = $220,000. Plant and equipment necessary to establish the giftware business will require an additional investment of$200,000.
This investment will bedepreciated in an asset class with a CCA rate of 25 percent. We will assume that the firm has other assets in this asset class. After four years, the equipment will have an economic and book value of zero. The firm”s tax rate is 35 percent. The discount rate is 20 percent. What is the net present value of the project?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. You are considering investing in a new line of entertainment products. The project has an estimated economic life of five years. You anticipate some immediate stand-up costs amounting to $25,000. In addition, you will be investing $ 100,000 in new plant and equipment. Assume, for tax purposes, that the machinery and equipment will be depreciated straight-line over its economic life. Also assume that the initial tan-up costs are fully tax-deductible.
In the first year of operation you are ant incepting sales revenues of $60,000. These revenues are expected to grow by five percent per year until Year 4, however, the revenues are expected to decline by five percent in the fifth year. First year operating costs will be $10,000; in subsequent years, these are expected to grow in proportion to sales revenues. The tax rate applicable to your business will be 34 percent. Also, at the end of the project”s economic life, your plant and equipment will not have any salvage value. Your cost of capital is 12 percent?
Assuming that you will be able to expense the project’s standup costs.
a. Calculate its payback period discounted payback period. Internal rate of return, net present value, and profitability index.
b. Using the net present value and internal rate of return criteria, do you think it is worthwhile for you to pursue this project”! Explain your answer.
c. Now, assume that for CCA purposes, your plant and equipment belong to asset Class 39, which carries a CCA rate of 25 percent. Recomputed the project”s net present value, assuming that you have other assets in asset Class 39 that will be continued even after the economic life of this project is over. Work out your calculations separately assuming ( I) a zero salvage value and (2) a $ 10,000 salvage value, al the end of the project”s economic life. Would you pursue the project under these new conditions? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. PC Shopping Network may upgrade it is modem pool. It last upgraded 2 years ago, when it spent $115 million on equipment with an assumed life of 5 years and an assumed salvage value of $ 15 million for tax purposes. The firm uses straight-line depredation. The old equipment can be sold today for $80 million A new modem pool can be installed today for $150 million. This will have a 3-year life, and will be depreciated to zero using straight-line depreciation. The new equipment will enable the firm to increase sales by $25 million per year and decrease operating costs by $ 10 million per year. At the end of 3 years, the new equipment will be worthless. Assume the firm”s tax rate is 35 percent and the discount rate for projects of this sort is 12 percent.
a. What is the net cash now at time 0 if the old equipment is replaced”!
b. What are the incremental cash flows in Years 1, 2, and 3?
c. What are the NPV and IRR of the replacement project?
d. Now ignore straight-line depreciation and assume that both new and old equipment are in an asset class with a CCA rate of 30 percent. PC Shopping Network has other assets in this asset class. What is the NPV of the replacement project”! For this part, assume that the new equipment will have a salvage value of $30 million at the end of3 years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Integrative You are exploring the possibility of starting a project involving production of an assortment of spicy curried pickles. You had approached a marketing consultant to conduct market research and do a one-year feasibility study for $25,000. The recommendations of the study ore positive, and you have decided to begin work on the project. You expect the life of the project to be six years. The initial investment in the project is expected 10 be as follows:
Land: $150,000
Buildings: $350,000
Manufacturing equipment: $250,000
Net working capital: $40,000
For CCA computation, the belong to asset Class I and the manufacturing equipment is in asset Class 39, with applicable CCA rates of 4 percent and 25 percent, respectively. At the end of the project”s economic life, you expect to be able to sell the buildings and land for $450,000 (the value of the land is expected to remain unchanged). The manufacturing equipment is, however, expected to have a salvage value of only $125,000. Net working capital requirements for each year are expected to increase by 10 percent from the previous year. Your business will be taxed at 35 percent.
In the first year, you expect to sell 30,000 units of the gannet pickles in bol1lcdjors. In each subsequent year, unit sales are expected to increase by 4 percent. You ha”e decided to price the pickles at S8.50 for each jar in the first year. You intend to adjust the price in subsequent years to keep up with inflation
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
you have decided that the appropriate discount rate to evaluate the project””s cash flows should be 12 percent. Conduct an NPV analysis to determine whether your decision to go ahead with the project is correct.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
would you pursue the project under these new conditions explain your answer 544072
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. Virtual Printing Inc. has devised a new technology based on which it plans to launch a new line of print media products. The firm intends to spend $160,000 in new plan! And equipment land $40,000 in expanding its building facilities to house the project. The project has an estimated economic life of eight years. Assume, for tax purposes, that the machinery and equipment and building will be depreciated straight-line over its economic life.
In the first year of operation, Virtual Printing expects to generate sales revenues of $60,000. These revenues are expected to stay at the same level until Year 3 but are subsequently expected to grow by 10 percent annually until Year 6, after which the revenues are expected to decline by 5 percent per year. First-year operating costwill be $15,000; in subsequent years, these are expected to grow in proportion to sales revenue.
The tax rate applicable to Virtual Printing”s business will be J4 percent. Also, at the end of the project”s economic life, the plant and equipment will not have any salvage value. The expanded building facilities also cannot be sold, leased or rented to another business entity without compromising the firm”s existing operations. Virtual Printing”s cost of capital is 12 percent.
a. Should Virtual Printing”s finance manager recommend accepting the project if the firm”s objective is to accept projects only when they are worth more than their cost?
b. Explain your answer to pan (a) above. What technique did you use in your answer to pan (a)?
c. By what time frame can Virtual Printing expect to recover its initial investment in the project:
(I) ignoring the lime value of money, and (2) taking into account the time value of money”! Name the techniques you have used for your computation. What arc the benefits and drawbacks to these techniques?
d. What is the IRR for this project?
e. Now, assume that for CCA purposes, the plan and equipment actually belong to asset Class 39 and the buildings belong to asset Class 1. with applicable CCA rates of 25 percent and 4 percent, respectively. Recomputed the project”s net present value, assuming that Virtual Printing has other assets in both asset classes that will be continued even after the economic life of this project is over. Work out your calculations assuming a zero salvage value for the building expansion and a $10,000 salvage value for the plant and equipment, at the end of the project”s economic life. Would you pursue the project under these new conditions? Explain your answer.
zero corporation is being sued for 1 000 000 for breach of contract its lawyers beli 544134
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the accounting principle(s) applicable to each of the following situations:
a. Tim Roberts owns a bar and a rental apartment and operates a consulting service. He has separate financial statements for each.
b. An advance collection for magazine subscriptions is reported as a liability titled Unearned Subscriptions.
c. Purchases for office or store equipment for less than $25 are entered in Miscellaneous Expense.
d. A company uses the lower of cost or market for valuation of its inventory.
e. Partially completed television sets are carried at the sum of the cost incurred to date.
f. Land purchased 15 years ago for $40,500 is now worth $346,000. It is still carried on the books at $40,500.
g. Zero Corporation is being sued for $1,000,000 for breach of contract. Its lawyers believe that the damages will be minimal. Zero reports the possible loss in a footnote.
a quality requiring that the information be timely and that it also have predictive 544139
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FASB Statement of Concepts No. 2 indicates several qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information. Below is a list of some of these qualities, as well as a list of statements and phrases describing the qualities?
a. Benefits costs
b. Decision usefulness representational faithfulness
c. Relevance
d. Reliability
e. Predictive value, feedback value, timeliness
f. Verifiability, neutrality,
g. Comparability
h. Materiality
i. Relevance, reliability
1. Without usefulness, there would be no benefits from information to set against its cost.
2. Pervasive constraint imposed upon financial accounting information.
3. Constraint that guides the threshold for recognition.
4. A quality requiring that the information be timely and that it also have predictive value, or feedback value, or both.
5. A quality requiring that the information have representational faithfulness and that it be verifiable and neutral.
6. These are the two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making.
7. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is relevant.
8. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is reliable.
9. Includes consistency and interacts with relevance and reliability to contribute to the usefulness of information.
Required Place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement or phrase describing the quality.
the business for which the financial statements are prepared is separate and distinc 544140
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Certain underlying considerations have had an important impact on the development of generally accepted accounting principles. Below is a list of these underlying considerations, as well as a list of statements describing them
a. Going concern or continuity
b. Monetary unit
c. Conservatism
d. Matching
e. Full disclosure
f. Materiality
g. Transaction approach
h. Accrual basis
i. Industry practices
j. Verifiability
k. Consistency
l. Realization
m. Historical cost
n. Time period
o. Business entity
1. The business for which the financial statements are prepared is separate and distinct from the owners.
2. The assumption is made that the entity will remain in business for an indefinite period of time.
3. Accountants need some standard of measure to bring financial transactions together in a meaningful way.
4. Revenue should be recognized when the earning process is virtually complete and the exchange value can be objectively determined.
5. This concept deals with when to recognize the costs that are associated with the recognized revenue.
6. Accounting reports must disclose all facts that may influence the judgment of an informed reader.
7. This concept involves the relative size and importance of an item to a firm.
8. The accountant is required to adhere as closely as possible to verifiable data.
9. Some companies use accounting reports that do not conform to the general theory that underlies accounting.
10. The accountant records only events that affect the financial position of the entity and, at the same time, can be reasonably determined in monetary terms.
11. Revenue must be recognized when it is realized (realization concept), and expenses are recognized when incurred (matching concept).
12. The entity must give the same treatment to comparable transactions from period to period.
13. The measurement with the least favorable effect on net income and financial position in the current period must be selected.
14. Of the various values that could be used, this value has been selected because it is objective and determinable.
15. With this assumption, inaccuracies of accounting for the entity short of its complete life span are accepted.
RequiredPlace the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement describing the quality.
which pronouncements are not issued by the financial accounting standards board 544141
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
RequiredAnswer the following multiple-choice questions:
a. Which of the following is a characteristic of information provided by external financial reports?
1. The information is exact and not subject to change.
2. The information is frequently the result of reasonable estimates.
3. The information pertains to the economy as a whole.
4. The information is provided at the least possible cost.
5. None of the above.
b. Which of the following is not an objective of financial reporting?
1. Financial reporting should provide information that is useful to present and potential investors and creditors and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions.
2. Financial reporting should provide information to help present and potential investors and creditors and other users in assessing the amounts, timing, and uncertainty of prospective cash receipts from dividends or interest and the proceeds from the sale, redemption, or maturity of securities or loans.
3. Financial reporting should provide information about the economic resources of an enterprise, the claims against those resources, and the effects of transactions, events, and circumstances that change the resources and claims against those resources.
4. Financial accounting is designed to measure directly the value of a business enterprise.
5. None of the above.
c. According to FASB Statement of Concepts No. 2, which of the following is an ingredient of the quality of relevance?
1. Verifiability
2. Representational faithfulness
3. Neutrality
4. Timeliness
5. None of the above
d. The primary current source of generally accepted accounting principles for nongovernment operations is the
1. New York Stock Exchange
2. Financial Accounting Standards Board Certified Public Accountants
3. Securities and Exchange Commission
4. American Institute of
5. None of the above
e. What is the underlying concept that supports the immediate recognition of a loss?
1. Matching
2. Consistency
3. Judgment
4. Conservatism
5. Going concern
f. Which statement is not true?
1. The Securities and Exchange Commission is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
2. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
3. The Internal Revenue Service is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
4. The Financial Accounting Standards Board is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
5. Numbers 1, 2, and 4 are sources of generally accepted accounting principles.
g. Which pronouncements are not issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board?
1. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards
2. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts
3. Technical bulletins
4. Interpretations
5. Opinions
sfac no 5 identifies five different measurement attributes currently used in practic 544142
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
RequiredAnswer the following multiple-choice questions:
a. Which of the following does the Financial Accounting Standards Board not issue?
1. Statements of Position (SOPs)
2. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards (SFASs)
3. Interpretations
4. Technical bulletins
5. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts (SFACs)
b. According to SFAC No. 6, assets can be defined by which of the following?
1. Probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events.
2. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events.
3. Residual interest on the assets of an entity that remains after deducting its liabilities.
4. Increases in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transfers to the enterprise from other entities of something of value to obtain or increase ownership interests (or equity) in it.
5. Decrease in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transferring assets, rendering services, or incurring liabilities by the enterprise.
c. According to SFAC No. 6, expenses can be defined by which of the following?
1. Inflows or other enhancements of assets of an entity or settlements of its liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.
2. Outflows or other consumption or using up of assets or incurrences of liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.
3. Increases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from revenues or investments.
4. Decreases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from expenses or distributions to owners.
5. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events.
d. SFAC No. 5 indicates that an item, to be recognized, should meet four criteria, subject to the cost-benefit constraint and the materiality threshold. Which of the following is not one of the four criteria?
1. The item fits one of the definitions of the elements.
2. The item has a relevant attribute measurable with sufficient reliability.
3. The information related to the item is relevant.
4. The information related to the item is reliable.
5. The item has comparability, including consistency.
e. SFAC No. 5 identifies five different measurement attributes currently used in practice Which of the following is not one of the measurement attributes currently used in practice?
1. Historical cost
2. Future cost
3. Current market value
4. Net realizable value
5. Present, or discounted, value of future cash flows
f. Which of the following indicates how revenue is usually recognized?
1. Point of sale
2. End of production
3. Receipt of cash
4. During production
5. Cost recovery
g. Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 1, “Objectives of Financial
Reporting by Business Enterprises,” includes all of the following objectives, except one. Which objective does it not include?
1. Financial accounting is designed to measure directly the value of a business enterprise.
2. Investors, creditors, and others may use reported earnings and information about the elements of financial statements in various ways to assess the prospects for cash flows.
3. The primary focus of financial reporting is information about earnings and its components.
4. Financial reporting should provide information that is useful to present and potential investors and creditors and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions.
5. The objectives are those of general-purpose external financial reporting by business enterprises.
determine income on a cash basis 544143
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to Jones Company for the year ended December 31, 1999:
|
Sales on credit
|
$80,000
|
|
Cost of inventory sold on credit
|
65,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
60,000
|
|
Purchase of inventory on credit
|
50,000
|
|
Payment for purchases
|
55,000
|
|
Cash collections for common stock
|
30,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
10,000
|
|
Payment to salesclerk
|
10,000
|
Required
a. Determine income on an accrual basis.
b. Determine income on a cash basis.
the following information was obtained from the accounts of airlines international d 544225
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the accounts of Airlines International dated December 31, 2000. It is presented in alphabetical order.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 77,916
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
67,551
|
|
Accrued expenses
|
23,952
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
220,541
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
248
|
|
Capital in excess of par
|
72,913
|
|
Cash
|
28,837
|
|
Common stock (par $.50, authorized 20,000
|
|
shares, issued 14,304 shares)
|
7,152
|
|
Current installments of long-term debt
|
36,875
|
|
Deferred income tax liability (long term)
|
42,070
|
|
Inventory
|
16,643
|
|
Investments and special funds
|
11,901
|
|
Long-term debt, less current portion
|
393,808
|
|
Marketable securities
|
10,042
|
|
Other assets
|
727
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
3,963
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment at cost
|
809,980
|
|
Retained earnings
|
67,361
|
|
Unearned transportation revenue (airline
|
|
|
tickets expiring within one year)
|
6,808
|
RequiredPrepare a classified balance sheet in report form.
the following information was obtained from the accounts of lukes inc as of december 544226
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the accounts of Lukes, Inc. as of December 31, 2000. It is presented in scrambled order. Common stock, no par value, 10,000 shares
|
authorized, 5,724 shares issued
|
$ 3,180
|
|
Retained earnings
|
129,950
|
|
Deferred income tax liability (long term)
|
24,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
99,870
|
|
Accounts payable
|
35,000
|
|
Buildings
|
75,000
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
300,000
|
|
Land
|
11,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
3,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance of $3,000
|
58,000
|
|
Accrued income taxes
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
54,000
|
|
Other accrued expenses
|
8,000
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
7,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
2,000
|
|
Other assets (long term)
|
7,000
|
Required Prepare a classified balance sheet in report form. For assets, use the classifications of current assets, plant and equipment, and other assets. For liabilities, use the classifications of current liabilities and long-term liabilities.
presented below is the balance sheet of rubber industries 544228
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is the balance sheet of Rubber Industries.
|
RUBBER INDUSTRIES
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2000
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
|
Marketable equity securities
|
19,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
60,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
|
Treasury stock
|
20,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
179,000
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
Land and buildings, net
|
160,000
|
|
Investments:
|
|
|
Short-term U.S. notes
|
20,000
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
Supplies
|
4,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$363,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Liabilities:
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
$120,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
40,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
10,000
|
|
Premium on bonds payable
|
3,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
173,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
Common stock ($20 par, 20,000 shares
|
|
|
authorized, 6,000 shares outstanding)
|
120,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
30,000
|
|
Minority interest
|
20,000
|
|
Redeemable preferred stock
|
20,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$363,000
|
Required Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.
presented below is the balance sheet of mcdonald company 544229
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is the balance sheet of McDonald Company.
|
McDONALD COMPANY
|
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2000
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash (including $10,000 restricted
|
|
|
|
|
for payment of note)
|
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Marketable equity securities
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, less allowance
|
|
|
|
|
for doubtful accounts of $12,000
|
|
70,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
$190,000
|
|
Land
|
|
40,000
|
|
|
Buildings, net
|
|
100,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
$80,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
20,000
|
60,000
|
|
|
Patent
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Organizational costs
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
|
235,000
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
|
$430,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$60,000
|
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Notes payable, due July 1, 2003
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable, due December 2010
|
|
100,000
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
Dividends payable
|
|
|
|
|
Deferred tax liability, long term
|
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock ($10 par, 10,000
|
|
|
|
|
shares authorized, 5,000 shares outstanding)
|
50,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
156,000
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
206,000
|
|
total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
$430,000
|
Required Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.
you have just started as a staff auditor for a small cpa firm during the course of t 544230
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just started as a staff auditor for a small CPA firm. During the course of the audit, you discover the following items related to a single client firm:
a. During the year, the firm declared and paid $10,000 in dividends.
b. Your client has been named defendant in a legal suit involving a material amount. You have received from the client’s counsel a statement indicating little likelihood of loss.
c. Because of cost control actions and general employee dissatisfaction, it is likely that the client will suffer a costly strike in the near future.
d. Twenty days after closing, the client suffered a major fire in one of its plants.
e. The cash account includes a substantial amount set aside for payment of pension obligations.
f. Marketable securities include a large quantity of shares of stock purchased for control purposes.
g. Land is listed on the balance sheet at its market value of $1,000,000. It cost $670,000 to purchase 12 years ago.
h. During the year, the government of Uganda expropriated a plant located in that country. There was substantial loss.
Required .How would each of these items be reflected in the year-end balance sheet, including footnotes?
corvallis corporation owns 80 of the stock of little harrisburg inc at december 31 2 544231
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corvallis Corporation owns 80% of the stock of Little Harrisburg, Inc. At December 31, 2000, Little Harrisburg had the following summarized balance sheet:
|
LITTLE HARRISBURG,
|
|
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2000
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
$100,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Property, plant, and
|
|
Long-term debt
|
150,000
|
|
equipment (net)
|
400,000
|
Capital stock
|
50,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
250,000
|
|
$500,000
|
|
$500,000
|
The earnings of Little Harrisburg, Inc. for 2000 were $50,000 after tax.
Required
a. What would be the amount of minority interest on the balance sheet of Corvallis Corporation? How should minority interest be classified for financial statement analysis purposes?
b. What would be the minority share of earnings on the income statement of Corvallis Corporation?
what would be the increase in the current cost of majikstan enterprise rsquo s equip 543820
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Now assume that Majikstan Enterprises is a foreign subsidiary of a U.S.-based multinational corporation and that its financial statements are consolidated with those of its U.S. parent. Relevant exchange rate and
|
Exchange rate:
|
General Price Level Index:
|
|
|
Majikstan
|
U.S.
|
|
12/31/2010
|
MJR 4,400 = $1
|
30,000
|
281.5
|
|
Average 2011
|
MJR 4,800 = $1
|
32,900
|
292.5
|
|
12/31/2011
|
MJR 5,290 = $1
|
36,000
|
303.5
|
Required: What would be the increase in the current cost of Majikstan Enterprise’s equipment, net of inflation, when expressed in U.S. dollars under the restate-translate methodology? Under the translate restate method?
assuming that changes in the producer rsquo s price index are a satisfactory measure 543821
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance sheet of Rackett & Ball plc., a U.K.-based sporting goods manufacturer, is presented here. Figures are stated in millions of pounds (?m). During the year, the producer’s price index increased from 100 to 120, averaging.
|
£2010 m
|
£2011 m
|
|
Fixed Assets:
|
|
|
Intangible assets
|
56
|
150
|
|
Tangible assets
|
260
|
318
|
|
Investments
|
4
|
5
|
|
320
|
479
|
|
Current Assets:
|
|
Inventory
|
175
|
220
|
|
Trade receivable
|
242
|
270
|
|
Marketable securities
|
30
|
50
|
|
Cash
|
25
|
25
|
|
472
|
565
|
|
Current Liabilities:
|
|
Trade payables
|
-170
|
-160
|
|
Net current assets
|
302
|
405
|
|
Total assets less current liabilities
|
622
|
884
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
85
|
128
|
|
Total net assets
|
237
|
356
|
|
Owner’s Equity:
|
|
Common stock
|
42
|
42
|
|
Premium on common stock
|
87
|
87
|
|
Retained earnings
|
108
|
227
|
|
Total owner’s equity
|
237
|
356
|
110.The aggregate current cost of sales, depreciation, and monetary working capital adjustment is assumed to be ?216m. Required: Assuming that changes in the producer’s price index are a satisfactory measure of the change in R&B’s purchasing power, calculate, as best as you can, R&B’s monetary working capital adjustment and its gearing adjustment.
which dollar figure do you think provides the more useful information 543822
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ninsuvaan Corporation, a U.S. subsidiary in Bangkok, Thailand, begins and ends its calendar year with an inventory balance of BHT500 million. The dollar/baht exchange rate on January 1 was $0.02 = BHT1. During the year, the U.S. general price level advances from 180 to 198, while the Thai general price level doubles. The exchange rate on December 31 was $0.015 = BHT1.
Required:
a. Using the temporal method of translation, calculate the dollar equivalent of the inventory balance by first restating for Thai inflation, then translating to U.S. dollars.
b. Repeat part (a), but translate the nominal baht balances to dollars before restating for U.S. inflation.
c. Which dollar figure do you think provides the more useful information?
d. If you are dissatisfied with either result, suggest a method that would provide more useful information than those in parts (a) and (b).
|
Balance Sheet Year Ended 2011
|
|
Cash
|
EUR2,000
|
Short-term debt
|
EUR8,000
|
|
Inventory
|
8,000
|
Long-term debt
|
25,000
|
|
Plant & equipment, net
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Other assets
|
5,000
|
Owners’ equity
|
2,000
|
|
Total
|
EUR35,000
|
|
EUR35,000
|
Exchange rate and price information:
January 1: General price index = 300
EUR1.5 = £1
December 31: General price index = 390
EUR1.95 = £1
how will u s interests be protected if standard setting is the responsibility of a n 543840
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) roadmap issued in 2008 may eventually move U.S. issuers to report under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Consider the following critical questions of such a move:
a. IFRS lack detailed rules when compared to U.S. GAAP. Shouldn’t IFRS be further developed and improved before mandating them?
b. An effort is already under way to converge U.S. GAAP and IFRS. Why not just keep converging?
c. How will U.S. interests be protected if standard setting is the responsibility of a non-U.S. organization?
Required: As one who believes that U.S. companies should use IFRS instead of U.S. GAAP in their financial statement filings with the SEC, how would you answer each of the above critical questions?
did infosys create value for its shareholders 543853
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Infosys Technologies, introduced in Chapter 1, regularly provides investors with a performance measure called economic value-added (EVA). Originally pioneered by GE, EVA measures the profitability of a company after deducting not just the cost of borrowing but also the firm’s cost of equity capital. So EVA is the after-tax return on capital employed (adjusted for the tax shield on debt) less the cost of capital employed. Companies that earn a higher return on capital employed than its cost of capital create value for its shareholders. Those that do not destroy shareholder value. Reproduced below is EVA calculations for Infosys for 2006.
Required:
1. Did Infosys create value for its shareholders?
2. Is EVA a useful performance metric relative to net income? (Compare PAT or profit after tax, and EVA to average capital employed.)
|
Cost of capital:
|
|
Cost of risk-free debt (%)
|
7.5
|
|
Market premium
|
7
|
|
Beta variant
|
0.78
|
|
Cost of equity (%)
|
12.96
|
|
Average debt/Total capital (%)
|
—
|
|
Cost of debt – net of tax (%)
|
NA
|
|
Weighted average cost of capital (%)
|
12.96
|
|
Average capital employed
|
6,177
|
|
PAT as a percentage of average capital employed (%)
|
40.14
|
|
Economic Value Added:
|
|
|
Operating profit (excluding extraordinary income)
|
2,654
|
|
Less: Taxes
|
313
|
|
Less: Cost of capital
|
801
|
|
EVA
|
1,540
|
|
Ratios:
|
|
|
EVA as a percentage of average capital employed (%)
|
24.93
|
compare the year to year percentage changes in sales revenues in pounds and in u s d 543855
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following sales revenue pattern for a British trading concern was cited earlier in the chapter:
|
2009
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Sales revenue
|
£23,500
|
£28,650
|
£33,160
|
Required:
a: Perform a convenience translation into U.S. dollars for each year given the following year-end exchange rates:
|
2009
|
£1 = $2.10
|
|
2010
|
£1 = $2.20
|
|
2011
|
£1 = $1.60
|
b. Compare the year-to-year percentage changes in sales revenues in pounds and in U.S. dollars. Do the two time series move in parallel fashion? Why or why not?
c. Suggest a method for minimizing the effect of exchange rate changes on foreign currency trend data.
what would be slovenia corporation rsquo s selling price per unit if it wants a gros 543870
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Slovenia Corporation manufactures a product that is marketed in North America, Europe, and Asia. Its total manufacturing cost to produce 100 units of product X is €=2,250, detailed as follows:
|
Raw materials
|
€500
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,000
|
|
Overhead
|
750
|
|
Total
|
€2,250
|
The company bases its selling price on a cost plus formula.
Required:
a. What would be Slovenia Corporation’s selling price per unit if it wants a gross profit of 10 percent above cost?
b. Slovenia Corporation wants to be price competitive on an international basis. To accomplish this it must be able to price its product no higher than $21.50. Using the target costing methodology described in this chapter, what would be Slovenia Corporation’s allowable costs? Assume that the company still wants a profit margin of 10 percent of its allowable costs. What does your calculation imply about its manufacturing costs?
management insists on a risk premium of 10 percent when evaluating foreign projects 543872
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that management is considering whether to make the foreign direct investment described in Exercise 3. Investment will require $6,000,000 in equity capital. Cash flows to the parent are expected to increase by 5 percent over the previous year for each year after year 2 (through year 6). Exchange rate forecasts are as follows:
|
Year
|
Rate
|
|
1
|
RUB 26 = $1
|
|
2
|
RUB 27 = $1
|
|
3
|
RUB 29 = $1
|
|
4–6
|
RUB 31 = $1
|
Management insists on a risk premium of 10 percent when evaluating foreign projects.
Required: Assuming a weighted average cost of capital of 10 percent and no expected changes in differential tax rates, evaluate the desirability of the Russian investment using a traditional discounted cash flow analysis.
inflation and zambian kwacha zmk devaluation is 30 percent per month or 1 2 percent 543874
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following:
- Inflation and Zambian kwacha (ZMK) devaluation is 30 percent per month, or 1.2 percent per workday.
- Foreign exchange rates at selected intervals for the current month are:
|
1-Jan
|
100
|
|
10-Jan
|
109.6
|
|
20-Jan
|
119.6
|
|
30-Jan
|
130
|
- The real rate of interest is 1.5 percent per month, or 20 percent per year.
- Cash balances are kept in hard currency (dollars).
- Month-end rates are used to record expense transactions.
Required: Based on these assumptions, prepare a table showing the distortions that can occur when expense transactions totaling ZMK 1,000,000 are recorded using conventional measurement rules (i.e., month-end rates in this example) instead of the internal reporting structure recommended in this chapter.
|
Transactions:
|
|
Invoice Date
|
Payment Terms
|
|
1
|
Cash
|
|
5
|
15 days
|
|
5
|
25 days
|
exchange risk management is also centralized at corporate treasury required based on 543875
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Global Enterprises, Inc. uses a number of performance criteria to evaluate its overseas operations, including return on investment. Compagnie de Calais, its Belgian subsidiary,
|
Compagnie de Calais Performance Report
|
|
Sales
|
|
$4,200,000
|
|
|
Other income
|
|
120,000
|
|
|
$4,320,000
|
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of sales
|
$3,200,000
|
|
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
330,000
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
160,000
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
162,000
|
|
|
|
Exchange losses
|
368,000
|
4,220,000
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
$100,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
42,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$58,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
submits the performance report shown in Exhibit 10-13 for the current fiscal year (translated to U.S. dollar equivalents). Included in sales are $500,000 worth of components sold by Compagnie de Calais to its sister subsidiary in Brussels at a transfer price set by corporate headquarters at 40 percent above an arms-length price. Cost of goods sold includes excess labor costs of $150,000 owing to local labor laws. Administrative expenses include $50,000 of headquarters expenses, which are allocated by Global Enterprises to its Belgian affiliate. The parent company holds all of its subsidiaries responsible for their fair share of corporate expenses. Local financing decisions are centralized at corporate treasury, as are all matters related to tax planning. At the same time, Global Enterprises thinks that all subsidiaries should be able to cover reasonable financing costs. Moreover, it thinks that foreign managers should be motivated to use local resources as efficiently as possible. Hence, Compagnie de Calais is assessed a capital charge based on its net assets and the parent company’s average cost of capital. This figure, which amounts to $120,000, is included in the $162,000 interest expense figure. One-half of the exchange gains and losses figure is attributed to transactions losses resulting from the Belgian subsidiary’s export activities. The balance is due to translating the Belgian accounts to U.S. dollars for consolidation purposes. Exchange risk management is also centralized at corporate treasury. Required: Based on the foregoing information, prepare a performance report that isolates those elements that should be included in performance appraisals of the foreign unit.
based on the foregoing information did the mexican manager perform well support your 543877
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To encourage its foreign managers to incorporate expected exchange rate changes into their operating decisions, Vancouver Enterprises requires that all foreign currency budgets be set in Canadian dollars using exchange rates projected for the end of the budget period. To further motivate its local managers to react to unexpected rate changes, operating results at period’s end are translated to dollars at the actual spot rate prevailing at that time. Deviations between actual and budgeted exchange rates are discarded in judging the manager’s performance. At the start of the 2010 fiscal year, budgeted results for a Mexican affiliate, the Cuernavaca Corporation, were as follows (amounts in thousands):
|
Sales
|
MXP 8,000,000
|
CAD 2,560
|
|
Expenses
|
6,400,000
|
2,048
|
|
Income
|
MXP 1,600,000
|
CAD 512
|
Actual results for the year in dollars were: sales, CAD2,160,000; expenses, CAD1,680,000; and net
|
Jan. 1, 2010 spot rate:
|
CAD.00040
|
|
Global Enterprise’s one-year forecast
|
CAD.00032
|
|
Dec. 31, 2010 spot rate
|
CAD.00024
|
Required: Based on the foregoing information, did the Mexican manager perform well? Support your answer using the variance analysis suggested in the chapter. (Refer to Exhibit 10-6.)
parent company establishes three wholly owned affiliates in countries x y and z its 543879
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parent Company establishes three wholly owned affiliates in countries X, Y, and Z. Its total investment in each of the respective affiliates at the beginning of the year together with year-end returns in parent currency (PC), appear here:
|
Subsidiary
|
Total Assets
|
Returns
|
|
X
|
PC 1,000,000
|
PC 250,000
|
|
Y
|
PC 3,000,000
|
PC 900,000
|
|
Z
|
PC 1,500,000
|
PC 600,000
|
income, CAD480,000. Relevant exchange rates for the peso during the year were as follows:
Parent Company requires a return on its domestic investments of 10 percent and is evaluating the annual performance of its three foreign affiliates. To establish an appropriate performance benchmark, Parent Company subscribes to a country risk evaluation service that compiles an unweighted risk index for various countries around the world. The risk scores for each of the n countries are:
|
Country Risk Score (out of 60)
|
|
X
|
30
|
|
Y
|
21
|
|
Z
|
15
|
Other things being equal, the higher the score, the lower the country’s risk.
Required: Prepare an analysis for Parent Company’s management indicating which affiliate performed best.
required calculate the foreign and u s taxes paid on each foreign source income 543912
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sweden has a classical system of taxation. Calculate the total taxes that would be paid by a company headquartered in Stockholm that earns 1,500,000 Swedish krona (SEK) and distributes 50 percent of its earnings as a dividend to its shareholders. Assume that the company’s shareholders are in the 40 percent
|
Country A
|
Country B
|
Country C
|
Country D
|
|
Royalty from Country A operations
|
$20
|
|
|
|
|
Pretax income
|
|
$90
|
$90
|
$54
|
|
Income taxes (20%/40%)
|
|
18
|
36
|
-0-
|
|
Net income
|
|
$72
|
$54
|
$54
|
Required: Calculate the foreign and U.S. taxes paid on each foreign-source income.
what issues does your pricing decision raise 543916
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alubar, a U.S. multinational, receives royalties from Country A, foreign-branch earnings from Country B, and dividends equal to 50 percent of net income from subsidiaries in Countries C and D. There is a 10 percent withholding tax on the royalty from Country A and a 10 percent withholding tax on the dividend from Country C. Income tax rates are 20 percent in Country B and 40 percent in Country C. Country D assesses indirect taxes of 40 percent instead of direct taxes on income. Selected data are as follows: unit, and a reasonable profit margin on such cross-border sales is 20 percent of cost. Now suppose that Country B levies a corporate income tax of 40 percent on taxable income (vs. 30 percent in Country A) and a tariff of 20 percent on the declared value of the imported goods. The minimum declared value legally allowed in Country B is $100 per unit with no upper limit. Import duties are deductible for income tax purposes in Country B.
Required: a. Based on the foregoing information, formulate
a transfer pricing strategy that would minimize Global Enterprise’s overall tax burden.
b. What issues does your pricing decision raise?
based on this information at what price would the lund manufacturing company invoice 543917
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partial income statement of the Lund Manufacturing Company, a Swedish-based concern producing pharmaceutical products, is presented below:
During the year, short-term interest rates in Sweden averaged 7 percent, while net operating assets averaged SEK 45,000,000.
|
Sales
|
SEK 75,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured and sold:
|
|
|
Finished goods, beginning inventory
|
-0-
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured: (100,000 units)
|
|
|
Direct materials used
|
SEK 22,500,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
11,600,000
|
|
Overhead
|
6,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
40,100,000
|
|
Finished goods, ending inventory
|
8,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
32,100,000
|
|
Gross Margin
|
SEK 42,900,000
|
The company is entitled to a government subsidy of 5 percent. Its required margin to provide a profit and cover other expenses is 8 percent. All affiliates receive credit terms of 60 days.
Required: Based on this information, at what price would the Lund Manufacturing Company invoice its distribution affiliate in neighboring Finland?
recommend and justify a long term asset allocation that is consistent with the inves 543956
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CFA Examination Level III
Mr. Franklin is 70 years of age, is in excellent health, pursues a simple but active lifestyle, and has no children. He has interest in a private company for $90 million and has decided that a medical research foundation will receive half the proceeds now; it will also be the primary beneficiary of his estate upon his death. Mr. Franklin is committed to the foundation’s well-being because he believes strongly that, through it, a cure will be found for the disease that killed his wife. He now realizes that an appropriate investment policy and asset allocations are required if his goals are to be met through investment of his considerable assets. Currently, the following assets are available for use in building an appropriate portfolio:
|
$45.0 million cash (from sale of the private company interest, net of pending $45 million gift to the foundation)
|
|
10.0 million stocks and bonds ($5 million each)
|
|
9.0 million warehouse property (now fully leased)
|
|
1.0 million Franklin residence
|
|
$65.0 million total available assets
|
a. Formulate and justify an investment policy statement setting forth the appropriate guidelines within which future investment actions should take place. Your policy statement must encompass all relevant objective and constraint considerations.
b. Recommend and justify a long-term asset allocation that is consistent with the investment policy statement you created in Part a. Briefly explain the key assumptions you made in generating your allocation.
what will the npv and irr be if the firm uses straight line depreciation with a 6 ye 544056
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CCA, Depreciation, and Project Value. Bottoms up Diaper Service is considering the purchase of a new industrial washer, It can purchase the washer for $6,000 and sell its old washer for $2,000. The new washer will last for 6 years and save $1,500 a year in expenses. If the old washer is retained it will also last for 6 more years after which it will have to be junked. The washers fall into an asset class with a CCA rate of 30 percent. Bottoms Up owns other wash ing machines that also fall into this asset class. The opportunity cost of capital is 15 percent. and the firms tax rate is 40 percent.
a. If the salvage value of the washer is expected to bezero at the end of its six year life, what are the cash flows of the project in years 0 to 6?
b. What is the project NPV”!
e. What will the NPV and IRR be if the firm uses straight-line depreciation with a 6-year tax life?
if the opportunity cost of capital is 10 percent what is the project np f 544059
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. Revenues generated by a new fad product are forecast as follows:
|
Year
|
Revenues
|
|
1
|
$40,000
|
|
2
|
30,000
|
|
3
|
20,000
|
|
4
|
10,000
|
|
Thereafter
|
0
|
Expenses are expected to be 40 percent of revenues, and working capital required in each year is expected to be 20 percent of revenues in the following year. The product requires an immediate investment of$50,000 in plant and equipment.
a. What is the initial investment in the product”! Remember working capital.
b. If the plant and equipment are in an asset class that has a CCA rate of 25 percent, and the firm’s tax rate is 40 percent, what are the project cash flows in each year?
c. If the opportunity cost of capital is 10 percent, what is the project NPf?
the net working capital requirement including the initial working capital needed in 544062
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. Fireplaces Etc. is about to launch a new range of wood stoves, priced at $ 110 per unit. The unit cost of the wood stoves is $65. The firm expects to sell the wood stoves over the next five years. The venture will require an initial investment in plant and equipment of$25,000. Assume that the investment will be in an asset class with a CCA rate of 15 percent. At the end office years, the plant and equipment will have a zero salvage value but Fireplaces Etc. will continue 10 have other assets in this asset class. Sales projections for the wood stoves arc as follows:
|
Year
|
Unit Sales
|
|
1
|
300
|
|
2
|
350
|
|
3
|
400
|
|
4
|
500
|
|
5
|
500
|
The net working capital requirement (including the initial working capital needed in Year 0) is expected to be20 percent of the following year”s sales. The firm”s tax rate is 35 percent. Using a discount rate of 15 percent, calculate the net present value of the project.
what is project npv 544064
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Evaluation. Beller Mousetraps has developed a new trap. It can go into production for an initial investment in equipment of $6 million. The equipment will be depreciated straight-line over 5 years to a value of 7.ero, but in fact it can be sold after 5 years for $500.000. The firm believes that working capital at each date must be maintained at a level of 10 percent of next year”s forecast sales. The firm estimates production costs equal to $ 1.50 per trap and believes that the traps can be sold for $4 each. Sales forecasts are given in the following table. The project will come to an end in years, when the trap becomes technologically obsoleted. The firm “S tax bracket is 35 percent, and the required rate of return on the project is 12 percent.
What is project NPV?
|
Year
|
0
|
1
|
2 |
3 |
4
|
5
|
Thereafter
|
|
Sales(millions of traps)
|
0
|
.5
|
.6
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
.6
|
0
|
net income is currently 600 million net income will grow by 20 percent annually 543660
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An aggressive financial planner who claims to have a superior method for picking undervalued stocks is courting one of your clients. The planner claims that the best way to find the value of a stock is to divide EBITDA by the risk-free bond rate. The planner is urging your client to invest in Alcan, Inc. (NYSE: AL). Alcan is the parent of a group of companies engaged in all aspects of the aluminum business. The planner says that Alcan”s EBITDA of $1,580 million divided by the long-term government bond rate of 7 percent gives a total value of $22,571 million. With 318 million outstanding shares, Alcan”s value per share using this method is $70.98. Shares of Alcan currently trade for $36.50, and the planner wants your client to make a large investment in Alcan through him. A. Provide your client with an alternative valuation of Alcan based on a two-stage FCFE valuation approach. Use the following assumptions:
- Net income is currently $600 million. Net income will grow by 20 percent annually
for the next three years.
- The net investment in operating assets (capital expenditures less depreciation plus investment in working capital) will be $1,150 million next year and grow at 15 percent for the following two years.
- Forty percent of the net investment in operating assets will be financed with net new debt financing.
- Alcan”s beta is 1.3, the risk-free bond rate is 7 percent, and the equity risk premium is 4 percent.
- After three years, the growth rate of net income will be 8 percent and the net investment in operating assets (capital expenditures minus depreciation plus increase in working capital) each year will drop to 30 percent of net income.
- Debt is, and will continue to be, 40 percent of total assets.
- Alcan has 3 18 million outstanding shares. Find the value per share of Alcan.
B. Criticize the valuation approach that the aggressive financial planner used.
bron has earnings per share of 3 00 in 2002 and expects earnings per share to increa 543661
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bron has earnings per share of $3.00 in 2002 and expects earnings per share to increase by 21 percent in 2003. Earnings per share are expected to grow at a decreasing rate for the following five years, as shown in the table below. In 2008, the growth rate will be 6 percent and is expected to stay at that rate thereafter. Net capital expenditures (capital expenditures minus depreciation) will be $5.00 per share in 2002 and then follow the pattern predicted in the table. In 2008, net capital expenditures are expected to be $1.50 and will then grow at 6 percent annually. The investment in working capital parallels the increase in net capital expenditures and is predicted to equal 25 percent of net capital expenditures each year. In 2008, investment in working capital will be $0.375 and is predicted to grow at 6 percent thereafter. Bron will use debt financing to fund 40 percent of net capital expenditures and 40 percent of the investment in working capital.
|
Year
|
2003
|
2004
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Growth rate for earnings per share
|
21%
|
18%
|
15%
|
12%
|
9%
|
6%
|
|
Net capital expenditure per share
|
$5.00
|
$5.00
|
$4.50
|
$4.00
|
$3.50
|
$1.50
|
what is the real required rate of return for sk telecom 543662
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SK Telecom Co. is a cellular telephone paging and computer communication services company in Seoul, South Korea. The company is traded on the Korea, New York, and
London stock exchanges (NYSE: SKM). Sol Kim has estimated the normalized FCFE for SK Telecom to be 1,300 Korean won (per share) for the year just ended. The real country return for South Korea is 6.50 percent. To estimate the required return for SK Telecom, the adjustments to the real country return are an industry adjustment of +0.60 percent, a size adjustment of -0.10 percent, and a leverage adjustment of +0.25 percent. The long-term real growth rate for South Korea is estimated at 3.5 percent, and Kim expects the real growth rate of SK Telecom to track the country rate.
A. What is the real required rate of return for SK Telecom?
B. Using the single-stage FCFE valuation model and real values for the discount rate
and FCFE growth rate, estimate the value of one share of SK Telecom.
calculate return on equity and use it as an input to the residual income model to ca 543691
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Simonson Investment Trust International (SITI) is expected to earn $4.00, $5.00, and $8.00 for the next three years. SITI will pay annual dividends of $2.00, $2.50, and 20.50 in each of these years. The last dividend includes the liquidating payment to shareholders at the end of Year 3 when the trust terminates. SITI”s book value is $8 per share and its required return on equity is 10 percent.
A. What is the current value per share of SITI according to the dividend discount model?
B. Calculate per-share book value and residual income for SITI for each of the next 3 years and use those results to find the stock”s value using the residual income model.
C. Calculate return on equity and use it as an input to the residual income model to calculate SITI”s value.
how if at all should this observation about le s other comprehensive income affect t 543693
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lendex Electronics (LE) has had a great deal of turnover of top management for several years and was not followed by analysts during this period of turmoil. Because the company”s performance has been improving steadily for the past three years, technology analyst Steve Kent recently reinitiated coverage of LE. A meeting with management confirmed Kent”s positive impression of LE”s operations and strategic plan. Kent decides LE merits further analysis. Careful examination of LE”s financial statements revealed that the company had negative other comprehensive income from changes in the value of available-for-sale securities in each of the past five years. How, if at all, should this observation about LE”s other comprehensive income affect the figures that Kent uses for the company”s ROE and book value for those years?
how does this value compare with the estimate from the residual income model 543698
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shunichi Kobayashi is valuing United Parcel Service (NYSE: UPS). Kobayashi has made the following assumptions:
- Book value per share is estimated at $9.62 on 3 1 December 2001.
- EPS will be 22 percent of the beginning book value per share for the next eight years.
- Cash dividends paid will be 30 percent of EPS.
- At the end of the eight-year period, the market price per share will be three times the book value per share.
- The beta for UPS is 0.60, the risk-free rate is 5.00 percent, and the equity risk premium is 5.50 percent.
The current market price of UPS is $59.38, which indicates a current PIB of 6.2.
A. Prepare a table showing the beginning and ending book values, net income, and cash dividends annually for the eight-year period.
B. Estimate the residual income and the present value of residual income for the eight years.
C. Estimate the value per share of UPS stock using the residual income model.
D. Estimate the value per share of UPS stock using the dividend discount model.How does this value compare with the estimate from the residual income model?
consider the development factors in the following five countries france india japan 543732
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the development factors in the following five countries: France, India, Japan, the United States, and the United Kingdom:
|
Development Factor
|
France
|
India
|
Japan
|
United Kingdom
|
United States
|
|
Main source of finance
|
Banks; government
|
Government; Stock market
|
Banks
|
Stock market
|
Stock market
|
|
Legal system
|
Code law
|
Common law
|
Code law
|
Common law
|
Common law
|
|
Taxation (link to accounting)
|
Linked
|
Separate
|
Linked
|
Separate
|
Separate
|
|
Political and economic ties
|
Europe
|
U.K., U.S., China
|
U.S., China
|
U.S., Europe
|
Canada, Mexico
|
|
Inflation
|
Low
|
Low
|
Low
|
Low
|
Low
|
|
Level of economic development
|
High
|
Low
|
High
|
High
|
High
|
|
Educational level
|
High
|
Low
|
High
|
High
|
High
|
Required: Based on the information provided in this chapter, prepare a profile of accounting in each of the countries.
required complete a matrix indicating whether each of the above groups significantly 543750
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In most countries, accounting standard setting involves a combination of private- and public-sector groups. The private sector includes the accounting profession and other groups affected by the financial reporting process, such as users and preparers of financial statements, and organized labor. The public sector includes government agencies, such as tax authorities, ministries responsible for commercial law, and securities commissions. The stock market is another potential influence.
Required: Complete a matrix indicating whether each of the above groups significantly influences accounting standard setting in the five countries discussed in this chapter.
List the groups across the top and the countries down the side; indicate the influence of each group with a yes or a no.
identify the major changes that have occurred in japanese accounting since the big b 543767
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes Japanese accounting before the Big Bang:
The preparation of consolidated financial statements is based on the Securities and Exchange Law. Individual-company accounts are the basis for the consolidated statements, and normally the same principles are used at both levels. Subsidiaries are consolidated if a parent directly or indirectly owns more than 50 percent of the shares. (However, Japanese regulations have materiality tests that can lead to the exclusion of significant subsidiaries in consolidation.) The purchase method of accounting for business combinations is normally used for business combinations. Goodwill is measured on the basis of the book value of the net assets acquired, not the fair market value as is common in most other countries. Goodwill is amortized over five years.
The equity method is used in consolidated statements for investments in nonconsolidated subsidiaries and 20 percent- to 50 percent-owned affiliated companies, but the cost method is used in individual company statements. The equity method is also used to account for joint ventures; proportional consolidation is not allowed. Under the foreign currency translation standard, assets and liabilities of foreign subsidiaries are translated at the current (year-end) exchange rate, revenues and expenses at either the year-end or average rate, and translation adjustments are carried as an asset or liability on the balance sheet. Accounting measurements based on historical cost are pervasive. Inventory may be valued at cost or the lower of cost or market; cost is most often used. However, in the event of a significant and permanent decline in value, inventory must be written down to market. FIFO, LIFO, and average are all acceptable cost-flow methods, with average the most popular. Fixed assets are valued at cost and depreciated in accordance with the tax laws. Research and development costs may be capitalized if they relate to new products or techniques, the exploitation of resources, or the development of markets. When capitalized, research and development is amortized over five years. Finance leases, those transferring the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee, are capitalized, while lease payments on operating leases are charged to income when incurred. Deferred taxes are not provided for (or needed) in individual company accounts. They are permitted in consolidated financial statements, but normally not provided there, either. Contingent losses are provided for when they are probable and can be reasonably estimated. Tax regulations limit the deductibility of employee retirement and severance benefits to 40 percent of the amount and so are normally only accrued up to this amount. Pension costs are expensed as paid, and unfunded obligations are not accrued. Legal reserves are required: Each year a company must allocate an amount equal to at least 10 percent of cash dividends and bonuses paid to directors and statutory auditors until the legal reserve reaches 25 percent of capital stock.
Required: Identify the major changes that have occurred in Japanese accounting since the Big Bang.
required identify the major changes that have occurred in chinese accounting since t 543768
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes Chinese accounting in the late 1990s:
Financial statements consist of the balance sheet, income statement, statement of changes in financial position (or cash flow statement), notes, and supporting schedules. Consolidated financial statements are required. The purchase method must be used to account for business combinations, and goodwill is amortized over the period benefited. The equity method is used when ownership of another enterprise exceeds 25 percent. When ownership exceeds 50 percent, the accounts of the subsidiary are consolidated. For overseas subsidiaries, the balance sheet is translated at the year-end exchange rate, the income statement is translated at the average-for-the-year exchange rate, and any translation difference is shown as a reserve in equity. Accounting measurements sometime have a tax orientation. For example, straight-line depreciation is used because tax laws specify this method. Tax law is also referred to in specifying the useful lives of assets and salvage value. Compared to international practice, historical cost is more strictly adhered to and the principle of conservatism is practiced on a more limited basis. These practices also reflect a tax law influence. For example,
1. The lower of cost or market inventory valuation method is not allowed.
2. Provisions for bad debts are allowed only up to 3 percent of the receivables balance.
3. Long-term investments are not written down for permanent declines in value. Historical cost is the basis for valuing tangible assets. FIFO, average, and LIFO are acceptable costing methods. Acquired intangibles are also recorded at cost and amortized over the periods benefited. Since land and much of the industrial property in China is owned by the state, companies that acquire the right to use land and industrial property rights show them as intangibles.
Costs associated with research and development can be capitalized in some circumstances. Guidance is neither provided on accounting for capital versus operating leases, nor for deferred taxes. Contingent losses are not accrued; however, contingency funds may be set up as appropriations of retained earnings. Reserves for future expansion may also be appropriated out of retained earnings.
Required: Identify the major changes that have occurred in Chinese accounting since the 1990s.
complete a matrix indicating whether each of these groups significantly influences a 543769
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting standard setting in most countries involves a combination of private- and public-sector groups. The private sector includes the accounting profession and other groups affected by the financial reporting process, such as users and preparers of financial statements and organized labor. The public sector includes government agencies, such as tax authorities, ministries responsible for commercial law, and securities commissions. The stock market is another potential influence.
Required: Complete a matrix indicating whether each of these groups significantly influences accounting standard setting in the five countries discussed in this chapter. List the groups across the top and the countries down the side; indicate the influence of each group with a yes or no.
what is the relevance of csr disclosures for outside investors 543783
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate social responsibility (CSR), as practiced by business, means many different things. Consider the following: “At one end of the broad span of CSR lie corporate policies that any wellrun company ought to have in place anyway, policies that are called for on any sensible view of business ethics or good management practice.
These include not lying to your employees, for instance, not paying bribes, and looking farther ahead than the next few weeks. At the other end of the range are the more ambitious and distinctive policies that differentiate between leaders and laggards in the CSR race—large expenditures of time and resources on charitable activities, for instance, or binding commitments to ‘ethical investment,’ or spending on environmental protection beyond what regulators demand.”33
Required:
a. Discuss the meaning of corporate social responsibility.
b. Do companies have an obligation to do more than the law requires? Why or why not?
c. Should companies report on their social responsibility activities? Why or why not?
d. What is the relevance of CSR disclosures for outside investors?
would your answer change if the functional currency were the canadian dollar please 543797
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, the wholly-owned Mexican affiliate of a Canadian parent company acquired an inventory of computer hard drives for its assembly operation. The cost Incurred was 15,000,000 pesos when the exchange rate was MXN11.3 = C$1. By year end, the Mexican affiliate had used three fourths of the acquired hard drives. Due to advances in hardware technology, the remaining inventory was marked down to its net realizable value of MXN1,750,000. The year-end exchange rate was MXN12.3 = C$1. The average rate during the year was MXN11.8 = C$1.
Required:
a. Translate the ending inventory to Canadian dollars assuming the Mexican affiliate’s functional currency is the Mexican peso.
b. Would your answer change if the functional currency were the Canadian dollar?Please explain.
translate the chinese dollar balance sheet of shanghai corporation into u s dollars 543800
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shanghai Corporation, the Chinese affiliate of
a U.S. manufacturer, has the balance sheet shown below. The current exchange rate is $.0.15 = CNY1.
|
Balance Sheet of Shanghai Corporation (000’s)
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
Cash
|
CNY 5,000
|
Accounts payable
|
CNY21,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
14,000
|
Long-term debt
|
27,000
|
|
Inventoriesa (cost = 24,000)
|
22,000
|
|
|
|
Fixed assets, net
|
39,000
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
32,000
|
|
Total assets
|
CNY80,000
|
Total liab & SE
|
CNY80,000
|
Required:
a. Translate the Chinese dollar balance sheet of Shanghai Corporation into U.S. dollars at the current exchange rate of $.0.15 12 = CNY1. All monetary accounts in Shanhai’s balance sheet are denominated in Chinese yuan.
b. Assume the Chinese yuan revalues from $0.15 = CNY1 to $0.1875 = CNY1. What would be the translation effect if Shanghai’s balance sheet is translated by the current–noncurrent method? By the monetary-nonmonetary method?
c. Assume instead that the Chinese yuan weakens from $0.15 = CNY1 to $0.1125 = CNY1. What would be the translation effect under each of the two translation methods?
what is the lesson for statement readers from all of this is it all a shell game 543802
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company A is headquartered in Country A and reports in the currency unit of Country A, the Apeso. Company B is headquartered in Country B and reports in the currency unit of Country B, the Bol. Company A and B hold identical assets, Apeso100 and Bol100, at the beginning and end of the year. At the beginning of the year, the exchange rate is Apeso1 = Bol1.25. At the end of the year, the exchange rate is Apeso1 = Bol 2. No transactions occur during the year.
Required:
a. Calculate total assets reported by Company A and Company B at the beginning and at the end of the year. Which company has a gain and which has a loss for the year?
b. Does your answer to part a. make sense? Would it matter if Companies A and B intended to repatriate their respective foreign assets rather than keep them invested permanently abroad?
c. What is the lesson for statement readers from all of this? Is it all a shell game?
which rates would be used if the parent currency were the functional currency 543803
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A 100 percent–owned foreign subsidiary’s trial balance consists of the accounts listed as follows. Which exchange rate—current, historical, or average—would be used to translate these accounts to parent currency assuming that the foreign currency is the functional currency? Which rates would be used if the parent currency were the functional currency?
|
Trial Balance Accounts
|
|
Cash
|
Common stock
|
|
Marketable securities (cost)
|
Premium on common stock
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
Retained earnings
|
|
Inventory (market)
|
Sales
|
|
Equipment
|
Purchases
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
Cost of sales
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
General and administrative expenses
|
|
Goodwill
|
Selling expenses
|
|
Accounts payable
|
Depreciation
|
|
Due to parent (denominated in dollars)
|
Amortization of goodwill
|
|
Bonds payable
|
Income tax expense
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
Intercompany interest expense
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
|
what adjustments to armaselah rsquo s accounts would you make to enable you to compa 543804
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 15, MSC Corporation acquires its first foreign affiliate by acquiring 100 percent of the net assets of the Armaselah Oil Company based in Saudi Arabia for 930,000,000 Saudi Arabian riyals.(SAR). At the time, the exchange rate was $1.00 = SAR3.750. The acquisition price is traceable to the following identifiable assets:
|
Cash
|
SAR 60,000,000
|
|
Inventory
|
120,000,000
|
|
Fixed assets
|
750,000,000
|
As a calendar-year company, MSC Corporation prepares consolidated financial statements every December 31. However, by the consolidation date, the Saudi Arabian riyal depreciates such that the new spot rate is $1.00 = SAR4.125.
Required:
a. Assuming no transactions took place before consolidation, what would be the translation gain or loss if Armaselah’s balance sheet were translated to dollars by the temporal rate method?
b. How does the translation adjustment affect MSC’s cash flows?
c. What adjustments to Armaselah’s accounts would you make to enable you to compare its financial statements with another company of comparable size in the same industry that is employing the current rate translation method per IAS 21?
following are the remarks of a prominent member of the u s congress explain why you 543808
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are the remarks of a prominent member of the U.S. Congress. Explain why you agree or disagree.
The plain fact of the matter is that inflation accounting is a premature, imprecise, and under developed method of recording basic business facts. To insist that any system of inflation accounting can afford the accuracy and fairness needed for the efficient operation of our tax system is simply foolish. My years on the Ways and Means Committee have exposed me to the many appeals of business from corporate tax “reform” to the need for capital formation-which have served as a guise for reducing the tax contributions of American business. In this respect, I see inflation accounting as another in a long line of attempts to minimize corporate taxation through backdoor gimmickry.
compare and evaluate the information content of rate of return statistics computed u 543815
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sobrero Corporation, a Mexican affiliate of a major U.S.-based hotel chain, starts the calendar year with 1 billion pesos (P) cash equity investment. It immediately acquires a refurbished hotel in Acapulco for P 900million. Owing to a favorable tourist season, Sobrero Corporation’s rental revenues were P 144 million for the year. Operating expenses of P 86,400,000 together with rental revenues were incurred uniformly throughout the year. The building, comprising 80 percent of the original purchase price (balance attributed to land), has an estimated useful life of 20 years and is being depreciated in straight-line fashion. By yearend, the Mexican consumer price index rose to 420 from an initial level of 263, averaging 340 during the year.
Required:
a. Prepare financial statements for Sobrero Corporation’s first year of operations in terms of the historical-cost model and the historical-cost-constant dollar model.
b. Compare and evaluate the information content of rate-of-return statistics computed using each of these models.
using this information calculate the increse in the current cost of majikstan enterp 543819
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Majikstan Enterprises has equipment on its books that it acquired at the start of 2009 . The equipment is being depreciated in straight-line fashion over a 10-year period and has no salvage value. The current cost of this equipment at the end of 2010 was MJR8,000,000,000. During 2011 , the specific price index for equipment increased from 100 to 137.5. General price-level index information for the period was as follows:
|
12/31/2010
|
30,000
|
|
Average
|
32,900
|
|
12/31/2011
|
36,000
|
Required: Using this information, calculate the increse in the current cost of Majikstan Enterprise’s equipment, net of inflation. 6. Now assume that Majikstan Enterprises is foreign subsidiary of a U.S.-based multinational corporation and that its financial statements are consolidated with those of its U.S. parent. Relevant exchange rate and
a characterize the effect of the xmi expensing policies with respect to acquisitions 543630
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are researching XMI Corporation (XMI). XMI has shown steady earnings per share growth (18 percent a year during the last seven years) and trades at a very high multiple to earnings (its PIE ratio is currently 40 percent above the average PIE ratio for a group of the most comparable stocks). XMI has generally grown through acquisition, by using XMI stock to purchase other companies. These companies usually trade at lower PIE ratios than XMI.
In investigating the financial disclosures of these acquired companies and in talking to industry contacts, you conclude that XMI has been forcing the companies it acquires to accelerate the payment of expenses before the acquisition deals are closed. Such acceleration drives down the acquired companies” last reported cash flow and earnings per share numbers. As one example, XMI asks acquired companies to immediately pay all pending accounts payable, whether or not they are due. Subsequent to the acquisition, XMI reinstitutes normal expense payment patterns. After it acquires a
company, XMI appears to have a pattern of speeding up revenue recognition as well. For example, one overseas telecommunications subsidiary changed its accounting to recognize up front the expected revenue from sales of network capacity that spanned decades. The above policies and accounting facts do not appear to be have been adequately disclosed in XMI”s shareholder communications.
A. Characterize the effect of the XMI expensing policies with respect to acquisitions on XMI”s post-acquisition earnings per share growth rate.
B. Characterize the quality of XMI earnings based on its expensing and revenuerecognition policies with respect to acquisitions.
C. In discussing the current price of XMI, the question states that XMI”s “PIE ratio is currently 40 percent above the average PIE ratio for a group of the most comparable stocks.” Characterize the type of valuation model implicit in such a statement.
D. State two risk factors in investing in XMI, in the sense in which that term was used in the discussion of quality of earnings.
the estimated factor sensitivities of terra energy to the five macroeconomic factors 543632
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The estimated factor sensitivities of Terra Energy to the five macroeconomic factors in the Burmeister, Roll, and Ross (1994) article are given in the table below. The table also gives the market risk premiums to each of these same factors.
|
Factor Sensitivity
|
Risk Premium (%)
|
|
Confidence risk
|
0.25
|
2.59
|
|
Time horizon risk
|
0.3
|
-0.66
|
|
Inflation risk
|
-0.45
|
-4.32
|
|
Business-cycle risk
|
1.6
|
1.49
|
|
Market-timing risk
|
0.8
|
3.61
|
Use the 5-factor BIRR APT model to calculate the required rate of return for Terra Energy using these estimates. The Treasury bill rate is 4.1 percent.
the expression for the value of a stock given a single period investment horizon has 543634
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The expression for the value of a stock given a single-period investment horizon has four variables: Vo, Dl, PI, and I: Solve for the value of the missing variable for each of the four stocks in the table below.
|
Stock
|
Estimated Value (Vo)
|
Expected Dividend (D1)
|
Expected Price (P1)
|
Required Rate of Return (r)
|
|
1
|
$0.30
|
$21.00
|
10.00%
|
|
2
|
$30.00
|
32
|
10
|
|
3
|
92
|
2.7
|
12
|
|
4
|
16
|
0.3
|
17.9
|
the current market prices of three stocks are given below the current dividends divi 543637
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The current market prices of three stocks are given below. The current dividends, dividend growth rates, and required rates of return are also given. The dividend growth rates are perpetual.
|
Stock
|
Current Price
|
Current Dividend (t = 0)
|
Dividend Growth Rate
|
Required Rate of Return
|
|
Que Corp.
|
$25.00
|
$0.50
|
7.00%
|
10.00%
|
|
SHS Company
|
$40.00
|
$1.20
|
6.5
|
10.5
|
|
True Corp.
|
$20.00
|
$0.88
|
5
|
10
|
A. Find the value of each stock with the Gordon growth model.
B. Which stock”s current market price has the smallest premium or largest discount relative to its DDM valuation?
calculate the expected rate of return for each stock using the gordon growth model 543638
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For five utility stocks, the table below provides the expected dividend for next year, the current market price, the expected dividend growth rate, and the beta. The risk free rate is currently 5.3 percent, and the market risk premium is 6.0 percent.
|
Stock
|
Dividend(D1)
|
Price(Po)
|
Dividend Growth Rate (g)
|
Beta (ß)
|
|
American Electric (NYSE: AEP)
|
2.4
|
46.17
|
5.00%
|
0.6
|
|
Consolidated Edison (NYSE: ED)
|
2.2
|
39.8
|
5
|
0.6
|
|
Exelon Corp. (NYSE: EXC)
|
1.69
|
64.12
|
7
|
0.8
|
|
Southern Co. (NYSE: SO)
|
1.34
|
23.25
|
5.5
|
0.65
|
|
Dominion Resources (NYSE: D)
|
2.58
|
60.13
|
5.5
|
0.65
|
A. Calculate the expected rate of return for each stock using the Gordon growth model.
B. Calculate the required rate of return for each stock using the CAPM.
vicente garcia is a buy side analyst for a large pension fund he frequently uses div 543639
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vicente Garcia is a buy-side analyst for a large pension fund. He frequently uses dividend discount models such as the Gordon growth model for the consumer noncyclical stocks that he covers. The current dividend for Procter & Gamble Co. (NYSE: PG) is $1.46, and the dividend eight years ago was $0.585. The current stock price is $80.00.
A. What is the historical dividend growth rate for Procter & Gamble?
B. Garcia assumes that the future dividend growth rate will be exactly half of the historical rate. What is Procter & Gamble”s expected rate of return using the GGM?
C. Garcia uses a beta of 0.53 (computed versus the S&P 500 index) for Procter & Gamble. The risk-free rate of return is 5.56 percent and the equity risk premium is 3.71 percent. If Garcia continues to assume that the future dividend growth rate will be exactly half of the historical rate, what is the value of the stock with the Gordon growth model?
the company has sales of 210 million net income of 3 million and 300 million outstan 543641
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
R.A. Nixon put out a “strong buy” on DuPoTex (DPT). This company has a current stock price of $88.00 per share. The company has sales of $210 million, net income of $3 million, and 300 million outstanding shares. DPT is not paying a dividend. Dorothy Josephson has argued with Nixon that DPT”s valuation is excessive relative to its sales, profits, and any reasonable assumptions about future possible dividends. Josephson also asserts that DPT has a market value equal to that of many large blue-chip companies, which it does not deserve. Nixon feels that Josephson”s concerns reflect an archaic attitude about equity valuation and a lack of understanding about DPT”s industry.
A. What is the total market value of DPT”s outstanding shares? What are the price-to earnings and price-to-sales ratios?
B. Nixon and Josephson have agreed on a scenario for future earnings and dividends for DPT. Their assumptions are that sales grow at 60 percent annually for four years, and then at 7 percent annually thereafter. In Year 5 and thereafter, earnings will be 10 percent of sales. No dividends will be paid for four years, but in Year 5 and after, dividends will be 40 percent of earnings. Dividends should be discounted at a 12 percent rate. What is the value of a share of DPT using the discounted dividend approach to valuation?
C. Nixon and Josephson explore another scenario for future earnings and dividends for DPT. They assume that sales will grow at 7 percent in Year 5 and thereafter. Earnings will be 10 percent of sales, and dividends will be 40 percent of earnings. Dividends will be initiated in Year 5, and dividends should be discounted at 12 percent. What level of sales is required in Year 4 to achieve a discounted dividend valuation equal to the current stock price?
hansen has a beta of 0 83 against the ftse 100 index and the current dividend is gbp 543646
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hanson PLC (LSE: HNS) is selling for GBP 472. Hansen has a beta of 0.83 against the FTSE 100 index, and the current dividend is GBP 13.80. The risk-free rate of return is 4.66 percent, and the equity risk premium is 4.92 percent. An analyst covering this stock expects the Hanson dividend to grow initially at 14 percent but to decline linearly to 5 percent over a 10-year period. After that, the analyst expects the dividend to grow at 5 percent.
A. Compute the value of the Hanson dividend stream using the H-model. According to the H-model valuation, is Hanson overpriced or underpriced?
B. Assume that Hanson”s dividends follow the H-model pattern the analyst predicts. If an investor pays the current GBP 472 price for the stock, what will be the rate of return?
calculate the expected return over the next year of the common stock of lcc and aoc 543647
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adapted from 1995 CFA Level I1 exam) Your supervisor has asked you to evaluate the relative attractiveness of the stocks of two very similar chemical companies: Litchfield Chemical Corp. (LCC) and Arninochem Company (AOC). AOC and LCC have June 30 fiscal year ends. You have compiled the data in Exhibit 17-1 for this purpose. Use a one-year time horizon and assume the following:
- Real gross domestic product is expected to rise 5 percent;
- S&P 500 expected total return of 20 percent;
- U.S. Treasury bills yield 5 percent; and
- 30-year U.S. Treasury bonds yield 8 percent.
|
EXHIBIT 17-1 Selected Data for Litchfield and Aminochem
|
|
|
Litchfield Chemical (LCC)
|
Aminochem (AOC)
|
|
Current stock price
|
$50
|
$30
|
|
Shares outstanding (millions)
|
10
|
$20
|
|
Projected earnings per share (N 1996)
|
$4.00
|
$3.20
|
|
Projected dividend per share (EY 1996)
|
$0.90
|
$1.60
|
|
Projected dividend growth rate
|
8%
|
7%
|
|
Stock beta
|
1.2
|
1.4
|
|
Investors” required rate of return Balance sheet data (millions)
|
10%
|
11%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
$100
|
$130
|
|
Stockholders” equity
|
$300
|
$320
|
A. Calculate the value of the common stock of LCC and AOC using the constant growth DDM. Show your work.
B. Calculate the expected return over the next year of the common stock of LCC and AOC using the CAPM. Show your work.
C. Calculate the internal (implied, normalized, or sustainable) growth rate of LCC and AOC. Show your work.
D. Recommend LCC or AOC for investment. Justify your choice using your answers to A, B, and C and the information in Exhibit 17- 1.
calculate the roe for 1999 using the three components of the dupont formula 543648
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adapted from 1999 CFA Level I1 exam) Scott Kelly is reviewing MasterToy”s financial statements in order to estimate its sustainable growth rate. Using the information presented in Exhibit 18- 1,
A. i. Identify the three components of the DuPont formula.
ii. Calculate the ROE for 1999 using the three components of the DuPont formula.
iii. Calculate the sustainable growth rate for 1999
Kelly has calculated actual and sustainable growth for each of the past four years and finds in each year that its calculated sustainable growth rate substantially exceeds its actual growth rate.
B. Cite one course of action (other than ignoring the problem) Kelly should encourage Master Toy to take, assuming the calculated sustainable growth rate continues to exceed the actual growth rate.
|
EXHIBIT 18-1 Master Toy Inc. Actual 1998 and Estimated 1999 Financial Statements For N Ending December 31 ($ millions, except per-share data)
|
|
1998
|
1999e
|
Change (%)
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
$4,750
|
$5,140
|
8.2
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$2,400
|
$2,540
|
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative
|
1,400
|
1,550
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
180
|
210
|
|
|
Goodwill amortization
|
10
|
10
|
|
|
Operating income
|
$760
|
$830
|
9.2
|
|
Interest expense
|
20
|
25
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$740
|
$805
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
265
|
295
|
|
|
Net income
|
$475
|
$510
|
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$1.79
|
$1.96
|
9.5
|
|
Average shares outstanding (millions)
|
265
|
260
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$400
|
$400
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
680
|
700
|
|
|
Inventories
|
570
|
600
|
|
|
Net property, plant, and equipment
|
800
|
870
|
|
|
Intangibles
|
500
|
530
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$2,950
|
$3,100
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$550
|
$600
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
300
|
300
|
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$850
|
$900
|
|
|
Stockholders” equity
|
2100
|
2.200
|
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$2,950
|
$3,100
|
|
|
Book value per share
|
$7.92
|
$8.46
|
|
|
Annual dividend per share
|
$0.55
|
$0.60
|
|
to assist her analysts carroll has gathered the information shown in exhibits 19 1 a 543649
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adapted from 2000 CFA Level I1 exam) The management of Telluride, an international diversified conglomerate based in the United States, believes that the recent strong performance of its wholly owned medical supply subsidiary, Sundanci, has gone unnoticed. In order to realize Sundanci”s full value, Telluride has announced that it will divest Sundanci in a tax-free spin-off Sue Carroll, CFA, is Director of Research at Kesson and Associates. In developing an investment recommendation for Sundanci, Carroll has directed four of her analysts to determine a valuation of Sundanci using various valuation disciplines. To assist her analysts, Carroll has gathered the information shown in Exhibits 19-1 and 19-2 below.
|
EXHIBIT 19-1 Sundanci Actual 1999 and 2000 Financial Statements For FY Ending May 31 ($ millions, except per-share data)
|
|
Income Statement
|
1999
|
2 000
|
|
Revenue
|
$474
|
$598
|
|
Depreciation
|
20
|
23
|
|
Other operating costs
|
368
|
460
|
|
Income before taxes
|
86
|
115
|
|
Taxes
|
26
|
35
|
|
Net income
|
60
|
80
|
|
Dividends
|
18
|
24
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$0.71
|
$0.95
|
|
Dividends per share
|
$0.21
|
$0.29
|
|
Common shares outstanding (millions)
|
84
|
84
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
1999
|
2000
|
|
Current assets
|
$201
|
$326
|
|
Net property, plant and equipment
|
474
|
489
|
|
Total assets
|
675
|
815
|
|
Current liabilities
|
57
|
141
|
|
Long-term debt
|
0
|
0
|
|
Total liabilities
|
618
|
141
|
|
Shareholders” equity
|
675
|
674
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
34
|
815
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
38
|
|
EXHIBIT 19-2 Selected Financial Information
|
|
|
Required rate of return on equity
|
14%
|
|
Growth rate of industry
|
13%
|
|
Industry PIE
|
26
|
Prior to determining Sundanci”s valuation, Carroll analyzes Sundanci”s return on equity (ROE) and sustainable growth.
A. i. Calculate the three components of ROE in the DuPont formula for the year 2000.
ii. Calculate ROE for the year 2000.
iii. Calculate the sustainable rate of growth. Show your work.
Carroll learns that Sundanci”s Board of Directors is considering the following policy changes that will affect Sundanci”s sustainable growth rate:
- Director A proposes an increase in the quarterly dividend by $0.15 per share.
- Director B proposes a bond issue of $25 million, the proceeds of which will be used to increase production capacity.
- Director C proposes a 2-for-1 stock split.
B. Indicate the effect of each of these proposals on Sundanci”s sustainable rate of growth, given that the other factors remain unchanged. Identify which components of the sustainable growth model, if any, are directly affected by each proposal.
Helen Morgan, CFA, has been asked by Carroll to determine the potential valuation for Sundanci using the DDM. Morgan anticipates that Sundanci”s earnings and dividends will grow at 32 percent for two years and 13 percent thereafter.
C. Calculate the current value of a share of Sundanci stock using a two-stage dividend discount model and the data from Exhibits 19-1 and 19-2. Show your work.
determine whether each of the fundamental factors in exhibit 20 2 would cause pies t 543650
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adapted from 2001 CFA Level I1 exam) Peninsular Research is initiating coverage of a mature manufacturing industry. John Jones, CFA, head of the research department, gathers the information given in Exhibit 20-1 to help in his analysis.
|
EXHIBIT 20-1 Fundamental industry and Market Data
|
|
Forecasted industry earnings retention rate
|
40%
|
|
Forecasted industry return on equity
|
25%
|
|
Industry beta
|
1.2
|
|
Government bond yield
|
6%
|
|
Equity risk premium
|
5%
|
A. Compute the price to earnings (Po/EI) ratio for the industry based on the fundamental data in Exhibit 20-1. Show your work. Jones wants to analyze how fundamental PIES might differ among countries. He gathers the data given in Exhibit 20-2:
|
EXHIBIT 20-2 Economic and Market Data
|
|
Fundamental Factors
|
Country A
|
Country B
|
|
Forecasted growth in real gross domestic product
|
5%
|
2%
|
|
Government bond yield
|
10%
|
6%
|
|
Equity risk premium
|
5%
|
4%
|
B. Determine whether each of the fundamental factors in Exhibit 20-2 would cause PIES to be generally higher for Country A or higher for Country B. Justify each of your conclusions with one reason. Note: Consider each fundamental factor in isolation, with all else remaining equal.
estimate the intrinsic value of smilewhite using the data above and the two stage dd 543651
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adapted from 1998 CFA Level I1 exam) Janet Ludlow”s company requires all its analysts to use a two-stage DDM and the CAPM to value stocks. Using these models, Ludlow has valued Quick Brush Company at $63 per share. She now must value Smile White Corporation.
|
EXHIBIT 21-1 Valuation Information: December 1997
|
|
Quick Brush
|
Smile White
|
|
Beta
|
1.35
|
1.15
|
|
Market price
|
$45.00
|
$30.00
|
|
Intrinsic value
|
$63.00
|
?
|
|
Notes:
|
|
|
|
Risk-free rate
|
4.50%
|
|
|
Expected market return
|
14.50%
|
|
A. Calculate the required rate of return for SmileWhite using the information in Exhibit 21-1 and the CAPM. Show your work.
Ludlow estimates the following EPS and dividend growth rates for Smile White:
|
First three years:
|
12% per year
|
|
Years thereafter:
|
9% per year
|
The 1997 dividend per share is $1.72.
B. Estimate the intrinsic value of SmileWhite using the data above and the two-stage DDM. Show your work.
C. Recommend Quick Brush or Smile White stock for purchase by comparing each company”s intrinsic value with its current market price. Show your work.
D. Describe one strength of the two-stage DDM in comparison with the constant growth DDM. Describe one weakness inherent in all DDMs.
what is the value of one ordinary share of taiwan semiconductor manufacturing co ltd 543655
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quinton Johnston is evaluating Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd., (NYSE: TSM) headquartered in Hsinchu, Taiwan. In 2001, when Johnston is performing his analysis, the company-and indeed, the whole industry-is unprofitable. Furthermore, TSM pays no dividends on its common shares. Johnston decides to value TSM using his forecasts of FCFE and makes the following assumptions:
- The company has 17.0 billion outstanding shares.
- Sales will be $5.5 billion in 2002, increasing at 28 percent annually for the next four years (through 2006).
- Net income will be 32 percent of sales.
- Investment in fixed assets will be 35 percent of sales, investment in working capital will be 6 percent of sales, and depreciation will be 9 percent of sales.
- 20 percent of the investment in assets will be financed with debt.
- Interest expenses will be only 2 percent of sales.
- The tax rate will be 10 percent.
- TSM”s beta is 2.1, the risk-free government bond rate is 6.4 percent, and the equity risk premium is 5.0 percent.
- At the end of 2006, Johnston projects TSM will sell for 18 times earnings.
What is the value of one ordinary share of Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd.?
interest expenses are 150 million the current market value of phaneuf s outstanding 543656
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do Pharn is evaluating Phaneuf Accelerateur using the FCFF and FCFE valuation approaches. Pham has collected the following information (currently in Euro):
- Phaneuf has net income of 250 million, depreciation of 90 million, capital expenditures of 170 million, and an increase in working capital of 40 million.
- Phaneuf will finance 40 percent of the increase in net fixed assets (capital expenditures less depreciation) and 40 percent of the increase in working capital with debt financing.
- Interest expenses are 150 million. The current market value of Phaneuf”s outstanding debt is 1,800 million.
- FCFF is expected to grow at 6.0 percent indefinitely, and FCFE is expected to grow at 7.0 percent.
- The tax rate is 30 percent.
- Phaneuf is financed with 40 percent debt and 60 percent equity. The before-tax cost of debt is 9 percent and the before-tax cost of equity is 13 percent.
- Phaneuf has 10 million outstanding shares.
A. Using the FCFF valuation approach, estimate the total value of the firm, the total market value of equity, and the value per share.
B. Using the FCFE valuation approach, estimate the total market value of equity and the value per share.
phb company currently sells for 32 50 per share in an attempt to determine if phb is 543657
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PHB Company currently sells for $32.50 per share. In an attempt to determine if PHB is fairly priced, an analyst has assembled the following information:
- The before-tax required rates of return on PHB debt, preferred stock, and common stock are 7.0 percent, 6.8 percent, and 11.0 percent, respectively.
- The company”s target capital structure is 30 percent debt, 15 percent preferred stock, and 55 percent common stock.
- The market value of the company”s debt is $145 million, and its preferred stock is valued at $65 million.
- PHB”s FCFF for the year just ended is $28 million. FCFF is expected to grow at a constant rate of 4 percent for the foreseeable future.
- The tax rate is 35 percent.
- PHB has 8 million outstanding common shares.
What is PHB”s estimated value per share? Is PHB”s stock underpriced?
bhp billiton headquartered in melbourne australia provides a variety of industrial m 543658
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Watson Dunn is planning to value BHP Billiton Ltd. (NYSE: BHP) using a single stage FCFF approach. BHP Billiton, headquartered in Melbourne, Australia, provides a variety of industrial metals and minerals. The financial information Dunn has assembled for his valuation is as follows:
- The company has 1,852 million shares outstanding.
- Market value of debt is $3.192 billion.
- FCFF is currently $1.1559 billion.
- Equity beta is 0.90, the equity risk premium is 5.5 percent, and the risk-free rate is 5.5 percent.
- The before-tax cost of debt is 7.0 percent.
- The tax rate is 40 percent.
- To calculate WACC, assume the company is financed 25 percent with debt.
- FCFF growth rate is 4 percent.
Using Dunn”s information, calculate the following:
A. WACC
B. Value of the firm
C. Total market value of equity
D. Value per share
use the base case values to estimate the current value of mcdonald s corporation 543659
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kenneth McCoin is valuing McDonald”s Corporation and performing a sensitivity analysis on his valuation. He uses a single-stage FCFE growth model. The “base case” values for each of the parameters in the model are given in the table below, along with possible “low” and “high” estimates for each variable.
|
Variable
|
Base Case Value
|
Low Estimate
|
High Estimate
|
|
Normalized FCFE,
|
$0.88
|
$0.70
|
$1.14
|
|
Risk-free rate
|
5.08%
|
5.00%
|
5.20%
|
|
Equity risk premium
|
5.50%
|
4.50%
|
6.50%
|
|
Beta
|
0.7
|
0.6
|
0.8
|
|
FCFE perpetual growth rate
|
6.40%
|
4.00%
|
7.00%
|
A. Use the base case values to estimate the current value of McDonald”s Corporation.
B. Calculate the range of stock prices that would occur if the base case value for FCFEo were replaced by the low and high estimate for FCFEo. Similarly, using the base case values for all other variables, calculate the range of stock prices caused by the using the low and high values for beta, the risk-free rate, the equity risk premium, and the growth rate. Rank the sensitivity of the stock price to each of the five variables based on these ranges.
on the last trading day of 2000 29 december 2000 an analyst is reviewing his valuati 543626
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On the last trading day of 2000 (29 December 2000), an analyst is reviewing his valuation of Wal-Mart Stores (NYSE: WMT). The analyst has the following information and assumptions:
- The current price is $53.12.
- The analyst”s estimate of WMT”s intrinsic value is $56.00.
- In addition to the full correction of the difference between WMT”s current price and its intrinsic value, the analyst forecasts additional price appreciation of $4.87 and a cash dividend of $0.28 over the next year.
- The required rate of return for Wal-Mart is 9.2 percent.
A. What is the analyst”s expected holding-period return on WMT?
B. What is WMT”s ex ante alpha?
C. Calculate ex post alpha, given the following additional information.
Over the next year, 29 December 2000 through 3 1 December 2001, Wal-Mart”s actual rate of return was 8.9 percent.
In 2001, the realized rate of return for stocks of similar risk was – 10.4 percent.
define ex ante alpha 543627
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The table below gives information on the expected and required rates of return based on the CAPM for three securities an analyst is valuing:
|
Expected Rate
|
CAPM Required Rate
|
|
Security 1
|
0.2
|
0.21
|
|
Security 2
|
0.18
|
0.08
|
|
Security 3
|
0.11
|
0.1
|
A. Define ex ante alpha.
B. Calculate the expected alpha of Securities 1, 2, and 3 and rank them from most attractive to least attractive.
C. Based on your answer to Part B, what risks attach to selecting among Securities 1, 2, and 3?
oliver company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook in 543524
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oliver Company uses the columnar cash journals illustrated in the textbook. In April, the following selected cash transactions occurred.
1. Made a refund to a customer for the return of damaged goods.
2. Received collection from customer within the 3% discount period.
3. Purchased merchandise for cash.
4. Paid a creditor within the 3% discount period.
5. Received collection from customer after the 3% discount period had expired.
6. Paid freight on merchandise purchased.
7. Paid cash for office equipment.
8. Received cash refund from supplier for merchandise returned.
9. Paid cash dividend to stockholders.
10. Made cash sales.
Instructions
Indicate (a) the cash journal, and (b) the columns in the cash journal that should be used in recording each transaction.
ramirez company has the following selected transactions during march 543525
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ramirez Company has the following selected transactions during March.
Mar. 2 Purchased equipment costing $6,000 from Briggs Company on account.
5 Received credit memorandum for $300 from Redbone Company for merchandise damaged in shipment to Ramirez.
7 Issued a credit memorandum for $400 to Sparks Company for merchandise the customer returned. The returned merchandise had a cost of $260. Ramirez Company uses a one-column purchases journal, a sales journal, the columnar cash journals used in the text, and a general journal.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions in the general journal.
(b) In a brief memo to the president of Ramirez Company, explain the postings to the control and subsidiary accounts.
below are some typical transactions incurred by costello company 543526
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are some typical transactions incurred by Costello Company.
|
1. Payment of creditors on account.
|
8. Sales discount taken on goods sold.
|
|
2. Return of merchandise sold for credit.
|
9. Payment of employee wages.
|
|
3. Collection on account from customers.
|
10. Paid a cash dividend to stockholders.
|
|
4. Sale of land for cash.
|
11. Depreciation on building.
|
|
5. Sale of merchandise on account.
|
12. Purchase of office supplies for cash.
|
|
6. Sale of merchandise for cash.
|
13. Purchase of merchandise on account.
|
|
7. Received credit for merchandise
|
|
|
purchased on credit.
|
|
Instructions
For each transaction, indicate whether it would normally be recorded in a cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, sales journal, single-column purchases journal, or general journal.
selected accounts from the ledgers of jose gomez company at july 31 showed the follo 543528
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts from the ledgers of Jose Gomez Company at July 31 showed the following.
|
Store Equipment
|
No. 153
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
1-Jul
|
|
G1
|
3,600
|
|
3,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
No. 120
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
15-Jul
|
|
G1
|
400
|
|
400
|
|
18
|
|
G1
|
|
100
|
300
|
|
25
|
|
G1
|
|
200
|
100
|
|
31
|
|
P1
|
8,400
|
|
8,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
No. 201
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
1-Jul
|
|
G1
|
|
3,600
|
3,600
|
|
15
|
|
G1
|
|
400
|
4,000
|
|
18
|
|
G1
|
100
|
|
3,900
|
|
25
|
|
G1
|
200
|
|
3,700
|
|
31
|
|
P1
|
|
8,400
|
12,100
|
|
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER
|
|
Agler Equipment Co.
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
1-Jul
|
|
G1
|
|
3,600
|
3,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Benton Co.
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
3-Jul
|
|
P1
|
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
|
20
|
|
P1
|
|
700
|
2,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cerner Materials
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
17-Jul
|
|
P1
|
|
1,400
|
1,400
|
|
18
|
|
G1
|
100
|
|
1,300
|
|
29
|
|
P1
|
|
2,100
|
3,400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dunlap Co.
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
14-Jul
|
|
P1
|
|
1,100
|
1,100
|
|
25
|
|
G1
|
200
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fogelson Co.
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
12-Jul
|
|
P1
|
|
500
|
500
|
|
21
|
|
P1
|
|
600
|
1,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Galant Transit
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
15-Jul
|
|
G1
|
|
400
|
400
|
Instructions
From the data, prepare:
(a) the single-column purchases journal for July.
(b) the general journal entries for July.
moreno products uses both special journals and a general journal as described in thi 543529
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Moreno Products uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this appendix. Moreno also posts customers’ accounts in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The postings for the most recent month are included in the subsidiary T accounts below.
|
Dolan
|
|
340
|
250
|
|
|
200
|
|
|
Rambo
|
|
150
|
150
|
|
|
290
|
|
|
Moses
|
|
–0–
|
145
|
|
|
145
|
|
|
Voris
|
|
120
|
120
|
|
|
190
|
|
|
|
170
|
|
Instructions
Determine the correct amount of the end-of-month posting from the sales journal to the
Accounts Receivable control account.
moran company s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts 543530
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Moran Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.
|
101 Cash
|
401 Sales
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
311 Common Stock
|
|
On April 1 the accounts receivable ledger of Moran Company showed the following balances: Collins $1,550, Harris $1,200, Fleetwood Co. $2,900, and Smith $1,700. The April transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.
Apr. 1 Stockholders invested additional cash in the business, $6,000, for common stock.
4 Received check for payment of account from Smith less 2% cash discount.
5 Received check for $620 in payment of invoice no. 307 from Fleetwood Co.
8 Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $7,245. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,347.
10 Received check for $800 in payment of invoice no. 309 from Collins.
11 Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $550.
23 Received check for $1,500 in payment of invoice no. 310 from Fleetwood Co.
29 Received check for payment of account from Harris.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions above in a six-column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr. Foot and cross foot the journal.
(b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the April transactions to these accounts.
(c) Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.
manilow company s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts 543531
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manilow Company’s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.
|
101 Cash
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
332 Dividends
|
|
130 Prepaid Insurance
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
|
On October 1 the accounts payable ledger of Manilow Company showed the following balances: Gibson Company $1,700, Milo Co. $2,500, Newsome Co. $1,400, and Pagan Company $3,700. The October transactions involving the payment of cash were as follows.
Oct. 1 Purchased merchandise, check no. 63, $700.
3 Purchased equipment, check no. 64, $800.
5 Paid Gibson Company balance due of $1,700, less 2% discount, check no. 65, $1,666.
10 Purchased merchandise, check no. 66, $2,250.
15 Paid Newsome Co. balance due of $1,400, check no. 67.
16 A cash dividend is paid in the amount of $400, check no. 68.
19 Paid Milo Co. in full for invoice no. 610, $1,400 less 2% cash discount, check no. 69, $1,372.
29 Paid Pagan Company in full for invoice no. 264, $2,600, check no. 70.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions above in a four-column cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr. Foot and crossfoot the journal. (b) Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Payable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the October transactions to these accounts. (c) Prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances.
the chart of accounts of renteria company includes the following selected accounts 543532
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The chart of accounts of Renteria Company includes the following selected accounts.
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
610 Advertising Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
In July the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.
July 1 Purchased merchandise from Carlin Company $7,000.
2 Received freight bill from Johnson Shipping on Carlin purchase $400.
3 Made sales to Nance Company $1,300, and to Franklin Bros. $1,900.
5 Purchased merchandise from Flynn Company $3,200.
8 Received credit on merchandise returned to Flynn Company $300.
13 Purchased store supplies from Beran Supply $720.
15 Purchased merchandise from Carlin Company $3,600 and from Ruiz Company $2,900.
16 Made sales to Martin Company $3,450 and to Franklin Bros. $1,570.
18 Received bill for advertising from Marlin Advertisements $600.
21 Made sales to Nance Company $310 and to Randee Company $2,300.
22 Granted allowance to Nance Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $40.
24 Purchased merchandise from Flynn Company $3,000.
26 Purchased equipment from Beran Supply $600.
28 Received freight bill from Johnson Shipping on Flynn purchase of July 24, $380.
30 Made sales to Martin Company $4,900.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Other Accounts Dr., and Merchandise Inventory Dr., Accounts Payable Cr. (b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.) (c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.
selected accounts from the chart of accounts of cross company are shown below 543533
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts from the chart of accounts of Cross Company are shown below.
|
101 Cash
|
401 Sales
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
726 Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price. During January, Cross completed the following transactions.
Jan. 3 Purchased merchandise on account from Carr Co. $10,000.
4 Purchased supplies for cash $80.
4 Sold merchandise on account to Hartman $7,250, invoice no. 371, terms 1/10, n/30.
5 Issued a debit memorandum to Carr Co. and returned $300 worth of damaged goods.
6 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,150.
8 Purchased merchandise on account from Law Co. $4,500.
9 Sold merchandise on account to Mays Corp. $5,800, invoice no. 372, terms 1/10, n/30.
Jan. 11 Purchased merchandise on account from Hoble Co. $3,700.
13 Paid in full Carr Co. on account less a 2% discount.
13 Made cash sales for the week totaling $5,340.
15 Received payment from Mays Corp. for invoice no. 372.
15 Paid semimonthly salaries of $14,300 to employees.
17 Received payment from Hartman for invoice no. 371.
17 Sold merchandise on account to Piper Co. $1,200, invoice no. 373, terms 1/10, n/30.
19 Purchased equipment on account from Johnson Corp. $5,500.
20 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,200.
20 Paid in full Law Co. on account less a 2% discount.
23 Purchased merchandise on account from Carr Co. $7,800.
24 Purchased merchandise on account from Levine Corp. $4,690.
27 Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,730.
30 Received payment from Piper Co. for invoice no. 373.
31 Paid semimonthly salaries of $13,200 to employees.
31 Sold merchandise on account to Hartman $9,330, invoice no. 374, terms 1/10, n/30.
Clark Company uses the following journals.
1. Sales journal.
2. Single-column purchases journal.
3. Cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Merchandise Inventory Cr.
4. Cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Merchandise Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr.
5. General journal.
Instructions
Using the selected accounts provided:
(a) Record the January transactions in the appropriate journal noted.
(b) Foot and cross-foot all special journals.
(c) Show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and checkmarks as needed in the journals. (Actual posting to ledger accounts is not required.)
presented below are the purchases and cash payments journals for garison co for its 543534
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are the purchases and cash payments journals for Garison Co. for its first month of operations.
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
|
Merchandise Inventory Dr. Accounts Payable Cr.
|
|
4-Jul
|
J. Eaton
|
|
6,800
|
|
5
|
W. Foley
|
|
7,500
|
|
11
|
R. Gamble
|
|
3,920
|
|
13
|
M. Hill
|
|
15,300
|
|
20
|
D. Jacob
|
|
8,800
|
|
|
|
|
42,320
|
|
CASH PAYMENTS JOURNAL
|
|
Date
|
Account Debited
|
|
Other Accounts Dr.
|
Accounts Payable Dr.
|
Merchandise Inventory Cr.
|
Cash Cr.
|
|
4-Jul
|
Store Supplies
|
|
600
|
|
|
600
|
|
10
|
W. Foley
|
|
|
7500
|
75
|
7,425
|
|
11
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
6000
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
15
|
J. Eaton
|
|
|
6800
|
|
6,800
|
|
19
|
Dividends
|
|
2500
|
|
|
2,500
|
|
21
|
M. Hill
|
|
|
15,300
|
153
|
15,147
|
|
|
|
|
9100
|
29,600
|
228
|
38,472
|
In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for July. The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price.
July 1 The founder, R. Garison, invests $80,000 in cash in exchange for common stock.
6 Sell merchandise on account to Hardy Co. $5,400 terms 1/10, n/30.
7 Make cash sales totaling $4,000.
8 Sell merchandise on account to D. Marlowe $3,600, terms 1/10, n/30.
10 Sell merchandise on account to L. Clinton $4,900, terms 1/10, n/30.
13 Receive payment in full from D. Marlowe.
16 Receive payment in full from L. Clinton.
20 Receive payment in full from Hardy Co.
21 Sell merchandise on account to S. Kane $4,000, terms 1/10, n/30.
29 Returned damaged goods to J. Eaton and received cash refund of $450.
Instructions
(a) Open the following accounts in the general ledger.
|
101 Cash
|
332 Dividends
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
127 Store Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
131 Prepaid Rent
|
631 Supplies Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
729 Rent Expense
|
|
311 Common Stock
|
|
(b) Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in the sales journal, the cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8), and the general journal.
(c) Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.
(d) Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.
(e) Prepare a trial balance at July 31, 2012.
(f) Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
(g) The following adjustments at the end of July are necessary.
(1) A count of supplies indicates that $140 is still on hand.
(2) Recognize rent expense for July, $500.
Prepare the necessary entries in the general journal. Post the entries to the general ledger.
(h) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at July 31, 2012.
the post closing trial balance for rivera co is as follows 543535
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The post-closing trial balance for Rivera Co. is as follows.
|
RIVERA CO. Post-Closing Trial Balance December 31, 2012
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$41,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
15,000
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
45,000
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
23,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
6,450
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$1,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
43,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
86,450
|
|
|
$130,950
|
$130,950
|
The subsidiary ledgers contain the following information: (1) accounts receivable—
N. Alspar $2,500, B. Cole $7,500, S. Devine $5,000; (2) accounts payable—S. Field $10,000,
A. Gantler $18,000, and D. Harms $15,000. The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price.
The transactions for January 2013 are as follows.
Jan. 3 Sell merchandise to B. Terrel $4,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
5 Purchase merchandise from S. Warren $2,500, terms 2/10, n/30.
7 Receive a check from S. Devine $3,500.
11 Pay freight on merchandise purchased $300.
12 Pay rent of $1,000 for January.
13 Receive payment in full from B. Terrel.
14 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Issue a credit memo to acknowledge receipt of damaged merchandise of $700 returned by N. Alspar.
15 Send D. Harms a check for $14,850 in full payment of account, discount $150.
17 Purchase merchandise from D. Milton $1,600, terms 2/10, n/30.
18 Pay salaries of $4,300.
20 Give A. Gantler a 60-day note for $18,000 in full payment of account payable.
23 Total cash sales amount to $8,600.
24 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Sell merchandise on account to B. Cole $7,700, terms 1/10, n/30.
27 Send S. Warren a check for $950.
29 Receive payment on a note of $40,000 from S. Lava (short-term, non-interest-bearing note).
30 Return merchandise of $500 to D. Milton for credit. Post all journals to the subsidiary ledger.
Instructions
(a) Open general and subsidiary ledger accounts for the following.
|
101 Cash
|
311 Common Stock
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales
|
|
115 Notes Receivable
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
120 Merchandise Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
157 Equipment
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
726 Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
200 Notes Payable
|
727 Office Salaries Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
729 Rent Expense
|
(b) Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8), a cash payments journal (see Illustration G-15), and a general journal.
(c) Post the appropriate amounts to the general ledger.
(d) Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2013.
(e) Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with controlling accounts in the general ledger.
c held and g kamp decide to merge their proprietorships into a partnership 543551
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
C. Held and G. Kamp decide to merge their proprietorships into a partnership called Heldkamp Company. The balance sheet of Kamp Co. shows:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$16,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
1,200
|
$14,800
|
|
Equipment
|
20,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
8,000
|
12,000
|
The partners agree that the net realizable value of the receivables is $12,500 and that the fair value of the equipment is $10,000. Indicate how the four accounts should appear in the opening balance sheet of the partnership.
the post closing trial balances of two proprietorships on january 1 2012 are 543562
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The post-closing trial balances of two proprietorships on January 1, 2012, are presented below.
|
|
High Company
|
Lowe Company
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$14,000
|
|
$13,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
17,500
|
|
26,000
|
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
|
$3,000
|
|
$4,400
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
26,500
|
|
18,400
|
|
|
Equipment
|
45,000
|
|
28,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
|
24,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
15,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
31,000
|
|
High, Capital
|
|
36,000
|
|
|
|
Lowe, Capital
|
|
|
|
23,000
|
|
|
$103,000
|
$103,000
|
$85,400
|
$85,400
|
High and Lowe decide to form a partnership, High Lowe Company, with the following agreed upon valuations for noncash assets.
|
|
High Company
|
Lowe Company
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$17,500
|
$26,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
4,500
|
4,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
18,000
|
All cash will be transferred to the partnership, and the partnership will assume all the liabilities of the two proprietorships. Further, it is agreed that High will invest $3,000 in cash, and Lowe will invest $18,000 in cash.
Instructions
(a) Prepare separate journal entries to record the transfer of each proprietorship’s assets and liabilities to the partnership.
(b) Journalize the additional cash investment by each partner.
(c) Prepare a balance sheet for the partnership on January 1, 2012.
at the end of its first year of operations on december 31 2012 lmn company s 543563
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of its first year of operations on December 31, 2012, LMN Company’s accounts show the following.
|
Partner
|
Drawings
|
Capital
|
|
Lois Lang
|
$23,000
|
$48,000
|
|
Mary Miley
|
14,000
|
30,000
|
|
Sue Norton
|
10,000
|
25,000
|
The capital balance represents each partner’s initial capital investment. Therefore, net income or net loss for 2012 has not been closed to the partners’ capital accounts.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the entry to record the division of net income for the year 2012 under each of the following independent assumptions.
(1) Net income is $28,000. Income is shared 6:3:1.
(2) Net income is $34,000. Lang and Miley are given salary allowances of $18,000 and $10,000, respectively. The remainder is shared equally.
(3) Net income is $22,000. Each partner is allowed interest of 10% on beginning capital balances. Lang is given a $15,000 salary allowance. The remainder is shared equally.
(b) Prepare a schedule showing the division of net income under assumption (3) above.
(c) Prepare a partners’ capital statement for the year under assumption (3) above.
the partners in jrs company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet 543564
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partners in JRS Company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet shows the following.
|
JRS COMPANY Balance Sheet May 31, 2012
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$27,500
|
Notes payable
|
$13,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
25,000
|
Accounts payable
|
27,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
-1,000
|
Wages payable
|
3,800
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
34,500
|
S. Jenner, Capital
|
36,000
|
|
Equipment
|
21,000
|
J. Richards, Capital
|
20,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
-5,500
|
Mick Sutter, Capital
|
1,200
|
|
Total
|
$101,500
|
Total
|
$101,500
|
The partners share income and loss 5 :3 :2. During the process of liquidation, the following transactions were completed in the following sequence.
1. A total of $53,000 was received from converting noncash assets into cash.
2. Gain or loss on realization was allocated to partners.
3. Liabilities were paid in full.
4. Mick Sutter paid his capital deficiency.
5. Cash was paid to the partners with credit balances.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the entries to record the transactions.
(b) Post to the cash and capital accounts.
(c) Assume that Sutter is unable to pay the capital deficiency.
(1) Prepare the entry to allocate Sutter’s debit balance to Jenner and Richards.
(2) Prepare the entry to record the final distribution of cash.
the adjusted trial balance of hanlon company at the end of its fiscal year is 543576
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Hanlon Company at the end of its fiscal year is:
|
HANLON COMPANY Adjusted Trial Balance July 31, 2012
|
|
Account Titles
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$14,940
|
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,780
|
|
|
157
|
Equipment
|
15,900
|
|
|
167
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$5,400
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,220
|
|
208
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
1,800
|
|
301
|
J. D. Hanlon, Capital
|
|
45,200
|
|
306
|
J. D. Hanlon, Drawing
|
14,000
|
|
|
404
|
Commission Revenue
|
|
65,100
|
|
429
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
6,500
|
|
711
|
Depreciation Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
720
|
Salaries Expense
|
55,700
|
|
|
732
|
Utilities Expense
|
14,900
|
|
|
|
|
$128,220
|
$128,220
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year. Hanlon
did not make any capital investments during the year.
(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet at July 31.
on may 1 robert neupert started skyline flying school a company that provides flying 543577
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 1, Robert Neupert started Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, by investing $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2012, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.
|
Cash
|
$6,500
|
Notes Payable
|
$30,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,200
|
Rent Expense
|
1,200
|
|
Equipment
|
64,000
|
Repair Expense
|
400
|
|
Lesson Revenue
|
8,600
|
Fuel Expense
|
2,500
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
500
|
Insurance Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
800
|
Robert Neupert made no additional investment in May, but he withdrew $1,700 in cash for personal use.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.
(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for May assuming that the data above need to be adjusted for the following items: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $3,300 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.
the following are the projected cash flows to equity and to the firm over the next f 543583
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the projected cash flows to equity and to the firm over the next five years:
|
Year
|
CF to Equity
|
Int (1-t)
|
CF to Firm
|
|
1
|
$250.00
|
$90.00
|
$340.00
|
|
2
|
$262.50
|
$94.50
|
$357.00
|
|
3
|
$275.63
|
$99.23
|
$374.85
|
|
4
|
$289.41
|
$104.19
|
$393.59
|
|
5
|
$303.88
|
$109.40
|
$413.27
|
|
Terminal Value
|
$3,946.50
|
|
$6,000.00
|
(The terminal value is the value of the equity or firm at the end of year 5.) The firm has a cost of equity of 12% and a cost of capital of 9.94%. Answer the following
questions:
A. What is the value of the equity in this firm?
B. What is the value of the firm?
you are estimating the price earnings multiple to use to value paramount corporation 543584
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are estimating the price/earnings multiple to use to value Paramount Corporation by looking at the average price/earnings multiple of comparable firms. The following are the price/earnings ratios of firms in the entertainment business.
|
Firm
|
P/E Ratio
|
Firm
|
P/E Ratio
|
|
Disney (Walt)
|
22.09
|
PLG
|
23.33
|
|
Time Warner
|
36
|
CIR
|
22.91
|
|
King World Productions
|
14.1
|
GET
|
97.6
|
|
New Line Cinema
|
26.7
|
GTK
|
26
|
A. What is the average P/E ratio?
B. Would you use all the comparable firms in calculating the average? Why or why not?
C. What assumptions are you making when you use the industry-average P/E ratio to value Paramount Communications?
an analyst has been following ken mcgee corporation nyse kmg for several years 543625
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst has been following Ken-McGee Corporation (NYSE: KMG) for several years. He has consistently felt that the stock is undervalued and has always recommended a strong buy. Another analyst who has been following Nucor Corporation (NYSE: NUE) has been similarly bullish. The tables below summarize the prices, dividends, total returns, and estimates of the contemporaneous required returns for KMG and NUE from 1998 to 2001.
Data for KMG
|
Year
|
Price at Year-End
|
Dividends
|
Total Annual Return
|
Contemporaneous Required Return
|
|
1997
|
$54.22
|
|
|
|
|
1998
|
33.97
|
$1.80
|
-34.00%
|
26.60%
|
|
1999
|
54.38
|
1.8
|
65.4
|
19.6
|
|
2000
|
63.96
|
1.8
|
20.9
|
-8.5
|
|
2001
|
53.93
|
1.8
|
-12.9
|
-11
|
Data for NUE
|
Year
|
Price at Year-End
|
Dividends
|
Total Annual Return
|
Contemporaneous Required Return
|
|
1997
|
$45.66
|
|
|
|
|
1998
|
41.31
|
$0.48
|
-8.50%
|
29.20%
|
|
1999
|
52.93
|
0.52
|
29.4
|
21.5
|
|
2000
|
38.96
|
0.6
|
25.3
|
-9.3
|
|
200 1
|
52.8
|
0.68
|
37.3
|
12.1
|
The total return is the price appreciation and dividends for the year divided by the price at the end of the previous year. The contemporaneous required return is the average actual return for the year realized by stocks that were of the same risk as KMG and NUE, respectively.
A. Without reference to any numerical data, what can be said about each analyst”s ex ante alpha for KMG and NUE, respectively?
B. Calculate the ex post alphas for each year 1998 through 2001 for KMG and for
colorado clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment it has tw 543363
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Colorado Clinic is considering investing in new heart-monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows. The company’s cost of capitalis 8%.
|
|
Option A
|
Option B
|
|
Initial cost
|
$135,000
|
$203,000
|
|
Net annual cash flows
|
$31,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)
|
$50,000
|
$0
|
|
Salvage value
|
$0
|
$10,000
|
|
Estimated useful life
|
8 years
|
8 years
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the (1) net present value and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint:To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)
(b) Which option should be accepted?
you would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet 543364
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. In preparation for an interview with the bank to discuss your financing needs, you develop answers to the following questions. A number of assumptions are required; clearly note all assumptions that you make.
Instructions
(a) Identify the types of costs that would likely be involved in making this product.
(b) Set up five columns as indicated.
|
|
Product Costs
|
|
|
Item
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
Period Costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Classify the costs you identified in (a) into the manufacturing cost classifications of product costs (direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead) and period costs.
(c) Assign hypothetical monthly dollar figures to the costs you identified in (a) and (b).
(d) Assume you have no raw materials or work in process beginning or ending inventories. Prepare a projected cost of goods manufactured schedule for the first month of operations.
(e) Project the number of helmets you expect to produce the first month of operations. Compute the cost to produce one bicycle helmet. Review the result to ensure it is reasonable; if not, return to part (c) and adjust the monthly dollar figures you assigned accordingly.
(f ) What type of cost accounting system will you likely use—job order or process costing?
(g) Explain how you would assign costs in either the job order or process costing system you plan to use.
(h) Classify your costs as either variable or fixed costs. For simplicity, assign all costs to either variable or fixed, assuming there are no mixed costs, using the format shown.
|
Item
|
Variable Costs
|
Fixed Costs
|
Total Costs
|
(i) Compute the unit variable cost, using the production number you determined in (e).
( j) Project the number of helmets you anticipate selling the first month of operations. Set a unit selling price, and compute both the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.
(k) Determine your break-even point in dollars and in units.
( l ) Prepare projected operating budgets (sales, production, direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling and administrative expense, and income statement).
You will need to make assumptions for each of the following:
|
Direct materials budget:
|
Quantity of direct materials required to produce one helmet; cost per unit of quantity; desired ending direct materials (assume none).
|
|
Direct labor budget:
|
Direct labor time required per helmet; direct labor cost per hour.
|
|
Budgeted income statement:
|
Income tax expense is 45% of income from operations.
|
(m) Prepare a cash budget for the month. Assume the percentage of sales that will be collected from customers is 75%, and the percentage of direct materials that will be paid in the current month is 75%.
(n) Determine a relevant range of activity, using the number of helmets produced as your activity index. Recast your manufacturing overhead budget into a flexible monthly budget for two additional activity levels.
(o) Identify one potential cause of materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead variances for your product.
(p) Assume that you wish to purchase production equipment that costs $720,000. Determine the cash payback period, utilizing the monthly cash flow that you computed in part (m) multiplied by 12 months (for simplicity).
(q) Identify any nonfinancial factors that should be considered before commencing your business venture.
shellhammer company is considering the purchase of a new machine the invoice 543366
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shellhammer Company is considering the purchase of a new machine. The invoice price of the machine is $170,000, freight charges are estimated to be $4,000, and installation costs are expected to be $6,000. Salvage value of the new equipment is expected to be zero after a useful life of 4 years. Existing equipment could be retained and used for an additional 4 years if the new machine is not purchased. At that time, the salvage value of the equipment would be zero. If the new machine is purchased now, the existing machine would be scrapped. Shellhammer’s accountant, Tracy Greene, has accumulated the following data regarding annual sales and expenses with and without the new machine.
1. Without the new machine, Shellhammer can sell 10,000 units of product annually at a per unit selling price of $100. If the new unit is purchased, the number of units produced and sold would increase by 20%. The selling price would remain the same.
2. The new machine is faster than the old machine, and it is more efficient in its usage of materials. With the old machine, the gross profit rate will be 25% of sales. With the new machine, the rate will be 28% of sales.
3. Annual selling expenses are $135,000 with the current equipment. Because the new equipment would produce a greater number of units to be sold, annual selling expenses are expected to increase by 10% if it is purchased.
4. Annual administrative expenses are expected to be $100,000 with the old machine and $113,000 with the new machine.
5. The current book value of the existing machine is $36,000. Shellhammer uses straight-line depreciation.
6. Shellhammer’s management wants a minimum rate of return of 15% on its investment and a payback period of no more than 3 years.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following. (Ignore income tax effects.)
(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the 4 years showing whether Shellhammer should keep the existing machine or buy the new machine.
(b) Calculate the annual rate of return for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)
(c) Compute the payback period for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)
(d) Compute the net present value of the new machine. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
(e) On the basis of the foregoing data, would you recommend that Shellhammer buy the machine? Why?
koonce company manufactures private label small electronic products 543367
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Koonce Company manufactures private-label small electronic products, such as alarm clocks, calculators, kitchen timers, stopwatches, and automatic pencil sharpeners. Some of the products are sold as sets, and others are sold individually. Products are studied as to their sales potential, and then cost estimates are made. The Engineering Department develops productionplans, and then production begins. The company has generally had very successful product introduction.Only two products introduced by the company have been discontinued.One of the products currently sold is a multi-alarm clock. The clock has four alarms that canbe programmed to sound at various times and for varying lengths of time. The company has experienceda great deal of difficulty in making the circuit boards for the clocks. The productionprocess has never operated smoothly. The product is unprofitable at the present time, primarilybecause of warranty repairs and product recalls. Two models of the clocks were recalled, for example,because they sometimes caused an electric shock when the alarms were being shut off. TheEngineering Department is attempting to revise the manufacturing process, but the revision willtake another 6 months at least.The clocks were very popular when they were introduced, and since they are private-label, thecompany has not suffered much from the recalls. Presently, the company has a very large order forseveral items from Kmart Stores. The order includes 5,000 of the multi-alarm clocks. When thecompany suggested that Kmart purchase the clocks from another manufacturer, Kmart threatenedto rescind the entire order unless the clocks were included.The company has therefore investigated the possibility of having another company make theclocks for them. The clocks were bid for the Kmart order, based on an estimated $5.50 cost to manufacture,as follows.
|
Circuit board, 1 each @ $1.00
|
$1.00
|
|
Plastic case, 1 each @ $0.50
|
0.5
|
|
Alarms, 4 @ $0.15 each
|
0.6
|
|
Labor, 15 minutes @ $12/hour
|
3
|
|
Overhead, $1.60 per labor hour
|
0.4
|
Koonce could purchase clocks to fill the Kmart order for $9 from Silver Star, a Korean manufacturer with a very good quality record. Silver Star has offered to reduce the price to $7.50 after Koonce has been a customer for 6 months, placing an order of at least 1,000 units per month. If Koonce becomes a “preferred customer” by purchasing 15,000 units per year, the price would be reduced still further to $4.50. Alpha Products, a local manufacturer, has also offered to make clocks for Koonce. It has offered to sell 5,000 clocks for $5 each. However, Alpha Products has been in business for only 6 months. It has experienced significant turnover in its labor force, and the local media have reported that the owner may soon face tax-evasion charges. The owner of Alpha Products is an electronic engineer, however, and the quality of the clocks is likely to be good. If Koonce decides to purchase the clocks from either Silver Star or Alpha, all the costs to manufacturer could be avoided, except a total of $5,000 in overhead costs for machine depreciation. The machinery is fairly new and has no alternate use.
Instructions
(a) What is the difference in profit under each of the alternatives if the clocks are to be sold for $13.00 each to Kmart?
(b) What are the most important nonfinancial factors that Koonce should consider when making this decision?
(c) What should Koonce do in regard to the Kmart order? What should it do in regard to continuing to manufacture the multi alarm clocks? Be prepared to defend your answer.
donna garland s regular hourly wage rate is 16 00 and she receives a wage of 11 2 543468
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Donna Garland’s regular hourly wage rate is $16.00, and she receives a wage of 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for work in excess of 40 hours. During a March weekly pay period, Donna worked 42 hours. Her gross earnings prior to the current week were $8,000. Donna is married and claims three withholding allowances. Her only voluntary deduction is for group hospitalization insurance at $15.00 per week.
Instructions
(a) Compute the following amounts for Donna’s wages for the current week.
(1) Gross earnings.
(2) FICA taxes. (Assume an 8% rate on maximum of $100,000.)
(3) Federal income taxes withheld. (Use the withholding table in the text, page F-6.)
(4) State income taxes withheld. (Assume a 2.0% rate.)
(5) Net pay.
(b) Record Donna’s pay, assuming she is an office computer operator.
gonzalez company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending january 31 543470
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gonzalez Company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending January 31.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hourly
|
Income Tax
|
Health
|
|
Employee
|
M
|
T
|
W
|
T
|
F
|
S
|
Rate
|
Withholding
|
Insurance
|
|
M. Mozart
|
8
|
8
|
9
|
8
|
10
|
3
|
$10
|
$34
|
$10
|
|
E. Donnelly
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
2
|
12
|
37
|
15
|
|
K. Renn
|
9
|
10
|
8
|
8
|
9
|
0
|
13
|
58
|
15
|
Employees are paid 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Gonzalez Company is subject to 5.4% state unemployment taxes and 0.8% federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of gross earnings.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the payroll register for the weekly payroll.
(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and Gonzalez’s payroll tax expense.
selected data from a february payroll register for skywalker company are presented 543471
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected data from a February payroll register for Skywalker Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.
|
Gross earnings:
|
|
State income taxes
|
($3)
|
|
Regular
|
$8,900
|
Union dues
|
100
|
|
Overtime
|
-1
|
Total deductions
|
-4
|
|
Total
|
-2
|
Net pay
|
$7,660
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
Accounts debited:
|
|
|
FICA taxes
|
$800
|
Warehouse wages
|
-5
|
|
Federal income taxes
|
1,140
|
Store wages
|
$4,000
|
FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.
Instructions
(a) Fill in the missing amounts.
(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll.
selected payroll procedures of waegelein company are described below 543473
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected payroll procedures of Waegelein Company are described below.
1. Department managers interview applicants, and on the basis of the interview either hire or reject the applicants. When an applicant is hired, the applicant fills out a W-4 form (Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate). One copy of the form is sent to the human resources department, and one copy is sent to the payroll department as notice that the individual has been hired. On the copy of the W-4 sent to payroll, the managers manually indicate the hourly pay rate for the new hire.
2. The payroll checks are manually signed by the chief accountant and given to the department managers for distribution to employees in their department. The managers are responsible for seeing that any absent employees receive their checks.
3. There are two clerks in the payroll department. The payroll is divided alphabetically; one clerk has employees A to L and the other has employees M to Z. Each clerk computes the gross earnings, deductions, and net pay for employees in the section and posts the data to the employee earning records.
Instructions
(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal control.
(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedures that will provide effective internal control. Use the following format for your answer:
|
(a) Weaknesses
|
(b) Recommended Procedures
|
the payroll liability accounts shown below are included in the ledger of ludwick 543475
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The payroll liability accounts shown below are included in the ledger of Ludwick Company on January 1, 2012.
|
FICA Taxes Payable
|
$760.00
|
|
Federal Income Taxes Payable
|
1,004.60
|
|
State Income Taxes Payable
|
108.95
|
|
Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable
|
288.95
|
|
State Unemployment Taxes Payable
|
1,954.40
|
|
Union Dues Payable
|
870
|
|
U.S. Savings Bonds Payable
|
360
|
In January, the following transactions occurred.
Jan. 10 Sent check for $870.00 to union treasurer for union dues.
12 Deposited check for $1,764.60 in Federal Reserve bank for FICA taxes and federal income taxes withheld.
15 Purchased U.S. Savings Bonds for employees by writing check for $360.00.
17 Paid state income taxes withheld from employees.
20 Paid federal and state unemployment taxes.
31 Completed monthly payroll register, which shows office salaries $14,600, store wages $28,400, FICA taxes withheld $3,440, federal income taxes payable $1,684, state income taxes payable $360, union dues payable $400, United Fund contributions payable $1,888, and net pay $35,228.
31 Prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees.
At January 31, the company also makes the following accrued adjustments pertaining to employee compensation.
1. Employer payroll taxes: FICA taxes 8%, federal unemployment taxes 0.8%, and state unemployment taxes 5.4%.
2. Vacation pay: 6% of gross earnings.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the January transactions.
(b) Journalize the adjustments pertaining to employee compensation at January 31.
for the year ended december 31 2012 bradburn electrical repair company 543476
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the year ended December 31, 2012, Bradburn Electrical Repair Company reports the following summary payroll data.
|
Gross earnings:
|
|
|
Administrative salaries
|
$180,000
|
|
Electricians’ wages
|
470,000
|
|
Total
|
$650,000
|
|
|
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
FICA taxes
|
$45,200
|
|
Federal income taxes withheld
|
188,000
|
|
State income taxes withheld (2.6%)
|
16,900
|
|
United Fund contributions payable
|
32,500
|
|
Hospital insurance premiums
|
20,300
|
|
Total
|
$302,900
|
Bradburn Company’s payroll taxes are: FICA 8%, state unemployment 2.5% (due to a stable employment record), and 0.8% federal unemployment. Gross earnings subject to FICA taxes total $565,000, and gross earnings subject to unemployment taxes total $145,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a summary journal entry at December 31 for the full year’s payroll.
(b) Journalize the adjusting entry at December 31 to record the employer’s payroll taxes.
(c) The W-2 Wage and Tax Statement requires the following dollar data.
|
Wages, Tips, Other Compensation
|
Federal Income Tax Withheld
|
State Income Tax Withheld
|
FICA Wages
|
FICA Tax Withheld
|
Complete the required data for the following employees.
|
Employee
|
Gross Earnings
|
Federal Income Tax Withheld
|
|
Anna Hillman
|
$59,000
|
$28,500
|
|
Sharon Wainwright
|
28,000
|
10,800
|
gonzalez company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending january 31 543493
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gonzalez Company has the following data for the weekly payroll ending January 31.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hourly
|
Income Tax
|
Health
|
|
Employee
|
M
|
T
|
W
|
T
|
F
|
S
|
Rate
|
Withholding
|
Insurance
|
|
M. Mozart
|
8
|
8
|
9
|
8
|
10
|
3
|
$10
|
$34
|
$10
|
|
E. Donnelly
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
8
|
2
|
12
|
37
|
15
|
|
K. Renn
|
9
|
10
|
8
|
8
|
9
|
0
|
13
|
58
|
15
|
Employees are paid 11/2 times the regular hourly rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Gonzalez Company is subject to 5.4% state unemployment taxes and 0.8% federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of gross earnings.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the payroll register for the weekly payroll.
(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the payroll and Gonzalez’s payroll tax expense.
selected data from a february payroll register for skywalker company are presented 543494
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected data from a February payroll register for Skywalker Company are presented below. Some amounts are intentionally omitted.
|
Gross earnings:
|
|
State income taxes
|
($3)
|
|
Regular
|
$8,900
|
Union dues
|
100
|
|
Overtime
|
(1.00)
|
Total deductions
|
(4.00)
|
|
Total
|
(2.00)
|
Net pay
|
$7,660
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
Accounts debited:
|
|
|
FICA taxes
|
$800
|
Warehouse wages
|
(5.00)
|
|
Federal income taxes
|
1,140
|
Store wages
|
$4,000
|
FICA taxes are 8%. State income taxes are 3% of gross earnings.
Instructions
(a) Fill in the missing amounts.
(b) Journalize the February payroll and the payment of the payroll.
selected payroll procedures of waegelein company are described below 543496
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected payroll procedures of Waegelein Company are described below.
1. Department managers interview applicants, and on the basis of the interview either hire or reject the applicants. When an applicant is hired, the applicant fills out a W-4 form (Employee’s Withholding Allowance Certificate). One copy of the form is sent to the human resources department, and one copy is sent to the payroll department as notice that the individual has been hired. On the copy of the W-4 sent to payroll, the managers manually indicate the hourly pay rate for the new hire.
2. The payroll checks are manually signed by the chief accountant and given to the department managers for distribution to employees in their department. The managers are responsible for seeing that any absent employees receive their checks.
3. There are two clerks in the payroll department. The payroll is divided alphabetically; one clerk has employees A to L and the other has employees M to Z. Each clerk computes the gross earnings, deductions, and net pay for employees in the section and posts the data to the employee earning records.
Instructions
(a) Indicate the weaknesses in internal control.
(b) For each weakness, describe the control procedures that will provide effective internal control. Use the following format for your answer:
(a) Weaknesses (b) Recommended Procedures
stine hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus timeand 543497
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stine Hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus timeand- a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 a week. Payroll data for the week ended March 15, 2012, are presented below.
|
Employee
|
Hours Worked
|
Hourly Rate
|
Federal Income Tax Withholdings
|
United Fund
|
|
Joe Feldon
|
40
|
$14.00
|
$ ?
|
$5.00
|
|
Mary Norten
|
42
|
13.00
|
?
|
5.00
|
|
Andy Renfro
|
44
|
13.00
|
60
|
8.00
|
|
Kim Cheng
|
46
|
13.00
|
51
|
5.00
|
Feldon and Norten are married. They claim 0 and 4 withholding allowances, respectively. The following tax rates are applicable: FICA 8%, state income taxes 3%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment 0.8%. The first three employees are sales clerks (store wages expense). The fourth employee performs administrative duties (office wages expense).
Instructions
(a) Prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll. (Use the wage-bracket withholding table in the text for federal income tax withholdings.)
(b) Journalize the payroll on March 15, 2012, and the accrual of employer payroll taxes.
(c) Journalize the payment of the payroll on March 16, 2012.
(d) Journalize the deposit in a Federal Reserve bank on March 31, 2012, of the FICA and federal income taxes payable to the government.
presented on the next page is information related to varberg company for its 543512
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented on the next page is information related to Varberg Company for its first month of operations. Identify the balances that appear in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the accounts receivable balance that appears in the general ledger at the end of January.
|
Credit Sales
|
Cash Collections
|
|
Jan. 7
|
Brown Co.
|
$8,000
|
Jan. 17
|
Brown Co.
|
$7,000
|
|
15
|
Ford Co.
|
6,000
|
24
|
Ford Co.
|
5,000
|
|
23
|
Jones Co.
|
9,000
|
29
|
Jones Co.
|
9,000
|
wei company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in 543519
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wei Company uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this appendix. On June 30, after all monthly postings had been completed, the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger had a debit balance of $350,000; the Accounts Payable control account had a credit balance of $87,000. The July transactions recorded in the special journals are summarized below. No entries affecting accounts receivable and accounts payable were recorded in the general journal for July.
|
Sales journal
|
Total sales $161,400
|
|
Purchases journal
|
Total purchases $54,360
|
|
Cash receipts journal
|
Accounts receivable column total $141,000
|
|
Cash payments journal
|
Accounts payable column total $47,500
|
Instructions
(a) What is the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?
(b) What is the balance of the Accounts Payable control account after the monthly postings on July 31?
(c) To what account(s) is the column total of $161,400 in the sales journal posted?
(d) To what account(s) is the accounts receivable column total of $141,000 in the cash receipts journal posted?
presented below is the subsidiary accounts receivable account of quincy smith 543520
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is the subsidiary accounts receivable account of Quincy Smith
|
Date
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sept. 2
|
S31
|
61,000
|
|
61,000
|
|
9
|
G4
|
|
14,000
|
47,000
|
|
27
|
CR8
|
|
47,000
|
—
|
Instructions
Write a memo that explains each transaction.
on september 1 the balance of the accounts receivable control account in the general 543521
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On September 1 the balance of the Accounts Receivable control account in the general ledger of Albert Company was $11,960. The customers’ subsidiary ledger contained account balances as follows: Fleming $2,440, Park $2,640, Stiner $2,060, Zander $4,820. At the end of September the various journals contained the following information.
Sales journal:
Sales to Zander $800; to Fleming $1,350; to Henry $1,030; to Stiner $1,100.
Cash receipts journal:
Cash received from Stiner $1,310; from Zander $2,300; from Henry $410; from Park $1,800; from Fleming $1,240.
General journal: An allowance is granted to Zander $220.
Instructions
(a) Set up control and subsidiary accounts and enter the beginning balances. Do not construct the journals.
(b) Post the various journals. Post the items as individual items or as totals, whichever would be the appropriate procedure. (No sales discounts given.)
(c) Prepare a list of customers and prove the agreement of the controlling account with the subsidiary ledger at September 30, 2012.
spears company uses special journals and a general journal the following transaction 543522
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spears Company uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during September 2012. Sept. 2 Sold merchandise on account to S. Daily, invoice no. 101, $480, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $300.
10 Purchased merchandise on account from L. Dayne $600, terms 2/10, n/30.
12 Purchased office equipment on account from B. Shafer $6,500.
21 Sold merchandise on account to L. Perez, invoice no. 102 for $800, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $480.
25 Purchased merchandise on account from F. Trent $900, terms n/30.
27 Sold merchandise to M. Deitrich for $700 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $420.
Instructions
(a) Draw a sales journal (see Illustration G-6) and a single-column purchase journal (see Illustration G-12). (Use page 1 for each journal.)
(b) Record the transaction(s) for September that should be journalized in the sales journal and the purchases journal.
cole co uses special journals and a general journal the following transactions 543523
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cole Co. uses special journals and a general journal. The following transactions occurred during May 2012.
May 1 R. Cole invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.
2 Sold merchandise to J. Simon for $6,000 cash. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,200.
3 Purchased merchandise for $9,000 from L. M. Howe using check no. 101.
14 Paid salary to S. Little $700 by issuing check no. 102.
16 Sold merchandise on account to B. Jones for $900, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $630.
22 A check of $9,000 is received from R. Wyatt in full for invoice 101; no discount given.
Instructions
(a) Draw a multiple-column cash receipts journal (see Illustration G-8) and a multiple column cash payments journal (see Illustration G-15). (Use page 1 for each journal.)
(b) Record the transaction(s) for May that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal and cash payments journal.
the information shown on the next page was taken from the annual manufacturing overh 543254
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information shown on the next page was taken from the annual manufacturing overhead cost budget of Marantha Company.
|
Variable manufacturing overhead costs
|
$33,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead costs
|
$19,800
|
|
Normal production level in labour hours
|
16,500
|
|
Normal production level in units
|
4,125
|
|
Standard labour hours per unit
|
4
|
During the year, 4,000 units were produced, 16,100 hours were worked, and the actual manufacturing overhead was $54,000. Actual fixed manufacturing overhead costs equaled budgeted fixed manufacturing overhead costs. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labour hours.
Instructions
(a) Compute the total, fixed, and variable predetermined manufacturing overhead rates.
(b) Compute the total, controllable, and volume overhead variances.
(c) Briefly interpret the overhead controllable and volume variances computed in (b).
the loan department of ottawa bank uses standard costs to determine the overhead cos 543255
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The loan department of Ottawa Bank uses standard costs to determine the overhead cost of processing loan applications. During the current month a fire occurred, and the accounting records for the department were mostly destroyed. The following data were salvaged from the ashes.
|
Standard variable overhead rate per hour
|
$9
|
|
Standard hours per application
|
2
|
|
Standard hours allowed
|
2,000
|
|
Standard fixed overhead rate per hour
|
$6
|
|
Actual fixed overhead cost
|
$13,200
|
|
Variable overhead budget based on standard hours allowed
|
$18,000
|
|
Fixed overhead budget
|
$13,200
|
|
Overhead controllable variance
|
$ 1,500 U
|
Instructions
(a) Determine the following.
(1) Total actual overhead cost.
(2) Actual variable overhead cost.
(3) Variable overhead cost applied.
(4) Fixed overhead cost applied.
(5) Overhead volume variance.
(b) Determine how many loans were processed.
rondello corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of pro 543257
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rondello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.
|
Direct materials—1 pound plastic at $7.00 per pound
|
$7.00
|
|
Direct labour—1.5 hours at $12.00 per hour
|
18
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
11.25
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
3.75
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
$40.00
|
The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $10 per direct labour hour ($15.00 _ 1.5). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 7,500 direct labour hours (5,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $56,250 ($7.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $18,750 ($2.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,900 units were as follows.
|
Direct materials (5,100 pounds)
|
$37,230
|
|
Direct labour (7,000 hours)
|
87,500
|
|
Variable overhead
|
56,170
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
19,680
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$200,580
|
The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.
Instructions
(a) Compute all of the materials and labour variances.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
martinez manufacturing corporation accumulates the following data relative 543258
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2A Martinez Manufacturing Corporation accumulates the following data relative to jobs started and finished during the month of June 2012.
|
Costs and Production Data
|
Actual
|
Standard
|
|
Raw materials unit cost
|
$2.25
|
$2.00
|
|
Raw materials units used
|
10,600
|
10,000
|
|
Direct labour payroll
|
$122,400
|
$120,000
|
|
Direct labour hours worked
|
14,400
|
15,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead incurred
|
$184,500
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
|
$189,000
|
|
Machine hours expected to be used at normal capacity
|
|
42,500
|
|
Budgeted fixed overhead for June
|
|
$51,000
|
|
Variable overhead rate per machine hour
|
|
$3.00
|
|
Fixed overhead rate per machine hour
|
|
$1.20
|
Overhead is applied on the basis of standard machine hours. Three hours of machine time are required for each direct labour hour. The jobs were sold for $400,000. Selling and administrative expenses were $40,000. Assume that the amount of raw materials purchased equaled the amount used.
Instructions
(a) Compute all of the variances for (1) direct materials and (2) direct labour.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
(c) Prepare an income statement for management. Ignore income taxes.
deskins clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall men s suits 543259
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deskins Clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall-men’s suits. The company has used a standard cost accounting system. In May 2012, 11,200 suits were produced. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of May when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labour hours. All materials purchased were used.
|
Cost Element
|
Standard (per unit)
|
Actual
|
|
Direct materials
|
8 yards at $4.30 per yard
|
$371,050 for 90,500 yards ($4.10 per yard)
|
|
Direct labour
|
1.2 hours at $13.50 per hour
|
$201,630 for 14,300 hours ($14.10 per hour)
|
|
Overhead
|
1.2 hours at $6.00 per hour
|
$49,000 fixed overhead
|
|
|
(fixed $3.50; variable $2.50)
|
$37,000 variable overhead
|
Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labour hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000, and budgeted variable overhead was $35,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labour.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
(c) Which of the materials and labour variances should be investigated if management considers a variance of more than 4% from standard to be significant?
korte corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of produc 543268
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Korte Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is as follows.
|
Direct materials—2 pounds of plastic at $5 per pound
|
$10
|
|
Direct labor—2 hours at $12 per hour
|
24
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
8
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
6
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
$48
|
The master manufacturing overhead budget for the month based on normal productive capacity of 20,000 direct labor hours (10,000 units) shows total variable costs of $80,000 ($4 per labor hour) and total fixed costs of $60,000 ($3 per labor hour). Normal productive capacity is 20,000 direct labor hours. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Actual costs for November in producing 9,700 units were as follows.
|
Direct materials (20,000 pounds)
|
$98,000
|
|
Direct labor (19,600 hours)
|
239,120
|
|
Variable overhead
|
79,100
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
59,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$475,220
|
The purchasing department normally buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.
Instructions
(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
vasquez manufacturing company uses a standard cost accounting system to account for 543269
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vasquez Manufacturing Company uses a standard cost accounting system to account for the manufacture of exhaust fans. In July 2012, it accumulates the following data relative to 1,800 units started and finished.
|
Cost and Production Data
|
Actual
|
Standard
|
|
Raw materials
|
|
|
|
Units purchased
|
21,000
|
|
|
Units used
|
21,000
|
22,000
|
|
Unit cost
|
$3.40
|
$3.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
Hours worked
|
3,450
|
3,600
|
|
Hourly rate
|
$11.80
|
$12.50
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
|
|
|
Incurred
|
$101,500
|
|
|
Applied
|
|
$108,000
|
Manufacturing overhead was applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Normal capacity for the month was 3,400 direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted overhead costs were $20 per labor hour variable and $10 per labor hour fixed. Total budgeted fixed overhead costs were $34,000. Jobs finished during the month were sold for $280,000. Selling and administrative expenses were $25,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute all of the variances for (1) direct materials and (2) direct labor.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
(c) Prepare an income statement for management. Ignore income taxes.
herzog clothiers manufactures women s business suits the company uses a 543270
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Herzog Clothiers manufactures women’s business suits. The company uses a standard cost accounting system. In March 2012, 15,700 suits were made. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of March when normal capacity was 20,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used in production.
|
Cost Element
|
Standard (per unit)
|
Actual
|
|
Direct materials
|
5 yards at $6.80 per yard
|
$547,200 for 76,000 yards ($7.20 per yard)
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.0 hours at $11.50 per hour
|
$166,880 for 14,900 hours ($11.20 per hour)
|
|
Overhead
|
1.0 hours at $9.30 per hour
|
$120,000 fixed overhead
|
|
|
(fixed $6.30; variable $3.00)
|
$49,000 variable overhead
|
Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $126,000, and budgeted variable overhead costs were $60,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labor.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
(c) Which of the materials and labor variances should be investigated if management considers a variance of more than 5% from standard to be significant?
crone labs performs steroid testing services to high schools colleges 543272
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crone Labs performs steroid testing services to high schools, colleges, and universities. Because the company deals solely with educational institutions, the price of each test is strictly regulated. Therefore, the costs incurred must be carefully monitored and controlled. Shown below are the standard costs for a typical test.
|
Direct materials (1 petri dish @ $2 per dish)
|
$2.00
|
|
Direct labor (0.5 hours @ $20 per hour)
|
10
|
|
Variable overhead (0.5 hours @ $8 per hour)
|
4
|
|
Fixed overhead (0.5 hours @ $4 per hour)
|
2
|
|
Total standard cost per test
|
$18.00
|
The lab does not maintain an inventory of petri dishes. Therefore, the dishes purchased each month are used that month. Actual activity for the month of May 2012, when 2,500 tests were conducted, resulted in the following.
|
Direct materials (2,530 dishes)
|
$5,313
|
|
Direct labor (1,240 hours)
|
26,040
|
|
Variable overhead
|
10,100
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
5,700
|
Monthly budgeted fixed overhead is $6,000. Revenues for the month were $58,000, and selling and administrative expenses were $2,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the price and quantity variances for direct materials and direct labor.
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
(c) Prepare an income statement for management.
(d) Provide possible explanations for each unfavorable variance.
glassmaster co is organized as two divisions and one subsidiary 543281
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glassmaster Co. is organized as two divisions and one subsidiary. One division focuses on the manufacture of filaments such as fishing line and sewing thread; the other division manufactures antennas and specialty fiberglass products. Its subsidiary manufactures flexible steel wire controls and molded control panels. The annual report of Glassmaster provides the following information.
|
GLASSMASTER COMPANY
Management Discussion
|
|
Gross profit margins for the year improved to 20.9% of sales compared to last year’s 18.5%. All operations reported improved margins due in large part to improved operating efficiencies as a result of cost reduction measures implemented during the second and third quarters of the fiscal year and increased manufacturing throughout due to higher unit volume sales. Contributing to the improved margins was a favorable materials price variance due to competitive pricing by suppliers as a result of soft demand for petrochemical-based products. This favorable variance is temporary and will begin to reverse itself as stronger worldwide demand for commodity products improves in tandem with the economy. Partially offsetting these positive effects on profit margins were competitive pressures on sales prices of certain product lines. The company responded with pricing strategies designed to maintain and/or increase market share.
|
Instructions
(a) Is it apparent from the information whether Glassmaster utilizes standard costs?
(b) Do you think the price variance experienced should lead to changes in standard costs for the next fiscal year?
winters inc has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps 543340
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Winters Inc. has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps. The company is currently operating at 100% of capacity. Variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the rate of 50% of direct labor cost. The direct materials and direct labor cost per unit to make the lamp shades are $4.00 and $6.00, respectively. Normal production is 40,000 table lamps per year. A supplier offers to make the lamp shades at a price of $13.50 per unit. If Winters Inc. accepts the supplier’s offer, all variable manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $40,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the lamp shades will have to be absorbed by other products.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy the lamp shades.
(b) Should Winters Inc. buy the lamp shades?
(c) Would your answer be different in (b) if the productive capacity released
by not making the lamp shades could be used to produce income of $35,000?
angie donohue recently opened her own basket weaving studio she sells finished baske 543341
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Angie Donohue recently opened her own basket weaving studio. She sells finished baskets in addition to the raw materials needed by customers to weave baskets of their own. Angie has put together a variety of raw material kits, each including materials at various stages of completion. Unfortunately, owing to space limitations, Angie is unable to carry all varieties of kits originally assembled and must choose between two basic packages. The basic introductory kit includes undyed, uncut reeds (with dye included) for weaving one basket. This basic package costs Angie $12 and sells for $27. The second kit, called Stage 2, includes cut reeds that have already been dyed. With this kit the customer need only soak the reeds and weave the basket. Angie is able to produce the second kit by using the basic materials included in the first kit and adding one hour of her own time (to produce two kits), which she values at $18 per hour. Because she is more efficient at cutting and dying reeds than her average customer, Angie is able to make two kits of the dyed reeds, in one hour, from one kit of undyed reeds. The kit of dyed and cut reeds sells for $33.
Instructions
Determine whether Angie’s basket weaving shop should carry the basic introductory kit with undyed and uncut reeds, or the Stage 2 kit with reeds already dyed and cut. Prepare an incremental analysis to support your answer.
brown enterprises uses a word processing computer to handle its sales invoices 543343
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brown Enterprises uses a word processing computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.
|
|
Current Machine
|
New Machine
|
|
Original purchase cost
|
$15,000
|
$21,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
6,000
|
—
|
|
Estimated operating costs
|
24,000
|
20,000
|
|
Useful life
|
5 years
|
5 years
|
If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.
Instructions
Should the current machine be replaced? (Ignore the time value of money.)
buford manufacturing company is considering three new projects 543348
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Buford Manufacturing Company is considering three new projects, each requiring an equipment investment of $22,000. Each project will last for 3 years and produce the following cash inflows.
|
Year
|
AA
|
BB
|
CC
|
|
1
|
$7,000
|
$9,500
|
$13,000
|
|
2
|
9,000
|
9,500
|
10,000
|
|
3
|
15,000
|
9,500
|
9,000
|
|
Total
|
$31,000
|
$28,500
|
$32,000
|
The equipment’s salvage value is zero. Buford uses straight-line depreciation. Buford will not accept any project with a payback period over 2 years. Buford’s minimum required rate of return is 12%.
Instructions
(a) Compute each project’s payback period, indicating the most desirable project and the least desirable project using this method. (Round to two decimals.)
(b) Compute the net present value of each project. Does your evaluation change? (Round to nearest dollar.)
house company is considering three capital expenditure projects 543350
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
House Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.
|
|
|
Annual
|
Life of
|
|
Project
|
Investment
|
Income
|
Project
|
|
22A
|
$240,000
|
$13,300
|
6 years
|
|
23A
|
270,000
|
21,000
|
9 years
|
|
24A
|
288,000
|
20,000
|
8 years
|
Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. House Company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.
Instructions
(a) Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.
(b) If House Company’s minimum required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?
pfeifer corporation is considering investing in two different projects 543351
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pfeifer Corporation is considering investing in two different projects. It could invest in both, neither, or just one of the projects. The forecasts for the projects are as follows.
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
Capital investment
|
$200,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Net annual cash flows
|
$50,000
|
$65,000
|
|
Length of project
|
5 years
|
7 years
|
The minimum rate of return acceptable to Pfeifer is 10%.
Instructions
(a) Compute the net present value of the two projects.
(b) What capital budgeting decision should Pfeifer make?
(c) Project A could be modified. By spending $20,000 more initially, the net annual cash flows could be increased by $10,000 per year. Would this change Pfeifer’s decision?
marin company is currently producing 16 000 units per month which is 80 543352
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1A Marin Company is currently producing 16,000 units per month, which is 80% of its production capacity. Variable manufacturing costs are currently $8.00 per unit. Fixed manufacturing costs are $56,000 per month. Marin pays a 9% sales commission to its sales people, has $30,000 in fixed administrative expenses per month, and is averaging $320,000 in sales per month. A special order received from a foreign company would enable Marin Company to operate at 100% capacity. The foreign company offered to pay 75% of Marin’s current selling price per unit. If the order is accepted, Marin will have to spend an extra $2.00 per unit to package the product for overseas shipping. Also, Marin Company would need to lease a new stamping machine to imprint the foreign company’s logo on the product, at a monthly cost of $2,500. The special order would require a sales commission of $3,500.
Instructions
(a) Compute the number of units involved in the special order and the foreign company’s offered price per unit.
(b) What is the manufacturing cost of producing one unit of Marin’s product for regular customers?
(c) Prepare an incremental analysis of the special order. Should management accept the order?
(d) What is the lowest price that Marin could accept for the special order to earn net income of $1.20 per unit?
(e) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?
sanchez corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals 543355
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sanchez Corporation is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Relevant data on each project are as follows.
|
|
Project
|
|
|
Brown
|
Red
|
Yellow
|
|
Capital investment
|
$190,000
|
$220,000
|
$250,000
|
|
Annual net income:
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
25,000
|
20,000
|
26,000
|
|
2
|
16,000
|
20,000
|
24,000
|
|
3
|
13,000
|
20,000
|
23,000
|
|
4
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
17,000
|
|
5
|
8,000
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Total
|
$72,000
|
$100,000
|
$110,000
|
Salvage value is expected to be zero at the end of each project. Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method. The company’s minimum rate of return is the company’s cost of capital which is 12%.
Instructions
(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)
(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)
(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)
(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?
stratton testing is considering investing in a new testing device it has two option 543357
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stratton Testing is considering investing in a new testing device. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 5 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were provided. The company’s cost of capital is 9%.
|
|
Option A
|
Option B
|
|
Initial cost
|
$90,000
|
$170,000
|
|
Net annual cash flows
|
$20,000
|
$32,000
|
|
Cost to rebuild (end of year 5)
|
$26,500
|
$0
|
|
Salvage value
|
$0
|
$27,500
|
|
Estimated useful life
|
8 years
|
8 years
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the (1) net present value, and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint: To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)
(b) Which option should be accepted?
sadler corporation is considering three long term capital investment proposals 543361
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sadler Corporation is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.
|
|
Project Ric
|
Project Rac
|
Project Roe
|
|
Capital investment
|
$140,000
|
$150,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Annual net income:
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
13,000
|
18,000
|
27,000
|
|
2
|
13,000
|
17,000
|
22,000
|
|
3
|
13,000
|
13,000
|
16,000
|
|
4
|
13,000
|
12,000
|
13,000
|
|
5
|
13,000
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
|
Total
|
$65,000
|
$69,000
|
$90,000
|
Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company’s cost of capital is 15%.
Instructions
(a) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to one decimal.)
(b) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)
(c) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)
(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?
paula woodward is the head of the information systems department at moreno manufactu 542878
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continuing Professional Education
Paula Woodward is the head of the Information Systems Department at Moreno Manufacturing Company. Roland Randolph, the company’s controller, is meeting with her to discuss changes in data gathering that relate to the company’s new flexible manufacturing system. Woodward opens the conversation by saying, “Roland, the old job order costing methods just will not work with the new flexible manufacturing system. The new system is based on continuous product flow, not batch processing. We need to change to a process costing system for both data gathering and product costing. Otherwise, our product costs will be way off, and it will affect our pricing decisions. I found out about the need for this change at a professional seminar I attended last month. You should have been there with me.” Randolph responds, “Paula, who is the accounting expert here? I know what product costing approach is best for this situation. Job order costing has provided accurate information for this product line for more than 15 years. Why should we change just because we’ve purchased a new machine? We’ve purchased several machines for this line over the years. And as for your seminar, I don’t need to learn about costing methods. I was exposed to them all when I studied management accounting back in the late 1970s.”
Is Randolph’s behavior ethical? If not, what has he done wrong? What can Woodward do if Randolph continues to refuse to update the product costing system?
ready tire corporation makes several lines of automobile and truck tires 542879
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Product Cost
Ready Tire Corporation makes several lines of automobile and truck tires. The company operates in a competitive marketplace, so it relies heavily on cost data from its FIFO-based process costing system. It uses that information to set prices for its most competitive tires. The company’s radial line has lost some of its market share during each of the past four years. Management believes that price breaks allowed by the company’s three biggest competitors are the main reason for the decline in sales.
The company controller, Sara Birdsong, has been asked to review the product costing information that supports pricing decisions on the radial line. In preparing her report, she collected the following data for last year, the most recent full year of operations:
|
|
|
Units
|
Dollars
|
|
Equivalent units
|
Direct materials
|
84,200
|
|
|
|
Conversion costs
|
82,800
|
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
|
$1,978,700
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
800,400
|
|
Unit cost data:
|
Conversion costs
|
1,600,800
|
|
Work in process inventory:
|
|
|
23.50
|
|
Beginning (70% complete)
|
|
4,200
|
29.00
|
|
Ending (30% complete)
|
|
3,800
|
|
Units started and completed last year totaled 80,400. Attached to the beginning Work in Process Inventory account were direct materials costs of $123,660 and conversion costs of $57,010. Birdsong found that little spoilage had occurred. The proper cost allowance for spoilage was included in the predetermined overhead rate of $2 per direct labor dollar. The review of direct labor cost revealed, however, that $90,500 had been charged twice to the production account, the second time in error. This resulted in overly high overhead costs being charged to the production account. The radial has been selling for $92 per tire. This price was based on last year’s unit data plus a 75 percent markup to cover operating costs and profit. The company’s three main competitors have been charging about $87 for a tire of comparable quality. The company’s process costing system adds all direct materials at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process.
1. Identify what inaccuracies in costs, inventories, and selling prices result from
the company’s cost-charging error.
2. Prepare a revised process cost report for last year. Round unit costs to two decimal places. Round total costs to whole dollars.
3. What should have been the minimum selling price per tire this year?
4. Suggest ways of preventing such errors in the future.
for the past four years three companies have dominated the soft drink industry holdi 542880
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Setting a Selling Price
For the past four years, three companies have dominated the soft drink industry, holding a combined 85 percent of market share. Wonder Cola, Inc., ranks second nationally in soft drink sales. Its management is thinking about introducing a new low-calorie drink called Null Cola. Wonder soft drinks are processed in a single department. All ingredients are added at the beginning of the process. At the end of the process, the beverage is poured into bottles that cost $0.24 per case produced. Direct labor and overhead costs are applied uniformly throughout the process. Corporate controller Adam Daneen believes that costs for the new cola will be very much like those for the company’s Cola Plus drink. Last year, he collected the following data about Cola Plus:
|
|
Units*
|
Costs
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
January 1†
|
2,200
|
|
|
Direct materials costs
|
|
|
|
Conversion costs
|
|
$ 2,080
|
|
December 31‡
|
2,000
|
620
|
|
Direct materials costs
|
|
1,880
|
|
Conversion costs
|
|
600
|
|
Units started during year
|
458,500
|
|
|
Costs for year
|
|
|
|
Liquid materials added
|
|
430,990
|
|
Direct labor and overhead
|
|
229,400
|
|
Bottles
|
110,068
|
The company’s variable general administrative and selling costs are $1.10 per unit. Fixed administrative and selling costs are assigned to products at the rate of $0.50 per unit. Each of Wonder Cola’s two main competitors is already marketing a diet cola. Company A’s product sells for $4.10 per unit; Company B’s, for $4.05. All costs are expected to increase by 10 percent in the next three years. Wonder Cola tries to earn a profit of at least 15 percent on the total unit cost.
1. What factors should Wonder Cola, Inc., consider in setting a unit selling price for a case of Null Cola?
2. Using the FIFO costing method, compute (a) equivalent units for direct materials, cases of bottles, and conversion costs; (b) the total production cost per unit; and (c) the total cost per unit of Cola Plus for the year.
3. What is the expected unit cost of Null Cola for the year?
4. Recommend a unit selling price range for Null Cola, and give the reason(s) for your choice.
you are the production manager for great grain corporation a manufacturer of four ce 542881
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the Process Costing System
You are the production manager for Great Grain Corporation, a manufacturer of four cereal products. The company’s best-selling product is Smackaroos, a sugar-coated puffed rice cereal. Yesterday, Clark Winslow, the controller, reported that the production cost for each box of Smackaroos has increased approximately 22 percent in the last four months. Because the company is unable to increase the selling price for a box of Smackaroos, the increased production costs will reduce profits significantly.
Today, you received a memo from Gilbert Rom, the company president, asking you to review your production process to identify inefficiencies or waste that can be eliminated. Once you have completed your analysis, you are to write a memo presenting your findings and suggesting ways to reduce or eliminate the problems. The president will use your information during a meeting with the top management team in ten days.
You are aware of previous problems in the Baking Department and the Packaging Department. Winslow has provided you with process cost reports for the two departments. He has also given you the following detailed summary of the cost per equivalent unit for a box of Smackaroos cereal:
|
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
July
|
|
Baking Department
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$1.25
|
$1.26
|
$1.24
|
$1.25
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.50
|
0.61
|
0.85
|
0.90
|
|
Overhead
|
0.25
|
0.31
|
0.34
|
0.40
|
|
Department totals
|
$2.00
|
$2.18
|
$2.43
|
$2.55
|
|
Packaging Department
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$0.35
|
$0.34
|
$0.33
|
$0.33
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.05
|
0.05
|
0.04
|
0.06
|
|
Overhead
|
0.10
|
0.16
|
0.15
|
0.12
|
|
Department totals
|
$0.50
|
$0.55
|
$0.52
|
$0.51
|
|
Total cost per equivalent unit
|
$2.50
|
$2.73
|
$2.95
|
$3.06
|
1. In preparation for writing your memo, answer the following questions: a. For whom are you preparing the memo? Does this affect the length of the memo? Explain.
b. Why are you preparing the memo?
c. What actions should you take to gather information for the memo? What information is needed? Is the information that Winslow provided sufficient for analysis and reporting?
d. When is the memo due? What can be done to provide accurate, reliable, and timely information?
2. Based on your analysis of the information that Winslow provided, where is the main problem in the production process?
3. Prepare an outline of the sections you would want in your memo.
the reports that follow are from a department in an insurance company 542893
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Reports
The reports that follow are from a department in an insurance company. Which report would be used for financial purposes, and which would be used for activity-based decision making? Why?
|
Salaries
|
$1,400
|
Enter claims into system
|
$2,000
|
|
Equipment
|
1,200
|
Analyze claims
|
1,000
|
|
Travel expenses
|
8,000
|
Suspend claims
|
1,500
|
|
Supplies
|
300
|
Receive inquiries
|
1,500
|
|
Use and occupancy
|
3,000
|
Resolve problems
|
400
|
|
|
|
Process batches
|
3,000
|
|
Determine eligibility
|
4,000
|
|
Make copies
|
200
|
|
Write correspondence
|
100
|
|
Attend training
|
200
|
|
Total
|
$13,900
|
Total
|
$13,900
|
libbel enterprises has been in business for 30 years 542895
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Value Analysis
Libbel Enterprises has been in business for 30 years. Last year, the company purchased Chemcraft Laboratory and entered the chemical processing business. Libbel’s controller prepared a process value analysis of the new operation and identified the following activities:
|
New product research
|
Product sales
|
Product bottling process
|
|
Design testing
|
Packaging process
|
Product warranty work
|
|
Materials storage
|
Materials inspection
|
Product engineering
|
|
Product curing
|
New product
|
Purchasing of direct
|
|
process
|
marketing
|
materials
|
|
Product scheduling
|
Product inspection
|
Finished goods storage
|
|
Product spoilage
|
Product delivery
|
Cleanup of processing areas
|
|
Customer follow-up
|
Materials delivery
|
Product mixing process
|
Identify the value-adding activities in this list, and classify them into the activity areas of the value chain. Prepare a separate list of the non-value-adding activities.
copia electronics makes speaker systems its customers range from new hotels and rest 542897
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cost Hierarchy
Copia Electronics makes speaker systems. Its customers range from new hotels and restaurants that need specifically designed sound systems to nationwide retail outlets that order large quantities of similar products. The following activities are part of the company’s operating process:
|
New retail product
|
Purchasing of
|
Assembly labor
|
|
design
|
materials
|
Assembly line setup
|
|
Retail product
|
Building repair
|
Building security
|
|
marketing
|
Retail sales commissions
|
Facility supervision
|
|
Unique system design
|
Bulk packing of
|
|
|
Unique system packaging
|
orders
|
Classify each activity as unit level (UL), batch level (BL), product level (PL), or facility level (FL).
lake corporation has received an order for handheld computers from union llc 542898
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bill of Activities
Lake Corporation has received an order for handheld computers from Union, LLC. A partially complete bill of activities for that order appears below. Fill in the missing data.
|
Activity
|
Activity Cost Rate
|
Cost Driver Level
|
Activity Cost
|
|
Unit level
|
|
|
|
|
Parts production
|
$50 per machine hour
|
200 machine hours
|
$ ?
|
|
Assembly
|
$20 per direct labor hour
|
100 direct labor hours
|
?
|
|
Packaging and shipping
|
$12.50 per unit
|
400 units
|
?
|
|
Batch level
|
|
|
|
|
Work cell setup
|
$100 per setup
|
16 setups
|
?
|
|
Product level
|
|
|
|
|
Product design
|
$60 per engineering hour
|
80 engineering hours
|
?
|
|
Product simulation
|
$80 per testing hour
|
30 testing hours
|
?
|
|
Facility level
|
|
|
|
|
Building occupancy
|
200% of assembly labor cost
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total activity costs
assigned to job
|
|
|
$ ?
|
|
Total job units
|
|
|
÷ 400
|
|
Activity costs per unit
(total activity costs÷ total units)
|
|
|
$ ?
|
|
Cost summary
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Purchased parts
|
|
|
80,000
|
|
Activity costs
|
|
|
?
|
|
Total cost of order
|
|
|
$ ?
|
|
Product unit cost (total cost ÷400 units)
|
|
|
$ ?
|
income statementangelo diaz has decided to go into business 542908
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Angelo Diaz has decided to go into business selling colourful scarves which are popular among university students. He will operate the business out of a flea market, mostly on weekends. He is trying to get himself organised for the start of the first quarter. In order to do so, he will have to prepare a few budgets. Use the follow?ing information to help him achieve his goal.
Angelo estimates expected sales for January to be £800, February £1200, March £2000 and April £3,000. Gross profit ratio is 0.4. Sixty percent of the next month’s sales should be kept in ending finished goods inventory.
Angelo has decided to pay himself a monthly salary of £150. He will pay his best friend £60 to help him with miscellaneous errands. He estimates that general operating costs will be £130 monthly. In addition, since his cousin is the owner of the flea market, he will only pay £100 per month in rent. Upgrading of the space will cost £500, of which £200 will be paid in January and £300 in February. All other costs must be paid for as incurred. He will begin January with £400 in the bank. Forty percent of sales are paid for in cash. The rest is put on credit: 5% of credit sales will not be received, 30% will be paid in the month of sale and 10% of those who pay in the month of sale will qualify for a 20% discount. Another 20% will be received the month following the sale and 5% the second month following the sale.
Thirty percent of the payments for merchandise are made in the month of purchase and the remaining 70% are made in the month following the purchase.
Interest is charged at a rate of 24% per year and payments of interest only are due at the end of each quarter. All loans are borrowed at the very beginning of the month and payments are made at the very end of the month. Angelo must maintain a minimum cash balance of £1,000.
Complete the following:
Help Angelo by completing the following:
- Prepare a schedule of cash receipts for the first quarter.
- Prepare a schedule of inventory purchases for the first quarter.
- Prepare a schedule of cash disbursements for the first quarter.
- Prepare a cash budget for January and February.
- How much interest is owed on February 28?
Hand-in Assignment Question
The income statement for ABC’s 2012 fiscal year is presented below. ABC manufactures one type of street lamp used on municipal roads.
| Sales |
2,400,000 |
| Variable cost of goods sold |
1,680,000 |
| Variable sales commissions |
120,000 |
| Contribution margin |
600,000 |
| Selling expense |
105,000 |
| Sales commissions expense |
48,000 |
| Administrative expense |
212,000 |
| Net income |
235,000 |
Variable costs per unit are £6.
Complete the following:
Please note:Round all answers to two decimal places.
- Calculate break-even in pounds.
- Calculate break-even in units.
- Calculate break-even in pounds if the sales price increases by 10% and fixed costs increase by £12,000.
- Calculate break-even in pounds if total sales increases by 10% and fixed costs increase by 10%.
- Calculate sales (in pounds) to achieve £600,000 after tax. (Note:Thetax rate is 40%.)
accounting 543009
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
our task is to prepare an income statement and a balance sheet ingood formatafter adjusting for the two errors below.
- A physical count of inventory indicates $70,500 on hand.
- There’s a check for $5,000 from a customer that has not been recorded in the working trial balance. The sale was never recorded in the first place, so the transaction relating to this sale is missing.
In addition:
- Describe the effect of the errors on the income statement and balance sheet.
- Is this company profitable? How do you determine whether or not this is the case?
- Is the company in a solid financial position? (Comment on balance sheet.)
cost accounting problems name type your name to sign date 543102
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I solemnly affirm that my answers to this examination/problem set are based on my solo effort. I understand that receiving or providing help from/to others or discussing the exam or comparing answers with others and reference to any material that is beyond what is permitted by the instructor is a violation of the University of Pittsburgh code of ethics.
Name: type your name to sign.
Date:
Problem 1
“Blast it!” said David Wilson, president of Teledex Company. “We’ve just lost the bid on the Koopers job by $2,000. It seems we’re either too high to get the job or too low to make any money on half the jobs we bid.”
Teledex Company manufactures products to customers’ specifications and operates a job-order costing system. Manufacturing overhead cost is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. The following estimates were made at the beginning of the year:
Department
_______________________________________________________________________
Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant
Direct labor $200,000 $100,000 $300,000 $600,000
Manufacturing overhead $350,000 $400,000 $ 90,000 $840,000
Jobs require varying amounts of work in the three departments. The Koopers job, for example, would have required manufacturing costs in the three departments as follows:
Department
______________________________________________________________________
Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant
Direct materials $3,000 $200 $1,400 $4,600
Direct labor $2,800 $500 $6,200 $9,500
Manufacturing overhead ? ? ? ?
The company uses a plantwide overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead cost to jobs.
REQUIRED:
1. Assuming use of a plantwide overhead rate:
a. Compute the rate for the current year.
b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the
Koopers job.
2. Suppose that instead of using a plantwide overhead rate, the company had used a separate
predetermined overhead rate in each department. Under these conditions:
a. Compute the rate for each department for the current year.
b. Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would have been applied to the
Koopers job.
3. Explain the difference between the manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to
the Koopers job using the plantwide rate in question 1 (b) above and using the departmental
rates in question 2 (b).
4. Assume that it is customary in the industry to bid jobs at 150% of total manufacturing cost
(direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead). What was the company’s bid price on
the Koopers job? What would the bid price have been if departmental overhead rates had been
used to apply overhead cost?
5. At the end of the year, the company assembled the following
actual cost data relating to all
jobs worked on during the year.
Department
_______________________________________________________________________
Fabricating Machining Assembly Total Plant
Direct materials $190,000 $ 16,000 $114,000 $320,000
Direct labor $210,000 $108,000 $262,000 $580,000
Manufacturing overhead $360,000 $420,000 $ 84,000 $864,000
Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for the year (a) assuming that a plantwide
overhead rate is used, and (b) assuming that departmental overhead rates are used.
Problem 2
Selected ledger accounts of Moore Company are given below for the just completed year:
Raw Materials Manufacturing Overhead
_________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________
Bal. 1/1 15,000 Credits ? Debits 230,000 Credits ?
Debits 120,000
————————————————————————————–
Bal. 12/31 25,000
Work in Process Factory Wages Payable
_________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
Bal. 1/1 20,000 Credits 470,000 Debits 185,000 Bal. 1/1 9,000
Direct materials 90,000 Credits 180,000
Direct labor 150,000 ————————————————————————————-
Overhead 240,000 Bal. 12/31 4,000
——————————————————–
Bal. 12/31 ?
Finished Goods Cost of Goods Sold
________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
Bal. l/1 40,000 Credits ? Debits ?
Debits ?
————————————————————————————
Bal. 12/31 60,000
REQUIRED:
1. What was the cost of raw materials put into production during the year?
2. How much of the materials in (1) above consisted of indirect materials?
3. How much of the factory labor cost for the year consisted of indirect labor?
4. What was the cost of goods manufactured for the year?
5. What was the cost of goods sold for the year (before considering under- or overapplied
overhead)?
6. If overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor cost, what rate was in effect
during the year?
7. Was manufacturing overhead under- or overapplied? By how much?
8. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process inventory account. Assume that this
balance consists entirely of goods started during the year. If $8,000 of this balance is direct
labor cost, how much of it is direct materials cost? Manufacturing overhead cost?
Problem 3
Neptune Company produces toys and other items for use in beach and resort areas. A small, inflatable toy has come onto the market that the company is anxious to produce and sell. The new toy will sell for $3 per unit. Enough capacity exists in the company’s plant to produce 16,000 units of the toy each month. Variable costs to manufacture and sell one unit would be $1.25, and fixed costs associated with the toy would total $35,000 per month.
The company’s Marketing Department predicts that demand for the new toy will exceed the 16,000 units that the company is able to produce. Additional manufacturing space can be rented from another company at a fixed cost of $1,000 per month. Variable costs in the rented facility would total $1.40 per unit, due to somewhat less efficient operations than in the main plant.
REQUIRED:
1. Compute the monthly break-even point for the new toy in units and in total sales dollars.
Show all computations in good form.
2. How many units must be sold each month to make a monthly profit of $12,000?
3. If the sales manager receives a bonus of 10 cents for each unit sold in excess of the break-
even point, how many units must be sold each month to earn a return of 25% on the monthly
investment in fixed costs?
Problem 4
Consider the decision by National Airlines, Inc. regarding the number of flights to operate per day on the air shuttle route between New York and Boston. Its advertising, personnel, and other expenditures to support the operation in New York and Boston amount to $24,000 per day. Flying crew, fuel, and other flight-related expenditures amount to $3,000 per round-trip flight. Landing and airport gate fees are $1,800 per round-trip flight. In addition, ground support personnel cost $2,000 per round-trip flight as company policy seeks to maintain quality service even as volume increases. National pays a commission of 5% to travel agents on a round-trip fare of $200 per passenger. A full flight carries 100 passengers.
- How many flights in a day must National Airlines operate to make 25% profit margin if it expects the average load factor (number of passengers to the seating capacity) to be 70% per flight?
- Suppose the load factor for National Airlines is not expected to equal 70% for each flight. Instead, the load factor is expected to be 90% for the first round-trip flight of the day and is expected to decline by 10% for each additional round-trip flight introduced in the same day. How many round-trip flights per day should National Airlines operate to maximize profit?
Hint: This problem is analogous to a bank/retailer deciding on the number of branches/stores in a geographical area. You need to think about how total revenue, total costs and profits change with the addition of flights. You can either use Excel to create a scenario analysis or use the incremental cost versus incremental revenue approach or formulate this as a profit maximization problem and solve for the optimum.
Problem 5
Gallatin Carpet Cleaning is a small, family-owned business operating out of Bozeman, Montana. For its services, the company has always charged a flat fee per hundred square feet of carpet cleaned. The current fee is $28 per hundred square feet. However, there is some question about whether the company is actually making any money on jobs for some customers—particularly those located on remote ranches that require considerable travel time. The owner’s daughter, home for the summer from college, has suggested investigating this question using activity-based costing. After some discussion, a simple system consisting of four activity cost pools seemed to be adequate. The activity cost pools and their activity measures appear below:
Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Activity for the Year
Cleaning carpets Square feet cleaned (00s) 20,000 hundred square feet
Travel to jobs Miles driven 60,000 miles
Job support Number of jobs 2,000 jobs
Other (costs of idle capacity and
organization-sustaining costs) None Not applicable
The total cost of operating the company for the year is $430,000, which includes the following costs:
Wages $150,000
Cleaning supplies 40,000
Cleaning equipment depreciation 20,000
Vehicle expenses 80,000
Office expenses 60,000
President’s compensation 80,000
Total cost $430,000
Resource consumption is distributed across the activities as follows:
Distribution of Resource Consumption Across Activities
Cleaning Travel Job
Carpets to Jobs Support Other Total
Wages 70% 20% 0% 10% 100%
Cleaning supplies 100% 0% 0% 0% 100%
Cleaning equipment depreciation 80% 0% 0% 20% 100%
Vehicle expenses 0% 60% 0% 40% 100%
Office expenses 0% 0% 45% 55% 100%
President’s compensation 0% 0% 40% 60% 100%
Job support consists of receiving calls from potential customers at the home office, scheduling jobs, billing, resolving issues, and so on.
REQUIRED:
1. Prepare the first-stage allocation of costs to the activity cost pools.
2. Compute the activity rates for the activity cost pools.
3. The company recently completed a 5 hundred square foot carpet-cleaning job at the Flying N
ranch—a 75-mile round-trip journey from the company’s offices in Bozeman. Compute the
cost of this job using the activity-based costing system.
4. The revenue from the Flying N ranch was $140 (5 hundred square feet @ $28 per hundred
square feet). Prepare a report showing the margin from this job.
5. What do you conclude concerning the profitability of the Flying N ranch job? Explain.
6. What advice would you give the president concerning pricing jobs in the future?
Problem 6 Barney Toy Company manufactures large and small stuffed animals. It has a long-term contract with a large chain of discount stores to sell 3000 large and 6000 small stuffed animals each month. The following cost information is available for large and small stuffed animals: Item Large Small Price per unit $32 $21
Variable costs per units:
Direct material $12 $10
Direct labor 6 3
Support 2 1
Fixed mfg. costs per unit 3 3
Fixed S&A cost per unit 4 6
Total unit costs $27 $23
Total monthly demand
(inclusive of long-term contract) 15,000 25,000
Production occurs in batches of 100 large or 200 small stuffed animals. Each batch takes a total of 100 labor hours to manufacture. The monthly capacity of 30,000 labor hours cannot be increased for at least a year.
Required
- Determine which size is more profitable to produce. How many units should Barney produce of each size?
Because of an unexpected high demand for stuffed dinosaurs, the discount store chain has requested an additional order of 5000 large stuffed dinosaurs. It is willing to pay $37 for this special order.
b. What is the opportunity cost for this special order? Should the order be accepted? Show calculations and explain.
c. Now assume that the company can increase the capacity by making its employees work overtime. What is the maximum overtime premium that can be paid to the workers if the special order is accepted.
feldkamp services inc is trying to establish the standard labour cost of a typical o 543237
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feldkamp Services, Inc. is trying to establish the standard labour cost of a typical oil change. The following data have been collected from time and motion studies conducted over the past month.
|
Actual time spent on the oil change
|
1.0 hour
|
|
Hourly wage rate
|
$10
|
|
Payroll taxes
|
10% of wage rate
|
|
Setup and downtime
|
10% of actual labour time
|
|
Cleanup and rest periods
|
30% of actual labour time
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
25% of wage rate
|
Instructions
(a) Determine the standard direct labour hours per oil change.
(b) Determine the standard direct labour hourly rate.
(c) Determine the standard direct labour cost per oil change.
(d) If an oil change took 1.5 hours at the standard hourly rate, what was the direct labour quantity variance?
compute the total price and quantity variances for materials and labour 543241
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following direct materials and direct labour data pertain to the operations of Engles Manufacturing Company for the month of August.
|
Costs
|
Quantities
|
|
Actual labour rate
|
$13 per hour
|
Actual hours incurred and used
|
4,200 hours
|
|
Actual materials price
|
$128 per ton
|
Actual quantity of materials purchased and used
|
1,225 tons
|
|
Standard labour rate
|
$12 per hour
|
Standard hours used
|
4,300 hours
|
|
Standard materials price
|
$130 per ton
|
Standard quantity of materials used
|
1,200 tons
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labour.
(b) Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.
how many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period 543242
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been given the following information about the production of Adler Co., and are asked to provide the plant manager with information for a meeting with the vice president of operations.
|
|
Standard Cost Card
|
|
Direct materials (6 pounds at $3 per pound)
|
$18.00
|
|
Direct labour (0.8 hours at $5)
|
4
|
|
Variable overhead (0.8 hours at $3 per hour)
|
2.4
|
|
Fixed overhead (0.8 hours at $7 per hour)
|
5.6
|
|
|
$30.00
|
The following is a variance report for the most recent period of operations.
|
|
|
Variances
|
|
Costs
|
Total Standard Cost
|
Price
|
Quantity
|
|
Direct materials
|
$405,000
|
$6,900 F
|
$9,000 U
|
|
Direct labour
|
90,000
|
4,850 U
|
7,000 U
|
Instructions
(a) How many units were produced during the period?
(b) How many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period?
(c) What was the actual cost per pound of raw materials?
(d) How many actual direct labour hours were worked during the period?
(e) What was the actual rate paid per direct labour hour?
during march 2012 mcguire tool amp die company worked on four jobs a review of direc 543243
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During March 2012, McGuire Tool & Die Company worked on four jobs. A review of direct labour costs reveals the following summary data.
|
|
Actual
|
Standard
|
|
|
Job Number
|
Hours
|
Costs
|
Hours
|
Costs
|
Total Variance
|
|
A257
|
220
|
$4,400
|
225
|
$4,500
|
$ 100 F
|
|
A258
|
450
|
9,900
|
430
|
8,600
|
1,300 U
|
|
A259
|
300
|
6,150
|
300
|
6,000
|
150 U
|
|
A260
|
115
|
2,070
|
110
|
2,200
|
130 F
|
|
Total variance
|
|
|
|
|
$1,220 U
|
Analysis reveals that Job A257 was a repeat job. Job A258 was a rush order that required overtime work at premium rates of pay. Job A259 required a more experienced replacement worker on one shift. Work on Job A260 was done for one day by a new trainee when a regular worker was absent.
Instructions
Prepare a report for the plant supervisor on direct labour cost variances for March. The report should have columns for (1) Job No., (2) Actual Hours, (3) Standard Hours, (4) Quantity Variance, (5) Actual Rate, (6) Standard Rate, (7) Price Variance, and (8) Explanation.
horak company produces one product a putter called go putter horak uses a standard c 543245
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horak Company produces one product, a putter called GO-Putter. Horak uses a standard cost system and determines that it should take one hour of direct labour to produce one GO-Putter. The normal production capacity for this putter is 100,000 units per year. The total budgeted overhead at normal capacity is $800,000 comprised of $200,000 of variable costs and $600,000 of fixed costs. Horak applies overhead on the basis of direct labour hours. During the current year, Horak produced 90,000 putters, worked 94,000 direct labour hours, and incurred variable overhead costs of $186,000 and fixed overhead costs of $600,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the predetermined variable overhead rate and the predetermined fixed overhead rate.
(b) Compute the applied overhead for Horak for the year.
(c) Compute the total overhead variance.
shatner landscaping plants grass seed as the basic landscaping for business campuses 543247
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shatner Landscaping plants grass seed as the basic landscaping for business campuses. During a recent month the company worked on three projects (Remington, Chang, and Wyco). The company is interested in controlling the material costs, namely the grass seed, for these plantings projects. In order to provide management with useful cost control information, the company uses standard costs and prepares monthly variance reports. Analysis reveals that the purchasing agent mistakenly purchased poor-quality seed for the Remington project. The Chang project, however, received higher-than standard-quality seed that was on sale. The Wyco project received standard-quality seed; however, the price had increased and a new employee was used to spread the seed.
Shown below are quantity and cost data for each project.
|
|
Actual
|
Standard
|
|
|
Project
|
Quantity
|
Costs
|
Quantity
|
Costs
|
Total Variance
|
|
Remington
|
500 lbs.
|
$1,175
|
460 lbs.
|
$1,150
|
$ 25 U
|
|
Chang
|
400
|
960
|
410
|
1,025
|
65 F
|
|
Wyco
|
500
|
1,300
|
480
|
1,200
|
100 U
|
|
Total variance
|
|
|
|
|
$ 60 U
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a variance report for the purchasing department with the following columns:
(1) Project, (2) Actual pounds purchased, (3) Actual price, (4) Standard price, (5) Price variance, and (6) Explanation.
(b) Prepare a variance report for the production department with the following columns:
(1) Project, (2) Actual pounds, (3) Standard pounds, (4) Standard price, (5) Quantity variance, and (6) Explanation.
barney corporation prepared the following variance report 543248
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barney Corporation prepared the following variance report.
|
BARNEY CORPORATION Variance Report—Purchasing Department For the Week Ended January 9, 2013
|
|
Type of
|
Quantity
|
Actual
|
Standard
|
Price
|
|
|
Materials
|
Purchased
|
Price
|
Price
|
Variance
|
Explanation
|
|
Rogue11
|
? lbs.
|
$5.20
|
$5.00
|
$5,200 ?
|
Price increase
|
|
Storm17
|
7,000 oz.
|
?
|
3.25
|
1,050 U
|
Rush order
|
|
Beast29
|
22,000 units
|
0.45
|
?
|
440 F
|
Bought larger quantity
|
Instructions
Fill in the appropriate amounts or letters for the question marks in the report.
carlton company uses a standard cost accounting system during january the company re 543249
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carlton Company uses a standard cost accounting system. During January, the company reported the following manufacturing variances.
|
Materials price variance
|
$1,250 U
|
Labour quantity variance
|
$725 U
|
|
Materials quantity variance
|
700 F
|
Overhead variance
|
800 U
|
|
Labour price variance
|
525 U
|
|
|
In addition, 8,000 units of product were sold at $8.00 per unit. Each unit sold had a standard cost of $6.00. Selling and administrative expenses were $6,000 for the month.
Instructions
Prepare an income statement for management for the month ended January 31, 2012.
the following is a list of terms related to performance evaluation 543250
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is a list of terms related to performance evaluation.
(1) Balanced scorecard
(2) Variance
(3) Learning and growth perspective
(4) Nonfinancial measures
(5) Customer perspective
(6) Internal process perspective
(7) Ideal standards
(8) Normal standards
Instructions
Match each of the following descriptions with one of the terms above.
(a) The difference between total actual costs and total standard costs.
(b) An efficient level of performance that is attainable under expected operating conditions.
(c) An approach that incorporates financial and nonfinancial measures in an integrated system that links performance measurement and a company’s strategic goals.
(d) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate how well a company develops and retains its employees.
(e) An evaluation tool that is not based on dollars.
(f) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the company from the perspective of those people who buy and use its products or services.
(g) An optimum level of performance under perfect operating conditions.
(h) A viewpoint employed in the balanced scorecard to evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness of the company’s value chain.
jordan smith the president of eagle manufacturing wants to improve the quality of th 542836
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product Costing Systems and Nonfinancial Data
Jordan Smith, the president of Eagle Manufacturing, wants to improve the quality of the company’s operations and products. She believes waste exists in the design and manufacture of standard engine parts. To begin the improvement process, she has asked you to (1) identify the sources of such waste, (2) develop performance measures to account for the waste, and (3) estimate the current costs associated with the waste. She has asked you to submit a memo of your findings within two weeks so that she can begin strategic planning to revise the price at which Eagle sells engine parts to Cherokee.
You have identified two sources of costly waste. The Production Department is redoing work that was not done correctly the first time, and the Engineering Design Department is redesigning products that were not initially designed to customer specifications. Having improper designs has caused the company to buy parts that are not used in production. You have also obtained the following information from the product costing system:
|
Direct labor costs
|
$673,402
|
|
Engineering design costs
|
124,709
|
|
Indirect labor costs
|
67,200
|
|
Depreciation on production equipment
|
84,300
|
|
Supervisors’ salaries
|
98,340
|
|
Direct materials costs
|
432,223
|
|
Indirect materials costs
|
44,332
|
1. In preparation for writing your memo, answer the following questions: a. For whom are you preparing the memo? What is the appropriate length of the memo?
b. Why are you preparing the memo?
c. What information is needed for the memo? Where can you get this information? What performance measure would you suggest for each activity? Is the accounting information sufficient for your memo?
d. When is the memo due? What can be done to provide accurate and timely information?
2. Prepare an outline of the sections you would want to include in your memo.
kevin rogers the production manager of stitts metal products company entered the off 542838
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Costing Procedures and Ethics
Kevin Rogers, the production manager of Stitts Metal Products Company, entered the office of controller Ed Harris and asked, “Ed, what gives here? I was charged for 330 direct labor hours on Job AD22, and my records show that we spent only 290 hours on that job. That 40-hour difference caused the total cost of direct labor and overhead for the job to increase by over $5,500. Are my records wrong, or was there an error in the direct labor assigned to the job?”
Harris replied, “Don’t worry about it, Kevin. This job won’t be used in your quarterly performance evaluation. Job AD22 was a federal government job, a cost-plus contract, so the more costs we assign to it, the more profit we make. We decided to add a few hours to the job in case there is some follow-up work to do. You know how fussy the feds are.” What should Kevin Rogers do? Discuss Ed Harris’s costing procedure.
software development companies frequently have a problem 542839
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Role of Cost Information in Software Development
Software development companies frequently have a problem: When is “good enough” good enough? How many hours should be devoted to developing a new product? The industry’s rule of thumb is that developing and shipping new software takes six to nine months. To be the first to market, a company must develop and ship products much more quickly than the industry norm. One performance measure that is used to answer the “good enough” question is a calculation based on the economic value (not cost) of what a company’s developers create. The computation takes the estimated current market valuation of a firm and divides it by the number of product developers in the firm, to arrive at the market value created per developer. Some companies refine this calculation further to determine the value that each developer creates per workday. One company has estimated this value to be $10,000. Thus, for one software development company, “good enough” focuses on whether a new product’s potential justifies an investment of time by someone who is worth $10,000 per day.
The salary cost of the company’s developers is not used in the “good enough” calculation. Why is that cost not relevant?
your team selected a cookie recipe for your company 542840
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company (Continuing Case)
your team selected a cookie recipe for your company. In this chapter, your team will use that recipe to bake a batch of cookies, collect cost and time performance data related to the baking, create a marketing display for your company, and vote for the class’s favorite cookie during an in-class cookie taste test. The goal of the taste test is to have your team’s product voted the “best in class.” One rule of the contest is that you may not vote for your own team’s product.
1.Design a job measurement document that includes at least the following measures: cost per cookie; number of cookies produced (= number meeting specs + number rejected+ number sampled for quality control +unexplained differences); size of cookies before baking; size of cookies after baking; and total throughput time (=mix time + [bake time for one cookie sheet ×number of cookie sheets processed] + packaging time +downtime +cleanup time).
2. Design a job order cost card for your company that resembles one of those displayed in this chapter.
3. Using the recipe your team selected and assigning duties as described in the last chapter, bake a batch of cookies, and complete the job measurement document and job order cost card.
• Assume an overhead rate of $2 for every $1 of direct material cost.
• Assign direct labor cost for each production task based on the hourly rate or a monthly salary previously determined by your team.
4. Create a marketing display for your cookie product, and bring it to class on the day of the taste test. The marketing display should include 20 cookies on a plate or napkin and a poster that displays your company’s name and mission statement, cookie recipe, job measurement document, and job order cost card.
5. During class, each student should look at all the marketing displays, taste 2 or 3 cookies and, on a ballot provided by your instructor, rank taste test results by giving 1 to the best cookie tasted, 2 to the next best, and so on. Students must sign their ballots before they turn them in to the instructor. (Remember, you cannot cast a vote for your own team’s entry.) Your instructor will tabulate the ballots and announce the winning team.
blue blaze adds direct materials at the beginning of its production process and adds 542844
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Equivalent Production: FIFO Costing Method
Blue Blaze adds direct materials at the beginning of its production process and adds conversion costs uniformly throughout the process. Given the following information from Blue Blaze’s records for July and using Steps 1 and 2 of the FIFO costing method, compute the equivalent units of production:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
3,000
|
|
Units started during the period
|
17,000
|
|
Units partially completed
|
2,500
|
|
Percentage of completion of ending
|
100% for direct materials;
|
|
work in process inventory
|
70% for conversion costs
|
|
Percentage of completion of beginning
|
100% for direct materials;
|
|
inventory
|
40% for conversion costs
|
tom rsquo s bakery makes a variety of cakes cookies and pies for distribution to fiv 542852
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use of Process Costing Information
Tom’s Bakery makes a variety of cakes, cookies, and pies for distribution to five major chains of grocery stores in the area. The company uses a standard manufacturing process for all items except special-order cakes. It currently uses a process costing system. Tom, the owner of the company, has some urgent questions, which are listed at the top of the next page. Which of these questions can be answered using information from a process costing system? Which can be best answered using information from a job order costing system? Explain your answers.
1. How much does it cost to make one chocolate cheesecake?
2. Did the cost of making special-order cakes exceed the cost budgeted for this month?
3. What is the value of the pie inventory at the end of June?
4. What were the costs of the cookies sold during June?
5. At what price should Tom’s Bakery sell its famous brownies to the grocery store chains?
6. Were the planned production costs of $3,000 for making pies in June exceeded?
gilbert inc which uses a process costing system makes a chemical used as a food pres 542853
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Work in Process Inventory Accounts in Process Costing Systems
Gilbert, Inc., which uses a process costing system, makes a chemical used as a food preservative. The manufacturing process involves Departments A and B. The company had the following total costs and unit costs for completed production last month, when it manufactured 10,000 pounds of the chemical. Neither Department A nor Department B had any beginning or ending work in process inventories.
|
|
Total Cost
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Department A
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$10,000
|
$1.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
2,600
|
0.26
|
|
Overhead
|
1,300
|
0.13
|
|
Total costs
|
$13,900
|
$1.39
|
|
Department B
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 3,000
|
$0.30
|
|
Direct labor
|
700
|
0.07
|
|
Overhead
|
1,000
|
0.10
|
|
Total costs
|
$ 4,700
|
$0.47
|
|
Totals
|
$18,600
|
$1.86
|
1. How many Work in Process Inventory accounts would Gilbert use?
2. What dollar amount of the chemical’s production cost was transferred from Department A to Department B last month?
3. What dollar amount was transferred from Department B to the Finished Goods Inventory account?
4. What dollar amount is useful in determining a selling price for 1 pound of the chemical?
mcquary stone company produces bricks 542854
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Equivalent Production: FIFO Costing Method
McQuary Stone Company produces bricks. Although the company has been in operation for only 12 months, it already enjoys a good reputation. During its first 12 months, it put 600,000 bricks into production and completed and transferred 586,000 bricks to finished goods inventory. The remaining bricks were still in process at the end of the year and were 60 percent complete.
The company’s process costing system adds all direct materials costs at the beginning of the production process; conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. From this information, compute the equivalent units of production for direct materials and conversion costs for the company’s first year, which ended December 31. Use the FIFO costing method.
the bakery produces tea cakes it uses a process costing system 542859
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assigning Costs: FIFO Costing Method
The Bakery produces tea cakes. It uses a process costing system. In March, its beginning inventory was 450 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 10 percent complete for conversion costs. The cost of beginning inventory was $655. Units started and completed during the month totaled 14,200. Ending inventory was 410 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs per equivalent unit for March were $1.40 for direct materials costs and $0.80 for conversion costs.
From this information, compute the cost of goods transferred to the Finished Goods Inventory account, the cost remaining in the Work in Process Inventory account, and the total costs to be accounted for. Use the FIFO costing method.
toy country corporation produces children rsquo s toys using a liquid plastic formul 542860
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Cost Report: FIFO Costing Method
Toy Country Corporation produces children’s toys using a liquid plastic formula and a continuous production process. In the company’s toy truck work cell, the plastic is heated and fed into a molding machine. The molded toys are then cooled and trimmed and sent to the packaging work cell. All direct material are added at the beginning of the process. In November, the beginning work in process inventory was 420 units, which were 40 percent complete; the ending balance was 400 units, which were 70 percent complete.
During November, 15,000 units were started into production. The Work in Process Inventory account had a beginning balance of $937 for direct materials costs and $370 for conversion costs. In the course of the month, $35,300 of direct materials were added to the process, and $31,760 of conversion costs were assigned to the work cell. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report that computes the equivalent units for November, the product unit cost for the toys, and the ending balance in the Work in Process Inventory account.
lightning industries specializes in making flash a high moisture low alkaline wax us 542866
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: FIFO Costing and Average Costing Methods
Lightning Industries specializes in making Flash, a high-moisture, low-alkaline wax used to protect and preserve skis. The company began producing a new, improved brand of Flash on January 1. Materials are introduced at the beginning of the production process. During January, 15,300 pounds were used at a cost of $46,665. Direct labor of $17,136 and overhead costs of $25,704 were incurred uniformly throughout the month. By January 31, 13,600 pounds of Flash had been completed and transferred to the finished goods inventory (1 pound of input equals 1 pound of output). Since no spoilage occurred, the leftover materials remained in production and were 40 percent complete on average.
Required
1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for January.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 using the average costing method.
liquid extracts company produces a line of fruit extracts for home use in making win 542867
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: FIFO Costing Method
Liquid Extracts Company produces a line of fruit extracts for home use in making wine, jams and jellies, pies, and meat sauces. Fruits enter the production process in pounds; the product emerges in quarts (1 pound of input equals 1 quart of output). On May 31, 4,250 units were in process. All direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Direct materials costs of $4,607 and conversion costs of $3,535 were attached to the units in beginning work in process inventory. During June, 61,300 pounds of fruit were added at a cost of $71,108. Direct labor for the month totaled $19,760, and overhead costs applied were $31,375. On June 30, 3,400 units remained in process. All direct materials for these units had been added, and 50 percent of conversion costs had been incurred.
Required
1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for June.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
lid corporation produces a line of beverage lids 542869
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method and Two Time Periods
Lid Corporation produces a line of beverage lids. The production process has been automated, so the product can now be produced in one operation rather than in the three operations that were needed before the company purchased the automated machinery. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. Operating data for May and June are as follows:
|
|
May
|
June
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (May: 40% complete)
|
220,000
|
?
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 3,440
|
$ 400
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$ 6,480
|
$ 420
|
|
Production during the month
|
|
|
|
Units started
|
24,000,000
|
31,000,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
$45,000
|
$93,200
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$66,000
|
$92,796
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (May: 70% complete; June:
|
|
|
|
60% complete)
|
200,000
|
320,000
|
1. Using the average costing method, prepare process cost reports for May and June. (Round unit costs to three decimal places; round all other costs to the nearest dollar.)
2. From the information in the process cost report for May, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
3. Compare the product costing results for June with the results for May. What is the most significant change? What are some of the possible causes of this change?
hurricane products inc makes high vitamin calorie packed wafers that are popular amo 542870
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method
Hurricane Products, Inc., makes high-vitamin, calorie-packed wafers that are popular among professional athletes because they supply quick energy. The company produces the wafers in a continuous flow, and it uses a process costing system based on the average costing method. It recently purchased several automated machines so that the wafers can be produced in a single department. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. The costs for the machine operators’ labor and production-related overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process. In February, the company put a total of 231,200 liters of direct materials into production at a cost of $294,780. Two liters of direct materials were used to produce one unit of output (one unit 144 wafers). Direct labor costs for February were $60,530, and overhead was $181,590. The beginning work in process inventory for February was 14,000 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials and 20 percent complete for conversion costs. The total cost of those units was $55,000, $48,660 of which was assigned to the cost of direct materials. The ending work in process inventory of 12,000 units was fully complete for direct materials but only 30 percent complete for conversion costs.
Required
1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for February.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
the company produces the wafers in a continuous flow and it uses a process costing s 542871
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method
Hurricane Products, Inc., makes high-vitamin, calorie-packed wafers that are popular among professional athletes because they supply quick energy. The company produces the wafers in a continuous flow, and it uses a process costing system based on the average costing method. It recently purchased several automated machines so that the wafers can be produced in a single department. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. The costs for the machine operators’ labor and production-related overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process. In February, the company put a total of 231,200 liters of direct materials into production at a cost of $294,780. Two liters of direct materials were used to produce one unit of output (one unit 144 wafers). Direct labor costs for February were $60,530, and overhead was $181,590. The beginning work in process inventory for February was 14,000 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials and 20 percent complete for conversion costs. The total cost of those units was $55,000, $48,660 of which was assigned to the cost of direct materials. The ending work in process inventory of 12,000 units was fully complete for direct materials but only 30 percent complete for conversion costs.
Required
1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for February.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
sunshine soda company manufactures and sells several different kinds of soft drinks 542872
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: FIFO Costing and Average Costing Methods
Sunshine Soda Company manufactures and sells several different kinds of soft drinks. Direct materials (sugar syrup and artificial flavor) are added at the beginning of production in the Mixing Department. Direct labor and overhead costs are applied to products throughout the process. For August, beginning inventory for the citrus flavor was 2,400 gallons, 80 percent complete. Ending inventory was 3,600 gallons, 50 percent complete. Production data show 240,000 gallons started during August. A total of 238,800 gallons was completed and transferred to the Bottling Department. Beginning inventory costs were $600 for direct materials and $676 for conversion costs. Current period costs were $57,600 for direct materials and $83,538 for conversion costs.
Required
1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing Department for August.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 using the average costing method.
canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by good foods inc 542873
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: FIFO Costing Method
Canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by Good Foods, Inc. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the Mixing Department’s process. When the ingredients have been mixed, they go to the Cooking Department. There the mixture is heated to 100° Celsius and simmered for 20 minutes. When cooled, the mixture goes to the Canning Department for final processing. Throughout the operations, direct labor and overhead costs are incurred uniformly. No direct materials are added in the Cooking Department. Cost data and other information for the Mixing Department for January are as follows:
|
|
Direct Materials
|
Conversion Costs
|
|
Production Cost Data
|
|
Mixing Department
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 28,560
|
$ 5,230
|
|
Current period costs
|
450,000
|
181,200
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
|
|
|
Mixing Department (40% complete)
|
5,000 liters
|
|
|
Ending inventory
|
|
|
Mixing Department (60% complete)
|
6,000 liters
|
|
|
Unit production data
|
|
|
Units started during January
|
90,000 liters
|
|
|
Units transferred out during January
|
89,000 liters
|
|
Assume that no spoilage or evaporation loss took place during January.
Required
1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing Department for January.
2. Explain how the analysis for the Cooking Department will differ from the analysis for the Mixing Department.
honey dews company produces organic honey which it sells to health food stores and r 542874
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: One Process and Two Time Periods—FIFO Costing Method
Honey Dews Company produces organic honey, which it sells to health food stores and restaurants. The company owns thousands of beehives. No direct materials other than honey are used. The production operation is a simple one. Impure honey is added at the beginning of the process and flows through a series of filterings, leading to a pure finished product. Costs of labor and overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the filtering process. Production data for April and May are as follows:
|
|
April
|
May
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (liters)
|
7,100
|
12,400
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 2,480
|
?*
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$ 5,110
|
?*
|
|
Production during the period
|
|
|
|
Units started (liters)
|
288,000
|
310,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
$100,800
|
$117,800
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$251,550
|
$277,281
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (liters)
|
12,400
|
16,900
|
The beginning work in process inventory for April was 80 percent complete for conversion costs, and ending work in process inventory was 20 percent complete. The ending work in process inventory for May was 30 percent complete for conversion costs. Assume that there was no loss from spoilage or evaporation.
Required
1. Using the FIFO method, prepare a process cost report for April.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 for May.
carton corporation produces a line of beverage cartons 542875
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method and Two Time Periods
Carton Corporation produces a line of beverage cartons. The production process has been automated, so the product can now be produced in one operation rather than in the three operations that were needed before the company purchased the automated machinery. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. Operating data for July and August are as follows:
|
|
July
|
August
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (July: 20% complete)
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20,000
|
$6,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$30,000
|
$6,000
|
|
Production during the month
|
|
|
|
Units started
|
70,000
|
90,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
$34,000
|
$59,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$96,000
|
$130,800
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
|
|
|
Units (July: 40% complete; August:
|
|
|
|
60% complete)
|
10,000
|
25,000
|
1. Using the average costing method, prepare process cost reports for July and August. (Round unit costs to two decimal places; round all other costs to the nearest dollar.)
2. From the information in the process cost report for July, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
3. Compare the product costing results for August with the results for July. What is the most significant change? What are some of the possible causes of this change?
many of the products made by wireless plastics company are standard telephone replac 542876
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method
Many of the products made by Wireless Plastics Company are standard telephone replacement parts that require long production runs and are produced continuously. A unit for Wireless Plastics is a box of parts. During April, direct materials for 25,250 units were put into production. Total cost of direct materials used during April was $2,273,000. Direct labor costs totaled $1,135,000, and overhead was $2,043,000. The beginning work in process inventory contained 1,600 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 60 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs attached to the units in beginning inventory totaled $232,515, which included $143,500 of direct materials costs. At the end of the month, 1,250 units were in ending inventory; all direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs.
Required
1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for April.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account, and state where those dollars should be transferred.
partial operating data for charing cross company are presented below 542816
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T Account Analysis with Unknowns
Partial operating data for Charing Cross Company are presented below. Charing Cross Company’s management has set the predetermined overhead rate for the current year at 80 percent of direct labor costs.
|
Account/Transaction
|
December
|
|
Beginning Materials Inventory
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Beginning Work in Process Inventory
|
66,000
|
|
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory
|
29,000
|
|
Direct materials used
|
168,000
|
|
Direct materials purchased
|
a
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
382,000
|
|
Overhead applied
|
b
|
|
Cost of units completed
|
c
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
808,000
|
|
Ending Materials Inventory
|
38,000
|
|
Ending Work in Process Inventory
|
138,600
|
|
Ending Finished Goods Inventory
|
d
|
Using T accounts and the data provided, compute the unknown values. Show all your computations.
in january the cabinet company worked on six job orders for specialty kitchen cabine 542817
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Cost Card and Computation of Product Unit Cost
Job Order Cost Card and Computation of Product Unit Cost
In January, the Cabinet Company worked on six job orders for specialty kitchen cabinets. It began Job A-62 for Zeke Cabinets, Inc., on January 10, 2011 and completed it on January 24, 2011. Partial data for Job A-62 are as follows:
|
|
Costs
|
Machine Hours Used
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
|
Cedar
|
$7,900
|
|
|
Pine
|
6,320
|
|
|
Hardware
|
2,930
|
|
|
Assembly supplies
|
988
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
Sawing
|
2,840
|
120
|
|
Shaping
|
2,200
|
220
|
|
Finishing
|
2,250
|
180
|
|
Assembly
|
2,890
|
50
|
The Cabinet Company produced a total of 34 cabinets for Job A-62. Its current predetermined overhead rate is $21.60 per machine hour. From the information given, prepare a job order cost card and compute the job order’s product unit cost. (Round to whole dollars.)
using job order costing determine the product unit cost based on the following costs 542818
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Using job order costing, determine the product unit cost based on the following costs incurred during March: liability insurance, manufacturing, $2,500; rent, sales office, $2,900; depreciation, manufacturing equipment, $6,100; direct materials, $32,650; indirect labor, manufacturing, $3,480;indirect materials, $1,080; heat, light, and power, manufacturing, $1,910; fire insurance, manufacturing, $2,600; depreciation, sales equipment, $4,250; rent, manufacturing, $3,850; direct labor, $18,420; manager’s salary, manufacturing, $3,100; president’s salary, $5,800; sales commissions, $8,250; and advertising expenses, $2,975. The Inspection Department reported that 48,800
good units were produced during March. Carry your answer to two decimal places.
wild things inc manufactures custom made stuffed animals last month the company prod 542819
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Wild Things, Inc., manufactures custom-made stuffed animals. Last month the company produced 4,540 stuffed bears with stethoscopes for the local children’s hospital to sell at a fund-raising event. Using job order costing, determine the product unit cost of a stuffed bear based on the following costs incurred during the month: manufacturing utilities, $500; depreciation on manufacturing equipment, $450; indirect materials, $300; direct materials, $1,300; indirect labor, $800; direct labor, $2,400; sales commissions, $3,000; president’s salary, $4,000; insurance on manufacturing plant, $600; advertising expense, $500; rent on manufacturing plant, $5,000; rent on sales office, $4,000; and legal expense, $250. Carry your answer to two decimal places.
arch corporation manufactures specialty lines of women rsquo s apparel 542820
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Arch Corporation manufactures specialty lines of women’s apparel. During February, the company worked on three special orders: A-25, A-27, and B-14. Cost and production data for each order are as follows:
|
|
Job A-25
|
Job A-27
|
Job B-14
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
|
|
Fabric Q
|
$10,840
|
$12,980
|
$17,660
|
|
Fabric Z
|
11,400
|
12,200
|
13,440
|
|
Fabric YB
|
5,260
|
6,920
|
10,900
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
|
Garment maker
|
8,900
|
10,400
|
16,200
|
|
Layout
|
6,450
|
7,425
|
9,210
|
|
Packaging
|
3,950
|
4,875
|
6,090
|
|
Overhead
|
|
|
|
|
(120% of direct labor costs)
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Number of units produced
|
700
|
775
|
1,482
|
1. Compute the total cost associated with each job. Show the subtotals for each cost category.
2. Compute the product unit cost for each job. (Round your computations to the nearest cent.)
a job order cost card for hal rsquo s computer services appears at the top of the ne 542821
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
A job order cost card for Hal’s Computer Services appears at the top of the next page. Complete the missing information. The profit factor in the organization’s cost-plus contract is 30 percent of total cost.
|
Job Order Cost Card Hal’s Computer Services
|
|
Customer:
|
James Lowe
|
|
Job Order No.:
|
8-324
|
|
Contract Type:
|
Cost-Plus
|
|
Type of Service:
|
Software Installation and Internet Interfacing
|
|
Date of Completion:
|
October 6, 2011
|
|
Costs Charged to Job
|
Total Cost
|
|
Software installation services
|
|
|
Installation labor
|
$300
|
|
Service overhead (? % of installation labor costs)
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$450
|
|
Internet services
|
|
|
Internet labor
|
$200
|
|
Service overhead (20% of Internet labor costs)
|
40
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
|
Cost Summary to Date
|
Total Cost
|
|
Software installation services
|
$ ?
|
|
Internet services
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
|
Profit margin (30% of total cost)
|
?
|
|
Contract revenue
|
$ ?
|
a job order cost card for mini blinds by jenny appears below 542822
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
A job order cost card for Mini blinds by Jenny appears below. Complete the missing information. The profit factor in the company’s cost-plus contract is 50 percent of total cost.
|
Job Order Cost Card Miniblinds by Jenny
|
|
Customer:
|
Carmen Sawyer
|
|
Job Order No.:
|
8-482
|
|
Contract Type:
|
Cost-Plus
|
|
Type of Service:
|
Miniblind Installation and Design
|
|
Date of Completion:
|
June 12, 2011
|
|
Costs Charged to Job
|
Total Cost
|
|
Installation services
|
|
|
Installation labor
|
$445
|
|
Service overhead (80% of installation labor costs)
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$?
|
|
Designer services
|
|
|
Designer labor
|
$200
|
|
Service overhead (? % of designer labor costs)
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$400
|
|
Cost Summary to Date
|
Total Cost
|
|
Installation services
|
$ ?
|
|
Designer services
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
|
Profit margin (50% of total cost)
|
?
|
|
Contract revenue
|
$ ?
|
personal shoppers inc relieves busy women executives of the stress of shopping for c 542823
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
Personal Shoppers, Inc., relieves busy women executives of the stress of shopping for clothes by taking an inventory of a client’s current wardrobe and shopping for her needs for the next season or a special event. The company charges clients $30 per hour for the service plus the cost of the clothes purchased. It pays its employees various hourly wage rates.
During September, Personal Shoppers worked with three clients. It began Job 9-3, for Lucinda Map ley, on September 3, 2011 and completed the job on September 30, 2011. Using the partial data that follow, prepare the job order cost card. What amount of profit will Personal Shoppers make on this job?
|
Costs Charged to Job
|
Costs
|
Hours
|
Other
|
|
In-person consultation
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 30
|
|
|
|
Labor ($10 per hour)
|
|
4
|
|
|
Overhead (10% of in-person labor costs)
|
|
|
|
|
Shopping
|
|
|
|
|
Purchases
|
$560
|
|
|
|
Labor ($15 per hour)
|
|
8
|
|
|
Overhead (25% of shopping labor costs)
|
|
|
|
|
Telephone consultations
|
|
|
|
|
Cell phone calls ($1 per call)
|
|
|
6 calls
|
|
Labor ($6 per hour)
|
|
2
|
|
|
Overhead (50% of telephone labor costs)
|
|
|
|
flagstaff enterprises makes flagpoles 542824
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T Account Analysis with Unknowns
Flagstaff Enterprises makes flagpoles. Dan Dal ripple, the company’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past two months:
|
Account/Transaction
|
May
|
June
|
|
Beginning Materials Inventory
|
$ 36,240
|
$ e
|
|
Beginning Work in Process Inventory
|
56,480
|
f
|
|
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory
|
44,260
|
g
|
|
Materials purchased
|
a
|
96,120
|
|
Direct materials requested
|
82,320
|
h
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
b
|
72,250
|
|
Overhead applied
|
53,200
|
i
|
|
Cost of units completed
|
c
|
221,400
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
209,050
|
j
|
|
Ending Materials Inventory
|
38,910
|
41,950
|
|
Ending Work in Process Inventory
|
d
|
k
|
|
Ending Finished Goods Inventory
|
47,940
|
51,180
|
The current year’s predetermined overhead rate is 80 percent of direct labor cost.
Required
Using the data provided and T accounts, compute the unknown values.
purchased direct materials on account 215 400 542825
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis
Par Carts, Inc., produces special-order golf carts, so Par Carts uses a job order costing system. Overhead is applied at the rate of 90 percent of direct labor cost. The following is a list of transactions for January, 2011:
Jan.
1 Purchased direct materials on account, $215,400.
2 Purchased indirect materials on account, $49,500.
4 Requested direct materials costing $193,200 (all used on Job X) and indirect materials costing $38,100 for production.
10 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,400; manufacturing rent, $3,800; and maintenance charges, $3,900.
15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $120,000 (all for Job X); indirect labor, $60,620.
15 Applied overhead to production.
19 Purchased indirect materials costing $27,550 and direct materials costing $190,450 on account.
21 Requested direct materials costing $214,750 (Job X, $178,170; Job Y, $18,170; and Job Z, $18,410) and indirect materials costing $31,400 for production.
31 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $132,000 (Job X, $118,500; Job Y, $7,000; Job Z, $6,500); indirect labor, $62,240.
31 Applied overhead to production.
31 Completed and transferred Job X (375 carts) and Job Y (10 carts) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $855,990.
31 Shipped Job X to the customer; total production cost was $824,520 and sales price was $996,800.
31 Recorded these overhead costs (adjusting entries): prepaid insurance expired, $3,700; property taxes (payable at year end), $3,400; and depreciation–machinery, $15,500.
Required
1. Record the entries for all transactions in January using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Prepaid Insurance, Accumulated Depreciation–Machinery, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold. Use job order cost cards for Job X, Job Y, and Job Z. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Also assume that when the payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account.
2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead as of January 31, 2011 and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?
the inventory balances of princess designs a manufacturer of high quality children r 542826
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Cost Flow
On May 31, the inventory balances of Princess Designs, a manufacturer of high-quality children’s clothing, were as follows: Materials Inventory, $21,360; Work in Process Inventory, $15,112; and Finished Goods Inventory, $17,120. Job order cost cards for jobs in process as of June 30 had these totals:
|
Job No.
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
24-A
|
$1,596
|
$1,290
|
$1,677
|
|
24-B
|
1,492
|
1,380
|
1,794
|
|
24-C
|
1,984
|
1,760
|
2,288
|
|
24-D
|
1,608
|
1,540
|
2,002
|
The predetermined overhead rate is 130 percent of direct labor costs. Materials purchased and received in June were as follows:
|
June 4
|
$33,120
|
|
June 16
|
28,600
|
|
June 22
|
31,920
|
Direct labor costs for June were as follows:
|
|
$23,680
|
|
June 29 payroll
|
25,960
|
Direct materials requested by production during June were as follows:
|
June 6
|
$37,240
|
|
June 23
|
38,960
|
On June 30, Princess Designs sold on account finished goods with a 75 percent markup over cost for $320,000.
Required
1. Using T accounts for Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Accounts Receivable, Payroll Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold, reconstruct the transactions in June.
2. Compute the cost of units completed during the month.
3. What was the total cost of goods sold during June?
4. Determine the ending inventory balances.
5. Jobs 24-A and 24-C were completed during the first week of July. No additional materials costs were incurred, but Job 24-A required $960 more of direct labor, and Job 24-C needed an additional $1,610 of direct labor. Job 24-A was composed of 1,200 pairs of trousers; Job 24-C, of 950 shirts. Compute the product unit cost for each job. (Round your answers to two decimal places.)
riley amp associates is a cpa firm located in clinton kansas 542827
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
Riley & Associates is a CPA firm located in Clinton, Kansas. The firm deals primarily in tax and audit work. For billing of major audit engagements, it uses cost-plus contracts, and its profit factor is 25 percent of total job cost. Costs are accumulated for three primary activities: preliminary analysis, fieldwork, and report development. Current service overhead rates based on billable hours are preliminary analysis, $12 per hour; fieldwork, $20 per hour; and report development, $16 per hour. Supplies are treated as direct materials and are traceable to each engagement. Audits for three clients—Fulcrum, Inc., Rainy Day Bakeries, and Our Place Restaurants—are currently in process. During March, 2011 costs related to these projects were as follows:
|
|
Fulcrum, Inc.
|
Rainy Day Bakeries
|
Our Place Restaurants
|
|
Beginning Balances
|
|
|
|
|
Preliminary analysis
|
$1,160
|
$2,670
|
$2,150
|
|
Fieldwork
|
710
|
1,980
|
3,460
|
|
Report development
|
—
|
1,020
|
420
|
|
Costs During March
|
|
|
|
|
Preliminary analysis
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 710
|
$ 430
|
$ 200
|
|
Labor: hours
|
60
|
10
|
12
|
|
dollars
|
$1,200
|
$ 200
|
$ 240
|
|
Fieldwork
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 450
|
$1,120
|
$ 890
|
|
Labor: hours
|
120
|
240
|
230
|
|
dollars
|
$4,800
|
$9,600
|
$9,200
|
|
Report development
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 150
|
$ 430
|
$ 390
|
|
Labor: hours
|
30
|
160
|
140
|
|
dollars
|
$ 900
|
$4,800
|
$4,200
|
Required
1. Using the format shown in this chapter’s Review Problem, create the job order cost card for each of the three audit engagements.
2. Riley & Associates will complete the audits of Rainy Day Bakeries and Our Place Restaurants by the end of March. What will the billing amount for each of those audit engagements be?
3. What is the March ending balance of Riley & Associates’ Audit in Process account?
peruga engineering company specializes in designing automated characters and display 542828
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
Peruga Engineering Company specializes in designing automated characters and displays for theme parks. It uses cost-plus profit contracts, and its profit factor is 30 percent of total cost. Peruga uses a job order costing system to track the costs of developing each job. Costs are accumulated for three primary activities: bid and proposal, design, and prototype development. Current service overhead rates based on engineering hours are as follows: bid and proposal, $18 per hour; design, $22 per hour; and prototype development, $20 per hour. Supplies are treated as direct materials, traceable to each job. Peruga worked on three jobs, P-12, P-15, and P-19, during January, 2011. The following table shows the costs for those jobs:
|
|
P-12
|
P-15
|
P-19
|
|
Beginning Balances
|
|
|
|
|
Bid and proposal
|
$2,460
|
$2,290
|
$ 940
|
|
Design
|
1,910
|
460
|
—
|
|
Prototype development
|
2,410
|
1,680
|
—
|
|
Costs During January
|
|
|
|
|
Bid and proposal
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ —
|
$ 280
|
$2,300
|
|
Labor: hours
|
12
|
$ 20
|
68
|
|
dollars
|
$ 192
|
$ 320
|
$1,088
|
|
Design
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 400
|
$460
|
$ 290
|
|
Labor: hours
|
64
|
42
|
26
|
|
dollars
|
$1,280
|
$ 840
|
$ 520
|
|
Prototype development
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$6,744
|
$7,216
|
$ 2,400
|
|
Labor: hours
|
120
|
130
|
25
|
|
dollars
|
$2,880
|
$3,120
|
$ 600
|
Required
1. Using the format in the answer to requirement 1 of this chapter’s Review Problem, create the job order cost card for each of the three jobs.
2. Peruga completed Jobs P-12 and P-15, and the customers approved the prototype products. Customer A plans to produce 12 special characters using the design and specifications created by Job P-12. Customer B plans to make 18 displays from the design developed by Job P-15. What dollar amount will each customer use as the cost of design for each of those products (i.e., what is the product unit cost for Jobs P-12 and P-15)? (Round to the nearest dollar.)
3. What is the January ending balance of Peruga’s Contract in Process account for the three jobs?
4. Rank the jobs in order from most costly to least costly based on each job’s total cost. From the rankings of cost, what observations can you make?
5. Speculate on the price that Peruga should charge for such jobs.
hard core enterprises makes peripheral equipment for computers 542829
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T Account Analysis with Unknowns
Hard Core Enterprises makes peripheral equipment for computers. Emily Vit, the company’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past two months:
|
Account/Transaction
|
July
|
August
|
|
Beginning Materials Inventory
|
$ 52,000
|
$ e
|
|
Beginning Work in Process Inventory
|
24,000
|
f
|
|
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory
|
36,000
|
g
|
|
Materials purchased
|
a
|
31,000
|
|
Direct materials requested
|
77,000
|
h
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
b
|
44,000
|
|
Overhead applied
|
53,200
|
i
|
|
Cost of units completed
|
C
|
167,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
188,000
|
j
|
|
Ending Materials Inventory
|
27,000
|
8,000
|
|
Ending Work in Process Inventory
|
D
|
k
|
|
Ending Finished Goods Inventory
|
12,000
|
19,000
|
The current year’s predetermined overhead rate is 110 percent of direct labor cost.
Required
Using the data provided and T accounts, compute the unknown values.
rhile industries inc produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms duringseptember 542830
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis
Rhile Industries, Inc., produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms. DuringSeptember, 2011 Rhile Industries completed the following transactions:
Sept. 1 Purchased direct materials on account, $59,400.3 Requested direct materials costing $26,850 for production (allfor Job A).
4 Purchased indirect materials for cash, $22,830.
8 Issued checks for the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,310; manufacturing insurance, $1,925; and repairs, $4,640.
Sept. 10 Requested direct materials costing $29,510 (all used on Job A) and indirect materials costing $6,480 for production.
15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $62,900 (all for Job A); indirect labor, $31,610; manufacturing supervision, $26,900; and sales commissions, $32,980.
15 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.
22 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,270; maintenance, $3,380; and rent, $3,250.
23 Recorded the purchase on account and receipt of $31,940 of direct materials and $9,260 of indirect materials.
27 Requested $28,870 of direct materials (Job A, $2,660; Job B, $8,400; Job C, $17,810) and $7,640 of indirect materials for production.
30 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $64,220 (Job A, $44,000; Job B, $9,000; Job C, $11,220); indirect labor, $30,290; manufacturing supervision, $28,520; and sales commissions, $36,200.
30 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.
30 Completed and transferred Job A (58,840 units) and Job B (3,525 units) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $322,400.
30 Shipped Job A to the customer; total production cost was $294,200, and sales price was $418,240.
30 Recorded the following adjusting entries: $2,680 for depreciation–manufacturing equipment; and $1,230 for property taxes, manufacturing, payable at month end.
Required
1. Record the entries for all Rhile’s transactions in September using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accumulated Depreciation–Manufacturing Equipment, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, Cost of Goods Sold, and Selling and Administrative Expenses. Use job order cost cards for Job A, Job B, and Job C. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Assume also that when payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.)
2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead for September and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?
15 recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees 542831
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis
Rhile Industries, Inc., produces colorful and stylish nursing uniforms. DuringSeptember, 2011 Rhile Industries completed the following transactions:
Sept. 1 Purchased direct materials on account, $59,400.3 Requested direct materials costing $26,850 for production (allfor Job A).
4 Purchased indirect materials for cash, $22,830.
8 Issued checks for the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,310; manufacturing insurance, $1,925; and repairs, $4,640.
Sept. 10 Requested direct materials costing $29,510 (all used on Job A) and indirect materials costing $6,480 for production.
15 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $62,900 (all for Job A); indirect labor, $31,610; manufacturing supervision, $26,900; and sales commissions, $32,980.
15 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.
22 Paid the following overhead costs: utilities, $4,270; maintenance, $3,380; and rent, $3,250.
23 Recorded the purchase on account and receipt of $31,940 of direct materials and $9,260 of indirect materials.
27 Requested $28,870 of direct materials (Job A, $2,660; Job B, $8,400; Job C, $17,810) and $7,640 of indirect materials for production.
30 Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $64,220 (Job A, $44,000; Job B, $9,000; Job C, $11,220); indirect labor, $30,290; manufacturing supervision, $28,520; and sales commissions, $36,200.
30 Applied overhead to production at a rate of 120 percent of direct labor cost.
30 Completed and transferred Job A (58,840 units) and Job B (3,525 units) to finished goods inventory; total cost was $322,400.
30 Shipped Job A to the customer; total production cost was $294,200, and sales price was $418,240.
30 Recorded the following adjusting entries: $2,680 for depreciation–manufacturing equipment; and $1,230 for property taxes, manufacturing, payable at month end.
Required
1. Record the entries for all Rhile’s transactions in September using T accounts for the following: Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accumulated Depreciation–Manufacturing Equipment, Accounts Payable, Payroll Payable, Property Taxes Payable, Sales, Cost of Goods Sold, and Selling and Administrative Expenses. Use job order cost cards for Job A, Job B, and Job C. Determine the partial account balances. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Assume also that when payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.)
2. Compute the amount of under applied or over applied overhead for September and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
3. Why should the Overhead account’s under applied or over applied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?
laurence norton is the chief financial officer of rotham industries a company that m 542832
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Cost Flow
Laurence Norton is the chief financial officer of Rotham Industries, a company that makes special-order sound systems for home theaters. His records for February revealed the following information:
Beginning inventory balances
|
Materials Inventory
|
$27,450
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
22,900
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
19,200
|
Direct materials purchased and received
|
February 6
|
$ 7,200
|
|
February 12
|
8,110
|
|
February 24
|
5,890
|
Direct labor costs
|
February 14
|
$13,750
|
|
February 28
|
13,230
|
Direct materials requested for production
|
February 4
|
$ 9,080
|
|
February 13
|
5,940
|
|
February 25
|
7,600
|
Job order cost cards for jobs in process on February 28 had the following totals:
|
Job No.
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
Overhead
|
|
AJ-10
|
$3,220
|
$1,810
|
$2,534
|
|
AJ-14
|
3,880
|
2,110
|
2,954
|
|
AJ-15
|
2,980
|
1,640
|
2,296
|
|
AJ-16
|
4,690
|
2,370
|
3,318
|
The predetermined overhead rate for the month was 140 percent of direct labor costs. Sales for February totaled $152,400, which represented a 70 percent markup over the cost of production.
Required
1. Using T accounts for Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Overhead, Accounts Receivable, Payroll Payable, Sales, and Cost of Goods Sold, reconstruct the transactions in February.
2. Compute the cost of units completed during the month.
3. What was the total cost of goods sold during February?
4. Determine the ending balances in the inventory accounts.
5. During the first week of March, Jobs AJ-10 and AJ-14 were completed.
No additional direct materials costs were incurred, but Job AJ-10 needed $720 more of direct labor, and Job AJ-14 needed an additional $1,140 of direct labor. Job AJ-10 was 40 units; Job AJ-14, 55 units. Compute the product unit cost for each completed job (round to two decimal places).
locust lodge a restored 1920s lodge located in alabama caters and serves special eve 542833
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
Locust Lodge, a restored 1920s lodge located in Alabama, caters and serves special events for businesses and social occasions. The company earns 60 percent of its revenue from weekly luncheon meetings of local clubs like Rotary. The remainder of its business comes from bookings for weddings and receptions.
Locust Lodge uses job order cost cards to keep track of the costs incurred. Job costs are separated into three categories: food and beverage, labor, and facility overhead. The facility overhead cost for weekly events is 10 percent of food and beverage costs, the facility overhead cost for sit-down receptions is 40 percent of food and beverage costs, and the facility overhead cost for stand-up receptions is 20 percent of food and beverage costs. Accumulated costs for three Locust Lodge clients in the current quarter are as follows:
|
|
Food and Beverage
|
Labor
|
Facility Overhead
|
|
Tuesday Club
|
Last month: $2,000
|
Last month: $200
|
Last month: ?
|
|
meetings
|
This month: $2,500
|
This month: $250
|
This month: ?
|
|
Doar-Turner
|
Last month: $3,000
|
Last month: $1,000
|
Last month: ?
|
|
engagement and
|
This month: $8,000
|
This month: $2,000
|
This month: ?
|
|
wedding parties
|
Both sit-down affairs
|
|
|
|
Reception for the
|
This month: $5,000
|
This month: $1,000
|
This month: ?
|
|
new president
|
A stand-up affair
|
|
|
The number of attendees served at Tuesday Club meetings is usually 200 per month. The Doar- Turner parties paid for 500 guests. The organizers of the reception for the new president paid for 1,000 invitees.
Required
1. Using the format shown in this chapter’s Review Problem, create a job order cost card for each of the three clients.
2. Calculate the total cost of each of the three jobs on its job order cost card.
3. Calculate the cost per attendee for each job.
4. Rank the jobs in order from most costly to least costly based on each job’s total cost and on the cost per attendee. From the rankings of cost, what observations are you able to make?
5. Speculate on the price that Locust Lodge should charge for such jobs.
refer to assignment p 5 in this chapter 542834
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing in a Service Organization
Peruga Engineering Company needs to analyze its jobs in process during the month of January.
Required
1.Using Excel’s Chart Wizard and the job order cost cards that you created for Jobs P-12, P-15, and P-19, prepare a bar chart that compares the bid and proposal costs, design costs, and prototype development costs of the jobs. The suggested format to use for the information table necessary to complete the bar chart is as follows:
|
1
|
|
P-12
|
P-15
|
P-19
|
|
2
|
Bid and Proposal
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
Design
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
Prototype Development
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
Total Job Cost
|
|
|
|
2.Examine the chart you prepared in requirement 1. List some reasons for the differences between the costs of the various jobs.
eagle manufacturing supplies engine parts to cherokee cycle company a major u s manu 542835
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting Nonfinancial Data
Eagle Manufacturing supplies engine parts to Cherokee Cycle Company, a major U.S. manufacturer of motorcycles. Like all of Cherokee’s suppliers, Eagle has always added a healthy profit margin to its cost when quoting selling prices to Cherokee. Recently, however, several companies have offered to supply engine parts to Cherokee for lower prices than Eagle has been charging.
Because Eagle Manufacturing wants to keep Cherokee Cycle Company’s business, a team of Eagle’s managers analyzed their company’s product costs and decided to make minor changes in the company’s manufacturing process. No new equipment was purchased, and no additional labor was required. Instead, the machines were rearranged, and some of the work was reassigned.
To monitor the effectiveness of the changes, Eagle introduced three new performance measures to its information system: inventory levels, lead time (total time required for a part to move through the production process), and productivity (number of parts manufactured per person per day). Eagle’s goal was to reduce the quantities of the first two performance measures and to increase the quantity of the third.
A section of a recent management report, shown below, summarizes the quantities for each performance measure before and after the changes in the manufacturing process
were made.
|
Measure
|
Before
|
After
|
Improvement
|
|
Inventory in dollars
|
$21,444
|
$10,772
|
50%
|
|
Lead time in minutes
|
17
|
11
|
35%
|
|
Productivity (parts per person
|
515
|
1,152
|
124%
|
|
per day)
|
1. Do you believe that Eagle improved the quality of its manufacturing process and the quality of its engine parts? Explain your answer.
2. Can Eagle lower its selling price to Cherokee? Explain your answer.
3. Did the introduction of the new measures affect the design of the product costing system? Explain your answer.
4. Do you believe that the new measures caused a change in Eagle’s cost per engine part? If so, how did they cause the change?
21 4 the service division of raney industries reported the following results for 201 542099
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The service division of Raney Industries reported the following results for 2012.
|
Sales
|
$500,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
300,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
75,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
450,000
|
Management is considering the following independent courses of action in 2013 in order to maximize the return on investment for this division.
1. Reduce average operating assets by $50,000, with no change in controllable margin.
2. Increase sales $100,000, with no change in the contribution margin percentage.
(a) Compute the controllable margin and the return on investment for 2012. (b) Compute the controllable margin and the expected return on investment for each proposed alternative.
the actual selling expenses incurred in march 2012 by dewitt company are as follows 542105
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The actual selling expenses incurred in March 2012 by DeWitt Company are as follows.
|
Variable Expenses
|
Fixed Expenses
|
|
Sales commissions
|
$9,200
|
Sales salaries
|
$34,000
|
|
Advertising
|
7,000
|
Depreciation
|
7,000
|
|
Travel
|
5,100
|
Insurance
|
1,000
|
|
Delivery
|
3,500
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a flexible budget performance report for March using the budget data in E21-5, assuming that March sales were $170,000. Expected and actual sales are the same.
(b) Prepare a flexible budget performance report, assuming that March sales were $180,000. Expected sales and actual sales are the same.
(c) Comment on the importance of using flexible budgets in evaluating theperformance of the sales manager.
kitchen help inc khi is a manufacturer of toaster ovens 542106
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kitchen Help Inc. (KHI) is a manufacturer of toaster ovens. To improve control over operations, the president of KHI wants to begin using a flexible budgeting system, rather than use only the current master budget. The following data are available for KHI’s expected costs at production levels of 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$6 per unit
|
|
Administrative
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Selling
|
$1 per unit
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$150,000
|
|
Administrative
|
$80,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a flexible budget for each of the possible production levels: 90,000, 100,000, and 110,000 units.
(b) If KHI sells the toaster ovens for $15 each, how many units will it have to sell to make a profit of $250,000 before taxes?
what do you think of the dividend policies of the following companies 542208
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What do you think of the dividend policies of the following companies.
|
|
1997
|
1998
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
2002
|
2003
|
|
A
|
EPS
|
100
|
115
|
131
|
150
|
160
|
165
|
167
|
|
DPS
|
20
|
23
|
26
|
30
|
35
|
41
|
60
|
|
B
|
EPS
|
350
|
402
|
458
|
524
|
559
|
577
|
584
|
|
DPS
|
70
|
80
|
92
|
105
|
112
|
115
|
117
|
|
C
|
EPS
|
100
|
50
|
0
|
-50
|
-50
|
0
|
-50
|
|
DPS
|
5
|
5
|
5
|
5
|
5
|
5
|
6
|
|
D
|
EPS
|
500
|
520
|
550
|
600
|
500
|
400
|
300
|
|
DPS
|
100
|
80
|
70
|
100
|
120
|
150
|
200
|
calculate rowak s after tax roce and roe in each year what do you think 542210
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rowak plc is a Syldavian industrial company listed on the Klow Stock Exchange. The number of shares in issue has been constant over the period at one million. The corporate income tax rate is 33%.
(a) Calculate Rowak’s after-tax ROCE and ROE in each year. What do you think?
(b) What do you think of the fact that Rowak has never paid a dividend?
(c) In early September 2000, the company’s market capitalisation is 200 million, and its managers believe the shares are worth 150 each. Rowak’s chairman proposes to the board of directors that 50 million be devoted to buying back (and cancelling) outstanding shares. The programme is to be financed by borrowing at 10% before tax. The board of directors refuses. Why, in your opinion?
(d) In December 2002, the company’s market capitalisation has fallen to 90 million (still with the same number of shares in issue) and the estimated value of the share is 120. Rowak’s chairman puts forward his proposal again. What do you think now?
|
(figures in millions)
|
Revenue
|
Net profit
|
Pre-tax interest expenses
|
Book value of equity
|
Net debt
|
Market capitalisation
|
|
1997
|
170
|
8
|
9
|
50
|
60
|
55
|
|
1998
|
130
|
10
|
10
|
60
|
70
|
90
|
|
1999
|
170
|
11
|
10
|
71
|
75
|
152
|
|
2000
|
220
|
13
|
9
|
84
|
76
|
195
|
|
2001
|
230
|
13
|
7
|
97
|
70
|
210
|
|
2002
|
240
|
13
|
6
|
110
|
65
|
90
|
what were the firm s net incomes cash flows from operations and cash flow from asset 542624
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Profits versus Cash Flow. Butterfly Tractors had $14 million in sales last year. Cost of goods sold was S8 million, depreciation expense was $2 million, interest payment on outstanding debt was $1 million, capital expenditures were $1 million, and the firn’s tax rate was 35 percent.
a. What were the firm’s net incomes? Cash flows from operations, and cash flow from assets?.
b. What would happen to net income and cash flows if depreciation were increased by $1 million? How do you explain the differing impact of depreciation on income versus cash flow?
c. Would you expect the change in income and cash flows from the change in depreciation to have a positive or negative impact on the firm’s stock price?
d. Now consider the impact on net income and cash flow if the firm s interest expense were $1I million higher. Why is this case different from part (b)?
the following information is from the trial balance of mills manufacturing company 542787
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Manufacturing Organization’s Balance Sheet
The following information is from the trial balance of Mills Manufacturing Company:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 34,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
27,000
|
|
|
Materials Inventory, ending
|
31,000
|
|
|
Work in Process Inventory, ending
|
47,900
|
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory, ending
|
54,800
|
|
|
Production Supplies
|
5,700
|
|
|
Small Tools
|
9,330
|
|
|
Land
|
160,000
|
|
|
Factory Building
|
575,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation–Factory Building
|
|
$ 199,000
|
|
Factory Equipment
|
310,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation–
|
|
|
|
Factory Equipment
|
|
137,000
|
|
Patents
|
33,500
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
26,900
|
|
Insurance Premiums Payable
|
|
6,700
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
|
41,500
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
343,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
200,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
334,130
|
|
|
$1,288,230
|
$1,288,230
|
Required
1. Manufacturing organizations use asset accounts that are not needed by retail organizations.
a. List the titles of the asset accounts that are specifically related to manufacturing organizations.
b. List the titles of the asset, liability, and equity accounts that you would see on the balance sheets of both manufacturing and retail organizations.
2. Assuming that the following information reflects the results of operations for the year, calculate the (a) gross margin, (b) cost of goods sold, (c) cost of goods available for sale, and (d) cost of goods manufactured:
|
Operating income
|
$138,130
|
|
Operating expenses
|
53,670
|
|
Sales
|
500,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
50,900
|
3. Does Mills manufacturing use the periodic or perpetual inventory system?
carola industries inc manufactures discs for several of the leading recording studio 542788
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Unit Cost
Carola Industries, Inc., manufactures discs for several of the leading recording studios in the United States and Europe. Department 60 is responsible for the electronic circuitry within each disc. Department 61 applies the plastic-like surface to the discs and packages them for shipment. Carola recently produced 4,000 discs for the Milo Company. In fulfilling this order, the departments incurred the following costs:
|
Department
|
|
60
|
61
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$29,440
|
$3,920
|
|
Direct labor
|
6,800
|
2,560
|
|
Overhead
|
7,360
|
4,800
|
1. Compute the unit cost for each department.
2. Compute the total unit cost for the Milo Company order.
3. The selling price for this order was $14 per unit. Was the selling price adequate? List the assumptions and/or computations upon which you based your answer. What suggestions would you make to Carola Industries’ management about the pricing of future orders?
4. Compute the prime costs and conversion costs per unit for each department.
byte computer company a manufacturing organization has just completed 542790
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocation of Overhead
Byte Computer Company, a manufacturing organization, has just completed an order that Grater, Ltd., placed for 80 computers. Direct materials, purchased parts, and direct labor costs for the Grater order are as follows:
|
Cost of direct materials
|
$36,750.00
|
Direct labor hours
|
220
|
|
Cost of purchased parts
|
$21,300.00
|
Average direct labor pay rate
|
$15.25
|
Overhead costs were applied at a single, plant wide overhead rate of 270 percent of direct labor dollars.
Required
Using the traditional costing method, compute the total cost of the Grater order.
statement of cost of goods manufactured 542791
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured
Dillo Vineyards, a large winery in Texas, produces a full line of varietal wines. The company, whose fiscal year begins on November 1, has just completed a record-breaking year. Its inventory account balances on October 31 of this year were Materials Inventory, $1,803,800; Work in Process Inventory, $2,764,500; and Finished Goods Inventory, $1,883,200. At the beginning of the year, the inventory account balances were Materials Inventory, $2,156,200; Work in Process Inventory, $3,371,000; and Finished Goods Inventory, $1,596,400.
During the fiscal year, the company’s purchases of direct materials totaled $6,750,000. Direct labor hours totaled 142,500, and the average labor rate was $8.20 per hour. The following overhead costs were incurred during the year: depreciation–plant and equipment, $685,600; indirect labor, $207,300; property tax, plant and equipment, $94,200; plant maintenance, $83,700; small tools, $42,400; utilities, $96,500; and employee benefits, $76,100.
Required
Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for the fiscal year ended October 31.
municipal hospital relies heavily on cost data to keep its pricing structures in lin 542792
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unit Costs in a Service Business
Municipal Hospital relies heavily on cost data to keep its pricing structures in line with those of its competitors. The hospital provides a wide range of services, including intensive care, intermediate care, and a neonatal nursery. Joo Young, the hospital’s controller, is concerned about the profits generated by the 30-bed intensive care unit (ICU), so she is reviewing current billing procedures for that unit. The focus of her analysis is the hospital’s billing per ICU patient day. This billing equals the per diem cost of intensive care plus a 40 percent markup to cover other operating costs and generate a profit. ICU patient costs include the following:
|
Doctors’ care
|
2 hours per day @ $360 per hour (actual)
|
|
Special nursing care
|
4 hours per day @ $85 per hour (actual)
|
|
Regular nursing care
|
24 hours per day @ $28 per hour (average)
|
|
Medications
|
$237 per day (average)
|
|
Medical supplies
|
$134 per day (average)
|
|
Room rental
|
$350 per day (average)
|
|
Food and services
|
$140 per day (average)
|
One other significant ICU cost is equipment, which is about $185,000 per room. Young has determined that the cost per patient day for the equipment is $179. Wiley Dix, the hospital director, has asked Young to compare the current billing procedure with another that uses industry averages to determine the billing per patient day.
Required
1. Compute the cost per patient per day.
2. Compute the billing per patient day using the hospital’s existing markup rate. (Round answers to whole dollars.)
3. Industry averages for markup rates are as follows:
|
Equipment
|
30%
|
Medications
|
50%
|
|
Doctors’ care
|
50
|
Medical supplies
|
50
|
|
Special nursing care
|
40
|
Room rental
|
30
|
|
Regular nursing care
|
50
|
Food and services
|
25
|
Using these rates, compute the billing per patient day. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollars.)
4. Based on your findings in requirements 2 and 3, which billing procedure would you recommend? Why?
land products inc uses a predetermined overhead rate in its production assembly and 542793
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocation of Overhead
Land Products, Inc., uses a predetermined overhead rate in its production, assembly, and testing departments. One rate is used for the entire company; it is based on machine hours. The rate is determined by analyzing data from the previous year to determine the percentage change in costs. Thus this year’s overhead rate will be based on the percentage change multiplied by last year’s costs. Lise Jensen is about to compute the rate for this year using the following data:
|
Last Year’s Costs
|
|
Machine hours
|
41,800
|
|
Overhead costs
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$ 57,850
|
|
Indirect labor
|
25,440
|
|
Supervision
|
41,580
|
|
Utilities
|
11,280
|
|
Labor-related costs
|
9,020
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
10,780
|
|
Depreciation, machinery
|
27,240
|
|
Property taxes
|
2,880
|
|
Insurance
|
1,920
|
|
Miscellaneous overhead
|
4,840
|
|
Total overhead
|
$192,830
|
This year the cost of indirect materials is expected to increase by 30 percent over the previous year. The cost of indirect labor, utilities, machinery depreciation, property taxes, and insurance is expected to increase by 20 percent over the previous year. All other expenses are expected to increase by 10 percent over the previous year. Machine hours for this year are estimated at 45,980.
Required
1. Compute the projected costs and the overhead rate for this year using the information about expected cost increases. (Round your answer to three decimal places.)
2. During this year, Lund Products completed the following jobs using the machine hours shown:
|
Job No.
|
Machine Hours
|
Job No.
|
Machine Hours
|
|
H–142
|
7,840
|
H–201
|
10,680
|
|
H–164
|
5,260
|
H–218
|
12,310
|
|
H–175
|
8,100
|
H–304
|
2,460
|
Determine the amount of overhead applied to each job. What was the total overhead applied during this year? (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
3. Actual overhead costs for this year were $234,485. Was overhead under applied or over applied this year? By how much? Should the Cost of Goods Sold account be increased or decreased to reflect actual overhead costs?
4. At what point during this year was the overhead rate computed? When was it applied? Finally, when was under applied or over applied overhead determined and the Cost of Goods Sold account adjusted to reflect actual costs?
tarbox manufacturing company makes sheet metal products for heating and air conditio 542796
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Performance Measures
Financial Performance Measures
Tarbox Manufacturing Company makes sheet metal products for heating and air conditioning installations. Its statements of cost of goods manufactured and income statements for the last two years are presented below and on the next page.
|
Tarbox Manufacturing Company Statements of Cost of Goods Manufactured For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
|
This Year
|
|
This Year
|
|
|
Direct materials used
|
|
|
|
|
|
Materials inventory,
|
|
|
|
|
|
beginning
|
$ 91,240
|
|
$93,560
|
|
|
Direct materials purchased
|
987,640
|
|
959,940
|
|
|
(net)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of direct materials
|
|
|
|
|
|
available for use
|
$1,078,880
|
|
$1,053,500
|
|
|
Less materials inventory,
|
|
|
|
|
|
ending
|
95,020
|
|
91,240
|
|
|
Cost of direct
|
|
|
|
|
|
materials used
|
|
$ 983,860
|
|
$ 962,260
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
571,410
|
|
579,720
|
|
Overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$ 182,660
|
|
$171,980
|
|
|
Power
|
34,990
|
|
32,550
|
|
|
Insurance
|
22,430
|
|
18,530
|
|
|
Supervision
|
125,330
|
|
120,050
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
75,730
|
|
72,720
|
|
|
Other overhead costs
|
41,740
|
|
36,280
|
|
|
Total overhead
|
|
482,880
|
|
452,110
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
|
$2,038,150
|
|
$1,994,090
|
|
Add work in process
|
|
|
|
|
|
inventory, beginning
|
|
148,875
|
|
152,275
|
|
Total cost of work in
|
|
|
|
|
|
process during the period
|
|
$2,187,025
|
|
$2,146,365
|
|
Less work in process
|
|
|
|
|
|
inventory, ending
|
|
146,750
|
|
148,875
|
|
Cost of goods
|
|
|
|
|
|
manufactured
|
|
$2,040,275
|
|
$1,997,490
|
|
Tarbox Manufacturing Company Income Statements For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
|
|
This Year
|
|
Last Year
|
|
Sales
|
|
$2,942,960
|
|
$3,096,220
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
|
|
|
inventory, beginning
|
$ 142,640
|
|
$ 184,820
|
|
|
Cost of goods
|
|
|
|
|
|
manufactured
|
2,040,275
|
|
1,997,490
|
|
|
Cost of goods
|
|
|
|
|
|
available for sale
|
$2,182,915
|
|
$2,182,310
|
|
|
Less finished goods
|
|
|
|
|
|
inventory, ending
|
186,630
|
|
142,640
|
|
|
Total cost of goods sold
|
|
1,996,285
|
|
2,039,670
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
$ 946,675
|
|
$1,056,550
|
|
Selling and
|
|
|
|
|
|
administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales salaries and
|
|
|
|
|
|
commission expense
|
$ 394,840
|
|
$ 329,480
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
116,110
|
|
194,290
|
|
|
Other selling expenses
|
82,680
|
|
72,930
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
242,600
|
|
195,530
|
|
|
Total selling and
|
|
|
|
|
|
administrative expenses
|
|
836,230
|
|
792,230
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 110,445
|
|
$ 264,320
|
|
Other revenues and
|
|
|
|
|
|
expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
54,160
|
|
56,815
|
|
Income before income
|
|
|
|
|
|
taxes
|
|
$ 56,285
|
|
$ 207,505
|
|
Income taxes expense
|
|
19,137
|
|
87,586
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 37,148
|
|
$ 119,919
|
For the past several years, the company’s income has been declining. You have been asked to comment on why the ratios for Tarbox’s profitability have deteriorated.
1. In preparing your comments, compute the following ratios for each year:
a. Ratios of cost of direct materials used to total manufacturing costs, direct labor to total manufacturing costs, and total overhead to total manufacturing costs. (Round to one decimal place.)
b. Ratios of sales salaries and commission expense, advertising expense, other selling expenses, administrative expenses, and total selling and administrative expenses to sales. (Round to one decimal place.)
c. Ratios of gross margin to sales and net income to sales. (Round to one decimal place.)
2. From your evaluation of the ratios computed in 1, state the probable causes of the decline in net income.
3. What other factors or ratios do you believe should be considered in determining the cause of the company’s decreased income?
as the manager of grounds maintenance for latchey a large insurance company in misso 542797
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Decision about a Supporting Service Function
As the manager of grounds maintenance for Latchey, a large insurance company in Missouri, you are responsible for maintaining the grounds surrounding the company’s three buildings, the six entrances to the property, and the recreational facilities, which include a golf course, a soccer field, jogging and bike paths, and tennis, basketball, and volleyball courts. Maintenance includes gardening (watering, planting, mowing, trimming, removing debris, and so on) and land improvements (e.g., repairing or replacing damaged or worn concrete and gravel areas).
Early in January, you receive a memo from the president of Latchey requesting information about the cost of operating your department for the last 12 months. She has received a bid from Xeriscape Landscapes, Inc., to perform the gardening activities you now perform. You are to prepare a cost report that will help her decide whether to keep gardening activities within the company or to outsource the work.
1. Before preparing your report, answer the following questions:
a. What kinds of information do you need about your department?
b. Why is this information relevant?
lake weir power plant provides power to a metropolitan area of 4 million people 542798
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preventing Pollution and the Costs of Waste Disposal
Lake Weir Power Plant provides power to a metropolitan area of 4 million people. Sundeep Guliani, the plant’s controller, has just returned from a conference on the Environmental Protection Agency’s regulations concerning pollution prevention. She is meeting with Alton Guy, the president of the company, to discuss the impact of the EPA’s regulations on the plant.
“Alton, I’m really concerned. We haven’t been monitoring the disposal of the radioactive material we send to the Willis Disposal Plant. If Willis is disposing of our waste material improperly, we could be sued,” said Guliani. “We also haven’t been recording the costs of the waste as part of our product cost. Ignoring those costs will have a negative impact on our decision about the next rate hike.”
“Sundeep, don’t worry. I don’t think we need to concern ourselves with the waste we send to Willis. We pay the company to dispose of it. The company takes it off our hands, and it’s their responsibility to manage its disposal. As for the cost of waste disposal, I think we would have a hard time justifying a rate increase based on a requirement to record the full cost of waste as a cost of producing power. Let’s just forget about waste and its disposal as a component of our power cost. We can get our rate increase without mentioning waste disposal,” replied Guy.
What responsibility for monitoring the waste disposal practices at the Willis Disposal Plant does Lake Weir Power Plant have? Should Guliani take Guy’s advice to ignore waste disposal costs in calculating the cost of power? Be prepared to discuss your response.
you prepared a mission statement for your company 542799
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Company (Continuing Case)
you prepared a mission statement for your company. You also set its strategic, tactical, and operating objectives; decided on its name; and identified the tools you might use to run it. Here, you will form a company team and assign roles to team members, set cookie specifications, decide on a cookie recipe, and answer some questions about product costs.
1. Join with 4 or 5 other students in the class to form a company team. (Your instructor may assign groups or allow students to organize their own teams.)
• Determine team members’ tasks, and make team assignments (e.g., mixer, baker, quality controller, materials purchaser, accountant, marketing manager).
• Assign each task an hourly pay rate or monthly salary based on your team’s perception of the job market for the task involved.
• Give the plan compiled thus far to your instructor and all team members in writing.
2. As a team, determine cookie specifications: quality, size, appearance, and special features (such as types of chips or nuts), as well as quantity and packaging.
3. As a team, select a cookie recipe that best fits the company’s mission.
4. As a team, answer the following questions and submit the answers to your instructor:
• Will your company use actual or normal costing when computing the cost per cookie? Explain your answer.
• List the types of costs that your company will classify as overhead.
complete the following job order cost card for six custom built computer systems 542807
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Computation of Product Unit Cost
Complete the following job order cost card for six custom-built computer systems:
|
Job Order Cost Card Keeper 3000 Apache City, North Dakota
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Customer:
|
Brian Patcher
|
Batch: ____
|
Custom:
|
X
|
|
Specifications:
|
6 Custom-Built Computer Systems
|
|
|
|
|
Date of Order:
|
4/4/2011
|
Date of Completion:
|
6/8/2011
|
|
|
Costs Charged to Job
|
Previous Months
|
Current Month
|
Cost Summary
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3,540
|
$2,820
|
$ ?
|
|
Direct labor
|
2,340
|
1,620
|
?
|
|
Overhead applied
|
2,880
|
2,550
|
?
|
|
Totals
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Units completed
|
|
|
÷ ?
|
|
Product unit cost
|
|
|
$ ?
|
complete the following job order cost card for an individual tax return 542809
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing with Cost-Plus Contracts
Job Order Costing with Cost-Plus Contracts
Complete the following job order cost card for an individual tax return:
|
Job Order 2011-A7
|
|
Job Order Cost Card Doremus Tax Service Puyallup, Washington
|
|
Customer:
|
Arthur Farnsworth
|
Batch:
|
Custom:
|
X
|
|
|
Specifications:
|
Annual Individual Tax Return
|
|
|
|
Date of Order:
|
3/24/2011
|
Date of Completion:
|
4/8/2011
|
|
|
Costs Charged to Job
|
Previous Months
|
Current Month
|
Total Cost
|
|
Client interview
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$10
|
$ —
|
$ ?
|
|
Labor
|
50
|
60
|
?
|
|
Overhead (40% of interview labor costs)
|
20
|
24
|
?
|
|
Totals
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Preparation of return
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$—
|
$ 16
|
$ ?
|
|
Computer time
|
—
|
12
|
?
|
|
Labor
|
—
|
240
|
?
|
|
Overhead (50% of preparation labor costs)
|
—
|
120
|
?
|
|
Totals
|
$—
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Delivery
|
|
|
|
|
Postage
|
$—
|
$ 12
|
$ ?
|
|
Totals
|
$—
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Cost Summary to Date
|
Total Cost
|
|
Client interview
|
$ ?
|
|
Preparation of return
|
?
|
|
Delivery
|
?
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
|
Profit margin (25% of total cost)
|
?
|
|
Job revenue
|
$ ?
|
on june 30 new haven company rsquo s work in process inventory account showed a begi 542814
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Work in Process Inventory: T Account Analysis
On June 30, New Haven Company’s Work in Process Inventory account showed a beginning balance of $29,400. The Materials Inventory account showed a beginning balance of $240,000. Production activity for July was as follows: Direct materials costing $238,820 were requested for production; total manufacturing payroll was $140,690, of which $52,490 was used to pay for indirect labor; indirect materials costing $28,400 were purchased and used; and overhead was applied at a rate of 150 percent of direct labor costs.
1. Record New Haven’s materials, labor, and overhead costs for July in T accounts.
2. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process Inventory account.
Assume a transfer of $461,400 to the Finished Goods Inventory account during the period.
partial operating data for merton company are presented below 542815
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T Account Analysis with Unknowns
Partial operating data for Merton Company are presented below. Management has set the predetermined overhead rate for the current year at 120 percent of direct labor costs.
|
Account/Transaction
|
June
|
July
|
|
Beginning Materials Inventory
|
a
|
e
|
|
Beginning Work in Process Inventory
|
$ 89,605
|
f
|
|
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory
|
79,764
|
$ 67,660
|
|
Direct materials requested
|
59,025
|
g
|
|
Materials purchased
|
57,100
|
60,216
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
48,760
|
54,540
|
|
Overhead applied
|
b
|
h
|
|
Cost of units completed
|
c
|
231,861
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
166,805
|
i
|
|
Ending Materials Inventory
|
32,014
|
27,628
|
|
Ending Work in Process Inventory
|
d
|
j
|
|
Ending Finished Goods Inventory
|
67,660
|
30,515
|
Using T accounts and the data provided, compute the unknown values. Show all your computations.
p19 4b the cubbie inn is a restaurant in dekalb illinois 541944
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-4B The Cubbie Inn is a restaurant in DeKalb, Illinois. It specializes in deluxe sandwiches in a moderate price range. Bill Michael, the manager of Cubbie Inn, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.
|
|
Percent of Total Sales
|
Contribution Margin Ratio
|
|
Appetizers
|
15%
|
60%
|
|
Main entrees
|
60%
|
25%
|
|
Desserts
|
10%
|
60%
|
|
Beverages
|
15%
|
80%
|
Bill is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. His goal is to generate a target net income of $120,000. The company has fixed costs of $300,000 per year.
Instructions
(a) Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income.
(b) Bill believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. He is proposing to reduce the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. He envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 40%. At the same time, he is proposing to change the sales mix to the following.
|
|
Percent of Total Sales
|
Contribution Margin Ratio
|
|
Appetizers
|
25%
|
60%
|
|
Main entrees
|
40%
|
10%
|
|
Desserts
|
10%
|
60%
|
|
Beverages
|
25%
|
80%
|
Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income.
(c) Suppose that Bill reduces the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in part (b), but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in part (a). Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. Comment on the potential risks and benefits of this strategy.
p19 5b the following variable costing income statements are available for american c 541945
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-5B The following variable costing income statements are available for American Company and National Company.
|
|
American Company
|
National Company
|
|
Sales
|
$1,000,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
500,000
|
150,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
500,000
|
850,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
300,000
|
650,000
|
|
Net income
|
$200,000
|
$200,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars and the margin of safety ratio for each company.
(b) Compute the degree of operating leverage for each company and interpret your results.
(c) Assuming that sales revenue increases by 30%, prepare a variable costing income statement for each company.
(d) Assuming that sales revenue decreases by 30%, prepare a variable costing income statement for each company.
(e) Discuss how the cost structure of these two companies affects their operating leverage and profitability.
p19 7b wku produces fabrics that are used for clothing and other applications 541947
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
*P19-7B WKU produces fabrics that are used for clothing and other applications. In 2012, the first year of operations, WKU produced 500,000 yards of fabric and sold 400,000 yards. In 2013, the production and sales results were exactly reversed. In each year, selling price per yard was $2, variable manufacturing costs were 25% of the sales price of units produced, variable selling expenses were 10% of the selling price of units sold, fixed manufacturing costs were $300,000, and fixed administrative expenses were $100,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare income statements for each year using variable costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-10.)
(b) Prepare income statements for each year using absorption costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-11.)
(c) Reconcile the differences each year in income from operations under the two costing approaches.
(d) Comment on the effects of production and sales on net income under the two costing approaches.
p19 8b electricswitch is a division of harclerode products corporation 541948
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-8B Electricswitch is a division of Harclerode Products Corporation. The division manufactures and sells an electric switch used in a wide variety of applications. During the coming year it expects to sell 200,000 units for $8 per unit. Mike Short is the division manager. He is considering producing either 200,000 or 250,000 units during the period.Other information is presented in the schedule.
|
Division Information for 2012
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Expected sales in units
|
200,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$8
|
|
Variable manufacturing cost per unit
|
$3
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead cost (total)
|
$480,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead costs per unit:
|
|
|
Based on 200,000 units
|
$2.40 per unit ($480,000 + 200,000)
|
|
Based on 250,000 units
|
$1.92 per unit ($480,000 + 250,000)
|
|
Manufacturing cost per unit:
|
|
|
Based on 200,000 units
|
$5.40 per unit ($3 variable + $2.40 fixed)
|
|
Based on 250,000 units
|
$4.92 per unit ($3 variable + $1.92 fixed)
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expense
|
$0.50
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense (total)
|
$12,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an absorption costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 200,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 250,000 units are produced.
(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 200,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 250,000 units are produced.
(c) Reconcile the difference in net incomes under the two approaches and explain what accounts for this difference.
(d) Discuss the relative usefulness of the variable costing income statements versus the absorption costing income statements for decision making and for evaluating the manager’s performance.
byp19 1 comfortcraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans 541949
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP19-1 ComfortCraft manufactures swivel seats for customized vans. It currently manufactures 10,000 seats per year, which it sells for $480 per seat. It incurs variable costs of $180 per seat and fixed costs of $2,200,000. It is considering automating the upholstery process, which is now largely manual. It estimates that if it does so, its fixed costs will be $3,200,000, and its variable costs will decline to $80 per seat.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.
(a) Prepare a CVP income statement based on current activity.
(b) Compute contribution margin ratio, break-even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage based on current activity.
(c) Prepare a CVP income statement assuming that the company invests in the automated upholstery system.
(d) Compute contribution margin ratio, break-even point in dollars, margin of safety ratio, and degree of operating leverage assuming the new upholstery system is implemented.
(e) Discuss the implications of adopting the new system.
byp19 3 in a recent report the del monte foods company reported three separate opera 541951
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP19-3 In a recent report, the Del Monte Foods Company reported three separate operating segments: consumer products (which includes a variety of canned foods including tuna, fruit, and vegetables); pet products (which includes pet food and snacks and veterinary products); and soup and infant-feeding products (which includes soup, broth, and infant feeding and pureed products). In its annual report, Del Monte uses absorption costing. As a result, information regarding the relative composition of its fixed and variable costs is not available. We have assumed that $860.3 million of its total operating expenses of $1,920.3 million are fixed and have allocated the remaining variable costs across the three divisions. Sales data, along with assumed expense data, are provided on the next page.
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
|
Sales
|
Variable Costs
|
|
Consumer products
|
$1,031.80
|
$610
|
|
Pet products
|
837.3
|
350
|
|
Soup and infant-feeding products
|
302
|
100
|
|
|
$2,171.10
|
$1,060
|
Instructions
(a) Compute each segment’s contribution margin ratio and the sales mix.
(b) Using the information computed in part (a), compute the company’s break-even point in dollars, and then determine the amount of sales that would be generated by each division at the break-even point.
byp19 5 mortonson corporation makes two different boat anchors 541952
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP19-5 Mortonson Corporation makes two different boat anchors—a traditional fishing anchor and a high-end yacht anchor—using the same production machinery. The contribution margin of the yacht anchor is three times as high as that of the other product. The company is currently operating at full capacity and has been doing so for nearly two years. Steve Gantner, the company’s CEO, wants to cut back on production of the fishing anchor so that the company can make more yacht anchors. He says that this is a “no-brainer” because the contribution margin of the yacht anchor is so much higher.
Instructions
Write a short memo to Steve Gantner describing the analysis that the company should do before it makes this decision and any other considerations that would affect the decision.
20 3 ash creek company is preparing its master budget for 2012 542004
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ash Creek Company is preparing its master budget for 2012. Relevant data pertaining to its sales, production, and direct materials budgets are as follows.
Sales:Sales for the year are expected to total 1,000,000 units. Quarterly sales are 20%, 25%, 25%, and 30%, respectively. The sales price is expected to be $40 per unit for the first three quarters and $45 per unit beginning in the fourth quarter. Sales in the first quarter of 2013 are expected to be 10% higher than the budgeted sales for the first quarter of 2012.
Production:Management desires to maintain the ending finished goods inventories at 20% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales volume.
Direct materials:Each unit requires 2 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $10 per pound. Management desires to maintain raw materials inventories at 10% of the next quarter’s production requirements. Assume the production requirements for first quarter of 2013 are 500,000 pounds.
Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2012.
e20 9 donnegal company makes and sells artistic frames for pictures 542015
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Donnegal Company makes and sells artistic frames for pictures. The controller is responsible for preparing the master budget and has accumulated the following information for 2012.
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
May
|
|
Estimated unit sales
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
8,000
|
9,000
|
9,000
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
$50.00
|
$47.50
|
$47.50
|
$47.50
|
$47.50
|
|
Direct labor hours per unit
|
2
|
2
|
1.5
|
1.5
|
1.5
|
|
Wage per direct labor hour
|
$8.00
|
$8.00
|
$8.00
|
$9.00
|
$9.00
|
Donnegal has a labor contract that calls for a wage increase to $9.00 per hour on April 1. New labor-saving machinery has been installed and will be fully operational by March 1.Donnegal expects to begin the year with 16,000 frames on hand and has a policy of carrying an end-of-month inventory of 100% of the following month’s sales, plus 50% of the second following month’s sales.
Instructions
Prepare a production budget and a direct labor budget for Donnegal Company by month and for the first quarter of the year. The direct labor budget should include direct labor hours
e20 17 lrf company s budgeted sales and direct materials purchases are as follows 542023
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LRF Company’s budgeted sales and direct materials purchases are as follows.
|
|
Budgeted Sales
|
Budgeted D.M. Purchases
|
|
January
|
$200,000
|
$30,000
|
|
February
|
220,000
|
35,000
|
|
March
|
270,000
|
41,000
|
LRF’s sales are 40% cash and 60% credit. Credit sales are collected 10% in the month of sale, 50% in the month following sale, and 36% in the second month following sale; 4% are uncollectible. LRF’s purchases are 50% cash and 50% on account. Purchases on account are paid 40% in the month of purchase, and 60% in the month following purchase.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule of expected collections from customers for March.
(b) Prepare a schedule of expected payments for direct materials for March.
p20 5a the budget committee of litwin company collects the following data 542031
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budget committee of Litwin Company collects the following data for its San Miguel Store in preparing budgeted income statements for May and June 2013.
1. Sales for May are expected to be $800,000. Sales in June and July are expected to be 10% higher than the preceding month.
2. Cost of goods sold is expected to be 75% of sales.
3. Company policy is to maintain ending merchandise inventory at 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.
4. Operating expenses are estimated to be:
|
Sales salaries
|
$30,000 per month
|
|
Advertising
|
5% of monthly sales
|
|
Delivery expense
|
3% of monthly sales
|
|
Sales commissions
|
4% of monthly sales
|
|
Rent expense
|
$5,000 per month
|
|
Depreciation
|
$800 per month
|
|
Utilities
|
$600 per month
|
|
Insurance
|
$500 per month
|
5. Income taxes are estimated to be 30% of income from operations.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for each month in columnar form.
(b) Prepare budgeted income statements for each month in columnar form. Show in the statements the details of cost of goods sold.
p20 6a krause industries balance sheet at december 31 2012 is presented below 542032
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Krause Industries’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012, is presented below.
|
KRAUSE INDUSTRIES Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 Assets
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$7,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
82,500
|
|
Finished goods inventory (2,000 units)
|
|
30,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
120,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
30,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$150,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
45,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
|
70,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
30,000
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
80,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$150,000
|
Additional information accumulated for the budgeting process is as follows.
Budgeted data for the year 2013 include the following.
|
|
4th Qtr. of 2013
|
Year 2013 Total
|
|
Sales budget (8,000 units at $35)
|
$84,000
|
$280,000
|
|
Direct materials used
|
17,000
|
69,400
|
|
Direct labor
|
12,500
|
56,600
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
10,000
|
54,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
18,000
|
76,000
|
To meet sales requirements and to have 3,000 units of finished goods on hand at December 31, 2013, the production budget shows 9,000 required units of output. The total unit cost of production is expected to be $20. Krause Industries uses the first-in, first-out (FIFO) inventory costing method. Selling and administrative expenses include $4,000 for depreciation on equipment. Interest expense is expected to be $3,500 for the year. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income before income taxes. All sales and purchases are on account. It is expected that 60% of quarterly sales are collected in cash within the quarter and the remainder is collected in the following quarter. Direct materials purchased from suppliers are paid 50% in the quarter incurred and the remainder in the following quarter. Purchases in the fourth quarter were the same as the materials used. In 2013, the company expects to purchase additional equipment costing $19,000. It expects to pay $8,000 on notes payable plus all interest due and payable to December 31 (included in interest expense $3,500, above). Accounts payable at December 31, 2013, includes amounts due suppliers (see above) plus other accounts payable of $5,700. In 2013, the company expects to declare and pay a $5,000 cash dividend. Unpaid income taxes at December 31 will be $5,000. The company’s cash budget shows an expected cash balance of $7,950 at December 31, 2013.
Instructions
Prepare a budgeted income statement for 2013 and a budgeted balance sheet at December 31, 2013. In preparing the income statement, you will need to compute cost of goods manufactured (direct materials +direct labor+manufacturing overhead) and finished goods inventory (December 31, 2013).
p20 3b ogleby industries has sales in 2012 of 5 600 000 800 000 units 542035
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ogleby Industries has sales in 2012 of $5,600,000 (800,000 units) and gross profit of $1,344,000. Management is considering two alternative budget plans to increase its gross profit in 2013. Plan A would increase the selling price per unit from $7.00 to $7.60. Sales volume would decrease by 10% from its 2012 level. Plan B would decrease the selling price per unit by 5%. The marketing department expects that the sales volume would increase by 100,000 units. At the end of 2012, Ogleby has 70,000 units on hand. If Plan A is accepted, the 2013 ending inventory should be equal to 90,000 units. If Plan B is accepted, the ending inventory should be equal to 100,000 units. Each unit produced will cost $2.00 in direct materials, $1.50 in direct labor, and $0.50 in variable overhead. The fixed overhead for 2013 should be $925,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a sales budget for 2013 under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B.
(b) Prepare a production budget for 2013 under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B.
(c) Compute the cost per unit under (1) Plan A and (2) Plan B. Explain why the cost per unit is different for each of the two plans. (Round to two decimals.)
(d) Which plan should be accepted? (Hint:Compute the gross profit under each plan.)
p20 4b derby company prepares monthly cash budgets relevant data from operating budg 542036
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Derby Company prepares monthly cash budgets. Relevant data from operating budgets for 2013 are:
|
|
January
|
February
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Direct materials purchases
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
85,000
|
115,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
60,000
|
75,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
75,000
|
80,000
|
All sales are on account. Collections are expected to be 60% in the month of sale, 30% in the first month following the sale, and 10% in the second month following the sale. Thirty percent (30%) of direct materials purchases are paid in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance due is paid in the month following the purchase. All other items above are paid in the month incurred. Depreciation has been excluded from manufacturing overhead and selling and administrative expenses.
Other data:
1. Credit sales: November 2012, $200,000; December 2012, $280,000.
2. Purchases of direct materials: December 2012, $90,000.
3. Other receipts: January—Collection of December 31, 2012, interest receivable $3,000; February—Proceeds from sale of securities $5,000.
4. Other disbursements: February—payment of $20,000 for land.
The company’s cash balance on January 1, 2013, is expected to be $50,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare schedules for (1) expected collections from customers and (2) expected payments for direct materials purchases.
(b) Prepare a cash budget for January and February in columnar form.
byp20 1 palmer corporation operates on a calendar year basis it begins the annual bu 542039
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Palmer Corporation operates on a calendar-year basis. It begins the annual budgeting process in late August when the president establishes targets for the total dollar sales and net income before taxes for the next year.
The sales target is given first to the marketing department. The marketing manager formulates a sales budget by product line in both units and dollars. From this budget, sales quotas by product line in units and dollars are established for each of the corporation’s sales districts. The marketing manager also estimates the cost of the marketing activities required to support the target sales volume and prepares a tentative marketing expense budget. The executive vice president uses the sales and profit targets, the sales budget by product line, and the tentative marketing expense budget to determine the dollar amounts that can be devoted to manufacturing and corporate office expense. The executive vice president prepares the budget for corporate expenses. She then forwards to the production department the product-line sales budget in units and the total dollar amount that can be devoted to manufacturing. The production manager meets with the factory managers to develop a manufacturing plan that will produce the required units when needed within the cost constraints set by the executive vice president. The budgeting process usually comes to a halt at this point because the production department does not consider the financial resources allocated to be adequate.
When this standstill occurs, the vice president of finance, the executive vice president, the marketing manager, and the production manager meet together to determine the final budgets for each of the areas. This normally results in a modest increase in the total amount available for manufacturing costs and cuts in the marketing expense and corporate office expense budgets. The total sales and net income figures proposed by the president are seldom changed. Although the participants are seldom pleased with the compromise, these budgets are final. Each executive then develops a new detailed budget for the operations in his or her area.
None of the areas has achieved its budget in recent years. Sales often run below the target. When budgeted sales are not achieved, each area is expected to cut costs so that the president’s profit target can be met. However, the profit target is seldom met because costs are not cut enough.
In fact, costs often run above the original budget in all functional areas (marketing, production, and corporate office). The president is disturbed that Palmer has not been able to meet the sales and profit targets. He hired a consultant with considerable experience with companies in Palmer’s industry. The consultant reviewed the budgets for the past 4 years. He concluded that the product line sales budgets were reasonable and that the cost and expense budgets were adequate for the budgeted sales and production levels.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) Discuss how the budgeting process employed by Palmer Corporation contributes to the failure to achieve the president’s sales and profit targets.
(b) Suggest how Palmer Corporation’s budgeting process could be revised to correct the problems.
(c) Should the functional areas be expected to cut their costs when sales volume falls below budget? Explain your answer.
byp20 3 network computing devices inc was founded in 1988 in mountain view californi 542041
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Network Computing Devices, Inc. was founded in 1988 in Mountain View, California. The company develops software products such as X-terminals, Z-mail, PC X-ware, and related hardware products. Presented below is a discussion by management in its annual report.
|
NETWORK COMPUTING DEVICES, INC.
Management Discussion
|
|
The Company’s operating results have varied significantly, particularly on a quarterly basis, as a result of a number of factors, including general economic conditions affecting industry demand for computer products, the timing and market acceptance of new product introductions by the Company and its competitors, the timing of significant orders from large customers, periodic changes in product pricing and discounting due to competitive factors, and the availability of key components, such as video monitors and electronic subassemblies, some of which require substantial order lead times. The Company’s operating results may fluctuate in the future as a result of these and other factors, including the Company’s success in developing and introducing new products, its product and customer mix, and the level of competition which it experiences. The Company operates with a small backlog. Sales and operating results, therefore, generally depend on the volume and timing of orders received, which are difficult to forecast. The Company has experienced slowness in orders from some customers during the first quarter of each calendar year due to budgeting cycles common in the computer industry. In addition, sales in Europe typically are adversely affected in the third calendar quarter as many European customers reduce their business activities during the month of August. Due to the Company’s rapid growth rate and the effect of new product introductions on quarterly revenues, these seasonal trends have not materially impacted the Company’s results of operations to date. However, as the Company’s product lines mature and its rate of revenue growth declines, these seasonal factors may become more evident. Additionally, the Company’s international sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, and an increase or decrease in the value of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies could make the Company’s products less or more competitive in those markets.
|
Instructions
(a) Identify the factors that affect the budgeting process at Network Computing Devices, Inc.
(b) Explain the additional budgeting concerns created by the international operations of the company.
byp20 6 you are an accountant in the budgetary projections and special projects depa 542043
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are an accountant in the budgetary, projections, and special projects department of Fernetti Conductor, Inc., a large manufacturing company. The president, Richard Brown, asks you on very short notice to prepare some sales and income projections covering the next 2 years of the company’s much heralded new product lines. He wants these projections for a series of speeches he is making while on a 2-week trip to eight East Coast brokerage firms. The president hopes to bolster Fernetti’s stock sales and price. You work 23 hours in 2 days to compile the projections, hand deliver them to the president, and are swiftly but graciously thanked as he departs. A week later, you find time to go over some of your computations and discover a miscalculation that makes the projections grossly overstated. You quickly inquire about the president’s itinerary and learn that he has made half of his speeches and has half yet to make. You are in a quandary as to what to do.
Instructions
(a) What are the consequences of telling the president of your gross miscalculations?
(b) What are the consequences of not telling the president of your gross miscalculations?
(c) What are the ethical considerations to you and the president in this situation?
byp20 7 in order to get your personal finances under control you need to prepare a p 542044
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In order to get your personal finances under control, you need to prepare a personal budget. Assume that you have compiled the following information regarding your expected cash flows for a typical month.
|
Rent payment
|
$400
|
Miscellaneous costs
|
$110
|
|
Interest income
|
50
|
Savings
|
50
|
|
Income tax withheld
|
300
|
Eating out
|
150
|
|
Electricity bill
|
22
|
Telephone and Internet costs
|
90
|
|
Groceries
|
80
|
Student loan payments
|
275
|
|
Wages earned
|
2,000
|
Entertainment costs
|
250
|
|
Insurance
|
100
|
Transportation costs
|
150
|
Instructions
Using the information above, prepare a personal budget. Just skip any unused line items.
be21 6 in the assembly department of hannon company budgeted and actual manufacturin 542089
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the Assembly Department of Hannon Company, budgeted and actual manufacturing overhead costs for the month of April 2012 were as follows.
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$15,000
|
$14,300
|
|
Indirect labor
|
20,000
|
20,600
|
|
Utilities
|
10,000
|
10,750
|
|
Supervision
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
All costs are controllable by the department manager. Prepare a responsibility report for April for the cost center.
21 3 the wellstone division operates as a profit center it reports the following for 542098
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Wellstone Division operates as a profit center. It reports the following for the year.
|
|
Budgeted
|
Actual
|
|
Sales
|
$2,000,000
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
800,000
|
750,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
550,000
|
550,000
|
|
Noncontrollable fixed costs
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
Prepare a responsibility report for the Wellstone Division at December 31, 2012.
pacific bank provides loans to businesses in the community through its commercial le 541908
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-4 Internal controls for bank lending
Pacific Bank provides loans to businesses in the community through its Commercial Lending Department. Small loans (less than $100,000) may be approved by an individual loan officer, while larger loans (greater than $100,000) must be approved by a board of loan officers. Once a loan is approved, the funds are made available to the loan applicant under agreed-upon terms. Pacific Bank has instituted a policy whereby its president has the individual authority to approve loans up to $5,000,000. The president believes that this policy will allow flexibility to approve loans to valued clients much quicker than under the previous policy.
As an internal auditor of Pacific Bank, how would you respond to this change in policy?
e19 7 quick auto has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide it provide 541920
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-7 Quick Auto has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair. Oil change–related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is, $80,000 per service outlet).
Instructions
(a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.
(b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?
e19 8 rathke delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service 541921
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-8 Rathke Delivery is a rapidly growing delivery service. Last year, 80% of its revenue came from the delivery of mailing “pouches” and small, standardized delivery boxes (which provides a 10% contribution margin). The other 20% of its revenue came from delivering non-standardized boxes (which provides a 60% contribution margin). With the rapid growth of Internet retail sales, Rathke believes that there are great opportunities for growth in the delivery of non-standardized boxes. The company has fixed costs of $12,000,000.
Instructions
(a) What is the company’s break-even point in total sales dollars? At the break-even point, how much of the company’s sales are provided by each type of service?
(b) The company’s management would like to hold its fixed costs constant, but shift its sales mix so that 60% of its revenue comes from the delivery of non-standardized boxes and the remainder from pouches and small boxes. If this were to occur, what would be the company’s break-even sales, and what amount of sales would be provided by each service type?
e19 9 green golf accessories sells golf shoes gloves and a laser 541922
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-9 Green Golf Accessories sells golf shoes, gloves, and a laser-guided range-finder that measures distance. Shown below are unit cost and sales data.
|
|
Pairs of shoes
|
Pairs of Gloves
|
Range- Finder
|
|
Unit sales price
|
$100
|
$30
|
$250
|
|
Unit variable costs
|
60
|
10
|
200
|
|
Unit contribution margin
|
$40
|
$20
|
$50
|
|
Sales mix
|
40%
|
50%
|
10%
|
Fixed costs are $620,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in units for the company.
(b) Determine the number of units to be sold at the break-even point for each product line.
(c) Verify that the mix of sales units determined in (b) will generate a zero net income.
e19 10 lake electronix sells television sets and dvd players 541923
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-10 Lake Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided binto two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter’s activity are presented below.
|
|
TV Division
|
DVD Division
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$600,000
|
$400,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
450,000
|
240,000
|
690,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$150,000
|
$160,000
|
310,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
124,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
$186,000
|
Instructions
(a) Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division.
(b) Calculate the company’s weighted-average contribution margin ratio.
(c) Calculate the company’s break-even point in dollars.
(d) Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break-even point.
e19 11 shore company manufactures and sells three products 541924
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-11 Shore Company manufactures and sells three products. Relevant per unit data concerning each product are given below.
|
|
Product
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Selling price
|
$9
|
$12
|
$14
|
|
Variable costs and expenses
|
$3
|
$9.50
|
$12
|
|
Machine hours to produce
|
2
|
1
|
2
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the contribution margin per unit of the limited resource (machine hours) for each product.
(b) Assuming 1,500 additional machine hours are available, which product should be manufactured?
(c) Prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours are
(1) divided equally among the products, and (2) allocated entirely to the product identified in (b) above.
e19 12 billings inc produces and sells three products 541925
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-12 Billings Inc. produces and sells three products. Unit data concerning each product is shown below.
|
|
Product
|
|
|
D
|
E
|
F
|
|
Selling price
|
$200
|
$300
|
$250
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
25
|
75
|
30
|
|
Other variable costs
|
105
|
90
|
148
|
The company has 2,000 hours of labor available to build inventory in anticipation of the company’s peak season. Management is trying to decide which product should be produced. The direct labor hourly rate is $10.
Instructions
(a) Determine the number of direct labor hours per unit.
(b) Determine the contribution margin per direct labor hour.
(c) Determine which product should be produced and the total contribution margin for that product.
e19 13 feld company manufactures and sells two products 541926
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-13 Feld Company manufactures and sells two products. Relevant per unit data concerning each product follow.
|
|
Product
|
|
|
Basic
|
Deluxe
|
|
Selling price
|
$40
|
$52
|
|
Variable costs
|
$18
|
$24
|
|
Machine hours
|
0.5
|
0.7
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the contribution margin per machine hour for each product.
(b) If 1,000 additional machine hours are available, which product should Feld manufacture?
(c) Prepare an analysis showing the total contribution margin if the additional hours are:
(1) Divided equally between the products.
(2) Allocated entirely to the product identified in part (b).
e19 16 an investment banker is analyzing two companies that specialize in the produc 541929
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-16 An investment banker is analyzing two companies that specialize in the production and sale of candied apples. Old Fashion Apples uses a labor-intensive approach, and Mech-Apple uses a mechanized system. CVP income statements for the two companies are shown below.
|
|
Old-Fashion Apples
|
Mech-Apple
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
320,000
|
160,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
80,000
|
240,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
20,000
|
180,000
|
|
Net income
|
$60,000
|
$60,000
|
The investment banker is interested in acquiring one of these companies. However, she is concerned about the impact that each company’s cost structure might have on its profitability.
Instructions
(a) Calculate each company’s degree of operating leverage. Determine which company’s cost structure makes it more sensitive to changes in sales volume.
(b) Determine the effect on each company’s net income if sales decrease by 10% and if sales increase by 5%. Do not prepare income statements.
(c) Which company should the investment banker acquire? Discuss.
e19 17 polk company builds custom fishing lures for sporting goods stores 541930
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
*E19-17 Polk Company builds custom fishing lures for sporting goods stores. In its first year of operations, 2012, the company incurred the following costs.
|
Variable Cost per Unit
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$7.50
|
|
Direct labor
|
$2.45
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5.75
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
$3.90
|
|
Fixed Costs per Year
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$234,650
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
$240,100
|
Polk Company sells the fishing lures for $25. During 2012, the company sold 80,000 lures and produced 95,000 lures.
Instructions
(a) Assuming the company uses variable costing, calculate Polk’s manufacturing cost per unit for 2012.
(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement for 2012.
(c) Assuming the company uses absorption costing, calculate Polk’s manufacturing cost per unit for 2012.
(d) Prepare an absorption costing income statement for 2012.
e19 18 langdon company produced 10 000 units during the past year 541931
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
*E19-18 Langdon Company produced 10,000 units during the past year, but only 9,000 of the units were sold. The following additional information is also available.
|
Direct materials used
|
$90,000
|
|
Direct labor incurred
|
$30,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$24,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$50,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
$70,000
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
$10,000
|
There was no work in process inventory at the beginning of the year, nor did Langdon have any beginning finished goods inventory.
Instructions
(a) What would be Langdon Company’s finished goods inventory cost on December 31 under variable costing?
(b) Which costing method, absorption or variable costing, would show a higher net income for the year? By what amount?
e19 19 pearson inc produces wooden crates used for shipping products by ocean liner 541932
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
*E19-19 Pearson Inc. produces wooden crates used for shipping products by ocean liner. In 2012, Pearson incurred the following costs.
|
Wood used in crate production
|
$54,000
|
|
Nails (considered insignificant and a variable expense)
|
$340
|
|
Direct labor
|
$37,000
|
|
Utilities for the plant:
|
|
|
$2,000 each month,
|
|
|
plus $0.45 for each kilowatt-hour used each month
|
|
|
Rent expense for the plant for the year
|
$21,400
|
Assume Pearson used an average 500 kilowatt-hours each month over the past year.
Instructions
(a) What is Pearson’s total manufacturing cost if it uses a variable costing approach?
(b) What is Pearson’s total manufacturing cost if it uses an absorption costing approach?
(c) What accounts for the difference in manufacturing costs between these two costing approaches?
p19 2a casper corporation has collected the following information after its first ye 541934
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-2A Casper Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,600,000 on 100,000 units; selling expenses $240,000 (40% variable and 60% fixed); direct materials $511,000; direct labor $285,000; administrative expenses $280,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed); manufacturing overhead $360,000 (70% variable and 30% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 10% next year.
Instructions
(a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)
(b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the first year.
(c) The company has a target net income of $310,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?
(d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?
(e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $104,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 30% variable and 70% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $360,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 90% variable and 10% fixed (assume total selling expense is $240,000, as above). Compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and recompute (3) the break-even point in sales dollars. Comment on the effect each of management’s proposed changes has on the break-even point.
p19 5a the following cvp income statements are available for red company and blue co 541937
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-5A The following CVP income statements are available for Red Company and Blue Company.
|
|
Red Company
|
Blue Company
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
180,000
|
80,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
220,000
|
320,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
170,000
|
270,000
|
|
Net income
|
$50,000
|
$50,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars and the margin of safety ratio for each company.
(b) Compute the degree of operating leverage for each company and interpret your results.
(c) Assuming that sales revenue increases by 20%, prepare a CVP income statement for each company.
(d) Assuming that sales revenue decreases by 20%, prepare a CVP income statement for each company.
(e) Discuss how the cost structure of these two companies affects their operating leverage and profitability.
p19 6a long beauty corporation manufactures cosmetic products that are sold through 541938
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-6A Long Beauty Corporation manufactures cosmetic products that are sold through a network of sales agents. The agents are paid a commission of 18% of sales. The income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012, is as follows.
|
LONG BEAUTY CORPORATION Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
|
$78,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
$35,100,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
8,610,000
|
43,710,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
$34,290,000
|
|
Selling and marketing expenses
|
|
|
|
Commissions
|
$14,040,000
|
|
|
Fixed costs
|
10,260,000
|
24,300,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
$9,990,000
|
The company is considering hiring its own sales staff to replace the network of agents. It will pay its salespeople a commission of 8% and incur additional fixed costs of $7.8 million.
Instructions
(a) Under the current policy of using a network of sales agents, calculate the Long Beauty Corporation’s break-even point in sales dollars for the year 2012.
(b) Calculate the company’s break-even point in sales dollars for the year 2012 if it hires its own sales force to replace the network of agents.
(c) Calculate the degree of operating leverage at sales of $78 million if (1) Long Beauty uses sales agents, and (2) Long Beauty employs its own sales staff. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative.
(d) Calculate the estimated sales volume in sales dollars that would generate an identical net income for the year ending December 31, 2012, regardless of whether Long Beauty Corporation employs its own sales staff and pays them an 8% commission or continues to use the independent network of agents. (CMA-Canada adapted)
p19 7a coswell company produces plastic that is used for injection molding applicat 541939
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-7A Coswell Company produces plastic that is used for injection-molding applications such as gears for small motors. In 2011, the first year of operations, Coswell produced 4,000 tons of plastic and sold 3,000 tons. In 2012, the production and sales results were exactly reversed. In each year, the selling price per ton was $2,000, variable manufacturing costs were 15% of the sales price of units produced, variable selling expenses were 10% of the selling price of units sold, fixed manufacturing costs were $2,400,000, and fixed administrative expenses were $600,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare income statements for each year using variable costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-5.)
(b) Prepare income statements for each year using absorption costing. (Use the format from Illustration 19A-4.)
(c) Reconcile the differences each year in net income under the two costing approaches.
(d) Comment on the effects of production and sales on net income under the two costing approaches.
p19 8a tanck electric motors is a division of tanck electric products corporation 541940
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
*P19-8A Tanck Electric Motors is a division of Tanck Electric Products Corporation. The division manufactures and sells an electric motor used in a wide variety of applications. During the coming year it expects to sell 50,000 units for $30 per unit. Kerry Starr is the division manager. She is considering producing either 50,000 or 80,000 units during the period. Other information is presented in the schedule.
|
Division Information for 2012
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Expected sales in units
|
50,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$30
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs per unit
|
$12
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead costs (total)
|
$400,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead costs per unit:
|
$8 per unit ($400,000 + 50,000)
|
|
Based on 50,000 units
|
$5 per unit ($400,000 + 80,000)
|
|
Based on 80,000 units
|
|
|
Manufacturing cost per unit:
|
|
|
Based on 50,000 units
|
$ 20 per unit ($12 variable + $8 fixed)
|
|
Based on 80,000 units
|
$ 17 per unit ($12 variable + $5 fixed)
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
$2
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses (total)
|
$40,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an absorption costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 50,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 80,000 units are produced.
(b) Prepare a variable costing income statement, with one column showing the results if 50,000 units are produced and one column showing the results if 80,000 units are produced.
(c) Reconcile the difference in net incomes under the two approaches and explain what accounts for this difference.
(d) Discuss the relative usefulness of the variable costing income statements versus the absorption costing income statements for decision making and for evaluating the manager’s performance.
p19 1b keppel manufacturing had a bad year in 2012 operating at a loss for the first 541941
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-1B Keppel Manufacturing had a bad year in 2012, operating at a loss for the first time in its history. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 200,000 units of product: net sales $2,000,000; total costs and expenses $2,120,000; and net loss $120,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the following.
|
|
Total
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$1,295,000
|
$975,000
|
$320,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
575,000
|
325,000
|
250,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
250,000
|
100,000
|
150,000
|
|
|
$2,120,000
|
$1,400,000
|
$720,000
|
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2013.
1. Increase unit selling price 30% with no change in costs and expenses.
2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $170,000 to total salaries of $50,000 plus a 6% commission on net sales.
3. Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 40:60.
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action. Which course of action do you recommend? (Round to the nearest dollar.)
p19 2b mccune corporation has collected the following information after its first ye 541942
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-2B McCune Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,000,000 on 50,000 units; selling expenses $200,000 (30% variable and 70% fixed); direct materials $300,000; direct labor $170,000; administrative expenses $250,000 (30% variable and 70% fixed); manufacturing overhead $240,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 20% next year.
Instructions
(a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and
(2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)
(b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year.
(c) The company has a target net income of $187,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?
(d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?
(e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $70,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 10% variable and 90% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $240,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 80% variable and 20% fixed (assume total selling expense is $200,000, as above). Compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and (3) recompute the break-even point in sales dollars. Comment on the effect each of management’s proposed changes has on the break-even point.
p19 3b lorge corporation manufactures and sells three different models of exterior d 541943
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-3B Lorge Corporation manufactures and sells three different models of exterior doors. Although the doors vary in terms of quality and features, all are good sellers. Lorge is currently operating at full capacity with limited machine time. Sales and production information relevant to each model is shown on the next page.
|
|
Product
|
|
|
Economy
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Selling price
|
$270
|
$450
|
$650
|
|
Variable costs and expenses
|
$150
|
$261
|
$425
|
|
Machine hours required
|
0.6
|
0.9
|
1.2
|
Instructions
(a) Ignoring the machine time constraint, which single product should Lorge produce?
(b) What is the contribution margin per unit of limited resource for each product?
(c) If additional machine time could be obtained, how should the additional time be used?
the following selected transactions were completed by air systems company during jan 541790
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 5-38 Journal entries using the periodic inventory system
The following selected transactions were completed by Air Systems Company during January of the current year. Air Systems Company uses the periodic inventory system.
Jan. 2. Purchased $18,200 of merchandise on account, FOB shipping point, terms 2/15, n/30.
5. Paid freight of $190 on the January 2 purchase.
6. Returned $2,750 of the merchandise purchased on January 2.
13. Sold merchandise on account, $37,300, FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $22,400.
15. Paid freight of $215 for the merchandise sold on January 13.
17. Paid for the purchase of January 2 less the return and discount.
23. Received payment on account for the sale of January 13 less the discount.
Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Air Systems Company.
united rug company is a small rug retailer owned and operated by pat kirwan after th 541792
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ex 5-40 Closing entries using periodic inventory system
United Rug Company is a small rug retailer owned and operated by Pat Kirwan. After the accounts have been adjusted on December 31, the following selected account balances were taken from the ledger:
|
Advertising Expense
|
$36,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
13,000
|
|
Dividends
|
65,000
|
|
Freight In
|
17,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory, December
|
375,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory, December
|
460,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
9,000
|
|
Purchases
|
1,760,000
|
|
Purchases Discounts
|
35,000
|
|
Purchases Returns and Allowances
|
45,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
375,000
|
|
Sales
|
2,300,000
|
|
Sales Discounts
|
30,000
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
50,000
|
the following selected transactions were completed by capers company during october 541793
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-1A Purchase-related transactions
The following selected transactions were completed by Capers Company during October of the current year:
|
Oct. 1.
|
Purchased merchandise from UK Imports Co., $14,448, terms FOB destination, n/30.
|
|
3
|
Purchased merchandise from Hoagie Co., $9,950, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/eom. Prepaid freight of $220 was added to the invoice.
|
|
4
|
Purchased merchandise from Taco Co., $13,650, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.
|
|
6
|
Issued debit memo to Taco Co. for $4,550 of merchandise returned from purchase on October 4.
|
|
13
|
Paid Hoagie Co. for invoice of October 3, less discount.
|
|
14
|
Paid Taco Co. for invoice of October 4, less debit memo of October 6 and discount.
|
|
19
|
Purchased merchandise from Veggie Co., $27,300, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom.
|
|
19
|
Paid freight of $400 on October 19 purchase from Veggie Co.
|
|
20
|
Purchased merchandise from Caesar Salad Co., $22,000, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30.
|
|
30
|
Paid Caesar Salad Co. for invoice of October 20, less discount.
|
|
31
|
Paid UK Imports Co. for invoice of October 1.
|
|
31
|
Paid Veggie Co. for invoice of October 19.
|
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Capers Company for October.
the following selected transactions were completed by amsterdam supply co which sell 541794
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-2A Sales-related transactions
The following selected transactions were completed by Amsterdam Supply Co., which sells office supplies primarily to wholesalers and occasionally to retail customers:
|
Mar. 2.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Equinox Co., $18,900, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $13,300.
|
|
3
|
Sold merchandise for $11,350 plus 6% sales tax to retail cash customers. The cost of merchandise sold was $7,000.
|
|
4
|
Sold merchandise on account to Empire Co., $55,400, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of merchandise sold was $33,200.
|
|
5
|
Sold merchandise for $30,000 plus 6% sales tax to retail customers who used MasterCard. The cost of merchandise sold was $19,400.
|
|
12
|
Received check for amount due from Equinox Co. for sale on March 2.
|
|
14
|
Sold merchandise to customers who used American Express cards, $13,700. The cost of merchandise sold was $8,350.
|
|
16
|
Sold merchandise on account to Targhee Co., $27,500, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $16,000.
|
|
18
|
Issued credit memo for $4,800 to Targhee Co. for merchandise returned from sale on March 16. The cost of the merchandise returned was $2,900.
|
|
19
|
Sold merchandise on account to Vista Co., $8,250, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Added $75 to the invoice for prepaid freight. The cost of merchandise sold was $5,000.
|
|
26
|
Received check for amount due from Targhee Co. for sale on March 16 less credit memo of March 18 and discount.
|
|
28
|
Received check for amount due from Vista Co. for sale of March 19.
|
|
31
|
Received check for amount due from Empire Co. for sale of March 4.
|
|
31
|
Paid Fleetwood Delivery Service $5,600 for merchandise delivered during March to customers under shipping terms of FOB destination.
|
|
Apr. 3
|
Paid City Bank $940 for service fees for handling MasterCard and American Express sales during March.
|
|
15.
|
Paid $6,544 to state sales tax division for taxes owed on sales.
|
the following were selected from among the transactions completed by babcock company 541795
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-3A Sales-related and purchase-related transactions
The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Babcock Company during November of the current year:
|
Nov. 3.
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Moonlight Co., list price $85,000, trade discount 25%, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.
|
|
4
|
Sold merchandise for cash, $37,680. The cost of the merchandise sold was $22,600.
|
|
5
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Papoose Creek Co., $47,500, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30, with prepaid freight of $810 added to the invoice.
|
|
6
|
Returned $13,500 ($18,000 list price less trade discount of 25%) of merchandise purchased on November 3 from Moonlight Co.
|
|
11
|
Sold merchandise on account to Quinn Co., list price $24,000, trade discount 35%, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $9,400.
|
|
13
|
Paid Moonlight Co. on account for purchase of November 3, less return of November 6 and discount.
|
|
14
|
Sold merchandise on VISA, $236,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $140,000.
|
|
15
|
Paid Papoose Creek Co. on account for purchase of November 5, less discount.
|
|
21
|
Received cash on account from sale of November 11 to Quinn Co., less discount.
|
|
24
|
Sold merchandise on account to Rabel Co., $56,900, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $34,000.
|
|
28
|
Paid VISA service fee of $3,540.
|
|
30
|
Received merchandise returned by Rabel Co. from sale on November 24, $8,400. The cost of the returned merchandise was $5,000.
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
the following selected transactions were completed during august between summit comp 541796
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-4A Sales-related and purchase-related transactions for seller and buyer
The following selected transactions were completed during August between Summit Company and Beartooth Co.:
Aug. 1. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Beartooth Co., $48,000, terms FOB destination, 2/15, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $28,800.
2. Summit Company paid freight of $1,150 for delivery of merchandise sold to Beartooth Co. on August 1.
5. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Beartooth Co., $66,000, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $40,000.
6. Beartooth Co. returned $10,500 of merchandise purchased on account on August 1 from Summit Company. The cost of the merchandise returned was $6,300.
9. Bear tooth Co. paid freight of $2,300 on August 5 purchase from Summit Company.
15. Summit Company sold merchandise on account to Bear tooth Co., $58,700, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. Summit Company paid freight of $1,675, which was added to the invoice. The cost of the merchandise sold was $35,000.
16. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company for purchase of August 1, less discount and less return of August 6.
25. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company on account for purchase of August 15, less discount.
31. Bear tooth Co. paid Summit Company on account for purchase of August 5.
Instructions
Journalize the August transactions for (1) Summit Company and (2) Bear tooth Co.
the following selected accounts and their current balances appear in the ledger of g 541797
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-5A Multiple-step income statement and report form of balance sheet
The following selected accounts and their current balances appear in the ledger of Gloucester Co. for the fiscal year ended August 31, 2014:
|
Cash
|
$125,000
|
Sales
|
$4,576,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
335,000
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
31,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
380,000
|
Sales Discounts
|
28,000
|
|
Office Supplies
|
12,000
|
Cost of Merchandise Sold
|
2,650,000
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,000
|
Sales Salaries Expense
|
745,000
|
|
Office Equipment
|
275,000
|
Advertising Expense
|
205,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
Depreciation Expense—
|
|
Office Equipment
|
187,000
|
Store Equipment
|
40,000
|
|
Store Equipment
|
859,000
|
Miscellaneous Selling Expense
|
18,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
410,000
|
|
Store Equipment
|
293,000
|
Rent Expense
|
60,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
193,000
|
Depreciation Expense—
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
12,000
|
Office Equipment
|
30,000
|
|
Note Payable
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
18,000
|
|
(final payment due 2037)
|
400,000
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
11,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
125,000
|
Miscellaneous Administrative Exp.
|
8,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
550,000
|
Interest Expense
|
12,000
|
|
Dividends
|
75,000
|
|
|
Instructions
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement.
3. Prepare a report form of balance sheet, assuming that the current portion of the note payable is $16,000.
4. Briefly explain (a) how multiple-step and single-step income statements differ and (b) how report-form and account-form balance sheets differ.
periodic inventory accounts multiple step income statement closing entries on decemb 541799
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-10A Periodic inventory accounts, multiple-step income statement, closing entries On December 31, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Wyman Company are as follows:
|
Cash
|
$13,500
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
$46,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
72,000
|
Sales Discounts
|
29,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory,
|
|
Purchases
|
$2,650,000
|
|
1-Jan-14
|
257,000
|
Purchases Returns and Allowances
|
93,000
|
|
Office Supplies
|
3,000
|
Purchases Discounts
|
37,000
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,500
|
Freight In
|
48,000
|
|
Land
|
150,000
|
Sales Salaries Expense
|
300,000
|
|
Store Equipment
|
270,000
|
Advertising Expense
|
45,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
Delivery Expense
|
9,000
|
|
Store Equipment
|
55,900
|
Depreciation Expense—
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
78,500
|
Store Equipment
|
6,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
Miscellaneous Selling Expense
|
12,000
|
|
Office Equipment
|
16,000
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
175,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
27,800
|
Rent Expense
|
28,000
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
3,000
|
Insurance Expense
|
3,000
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
8,300
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
2,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
50,000
|
Depreciation Expense—
|
|
|
Capital Stock
|
150,000
|
Office Equipment
|
1,500
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
430,500
|
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense
|
3,500
|
|
Dividends
|
25,000
|
Rent Revenue
|
7,000
|
|
Sales
|
3,355,000
|
Interest Expense
|
2,000
|
Instructions
1. Does Wyman Company use a periodic or perpetual inventory system? Explain.
2. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for Wyman Company for the year ended December 31, 2014. The merchandise inventory as of December 31, 2014, was $305,000.
3. Prepare the closing entries for Wyman Company as of December 31, 2014.
4. What would be the net income if the perpetual inventory system had been used?
the following selected transactions were completed by niles co during march of the c 541800
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-1B Purchase-related transactions
The following selected transactions were completed by Niles Co. during March of the current year:
|
Mar. 1.
|
Purchased merchandise from Haas Co., $43,250, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/eom. Prepaid freight of $650 was added to the invoice.
|
|
5.
|
Purchased merchandise from Whitman Co., $19,175, terms FOB destination, n/30.
|
|
10.
|
Paid Haas Co. for invoice of March 1, less discount.
|
|
13.
|
Purchased merchandise from Jost Co., $15,550, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.
|
|
14.
|
Issued debit memo to Jost Co. for $3,750 of merchandise returned from purchase on March 13.
|
|
18.
|
Purchased merchandise from Fairhurst Company, $13,560, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom.
|
|
18.
|
Paid freight of $140 on March 18 purchase from Fairhurst Company.
|
|
19.
|
Purchased merchandise from Bickle Co., $6,500, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.
|
|
23.
|
Paid Jost Co. for invoice of March 13, less debit memo of March 14 and discount.
|
|
29.
|
Paid Bickle Co. for invoice of March 19, less discount.
|
|
31.
|
Paid Fairhurst Company for invoice of March 18.
|
|
31.
|
Paid Whitman Co. for invoice of March 5.
|
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Niles Co. for March.
the following selected transactions were completed by green lawn supplies co which s 541801
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-2B Sales-related transactions
The following selected transactions were completed by Green Lawn Supplies Co., which sells irrigation supplies primarily to wholesalers and occasionally to retail customers:
|
July 1.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Landscapes Co., $33,450, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of merchandise sold was $20,000.
|
|
2.
|
Sold merchandise for $86,000 plus 8% sales tax to retail cash customers. The cost of merchandise sold was $51,600.
|
|
5.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Peacock Company, $17,500, terms FOB destination, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $10,000.
|
|
8.
|
Sold merchandise for $112,000 plus 8% sales tax to retail customers who used VISA cards. The cost of merchandise sold was $67,200.
|
|
13.
|
Sold merchandise to customers who used MasterCard cards, $96,000. The cost of merchandise sold was $57,600.
|
|
14.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Loeb Co., $16,000, terms FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30. The cost of merchandise sold was $9,000.
|
|
15.
|
Received check for amount due from Peacock Company for sale on July 5.
|
|
16.
|
Issued credit memo for $3,000 to Loeb Co. for merchandise returned from sale on July 14. The cost of the merchandise returned was $1,800.
|
|
18.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Jennings Company, $11,350, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Paid $475 for freight and added it to the invoice. The cost of merchandise sold was $6,800.
|
|
24.
|
Received check for amount due from Loeb Co. for sale on July 14 less credit memo of July 16 and discount.
|
|
28.
|
Received check for amount due from Jennings Company for sale of July 18.
|
|
31.
|
Paid Black Lab Delivery Service $8,550 for merchandise delivered during July to customers under shipping terms of FOB destination.
|
|
31.
|
Received check for amount due from Landscapes Co. for sale of July 1.
|
|
Aug. 3.
|
Paid Hays Federal Bank $3,770 for service fees for handling MasterCard and VISA sales during July.
|
|
10.
|
Paid $41,260 to state sales tax division for taxes owed on sales.
|
Instructions
Journalize the entries to record the transactions of Green Lawn Supplies Co.
the following were selected from among the transactions completed by essex company d 541802
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-3B Sales-related and purchase-related transactions
The following were selected from among the transactions completed by Essex Company during July of the current year:
|
July 3.
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Hamling Co., list price $72,000, trade discount 15%, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30, with prepaid freight of $1,450 added to the invoice.
|
|
5.
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Kester Co., $33,450, terms FOB destination, 2/10, n/30.
|
|
6.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Parsley Co., list price $45,000, trade discount 33%, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $25,000.
|
|
7.
|
Returned $6,850 of merchandise purchased on July 5 from Kester Co.
|
|
13.
|
Paid Hamling Co. on account for purchase of July 3, less discount.
|
|
15.
|
Paid Kester Co. on account for purchase of July 5, less return of July 7 and discount.
|
|
16.
|
Received cash on account from sale of July 6 to Parsley Co., less discount.
|
|
19.
|
Sold merchandise on MasterCard, $108,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $64,800.
|
|
22.
|
Sold merchandise on account to Tabor Co., $16,650, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $10,000.
|
|
23.
|
Sold merchandise for cash, $91,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $55,000.
|
|
28.
|
Received merchandise returned by Tabor Co. from sale on July 22, $3,600.
|
|
31.
|
The cost of the returned merchandise was $2,000. Paid MasterCard service fee of $1,650.
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions
the following selected transactions were completed during april between swan company 541803
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 5-4B Sales-related and purchase-related transactions for seller and buyer
The following selected transactions were completed during April between Swan Company and Bird Company:
|
Apr. 2.
|
Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $32,000, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30. Swan Company paid freight of $330, which was added to the invoice. The cost of the merchandise sold was $19,200.
|
|
8.
|
Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $49,500, terms FOB destination, 1/15, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $29,700.
|
|
8.
|
Swan Company paid freight of $710 for delivery of merchandise sold to Bird Company on April 8.
|
|
12.
|
Bird Company returned $7,500 of merchandise purchased on account on April 8 from Swan Company. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4,800.
|
|
12.
|
Bird Company paid Swan Company for purchase of April 2, less discount.
|
|
23.
|
Bird Company paid Swan Company for purchase of April 8, less discount and less return of April 12.
|
|
24.
|
Swan Company sold merchandise on account to Bird Company, $67,350, terms FOB shipping point, n/eom. The cost of the merchandise sold was $40,400.
|
|
26.
|
Bird Company paid freight of $875 on April 24 purchase from Swan Company.
|
|
30.
|
Bird Company paid Swan Company on account for purchase of April 24.
|
Instructions
Journalize the April transactions for (1) Swan Company and (2) Bird Company.
palisade creek co is a merchandising business the account balances for palisade cree 541810
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Palisade Creek Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Palisade Creek Co. as of May 1, 2014 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 83,600
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
233,900
|
|
115
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
602,400
|
|
116
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
16,800
|
|
117
|
Store Supplies
|
11,400
|
|
123
|
Store Equipment
|
569,500
|
|
124
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment
|
56,700
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
96,600
|
|
211
|
Salaries Payable
|
—
|
|
310
|
Capital Stock
|
100,000
|
|
311
|
Retained Earnings
|
585,300
|
|
312
|
Dividends
|
135,000
|
|
313
|
Income Summary
|
—
|
|
410
|
Sales
|
5,221,100
|
|
411
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
92,700
|
|
412
|
Sales Discounts
|
59,400
|
|
510
|
Cost of Merchandise Sold
|
2,823,000
|
|
520
|
Sales Salaries Expense
|
664,800
|
|
521
|
Advertising Expense
|
281,000
|
|
522
|
Depreciation Expense
|
—
|
|
523
|
Store Supplies Expense
|
—
|
|
529
|
Miscellaneous Selling Expense
|
12,600
|
|
530
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
382,100
|
|
531
|
Rent Expense
|
83,700
|
|
532
|
Insurance Expense
|
—
|
|
539
|
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense
|
7,800
|
During May, the last month of the fiscal year, the following transactions were completed:
May 1. Paid rent for May, $5,000.
3. Purchased merchandise on account from Martin Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $36,000.
4. Paid freight on purchase of May 3, $600.
6. Sold merchandise on account to Korman Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $68,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $41,000.
7. Received $22,300 cash from Halstad Co. on account, no discount.
10. Sold merchandise for cash, $54,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $32,000.
13. Paid for merchandise purchased on May 3, less discount.
14. Received merchandise returned on sale of May 6, $13,500. The cost of the merchandise returned was $8,000.
15. Paid advertising expense for last half of May, $11,000.
16. Received cash from sale of May 6, less return of May 14 and discount.
19. Purchased merchandise for cash, $18,700.
19. Paid $33,450 to Buttons Co. on account, no discount.
Record the following transactions on Page 21 of the journal.
20. Sold merchandise on account to Crescent Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $110,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $70,000.
21. For the convenience of Crescent Co., paid freight on sale of May 20, $2,300.
21. Received $42,900 cash from Gee Co. on account, no discount.
21. Purchased merchandise on account from Osterman Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $88,000.
24. Returned $5,000 of damaged merchandise purchased on May 21, receiving credit from the seller.
May 26. Refunded cash on sales made for cash, $7,500. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4,800.
28. Paid sales salaries of $56,000 and office salaries of $29,000.
29. Purchased store supplies for cash, $2,400.
30. Sold merchandise on account to Turner Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $78,750. The cost of the merchandise sold was $47,000.
30. Received cash from sale of May 20, less discount, plus freight paid on May 21.
31. Paid for purchase of May 21, less return of May 24 and discount.
Instructions
1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account. Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (*) in the Posting Reference column. Journalize the transactions for July, starting on Page 20 of the journal.
2. Post the journal to the general ledger, extending the month-end balances to the appropriate balance columns after all posting is completed. In this problem, you are not required to update or post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of May, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete (5) and (6).
|
a. Merchandise inventory on May 31
|
|
$550,000
|
|
b. Insurance expired during the year
|
|
12,000
|
|
c. Store supplies on hand on May 31
|
|
4,000
|
|
d. Depreciation for the current year
|
|
14,000
|
|
e. Accrued salaries on May 31:
|
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$7,000
|
|
|
Office salaries
|
6,600
|
13,600
|
5. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on a 10-column end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet), and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries on Page 23 of the journal. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance in the retained earnings account.
10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
rustic furniture co is owned and operated by cam pfeifer the following is an excerpt 541812
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 5-2 Purchases discounts and accounts payable
Rustic Furniture Co. is owned and operated by Cam Pfeifer. The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Cam Pfeifer and Mitzi Wheeler, the chief accountant for Rustic Furniture Co. Cam: Mitzi, I’ve got a question about this recent balance sheet.
Mitzi: Sure, what’s your question? Cam: Well, as you know, I’m applying for a bank loan to finance our new store in Garden Grove, and I noticed that the accounts payable are listed as $320,000.
Mitzi: That’s right. Approximately $275,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.
Cam: That’s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.
Mitzi: That’s right. I can’t remember the last time we missed a discount.
Cam: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let’s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $314,500, rather than $320,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.
How would you respond to Cam Pfeifer’s request?
mark is debating whether to buy a stereo system from tru sound systems a locally own 541813
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 5-3 Determining cost of purchase
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Mark Loomis and Krista Huff.
Mark is debating whether to buy a stereo system from Tru-Sound Systems, a locally owned electronics store, or Wholesale Stereo, an online electronics company.
Mark: Krista, I don’t know what to do about buying my new stereo.
Krista: What’s the problem?
Mark: Well, I can buy it locally at Tru-Sound Systems for $1,175.00. However, Wholesale Stereo has the same system listed for $1,200.00.
Krista: What’s the big deal? Buy it from Tru-Sound Systems.
Mark: It’s not quite that simple. Wholesale Stereo charges $49.99 for shipping and handling. If I have them send it next-day air, it’ll cost $89.99 for shipping and handling.
Krista: So?
Mark: But, that’s not all. Tru-Sound Systems will give an additional 2% discount if I pay cash. Otherwise, they will let me use my VISA, or I can pay it off in three monthly installments. In addition, if I buy it from Tru-Sound Systems, I have to pay 9% sales tax. I won’t have to pay sales tax if I buy it from Wholesale Stereo, since they are out of state.
Krista: Anything else?
Mark: Well . . . Wholesale Stereo says I have to charge it on my VISA. They don’t accept checks.
Krista: I am not surprised. Many online stores don’t accept checks.
Mark: I give up. What would you do?
1. Assuming that Wholesale Stereo doesn’t charge sales tax on the sale to Mark, which company is offering the best buy?
2. What might be some considerations other than price that might influence Mark’s decision on where to buy the stereo system?
your sister operates watercraft supply company an online boat parts distributorship 541814
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CP 5-4 Sales discounts
Your sister operates Watercraft Supply Company, an online boat parts distributorship that is in its third year of operation. The income statement shown on the next page was recently prepared for the year ended October 31, 2014.
|
Watercraft Supply Company Income Statement For the Year Ended October 31, 2014
|
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
|
$1,350,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
15,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
$1,365,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
$810,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
140,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
90,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
1,044,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 321,000
|
Your sister is considering a proposal to increase net income by offering sales discounts of 2/15, n/30, and by shipping all merchandise FOB shipping point. Currently, no sales discounts are allowed and merchandise is shipped FOB destination. It is estimated that these credit terms will increase net sales by 10%. The ratio of the cost of merchandise sold to net sales is expected to be 60%. All selling and administrative expenses are expected to remain unchanged, except for store supplies, miscellaneous selling, office supplies, and miscellaneous administrative expenses, which are expected to increase proportionately with increased net sales. The amounts of these preceding items for the year ended October 31, 2014, were as follows:
|
Store supplies expense
|
$12,000
|
|
Miscellaneous selling expense
|
6,000
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
3,000
|
|
Miscellaneous administrative expense
|
2,500
|
The other income and other expense items will remain unchanged. The shipment of all merchandise FOB shipping point will eliminate all delivery expenses, which for the year ended October 31, 2014, were $12,000.
1. Prepare a projected single-step income statement for the year ending October 31, 2015, based on the proposal. Assume all sales are collected within the discount period.
2. a. Based on the projected income statement in (1), would you recommend the implementation of the proposed changes?
b. Describe any possible concerns you may have related to the proposed changes described in (1).
the following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of eves comp 541900
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 7-3A Bank reconciliation
The following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of Eves Company:
|
Balance per bank
|
$13,450
|
|
Balance per company records
|
11,655
|
|
Bank service charges
|
45
|
|
Deposit in transit
|
3,000
|
|
NSF check
|
1,800
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
6,640
|
a. What is the adjusted balance on the bank reconciliation?
b. Journalize any necessary entries for Eves Company based on the bank reconciliation.
the following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of conway co 541901
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE 7-3B Bank reconciliation
The following data were gathered to use in reconciling the bank account of Conway Company:
|
Balance per bank
|
$23,900
|
|
Balance per company records
|
8,700
|
|
Bank service charges
|
50
|
|
Deposit in transit
|
5,500
|
|
Note collected by bank with $450 interest
|
9,450
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
11,300
|
a. What is the adjusted balance on the bank reconciliation?
b. Journalize any necessary entries for Conway Company based on the bank reconciliation.
madonna epstein has recently been hired as the manager of beans coffee shop beans co 541906
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-2 Internal controls
Madonna Epstein has recently been hired as the manager of Beans Coffee Shop. Beans Coffee Shop is a national chain of franchised coffee shops. During her first month as store manager, Madonna encountered the following internal control situations:
a. Beans Coffee Shop has one cash register. Prior to Madonna’s joining the coffee shop, each employee working on a shift would take a customer order, accept payment, and then prepare the order. Madonna made one employee on each shift responsible for taking orders and accepting the customer’s payment. Other employees prepare the orders.
b. Since only one employee uses the cash register, that employee is responsible for counting the cash at the end of the shift and verifying that the cash in the drawer matches the amount of cash sales recorded by the cash register. Madonna expects each cashier to balance the drawer to the penny every time—no exceptions.
c. Madonna caught an employee putting a case of 500 single-serving tea bags in her car. Not wanting to create a scene, Madonna smiled and said, “I don’t think you’re putting those tea bags on the right shelf. Don’t they belong inside the coffee shop?”
The employee returned the tea bags to the stockroom.
State whether you agree or disagree with Madonna’s method of handling each situation and explain your answer.
clothing is a retail store specializing in women rsquo s clothing the store has esta 541907
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 7-3 Internal controls
Ramona’s Clothing is a retail store specializing in women’s clothing. The store has established a liberal return policy for the holiday season in order to encourage gift purchases. Any item purchased during November and December may be returned through January 31, with a receipt, for cash or exchange. If the customer does not have a receipt, cash will still be refunded for any item under $75. If the item is more than $75, a check is mailed to the customer.
Whenever an item is returned, a store clerk completes a return slip, which the customer signs. The return slip is placed in a special box. The store manager visits the return counter approximately once every two hours to authorize the return slips. Clerks are instructed to place the returned merchandise on the proper rack on the selling floor as soon as possible.
This year, returns at Ramona’s Clothing have reached an all-time high. There are a large number of returns under $75 without receipts.
a. How can sales clerks employed at Ramona’s Clothing use the store’s return policy to steal money from the cash register?
b. What internal control weaknesses do you see in the return policy that make cash thefts easier?
c. Would issuing a store credit in place of a cash refund for all merchandise returned without a receipt reduce the possibility of theft? List some advantages and disadvantages of issuing a store credit in place of a cash refund.
d. Assume that Ramona’s Clothing is committed to the current policy of issuing cash refunds without a receipt. What changes could be made in the store’s procedures regarding customer refunds in order to improve internal control?
for the past several years jeff horton has operated a part time consulting business 541730
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete accounting cycle
For the past several years, Jeff Horton has operated a part-time consulting business from his home. As of April 1, 2014, Jeff decided to move to rented quarters and to operate the business, which was to be known as Rosebud Consulting, on a full-time basis. Rosebud Consulting entered into the following transactions during April:
Apr. 1. The following assets were received from Jeff Horton in exchange for capital stock: cash, $20,000; accounts receivable, $14,700; supplies, $3,300; and office equipment, $12,000. There were no liabilities received.
1. Paid three months’ rent on a lease rental contract, $6,000.
2. Paid the premiums on property and casualty insurance policies, $4,200.
4. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $9,400.
5. Purchased additional office equipment on account from Smith Office Supply Co.,$8,000.
6. Received cash from clients on account, $11,700.
10. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $350.
12. Paid Smith Office Supply Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $6,400.
12. Recorded services provided on account for the period April 1–12, $21,900.
14. Paid receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $1,650.
Record the following transactions on Page 2 of the journal.
17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period April 1–16, $6,600.
18. Paid cash for supplies, $725.
20. Recorded services provided on account for the period April 13–20, $16,800.
24. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period April 17–24, $4,450.
26. Received cash from clients on account, $26,500.
27. Paid receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $1,650.
29. Paid telephone bill for April, $540.
30. Paid electricity bill for April, $760.
30. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period April 25–30, $5,160.
30. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of April, $2,590.
30. Paid dividends of $18,000.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal starting referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited.
(Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)
|
11 Cash
|
31 Capital Stock
|
|
12 Accounts Receivable
|
32 Retained Earnings
|
|
14 Supplies
|
33 Dividends
|
|
15 Prepaid Rent
|
41 Fees Earned
|
|
16 Prepaid Insurance
|
51 Salary Expense
|
|
18 Office Equipment
|
52 Supplies Expense
|
|
19 Accumulated Depreciation
|
53 Rent Expense
|
|
21 Accounts Payable
|
54 Depreciation Expense
|
|
22 Salaries Payable
|
55 Insurance Expense
|
|
23 Unearned Fees
|
59 miscellaneous Expense
|
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts.
- Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
- At the end of April, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).
- Insurance expired during April is $350.
- Supplies on hand on April 30 are $1,225.
- Depreciation of office equipment for April is $400.
- Accrued receptionist salary on April 30 is $275.
- Rent expired during April is $2,000.
- Unearned fees on April 30 are $2,350.
- (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
- Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries of the journal.
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries of the journal. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
the unadjusted trial balance of ps music as of july 31 2014 along with the adjustmen 541731
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of PS Music as of July 31, 2014, along with the adjustment data for the two months ended July 31, 2014, are shown in Chapter 3. Based upon the adjustment data, the adjusted trial balance shown below was prepared.
|
PS Music Adjusted Trial Balance July 31, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash
|
9,945
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
275
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,475
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
7,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
50
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
8,350
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
140
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
3,600
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
9,000
|
|
Dividends
|
1,750
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
21,200
|
|
Music Expense
|
3,610
|
|
|
Wages Expense
|
2,940
|
|
|
Office Rent Expense
|
2,550
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
Equipment Rent Expense
|
1,375
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
1,215
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
925
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
225
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
50
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,855
|
|
|
42,340
|
42,340
|
Instructions
- Prepare an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet).
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Journalize and post the closing entries. The income summary account is #34 in the ledger of PS Music. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
- Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
kelly pitney began her consulting business kelly consulting p c on april 1 2014 the 541732
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly Pitney began her consulting business, Kelly Consulting, P.C., on April 1, 2014. The accounting cycle for Kelly Consulting for April, including financial statements, During May, Kelly Consulting entered into the following transactions:
May 3. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $4,500.
5. Received cash from clients on account, $2,450.
9. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $225.
13. Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $640.
15. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1–15, $9,180.
16. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 30, $750.
17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1–16, $8,360.
Record the following transactions on Page 6 of the journal.
20. Purchased supplies on account, $735.
21. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16–20, $4,820.
25. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17–23, 7,900.
27. Received cash from clients on account, $9,520.
28. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
30. Paid telephone bill for May, $260.
31. Paid electricity bill for May, $810.
31. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 26–31, $3,300.
31. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,650.
31. Paid dividends, $10,500.
Instructions
1. The chart of accounts for Kelly Consulting and the post-closing trial balance as of April 30, 2014, is shown on page 171. For each account in the post-closing trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four-column account. Date the balances May 1, 2014, and place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column. Journalize each of the May transactions in a two column journal starting on Page 5 of the journal and using Kelly Consulting’s chart of accounts. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of May, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).a. Insurance expired during May is $275.b. Supplies on hand on May 31 are $715. c. Depreciation of office equipment for May is $330. d. Accrued receptionist salary on May 31 is $325. e. Rent expired during May is $1,600. f. Unearned fees on May 31 are $3,210.
5. (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries of the journal.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries of the journal. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
picasso graphics is a graphics arts design consulting firm pablo taylor its treasure 541733
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and professional conduct in business
Picasso Graphics is a graphics arts design consulting firm. Pablo Taylor, its treasurer and vice president of finance, has prepared a classified balance sheet as of July 31, 2014, the end of its fiscal year. This balance sheet will be submitted with Picasso Graphics’ loan application to Paris Trust & Savings Bank. In the Current Assets section of the balance sheet, Pablo reported a $56,000 receivable from Becky Holt, the president of Picasso Graphics, as a trade account receivable.
Becky borrowed the money from Picasso Graphics in January 2012 for a down payment on a new home. She has orally assured Pablo that she will pay off the account receivable within the next year. Pablo reported the $56,000 in the same manner on the preceding year’s balance sheet. Evaluate whether it is acceptable for Pablo to prepare the July 31, 2014, balance sheet in the manner indicated above.
the following is an excerpt from a telephone conversation between ben simpson presid 541734
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements
The following is an excerpt from a telephone conversation between Ben Simpson, president of Main Street Co., and Tami Lundgren, owner of Reliable Employment Co. Ben: Tami, you’re going to have to do a better job of finding me a new computer programmer. That last guy was great at programming, but he didn’t have any common sense.
Tami: What do you mean? The guy had a master’s degree with straight A’s.
Ben: Yes, well, last month he developed a new financial reporting system. He said we could do away with manually preparing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and financial statements. The computer would automatically generate our financial statements with “a push of a button.”
Tami: So what’s the big deal? Sounds to me like it would save you time and effort.
Ben: Right! The balance sheet showed a minus for supplies!
Tami: Minus supplies? How can that be?
Ben: That’s what I asked.
Tami: So, what did he say?
Ben: Well, after he checked the program, he said that it must be right. The minuses were greater than the pluses
Tami: Didn’t he know that Supplies can’t have a credit balance—it must have a debit balance?
Ben: He asked me what a debit and credit were.
Tami: I see your point.
a. Comment on (a) the desirability of computerizing Main Street Co.’s financial reporting system, (b) the elimination of the end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) in a computerized accounting system, and (c) the computer programmer’s lack of accounting knowledge.
b. Explain to the programmer why Supplies could not have a credit balance.
assume that you recently accepted a position with five star national bank amp trust 541735
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements
Assume that you recently accepted a position with Five Star National Bank & Trust as an assistant loan officer. As one of your first duties, you have been assigned the responsibility of evaluating a loan request for $300,000 from West Gate Auto Co., a small corporation. In support of the loan application, Joan Whalen, owner and sole stockholder, submitted a “Statement of Accounts” (trial balance) for the first year of operations ended October 31, 2014.
|
West Gate Auto Co. Statement of Accounts October 31, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash
|
5,000
|
|
|
Billings Due from Others
|
40,000
|
|
|
Supplies (chemicals, etc.)
|
7,500
|
|
|
Building
|
222,300
|
|
|
Equipment
|
50,000
|
|
|
Amounts Owed to Others
|
|
31,000
|
|
Investment in Business
|
|
179,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
215,000
|
|
Wages Expense
|
75,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
8,000
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
Other Expenses
|
1,200
|
|
|
425,000
|
425,000
|
- Explain to Joan Whalen why a set of financial statements (income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet) would be useful to you in evaluating the loan request.
- In discussing the “Statement of Accounts” with Joan Whalen, you discovered that the accounts had not been adjusted at October 31. Analyze the “Statement of Accounts” and indicate possible adjusting entries that might be necessary before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
- Assuming that an accurate set of financial statements will be submitted by Joan Whalen in a few days, what other considerations or information would you require before making a decision on the loan request?
determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of two invoices a and b a 541749
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Freight terms
Determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of two invoices, (a) and (b), assuming that credit for returns and allowances was received prior to payment and that all invoices were paid within the discount period.
|
Merchandise
|
Freight Paid by Seller
|
Freight Terms
|
Returns and Allowances
|
|
a.
|
$180,000
|
$3,000
|
FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30
|
$20,000
|
|
b.
|
88,000
|
1,250
|
FOB destination, 2/10, n/30
|
9,000
|
the following financial statement data for years ending december 31 for latchkey 541755
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of net sales to assets
The following financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Latchkey
Company are shown below.
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,734,000
|
$1,645,000
|
|
Total assets:
|
|
|
|
Beginning of year
|
480,000
|
460,000
|
|
End of year
|
540,000
|
480,000
|
- Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for 2014 and 2013.
- Does the change in the ratio of net sales to assets from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
the following financial statement data for years ending december 31 for edison compa 541756
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of net sales to assets
The following financial statement data for years ending December 31 for Edison Company are shown below.
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,884,000
|
$1,562,000
|
|
Total assets:
|
|
|
|
Beginning of year
|
770,000
|
650,000
|
|
End of year
|
800,000
|
770,000
|
a. Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for 2014 and 2013.
b. Does the change in the ratio of net sales to assets from 2013 to 2014 indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of the following invoices 541766
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining amounts to be paid on invoices
Determine the amount to be paid in full settlement of each of the following invoices, assuming that credit for returns and allowances was received prior to payment and that all invoices were paid within the discount period.
|
Merchandise
|
Freight Paid by seller
|
Returns and Allowances
|
|
a.
|
$52,300
|
____
|
FOB destination, n/30
|
$2,700
|
|
b.
|
14,800
|
$200
|
FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30
|
1,600
|
|
c.
|
19,100
|
____
|
FOB shipping point, 1/10, n/30
|
1,300
|
|
d.
|
6,700
|
80
|
FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/30
|
300
|
|
e.
|
22,600
|
____
|
FOB destination, 1/10, n/30
|
—
|
monet paints co is a newly organized business with a list of accounts arranged in al 541769
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chart of accounts
Monet Paints Co. is a newly organized business with a list of accounts arranged in alphabetical order below.
|
Accounts Payable
|
Miscellaneous Selling Expense
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Notes Payable
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
Office Equipment
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
Office Supplies
|
|
Capital Stock
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
|
Cash
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
Cost of Merchandise Sold
|
Rent Expense
|
|
Delivery Expense
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Store Equipment
|
Sales
|
|
Dividends
|
Sales Discounts
|
|
Income Summary
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
Sales Salaries Expense
|
|
Interest Expense
|
Store Equipment
|
|
Land
|
Store Supplies
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
Store Supplies Expense
|
|
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense
|
balance sheet and income statement order, as illustrated in. Each account number is three digits: the first digit is to indicate the major classification (1 for assets, and so on); the second digit is to indicate the sub classification (11 for current assets, and so on); and the third digit is to identify the specific account (110 for Cash, 112 for Accounts Receivable, 114 for Merchandise Inventory, 115 for Store Supplies, and so on).
two items are omitted in each of the following four lists of income statement data d 541775
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining amounts for items omitted from income statement
Two items are omitted in each of the following four lists of income statement data. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.
|
Sales
|
$525,000
|
$733,000
|
$1,440,000
|
$ (g)
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
(a)
|
28,000
|
(e)
|
85,000
|
|
Sales discounts
|
41,350
|
17,500
|
100,000
|
65,000
|
|
Net sales
|
463,400
|
(c)
|
1,295,000
|
(h)
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
(b)
|
410,000
|
(f )
|
900,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
83,500
|
(d)
|
275,000
|
600,000
|
on february 28 2014 the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of foldaway 541776
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple-step income statement
On February 28, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Foldaway Furnishings Company, a furniture wholesaler, are as follows:
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
$ 150,000
|
Notes Payable
|
400,000
|
|
Administrative Expenses
|
290,000
|
Office Supplies
|
20,000
|
|
Building
|
1,130,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
416,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
175,000
|
Salaries Payable
|
6,000
|
|
Cash
|
97,000
|
Sales
|
2,850,000
|
|
Cost of Merchandise Sold
|
1,641,000
|
Sales Discounts
|
25,000
|
|
Dividends
|
50,000
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
90,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
29,000
|
Selling Expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
$ 260,000
|
Store Supplies
|
65,000
|
- Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended February 28, 2014.
- Compare the major advantages and disadvantages of the multiple-step and single-step forms of income statements.
identify the errors in the following income statement 541777
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple-step income statement
Identify the errors in the following income statement:
|
Curbstone Company Income Statement For the Year Ended August 31, 2014
|
|
Revenue from sales:
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$9,132,000
|
|
|
Add: Sales returns and allowances
|
$422,000
|
|
|
|
Sales discounts
|
115,000
|
537,000
|
$9,669,000
|
|
Gross sales
|
6,110,000
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$800,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
575,000
|
|
|
Delivery expense
|
425,000
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
1,800,000
|
|
|
|
$1,759,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other expense:
|
|
|
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
|
45,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$1,714,000
|
on october 31 2014 the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of acorn int 541781
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing entries
On October 31, 2014, the balances of the accounts appearing in the ledger of Acorn Interiors Company, a furniture wholesaler, are as follows:
|
Accumulated Depr.—Building
|
$142,000
|
Notes Payable
|
$ 125,000
|
|
Administrative Expenses
|
300,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
105,000
|
|
Building
|
446,000
|
Sales
|
1,375,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
75,000
|
Sales Discounts
|
20,000
|
|
Cash
|
60,000
|
Sales Returns and Allow.
|
13,000
|
|
Cost of Merchandise Sold
|
650,000
|
Sales Tax Payable
|
3,000
|
|
Dividends
|
25,000
|
Selling Expenses
|
140,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
10,000
|
Store Supplies
|
23,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
126,000
|
Store Supplies Expense
|
12,000
|
Prepare the October 31, 2014, closing entries for Acorn Interiors Company.
the home depot reported the following data in millions in its recent financial state 541782
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of net sales to assets
The Home Depot reported the following data (in millions) in its recent financial statements:
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales
|
$67,997
|
$66,176
|
|
Total assets at the end of the year
|
40,125
|
40,877
|
|
Total assets at the beginning of the year
|
40,877
|
41,164
|
- Determine the ratio of net sales to assets for The Home Depot for Year 2 and Year 1.Round to two decimal places.
- What conclusions can be drawn from these ratios concerning the trend in the ability of The Home Depot to effectively use its assets to generate sales?
kroger a national supermarket chain reported the following data in millions in its f 541783
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of net sales to assets
Kroger, a national supermarket chain, reported the following data (in millions) in its financial statements for a recent year:
|
Total revenue
|
$82,189
|
|
Total assets at end of year
|
23,505
|
|
Total assets at beginning of year
|
23,126
|
- Compute the ratio of net sales to assets. Round to two decimal places.
- Tiffany & Co. is a large North American retailer of jewelry, with a ratio of net sales to assets of 0.85. Why would Tiffany’s ratio of net sales to assets be lower than that of Kroger?
the following data were extracted from the accounting records of harkins company for 541785
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 5-33 Cost of merchandise sold and related items
The following data were extracted from the accounting records of Harkins Company for the year ended April 30, 2014:
|
Merchandise inventory, May 1, 2013
|
$380,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, April 30, 2014
|
415,000
|
|
Purchases
|
3,800,000
|
|
Purchases returns and allowances
|
150,000
|
|
Purchases discounts
|
80,000
|
|
Sales
|
5,850,000
|
|
Freight in
|
16,600
|
a. Prepare the cost of merchandise sold section of the income statement for the year ended April 30, 2014, using the periodic inventory system.
b. Determine the gross profit to be reported on the income statement for the year ended April 30, 2014.
c. Would gross profit be different if the perpetual inventory system was used instead of the periodic inventory system?
identify the errors in the following schedule of the cost of merchandise sold for th 541788
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 5-36 Cost of merchandise sold
Identify the errors in the following schedule of the cost of merchandise sold for the current year ended May 31, 2014:
|
Cost of merchandise sold:
|
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory, May 31, 2014
|
|
$105,000
|
|
Purchases
|
|
|
|
Plus: Purchases returns and allowances
|
$55,000
|
|
|
Purchases discounts
|
30,000
|
85,000
|
|
Gross purchases
|
|
$1,195,000
|
|
Less freight in
|
|
22,000
|
|
Cost of merchandise purchased
|
|
1,173,000
|
|
Merchandise available for sale
|
|
$1,278,000
|
|
Less merchandise inventory, June 1, 2013
|
|
91,300
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
|
$1,186,700
|
rules of debit and credit for periodic inventory accounts complete the following tab 541789
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EX 5-37 Rules of debit and credit for periodic inventory accounts Complete the following table by indicating for (a) through (g) whether the proper answer is debit or credit.
|
Account
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Normal Balance
|
|
Purchases
|
debit
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
|
Purchases Discounts
|
credit
|
(c)
|
credit
|
|
Purchases Returns and Allowances
|
(d)
|
(e)
|
(f )
|
|
Freight In
|
debit
|
(g)
|
debit
|
after the accounts have been adjusted at april 30 the end of the fiscal year the fol 541697
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing entries
After the accounts have been adjusted at April 30, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Nuclear Landscaping Co.:
|
Retained Earnings
|
$643,600
|
|
Dividends
|
10,500
|
|
Fees Earned
|
356,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
283,100
|
|
Rent Expense
|
56,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
11,500
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
13,000
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
holism consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by scott cutler the end of 541704
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements from the end-of-period spreadsheet
Holism Consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by Scott Cutler. The end-of period spreadsheet shown below was prepared for the year ended May 31, 2014.
|
Holism Consulting
End-of-Period Spreadsheet
For the Year Ended May 31, 2014
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
Trial Balance
|
Adjusted
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
38,000
|
|
|
|
38,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
90,000
|
|
|
|
90,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
9,600
|
|
|
(a) 6,000
|
3,600
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
74,000
|
|
|
|
74,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
10,000
|
|
(b) 4,800
|
|
14,800
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
24,400
|
|
|
|
24,400
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
|
(c ) 1,500
|
|
1,500
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
80,400
|
|
|
|
80,400
|
|
Dividends
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
12,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
175,200
|
|
|
|
175,200
|
|
Salary Expense
|
69,000
|
|
(c) 1,500
|
|
70,500
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
(a) 6,000
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
(b) 4,800
|
|
4,800
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
7,400
|
|
|
|
7,400
|
|
| |
300,000
|
300,000
|
12,300
|
12,300
|
306,300
|
306,300
|
Based on the preceding spreadsheet, prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet for Holism Consulting.
olympia consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by raul hann the followin 541705
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements from the end-of-period spreadsheet
Olympia Consulting is a consulting firm owned and operated by Raul Hann. The following end-of-period spreadsheet was prepared for the year ended April 30, 2014.
|
Olympia Consulting
End-of-Period Spreadsheet
For the Year Ended April 30, 2014
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
Trial Balance
|
Adjusted
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
27,500
|
|
|
|
27,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
53,500
|
|
|
|
53,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,000
|
|
|
(a) 1,800
|
1,200
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
30,500
|
|
|
|
30,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
4,500
|
|
(b) 750
|
|
5,250
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
3,300
|
|
|
|
3,300
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
|
(c ) 450
|
|
450
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
52,200
|
|
|
|
52,200
|
|
Dividends
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
|
60,000
|
|
Salary Expense
|
32,000
|
|
|
|
32,450
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
|
|
1,800
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
|
|
750
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
1,500
|
|
| |
150,000
|
150,000
|
3,000
|
3,000
|
151,200
|
151,200
|
Based on the preceding spreadsheet, prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet for Olympia Consulting.
the following account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance for shangh 541706
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement
The following account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance for Shanghai Messenger Service, a delivery service firm, for the current fiscal year ended September 30, 2014:
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$ 7,250
|
Rent Expense
|
$ 36,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
440,000
|
Salaries Expense
|
265,150
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,200
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,200
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
7,100
|
Utilities Expense
|
28,500
|
Prepare an income statement.
the following revenue and expense account balances were taken from the ledger of veg 541707
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement; net loss
The following revenue and expense account balances were taken from the ledger of Veggie Health Services Co. after the accounts had been adjusted on February 28, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year:
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$ 9,000
|
Service Revenue
|
$270,900
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
4,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
3,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
6,000
|
Utilities Expense
|
17,600
|
|
Rent Expense
|
42,000
|
Wages Expense
|
213,100
|
Prepare an income statement.
fedex corporation had the following revenue and expense account balances in millions 541708
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement
FedEx Corporation had the following revenue and expense account balances (in millions) for a recent year ending May 31, 2011:
|
Depreciation
|
$1,973
|
Purchased Transportation
|
$ 5,674
|
|
Fuel
|
4,151
|
Rentals and Landing Fees
|
2,462
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
1,979
|
Revenues
|
39,304
|
|
Other Expense (Income) Net
|
5,524
|
Salaries and Employee Benefits
|
15,276
|
|
Provision for Income Taxes
|
813
|
|
|
a. Prepare an income statement.
b. Compare your income statement with the related income statement that is available at the FedEx Corporation, What similarities and differences do you see?
well systems co offers its services to residents in the dallas area selected account 541709
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained earnings statement
Well Systems Co. offers its services to residents in the Dallas area. Selected accounts from the ledger of Well Systems Co. for the current fiscal year ended October 31, 2014, are as follows:
|
Retained Earnings
|
Dividends
|
|
Oct. 31
|
48,000
|
Nov. 1 (2013)
|
475,000
|
Jan. 31
|
12,000
|
Oct. 31
|
48,000
|
| |
|
Oct. 31
|
90,000
|
Apr. 30
|
12,000
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
July 31
|
12,000
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Oct. 31
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
Income Summary
|
|
Oct. 31
|
270,000
|
Oct. 31
|
360,000
|
|
31
|
90,000
|
|
|
Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year.
selected accounts from the ledger of weird sports for the current fiscal year ended 541710
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained earnings statement; net loss
Selected accounts from the ledger of Weird Sports for the current fiscal year ended June 30, 2014, are as follows:
|
Retained Earnings
|
Dividends
|
|
June 30
|
20,900
|
July 1 (2013)
|
115,800
|
Sept. 30
|
6,000
|
June 30
|
24,000
|
|
30
|
24,000
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
6,000
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
March 31
|
6,000
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
June 30
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Income Summary
|
|
June 30
|
201,400
|
June 30
|
180,500
|
| |
|
30
|
20,900
|
Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year.
labrador weight loss co offers personal weight reduction consulting services to indi 541713
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheet
Labrador Weight Loss Co. offers personal weight reduction consulting services to individuals. After all the accounts have been closed on June 30, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the balances of selected accounts from the ledger of Labrador Weight Loss Co. are as follows:
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 18,500
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 19,200
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
78,250
|
Prepaid Rent
|
18,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
103,300
|
Retained Earnings
|
509,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
100,000
|
Salaries Payable
|
8,500
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
Supplies
|
5,350
|
|
Equipment
|
300,000
|
Unearned Fees
|
9,000
|
|
Land
|
290,000
|
|
|
Prepare a classified balance sheet that includes the correct balance for Cash.
list the errors you find in the following balance sheet prepare a corrected balance 541714
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheet
List the errors you find in the following balance sheet. Prepare a corrected balance sheet.
|
Labyrinth Services Co.
Balance Sheet
For the Year Ended August 31, 2014
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$18,500
|
|
Accounts receivable . .
|
$ 41,400
|
|
|
Accounts payable . .
|
31,300
|
|
Accum. depr.—building
|
155,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
6,500
|
|
Accum. depr.—equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance . .
|
16,600
|
|
Net income .
|
118,200
|
|
|
Land
|
225,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$339,600
|
|
Total current
|
$297,900
|
|
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Building .
|
$400,000
|
|
Wages payable . .
|
$6,500
|
|
|
Equipment ?
|
97,000
|
|
Capital stock . ????????
|
75,000
|
|
|
Total property, Plant and equipment
|
635,400
|
Retained earnings
|
512,200
|
|
| |
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
593,700
|
|
Total assets .
|
$933,300
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity .
|
$933,300
|
from the list at the top of the next page identify the accounts that should be close 541715
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying accounts to be closed
From the list at the top of the next page, identify the accounts that should be closed to Income Summary at the end of the fiscal year:
|
a. Accounts Payable
|
g. Fees Earned
|
|
b. Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
h. Land
|
|
c. Capital Stock
|
i. Supplies
|
|
d. Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
j. Supplies Expense
|
|
e. Dividends
|
k. Wages Expense
|
|
f. Equipment
|
l. Wages Payable
|
grande services co offers its services to individuals desiring to improve their pers 541718
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing entries with net loss
Grande Services Co. offers its services to individuals desiring to improve their personal images. After the accounts have been adjusted at July 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Grande Services Co.
|
Retained Earnings
|
$842,500
|
Rent Expense
|
$54,000
|
|
Dividends
|
45,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
14,300
|
|
Fees Earned
|
337,900
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
16,200
|
|
Wages Expense
|
277,500
|
|
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
an accountant prepared the following post closing trial balance 541720
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Post-closing trial balance
An accountant prepared the following post-closing trial balance:
|
Igloo Treasures Co. Post-Closing Trial Balance January 31, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash
|
21,350
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
56,700
|
|
|
Supplies
|
7,500
|
|
Equipment
|
74,450
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
12,400
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
29,600
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
3,200
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
11,000
|
|
|
Capital Stock
|
25,000
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
78,800
|
|
|
234,850
|
85,150
|
Prepare a corrected post-closing trial balance. Assume that all accounts have normal balances and that the amounts shown are correct.
the following data in thousands were taken from recent financial statements of under 541722
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Working capital and current ratio OBJ.7
The following data (in thousands) were taken from recent financial statements of Under Armour, Inc.:
|
December 31
|
|
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Current assets
|
$555,850
|
$448,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
149,147
|
120,162
|
a. Compute the working capital and the current ratio as of December 31, Year 2 and Year 1. Round to two decimal places.
b. What conclusions concerning the company’s ability to meet its financial obligations can you draw from part (a)?
completing an end of period spreadsheet work sheet list a through j in the order the 541724
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Completing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) List (a) through (j) in the order they would be performed in preparing and completing an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet).
a. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
b. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
c. Add or deduct adjusting entry data to trial balance amounts, and extend amounts to the Adjusted Trial Balance columns.
d. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjustments columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
e. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to determine the amount of net income or net loss for the period.
f. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
g. Enter the adjusting entries into the spreadsheet (work sheet), based on the adjustment data.
h. Enter the amount of net income or net loss for the period in the proper Income Statement column and Balance Sheet column.
i. Enter the unadjusted account balances from the general ledger into the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet).
j. Extend the adjusted trial balance amounts to the Income Statement columns and the Balance Sheet columns.
a financial statements and closing entries obj 2 3 ironside security services is an 541725
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Financial statements and closing entries OBJ. 2, 3 Ironside Security Services is an investigative services firm that is owned and operated by Don Chadwell. On April 30, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for Ironside Security Services prepared an end-of-period spreadsheet, a part of which is shown as per below :
|
Iron side Security Services End-of-Period Spreadsheet For the Year Ended April 30, 2014
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
18,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
37,200
|
|
|
Supplies
|
7,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,800
|
|
|
Building
|
240,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
55,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
6,000
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
1,500
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
3,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
35,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
144,300
|
|
Dividends
|
10,000
|
|
|
Service Fees
|
|
480,000
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
25,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
336,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
62,500
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
12,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Building
|
6,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
4,400
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
2,800
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
750,000
|
750,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
2. Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at April 30.
3. If Retained Earnings has instead decreased $47,500 after the closing entries were posted, and the dividends remained the same, what would have been the amount of net income or net loss?
a t accounts adjusting entries financial statements and obj 2 3 closing entries opti 541726
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A T accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and OBJ. 2, 3 closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet)
The unadjusted trial balance of Epicenter Laundry at June 30, 2014, the end of the current Finical year, is shown below.
|
Epicenter Laundry Unadjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash . .
|
11,000
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
21,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,600
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment .
|
232,600
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
125,400
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
11,800
|
|
Capital Stock .
|
40,000
|
|
Retained Earnings . .
|
65,600
|
|
Dividends
|
10,000
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
232,200
|
|
Wages Expense .
|
125,200
|
|
|
Rent Expense .
|
40,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
19,700
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
5,400
|
|
|
475,000
|
475,000
|
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
- Laundry supplies on hand at June 30 are $3,600.
- Insurance premiums expired during the year are $5,700.
- Depreciation of laundry equipment during the year is $6,500.
- Wages accrued but not paid at June 30 are $1,100.
Instructions
- For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account. Identify the balance as “June 30 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
- (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (1) as needed.
- Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”
Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
the gorman group is a financial planning services firm owned and operated by nicole 541727
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements and closing entries
The Gorman Group is a financial planning services firm owned and operated by Nicole Gorman. As of October 31, 2014, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for The Gorman Group prepared an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet), part of which is shown below.
|
The Gorman Group End-of-Period Spreadsheet For the Year Ended October 31, 2014
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
11,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
6,350
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
75,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
250,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
117,200
|
|
Equipment
|
240,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
151,700
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
33,300
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
3,300
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
1,500
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
25,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
195,000
|
|
Dividends
|
20,000
|
|
|
Service Fees
|
|
468,000
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
5,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
291,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
17,500
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
15,500
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
9,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
8,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Buildings
|
6,600
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
3,450
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
3,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
5,450
|
|
|
1,000,000
|
1,000,000
|
Instructions
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at October 31.
If the balance of Retained Earnings had instead increased $115,000 after the closing entries were posted, and the dividends remained the same, what would have been the amount of net income or net loss?
t accounts adjusting entries financial statements and closing entries optional end o 541728
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) The unadjusted trial balance of La Mesa Laundry at August 31, 2014, the end of the current finical year, is shown below.
|
La Mesa Laundry Unadjusted Trial Balance August 31, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash . .
|
3,800
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
9,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6,000
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment .
|
180,800
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
49,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
7,800
|
|
Capital Stock .
|
15,000
|
|
Retained Earnings . .
|
80,000
|
|
Dividends
|
2,400
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
248,000
|
|
Wages Expense .
|
135,800
|
|
|
Rent Expense .
|
43,200
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
16,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
3,000
|
|
|
400,000
|
400,000
|
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
- Wages accrued but not paid at August 31 are $2,200.
- Depreciation of equipment during the year is $8,150.
- Laundry supplies on hand at August 31 are $2,000.
- Insurance premiums expired during the year are $5,300.
Instructions
- For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account. Identify the balance as “Aug. 31 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
- (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (1) as needed.
- Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”
- Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
ledger accounts adjusting entries financial statements and closing entries optional 541729
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ledger accounts, adjusting entries, financial statements, and closing entries; optional end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) The unadjusted trial balance of Recessive Interiors at January 31, 2014, the end of the current year, is shown below.
|
Recessive Interiors Unadjusted Trial Balance January 31, 2014
|
|
Debits Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
11 Cash
|
13,100
|
|
|
13 Supplies
|
8,000
|
|
|
14 Prepaid Insurance
|
7,500
|
|
|
16 Equipment
|
113,000
|
|
|
17 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
12,000
|
|
18 Trucks
|
90,000
|
|
|
19 Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks
|
27,100
|
|
21 Accounts Payable
|
4,500
|
|
31 Capital Stock
|
30,000
|
|
32 Retained Earnings
|
96,400
|
|
33 Dividends
|
3,000
|
|
|
41 Service Revenue
|
155,000
|
|
51 Wages Expense
|
72,000
|
|
|
52 Rent Expense
|
7,600
|
|
|
53 Truck Expense
|
5,350
|
|
|
59 Miscellaneous Expense
|
5,450
|
|
|
325,000
|
325,000
|
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
- Supplies on hand at January 31 are $2,850.
- Insurance premiums expired during the year are $3,150.
- Depreciation of equipment during the year is $5,250.
- Depreciation of trucks during the year is $4,000.
- Wages accrued but not paid at January 31 are $900.
Instructions
- For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four-column account and place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.
- (Optional.) Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end-of-period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (3) as needed.
- Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected. The following additional accounts from Recessive Interiors’ chart of accounts should be used: Wages Payable, 22; Depreciation Expense—Equipment, 54; Supplies Expense, 55; Depreciation Expense— Trucks, 56; Insurance Expense, 57.
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
- Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
- Journalize and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #34 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
- Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
electro repairs amp service an electronics repair store prepared the unadjusted tria 541662
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
Electro Repairs & Service, an electronics repair store, prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown below at the end of its first year of operations.
|
Electro Repairs & Service
Unadjusted Trial Balance
June 30, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash .
|
13,800
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable .
|
90,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
21,600
|
|
|
Equipment . .
|
154,800
|
|
|
Accounts Payable . .
|
21,000
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
24,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
40,000
|
|
Retained Earnings .
|
122,000
|
|
Dividends
|
18,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned .
|
393,000
|
|
Wages Expense
|
126,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
96,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
69,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
10,800
|
|
| |
600,000
|
600,000
|
for preparing the adjusting entries the following data were assembled 541663
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For preparing the adjusting entries, the following data were assembled:
1. Fees earned but unbilled on June 30 were $12,700.
2. Supplies on hand on June 30 were $4,175.
3. Depreciation of equipment was estimated to be $7,400 for the year.
4. The balance in unearned fees represented the June 1 receipt in advance for services to be provided. Only $14,200 of the services was provided between June 1 and June 30.
5. Unpaid wages accrued on June 30 were $1,100.
6.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries necessary on June 30, 2014.
2. Determine the revenues, expenses, and net income of Electro Service & Repairs before the adjusting entries.
3. Determine the revenues, expense, and net income of Electro Service & Repairs after the adjusting entries.
4. Determine the effect of the adjusting entries on Retained Earnings.
good note company specializes in the repair of music equipment and is owned and oper 541664
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
Good Note Company specializes in the repair of music equipment and is owned and operated by Robin Stahl. On November 30, 2014, the end of the current year, the accountant for Good Note Company prepared the following trial balances:
|
Good Note Company
Trial Balances
November 30, 2014
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash .
|
38,250
|
|
38,250
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
89,500
|
|
89,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
11,250
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
14,250
|
|
3,850
|
|
|
Equipment .
|
290,450
|
|
290,450
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
94,500
|
|
106,100
|
|
Automobiles
|
129,500
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Automobiles . .
|
54,750
|
|
62,050
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
24,930
|
|
26,130
|
|
Salaries Payable .
|
8,100
|
|
Unearned Service Fees .
|
18,000
|
|
9,000
|
|
Capital Stock
|
100,000
|
|
100,000
|
|
Retained Earnings .
|
224,020
|
|
224,020
|
|
Dividends . .
|
75,000
|
|
75,000
|
|
|
Service Fees Earned
|
733,800
|
|
742,800
|
|
Salary Expense . .
|
516,900
|
|
525,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
54,000
|
|
54,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
8,850
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment . .
|
11,600
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Automobiles
|
7,300
|
|
|
Utilities Expense .
|
12,900
|
|
14,100
|
|
|
Taxes Expense
|
8,175
|
|
8,175
|
|
|
Insurance Expense .
|
10,400
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense .
|
9,825
|
|
9,825
|
,
|
| |
1,250,000
|
1,250,000
|
1,250,000
|
1,250,000
|
Instructions
Journalize the seven entries that adjusted the accounts at November 30. None of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.
dickens company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by monica b 541665
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries and adjusted trial balances
Dickens Company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by Monica Baker. On October 31, 2014, the end of the current year, Dickens Company’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown below.
|
Dickens Company
Unadjusted Trial Balance
October 31, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash .
|
7,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable .
|
38,400
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance . .
|
7,200
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,980
|
|
|
Land .
|
112,500
|
|
|
Building
|
150,250
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
87,550
|
|
Equipment . .
|
135,300
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
97,950
|
|
Accounts Payable . .
|
12,150
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
6,750
|
|
Capital Stock
|
75,000
|
|
Retained Earnings .
|
146,000
|
|
Dividends
|
15,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned .
|
324,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
193,370
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
42,375
|
|
|
Advertising Expense .
|
22,800
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
17,250
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
6,075
|
|
| |
750,000
|
750,000
|
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
1. Unexpired insurance at October 31, $5,400.
2. Supplies on hand at October 31, $375.
3. Depreciation of building for the year, $6,000.
4. Depreciation of equipment for the year, $3,000.
5. Rent unearned at October 31, $1,350.
6. Accrued salaries and wages at October 31, $2,900.
7. Fees earned but unbilled on October 31, $18,600.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries using the following additional accounts: Salaries and Wages Payable; Rent Revenue; Insurance Expense; Depreciation Expense—Building; Depreciation Expense—Equipment; and Supplies Expense.
2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries, and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
at the end of april the first month of operations the following selected data were t 541666
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries and errors
At the end of April, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Shelby Crawford, an attorney:
|
Net income for April
|
$120,000
|
|
Total assets at April 30
|
750,000
|
|
Total liabilities at April 30
|
300,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity at April 30
|
450,000
|
In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:
1. Supplies used during April, $2,750.
2. Unbilled fees earned at April 30, $23,700.
3. Depreciation of equipment for April, $1,800.
4. Accrued wages at April 30, $1,400.
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the omitted adjustments.
2. Determine the correct amount of net income for April and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at April 30. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.
| |
Net Income
|
Total Assets
|
=
|
Total Liabilities
|
+
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Reported amounts
|
$120,000
|
$750,000
|
|
$300,000
|
|
$450,000
|
|
Corrections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (a)
|
-2,750
|
-2,750
|
|
|
|
-2,750
|
|
Adjustment (b)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Adjustment (c)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Adjustment (d)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Corrected amounts
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
on may 31 2014 the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in prepa 541667
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
On May 31, 2014, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Oceanside Realty:
1. Fees accrued but unbilled at May 31 are $19,750.
2. The supplies account balance on May 31 is $12,300. The supplies on hand at May 31 are $4,150.
3. Wages accrued but not paid at May 31 are $2,700.
4. The unearned rent account balance at May 31 is $9,000, representing the receipt of an advance payment on May 1 of three months’ rent from tenants.
5. Depreciation of office equipment is $3,200.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries required at May 31, 2014.
2. Briefly explain the difference between adjusting entries and entries that would be made to correct errors.
selected account balances before adjustment for intuit realty at november 30 2014 th 541668
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
Selected account balances before adjustment for Intuit Realty at November 30, 2014, the end of the current year, are shown below.
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$ 75,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
250,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
$ 12,000
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
10,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
400,000
|
|
Wages Expense
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
140,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
Data needed for year-end adjustments are as follows:
a. Supplies on hand at November 30, $550.
b. Depreciation of equipment during year, $1,675.
c. Rent expired during year, $8,500.
d. Wages accrued but not paid at November 30, $2,000.
e. Unearned fees at November 30, $4,000.
f. Unbilled fees at November 30, $5,380.
Instructions
1. Journalize the six adjusting entries required at November 30, based on the data presented.
2. What would be the effect on the income statement if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?
3. What would be the effect on the balance sheet if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?
4. What would be the effect on the “Net increase or decrease in cash” on the statement of cash flows if adjustments (b) and (e) were omitted at the end of the year?
crazy mountain outfitters co an outfitter store for fishing treks prepared the follo 541669
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
Crazy Mountain Outfitters Co., an outfitter store for fishing treks, prepared the following unadjusted trial balance at the end of its first year of operations:
|
Crazy Mountain Outfitters Co.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
April 30, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash .
|
11,400
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable .
|
72,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
7,200
|
|
|
Equipment . .
|
112,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable . .
|
12,200
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
19,200
|
|
Capital Stock
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings .
|
117,800
|
|
Dividends . .
|
10,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned .
|
305,800
|
|
Wages Expense
|
157,800
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
55,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
42,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
7,000
|
|
| |
475,000
|
475,000
|
reece financial services co which specializes in appliance repair services is owned 541672
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries and adjusted trial balances
Reece Financial Services Co., which specializes in appliance repair services, is owned and operated by Joni Reece. Reece Financial Services Co.’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance at July 31, 2014, shown below.
|
Reece Financial Services Co.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
July 31, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash
|
10,200
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
34,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,725
|
|
|
Land
|
50,000
|
|
|
Building
|
155,750
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
62,850
|
|
Equipment
|
45,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
17,650
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
3,750
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
3,600
|
|
Capital Stock
|
60,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
93,550
|
|
Dividends
|
8,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
158,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
56,850
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
14,100
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
7,500
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
6,100
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,025
|
|
| |
400,000
|
400,000
|
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
1) Depreciation of building for the year, $6,400.
2) Depreciation of equipment for the year, $2,800.
3) Accrued salaries and wages at July 31, $900.
4) Unexpired insurance at July 31, $1,500.
5) Fees earned but unbilled on July 31, $10,200.
6) Supplies on hand at July 31, $615.
7) Rent unearned at July 31, $300.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries using the following additional accounts: Salaries and Wages Payable; Rent Revenue; Insurance Expense; Depreciation Expense—Building; Depreciation Expense—Equipment; and Supplies Expense.
2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
at the end of august the first month of operations the following selected data were 541673
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries and errors
At the end of August, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Tucker Jacobs, an attorney:
|
Net income for August
|
$112,500
|
|
Total assets at August 31
|
650,000
|
|
Total liabilities at August 31
|
225,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity at August 31
|
425,000
|
In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:
1. Unbilled fees earned at August 31, $31,900.
2. Depreciation of equipment for August, $7,500.
3. Accrued wages at August 31, $5,200.
4. Supplies used during August, $3,000.
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the omitted adjustments.
2. Determine the correct amount of net income for August and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at August 31. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.
| |
Net Income
|
Total Assets
|
=
|
Total Liabilities
|
+
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Reported amounts
|
$112,500
|
$650,000
|
|
$225,000
|
|
$425,000
|
|
Corrections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (a)
|
+31,900
|
+31,900
|
|
0
|
|
+31,900
|
|
Adjustment (b)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Adjustment (c)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Adjustment (d)
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
Corrected amounts
|
____
|
____
|
|
____
|
|
____
|
the following is an excerpt from a conversation between sonia lopez and pete lemke j 541676
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accrued revenue
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sonia Lopez and Pete Lemke just before they boarded a flight to Paris on Delta Air Lines. They are going to Paris to attend their company’s annual sales conference. Sonia: Pete, aren’t you taking an introductory accounting course at college? Pete: Yes, I decided it’s about time I learned something about accounting. You know, our annual bonuses are based on the sales figures that come from the accounting department. Sonia: I guess I never really thought about it. Pete: You should think about it! Last year, I placed a $5,000,000 order on December 30. But when I got my bonus, the $5,000,000 sale wasn’t included. They said it hadn’t been shipped until January 9, so it would have to count in next year’s bonus.
Sonia: A real bummer!
Pete: Right! I was counting on that bonus including the $5,000,000 sale.
Sonia: Did you complain?
Pete: Yes, but it didn’t do any good. Julie, the head accountant, said something about matching revenues and expenses. Also, something about not recording revenues until the sale is final. I figure I’d take the accounting course and find out whether she’s just messing with me.
Sonia: I never really thought about it. When do you think Delta Air Lines will record its revenues from this flight?
Pete: Hmmm I guess it could record the revenue when it sells the ticket or when the boarding passes are scanned at the door or when we get off the plane or when our company pays for the tickets or I don’t know. I’ll ask my accounting instructor.
Discuss when Delta Air Lines should recognize the revenue from ticket sales to properly match revenues and expenses.
several years ago your brother opened magna appliance repairs he made a small initia 541678
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjustments and financial statements
Several years ago, your brother opened Magna Appliance Repairs. He made a small initial investment and added money from his personal bank account as needed. He withdrew money for living expenses at irregular intervals. As the business grew, he hired an assistant. He is now considering adding more employees, purchasing additional service trucks, and purchasing the building he now rents. To secure funds for the expansion, your brother submitted a loan application to the bank and included the most recent financial statements (shown below) prepared from accounts maintained by a part-time bookkeeper.
|
Magna Appliance Repairs
Income Statement
For the Year Ended October 31, 2014
|
|
Service revenue .
|
$675,000
|
|
Less: Rent paid
|
$187,200
|
|
|
Wages paid .
|
148,500
|
|
|
Supplies paid
|
42,000
|
|
|
Utilities paid
|
39,000
|
|
|
Insurance paid . .
|
21,600
|
|
|
Miscellaneous payments
|
54,600
|
492,900
|
|
Net income
|
$182,100
|
|
Magna Appliance Repairs
Balance Sheet
October 31, 2014
|
| |
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$95,400
|
|
Amounts due from customer
|
|
112,500
|
|
Truck
|
|
332,100
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$540,000
|
|
Equities
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
$100,000
|
|
Retimed earning
|
|
440,000
|
|
Total equities
|
|
$540,000
|
After reviewing the financial statements, the loan officer at the bank asked your brother if he used the accrual basis of accounting for revenues and expenses. Your brother responded that he did and that is why he included an account for “Amounts Due from Customers.” The loan officer then asked whether or not the accounts were adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements. Your brother answered that they had not been adjusted.
1. Why do you think the loan officer suspected that the accounts had not been adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements?
2. Indicate possible accounts that might need to be adjusted before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
the fiscal years for several well known companies are as follows 541689
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fiscal years for several well-known companies are as follows:
|
Company
|
Fiscal Year Ending
|
|
Sears
|
January 30
|
|
JCPenney
|
January 30
|
|
Target Corp.
|
January 30
|
|
Home Depot
|
January 31
|
|
Tiffany & Co.
|
January 31
|
|
Limited Brands, Inc.
|
January 31
|
What general characteristic shared by these companies explains why they do not have fiscal years ending December 31?
after the accounts have been adjusted at august 31 the end of the fiscal year the fo 541696
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing entries
After the accounts have been adjusted at August 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Marcy Delivery Services Co.:
|
Retained Earnings
|
$1,400,000
|
|
Dividends
|
55,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
880,000
|
|
Wages Expense
|
524,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
80,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
16,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
9,000
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
the accountant for astaire medical co a medical services consulting firm mistakenly 541653
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of errors on financial statements
The accountant for Astaire Medical Co., a medical services consulting firm, mistakenly omitted adjusting entries for (a) unearned revenue earned during the year ($23,250) and (b) accrued wages ($4,000). Indicate the effect of each error, considered individually, on the income statement for the current year ended August 31. Also indicate the effect of each error on the August 31 balance sheet. Set up a table similar to the following, and record your answers by inserting the dollar amount in the appropriate spaces. Insert a zero if the error does not affect the item.
| |
|
Error(a)
|
|
Error(b)
|
| |
|
Over-stated
|
Under-Stated
|
|
Over-Stated
|
Under-stated
|
|
1.
|
Revenue for the year would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
2.
|
Expenses for the year would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
3.
|
Net income for the year would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
4.
|
Assets at August 31 would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
5.
|
Liabilities at August 31 would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
6.
|
Stockholders’ equity at August 31 would be
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
|
$_____
|
$_____
|
the unadjusted and adjusted trial balances for editorial services co on march 31 201 541656
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries from trial balances
The unadjusted and adjusted trial balances for Editorial Services Co. on March 31, 2014,are shown below.
|
Editorial Services Co.
Trial Balances
March 31, 2014
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash . .
|
8
|
|
8
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
19
|
|
22
|
|
|
Supplies
|
6
|
|
5
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance .
|
10
|
|
4
|
|
|
Land . .
|
13
|
|
13
|
|
|
Equipment .
|
20
|
|
20
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
4
|
|
6
|
|
Accounts Payable .
|
13
|
|
13
|
|
Wages Payable
|
0
|
|
1
|
|
Capital Stock .
|
15
|
|
15
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
31
|
|
31
|
|
Dividends . .
|
4
|
|
4
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
37
|
|
40
|
|
Wages Expense
|
12
|
|
13
|
|
|
Rent Expense .
|
4
|
|
4
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
0
|
|
6
|
|
|
Utilities Expense . .
|
2
|
|
2
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
0
|
|
2
|
|
|
Supplies Expense .
|
0
|
|
1
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2
|
|
2
|
|
| |
100
|
|
106
|
106
|
Journalize the five entries that adjusted the accounts at March 31, 2014. None of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.
the accountant for eva s laundry prepared the following unadjusted and adjusted tria 541657
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries from trial balances
The accountant for Eva’s Laundry prepared the following unadjusted and adjusted trial balances. Assume that all balances in the unadjusted trial balance and the amounts of the adjustments are correct. Identify the errors in the accountant’s adjusting entries, assuming that none of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.
|
Eva’s Laundry
Trial Balances
May 31, 2014
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
| |
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash .
|
7,500
|
|
7,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable .
|
18,250
|
|
23,250
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
3,750
|
|
6,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance*
|
5,200
|
|
1,600
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment . .
|
190,000
|
|
177,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Laundry
|
48,000
|
|
48,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
9,600
|
|
9,600
|
|
Wages Payable
|
1,000
|
|
Capital Stock . .
|
35,000
|
|
35,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
75,300
|
|
75,300
|
|
Dividends
|
28,775
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
182,100
|
|
182,100
|
|
Wages Expense
|
49,200
|
|
49,200
|
|
|
Rent Expense . .
|
25,575
|
|
25,575
|
|
|
Utilities Expense .
|
18,500
|
|
18,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
13,000
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies Expense
|
3,000
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
600
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense .
|
3,250
|
|
3,250
|
|
| |
350,000
|
350,000
|
358,000
|
351,000
|
the following data in millions are taken from recent financial statements of nike in 541658
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vertical analysis of income statement
The following data (in millions) are taken from recent financial statements of Nike Inc.:
| |
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Net sales (revenues)
|
$19,014
|
$19,176
|
|
Net income
|
1,907
|
1,487
|
a. Determine the amount of change (in millions) and percent of change in net income for Year 2. Round to one decimal place.
b. Determine the percentage relationship between net income and net sales (net income divided by net sales) for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to one decimal place.
c. What conclusions can you draw from your analysis?
the following income statement data in millions for dell inc and hewlett packard com 541659
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vertical analysis of income statement
The following income statement data (in millions) for Dell, Inc., and Hewlett-Packard Company (HP) were taken from their recent annual reports:
| |
Dell
|
Hewlett-Packard
|
|
Net sales
|
$61,494
|
$126,033
|
|
Cost of goods sold (expense)
|
(50,098)
|
(96,089)
|
|
Operating expenses
|
(7,963)
|
(18,465)
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ 3,433
|
$ 11,479
|
1. Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement for Dell. Round to one decimal place.
2. Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement for HP. Round to one decimal place.
3. Based on (a) and (b), how does Dell compare to HP?
selected account balances before adjustment for heartland realty at august 31 2014 t 541661
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries
Selected account balances before adjustment for Heartland Realty at August 31, 2014, the end of the current year, are as follows:
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$ 80,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment
|
|
$28,000
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
6,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,000
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
10,500
|
|
Fees Earned
|
410,000
|
|
Wages Expense
|
190,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Data needed for year-end adjustments are as follows:
a. Unbilled fees at August 31, $9,150.
b. Supplies on hand at August 31, $675.
c. Rent expired, $5,000.
d. Depreciation of equipment during year, $3,300.
e. Unearned fees at August 31, $3,000.
f. Wages accrued but not paid at August 31, $3,100.
Instructions
1. Journalize the six adjusting entries required at August 31, based on the data presented.
2. What would be the effect on the income statement if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?
3. What would be the effect on the balance sheet if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?
4. What would be the effect on the “Net increase or decrease in cash” on the statement of cash flows if adjustments (a) and (f) were omitted at the end of the year?
during 2009 arctic fans amp blowers has invested 245 000 of extra cash in securities 541581
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
810-168. Investments.
During 2009, Arctic Fans& Blowers has invested $245,000 of extra cash in securities. Of the total amount invested, $115,000 was invested in bonds that Arctic plans to hold until maturity (the bonds were issued at par); $55,000 was invested in various equity securities that Arctic plans to hold for an indefinite period of time; and $75,000 was invested in the stock of various companies that Arctic intends to trade to make a short-term profit. At the end of the year, the market value of the held-to-maturity securities was $108,000, the market value of the trading securities was $52,000, and the market value of the available-for-sale securities was $85,000. Use the accounting equation to record all adjustments required at year-end and indicate how the effects of each group of securities will be reported on the financial statements
the pops corporation had the following for the year ended december 31 2008 541583
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-24. Prepare an income statement (LO 1)
The Pops Corporation had the following for the year ended December 31, 2008.
|
Sales
|
$s75,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
230,000
|
|
Interest income
|
10,000
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
9,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
12,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
5,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
15,000
|
|
Loss from discontinued segment operations
|
(10,500)
|
|
Gain on disposal of discontinued segment
|
28,000
|
Required
Assume the corporation is subject to a 30Vo tax rate. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2008.
the following balances appeared in the general ledger for hacky sak corporation at f 541584
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-3A. Prepare an income statement. (LO 1)
The following balances appeared in the general ledger for Hacky Sak Corporation at fiscal year end September 30, 2008:
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$ 2s,000
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
50,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
75,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
135,000
|
|
Net sales
|
375,000
|
|
Other expenses and losses
|
15,000
|
In addition, the following occurred throughout the year.
1. On April 10, a tornado destroyed one of the company’s manufacturing plants resulting in an extraordinary loss of $55,000.
2. On July 31, the company discontinued one of its unprofitable segments. The loss from operations was $25,000. The assets of the segment were sold at a gain of $15,000.
Required
a. Assume Hacky Sak’s income tax rate is 40Vo; prepare the income statement for the year ended September3 0, 2008.
b. Calculate the earnings per share the company would report on the income statement assuming Hacky Sak had a weighted average of 200,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year and paid preferred dividends of $5,000.
given the information below from a firm s financial statement 541586
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-5A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)
Given the information below from a firm’s financial statement
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net sales (all on account)
|
$5,003,837
|
$4,934,430
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,755,323
|
2,804,459
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
2,248,514
|
2,129,971
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
61,168
|
71,971
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
186,258
|
167,239
|
|
|
Net income
|
$303,860
|
$272,864
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 18,623
|
$19,133
|
$ 3,530
|
|
Accounts receivable less allowance
|
606,046
|
604,516
|
546,314
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,597,3 77
|
1,547,290
|
1,532,253
|
|
Total assets
|
4,052,090
|
4,065,462
|
4,035,801
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,189,862
|
1,111,973
|
44,539
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
1,153,595
|
1,237,549
|
|
|
Total shareholder’s equity*
|
1,698,532
|
1,715,940
|
1,592,180
|
|
*The firm has no preferred stock.
|
|
|
|
Required
a. Calculate the following ratios for 2009 and 2008:
1. Current ratio
2. Acid-test ratio (assume no short-term investments)
3. Working capital
4. Accounts receivable turnover ratio
5. Debt-to-equity ratio
6. Times-interest-earned ratio
7. Return on equity
8. Gross profit percentage
b. Suppose the changes from 2008 to 2009 in each of these ratios were consistent with the direction and size of the change for the past several years. For each ratio, explain what the trend in the ratio would indicate about the company.
the following information was taken from the 2008 annual report of presentations 541587
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-6A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)
The following information was taken from the 2008 annual report of Presentations
|
At December 31, (in thousands)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$1,617
|
$1,220
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,925
|
3,112
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
2,070
|
966
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
188
|
149
|
|
Total current assets
|
5,800
|
5,447
|
|
Plant and equipment:
|
|
|
|
Buildings net
|
$4457
|
$2,992
|
|
Equipment net
|
1,293
|
1,045
|
|
Total plant and equipment
|
$5,750
|
$4,037
|
|
Total assets
|
$11,550
|
$9,484
|
|
LIABILITIES
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 1817
|
$ 1,685
|
|
Notes payable
|
900
|
1,100
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
2,717
|
2,785
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
3,500
|
2,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
6,217
|
4,795
|
|
STOCKHOLDERESQ’ UITY
|
|
|
|
Common stock, no par value
|
3,390
|
3,042
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,943
|
1,657
|
|
Total stockholder’s equity
|
5,333
|
4,699
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$11,550
|
59,484
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$12,228
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
8,751
|
|
|
Gross profit on sales
|
3,477
|
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation-buildings and equipment
|
102
|
|
|
Other selling and administrative
|
2,667
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
2,769
|
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
708
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
168
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
540
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
114
|
|
|
Net income
|
$426
|
|
Required
a. Calculate the following ratios for 2008 and 2007 whenever possible.
1. Debt-to-equity ratio
2. Gross margin percentage
3. Current ratio
4. Acid-test ratio
5. Times-interest-earned ratio
b. What do the ratios indicate about the success of Presentations? What additional information would help you analyze the overall performance of this company?
the financial statements of for the kitchen include the following items 541588
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-7A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)
The financial statements of For the Kitchen include the following items.
|
At June 30, 2007
|
June 30, 2006
|
June 30, 2005
|
|
Balance sheet :
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 17,000
|
$ 12,000
|
$ 14,000
|
|
Investments(i n trading securities)
|
10,000
|
16,000
|
20,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
54,000
|
50,000
|
48,000
|
|
Inventory
|
75,000
|
70,000
|
73,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
16,000
|
12,000
|
10,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
172,000
|
160,000
|
165,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$140,000
|
$ 90,000
|
$75,000
|
|
Income statement for the
|
June 30, 2007
|
June 30 2006
|
|
|
Year ended
|
$420,000
|
$380,000
|
|
|
Net credit sales
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Required
a. Compute the following ratios for the years ended June 30, 2007, and whenever possible for the year ended June 30, 2006. For each, indicate if the direction is favorable or unfavorable for the company.
1. Current ratio
2. Accounts receivable turnover
3. Inventory turnover ratio
4. Gross profit percentage
b. Suppose the industry average for similar retail stores for the current ratio is 1.7.
Does this information help you evaluate For the Kitchen’s liquidity?
you are interested in investing in reese company and you have obtained the balance s 541589
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-8A. Calculate and analyze financial ratios, (LO 3)
You are interested in investing in Reese Company, and you have obtained the balance sheets for the company for the past 2 years.
|
Reese Company Balance Sheet At June 30, 2007 and 2006
|
|
|
2007
|
2005
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$198,000
|
$90,000
|
|
Accounts receivable net
|
210,000
|
116,000
|
|
Inventory
|
270,000
|
1 60,000
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
15,000
|
16,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
693,000
|
382,000
|
|
Equipment net
|
280,000
|
250,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$973,000
|
$642,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$306,000
|
$223,000
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
219,000
|
117,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
525,000
|
340,000
|
|
Common stockholder’s equity
|
150,000
|
90,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
298,000
|
212,O00
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$973,000
|
$642,000
|
The following amounts were reported on the income statement for the year ended June 30, 2007.
|
Sales
|
$450,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
215,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
7,500
|
|
Net income
|
80,000
|
Required
a. Compute as many of the financial statement ratios you have studied as possible with the information provided for Reese Company. Some ratios can be computed for both years and others can be computed for only 1 year.
b. Would you invest in Reese Company? Why or why not? What additional information would be helpful in making this decision?
each of the following items was found on the financial statements for logan company 541590
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-1B. Discontinued operations and extraordinary item. (LO I)
Each of the following items was found on the financial statements for Logan Company for the year ended December 31, 2008.
|
Income from continuing operations
|
85,000
|
|
Gain on the sale of discontinued segment net of taxes $9,000
|
30,000
|
|
Loss from operation of discontinued segment net of taxes of $9,750
|
(32,500)
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
12,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss from earthquake net of taxes $45,000
|
(150,000)
|
Required
a. For each item listed, indicate the financial statement and appropriate section, if applicable, on which each would appear.
b. Provide a description of each item and give as many details of each item’s financial statement presentation as possible.
c. Based on the data provided, what is Logan Company’s tax rate?
the blues corporation had the following for the year ended december 31 2007 541591
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P102B. Prepare an income statement (LO1)
The Blues Corporation had the following for the year ended December 31,2007.
|
Sales
|
$425,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
185,000
|
|
Interest income
|
8,000
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
4,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
18,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
25,000
|
|
Loss from discontinued segment operations
|
(e,s00)
|
|
Gain on disposal of discontinued segment
|
36,000
|
Required
Assume the corporation is subject to a 40Vo tax rate. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31,2007 .
the following balances appeared in the general ledger for ski daddle corporation at 541592
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-3B. Prepare an income statement (LO 1)
The following balances appeared in the general ledger for Ski Daddle Corporation at fiscal year-end December 3I, 2007.
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$ 4s,000
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
80,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
110,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
185,000
|
|
Net sales
|
325,000
|
|
Other expenses and losses
|
8,000
|
In addition, the following occurred throughout the year.
1. On August 20, a fire destroyed one of the company’s warehouses resulting in an extraordinary loss of $35,000.
2. On October 31, the company discontinued one of its unprofitable segments. The loss from operations was $35,000. The assets of the segment were sold at a gain of $19,000.
Required
a. Assume Ski Daddle Corporation’s income tax rate is 307o; prepare the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2001.
b. Calculate the earnings per share the company would report on the income statement assuming Ski Daddle had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year and paid preferred dividends of $15,000.
here are the income statements from a firm s recent annual report 541593
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-4B. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis. (LO 2)
Here are the income statements from a firm’s recent annual report.
|
Year ended December 31 (in millions)
|
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Net revenue
|
526,971
|
$25,112
|
$23,512
|
|
Cost of sales
|
12,379
|
11,497
|
10,750
|
|
Selling general, and administrative
|
|
|
|
|
expenses
|
9,460
|
8,958
|
8,574
|
|
Amortization of intangible assets
|
145
|
138
|
165
|
|
Other expenses
|
204
|
224
|
355
|
|
Operating profit
|
4,783
|
4,295
|
3,667
|
|
Income from investments
|
323
|
280
|
160
|
|
Interest expense
|
(163)
|
(178)
|
(219)
|
|
Interest income
|
51
|
36
|
67
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
4,994
|
4,433
|
3,675
|
|
Income taxes
|
1,424
|
1,433
|
1,244
|
|
Net income
|
$ g,szo
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 2,431
|
the following information was taken from the annual report of rom 541594
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-6B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)
The following information was taken from the annual report of ROM’
|
At Decembe3r1 (in thousands) 2008
|
|
ASSETS:
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$1,220
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
3,112
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
966
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
149
|
|
Total current assets
|
5,447
|
|
Plant and equipment:
|
|
|
Buildings net
|
2,992
|
|
Equipment net
|
1,045
|
|
Total plant and equipment
|
4,037
|
|
Total assets
|
$9,484
|
|
LIABILITIES:
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 1,685
|
|
Notes payable
|
1,100
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
2,785
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
2,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
4,785
|
|
Stockholder’s Equity
|
|
|
Common stock, no par value
|
3,042
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,657
|
|
Total stockholder’s equity
|
4,699
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$9,484
|
|
Sales of the year
|
10,200
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
6,750
|
|
Total assets at Dec. 31, 2007
|
8,980
|
|
Total liabilities at Dec. 31, 2007
|
4,535
|
|
Total stockholder’s equity at Dec. 31, 2007
|
4,445
|
Required
a. Calculate the following ratios for 2008:
1. Debt-to-equity ratio
2. Gross profit percentage
3. Current ratio
4. Acid-test ratio
b. What do the ratios indicate about the success of ROM? What additional information would be useful to help you analyze the overall performance of this company?
the financial statements of builder bob s include the following items 541595
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-7B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 3)
The financial statements of Builder Bob’s include the following items
|
Sept. 30, 2008
|
Sept. 30, 2007
|
|
At
|
|
|
|
Balance sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$27,000
|
$22,000
|
|
Investments (short-term)
|
15,000
|
12,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
44,000
|
40,000
|
|
Inventory
|
85,000
|
75,000
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
6,000
|
2,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$1 77,000
|
$151, 000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$120,000
|
$ 80,000
|
Income statement for the year ended September 30, 2008
|
Net credit sales
|
$320,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
150,000
|
Required
a. Compute the following ratios for the year ended September 30, 2008, and
September 30, 2007 . For each, indicate if the direction is favorable or unfavorable for the company.
1. Current ratio
2. Quick ratio
3. Accounts receivable turnover (2008 only)
4. Inventory turnover ratio (2008 only)
5. Gross margin percentage (2008 only)
b. Which financial statement users would be most interested in these ratios?
c. Suppose the industry average for similar retail stores for the current ratio is 1.2.
Does this information help you evaluate Builder Bob’s liquidity?
you are interested in investing in apples and nuts company and you have obtained the 541596
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-8B. Calculate and analyze financial ratios. (LO 5)
You are interested in investing in Apples and Nuts Company, and you have obtained the balance sheets for the company for the past 2 years
|
Apples and Nuts Company Balance Sheet At December 31, 2008 and 2007
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$873,000
|
$90,000
|
|
Accounts receivable net
|
$ 98,000
|
216,000
|
|
Inventory
|
310,000
|
170,000
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
275,000
|
5,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
10,000
|
482,000
|
|
Equipment net
|
693,000
|
258,000
|
|
Total assets
|
1 80,000
|
$740,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$206,000
|
$223,000
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
219,000
|
217,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
425,000
|
440,000
|
|
Common stockholder’s equity
|
250,000
|
1 90,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1 98,000
|
1 10,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$873,000
|
$740,ooo
|
Net income for the year ended December 3L, 2008 was $ 100,000.
Required
a. Compute as many of the financial statement ratios you have studied as possible with the information from Apples and Nuts Company. (Compute 2008 ratios.)
b. Would you invest in this company? Why or why not? What additional information would be helpful in making this decision?
the following excerpt is from a conversation between kate purvis the president and c 541600
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Debits and credits
Group Project
The following excerpt is from a conversation between Kate Purvis, the president and chief operating officer of Light House Company, and her neighbor, Dot Evers. Dot: Kate, I’m taking a course in night school, “Intro to Accounting.” I was wondering—could you answer a couple of questions for me? Kate: Well, I will if I can. Dot: Okay, our instructor says that it’s critical we understand the basic concepts of accounting, or we’ll never get beyond the first test. My problem is with those rules of debit and credit you know, assets increase with debits, decrease with credits, etc.
Kate: Yes, pretty basic stuff. You just have to memorize the rules. It shouldn’t be too difficult. Dot: Sure, I can memorize the rules, but my problem is I want to be sure I understand the basic concepts behind the rules. For example, why can’t assets be increased with credits and decreased with debits like revenue? As long as everyone did it that way, why not? It would seem easier if we had the same rules for all increases and decreases in accounts. Also, why is the left side of an account called the debit side? Why couldn’t it be called something simple like the “LE” for Left Entry? The right side could be called just “RE” for Right Entry. Finally, why are there just two sides to an entry? Why can’t there be three or four sides to an entry? In a group of four or five, select one person to play the role of Kate and one person to play the role of Dot.
1. After listening to the conversation between Kate and Dot, help Kate answer Dot’s questions.
2. What information (other than just debit and credit journal entries) could the accounting system gather that might be useful to Kate in managing Light House Company?
cory neece is planning to manage and operate eagle caddy service at canyon lake golf 541601
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions and income statement
Cory Neece is planning to manage and operate Eagle Caddy Service at Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club during June through August 2014. Cory will rent a small maintenance building from the country club for $500 per month and will offer caddy services, including cart rentals, to golfers. Cory has had no formal training in record keeping.
Cory keeps notes of all receipts and expenses in a shoe box. An examination of Cory’s shoe box records for June revealed the following:
June 1. Transferred $2,000 from personal bank account to be used to operate the caddy service.
1. Paid rent expense to Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club, $500.
2. Paid for golf supplies (practice balls, etc.), $750.
3. Arranged for the rental of 40 regular (pulling) golf carts and 20 gasoline-driven carts for $3,000 per month. Paid $600 in advance, with the remaining $2,400 due June 20.
7. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, for the golf carts on account, $1,000. Canyon Lake Golf and Country Club has agreed to allow Cory to store the gasoline in one of its fuel tanks at no cost.
15. Received cash for services from June 1–15, $5,400.
17. Paid cash to creditors on account, $1,000.
20. Paid remaining rental on golf carts, $2,400.
22. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, on account, $850.
25. Accepted IOUs from customers on account, $1,800.
28. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $395.
30. Received cash for services from June 16–30, $4,200.
30. Paid telephone and electricity (utilities) expenses, $340.
30. Paid wages of part-time employees, $850.
30. Received cash in payment of IOUs on account, $1,500.
30. Determined the amount of supplies on hand at the end of June, $675.
Cory has asked you several questions concerning his financial affairs to date, and he has asked you to assist with his record keeping and reporting of financial data.
a. To assist Cory with his record keeping, prepare a chart of accounts that would be appropriate for Eagle Caddy Service. Note: Small businesses such as Eagle Caddy Service are often organized as proprietorships. The accounting for proprietorships is similar to that for a corporation, except that the stockholders’ equity accounts differ. Specifically, instead of the account for Capital Stock, a capital account entitled Cory Neece, Capital is used to record investments in the business. In addition, instead of a dividends account, withdrawals from the business are debited to Cory Neece, Drawing.
b. A proprietorship has no retained earnings account.
c. Prepare an income statement for June in order to help Cory assess the profitability of Eagle Caddy Service. For this purpose, the use of T accounts may be helpful in analyzing the effects of each June transaction.
d. Based on Cory’s records of receipts and payments, compute the amount of cash on hand on June 30. For this purpose, a T account for cash may be useful.
e. A count of the cash on hand on June 30 totaled $6,175. Briefly discuss the possible causes of the difference between the amount of cash computed in (c) and the actual amount of cash on hand.
the increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has cre 541602
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Opportunities for accountants
The increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has created an increased demand for accountants who can analyze business transactions and interpret their effects on the financial statements. In addition, a basic ability to analyze the effects of transactions is necessary to be successful in all fields of business as well as in other disciplines, such as law. To better understand the importance of accounting in today’s environment, search the Internet or your local newspaper for job opportunities. Then do one of the following:
1. Print a listing of one or two ads for accounting jobs. Alternatively, bring to class one or two newspaper ads for accounting jobs.
2. Print a listing of one or two ads for non-accounting jobs for which some knowledge of accounting is preferred or necessary. Alternatively, bring to class one or two newspaper
two income statements for cornea company are shown below 541631
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vertical analysis
Two income statements for Cornea Company are shown below.
|
Cornea Company
Income Statements
For Years Ended December 31
|
| |
2014
|
2013
|
|
Fees earned
|
$1,640,000
|
$1,300,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
869,200
|
715,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 770,800
|
$ 585,000
|
a. Prepare a vertical analysis of Cornea Company’s income statements.
b. Does the vertical analysis indicate a favorable or an unfavorable trend?
the following accounts were taken from the unadjusted trial balance of orion co a co 541633
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying adjusting entries
The following accounts were taken from the unadjusted trial balance of Orion Co., a congressional lobbying firm. Indicate whether or not each account would normally require an adjusting entry. If the account normally requires an adjusting entry, use the following notation to indicate the type of adjustment:
AE—Accrued Expense
AR—Accrued Revenue
PE—Prepaid Expense
UR—Unearned Revenue
To illustrate, the answer for the first account is shown below.
|
Account
|
Answer
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Normally requires adjustment (AR).
|
|
Capital Stock
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
|
Land
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
Wages Expense
|
the wages payable and wages expense accounts at may 31 after adjusting entries have 541645
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining wages paid
The wages payable and wages expense accounts at May 31, after adjusting entries have been posted at the end of the first month of operations, are shown in the following T accounts:
|
Wages Payable
|
Wages Expense
|
| |
Bal.
|
7,175
|
Bal.
|
73,250
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Determine the amount of wages paid during the month.
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 3 1 2008 murray c 541510
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-7A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2008, Murray Company gathered the following information.
|
Dividends paid
|
$ 16,200
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
40,000
|
|
Proceeds from bank loan
|
180,000
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
9,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of equipment
|
25,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of common stock
|
250,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
the information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of matt s music company 541511
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-28, Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)
The information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of Matt’s Music Company at December 31, 2008 and 2O01.
|
At December 31 2008
|
2007
|
|
(in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$3,500
|
$2,090
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,725
|
2,980
|
|
Inventory
|
1,050
|
1,300
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
520
|
470
|
|
Total current assets
|
$7,795
|
$6,840
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$2,890
|
$1,650
|
|
Salaries payable
|
1,500
|
3,200
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$4,390
|
$4,850
|
Net income for 2008 was $ 211,000. Depreciation expense of $80,000 was including the Operating expenses of the year.
Required
Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for Matt’s Music Company for the year ended December 31, 2008
the information shown comes from the balance sheets of walker corporation at septemb 541512
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-3B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method (LO5)
The information shown comes from the balance sheets of Walker Corporation at September 30, 2008 and 2007.
|
Walker Corporation Balance Sheets (Adapted) September 30, 2008, and September 30, 2007
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
(in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$2,110
|
$1,650
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,254
|
1,977
|
|
Inventory
|
700
|
656
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
157
|
314
|
|
Total current assets
|
$4,221
|
$4,597
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$2,000
|
$2,330
|
|
Wages payable
|
1,154
|
750
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$3,154
|
$3,080
|
Net income for the year ended September 30, 2008, was $146,000. Included in the operating expenses for the year was depreciation expense of $11 2,000.
Required
Prepare the cash from operating activities section of Walker Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2008. Use the indirect method.
ace corporation had the following information available for 2008 541513
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-48. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)
Ace Corporation had the following information available for 2008.
|
January 1
|
December 31
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$80,000
|
$76,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
48,000
|
25,000
|
|
Inventory
|
76,000
|
50,000
|
Ace Corporation reported net income of $130,000 for the year. Depreciation expense, included on the income statement was $20,800.
Required
Assume this is all the information relevant to the statement of cash flows. Use the indirect method to prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of Ace Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2008
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 3 1 2007 wright c 541514
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-58. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 3 1, 2007, Wright Company gathered the following information.
|
Proceeds from bond issue (face value $100,000)
|
$120,000
|
|
Amortization of bond premium
|
1,000
|
|
Dividends declared
|
15,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
12,000
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
50,000
|
|
Loss on sale of machinery
|
18,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of machinery
|
30,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2008 bowden 541515
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-68. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, Bowden
Company gathered the following information.
|
Dividends declared
|
$1s,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
i2,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of treasury stock
|
70,000
|
|
Repayment of loan principal
|
32,000
|
|
Payment of interest on loan
|
320
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
3,500
|
|
Proceeds from sale of equipment
|
11,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
75,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2001 tango com 541516
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-78. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2001, Tango Company gathered the following information.
|
Proceeds from bank loan
|
157,000
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
12,500
|
|
Proceeds from sale of equipment
|
35,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of common stock
|
100,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
t2,400
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
85,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
a 5 year comparative analysis of low light company s current ratio and quick ratio f 541546
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SE10-10. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
A 5-year comparative analysis of Low Light Company’s current ratio and quick ratio follows.
|
2004
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
current ratio
|
1.19
|
1.85
|
2.50
|
3.40
|
4.02
|
|
Acid- test ratio
|
1. i5
|
1.02
|
0.98
|
0.72
|
0.50
|
a. What has been happening to the liquidity of Low Light Company over the 5 years presented?
b. Considering both ratios, what does the trend indicate about what has happened to the makeup of Low Light’s current assets over the 5-year period?
the following is a 5 year comparative analysis of accent company s return on assets 541548
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SE10-12. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
The following is a 5-year comparative analysis of Accent Company’s return on assets and return on equity.
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Return on assets
|
8%
|
7.5%
|
7.12%
|
6.54%
|
6%
|
|
Return on equity
|
20%
|
21%
|
21.8%
|
22.2%
|
23%
|
a. What does this analysis tell you about the overall profitability of Accent Company over the S-year period?
b. What does this analysis tell you about what has happened to Accent’s amount of debt over the past 5 years?
use the income statement from color copy to perform a vertical analysis with sales a 541556
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-4A. Vertical analysis. (LO 2)
Use the income statement from Color Copy to perform a vertical analysis with sales as the base.
|
Color Copy Inc.
Income Statement
For the year ended September 30,2OO7
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$10,228
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
5,75
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$4,477
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation-buildings and equipment
|
$ 100
|
|
|
Other selling and administrative
|
2,500
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
2,600
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
|
$ 1,877
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
350
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
$1,527
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
150
|
|
Net income
|
|
1,377
|
calculate the current ratio and the amount of working capital for albert s hotels fo 541557
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-5A. Current ratio and working capital. (LO 3)
Calculate the current ratio and the amount of working capital for Albert’s Hotels for the years given in the following comparative balance sheets. Although 2 year c is not much of a trend, what is your opinion of the direction of these ratios?
|
Albert Hotels Inc. Balance Sheet At December 31, 2008 and 2007
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current assets;
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$98,000
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Accounts receivable net
|
1 10,000
|
1 16,000
|
|
Inventory
|
170,000
|
160,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
18,000
|
16,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
396,000
|
382,000
|
|
Equipment net
|
184,000
|
160,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$580,000
|
$542,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$206,000
|
$223,000
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
1 19,000
|
1 17,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
325,000
|
340,000
|
|
Common stockholder’s equity
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
155,000
|
112,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$580,000
|
$542,000
|
zap electronics reported the following for the fiscal years ended january 31 2007 an 541559
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-7A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
Zap Electronics reported the following for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2007, and January 31, 2006.
|
January3 1
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
(in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 35,184
|
$ 24,306
|
|
Inventory
|
106,754
|
113,875
|
|
Current assets
|
174,369
|
124,369
|
|
Current liabilities
|
71,616
|
68,001
|
|
Long- term liabilities
|
12,315
|
35,200
|
|
Shareholder’s equity
|
121,851
|
198,935
|
|
Sales
|
712,855
|
580,223
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
483,463
|
400,126
|
|
Interest expense
|
335
|
709
|
|
Net income
|
11,953
|
4,706
|
Assume all sales are on credit and the firm has no preferred stock outstandings. Calculate the following ratios.
a. Current ratio (for both years)
b. Accounts receivable turnover ratio (for 2007)
c. Inventory turnover ratio (for 2007)
d. Debt-to-equity ratio (for both years)
e. Return on equity ratio (for 2007)
Do any of these ratios suggest problems for the company?
evans family grocers reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years 541560
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-8A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
Evans Family Grocers reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years.
|
December 31
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Cash
|
$ 25,000
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Receivables (net)
|
60,000
|
70,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
55,000
|
30,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
280,000
|
260,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$420,000
|
$380,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$45,000
|
62,000
|
|
Long-term notes payable
|
$4?9p99
|
100,000
|
|
Common stock
|
45,000
|
122,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
75,000
|
96,000
|
|
Total Liabilities and Shareholder’s Equity
|
135,000
|
$380,000
|
|
Net income for the year ended 12/31/08
|
165,000
|
|
|
Sales( all sales were on account)
|
450,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
210,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,500
|
|
Calculate the following for the year ended December 31,2008.
a. Current ratio
b. Working capital
c. Accounts receivable turnover ratio
d. Inventory turnover ratio
e. Return on assets
f. Return on equity
furniture showcase reported the following for its fiscal year ended june 30 2008 541561
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-9A. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
Furniture Showcase reported the following for its fiscal year ended June 30, 2008.
|
Sales
|
$530,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
300,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
230,000
|
|
Expenses*
|
113,000
|
|
Net income
|
$117,000
|
*Included in the expenses was $12,000 of interest expense.
Assume no income tax expense.
At the beginning of the year, the company had 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding. At the end of the year, there were 40,000 shares outstanding. The market price of the company’s stock at year-end was $20 per share. The company declared and paid $80,000 of dividends near year-end.
Calculate earnings per share, the price-earnings ratio, and times-interest-earned ratio for Furniture Showcase.
during 2007 nike has invested 200 000 of extra cash in securities of the total amoun 541567
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-16A: Investments.
During 2007, Nike has invested $200,000 of extra cash in securities. Of the total amount invested, $75,000 was invested in bonds that Nike plans to hold until maturity (the bonds were issued at par value); $65,000 was invested in various equity securities that Nike plans to hold for an indefinite period of time; and $60,000 was invested in the stock of various companies that Nike intends to trade to make a short-term profit. At the end of the year, the market value of the held-to-maturity securities was $80,000; the market value of the trading securities was $75,000; and the market value of the available-for-sale securities was $55,000.
Use the accounting equation to record all adjustments required at year-end, and indicate how the effects of each group of securities will be reported on the financial statements.
use the income statement from designers discount inc to perform a vertical analysis 541571
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E1-0-48. Vertical analysis. (LO 2)
Use the income statement from Designers Discount Inc. to perform a vertical analysis with sales as the base.
|
Designers Discount Inc. Income Statement For the year ended March 28, 2008
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$16,374
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
7,985
|
|
Gross profit on sales
|
|
$ 8,389
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation-buildings and equipment
|
$265
|
|
|
Other selling and administrative
|
3,750
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
4,015
|
|
Income before interest and taxes
|
|
$4374
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
254
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
$4,120
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
1,236
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 2,884
|
crystal cromarties frozen foods reported the following for the fiscal years ended se 541574
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-7B. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
Crystal Cromarties Frozen Foods reported the following for the fiscal years ended September 30,2008, and September 30, 2007
|
September 30
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$21,265
|
$13,802
|
|
Inventory
|
45,692
|
47,682
|
|
Current assets
|
185,716
|
155,716
|
|
Current liabilities
|
80,954
|
72,263
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
15,251
|
17,852
|
|
Shareholder’s equity
|
21,871
|
58,035
|
|
Sales
|
88,455
|
70,223
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
60,463
|
52,750
|
|
Interest expense
|
21.5
|
43.2
|
|
Net income
|
1,842
|
1,006
|
Assume there is no outstanding preferred stock and all sales are credit sales. Calculate the following ratios.
a. Current ratio (for both years)
b. Accounts receivable turnover ratio (for 2008)
c. Inventory turnover ratio (for 2008)
d. Debt-to-equity ratio (for both years)
e. Return on equity (for 2008)
Do any of these ratios suggest problems for the company?
hutson coffee shops reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years 541575
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-88. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
Hutson Coffee Shops reported the following for the two most recent fiscal years.
|
December 31
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Cash
|
$ 34,000
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Receivables(net)
|
85,000
|
80,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
74,000
|
48,000
|
|
Fixed assets
|
365,000
|
324,O00
|
|
Total assets
|
$558,000
|
$469,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
65,000
|
83,000
|
|
Long-term notes payable
|
82,000
|
112,000
|
|
Common stock
|
175,000
|
144,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
235,000
|
130,000
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholder’s equity
|
$558,000
|
$469,000
|
|
Net income for the year ended 12/31/1O
|
$115,000
|
|
|
Sales(all sales were on account )
|
620,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
284,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
|
Calculate the following for the year ended December 31,2010.
a. Current ratio
b. Working capital
c. Accounts receivable turnover ratio
d. Inventory turnover ratio
e. Return on assets
f. Return on equity
international imports corporation reported the following for its fiscal year ended 541576
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-98. Ratio analysis. (LO 3)
International Imports Corporation reported the following for its fiscal year ended
June 30, 2007.
|
Sales
|
$640,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
470,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
170,000
|
|
Expenses*
|
94,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 76,000
|
*Included in the expenses were $9,000 of interest expense and $14,000 of income tax expense.
At the beginning of the year, the company had 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding and no preferred stock. At the end of the year, there were 25,000 common shares outstanding and no preferred stock. The market price of the company’s stock at year-end was $15 per share. The company declared and paid $46,000 of dividends near year-end.
Calculate earnings per share, the price-earnings ratio, and times-interest-earned ratio for International Imports.
kinsey scales invested 164 000 of its extra cash in securities under each of the fol 541580
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-15B: Investments.
Kinsey Scales invested $164,000 of its extra cash in securities. Under each of the following independent scenarios (a) calculate the amount at which the investments would be valued for the year-end balance sheet, and (b) indicate how these scenarios should be reported on the other financial statements if at all.
1. Al1 the securities were debt securities, with a maturity date in 2 years. Kinsey will hold the securities until they mature. The market value of the securities at year-end was $158,000.
2. Kinsey purchased the securities for trading, hoping to make a quick profit. At year-end the market value of the securities was $162,000.
3. Kinsey is uncertain about how long it will hold the securities. At year-end the market value of the securities is $167,000
the following information applies to computer company 541483
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-9A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 1,4)
The following information applies to Computer Company.
Income Statement for the Year Ended December 31,2007
|
Sales
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(15,200)
|
|
Gross margin
|
4,800
|
|
Rent expense
|
(1,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 3,800
|
1. Accounts receivable started the year with a balance of $1,000 and ended the year with a balance of $3,300
2. The beginning balance in accounts payable (to vendors) was 92,000, and the ending balance was zero. Inventory at the end of the year was the same as it was at the beginning of the year (i.e., there was no change in inventory).
3. The company started the year with $5,000 of prepaid rent and ended the year with $4,000 of prepaid rent.
Determine the following cash flows.
a. Cash collected from customers for sales during the year
b. Cash paid to vendors for inventory during the year
c. Cash paid for rent during the year
the following information was taken from tram inc s balance sheets at december 3 1 2 541485
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-11A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)
The following information was taken from Tram Inc.’s balance sheets at December 3 1, 2005 and 2006. Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2006, using the indirect method.
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$103,000
|
$99,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
90,000
|
79,000
|
|
Inventory
|
150,000
|
142,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
47,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$390,000
|
$370,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accrued expenses payable
|
$ 17,000
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
60,000
|
92,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 77,000
|
$107,000
|
Net income for 2006 was $ 1 85,000. Depreciation expense was $25,000.
during the fiscal year ended september 30 2006 napster company engaged in the follow 541487
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-13A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO I, 4)
During the fiscal year ended September 30,2006, Napster Company engaged in the following transactions. Using the relevant transactions, prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
a. Paid interest of $7,000
b. Collected $175,000 on accounts receivable
c. Made cash sales of $128,000
d. Paid salaries of $52,000
e. Recorded depreciation expense of $27,000
f. Paid income taxes of $32,000
g. Sold equipment for cash of $152,000
h. Purchased new equipment for cash of $41,000
i. Made payments to vendors of $62,700
j. Paid dividends of$20,000
k. Purchased land for cash of $ 1 74,000
1. Paid operating expenses of $32,500
use the following information for just nuts company to prepare a statement of cash f 541488
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-14A. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (LO 5, 6)
Use the following information for Just Nuts Company to prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
|
Just Nuts Company Balance Sheet June 30
|
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 193,000
|
$ 1 20,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
64,000
|
60,000
|
|
Inventories
|
1 20,000
|
1 75,000
|
|
Land
|
95,000
|
120,000
|
|
Equipment
|
250,000
|
180,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(75,000)
|
(45,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$647,000
|
$610 ,500
|
|
Liabilities and Shareholders Equity
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 42,ooo
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
150,000
|
220,000
|
|
Common stock and additional
|
|
|
paid-in capital
|
200,000
|
1 80,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
245,000
|
1 60,500
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders’
|
|
|
equity
|
$647,00
|
$610,500
|
Additional information:
a. Net income for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007, was $95,000.
b. The company declared and paid cash dividends.
c. The company redeemed bonds payable amounting to $60,000 for cash of $60,000.
d. The company issue common stock for $20,000 cash.
the following information has been taken from the most recent statement of cash flow 541490
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-16A. Analyze a statement of cash flows. (LO 7)
The following information has been taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of Expansion Company:
|
Net cash used by operating activities
|
$(932,000)
|
|
Net cash provided by investing activities
|
$1,180,500
|
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
$2,107,000
|
a. What information do these subtotals from the statement of cash flows tell you about Expansion Company?
b. What additional information would you want to see before you analyze Expansion Company’s ability to generate positive operating cash flows in the future?
c. Did Expansion have a positive net income for the period? What information would you like to see to help you predict next year’s net income?
for each of the following items tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and 541491
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-1B. Identify cash flows (L.OI )
For each of the following items, tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and the section of the statement of cash flows in which the item would appear. (Assume the direct method is used.)
|
Inflow or Outflow
|
Section of the Statement
|
|
Item
|
|
|
|
a. Cash paid to vendor for supplies
|
|
|
|
b. Purchase of treasury stock
|
|
|
|
c. Principle payment on bonds
|
|
|
|
d. Interest payment on bonds
|
|
|
|
e. Cash paid for salaries
|
|
|
|
f. Cash from issuance of common stock
|
|
|
|
g. Cash dividends paid
|
|
|
|
h. Cash paid for rent and utilities
|
|
|
|
i . Purchase of computer for cash
|
|
|
|
j. Cash paid for company vehicle
|
|
|
|
k. Income taxes paid
|
|
|
for each transaction indicate the amount of the cash flow indicate whether each resu 541492
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-2B. Identify cash flows. (LO 1, 4)
For each transaction, indicate the amount of the cash flow, indicate whether each results in an inflow or outflow of cash, and give the section of the statement in which each cash flow would appear. Assume the statement of cash flows is prepared using the direct method
|
Inflow or Outflow
|
Section of the Statement
|
|
Item
|
|
|
|
a. lssued6 60 shares of $0.10 Par
|
|
|
|
common stock for $15 per share.
|
|
|
|
b. Sold $2,500 of inventory, received
|
|
|
|
$1,500 in cash and remaining
|
|
|
|
$1,000o n account
|
|
|
|
c. Purchased a $2,500 computer by
|
|
|
|
Paying cash of $1,000 and signing
|
|
|
|
a short-term note for the
|
|
|
|
other $1,500
|
|
|
|
d. Paid $600 for routine maid
|
|
|
|
Service to clean office
|
|
|
|
e. Paid rent and utility expenses
|
|
|
|
totaling $2,250
|
|
|
|
f. Hired a runner to carry
|
|
|
|
Correspondences between
|
|
|
|
offices and paid her $175
|
|
|
|
g. Repaid the $1,500 short-term
|
|
|
|
note along with $100 interest
|
|
|
|
h. Purchase $1,500 of treasury stock
|
|
|
use the income statement for kristen harrison s cosmetics inc for the past year and 541493
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-3B. Prepare cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 4)
Use the income statement for Kristen Harrison’s Cosmetics Inc. for the past year and the information from the comparative balance sheets shown for the beginning and the end of the year to prepare the operating section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method
|
Sales
|
|
$ 1 50,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
55,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
95,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
Wages
|
$ 3,750
|
|
|
Rent
|
1,600
|
|
|
Utilities
|
850
|
|
|
Insurance
|
175
|
6,375
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 88,625
|
|
Account
|
Beginning of the Year
|
End of the Year
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 12,000
|
$ 1o,ooo
|
|
Inventory
|
18,200
|
19,700
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
600
|
200
|
|
Accounts payable
|
8,000
|
7,400
|
|
Wages payable
|
725
|
850
|
|
Utilities payable
|
0
|
-275-
|
given the following information calculate the change in cash for the year 541495
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-58. Calculate change in cash. (LO I, 5)
Given the following information, calculate the change in cash for the year.
|
Cash received from sale of company van
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Cash paid for utilities and rent
|
5,150
|
|
Cash paid for interest expense during the year
|
10,650
|
|
Cash paid for purchase of treasury stock
|
25,000
|
|
Cash collected from customers
|
68,250
|
|
Cash received from issuance of bonds
|
114,500
|
|
Cash paid for salaries
|
12,000
|
|
Cash paid to do a major repair of equipment to prolong its useful life for five more years
|
32,480
|
calculate cash from operating activities 541496
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-68. Calculate cash from operating activities. (LO 2, 5 )
a. Cash paid for utilities
b. Cash paid for interest
c. Cash paid for inventory items
d. Cash collected from customers
From the Financial Statements for MF Company.
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Income Statement
|
Beginning
|
End
|
|
Amount for the Year
|
of the Year
|
of the Year
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$314,250
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 1,200
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1 8,30
|
|
|
|
Utilities payable
|
|
1,500
|
2,700
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
25,600
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
7,800
|
6,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
1,500
|
2,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
5,750
|
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
2,400
|
2,300
|
the following information applies to electronics plus inc 541498
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-9B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO 1, 4)
The following information applies to Electronics Plus Inc.:
Income Statement for the Year Ended June 30, 2010
|
Sales
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(20,600)
|
|
Gross margin
|
14,400
|
|
Rent expense
|
(1,400)
|
|
Net income
|
$13,000
|
1. Accounts receivable started the year with a balance of $1,500 and ended the year with a balance of $500.
2. The beginning balance in accounts payable (to vendors) was $1,650, and the ending balance was $550. Inventory at the end of the year was the same as it was at the beginning of the year (i.e., there was no change in inventory).
3. The company started the year with $3,000 of prepaid rent and ended the year with $1,600 of prepaid rent.
Determine the following cash flows
a. Cash collected from customers for sales during the year
b. Cash paid to vendors for inventory during the year
c. Cash paid for rent during the year
the following information was taken from fix it company s balance sheets at june 30 541500
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-11B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5 )
The following information was taken from Fix-It Company’s balance sheets at June 30, 2O0i and.2008. Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2008′ using the indirect method.
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$105,000
|
$ 95,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
80,000
|
89,000
|
|
Inventory
|
210,000
|
188,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
53,000
|
45,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$448,000
|
$417,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accrued expenses payable
|
85,000
|
$ 22,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 18,000
|
63,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$103,000
|
$85,000
|
Net income for the year ended June 30, 2008 was $215,000. Depreciation expense was $30,500.
during the fiscal year ended march 31 2008 radio technology inc engaged in the follo 541502
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-13B. Calculate cash from operating activities using the direct method. (LO I, 4)
During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, Radio Technology Inc. engaged in the following transactions. Using the relevant transactions, prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
a. Paid $130,000 on accounts payable related to operating expenses
b. Collected$ 185,000 on accounts receivable
c. Made cash sales of $315,000
d. Paid salaries of $40,000
e. Recorded amortization expense of $15,000
f. Declared a2-for-l stock split
g. Paid interest on loan in the amount of $21,500
h. Repaid principal of loan for $275,000
i. Sold equipment for $295,000
j. Paid dividends of $15,000
k. Purchased a new building for cash of $215,000
I. Paid operating expenses of $65,50
use the following information for law office products and supplies inc to prepare a 541503
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-148. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (LO 2, 5)
Use the following information for LAW Office Products and Supplies Inc. to prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2007, using the indirect method.
|
LAW Office Products and Supplies Inc. Balance Sheet
|
|
2007
|
2008
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 55,000
|
$ 23,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
78,000
|
54,000
|
|
Inventories
|
180,000
|
169,000
|
|
Land
|
135,000
|
105,000
|
|
Equipment
|
350,000
|
260,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(90000)
|
(60,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 708,000
|
$561,500
|
|
Liabilities and Shareholder’s Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 35,000
|
$23,500
|
|
Bonds payable
|
185,000
|
215,000
|
|
Common stock and additional
|
|
|
|
paid-in capital
|
225,0OO
|
175,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
263,000
|
131,500
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholder’s equity
|
$708,000
|
$561,500
|
Additional information:
a. Net income for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2007, was $145,000
b. The company declared and paid cash dividends.
c. The company redeemed bonds payable amounting to $30,000 for cash of $30,000.
d. The company issued common stock for $50,000 cash.
the following information was taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of 541504
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-168. Analyze a statement of cash flows-( LO 7, 8)
The following information was taken from the most recent statement of cash flows of Innovative
Electronics Company’
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$ 845,000
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
$ (530,000)
|
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
$1,675,000
|
a. What information do these subtotals from the statement of cash flows tell you about Innovative Electronics Company?
b. what additional information would you want to see before you analyze Innovative Electronics company’s ability to generate positive operating cash flows in the future?
c. Did Innovative Electronics have a positive net income for the period? What information would you like to see to help you predict next year’s net income?
the information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of m amp s record compa 541505
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate cash from operating activities-indirect method. (LO 5)
The information shown is from the comparative balance sheets of M&S Record Company at December 31,2007 and 2006.
|
(in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$3,000
|
52,490
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,325
|
1,700
|
|
Inventory
|
2,150
|
1,380
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
320
|
270
|
|
Total current assets
|
$7,795
|
$5,840
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$4,390
|
$4,850
|
|
Salaries payable
|
$1,80
|
$ 1,050
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
2,500
|
3,800
|
Net income for 2007 was $356,000. Depreciation expense of $135,00 was including the operating expenses for the year.
Required
Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for M&S Record Company for the year ended December 31, 2001.
the information shown comes from the balance sheets of tcb company at june 30 2008 a 541506
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-3A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)
The information shown comes from the balance sheets of TCB Company at June 30, 2008 and 2007.
|
TCB Company Balance Sheets (Adapted) June 30, 2008, and June 30, 2007
|
|
|
(in thousands)
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$2,11 0
|
$2,6s0
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,254
|
977
|
|
Inventory
|
730
|
856
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
127
|
114
|
|
Total current assets
|
$4221
|
$4597
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$1,054
|
$1,330
|
|
Wages payable
|
2,100
|
1,750
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$3154
|
$3,080
|
Net income for the year ended June 30, 2008, was $86,900. Included in the operating expenses of the year was depreciation expense of $102,000.
Required
Prepare the cash from operating activities section of TCB Company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2008. Use the indirect method.
rollins land corporation had the following information available for 2005 541507
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-4A. Calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method. (LO 5)
Rollins Land Corporation had the following information available for 2005.
|
Januar1y
|
Decembe3r 1
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 1 78,000
|
$151,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
38,000
|
16,000
|
|
Inventory
|
65,000
|
71,000
|
Rollins Land Corporation reported net income of $295,000 for the year. Depreciation expense, included on the income statement was $26,500.
Required
Assume this is all the information relevant to the statement of cash flows. Use the indirect method to prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of Rollins Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2005.
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2008 myers com 541508
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-5A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, Myers Company gathered the following information.
|
Loss on sale of machinery
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of machinery
|
50,000
|
|
Proceeds from bond issue (face value $100,000)
|
80,000
|
|
Amortization of bond discount
|
1,000
|
|
Dividends declared
|
25,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
15,000
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
30,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
to prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2005 martin co 541509
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-6A. Calculate investing and financing cash flows. (LO 6)
To prepare its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31,2005, Martin Company gathered the following information.
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of equipment
|
10,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
80,000
|
|
Dividends declared
|
5,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
2,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of treasury stock
|
90,000
|
|
Repayment of loan principal
|
21,000
|
|
Payment of interest on loan
|
210
|
Required
a. Prepare the cash from investing section of the statement of cash flows.
b. Prepare the cash from financing section of the statement of cash flows.
the following balances were shown on the year end balance sheets for 2007 and 2008 f 541410
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-10B. Analyze equity accounts(.L O 1,2,3,5)
The following balances were shown on the year-end balance sheets for 2007 and 2008 for High Note Publishing Company. For each item, give the most likely reason for the change from one year to the next.
|
12/31/07
|
12/31/08
|
Explanation
|
|
Common stock
|
$ 35,000
|
$43,000
|
|
|
Paid- in capital
|
$115.000
|
155,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$142,000
|
*$160,500
|
|
|
Treasury stock
|
$ (2,125)
|
$ (2,625)
|
|
answer the following questions using the shareholders equity section of fantasy film 541411
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-11B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3)
Answer the following questions using the shareholders’ equity section of Fantasy Films Corporation’s balance sheet at June 30.
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
Preferred stock, cumulative, 15,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
4,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$ 420,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock
|
40,000
|
|
Common stock, $0.05 par, 500,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
250,000 shares issued
|
12,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, common stock
|
675,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,005,000
|
|
2,152,500
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (4,000 common shares)
|
(13,000)
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
$2,139,500
|
a. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?
b. On average what was the issue price of the common shares issued?
c. What is the par value of the preferred stock?
d. If the total annual dividend on preferred stock is $25,200, what is the dividend rate on preferred stock?
e. On average, how much per share did the company pay for the treasury stock?
on the first day of the fiscal year jkb construction inc had 185 000 shares of 50 pa 541412
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-12B. Record stock transactions (LO I, 2, 3, 4)
On the first day of the fiscal year, JKB Construction Inc. had 185,000 shares of $.50 par common stock issued and outstanding, and the retained earnings balance was $165,000.
Show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation.
a. Issued 15,000 additional shares of common stock for $16 per share
b. Distributed a2070 stock dividend
c. Issued 10,000 additional shares of common stock for $15 per share
d. Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $ 1.10 per share
e. Paid the dividend declared in item d
f. Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock for $16 per share
g. Sold 250 shares of treasury stock for $18 per share
h. Sold 200 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share
i. Declared 2-for-l stock split
the following account balances can be found in the general ledger of athletics suppl 541413
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-14B. Prepare equity section of the balance sheet. (LO I, 3, 5)
The following account balances can be found in the general ledger of Athletics Supply Corporation at year-end. Prepare the shareholder’s equity section of the balance sheet
|
Retained earnings
|
$ 450,000
|
|
Treasury stock (4,000 common shares at cost)
|
36,000
|
|
Common stock ($2 par, 500,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
175,000 shares issued)
|
350,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, common stock
|
2,712,500
|
|
Preferred stock ($8 par value, 8%, 90,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
20,000 shares issued)
|
160,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock
|
50,000
|
the following information pertains to the equity accounts of fragrant soap company i 541417
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-34. Analyze and record stock transactions and prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3,4, 5)
The following information pertains to the equity accounts of Fragrant Soap Company Inc. L. Contributed capital on January 1, 2007, consisted of 70,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $0.50; additional paid-in capital in excess of par of $350,000; and retained earnings of $500,000.
2. During the first quarter of 2007, Fragrant Soap Company issued an additional 10,000 shares of common stock for $6 per share.
3. On June 15, the company declared a2-for-l stock split.
4. On September 30, the company distributed a I07o stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $5 per share.
5. On October 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.25 per share to be paid on October 31.
6. Near the end of the year, the company’s CEO decided the company should buy 1,000 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $6 per share in the stock market.
7. Net income for 200’7 was $49.500.
Required
a. Show how each of the transactions would affect the accounting equation.
b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2007.
on january 1 2007 the expedite corporation s shareholders equity account balances we 541418
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-4A. Record stock transactions, prepare equity section of balance sheet, and calculate ratios.( LO 1,2,3, 5,6)
On January 1, 2007, the Expedite Corporation’s shareholders equity account balances were as follows
|
Preferred stock (6Vo, $ 100 par noncumulative,
|
|
|
25,000 shares authorized)
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Common stock ($5 par value, 8,000,000 shares authorized)
|
4,500,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock
|
20,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, common stock
|
6,300,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
20,380,000
|
|
Treasury stock-common( 5,000 shares at cost)
|
70,000
|
During 2007, Expedite Corporation engaged in the following transactions
|
Jan.5
|
Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for $15 per share
|
|
Feb. 9
|
Purchased 2,000 additional shares of common treasury stock at $13 per share
|
|
June 1
|
Declared the annual cash dividend on preferred stock, payable June 30
|
|
Dec. I
|
Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend to common stockholders payable December 31, 2007
|
Net income for the year was $2,330,000
Required
a. Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation.
b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2001.
c. Calculate earnings per share and return on common stockholders’ equity.
on october l 2006 marble company had 400 000 shares of 2 par common stock issued and 541419
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-5A. Prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)
On October l,2006,Marble Company had 400,000 shares of $2 par common stock issued and outstanding. The shareholders equity accounts at October 1, 2006, had the following balances
|
Common stock
|
$ 800,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
2,400,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
9,800,000
|
The following transactions occurred during the fiscal year ended September 30, 2007.
1. On October 30, issued 30,000 shares of 970, $100 par, cumulative preferred stock at $102.
2. On November 30, reacquired 8,000 shares of common stock for $8.50 per share.
3. On December 1, declared a cash dividend of $0.45 per share on the common stock outstanding, payable on December 31,2006, to shareholders of record on November 15.
4. Paid dividends to preferred shareholders on December 31, 2006.
5. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2001, was $3,875,000.
Required
Prepare the shareholders equity section of Marble’s balance sheet at September 30,2001.
the following information is from the equity sections of the comparative balance she 541420
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-6A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 3′ 5)
The following information is from the equity sections of the comparative balance sheets for Wildwood Company.
|
December 31,2007
|
December 31, 2006
|
|
Common stock ($10 par)
|
$420,000
|
$400’000
|
|
Additional paid-in-capital
|
325,000
|
306,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
55,000
|
51,000
|
|
Total shareholder’s equity
|
$801,000
|
$757,000
|
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2007, was $70,000.
Required
a. How many shares of common stock were issued to new shareholders during 2007?
b. What was the avera1eis sue price of the stock issued during 2007?
c. What was the amount of dividends declared during 2007?
d. Did the company have any treasury shares at the end of2007?
at december 31 2006 plasma company reported the following on its comparative balance 541421
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-7A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)
At December 31,2006, Plasma Company reported the following on its comparative balance sheet (amounts in thousands).
|
December 31, 2006
|
December 31, 2005
|
|
Common stock
|
|
|
|
Authorized: 1,200 shares
|
|
|
|
Issued: 950 shares at 2006
|
$ 475
|
|
|
900 shares at 2005
|
|
$ 450
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par
|
19,000
|
17,550
|
|
Retained earnings
|
45,500
|
31,300
|
Required
a. What is the par value of the company’s common stock?
b. Did the company issue any new shares during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2006?
c. What was the approximate (average) issue price of the stock issued during the year?
d. Did Plasma Company earn net income (loss) during the year? Assuming no dividends were paid, how much was net income (loss)?
the following information is from the equity section of the comparative balance shee 541422
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-8A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 3, 4)
The following information is from the equity section of the comparative balance sheets of Aloha Cruises Inc.
|
Aloha Cruises Inc. Consolidated Balance Sheets
|
|
|
Shareholder’s equity:
|
June 30, 2006
|
June 30, 2005
|
|
Common stock, $0.10 par value;
|
|
|
|
250,000 shares issued and
|
|
|
|
Shares outstanding at June 30, 2 006;
|
|
|
|
and 220,000 shares issued and
|
|
|
|
Shares outstanding at June 30, 2005.
|
$ 25.0
|
$ 22.0
|
|
Additional paid-in-capital
|
3,580
|
3,014
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,237
|
7,450
|
|
Treasury stock, at cost,
|
|
|
|
14,200 shares at June 30, 2006,
|
|
|
|
and 12,000 shares at June 30, 2005.
|
213
|
171.6
|
Required
a. What was the average issue price per share of the 250,000 shares classified as “issued” at June 30, 2006? (Round the answer to the nearest cent.)
b. What was the average issue price of the 30,000 shares of common stock issued during the fiscal year ending June 30, 2006?
c. How many shares were outstanding at June 30,2006? How many shares were outstanding at June 30,2005?
d. How many shares did the company buy back during the year? What was the average cost of a share of the treasury shares purchased during the year?
(Assume no treasury stock was sold during the year.)
e. If no dividends were paid, what was net income for the year ending June 30, 2006?
simba corporation was started on july 1 2006 the company is authorized to issue 100 541423
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-lB. Account for stock transactions (LO 1)
Simba Corporation was started on July 1, 2006. The company is authorized to issue 100,000 shares of 570, $100 par value preferred stock and 1,800,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $2 per share. The following stock transactions took place during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007.
Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for cash at $23.50 per share
Issued 10,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $ 101 per share
Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for cash at $24.80 per share
Issued 7,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $102 per share
Issued 25,000 shares of common stock for cash at $25 per share
Required
a. Show each transaction in the accounting equation.
b. Prepare the contributed capital portion of the shareholder’s equity section at June 30,2007.
contributed capital on october 1 2006 consisted of 50 000 issued and outstanding sha 541425
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-38. Analyze and record stock transactions and prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3,4, s)
The following information pertains to All Batteries Company Inc.
L. Contributed capital on October 1,2006, consisted of 50,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $l; additional paid-in capital in excess of par of $250,000; and retained earnings of $400,000.
2. During the first quarter of the fiscal year, All Batteries Company issued an additional 20,000 shares of common stock for $8 per share.
3. On March 15, the company declared a2-for-1 stock split.
4. On June 30, the company distributed a 5Vo stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $6 per share.
5. On July 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.50 per share to be paid on July 31.
6. During September 2007, All Batteries Company’s CEO decided the company should buy 600 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $7 per share.
7. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2007, was $87,500.
Required
a. Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation.
b. Prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at September 30, 2007.
on july 1 2006 philbrick company had 500 000 shares of 1 par common stock issued and 541427
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-5B. Prepare equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2, 5)
On July 1, 2006, Philbrick Company had 500,000 shares of $1 par common stock issued and outstanding. The shareholder’s equity accounts at July 1, 2006, had the following balances.
|
Common stock
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
36,500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
22,100,000
|
The following transactions occurred during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2007.
1. On July 30, issued 50.000 shares of $ 100 par value, 67o cumulative preferred stock at $103.
2. On October 1, reacquired 20,000 shares of common stock for $76 per share.
3. On December 1, declared a cash dividend of $2.50 per share on the common stock outstanding, payable on December 31, 2006, to shareholder of record on November 15.
4. Paid dividends to preferred shareholders on December 3I,2006.
5. Net income for the year ended June 30, 2007, was $5,150,000.
Required
Prepare the shareholder’s equity section of Philbrick’s balance sheet at June 30, 2007.
at june 30 2007 high quality mining company reported the following on its comparativ 541429
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P8-7B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO I, 2, 5)
At June 30, 2007, High Quality Mining Company reported the following on its comparative balance sheet, which included 2006 amounts for comparison (amounts in millions).
|
June 30 2007
|
June 30 2006
|
|
Common stock
|
|
|
|
Authorized: 2,500 shares
|
$ 14,500
|
|
|
lssued:1 ,450 shares in 2007
|
|
|
|
1,400 shares in 2006
|
|
$ 14,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par
|
4,350
|
2,890
|
|
Retained earnings
|
15,500
|
14,300
|
Required
a. What is the par value of the company’s common stock?
b. Did the company issue any new shares during the fiscal ended June 30, 2007?
c. What was the approximate (average) issue price of the stock issued during the year?
d. Did High Quality Mining Company earn net income (loss) during the year?
Assuming no dividends were paid this year, what was net income (loss X)
use the following information to answer the next three questions 541453
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following information to answer the next three questions.
The income statement and additional data for Frances Company for the year ended December 31. 2006. Follows
|
Sales revenue
|
$400,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$165,000
|
|
Salary expense
|
$ 70,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
$ 55,000
|
|
Insurance expense
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
$ 18,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 62,000
|
Accounts receivable decreased by $12,000. Inventories increased by $6,000 and accounts payable decreased by $2,000. Salaries payable increased by $8,000. Prepaid insurance increased by $4,000. Interest expense and income tax expense equal their cash amounts. Frances Company uses the direct method for its statement of cash flows.
for each of the following items tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and 541477
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-1A Identify cash flows (L.OI)
For each of the following items, tell whether it is a cash inflow or cash outflow and the section of the statement of cash flows in which the item would appear. (Assume the direct method is used.)
|
Item
|
Inflow or Outflow
|
Section of the Statement
|
|
a. Cash collected from customers
|
|
|
|
b. Proceeds from issue of stock
|
|
|
|
c. Interest payment on loan
|
|
|
|
d. Principle payment on loan
|
|
|
|
e. Cash paid for advertising
|
|
|
|
f. Proceeds from sale of treasury stock
|
|
|
|
g. Money borrowed from the local bank
|
|
|
|
h. Cash paid to employees (salaries)
|
|
|
|
i . Purchase of equipment for cash
|
|
|
|
j. Cash paid to vendors for inventory
|
|
|
|
k. Taxes paid
|
|
|
for each transaction indicate the amount of the cash flow indicate whether each resu 541478
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-2A. Identify cash flows. (LO 1, 4, 6)
For each transaction, indicate the amount of the cash flow, indicate whether each results in an inflow or outflow of cash, and give the section of the statement in which each cash flow would appear. Assume the statement of cash flows is prepared using the direct method.
|
Amount
|
Inflow or Outflow
|
Section of the Statement
|
|
a. lssued1 00s hares of $2 par common stock for $12 per share
|
|
|
|
b. Borrowed $7,000 from a local bank to expand the business
|
|
|
|
c. Purchased $500 of supplies for $400 cash and the balance on account
|
|
|
|
d. Hireda carpenter to build some book case for the office for $500 cash
|
|
|
|
e. Earned revenue of $19,000 receiving $9,200 cash and the balance on account
|
|
|
|
f. Hired a student to do some typing and paid him $250 cash
|
|
|
|
g. Repaid$ 7,000o f the bank loan along with $250 interest.
|
|
|
|
h. Paid dividends of $600
|
|
|
prepare cash from operating activities section of statement of cash flows using the 541479
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-3A. Prepare cash from operating activities section of statement of cash flows using the direct method (.L O 4)
Use the income statement for Clark Corporation for past year and the information from the comparative balance sheets shown for the beginning and the end of the year to prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
|
Sales
|
|
$ 100,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
35,000
|
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
55,000
|
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Wages
|
$ 2,500
|
|
|
|
Rent
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
Utilities
|
980
|
|
|
|
Insurance
|
320
|
5,000
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 60,000
|
|
|
Account
|
Beginning of the Year
|
End of the Year
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 10,000
|
$ 12,000
|
|
Inventory
|
21,000
|
1 8,500
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
575
|
400
|
|
Accounts payable
|
9,000
|
10,400
|
|
Wages payable
|
850
|
600
|
|
Utilities payable
|
150
|
-0-
|
given the following information calculate the change in cash for the year 541480
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-54. Calculate change in cash. (LO 1, 4, 6)
Given the following information, calculate the change in cash for the year.
|
Cash received from sale of equipment
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Cash paid for salaries
|
8,250
|
|
Depreciation expense for the year
|
12,450
|
|
Cash received from issue of stock
|
150,000
|
|
Cash collected from customers
|
87,900
|
|
Cash received from sale of land
|
14,500
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
2,000
|
|
Cash paid to vendor for inventory
|
32,480
|
use the information given for evans company to calculate 541481
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-6A. Calculate cash from operating activities. (LO 3, 4)
Use the information given for Evans Company to calculate
a. Cash paid for salaries
b. Cash paid for income taxes
c. Cash paid for inventory items
d. Cash collected from customers
e. Cash proceeds from stock issue
From the Financial Statements for Evans Company
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Income Statement Amount for the Year
|
Beginning of the Year
|
End of the Year
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$ 85,600
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
$ 8,700
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Salary expense
|
21, 400
|
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
2,300
|
2,100
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
24,300
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
4,800
|
8,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
28,500
|
|
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
|
7,400
|
8,500
|
|
Common stock and additional
|
|
|
|
|
paid-in capital
|
N/A
|
630,000
|
718,000
|
Prepare the cash from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows and determine the method used. (LO 2, 4, 6)
Use the information from E9-6A to calculate the cash flow from operations for Evans Company.
Based on the information provided, which method of preparing the statement of cash flows does Evans use
can someone please help me with accounting 540659
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please i need someone to explain me the cash budget and income statement please i need help
dry quick dq is a medium sized private manufacturing company located near timmins 540725
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dry Quick (DQ) is a medium-sized, private manufacturing company located near Timmins, Ontario. DQ has a June 30 year-end. The Chief Financial Officer (CFO) believed DQ had outgrown its audit firm and asked your firm, Poivre & Sel (P&S), to perform the annual audit. It is now August 2, 2010. P&S performed the necessary client acceptance procedures and is currently working on the year-end audit of DQ. However, the senior on the engagement has recently become ill and will be unable to complete the file. You, CA, have been asked to take over the senior role on the audit. The following information has been provided to help you familiarize yourself with the client: information on DQ (Exhibit I), a draft income statement prepared by management in accordance with Canadian Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) (Exhibit II), notes from your firm’s meetings with management and the Board Chair (Exhibit 111), and excerpts from the current year audit file (Exhibit IV).
The following week, the audit partner on the file calls you into his office, “Now that you’ve had the audit file for a week, can you let me know what issues you’ve identified and what is left to be done, including a list of outstanding audit procedures. In addition, the Board Chair is curious to see what our management letter is likely to contain, so please prepare a first draft for me.”
hickory company manufactures two products 14 000 units of product y and 6 000 units 540731
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hickory Company manufactures two products – 14,000 units of Product Y and 6,000 units of Product Z.The company uses a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours.It is a considering implementing an activity-based costing (ABC) costing to allocate all of its manufacturing overhead to their products using four cost pools.The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Products Y and Z.
| Activity Cost Pool |
Activity Measure |
Total Activity Cost Pool |
Total Amount of Activity Allocation Base |
|
| Machining |
Machine-hours |
$ 200,000.00 |
10,000 |
|
| Machine setups |
Number of setups |
$ 100,000.00 |
200 |
|
| Inspection |
Number of inspections |
$ 50,000.00 |
25,000 |
|
| General factory |
Direct Labor-hours |
$ 300,000.00 |
12,000 |
|
|
|
$650,000.00 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Activity Measure |
Total Amount of the Activity Allocation Base for All Units of Product Y |
Total Amount of the Activity Allocation Base for All Units of Product Z |
Total Amount of Activity Allocation Base |
|
| Machine-hours |
7,000 |
3,000 |
10,000 |
|
| Number of setups |
50 |
150 |
200 |
|
| Number of Inpections |
12,000 |
13,000 |
25,000 |
|
| Direct Labor-hours |
8,000 |
4,000 |
12,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Direct Costs for Products Y & Z: |
|
|
|
| Direct Costs: |
Total Cost for All units Produced of Product Y |
Total Cost for All units Produced of Product Product Z |
|
|
| Direct Material |
$100,000.00 |
$ 110,000.00 |
|
|
| Direct Labor |
$50,000.00 |
$ 60,000.00 |
|
|
| Number of Finished Units Produced
1. The company’s plantwide overhead rate.
2. Using the traditional plantwide overhead rate , the amount of manufacturing overhead cost allocated to Product Y and Product Z.
3. Total product cost for Product Y and Z under the traditional plantwide overhead rate system.
4. Total product cost per unit for Product Y and Product Z under the traditional plantwide overhead rate system.
5. The company switches to an ABC costing system for allocating overhead to product Y and product Z.
Calculate the overhead activity rate for the four cost pools (machining, machine setups, inspections
and general factory)
6. Using the ABC system, calculate total manufacturing overhead cost assigned to Product Y.
7. Using the ABC system, calculate total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Z.
8. Total product cost for Product Y and Z under the Activity based costing system?
9. Total product cost per unit for Product Y and Product Z under Activity Based Costing
system.
10. Which product was overcosted when using the Plantwide rate, in comparison to ABC Costing?
11. Which product was undercosted when using the Plantwide rate, in comparison to ABC Costing?
|
14,000 |
6,000 |
|
|
a company has an overhead application rate of 123 of direct labor costs 540740
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| A company has an overhead application rate of 123% of direct labor costs. How much overhead would be allocated to a job if it required total labor costing $25,000? |
|
$15,375. |
|
$20,325. |
|
$307,500. |
|
$25,000. |
|
$30,750. |
2-
| Use the following information about the current year’s operations of a company to calculate the cash paid for merchandise. |
| Cost of good sold |
$ 238,000 |
| Merchandise inventory, January 1 |
66,800 |
| Merchandise inventory, December 31 |
68,200 |
| Accounts payable, January 1 |
65,200 |
| Accounts payable, December 31 |
71,800 |
|
$246,000. |
|
$243,200. |
|
$230,000. |
|
$238,000. |
|
$232,800. |
3-
| A machine with a cost of $142,000 and accumulated depreciation of $97,000 is sold for $56,000 cash. The amount that should be reported as a source of cash under cash flows from investing activities is: |
|
$45,000. |
|
Zero. This is an operating activity. |
|
$11,000. |
|
$56,000. |
|
Zero. This is a financing activity. |
4- The Goods in Process Inventory account for AB Manufacturing follows. Compute the cost of jobs completed and transferred to Finished Goods Inventory. |
|
|
|
|
| Goods in Process Inventory |
|
|
|
| Beginning balance |
5,200 |
|
|
| Direct materials |
47,800 |
|
|
| Direct labor |
30,300 |
|
|
| Applied overhead |
16,500 |
? |
Finished goods |
|
|
|
|
| Ending balance |
10,300 |
|
|
|
| The cost of units transferred to finished goods is: |
|
$94,600. |
|
$99,800. |
|
$98,000. |
|
$89,500. |
|
$110,100. |
|
|
|
|
5-
| The Goods in Process Inventory account of a manufacturing company that uses an overhead rate based on direct labor cost has a $4,809 debit balance after all posting is completed. The cost sheet of the one job still in process shows direct material cost of $2,100 and direct labor cost of $900. Therefore, the company’s overhead application rate is: |
|
43%. |
|
50%. |
|
201%. |
|
86%. |
|
233%. |
6- Estimated overhead and direct labor costs for the year were $114,500 and $124,700, respectively. During the year, actual overhead was $107,100 and actual direct labor cost was $117,000. The entry to close the over- or underapplied overhead at year-end, assuming an immaterial amount, would include(Round predetermined overhead rate to nearest whole percentage.): |
|
|
|
|
|
A debit to Cost of Goods Sold for $540. |
|
A credit to Cost of Goods Sold for $540. |
|
A debit to Goods in Process Inventory for $540. |
|
A credit to Finished Goods Inventory for $540. |
|
A credit to Factory Overhead for $540. |
7-
| In preparing a company’s statement of cash flows for the most recent year on the indirect method, the following information is available: |
| Net income for the year was |
$ 62,000 |
| Accounts payable decreased by |
28,000 |
| Accounts receivable decreased by |
35,000 |
| Inventories increased by |
15,000 |
| Cash dividends paid were |
16,000 |
| Depreciation expense was |
40,000 |
| Net cash provided by operating activities was: |
|
$94,000. |
|
$78,000. |
|
$54,000. |
|
$150,000. |
|
$40,000. |
8 Ajax Company accumulated the following account information for the year: |
|
|
|
|
| Beginning raw materials inventory |
$ 6,900 |
| Indirect materials cost |
2,900 |
| Indirect labor cost |
5,900 |
| Maintenance of factory equipment |
3,700 |
| Direct labor cost |
7,900 |
| Using the above information, total factory overhead costs would be: |
|
$9,600. |
|
$20,400. |
|
$18,500. |
|
$15,700. |
|
$12,500. |
9- A company had net cash flows from operations of $85,200, cash flows from financing of $360,000, total cash flows of $324,000, and average total assets of $2,400,000. The cash flow on total assets ratio equals: |
|
|
|
|
|
3.75%. |
|
3.55%. |
|
13.50%. |
|
15.00%. |
|
26.30%. |
10-
| Ajax Company accumulated the following account information for the year: |
| Beginning raw materials inventory |
$ 6,900 |
| Indirect materials cost |
2,900 |
| Indirect labor cost |
5,900 |
| Maintenance of factory equipment |
3,700 |
| Direct labor cost |
7,900 |
| Using the above information, total factory overhead costs would be: |
11-
| Juliet Corporation has accumulated the following accounting data for the year: |
| Finished goods inventory, January 1 |
$ 2,200 |
| Finished goods inventory, December 31 |
3,000 |
| Total cost of goods sold |
8,200 |
| The cost of goods manufactured for the year is: |
|
$11,200. |
|
$9,000. |
|
$10,400. |
|
$6,000. |
|
$5,200. |
12-
| Salaries expense |
$ 176,000 |
| Salaries payable, January 1 |
7,200 |
| Salaries payable, December31 |
12,200 |
|
$171,000. |
|
$183,200. |
|
$176,000. |
|
$163,800. |
|
$181,000. |
13 Typical cash flows from investing activities include each of the following
except:
|
Payments to acquire held-to maturity securities of other entities, except cash equivalents. |
|
Proceeds from the sale of equipment. |
|
Proceeds from collecting the principal amount of notes receivable arising from intercompany transactions. |
|
Payments to purchase property, plant and equipment or other productive assets (excluding inventory). |
|
Proceeds from collecting the principal amount of notes receivable arising from customer sales. |
14-
| Trenton reports net income of $247,000 for the year ended December 31, Year 2. It also reports $95,100 depreciation expense and a $5,850 gain on the sale of equipment. Its comparative balance sheet reveals a $38,900 decrease in accounts receivable, a $17,450 increase in accounts payable, and a $13,650 decrease in wages payable. Calculate the net cash provided (used) in operating activities using the indirect method. |
|
$344,050. |
|
$406,250. |
|
$384,800. |
|
$378,950. |
|
$283,950. |
A cash equivalent is an investment that:
|
Is highly liquid. |
|
All of the choices are correct. |
|
Generally is within 3 months of its maturity date. |
|
Is sufficiently close to its maturity date so its market value is unaffected by interest rate changes. |
|
Is readily convertible to a known amount of cash. |
Bottom of Form Top of Form A cash equivalent is an investment that:
|
Is highly liquid. |
|
All of the choices are correct. |
|
Generally is within 3 months of its maturity date. |
|
Is sufficiently close to its maturity date so its market value is unaffected by interest rate changes. |
|
Is readily convertible to a known amount of cash. |
Bottom of Form
Note: need a detailed explanation
accounting questions if a firm had sales of 50 000 during a period 540770
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If a firm had sales of 50,000 during a period and sales returns and allowances of 4,000 its nets sales were 54,000 50,000 46,000 4,000 On Dec. 31, prior to adjustment, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of 200. An age analysis of the accounts receivable produces an estimate of 1,000 of probable losses from uncollectible accounts. The adjusting entry needed to record the estimated losses from uncollectible accounts is made for 800.00 1,000 1,200 200.
accounting 540831
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Exercise 20-14 |
 |
Johnson Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.
|
|
Current Machine |
|
New Machine |
|
| Original purchase cost |
|
$15,040 |
|
|
$24,810 |
|
|
| Accumulated depreciation |
|
$6,950 |
|
|
_ |
|
|
| Estimated annual operating costs |
|
$24,790 |
|
|
$19,760 |
|
|
| Useful life |
|
5 years |
|
|
5 years |
|
|
If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $10,260. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after 5 years.
Prepare an incremental analysis.
(Enter negative amounts using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)
|
|
Retain Machine |
|
Replace Machine |
|
Net Income Increase (Decrease) |
|
| Operating costs |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
| New machine cost |
|
 |
|
 |
|
 |
|
| Salvage value (old) |
|
 |
|
 |
|
 |
|
| Total |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
Should the current machine be replaced?
The current machine should be retainedreplaced. |
| Exercise 20-2 |
 |
Gruden Company produces golf discs which it normally sells to retailers for $6.87 each. The cost of manufacturing 22,800 golf discs is:
| Materials |
|
$11,628 |
|
| Labor |
|
32,148 |
|
| Variable overhead |
|
22,572 |
|
| Fixed overhead |
|
46,512 |
|
| Total |
|
$112,860 |
|
Gruden also incurs 5% sales commission ($0.34) on each disc sold. McGee Corporation offers Gruden $5 per disc for 5,300 discs. McGee would sell the discs under its own brand name in foreign markets not yet served by Gruden. If Gruden accepts the offer, its fixed overhead will increase from $46,512 to $51,412 due to the purchase of a new imprinting machine. No sales commission will result from the special order.
|
|
|
 |
 |
Should Gruden accept the special order?
Gruden should acceptrejectthe special order. |
|
|
|
| Exercise 20-6 |
 |
Jobs, Inc. has recently started the manufacture of Tri-Robo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 Tri-Robos is as follows.
|
|
Cost |
|
| Direct materials ($42 per robot) |
|
$840,000 |
|
| Direct labor ($41 per robot) |
|
820,000 |
|
| Variable overhead ($8 per robot) |
|
160,000 |
|
| Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot) |
|
500,000 |
|
| Total |
|
$2,320,000 |
|
Jobs is approached by Tienh Inc., which offers to make Tri-Robo for $106 per unit or $2,120,000.
|
|
|
 |
deglman manufacturing direct labor and overhead 540838
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deglman Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2012, Job No. 50 was the only job in process. The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account.
During the month of January, Deglman Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.
|
|
|
|
|
1.
|
Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.
|
|
2.
|
Incurred factory labor costs of $70,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.
|
|
3.
|
Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $20,000; depreciation expense on equipment $19,000; and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $16,000.
|
|
4.
|
Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.
|
Job No.
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
|
50
|
$10,000
|
$ 5,000
|
|
51
|
39,000
|
25,000
|
|
52
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
|
(a)
|
Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2012, assuming Deglman Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $980,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.
|
|
(b)
|
Open job cost sheets for Jobs 50, 51, and 52. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 50.
|
|
(c)
|
Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.
|
|
(d)
|
Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in (a). Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary.
|
|
(e)
|
Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.
|
|
(f)
|
Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.
|
|
(g)
|
What is the balance in the Finished Goods Inventory account at the end of the month? What does this balance consist of?
|
|
(h)
|
What is the amount of over- or underapplied overhead?
|
amortization of intangibles 541314
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amortization of Intangibles. On January 1 of the current year, Palm Corporation purchases the net assets of Vicki’s unincorporated business for $600,000. The tangible net assets have a $300,00 book value and a $400,000 FMV. The purchase agreement states that Vicki will not compete with Palm Corporation by starting a new business in the same area for A PERIOD OF FIVE YEARS. The stated consideration received by Vicki for the covenant not to compete is $50,000. Other intangibles assets included in the purchase agreement are as follows:
Goodwill: $70,000
Patents (12-year remaining legal life):$30,000
Customer list:$50,000
-
How would Vicki’s assets be recorded for tax purposes by Palm Corporation?
-
What is the amortization amount for each intangible asset in the current year?
pets mart reported the following information on the financial statements included wi 541389
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-lA. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO I, 5)
Pets Mart reported the following information on the financial statements included with its 2004 annual report. Were any new shares of common stock issued between February 1, 2004, and January 30, 2005? Did the company report a net income for the year ended January 30, 2005? Explain how You know
|
(dollars in thousands)
|
Jan. 30, 2005
|
Feb. 1, 2004
|
|
Common stock, par value $0’0001
|
|
|
|
Authorized:2 50,000,000 shares;
|
|
|
|
Issued and outstanding 149,517,000 shares
|
15
|
|
|
at Jan. 30, 2005
|
|
|
|
144,813,000 shares
|
|
14
|
|
at February 1 ,2004
|
|
|
|
Paid- in capital
|
792,400
|
705,265
|
|
Retained earnings
|
286,380
|
132,544
|
framer company has 4 000 shares of 9 100 par cumulative preferred stock outstanding 541393
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-6A. Distribute dividend between preferred and common shareholders. (LO 2)
Framer Company has 4,000 shares of 9%, $100 par, cumulative preferred stock outstanding and 10,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding. The company began operations on January 1, 2008. The cash dividends declared and paid during each of the first 3 years of Framer’s operations are shown. Calculate the amounts that went to the preferred and the common shareholders (SHs) each year.
|
Total Dividends
|
Dividends to
|
|
Year
|
Paid
|
Preferred SHs
|
|
2008
|
$120,000
|
|
|
2009
|
50,000
|
|
|
201 0
|
80,000
|
|
jazz company had the following stockholders equity section on the december 31 2007 b 541394
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-7A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO l, 2)
Jazz Company had the following stockholders’ equity section on the December 31, 2007, balance sheet
|
Preferred stock, 8%, $100 par, cumulative
|
$1,250,000
|
|
Common stock, $2 par value
|
800,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par, common stock
|
3,500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
3,461,000
|
|
Total
|
$9,017,000
|
a. How many shares of common stock are classified as issued?
b. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?
c. How many shares of preferred stock are outstanding?
d. What was the average selling price of a share of common stock?
e. If $150,000 of dividends was declared and there were no dividends in arrears, how much of the dividend would go to the common shareholders
quicksilver corporation is authorized to issue both preferred and common stock 541395
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-8A. Record stock transactions. (LO 1, 2, 3)
Quicksilver Corporation is authorized to issue both preferred and common stock. Quicksilver’s preferred stock is $200 par, 5% preferred stock. During the first month of operations, the company engaged in the following transactions related to its stock. Show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation
|
Jan. 1
|
Issued 30,000 shares of $1 par value common stock for cash at $51 per share
|
|
Jan. 10
|
Issued 1,000 shares of preferred stock at par
|
|
Jan. 15
|
Purchased 2,000 shares of common stock to be held in the treasury for $53 per share
|
|
Jan.20
|
Issued 40,000 shares $1 par value common stock for cash at $56 per share
|
|
Jan.21
|
Sold 1,500 shares of the treasury stock purchased on the 15th for $56 per share
|
|
Jan. 31
|
Declared a $25,000 dividend
|
the following balances were shown on the year end balance sheets for 2006 and2007 fo 541396
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-10A. Analyze equity accounts. (LO 1,2, 3, 5)
The following balances were shown on the year-end balance sheets for 2006 and2007 for Columbia Company. For each item, give the most likely reason for the change from one year to the next.
|
12/31/06
|
12/31/07
|
|
Common stock
|
$ 45,000
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Paid-in-capital
|
$200,000
|
$230,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$182,500
|
*$200,000
|
|
Treasury stock
|
$ (3,450)
|
$ (5,450)
|
answer the following questions using the shareholders equity section of camp corpora 541397
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-11A. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1,2, 3)
Answer the following questions using the shareholders’ equity section of Camp Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31.
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
Preferred stock, cumulative, 10,000 shares authorized,
|
|
3,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, preferred stock
|
30,000
|
|
Common stock, $0.10 par,750,000 shares authorized,
|
|
600,000 shares issued
|
60,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital, common stock
|
234,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
975,000
|
|
1,599,000
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (8,000 common shares)
|
(85,200)
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
$1,513,800
|
a. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?
b. On average, what was the issue price of the common shares issued?
c. What is the par value of the preferred stock?
d. If the total annual dividend on preferred stock is $24,000, what is the dividend rate on preferred stock?
e. On average, how much per share did the company pay for the treasury stock?
on the first day of the fiscal year zenith corporation had 1 90 000 shares of 1 par 541398
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-12A. Record stock transactions (L.O I,2, 3,4)
On the first day of the fiscal year, Zenith Corporation had 1 90,000 shares of $ 1 par common stock issued and outstanding and the retained earnings balance was $350,000. Show how each of the following transactions would affect the accounting equation.
a. Issued 10,000 additional shares of common stock for $15 per share b. Distributed a I07o stock dividend
c. Issued 5,000 additional shares of common stock for $14 per share
d. Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $ 1.20 per share
e. Paid the dividend declared in item d
f. Purchased 500 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share
g. Sold 200 shares of treasury stock for $17 per share
h. Sold 250 shares of treasury stock for $14 per share
i. Declared 2-foy1, stock split
the following financial information is available for cable corporation at the end of 541400
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-15A. Calculate return on equity and earnings per share. (LO 6)
The following financial information is available for Cable Corporation at the end of its two most recent fiscal years. The company has no preferred stock. Calculate (1) return on equity and (2) earnings per share. What do the ratios indicate about the company’s performance during the year?
|
(amounts in thousands)
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Weighted average common shareholder’s equity
|
$1,328
|
$1,150
|
|
Dividends declared for common shareholder’s
|
500
|
485
|
|
Net income
|
2,015
|
1,422
|
|
Average number of common shares outstanding during the year
|
2,18
|
1,95
|
analyze the following transactions and indicate the dollar increase or decrease each 541401
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-16A. Analyze effects of equity transactions on financial statements(.L O 1,2, 3,4, 5)
Analyze the following transactions and indicate the dollar increase(*) or decrease(-) each has on the balance sheet. If there is an overall change in shareholder’s equity also indicate whether contributed capital, retained earnings, or treasury stock is affected. If the transaction has no effect on the balance sheet, enter NA for that item. The first row is filled in for you as an example
|
|
Shareholders Equity Sect ion
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Affected
|
|
issued 1,000 shares of $1 par
|
|
|
|
Contributed
|
|
common stock at par
|
+ 1,000
|
|
+ 1,000
|
capital
|
|
Issued 1,500 shares of $1 par
|
|
|
|
|
|
common stock for $14
|
|
|
|
|
|
Declared a cash dividend
|
|
|
|
|
|
of $.25 per share
|
|
|
|
|
|
Paid the $.25 cash dividend
|
|
|
|
|
|
Purchased2 00 shares of
|
|
|
|
|
|
treasury stock for $17 per share
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sold 100 shares of treasury stock
|
|
|
|
|
|
for $17 per share
|
|
|
|
|
|
Distributed a 1070 common
|
|
|
|
|
|
stock dividend
|
|
|
|
|
|
Announced a 2-for-1 stock split
|
|
|
|
|
|
Issued 2,000 shares of $100 par,
|
|
|
|
|
|
47o noncumulative preferred stock
|
|
|
|
|
outback steakhouse reported the following information on the financial statement is 541403
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-1B. Analyze equity section of balance sheet (.L O 1, 5)
Outback Steakhouse reported the following information on the financial statement is included with its 2005 annual report. Were any new shares of common stock issued during the year end December 31, 2005? Did the company report a net income for the year ended December 31 2005? Explain how you know.
|
(in thousands except per share amounts)
|
December 31 , 2005
|
December 31, 2004
|
|
Common stock, par value $0.01
|
|
|
|
Authorized: 200,000 shares;
|
|
|
|
Issued: 78,750 shares at Dec. 31,2005;
|
|
|
|
78,750 shares at Dec. 31, 2004
|
788
|
788
|
|
Outstanding: 74,854 shares at Dec. 31, 2005
|
|
|
|
73,767 shares at Dec. 31, 2004
|
|
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
291,0 35
|
271,109
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,104,423
|
1,025,447
|
rich land inc had a net income of 315 000 for the year ended june 30 2008 on july 15 541407
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-5B. Analyze effects of dividends on financial statements. (LO 2)
Rich Land Inc. had a net income of $315,000 for the year ended June 30,2008. On July 15, 2008, the board of directors met and declared a dividend of $0.25 per share for each of the 500,000 outstanding shares of common stock. The board voted to make the actual distribution on September to all shareholders of record as of August 1. What is (a) the date of declaration, (b) the date of record, and (c) the date of payment? If Rich Land Inc. were to prepare a balance sheet on July 30, how would the dividends be reported (if at all X E8-68. Distribute dividend between preferred and common shareholders. (LO 2)
Law ever Electronics Inc. has 8,000 shares of $150 par, l27o cumulative preferred stock outstanding and 15,000 shares of $2 par value common stock outstanding. The company began operations on January 1, 2007. The cash dividends declared and paid during each of the first 3 years of Lawver’s operations are shown below. Calculate the amounts that went to the preferred shareholders and the common shareholders (SHs) each year
|
Year
|
Total Dividends Paid
|
Dividends to Preferred SHs
|
Dividends to Common SHs
|
|
2007
|
$1s0,000
|
|
|
|
2008
|
125,000
|
|
|
|
2009
|
175,000
|
|
|
market street music corporation had the following stockholders equity section on the 541408
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-78. Analyze equity section of balance sheet. (LO 1, 2)
Market Street Music Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity section on the December 31.2007. balance sheet
|
Preferred stock, $ 150 par, 6% cumulative
|
$2,250,000
|
|
Common stock, $1 par value
|
400,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par, common stock
|
1,020,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
5,325,000
|
|
Total
|
$8,995,000
|
a. How many shares of common stock are classified as issued?
b. How many shares of common stock are outstanding?
c. How many shares of preferred stock are outstanding?
d. What was the average selling price of a share of common stock?
e. If $175,000 of dividends was declared and there were $35,000 dividends in arrears, how much of the dividend would go to the common shareholders?
for almost a year west company has been changing its manufacturing process from a tr 540554
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and JIT Implementation
For almost a year, WEST Company has been changing its manufacturing process from a traditional to a JIT approach. Management has asked for employees’ assistance in the transition and has offered bonuses for suggestions that cut time from the production operation. Don Hanley and Jerome Obbo each identified a time-saving opportunity and turned in their suggestions to their manager, Sam Knightly. Knightly sent the suggestions to the committee charged with reviewing employees’ suggestions, which inadvertently identified them as being Knightly’s own. The committee decided that the two suggestions were worthy of reward and voted a large bonus for Knightly. When notified of this, Knightly could not bring himself to identify the true authors of the suggestions.
When Hanley and Obbo heard about Knightly’s bonus, they confronted him with his fraudulent act and expressed their grievances. He told them that he needed the recognition to be eligible for an upcoming promotion and promised that if they kept quiet about the matter, he would make sure that they both received significant raises.
Required
1. Should Hanley and Obbo keep quiet? What other options are open to them?
2. How should Knightly have dealt with Hanley’s and Obbo’s complaints?
obtain a copy of a recent annual report of a publicly held organization in which you 540555
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Information
Obtain a copy of a recent annual report of a publicly held organization in which you have a particular interest. (Copies of annual reports are available at your campus library, at a local public library, on the Internet, or by direct request to an organization.) Assume that you have just been appointed to a middle management position in a division of the organization you have chosen. You are interested in obtaining information that will help you better manage the activities of your division, and you have decided to study the contents of the annual report in an attempt to learn as much as possible. You particularly want to know about the following: (1) size of inventory maintained; (2) ability to earn income; (3) reliance on debt financing; (4) types, volume, and prices of products or services sold; (5) type of production process used; (6) management’s long-range strategies; (7) success (profitability) of the division’s various product lines; (8) efficiency of operations; and (9) operating details of your division.
1. Write a brief description of the organization and its products or services and activities.
2. Based on a review of the financial statements and the accompanying disclosure notes, prepare a written summary of information pertaining to items 1 through 9 above.
3. Can you find any of the information in which you are interested in other sections of the annual report? If so, which information, and in which sections of the report is it?
4. The annual report also includes other types of information that you may find helpful in your new position. In outline form, summarize this additional information.
you examined your new employer s annual report and found some useful information 540556
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Information Needs
you examined your new employer’s annual report and found some useful information. However, you are interested in knowing whether your division’s products or services are competitive, and you were unable to find the necessary information in the annual report.
1. What kinds of information about your competition do you want to find?
2. Why is this information relevant? (Link your response to a particular decision about your organization’s products or services. For example, you might seek information to help you determine a new selling price.)
3. From what sources could you obtain the information you need?
4. When would you want to obtain this information?
5. Create a report that will communicate your findings to your superior.
the registrar s office of mainland college is responsible for maintaining a record o 540557
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Report Preparation
The registrar’s office of Mainland College is responsible for maintaining a record of each student’s grades and credits for use by students, instructors, and administrators.
1. Assume that you are a manager in the registrar’s office and that you recently joined a team of managers to review the grade-reporting process. Explain how you would prepare a report of grades for students’ use and the same report for instructors’ use by answering the following questions:
a. Who will read the grade report?
b. Why is the grade report necessary?
c. What information should the grade report contain?
d. When is the grade report due?
2. Why does the information in a grade report for students’ use and in a grade report for instructors’ use differ?
3. Visit the registrar’s office of your school in person or through your school’s website. Obtain a copy of your grade report and a copy of the form that the registrar’s office uses to report grades to instructors. Compare the information that these reports supply with the information you listed. Explain any differences.
4. What can the registrar’s office do to make sure that its grade reports are effective in communicating all necessary information to readers?
mcdonald s is a leading competitor in the fast food restaurant business 540558
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Information Needs
McDonald’s is a leading competitor in the fast-food restaurant business. One component of McDonald’s marketing strategy is to increase sales by expanding its foreign markets. At present, McDonald’s restaurants operate in over 100 countries. In making decisions about opening restaurants in foreign markets, the company uses quantitative and qualitative financial and nonfinancial information. The following types of information would be important to such a decision: the cost of a new building (quantitative financial information), the estimated number of hamburgers to be sold in the first year (quantitative nonfinancial information), and site desirability (qualitative information). Suppose you are a member of McDonald’s management team that must decide whether to open a new restaurant in England. Identify at least two examples each of the (a) quantitative financial, (b) quantitative nonfinancial, and (c) qualitative information that you will need before you can make a decision.
working in a group of four to six students select a local business 540559
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Measures and the Balanced Scorecard
Working in a group of four to six students, select a local business. The group should become familiar with the background of the business by interviewing its manager or accountant. Each group member should identify several performance objectives for the business and link each objective with a specific stakeholder’s perspective from the balanced scorecard. (Select at least one performance objective for each perspective.) For each objective, ask yourself, “If I were the manager of the business, how would I set performance measures for each objective?” Then prepare an email stating the business’s name, location, and activities and your linked performance objective and perspectives. Also list possible measures for each performance objective. In class, members of the group should compare their individual emails and compile them into a group report by having each group member assume a different stakeholder perspective (add government and community if you want more than four perspectives). Each group should be ready to present all perspectives and the group’s report on performance objectives and measures in class.
given the following information compute the ending balances of the materials invento 540563
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Flow in a Manufacturing Organization
Given the following information, compute the ending balances of the Materials Inventory, Work in Process Inventory, and Finished Goods Inventory accounts:
|
Materials Inventory, beginning balance
|
$ 23,000
|
|
Work in Process Inventory, beginning balance
|
25,750
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory, beginning balance
|
38,000
|
|
Direct materials purchased
|
85,000
|
|
Direct materials placed into production
|
74,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
97,000
|
|
Overhead costs
|
35,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
123,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
93,375
|
Document Flows in a Manufacturing Organization
Identify the document needed to support each of the following activities in a manufacturing organization:
1. Placing an order for direct materials with a supplier
2. Recording direct labor time at the beginning and end of each work shift
3. Receiving direct materials at the shipping dock
4. Recording the costs of a specific job requiring direct materials, direct labor, and overhead
5. Issuing direct materials into production
6. Billing the customer for a completed order
7. Fulfilling a request from the Production Scheduling Department for the purchase of direct materials
indicate whether each of the following costs for a bicycle manufacturer is a product 540570
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Classifications
Indicate whether each of the following costs for a bicycle manufacturer is a product or a period cost, a variable or a fixed cost, a value-adding or a non value adding cost, and, if it is a product cost, a direct or an indirect cost of the bicycle:
|
Cost Classification
|
|
Example
|
Product or Period
|
Variable or Fixed
|
Value-Adding or Non value-Adding
|
Direct or Indirect
|
|
Bicycle tire
|
Product
|
Variable
|
Value-adding
|
Direct
|
1. Depreciation on office computer
2. Labor to assemble bicycle
3. Labor to inspect bicycle
4. Internal auditor’s salary
5. Lubricant for wheels
treetop corp makes irrigation sprinkler systems for tree nurseries ramsey roe treeto 540573
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Cost of Goods Sold
Treetop Corp. makes irrigation sprinkler systems for tree nurseries. Ramsey Roe, Treetop’s new controller, can find only the following partial information for the past year:
| |
Oak Division
|
Loblolly Division
|
Maple Division
|
Spruce Division
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$3
|
$ 7
|
$ g
|
$ 8
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
6
|
d
|
h
|
14
|
|
Overhead
|
1
|
3
|
2
|
j
|
|
Direct labor
|
a
|
6
|
4
|
4
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
b
|
3
|
2
|
5
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
7
|
20
|
12
|
l
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
2
|
e
|
3
|
k
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
2
|
6
|
i
|
9
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
3
|
f
|
5
|
7
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
c
|
18
|
13
|
9
|
Using the information given, compute the unknown values. List the accounts in the proper order, and show subtotals and totals as appropriate.
presented below are incomplete inventory and income statement data for to liver corp 540575
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing Amounts—Manufacturing
Presented below are incomplete inventory and income statement data for To liver Corporation. Determine the missing amounts.
| |
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Cost of Goods Manufactured
|
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory
|
Ending Finished Goods Inventory
|
|
1.
|
$ 10,000
|
$12,000
|
$ 1,000
|
?
|
|
2.
|
$140,000
|
?
|
$45,000
|
$60,000
|
|
3.
|
?
|
$89,000
|
$23,000
|
$20,000
|
the data presented below are for a retail organization and a manufacturing organizat 540576
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, and Net Income
The data presented below are for a retail organization and a manufacturing organization.
1. Fill in the missing data for the retail organization:
| |
First Quarter
|
Second Quarter
|
Third Quarter
|
Fourth Quarter
|
|
Sales
|
$9
|
$ e
|
$15
|
$ k
|
|
Gross margin
|
a
|
4
|
5
|
1
|
|
Ending merchandise inventory
|
5
|
f
|
5
|
m
|
|
Beginning merchandise inventory
|
4
|
g
|
h
|
5
|
|
Net cost of purchases
|
b
|
7
|
9
|
n
|
|
Operating income
|
3
|
2
|
i
|
2
|
|
Operating expenses
|
c
|
2
|
2
|
4
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
5
|
6
|
j
|
11
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
d
|
12
|
15
|
15
|
2. Fill in the missing data for the manufacturing organization:
| |
First Quarter
|
Second Quarter
|
Third Quarter
|
Fourth Quarter
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
$a
|
$ 3
|
$ h
|
$ 6
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
6
|
3
|
5
|
1
|
|
Operating income
|
1
|
3
|
1
|
m
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
8
|
d
|
10
|
13
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
5
|
e
|
i
|
8
|
|
Gross margin
|
4
|
f
|
j
|
7
|
|
Operating expenses
|
3
|
g
|
5
|
6
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
b
|
2
|
3
|
n
|
|
Sales
|
c
|
10
|
k
|
14
|
waltz company manufactures music boxes seventy percent of its products are standard 540577
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Documentation
Waltz Company manufactures music boxes. Seventy percent of its products are standard items produced in long production runs. The other 30 percent are special orders with specific requests for tunes. The latter cost from three to six times as much as the standard product because they require additional materials and labor.
Reza Seca, the controller, recently received a complaint memorandum from Iggy Paulo, the production supervisor, about the new network of source documents that has been added to the existing cost accounting system. The new documents include a purchase request, a purchase order, a receiving report, and a materials request. Paulo claims that the forms create extra work and interrupt the normal flow of production.
Prepare a written memorandum from Reza Seca to Iggy Paulo that fully explains the purpose of each type of document.
the pattia winery is one of the finest wineries in the country 540579
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unit Cost Determination
The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The information on the next page is given to you for analysis.
1. Compute the unit cost per bottle for materials, labor, and overhead.
2. How would you advise management regarding the price per bottle of wine?
3. Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit.
|
Batch size
|
10,550 bottles
|
|
Costs
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
Olen Millot grapes
|
$22,155
|
|
Chancellor grapes
|
9,495
|
|
Bottles
|
5,275
|
|
Total direct materials costs
|
$36,925
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
Pickers/loaders
|
$ 2,110
|
|
Crusher
|
422
|
|
Processors
|
8,440
|
|
Bottler
|
13,293
|
|
Total direct labor costs
|
$24,265
|
|
Overhead
|
|
|
Depreciation–equipment
|
$ 2,743
|
|
Depreciation–building
|
5,275
|
|
Utilities
|
1,055
|
|
Indirect labor
|
6,330
|
|
Supervision
|
7,385
|
|
Supplies
|
9,917
|
|
Repairs
|
1,477
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
633
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
$34,815
|
|
Total production costs
|
$96,005
|
the overhead costs that lucca industries inc used to compute its overhead rate for t 540581
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Overhead Rate
The overhead costs that Lucca Industries, Inc., used to compute its overhead rate for the past year are as follows:
|
Indirect materials and supplies
|
$ 79,200
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
14,900
|
|
Outside service contracts
|
17,300
|
|
Indirect labor
|
79,100
|
|
Factory supervision
|
42,900
|
|
Depreciation–machinery
|
85,000
|
|
Factory insurance
|
8,200
|
|
Property taxes
|
6,500
|
|
Heat, light, and power
|
7,700
|
|
Miscellaneous overhead
|
5,760
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
$346,560
|
The allocation base for the past year was 45,600 total machine hours. For the next year, all overhead costs except depreciation, property taxes, and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 10 percent. Depreciation should increase by 12 percent, and property taxes and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 20 percent. Plant capacity in terms of machine hours used will increase by 4,400 hours.
1. Compute the past year’s overhead rate. (Carry your answer to three decimal places.)
2. Compute the overhead rate for next year. (Carry your answer to three decimal places.)
compumatics specializes in the analysis and reporting of complex inventory costing p 540582
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation and Application of Overhead Rate
Compumatics specializes in the analysis and reporting of complex inventory costing projects. Materials costs are minimal, consisting entirely of operating supplies (DVDs, inventory sheets, and other recording tools). Labor is the highest single expense, totaling $693,000 for 75,000 hours of work last year. Overhead costs for last year were $916,000 and were applied to specific jobs on the basis of labor hours worked. This year the company anticipates a 25 percent increase in overhead costs. Labor costs will increase by $130,000, and the number of hours worked is expected to increase by 20 percent.
1. Determine the total amount of overhead anticipated this year.
2. Compute the overhead rate for this year. (Round your answer to the nearest cent.)
3. During April of this year, 11,980 labor hours were worked. Calculate the overhead amount assigned to April production.
management 220 assignment 7 540599
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management 220 Assignment 7 Due Date: March 12, 2014 ***To be completed in Excel using Excel formulas and functions for calculations*** QUESTION 1 Problem 9-12 Pages 385. Approximate time to complete: 30 minutes. ***Note: equations, identification of units/$ and number formatting must be shown in order to receive marks*** References: Solutions posted on D2L: E9-1 to E9-7; Review Problems pp. 376 -380; in class examples posted to D2L Marks: Required 1: 5 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 2: 3 marks (one mark for each item accompanied by the correct description) Required 3: 13 marks (10 marks for cash budget up to “Excess (deficiency) of cash available over disbursements”, 3 marks for financing portion of budget)
breakeven analysis 540625
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare breakeven analysis and a C-V-P analysis planning future sales using the information below.
Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales
Write Company has a maximum capacity of 200,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $12 per unit. Fixed overhead is $600,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $23 per unit.
Required
- What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?
- How many units must Write Company sell to earn a profit of $240,000 per year?
- A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 160,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $841,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $23 per unit.
- a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?
- b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 130,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $210,000 this year?
check tasks 540626
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MSc IBM, MSc IBF, MBA, MBA (Finance), MSc Accounting & Finance, MSc Risk Management Strategic and Financial Decision-making Assignment 2013/2014 Goodway plc is a holding company owning shares in various subsidiary companies. Its directors are currently considering several projects which will increase the range of the business activities undertaken by Goodway plc and its subsidiaries. The directors would like to use discounted cash flow techniques in their evaluation of these projects but as yet no weighted average cost of capital (WACC) has been calculated.
accouting test question 540649
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dimitri Company, a manufacturer of small tools, provided the following information from its accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2012.
| Inventory at December 31, 2012 (based on physical count of goods |
|
|
| in Dimitri’s plant, at cost, on December 31, 2012) |
|
$1,530,800 |
| Accounts payable at December 31, 2012 |
|
1,306,600 |
| Net sales (sales less sales returns) |
|
8,156,500 |
Additional information is as follows.
| 1. |
|
Included in the physical count were tools billed to a customer f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. These tools had a cost of $31,610and were billed and recorded at $40,610. The shipment was on Dimitri’s loading dock waiting to be picked up by the common carrier. |
|
|
|
| 2. |
|
Goods were in transit from a vendor to Dimitri on December 31, 2012. The invoice cost was $76,610, and the goods were shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29, 2012. |
|
|
|
| 3. |
|
Work in process inventory costing $30,610was sent to an outside processor for plating on December 30, 2012. |
|
|
|
| 4. |
|
Tools returned by customers and held pending inspection in the returned goods area on December 31, 2012, were not included in the physical count. On January 8, 2013, the tools costing $32,610were inspected and returned to inventory. Credit memos totaling $47,610were issued to the customers on the same date. |
|
|
|
| 5. |
|
Tools shipped to a customer f.o.b. destination on December 26, 2012, were in transit at December 31, 2012, and had a cost of $26,610. Upon notification of receipt by the customer on January 2, 2013, Dimitri issued a sales invoice for $42,610. |
|
|
|
| 6. |
|
Goods, with an invoice cost of $27,610, received from a vendor at 5:00 p.m. on December 31, 2012, were recorded on a receiving report dated January 2, 2013. The goods were not included in the physical count, but the invoice was included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012. |
|
|
|
| 7. |
|
Goods received from a vendor on December 26, 2012, were included in the physical count. However, the related $56,610vendor invoice was not included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012, because the accounts payable copy of the receiving report was lost. |
|
|
|
| 8. |
|
On January 3, 2013, a monthly freight bill in the amount of $8,610was received. The bill specifically related to merchandise purchased in December 2012, one-half of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2012. The freight charges were not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2012. |
Prepare a schedule of adjustments as of December 31, 2012, to the initial amounts per Dimitri’s accounting records.
(If an amount reduces the account balance then enter either with a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis, e.g. (15,000).)
accouting test question 540652
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Outdoor Manufacturing Company produces sporting equipment. The company maintains a single raw materials inventory account for both direct and indirect materials. The following information came from the factory ledger accounts for December:
|
Raw Materials, December 1
|
$ 45,500
|
|
Work in Process, December 1
|
125,000
|
|
Finished Goods, December 1
|
175,000
|
|
Raw materials purchases (during December)
|
623,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
435,000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
37,200
|
|
Indirect materials
|
16,700
|
|
Utilities
|
63,200
|
|
Indirect labor
|
38,200
|
|
Supervisors’ salaries
|
18,300
|
|
Raw Materials, December 31
|
43,600
|
|
Work in Process, December 31
|
135,000
|
|
Finished Goods, December 31
|
150,000
|
Compute the cost of direct materials used during the month of December.
the following unit costs were determined by dividing the total costs of each compone 540525
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain
The following unit costs were determined by dividing the total costs of each component by the number of products produced. From these unit costs, determine the total cost per unit of primary processes and the total cost per unit of support services.
|
Research and development
|
$ 1.40
|
|
Human resources
|
1.45
|
|
Design
|
0.15
|
|
Supply
|
1.10
|
|
Legal services
|
0.50
|
|
Production
|
4.00
|
|
Marketing
|
0.80
|
|
Distribution
|
0.90
|
|
Customer service
|
0.65
|
|
Information systems
|
0.85
|
|
Management accounting
|
0.20
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
$12.00
|
indicate whether each of the following management activities in a community hospital 540532
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Management Process
Indicate whether each of the following management activities in a community hospital is part of planning (PL), performing (PE), evaluating (E), or communicating (C):
1. Leasing five ambulances for the current year
2. Comparing the actual number with the planned number of patient days in the hospital for the year.
3. Developing a strategic plan for a new pediatric wing
4. Preparing a report showing the past performance of the emergency room
5. Developing standards, or expectations, for performance in the hospital admittance area for next year
6. Preparing the hospital’s balance sheet and income statement and distributing them to the board of directors
7. Maintaining an inventory of bed linens and bath towels
8. Formulating a corporate policy for the treatment and final disposition of hazardous waste materials
9. Preparing a report on the types and amounts of hazardous waste materials removed from the hospital in the last three months
10. Recording the time taken to deliver food trays to patients
john jefferson is the sales manager for sunny greeting cards inc at the beginning of 540533
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Report Preparation
John Jefferson is the sales manager for Sunny Greeting Cards, Inc. At the beginning of the year, the organization introduced a new line of humorous birthday cards to the U.S. market. Management held a strategic planning meeting on August 31 to discuss next year’s operating activities. One item on the agenda was to review the success of the new line of cards and decide if there was a need to change the selling price or to stimulate sales volume in the five sales territories. Jefferson was asked to prepare a report addressing those issues and to present it at the meeting. His report was to include the profits generated in each sales territory by the new card line only.
On August 31, Jefferson arrived at the meeting late and immediately distributed his report to the strategic planning team. The report consisted of comments made by seven of Jefferson’s leading sales representatives. The comments were broad in scope and touched only lightly on the success of the new card line. Jefferson was pleased that he had met the deadline for distributing the report, but the other team members were disappointed in the information he provided.
Using the four w’s for report presentation, comment on Jefferson’s effectiveness in preparing his report.
edward ortez has just opened a company that imports fine ceramic gifts from mexico a 540535
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Planning Framework
Edward Ortez has just opened a company that imports fine ceramic gifts from Mexico and sells them over the Internet. In planning his business, Ortez did the following:
1. Listed his expected expenses and revenues for the first six months of operations
2. Decided that he wanted the company to provide him with income for a good lifestyle and funds for retirement
3. Determined that he would keep his expenses low and generate enough revenues during the first two months of operations so that he would have a positive cash flow by the third month
4. Decided to focus his business on providing customers with the finest Mexican ceramics at a favorable price
5. Developed a complete list of goals, objectives, procedures, and policies relating to how he would find, buy, store, sell, and ship goods and collect payment
6. Decided not to have a retail operation but to rely solely on the Internet to market the products
7. Decided to expand his website to include ceramics from other Central American countries over the next five years Match each of Ortez’s actions to the components of the planning framework: goal, mission, strategic objectives, tactical objectives, operating objectives, business plan, and budget.
edward ortez recently opened his own company 540536
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain
Edward Ortez recently opened his own company. He has been thinking of ways to improve the business. Here is a list of the actions that he will be undertaking:
1. Engaging an accountant to help analyze progress in meeting the objectives of the company
2. Hiring a company to handle payroll records and employee benefits
3. Developing a logo for labeling and packaging the ceramics
4. Making gift packages by placing gourmet food products in ceramic pots and wrapping them in plastic
5. Engaging an attorney to write contracts
6. Traveling to Mexico himself to arrange for the purchase of products and their shipment back to the company
7. Arranging new ways of taking orders over the Internet and shipping the products
8. Keeping track of the characteristics of customers and the number and types of products they buy
9. Following up with customers to see if they received the products and if they are happy with them
10. Arranging for an outside firm to keep the accounting records
11. Distributing brochures that display the ceramics and refer to the website Classify each of Ortez’s actions as one of the value chain’s primary processes— research and development, design, supply, production, marketing, distribution, or customer service—or as a support service—human resources, legal services, information systems, or management accounting. Of the 11 actions, which are the most likely candidates for outsourcing? Why?
the reports that follow are from a grocery store 540538
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management Reports
The reports that follow are from a grocery store. Which report would be used for financial purposes, and which would be used for activity-based decision making? Why?
|
Salaries
|
$ 1,000
|
Scan grocery purchases
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Equipment
|
2,200
|
Stock fruit
|
1,000
|
|
Freight
|
5,000
|
Bake rye bread
|
500
|
|
Supplies
|
800
|
Operate salad bar
|
2,500
|
|
Use and occupancy
|
1,000
|
Stock can goods
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
Collapse cardboard boxes
|
1,000
|
|
Total
|
$10,000
|
Total
|
$10,000
|
as shown in the data that follow a producer of ceiling fans has determined the unit 540539
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain
As shown in the data that follow, a producer of ceiling fans has determined the unit cost of its most popular model. From these unit costs, determine the total cost per unit of primary processes and the total cost per unit of support services.
|
Research and development
|
$ 5.00
|
|
Human resources
|
4.50
|
|
Design
|
1.50
|
|
Supply
|
1.00
|
|
Legal services
|
0.50
|
|
Production
|
4.50
|
|
Marketing
|
2.00
|
|
Distribution
|
2.50
|
|
Customer service
|
6.50
|
|
Information systems
|
1.80
|
|
Management accounting
|
0.20
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
$30.00
|
the following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their comp 540540
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparison of ABM and JIT
The following are excerpts from a conversation between two managers about their companies’ management systems. Identify the manager who works for a company that emphasizes ABM and the one who works for a company that emphasizes a JIT system.
Manager 1: We try to manage our resources effectively by monitoring operating activities. We analyze all major operating activities, and we focus on reducing or eliminating the ones that don’t add value to our products.
Manager 2: We’re very concerned with eliminating waste. We’ve designed our operations to reduce the time it takes to move, store, queue, and inspect materials. We’ve also reduced our inventories by buying and using materials only when we need them.
tim s bargain basement sells used goods at very low prices 540541
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Balanced Scorecard
Tim’s Bargain Basement sells used goods at very low prices. Tim has developed the following business objectives:
1. To buy only the inventory that sells
2. To have repeat customers
3. To be profitable and grow
4. To keep employee turnover low Tim also developed the following performance measures:
5. Growth in revenues and net income per quarter
6. Average unsold goods at the end of the business day as a percentage of the total goods purchased that day
7. Number of unemployment claims
8. Percentage of customers who have shopped in the store before Match each of these objectives and performance measures with the four perspectives of the balanced scorecard: financial perspective, learning and growth perspective, internal business processes perspective, and customer perspective.
your college s overall goal is to add value to the communities it serves in light of 540542
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Balanced Scorecard
Your college’s overall goal is to add value to the communities it serves. In light of that goal, match each of the following stakeholders’ perspectives with the appropriate objective:
|
Perspective
|
Objective
|
|
1. Financial (investors)
|
a. Adding value means that the faculty engages in meaningful teaching and research.
|
|
2. Learning and growth (employees)
|
b. Adding value means that students receive their degrees in four years.
|
|
3. Internal business processes
|
c. Adding value means that the college has winning sports teams.
|
|
4. Customers
|
d. Adding value means that fund-raising campaigns are successful.
|
katrina storm went to work for nola industries five years ago 540543
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Conduct
Katrina Storm went to work for NOLA Industries five years ago. She was recently promoted to cost accounting manager and now has a new boss, Vickery Howe, the corporate controller. Last week, Storm and Howe went to a two-day professional development program on international accounting standards changes. During the first hour of the first day’s program, Howe disappeared and Storm didn’t see her again until the cocktail hour. The same thing happened on the second day. During the trip home, Storm asked Howe if she had enjoyed the conference. She replied: “Katrina, the golf course was excellent. You play golf. Why don’t you join me during the next conference? I haven’t sat in on one of those sessions in ten years. This is my R&R time. Those sessions are for the new People. My experience is enough to keep me current. Plus, I have excellent people to help me as we adjust our accounting system to the international changes being implemented.”
Does Katrina Storm have an ethical dilemma? If so, what is it? What are her options? How would you solve her problem? Be prepared to defend your answer.
clothing industries inc is deciding whether to expand its line of women s clothing c 540545
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Report Preparation
Clothing Industries, Inc. is deciding whether to expand its line of women’s clothing called Sami Pants. Sales in units of this product were 22,500, 28,900, and 36,200 in 2010, 2011, and 2012, respectively. The product has been very profitable, averaging 35 percent profit (above cost) over the three-year period. The company has 10 sales representatives covering seven states in the North. Production capacity at present is about 40,000 pants per year. There is adequate plant space for additional equipment, and the labor needed can be easily hired and trained.
The organization’s management is made up of four vice presidents: the vice president of marketing, the vice president of production, the vice president of finance, and the vice president of management information systems. Each vice president is directly responsible to the president, Jefferson Henry.
Required
1. What types of information will Henry need before he can decide whether to expand the Sami Pants line?
2. Assume that one report needed to support Henry’s decision is an analysis of sales, broken down by sales representative, over the past three years. How would each of the four w’s pertain to this report? 3. Design a format for the report described in requirement 2
reigle electronics is a manufacturer of cell phones a highly competitive business 540546
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain
Reigle Electronics is a manufacturer of cell phones, a highly competitive business. Reigle’s phones carry a price of $99, but competition forces the company to offer significant discounts and rebates. As a result, the average price of Reigle’s cell phones has dropped to around $50, and the company is losing money. Management is applying value chain analysis to the company’s operations in an effort to reduce costs and improve product quality. A study by the company’s management accountant has determined the following per unit costs for primary processes:
|
Primary Process
|
Cost per Unit
|
|
Research and development
|
$ 2.50
|
|
Design
|
3.50
|
|
Supply
|
4.50
|
|
Production
|
6.70
|
|
Marketing
|
8.00
|
|
Distribution
|
1.90
|
|
Customer service
|
0.50
|
|
Total cost
|
$27.60
|
To generate a gross margin large enough for the company to cover its overhead costs and earn a profit, Reigle must lower its total cost per unit for primary processes to no more than $20. After analyzing operations, management reached the following conclusions about primary processes:
• Research and development and design are critical functions because the market and competition require constant development of new features with “cool” designs at lower cost. Nevertheless, management feels that the cost per unit of these processes must be reduced by 10 percent.
• Six different suppliers currently provide the components for the cell phones. Ordering these components from just two suppliers and negotiating lower prices could result in a savings of 15 percent.
• The cell phones are currently manufactured in Mexico. By shifting production to China, the unit cost of production can be lowered by 20 percent.
• Most cell phones are sold through wireless communication companies that are trying to attract new customers with low-priced cell phones. Management believes that these companies should bear more of the marketing costs and that it is feasible to renegotiate its marketing arrangements with them so that they will bear 35 percent of the current marketing costs.
• Distribution costs are already very low, but management will set a target of reducing the cost per unit by 10 percent.
• Customer service is a weakness of the company and has resulted in lost sales. Management therefore proposes increasing the cost per unit of customer service by 50 percent.
Required
1. Prepare a table showing the current cost per unit of primary processes and the projected cost per unit based on management’s proposals for cost reduction.
2. Will management’s proposals for cost reduction achieve the targeted total cost per unit? What further steps should management take to reduce costs? Which steps that management is proposing do you believe will be the most difficult to accomplish?
3. What are the company’s support services? What role should these services play in the value chain analysis?
medic products company mpc is known for developing innovative and high quality produ 540547
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain and Core Competency
Medic Products Company (MPC) is known for developing innovative and high-quality products for use in hospitals and medical and dental offices. Its latest product is a nonporous, tough, and very thin disposable glove that will not leak or split and molds tightly to the hand, making it ideal for use in medical and dental procedures. MPC buys the material it uses in making the gloves from another company, which manufactures it according to MPC’s exact specifications and quality standards. MPC makes two models of the glove—one white and one transparent—in its own plant and sells them through independent agents who represent various manufacturers. When an agent informs MPC of a sale, MPC ships the order directly to the buyer. MPC advertises the gloves in professional journals and gives free samples to physicians and dentists. It provides a product warranty and periodically surveys users about the product’s quality.
Required
1. Briefly explain how MPC accomplishes each of the primary processes in the value chain.
2. What is a core competency? Which one of the primary processes would you say is MPC’s core competency? Explain your choice.
howski associates is an independent insurance agency that sells business automobile 540548
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Balanced Scorecard and Benchmarking
Howski Associates is an independent insurance agency that sells business, automobile, home, and life insurance. Maya Howski, senior partner of the agency, recently attended a workshop at the local university in which the balanced scorecard was presented as a way of focusing all of a company’s functions on its mission. After the workshop, she met with her managers in a weekend brainstorming session. The group determined that Howski Associates’ mission was to provide high-quality, innovative, risk-protection services to individuals and businesses. To ensure that the agency would fulfill this mission, the group established the following
objectives:
• To provide a sufficient return on investment by increasing sales and maintaining the liquidity needed to support operations
• To add value to the agency’s services by training employees to be knowledgeable and competent
• To retain customers and attract new customers
• To operate an efficient and cost-effective office support system for customer agents
To determine the agency’s progress in meeting these objectives, the group established the following performance measures:
• Number of new ideas for customer insurance
• Percentage of customers who rate services as excellent
• Average time for processing insurance applications
• Number of dollars spent on training
• Growth in revenues for each type of insurance
• Average time for processing claims
• Percentage of employees who complete 40 hours of training during the year
• Percentage of new customer leads that result in sales
• Cash flow
• Number of customer complaints
• Return on assets
• Percentage of customers who renew policies
• Percentage of revenue devoted to office support system (information systems, accounting, orders, and claims processing)
Required
1. Prepare a balanced scorecard for Howski Associates by stating the agency’s mission and matching its four objectives to the four stakeholder perspectives: the financial, learning and growth, internal business processes, and customer perspectives. Indicate which of the agency’s performance measures would be appropriate for each objective.
2.Howski Associates is a member of an association of independent insurance agents that provides industry statistics about many aspects of operating an insurance agency. What is benchmarking, and in what ways would the industry statistics assist Howski Associates in further developing its balanced scorecard?
taylor zimmer is the controller for value corporation he has been with the company f 540549
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Professional Ethics
Taylor Zimmer is the controller for Value Corporation. He has been with the company for 17 years and is being considered for the job of chief financial officer. His boss, who is the current chief financial officer and former company controller, will be Value Corporation’s new president. Zimmer has just discussed the year-end closing with his boss, who made the following statement during their conversation: “Taylor, why are you being so inflexible? I’m only asking you to postpone the $2,500,000 write-off of obsolete inventory for 10 days so that it won’t appear on this year’s financial statements. Ten days! Do it. Your promotion is coming up, you know. Make sure you keep all the possible outcomes in mind as you complete your year-end work. Oh, and keep this conversation confidential— just between you and me. Okay?”
Required
1. Identify the ethical issue or issues involved.
2. What do you believe is the appropriate solution to the problem? Be prepared to defend your answer.
daisy flowers recently purchased yardworks inc a wholesale distributor of equipment 540550
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Report Preparation
Daisy Flowers recently purchased Yardworks, Inc., a wholesale distributor of equipment and supplies for lawn and garden care. The organization, which is headquartered in Baltimore, has four distribution centers that service 14 eastern states. The centers are located in Boston, Massachusetts; Rye, New York; Reston, Virginia; and Lawrenceville, New Jersey. The company’s profits for 2010, 2011, and 2012 were $225,400, $337,980, and $467,200, respectively. Shortly after purchasing the organization, Flowers appointed people to the following positions: vice president, marketing; vice president, distribution; corporate controller; and vice president, research and development. Flowers called a meeting of this management group. She wants to create a deluxe retail lawn and garden center that would include a large, fully landscaped plant and tree nursery. The purposes of the retail center would be (1) to test equipment and supplies before selecting them for sales and distribution and (2) to showcase the effects of using the company’s products. The retail center must also make a profit on sales.
Required
1. What types of information will Flowers need before deciding whether to create the retail lawn and garden center?
2. To support her decision, Flowers will need a report from the vice president of research and development analyzing all possible plants and trees that could be planted and their ability to grow in the places where the new retail center might be located. How would each of the four w’s pertain to this report?
3. Design a format for the report in requirement 2.
soft spot is a manufacturer of futon mattresses soft spot s mattresses are priced at 540551
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain
Soft Spot is a manufacturer of futon mattresses. Soft Spot’s mattresses are priced at $60, but competition forces the company to offer significant discounts and rebates. As a result, the average price of the futon mattress has dropped to around $50, and the company is losing money. Management is applying value chain analysis to the company’s operations in an effort to reduce costs and improve product quality. A study by the company’s management accountant has determined the following per unit costs for primary processes and support services:
|
Primary Process
|
Cost per Unit
|
|
Research and development
|
$ 5.00
|
|
Design
|
3.00
|
|
Supply
|
4.00
|
|
Production
|
16.00
|
|
Marketing
|
6.00
|
|
Distribution
|
7.00
|
|
Customer service
|
1.00
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
$42.00
|
|
Support Service
|
$ 2.00
|
|
Human resources
|
5.00
|
|
Information services
|
1.00
|
|
Management accounting
|
$ 8.00
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
|
To generate a gross margin large enough for the company to cover its overhead costs and earn a profit, Soft Spot must lower its total cost per unit for primary processes to no more than $32.00 and its support services to no more than $5.00. After analyzing operations, management reached the following conclusions about primary processes and support services:
• Research and development and design are critical functions because the market and competition require constant development of new features with “cool” designs at lower cost. Nevertheless, management feels that the cost per unit of these processes must be reduced by 20 percent.
• Ten different suppliers currently provide the components for the futons. Ordering these components from just two suppliers and negotiating lower prices could result in a savings of 15 percent.
• The futons are currently manufactured in Mali. By shifting production to China, the unit cost of production can be lowered by 40 percent.
• Management believes that by selling to large retailers like Wal-Mart it is feasible to lower current marketing costs by 25 percent.
• Distribution costs are already very low, but management will set a target of reducing the cost per unit by 10 percent.
• Customer service and support to large customers are key to keeping their business. Management therefore proposes increasing the cost per unit of customer service by 20 percent.
• By outsourcing its support services, management projects a 20 percent drop in these costs.
sports products company spc is known for developing innovative high quality shoes fo 540552
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Value Chain and Core Competency
Sports Products Company (SPC) is known for developing innovative high quality shoes for lacrosse. Its latest patented product is a tough, all-weather, and very flexible shoe. SPC buys the material it uses in making the shoes from another company, which manufactures it according to SPC’s exact specifications and quality standards. SPC makes two models of the shoe—one white and one black—in its own plant. SPC sells them through independent distributors who represent various manufacturers. When a distributor informs SPC of a sale, SPC ships the order directly to the buyer. SPC advertises the shoes in sports magazines and gives free samples to well-known lacrosse players who endorse its products. It provides a product warranty and periodically surveys users about the product’s quality.
Required
1. Briefly explain how SPC accomplishes each of the primary processes in the value chain.
2. What is a core competency? Which one of the primary processes would you say is SPC’s core competency? Explain your choice.
resource college is a liberal arts school that provides local residents the opportun 540553
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Balanced Scorecard and Benchmarking
Resource College is a liberal arts school that provides local residents the opportunity to take college courses and earn bachelor’s degrees. Yolanda Howard, the school’s provost, recently attended a workshop in which the balanced scorecard was presented as a way of focusing all of an organization’s functions on its mission. After the workshop, she met with her administrative staff and college deans in a weekend brainstorming session. The group determined that the college’s mission was to provide high-quality courses and degrees to individuals to add value to their lives. To ensure that the college would fulfill this mission, the group established the following objectives:
• To provide a sufficient return on investment by increasing tuition revenues and maintaining the liquidity needed to support operations
• To add value to the college’s courses by encouraging faculty to be lifelong learners
• To retain students and attract new students
• To operate efficient and cost-effective student support systems To determine the college’s progress in meeting these objectives, the group established the following performance measures:
• Number of faculty publications
• Percentage of students who rate college as excellent
• Average time for processing student applications
• Number of dollars spent on professional development
• Growth in revenues for each department
• Average time for processing transcript requests
• Percentage of faculty who annually do 40 hours of professional development
• Percentage of new student leads that result in enrollment
• Cash flow
• Number of student complaints
• Return on assets
• Percentage of returning students
• Percentage of revenue devoted to student services systems (registrar, computer services, financial aid, and student health)
Required
1. Prepare a balanced scorecard for Resource College by stating the college’s mission and matching its four objectives to the four stakeholder perspectives: the financial, learning and growth, internal business processes, and customer perspectives.
2. Indicate which of the college’s performance measures would be appropriate for each objective.
unfortunately it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outco 540129
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial manager of the Variable Corporation has looked into the department’s crystal ball and estimated the earnings per share for Variable under three possible outcomes. This crystal ball is a bit limited, for it can only make projections regarding the earnings per share and the probability that each will occur. Unfortunately, it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outcomes will occur. The data provided by the crystal ball indicates:
|
Economic Environment
|
Probability
|
Earnings per Share
|
|
Good
|
50%
|
$10.00
|
|
OK
|
20%
|
$5.00
|
|
Bad
|
30%
|
$1.00
|
Help the financial manager assess this data by calculating the expected earnings per share and the standard deviation of earnings per share for Variable Corporation.
the lou zer corporation generated a net operating loss of 5 000 in 2001 assume that 540133
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Lou Zer Corporation generated a net operating loss of $5,000 in 2001. Assume that the current tax law allows the loss to be carried back three years to reduce previous years’ taxes and that previous tax returns reveal the following information:
|
Tax Year
|
Taxable Income
|
Taxes Paid
|
|
2000
|
$1,000
|
$400
|
|
1999
|
$2,000
|
$800
|
|
1998
|
$3,000
|
$1,200
|
|
1997
|
$2,000
|
$800
|
a. What is the amount of tax refund that Lou Zer can apply for as a result of the 2001 loss?
b. How would your answer differ if the tax law permitted the loss to be carried back only two years?
the beta an indicator of an asset s systematic risk assigned to general stuff s comm 540134
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food products, including pasta, cereal, juice beverages, and confectionery goods. In addition to food processing, General Stuff has acquired a small, regional restaurant chain within the past year. The management of General Stuff believes that the most profitable course would be to expand the restaurant chain to become a major player in the national market. To do this, however, requires cash—which General Stuff doesn’t have quite enough of right now. General Stuff’s management has determined that it needs to raise $1 million in capital next year beyond the funds generated internally.
General Stuff had revenues of around $1.2 billion in the last fiscal year and revenues are expected to increase at a rate of 8% per year for the next five years if the restaurant chain is expanded as planned. The vast majority (80%) of the revenues are currently from the food processing business, but it is expected that the restaurant chain will provide up to 40% of General Stuff’s revenues within three years. General Stuff’s net profit margin last year was 5%, but the typical net profit margin for retail food businesses is 10%. General Stuff’s return on assets last year was 25% and return on equity was 40%.
The beta (an indicator of an asset’s systematic risk) assigned to General Stuff’s common stock by a major financial analysis service was 1.2 prior to its acquisition of the restaurant chain. The beta was revised upward slightly to 1.3 following this acquisition.
Other firms in the food processing industry have capital structures comprising 40% debt and 60% equity, though the use of debt ranges from a low of 15% to a high of 72%. Firms in the retail food industry have capital structures of 45% debt and 55% equity, ranging from 35% to 70% debt.
a. Compare General Stuff’s capital structure with that of the industry.
b. Provide a recommendation for the amount of debt and equity
General Stuff should issue to support the expansion program.
List any assumptions you have made in your analysis. Briefly discuss additional information that would be useful in making a recommendation.
the seminole company wishes to apply the miller orr model to manage its cash investm 540148
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Seminole Company wishes to apply the Miller-Orr model to manage its cash investment. Seminole’s management has collected the following estimates:
|
Cost per transaction
|
= $200
|
|
Variance of daily cash flows
|
= $10,000
|
|
Opportunity cost of cash, per day
|
= 0.05%
|
Seminole management has figured, based on their experience dealing with the cash flows of the company, that there should be a cushion— a safety stock—of cash of $20,000. Calculate the following:
a. the lower limit
b. the return point
c. the upper limit
consider the following five different lock box arrangements 540152
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following five different lock box arrangements:
|
Float Reduction,
|
Opportunity
|
Annual
|
Bank Fee
|
|
Arrangement
|
in Days
|
Cost per Year
|
Collections
|
for Lockbox
|
|
A
|
3
|
10%
|
$1,000,000
|
$500
|
|
B
|
5
|
10%
|
1,000,000
|
600
|
|
C
|
5
|
10%
|
1,000,000
|
1,500
|
|
D
|
4
|
12%
|
500,000
|
500
|
|
E
|
3
|
5%
|
1,200,000
|
500
|
a. For each arrangement, calculate the benefits from using the lock box system.
b. Considering the bank fee for each arrangement, which lock box systems are attractive?
what is the effective annual cost of credit to its customers if el cheapo changes it 540168
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The El Cheapo Company typically has $1 million of sales each year and a contribution margin of 20%. El Cheapo is considering offering its customers a 1% discount if they pay within five days of the sale otherwise full payment is due within 20 days.
a. What is the effective annual cost of credit to its customers if El Cheapo changes its policy and customers pay on the net day?
b. If sales are expected to increase to $2 million per year when this discount is instituted and if 30% of its customers are predicted to take advantage of this discount, what is the cost of the discount to El Cheapo?
c. What contribution margin would El Cheapo need to insure a 20% profit margin on those accounts paid within five days (ignoring any costs of carrying accounts receivable)?
what is the cost to uo of changing its discount 540169
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
UO, Inc., is evaluating its present credit policy and is concerned that it may not be offering terms that are competitive. Presently, they offer terms of 1/10, net 30, with 50% of its customers paying within the discount period and the remainder paying within the net period. UO’s credit department has projected that if the terms were changed to 2/10, net 30, without changing the 25% contribution margin, annual credit sales will increase from $20 million to $30 million, with 75% of customers paying within ten days and the remainder paying within the net period. This change will decrease its days of credit from 20 to 15 days. UO’s opportunity cost for its accounts receivable investment is 15% before taxes.
a. What is the cost to UO of changing its discount?
b. What is the change in the carrying cost of accounts receivable for UO?
c. Should UO change its discount? Explain.
hurricane s management estimates that hurricane needs 100 000 units per month each t 540170
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hurricane, Inc. is evaluating its management of inventory. Hurricane’s management estimates that Hurricane needs 100,000 units per month. Each time it places an order to replenish inventory, it costs Hurricane $50. It costs approximately $5 per month to carry one unit.
a. If Hurricane orders 20,000 units each time it places an order, what are the ordering costs per month?
b. If Hurricane Company orders 20,000 units each time it places an order, what are the holding costs of inventory per month?
c. What is the economic order quantity for Hurricane? How do the inventory costs change if Hurricane orders 1,000 units more than the EOQ each time? How do the inventory costs change if Hurricane orders 1,000 units less than the EOQ each time?
consider the following information from financial statements with dollar amounts in 540171
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following information from financial statements, with dollar amounts in millions:
|
Corporation
|
Inventory
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Primary Product
|
|
A
|
$816
|
$2,761
|
Drugs and health care
|
|
B
|
2,141
|
3,975
|
Tobacco products
|
|
C
|
1,147
|
17,932
|
Oil and gasoline
|
|
D
|
707
|
3,915
|
Food, soup
|
|
E
|
1,595
|
6,506
|
Computers
|
|
F
|
494
|
3,727
|
Food, cereal
|
Source: Standard & Poors Compustat PC Plus CD- Rom
a. Calculate the inventory turnover for each firm.
b. Calculate the number of days of inventory for each firm.
c. Why might the inventory turnovers and number of days of inventory differ among these firms?
the floppy disk company currently extends credit to its customers offering a discoun 540174
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Floppy Disk Company currently extends credit to its customers, offering a discount of 4% if the account is paid within 20 days, otherwise the full amount is due 40 days from the date of purchase. It is considering changing its credit terms to offer more incentive to its customers to pay early. It is proposing increasing its discount to 6%if accounts are paid within 20 days. Its contribution margin is 25% and its before-tax opportunity cost of funds is 15%.
a. Calculate the cost of trade credit to Floppy’s customers that choose to pay on the net day under the present credit terms.
b. Calculate the cost of trade credit to Floppy’s customers that choose to pay on the net day under the proposed credit terms.
c. If Floppy’s sales are expected to increase by $5 million under these new credit terms and the percentage of customers paying within 10 days increases from 20% to 30%, what is the cost of the change in the discount for the Floppy Disk Company?
what is the effective interest rate on its current credit terms 540175
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The I. Krueger Company is evaluating its credit terms. Currently, the I. Krueger Company allows its customers to pay in 30 days and gives the customers a 2% discount if they pay in within five days.
a. What is the effective interest rate on its current credit terms?
b. If I. Krueger moves the discount period from five days to three days (leaving the amount of the discount the same), what would be the effective interest rate that it charges credit customers that pay in 30 days?
c. If I. Krueger changes only the discount rate from 2% to 3% (leaving the discount period the same), what would be the effective interest rate that it charges its credit customers that pay in 30 days?
d. If I. Krueger changes the discount rate from 2% to 3% and changes the discount period from five to three days, what would be the effective interest rate that it charges its credit customers that pay in 30 days?
the teeny tiny toy company often referred to as the 3t company manufactures toys wit 540176
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Teeny Tiny Toy Company (often referred to as the 3T Company) manufactures toys with themes tied to recent movie releases. 3T’s sales in the last fiscal year were $3 billion and sales have been growing at a rate of 5% per year. Sales are seasonal, with the peak sales in August of each year. 3T’s fiscal year ends in January. The forecasted sales for 3T for the next fiscal year, in millions, are:
|
Month
|
Estimated Sales
|
Month
|
Estimated Sales
|
|
February
|
$150
|
August
|
$450
|
|
March
|
160
|
September
|
370
|
|
April
|
170
|
October
|
320
|
|
May
|
230
|
November
|
300
|
|
June
|
250
|
December
|
230
|
|
July
|
380
|
January
|
140
|
Sales for December and January of the most recent fiscal year are $215 million and $130 million, respectively. 3T’s gross and contribution margins were 30% and 40%, respectively, in the last fiscal year. No change in margins is expected in the next fiscal year. 3T sells its goods to retail stores on credit, with terms of 4/30, net 90. Under the present credit terms, 30% of its customers pay within 30 days, 60% pay within 60 days, and the rest pay within 90 days. 3T is considering changing its credit policy to stimulate sales.
Based an examination of competitors’ terms, if they alter the policy to 4/60, net 90, 3T management anticipates increasing sales by 10%, but collections are expected to slow down: Only 10% of its sales on credit will be paid within 30 days, 80% paid within 60 days, and the rest paid within 90 days.
The costs of administering and collecting accounts receivables is expected to increase by $200,000 since the customer base will be increased and credit will be extended to slower-paying customers.
The cost of carrying accounts receivable (that is, the opportunity cost) is 10%.
a. Estimate the effect that the change in the credit policy would have on monthly sales and accounts receivable. Graph monthly sales and accounts receivable for each month in the next fiscal year.
b. Prepare a recommendation regarding the change in the credit policy.
Be sure to list any assumptions that are necessary and discuss the benefits and costs associated with a change in 3T’s credit policy.
calculate the effective annual rate that corresponds to each of the following altern 540188
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the effective annual rate that corresponds to each of the following alternative financings’ annual percentage rates:
|
Alternative
|
APR
|
Frequency of Compounding
|
|
A
|
12%
|
annually
|
|
B
|
12
|
semiannually
|
|
C
|
18
|
monthly
|
|
D
|
10
|
weekly
|
|
E
|
5
|
quarterly
|
if the prime rate is 12 apr which arrangement is less costly for cash poor 540198
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cash Poor Company is considering using its $1 million of accounts receivable to secure financing for the next month. Cash Poor has approached two financing firms, each offering different arrangements. Firm A is willing to lend Cash Poor 75% of the face value of the receivables at 60 basis points above the prime rate. Firm B is willing to factor Cash Poor’s receivables, advancing 75% of the receivables, collecting a fee up front of 1% of all receivables, and charging interest at 30 basis points above the prime rate. In the case of Firm A’s arrangement, Cash Poor continues with its evaluation and collection of credit, but in the case of Firm B’s arrangement, Firm B performs all the credit functions, saving Cash Poor an estimated $10,000 over the next month. If the prime rate is 12% APR, which arrangement is less costly for Cash Poor?
classify each of the following companies as mature growing or downsizing based on th 540249
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classify each of the following companies as mature, growing, or downsizing based on these cash flows:
|
Cash Flow from
|
Cash Flow from (for)
|
Cash Flow from (for)
|
|
Company
|
Operations
|
Investing Activities
|
Financing Activities
|
|
A
|
$550,345,890
|
$(300,532,400)
|
$(232,221,891)
|
|
B
|
$33,114,893
|
$(145,231,879)
|
$120,133,155
|
|
C
|
$2,900,311
|
$3,000,200
|
$(5,444,656)
|
|
D
|
$1,918,777
|
$(5,506,990)
|
$3,899,231
|
calculate the amount of free cash flow for gap inc for the year ended january 31 199 540253
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the amount of free cash flow for Gap Inc., for the year ended January 31, 1998. State any assumptions that you make in your calculations.
|
Gap Inc., Statement of Cash Flows, in thousands
|
|
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
|
|
|
Net earnings
|
$53,901
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net earnings to net cash provided by operating
|
|
|
activities
|
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
269,706
|
|
Tax benefit from exercise of stock options by employees and from vesting
|
|
|
of restricted stock
|
23,682
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
(13,706)
|
|
Change in operating assets and liabilities
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
(156,091)
|
|
Prepaid expenses and other
|
(44,736)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
63,532
|
|
Accrued expenses
|
107,365
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
(8,214)
|
|
Deferred lease credits and other long-term liabilities
|
69,212
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$844,651
|
|
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
|
|
Net maturity (purchase) of short-term investments
|
174,709
|
|
Net purchase of long-term investments
|
(2,939)
|
|
Net purchase of property and equipment
|
(465,843)
|
|
Acquisition of lease rights and other assets
|
19,779
|
|
Net cash used for investing activities
|
(313,852)
|
|
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
|
|
Net increase in notes payable
|
44,462
|
|
Net issuance of long-term debt
|
495,890
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
30,653
|
|
Net purchase of treasury stock
|
(593,142)
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(79,503)
|
|
Net cash used for financing activities
|
(101,640)
|
|
Gap Inc., Income Statement, in thousands
|
|
Net sales
|
$6,507825
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
Cost of goods sold and occupancy expenses
|
4,021,541
|
|
Operating expenses
|
1,635,017
|
|
Net interest income
|
(2,975)
|
|
Earnings before income taxes
|
$842,242
|
|
Income taxes
|
320,341
|
|
Net earnings
|
$533,901
|
assume that the lease is a net lease that any tax benefits are realized in the year 540316
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Mietet Company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs $1 million if bought today. The company can buy or lease the machine. If it buys the machine, the machine would be depreciated as a 3-year MACRS asset and is expected to have a salvage value of $10,000 at the end of the 5-year useful life. If leased, the lease payments are $250,000 each year for four years, payable at the beginning of each year. Mietet’s marginal tax rate is 35% and the cost of capital is 12%.
Assume that the lease is a net lease, that any tax benefits are realized in the year of the expense, and that there is no investment tax credit.
a. Calculate the depreciation for each year in the case of the purchase of this machine.
b. Calculate the direct cash flows from leasing initially and for each of the five years.
c. Calculate the adjusted discount rate.
d. Calculate the value of the lease.
the rendilegping company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs 100 540317
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Rendilegping Company is considering the acquisition of a machine that costs $100,000 if bought today. The company can buy or lease the machine. If it buys the machine, the machine would be depreciated as a 3-year MACRS asset and is expected to have a salvage value of $5,000 at the end of the 5-year useful life. If leased, the lease payments are $24,000 each year for four years, payable at the beginning of each year. The marginal tax rate of the Rendilegping Company is 30% and the cost of capital is 15%. Use the MACRS rates as provided in Question 19 and assume that the lease is a net lease, that any tax benefits are realized in the year of the expense, and that there is no investment tax credit.
a. Calculate the depreciation for each year in the case of the purchase of this machine.
b. Calculate the direct cash flows from leasing initially and for each of the five years.
c. Calculate the adjusted discount rate.
d. Calculate the value of the lease.
e. Calculate the amortization of the equivalent loan.
organizations stake out different strategic positions to add value and achieve succe 540521
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Strategic Positioning
Organizations stake out different strategic positions to add value and achieve success. Some strive to be low-cost leaders like Wal-Mart, while others become the high-end quality leaders like Whole Foods Market. Identify which of the following organizations are low-cost leaders (C) and which are quality leaders (Q):
|
1. Tiffany & Co.
|
6. Rent-a-Wreck
|
|
2. Yale University
|
7. Hertz Rental Cars
|
|
3. Local community college
|
8. Pepsi-Cola
|
|
4. Lexus
|
9. Store-brand soda
|
|
5. Kia
|
|
indicate whether each of the following management activities in a department store i 540522
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Management Process
Indicate whether each of the following management activities in a department store is part of planning (PL), performing (PE), evaluating (E), or communicating (C):
1. Completing a balance sheet and income statement at the end of the year
2. Training a clerk to complete a cash sale
3. Meeting with department managers to develop performance measures for sales personnel
4. Renting a local warehouse to store excess inventory of clothing
5. Evaluating the performance of the shoe department by examining the significant differences between its actual and planned expenses for the month
6. Preparing an annual budget of anticipated sales for each department and the entire store
suppose that an investment promises to provide the following cash flows 539849
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that an investment promises to provide the following cash flows:
|
Year
|
End of Year Cash Flow
|
|
Year 1
|
$0
|
|
Year 2
|
$1,000
|
|
Year 3
|
$0
|
|
Year 4
|
–$1,000
|
If interest is compounded annually at 5%, what is the value of the investment at the end of: a. Year 1? b. Year 0?
calculate the average annual return for the following investments that have no inter 539874
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the average annual return for the following investments that have no intermediate cash flows:
| |
Beginning Price
|
Ending Price
|
Number of Years
|
|
(a)
|
$1,000
|
$1,500
|
2
|
|
(b)
|
$10,000
|
$9,000
|
10
|
|
(c)
|
$978
|
$1,000
|
3
|
the baker company is considering an investment of 1 million the investment is expect 539878
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Baker Company is considering an investment of $1 million. The investment is expected to produce the following cash flows:
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Year 1
|
$400,000
|
|
Year 2
|
$300,000
|
|
Year 3
|
$300,000
|
|
Year 4
|
$400,000
|
a. What is the annual return on Baker Company’s investment if it invests $1 million?
b. What is the most the Baker Company would invest so that the return on its investment is at least 10%?
the common company has paid the following dividends during the past four years of 539887
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Common Company has paid the following dividends during the past four years of:
|
Year
|
Dividend per Share
|
|
1997
|
$2.00
|
|
1998
|
$2
|
|
1999
|
$2
|
|
2000
|
$3
|
If dividends are expected to grow at the same rate as the past four years and the required rate of return on Common common is 10%, what is the expected price of a share of Common common at the end of 2000?
burlington northern santa fe inc paid the following dividends per share dps on its c 539893
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Burlington Northern Santa Fe, Inc., paid the following dividends per share (DPS) on its common stock:
|
Year
|
DPS
|
Year
|
DPS
|
Year
|
DPS
|
|
1984
|
$1.10
|
1988
|
$2.20
|
1992
|
$1.20
|
|
1985
|
$1.45
|
1989
|
$1.20
|
1993
|
$1.20
|
|
1986
|
$2
|
1990
|
$1.20
|
1994
|
$1.20
|
|
1987
|
$2
|
1991
|
$1.20
|
1995
|
$1.20
|
Source: Value Line Investment Survey, Edition 2 (March 22, 1996) p. 285.
Calculate the average annual growth rate in dividends from:
a. 1984 through 1987
b. 1984 through 1991
c. 1984 through 1995
for each of the following pairs of coupon rates and yields assuming interest is paid 539896
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following pairs of coupon rates and yields, assuming interest is paid at the end of each year, determine whether the bond will sell for more than, at, or less than its par value:
|
Bond
|
Coupon Rate
|
Yield-to-Maturity
|
|
A
|
5%
|
7%
|
|
B
|
2%
|
3%
|
|
C
|
6%
|
6%
|
|
D
|
3%
|
6%
|
|
E
|
8%
|
4%
|
on january 1 1981 the huntington railroad company issued 100 million of 95 8 bonds d 539906
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 1981, the Huntington Railroad Company issued $100 million of 95_8 bonds due 2020. Interest is paid semiannually in January and June of each year. These bonds are callable according to the following schedule:
1990–2000 at 103.0
2001–2005 at 102.0
2006–2010 at 101.0
2011–2015 at 100.5
2016–2020 at 100.0
These bonds are also convertible into shares of stock, with each $1,000 face value bond convertible into 15 shares of Huntington common stock. Huntington common stock paid a dividend of $2 per share in 1997. Its dividends are expected to grow at a rate of 10% per year for the years 1998–2002 and then slow to a rate of 5% per year thereafter. The current required rate of return on Huntington common stock is 14%.
The current yield (i.e., annual interest/market price) on the Huntington bonds is 7.5%. Interest rate recasts for the next six years are as follows:
|
1998
|
8.00%
|
2001
|
8.75%
|
|
1999
|
8.50%
|
2002
|
9.00%
|
|
2000
|
8.50%
|
2003
|
9.00%
|
All indications are that yields will remain at 9% through 2020.
a. Calculate the yield-to-call for the Huntington bonds for each year from today, the end of 1997, to maturity. Plot the yield-to-call against time.
b. Forecast the stock price of Huntington common stock for each year from 1998 through 2020. Plot the predicted stock price against time.
c. Based on the yield and dividend growth forecasts, at what point in the future would it be profitable to convert the Huntington bonds into stock? Explain the basis of your decision. What other factors enter into this decision?
a manufacturing firm banner products is seeking to raise 50 million by issuing a sev 540043
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing firm, Banner Products, is seeking to raise $50 million by issuing a seven-year bond. The CFO is seeking fixed-rate financing. However, Banner Products’ investment banker has informed the CFO that it could synthetically create a fixed-rate bond at a lower cost if it issued floating-rate bonds and used an interest rate swap. If the fixed rate bonds are issued, the interest rate that Banner Products must offer is 9%. If floating-rate bonds are issued, the rate would be three-month LIBOR plus 200 basis points. The swap would be a seven-year swap that pays quarterly with a notional amount of $50 million. In the swap, Banner Products would pay 6.7% and receive three-month LIBOR.
a. Diagram the payments that must be made by Banner Products if it issues a floating-rate bond and at the same time enters into the swap.
b. What is the rate on the synthetic fixed-rate bond created and compare this rate to that of a fixed-rate bond that Banner Products could have issued?
c. What risk is Banner Products exposed to by creating a synthetic fixed-rate bond?
suppose that chuckie munchies company is seeking to raise 60 million for the next fi 540044
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that Chuckie Munchies Company is seeking to raise $60 million for the next five years on a fixed-rate basis. The firm’s investment banker indicates that if bonds with a maturity of five years are issued, the interest rate on the issue would have to be 9%.
At the same time, there are institutional investors willing to purchase a bond whose annual interest rate is based on the actual performance of the S&P 500 stock market index. Specifically, the company can issue a five-year bond whose coupon rate is equal to the S&P 500 minus 250 basis points. A . If Chuckie Munchies Company issued a bond whose coupon rate is tied to the S&P 500, what risk is it facing?
b. Suppose that the company’s investment banker indicates that the firm can enter into a five-year equity swap with a notional amount of $60 million on the following terms:
¦One party will pay a fixed-rate of 8.7%.
¦The other party will pay a rate equal to the actual performance of the S&P 500 minus 280 basis points (with the minimum interest rate equal to zero).
How can Chuckie Munchies Company’s CFO use the equity swap to create a bond structure tied to the S&P 500 so as to lower its funding cost?
the pact company is evaluating its outstanding bond issue in light of a recent drop 540049
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Pact Company is evaluating its outstanding bond issue in light of a recent drop in interest rates. Currently, it has $200 million of 8% coupon bonds (paid semiannually) outstanding that mature in five years and have a maturity value of $1,000 each. The bonds are callable at 106 at any time. Their outstanding bonds are priced to yield 6% on a bond-equivalent basis (i.e., a six-month yield of 3%) and the treasurer believes that if the bonds could retire the existing bonds, they could issue new bonds at par with a 6% coupon rate.
Pact Company’s marginal tax rate is 40%.
a. What is the total market value of the outstanding bonds?
b. Should Pact Company buy the outstanding bonds in the open market or call in the bonds at this point in time assuming no flotation costs for new bonds issued? Why?
c. If there are no flotation costs, what is the face value of new 6% bonds that must be issued to refund the existing bonds?
d. Should Pact refund the 8% bonds?
the buffett restaurant company currently has 100 million of 9 coupon bonds outstandi 540050
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Buffett Restaurant Company currently has $100 million of 9% coupon bonds outstanding. These bonds pay interest semiannually, mature in ten years, and are callable at 102. Buffett also has $100 million of 81/2% coupon bonds outstanding. These bonds pay interest semiannually, have ten years remaining to maturity, and are callable at 101. Both issues of bonds are trading to yield 6%.
a. What is the market value of Buffett’s outstanding bonds?
b. If Buffett is considering retiring both issues, should it buy the bonds in the open market or call the bonds? Explain.
c. Suppose that Buffett can issue new bonds with a 6% coupon Ignoring flotation costs, what is the face value of these new bonds that must be issued to replace each of Buffett’s two outstanding issues?
the foster corporation has paid dividends on common stock over the ten years as foll 540071
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Foster Corporation has paid dividends on common stock over the ten years as follows:
|
Year
|
Dividends
|
Earnings
|
|
1994
|
$3,000
|
$5,000
|
|
1995
|
3,100
|
5,100
|
|
1996
|
3,200
|
4,500
|
|
1997
|
3,300
|
5,400
|
|
1998
|
3,500
|
5,500
|
|
1999
|
3,725
|
5,300
|
|
2000
|
3,975
|
5,200
|
|
2001
|
4,200
|
5,600
|
|
2002
|
4,500
|
5,800
|
During this ten-year period, there were 1,000 common shares outstanding.
a. What are the dividends per share for each year?
b. What is the dividend payout for each year?
c. How would you describe the dividend policy of Foster Corporation?
sun trek corporation is the leading u s producer of equipment for aerospace sun trek 540083
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sun Trek Corporation is the leading U. S. producer of equipment for aerospace. Sun Trek currently has over 60,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The price of a share of stock at the end of 1997 was $42, but the stock traded in the range of $35 to $42 during 1997. Sun Trek earnings and dividends are expected to grow at a rate of 10% each year over the next few years. In anticipation of the increased rate of growth, Sun Trek board of directors declared a 2 for 1 stock split, effective in March, 1998.
Its earnings per share (EPS) and dividends per share (DPS) over the period from 1983 through 1997 (based on per-split shares) a represented in following table.
|
Year
|
DPS
|
EPS
|
Year
|
DPS
|
EPS
|
Year
|
DPS
|
EPS
|
|
1983
|
$0.38
|
$1.14
|
1988
|
0.45
|
$1.01
|
1993
|
$0.55
|
1.53
|
|
1984
|
0.43
|
1.31
|
1989
|
0.45
|
0.61
|
1994
|
0.55
|
1.51
|
|
1985
|
0.45
|
0.94
|
1990
|
0.45
|
0.46
|
1995
|
0.59
|
1.49
|
|
1986
|
0.45
|
0.61
|
1991
|
0.45
|
–0.68
|
1996
|
0.60
|
1.28
|
|
1987
|
0.45
|
0.91
|
1992
|
0.45
|
1.40
|
1997
|
0.60
|
1.46
|
a. Describe Sun Trek’s dividend policy in terms of dividends per share and dividend payout. Provide graphs to illustrate Sun- Trek’s policy.
b. What stock price change, if any, do you expect when the shares are split in March of 1998? Explain.
c. Discuss the reasoning behind Sun Trek’s splitting its shares. Do you agree with Sun Trek’s board’s decision to split the shares?
Explain.
d. Suppose that there is a difference of opinion regarding Sun Trek’s future growth, with estimates of future growth ranging from 5% to 14%, and a median estimate of 10%. Considering the difference of opinion on Sun Trek’s future growth, discuss the wisdom of splitting its shares.
the george corporation is considering raising new funds by either issuing preferred 540098
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The George Corporation is considering raising new funds by either issuing preferred stock or issuing additional common shares. The preferred stock alternative consists of issuing $20 million of $25 par, 5% preferred stock. The common stock alternative consists of issuing 1 million new shares at $20 per share. The George Corporation currently has 4 million shares outstanding. The expected net profits of the George Corporation for the next few years are the following:
|
Year
|
Net Profit
|
|
One year from now
|
$5.4 million
|
|
Two years from now
|
6.0 million
|
|
Three years from now
|
4.2 million
|
|
Four years from now
|
5.0 million
|
Calculate George’s earnings available for common stock and earnings per share for each year and each alternative financing arrangement.
consider the information on the three firms a b and c 540109
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the information on the three firms A, B, and C:
|
Capital
|
Firm A
|
Firm B
|
Firm C
|
|
Debt
|
$1,000
|
$2,000
|
$3,000
|
|
Equity
|
$3,000
|
$2,000
|
$1,000
|
a. Calculate the debt ratio for each firm.
b. Calculate the debt-to-assets ratio for each firm.
the chew z corporation is considering three possible financing arrangements to raise 540110
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Chew-Z Corporation is considering three possible financing arrangements to raise $10,000 of new capital. Currently, the capital structure of Chew-Z consists of no debt and $10,000 of equity.
There are 500 shares of common stock currently outstanding, selling at $20 per share. The Chew-Z is expected to generate $12,000 of earnings before interest and taxes next period. It is expected that the interest rate on any debt would be 10%. The three possible financing alternatives are:
Alternative 1: Finance completely with new equity.
Alternative 2: Finance using 50% debt and 50% new equity.
Alternative 3: Finance completely with new debt.
a. Calculate the following items for each alternative, assuming that there are no taxes on corporate income:
¦ Earnings to owners
¦ Earnings per share
¦ Distribution of income between creditors and shareholders
b. Calculate the following items for each alternative, assuming that the marginal rate of tax on corporate income is 40%:
¦ Earnings to owners
¦ Earnings per share
¦ Distribution of income among creditors, shareholders, and the government
the financial manager of the variable corporation has looked into the department s c 540111
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial manager of the Variable Corporation has looked into the department’s crystal ball and estimated the earnings per share for Variable under three possible outcomes. This crystal ball is a bit limited, for it can only make projections regarding the earnings per share and the probability that each will occur. Unfortunately, it cannot tell the financial manager which of the three possible outcomes will occur. The data provided by the crystal ball indicates:
|
Economic Environment
|
Probability
|
Earnings per Share
|
|
Good
|
50%
|
$10.00
|
|
OK
|
20%
|
$5.00
|
|
Bad
|
30%
|
$1.00
|
Help the financial manager assess this data by calculating the expected earnings per share and the standard deviation of earnings per share for Variable Corporation.
calculate the capitalization rate discount rate for equity for the following three f 540112
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the capitalization rate (discount rate) for equity for the following three firms, D, E and F:
|
Capital
|
Firm D
|
Firm E
|
Firm F
|
|
Debt
|
$1,500
|
$1,000
|
$2,000
|
|
Equity
|
$1,500
|
$2,000
|
$1,000
|
Assume that there are no corporate income taxes and that the cost of equity for an unlevered firm is 10% and the cost of risk-free debt is 6%
the lou zer corporation generated a net operating loss of 5 000 in 2001 540115
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Lou Zer Corporation generated a net operating loss of $5,000 in 2001. Assume that the current tax law allows the loss to be carried back three years to reduce previous years’ taxes and that previous tax returns reveal the following information:
|
Tax Year
|
Taxable Income
|
Taxes Paid
|
|
2000
|
$1,000
|
$400
|
|
1999
|
$2,000
|
$800
|
|
1998
|
$3,000
|
$1,200
|
|
1997
|
$2,000
|
$800
|
a. What is the amount of tax refund that Lou Zer can apply for as a result of the 2001 loss?
b. How would your answer differ if the tax law permitted the loss to be carried back only two years?
general stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food 540116
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Stuff is a food processing company that manufactures a wide variety of food products, including pasta, cereal, juice beverages, and confectionery goods. In addition to food processing, General Stuff has acquired a small, regional restaurant chain within the past year. The management of General Stuff believes that the most profitable course would be to expand the restaurant chain to become a major player in the national market. To do this, however, requires cash—which General Stuff doesn’t have quite enough of right now.
General Stuff’s management has determined that it needs to raise $1 million in capital next year beyond the funds generated internally.
General Stuff had revenues of around $1.2 billion in the last fiscal year and revenues are expected to increase at a rate of 8% per year for the next five years if the restaurant chain is expanded as planned. The vast majority (80%) of the revenues are currently from the food processing business, but it is expected that the restaurant chain will provide up to 40% of General Stuff’s revenues within three years. General Stuff’s net profit margin last year was 5%, but the typical net profit margin for retail food businesses is 10%. General Stuff’s return on assets last year was 25% and return on equity was 40%.
The beta (an indicator of an asset’s systematic risk) assigned to General Stuff’s common stock by a major financial analysis service was 1.2 prior to its acquisition of the restaurant chain. The beta was revised upward slightly to 1.3 following this acquisition. Other firms in the food processing industry have capital structures comprising 40% debt and 60% equity, though the use of debt ranges from a low of 15% to a high of 72%. Firms in the retail food industry have capital structures of 45% debt and 55% equity, ranging from 35% to 70% debt.
a. Compare General Stuff’s capital structure with that of the industry.
b. Provide a recommendation for the amount of debt and equity
General Stuff should issue to support the expansion program.
List any assumptions you have made in your analysis. Briefly discuss additional information that would be useful in making a recommendation.
indicate which of the following errors each considered individually would cause the 539398
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of errors on trial balance
Indicate which of the following errors, each considered individually, would cause the trial balance totals to be unequal:
a. A fee of $21,000 earned and due from a client was not debited to Accounts Receivable or credited to a revenue account, because the cash had not been received.
b. A receipt of $11,300 from an account receivable was journalized and posted as a debit of $11,300 to Cash and a credit of $11,300 to Fees Earned.
c. A payment of $4,950 to a creditor was posted as a debit of $4,950 to Accounts Payable and a debit of $4,950 to Cash.
d. A payment of $5,000 for equipment purchased was posted as a debit of $500 to Equipment and a credit of $500 to Cash.
e. Payment of a cash dividend of $19,000 was journalized and posted as a debit of $1,900 to Salary Expense and a credit of $19,000 to Cash.
Indicate which of the preceding errors would require a correcting entry.
the following preliminary unadjusted trial balance of ranger co a sports ticket agen 539399
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Errors in trial balance
The following preliminary unadjusted trial balance of Ranger Co., a sports ticket agency, does not balance:
|
Ranger Co.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
August 31, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balance
|
Credit Balance
|
|
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
77,600
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
37,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
12,000
|
|
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
19,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
29,100
|
|
Unearned Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
10,800
|
|
Capital Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
40,000
|
|
|
Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
70,000
|
|
|
Dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
13,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
385,000
|
|
Wages Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
213,000
|
|
Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
16,350
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
18400
|
| |
273,700
|
668,300
|
When the ledger and other records are reviewed, you discover the following:
1) the debits and credits in the cash account total $77,600 and $62,100, respectively;
2) a billing of $9,000 to a customer on account was not posted to the accounts receivable account;
3) a payment of $4,500 made to a creditor on account was not posted to the accounts payable account;
4) the balance of the unearned rent account is $5,400;
5) the correct balance of the equipment account is $190,000;
6) each account has a normal balance.
Prepare a corrected unadjusted trial balance.
the following errors occurred in posting from a two column journal 539400
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of errors on trial balance
The following errors occurred in posting from a two-column journal:
1. A credit of $6,000 to Accounts Payable was not posted.
2. An entry debiting Accounts Receivable and crediting Fees Earned for $5,300 was not posted.
3. A debit of $2,700 to Accounts Payable was posted as a credit.
4. A debit of $480 to Supplies was posted twice.
5. A debit of $3,600 to Cash was posted to Miscellaneous Expense.
6. A credit of $780 to Cash was posted as $870.
7. A debit of $12,620 to Wages Expense was posted as $12,260.
Considering each case individually (i.e., assuming that no other errors had occurred), indicate: (a) by “yes” or “no” whether the trial balance would be out of balance; (b) if answer to (a) is “yes,” the amount by which the trial balance totals would differ; and (c) whether the Debit or Credit column of the trial balance would have the larger total. Answers should be presented in the following form, with error (1) given as an example:
| |
(a)
|
(b)
|
( c)
|
|
Error
|
Out of Balance
|
Difference
|
Larger Total
|
|
1.
|
yes
|
$6,000
|
Debit
|
identify the errors in the following trial balance all accounts have normal balances 539401
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Errors in trial balance
Identify the errors in the following trial balance. All accounts have normal balances.
|
Mascot Co.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
For the Month Ending July 31, 2014
|
| |
Debit Balance
|
Credit Balance
|
|
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
36,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
|
Prepaid Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
18,000
|
112,600
|
|
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
375,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
53,300
|
|
|
Unearned Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
|
Salarires Payable
|
|
7,500
|
|
Capital Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
100,000
|
|
Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
197,200
|
|
Dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
17,000
|
|
Service Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
682,000
|
|
Wages Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
396,800
|
|
|
Advertising Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
73,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
11,600
|
|
| |
273,700
|
1,189,300
|
the following data in millions are taken from the financial statements of target 539404
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal analysis of income statement
The following data (in millions) are taken from the financial statements of Target
| |
Recent
Year
|
Prior
Year
|
| |
|
Revenue
|
$67,390
|
$65,357
|
|
Operating expenses
|
62,138
|
60,684
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 5,252
|
$ 4,673
|
a. For Target Corporation, determine the amount of change in millions and the percent of change (round to one decimal
place) from the prior year to the recent year for:
1. Revenue
2. Operating expenses
3. Operating income
a. What conclusions can you draw from your analysis of the revenue and the total operating expenses?
the following data in millions were taken the financial statements of walmart stores 539405
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal analysis of income statement
The following data (in millions) were taken the financial statements of Walmart Stores, Inc.
| |
Recent
Year
|
Prior
Year
|
| |
|
Revenue
|
$421,849
|
$408,085
|
|
Operating expenses
|
396,307
|
384,083
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 25,542
|
$ 24,002
|
a. For Walmart Stores, Inc., determine the amount of change in millions and the percent of change (round to one decimal place) from the prior year to the recent year for:
a. Revenue
b. Operating expenses
c. Operating income
b. Comment on the results of your horizontal analysis in part (a).
c. Based upon Exercise 2-23, compare and comment on the operating results of Target and Walmart for the recent year.
lynn cantwell an architect organized cantwell architects on july 1 2014 during the m 539406
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entries into T accounts and trial balance
Lynn Cantwell, an architect, organized Cantwell Architects on July 1, 2014. During the month, Cantwell Architects completed the following transactions:
a. Issued capital stock to Lynn Cantwell in exchange for $25,000.
b. Paid July rent for office and workroom, $2,750.
c. Purchased used automobile for $30,000, paying $4,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
d. Purchased office and computer equipment on account, $9,000.
e. Paid cash for supplies, $1,600.
f. Paid cash for annual insurance policies, $2,400.
g. Received cash from client for plans delivered, $11,150.
h. Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $300.
i. Paid cash to creditors on account, $3,500.
j. Paid installment due on note payable, $550.
k. Received invoice for blueprint service, due in August, $1,500.
l. Recorded fee earned on plans delivered, payment to be received in August, $17,300.
m. Paid salary of assistant, $2,200.
n. Paid gas, oil, and repairs on automobile for July, $815.
Instructions
a. Record the above transactions directly in the following T accounts, without journalizing: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Automobiles, Equipment, Notes Payable, Accounts Payable, Capital Stock, Professional Fees, Rent Expense, Salary Expense, Blueprint Expense, Automobile Expense, and Miscellaneous Expense. To the left of the amount entered in the accounts, place the appropriate letter to identify the transaction.
b. Determine account balances of the T accounts. Accounts containing a single entry only (such as Prepaid Insurance) do not need a balance.
c. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Cantwell Architects, as of July 31, 2014.
d. Determine the net income or net loss for July.
on january 1 2014 alicia masingale established leopard realty which completed the fo 539407
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries and trial balance
On January 1, 2014, Alicia Masingale established Leopard Realty, which completed the following transactions during the month:
a. Alicia Masingale transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business in exchange for capital stock, $23,500.
b. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.
c. Purchased supplies on account, $1,800.
d. Paid creditor on account, $675.
e. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $16,750.
f. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $1,000, and miscellaneous expenses, $800.
g. Paid office salaries, $2,150.
h. Determined that the cost of supplies used was $925.
i. Paid dividends, $1,600.
Instructions
1. Journalize entries for transactions (a) through (i), using the following account titles: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Capital Stock, Dividends, Sales Commissions, Rent Expense, Office Salaries Expense, Automobile Expense, Supplies Expense, Miscellaneous Expense. Explanations may be omitted.
2. Prepare T accounts, using the account titles in (1). Post the journal entries to these accounts, placing the appropriate letter to the left of each amount to identify the transactions. Determine the account balances, after all posting is complete. Accounts containing only a single entry do not need a balance.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of January 31, 2014.
4. Determine the following:
a. Amount of total revenue recorded in the ledger.
b. Amount of total expenses recorded in the ledger.
c. Amount of net income for January.
5. Determine the increase or decrease in retained earnings for January.
on june 1 2014 ellie hopkins established an interior decorating business first class 539408
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries and trial balance
On June 1, 2014, Ellie Hopkins established an interior decorating business, First-Class Designs.
During the month, Ellie completed the following transactions related to the business:
June 1. Ellie transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business in exchange for capital stock, $21,500.
1. Paid rent for period of June 1 to end of month, $4,200.
6. Purchased office equipment on account, $8,500.
8. Purchased a used truck for $28,000, paying $3,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
10. Purchased supplies for cash, $1,800.
12. Received cash for job completed, $9,000.
June 15. Paid annual premiums on property and casualty insurance, $2,700.
23. Recorded jobs completed on account and sent invoices to customers, $13,650.
24. Received an invoice for truck expenses, to be paid in July, $975.
Enter the following transactions on Page 2 of the two-column journal.
29. Paid utilities expense, $2,480.
29. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $750.
30. Received cash from customers on account, $7,800.
30. Paid wages of employees, $5,100.
30. Paid creditor a portion of the amount owed for equipment purchased on June 6, $4,250.
30. Paid dividends, $3,000.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 1, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.) Explanations may be omitted.
11 Cash 31 Capital Stock
12 Accounts Receivable 33 Dividends
13 Supplies 41 Fees Earned
14 Prepaid Insurance 51 Wages Expense
16 Equipment 53 Rent Expense
18 Truck 54 Utilities Expense
21 Notes Payable 55 Truck Expense
22 Accounts Payable 59 Miscellaneous Expense
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts, inserting appropriate posting references as each item is posted. Extend the balances to the appropriate balance columns after each transaction is posted.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for First-Class Designs as of June 30, 2014.
4. Determine the excess of revenues over expenses for June.
5. Can you think of any reason why the amount determined in (4) might not be the net income for June?
the financial statements of company m and its subsidiary s are shown here in m 539424
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements of company M and its subsidiary S are shown here (in € m).
Balance sheet
|
Assets
|
M
|
S
|
Equity and liabilities
|
M
|
S
|
|
Tangible and intangible fixed assets
|
100
|
30
|
Equity and share capital
|
40
|
10
|
|
Investment in subsidiary S
|
16
|
—
|
Reserves
|
80
|
10
|
|
Other investments
|
5
|
—
|
Net earnings
|
10
|
5
|
|
Current assets
|
200
|
70
|
Debt
|
191
|
75
|
|
Total
|
321
|
100
|
Total
|
321
|
100
|
Income statement
|
M
|
S
|
|
-Sales
|
200
|
90
|
|
-Purchases of raw materials
|
100
|
50
|
|
-Change in inventories
|
—
|
2
|
|
-Other external services
|
25
|
20
|
|
-Personnel costs
|
40
|
8
|
|
-Interest and other financial Charges
|
10
|
1
|
|
+ Interest, dividends and other financial income
|
3
|
—
|
|
-Exceptional costs
|
9
|
—
|
|
+ Exceptional income
|
2
|
—
|
|
-Corporate income tax
|
11
|
4
|
|
= Net income
|
10
|
5
|
Draw up the consolidated accounts for the group MþS in the following circumstances:
(a) M has an 80% stake in S (full consolidation).
(b) M has a 50% stake in S (proportional consolidation).
(c) M has a 20% stake in S (equity method consolidation).
(N.B.: It is assumed that there are no flows between M and S.)
what are your conclusions 539521
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the leverage effect for each year. What are your conclusions?
|
€m
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
100
|
115
|
320
|
300
|
240
|
|
Long- and medium-term debt
|
123
|
180
|
540
|
640
|
680
|
|
Financial expense before tax
|
11
|
18.5
|
29
|
63
|
83
|
|
Net income
|
14
|
16
|
(20)
|
(60)
|
(40)
|
|
Tax rate
|
35%
|
35%
|
35%
|
35%
|
35%
|
draw up the cash flow schedule for the project on the basis of straight line depreci 539631
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following investment project is submitted to you:
· project: extension of an industrial plant;
· purchase of equipment € 20m;
· setup costs €1.5m;
· useful life 8 years;
- e residual value 0;
- e increase in working capital € 2.5m
The project will result in an increase in EBITDA of € 3m per year, over the 8 years during which the new asset is used. The equipment is depreciated over 5 years. The corporate income tax rate is 40%:
(a) Draw up the cash flow schedule for the project, on the basis of straight-line
depreciation.
(b) Calculate each of the two cases:
· net present value at 10%;
· the internal rate of return of the project.
a company is planning to replace a machine with a new better performing one the figu 539632
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is planning to replace a machine with a new, better performing one. The figures for the investment are as follows:
· Purchase of new machine:
· useful life 5 years, residual value nil;
· linear depreciation over 5 years;
· savings on charges € 0.8m per year.
· Sale of second-hand machine:
· purchase cost € 1.5m (machine bought the previous year);
· linear depreciation over 5 years (residual value is nil);
· net book value today € 1.2m;
· potential sale price € 1.0m.
If the tax rate on profits and capital gains/losses is 40%, what is the ‘‘value” for the company of the new machine the company is planning to buy (this company’s required rate of return is 12%)?
Calculate the net present value and the internal rate of return of the planned
investment.
calculate the average accounting return on the project the payback ratio the net pre 539636
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A large oil company has been invited to get involved in a project to build a parking facility in the centre of Frankfurt. The project includes a 450-car public parking lot, a 200-car garage and a petrol station covering 1,000m2. It will take 1 year to build, and a 30-year concession to run the facility will be granted by the municipality (after construction has been completed). Total capital expenditure will be € 8,400,000 and working capital will be nil. The annual income statement for the project after the construction looks like this:
|
Charges
|
Revenues
|
|
Operating
|
670,000
|
Parking places
|
1,680,000
|
|
Depreciation and amortisation
|
280,000
|
Garage
|
770,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
1,000,000
|
Petrol station
|
800,000
|
|
Net profits
|
1,300,000
|
|
|
|
3,250,000
|
|
3,250,000
|
Calculate the average accounting return on the project, the payback ratio, the net present value at 10% and the internal rate of return. Is the average accounting return equal to the average of the annual returns on the project?
draw up the cash flow schedule for the contemplated investment 539637
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A year ago, Robin plc invested in a machine to improve the manufacturing of one of its products. It has just discovered that a new machine has come onto the market which would improve performance more than the one it bought. That machine cost € 8,000 a year ago, and is depreciated on a straight-line basis over 8 years (the same period as its useful life after which it will be scrapped). If it were sold now, the company would get around € 5,000 (tax credit on the capital loss would be 40%).
The new machine costs € 11,000 and would be depreciated for € 10,500 on a straightline basis over its useful life, estimated at 7 years. It could be sold at the end of its useful life for € 500 which is what its book value would be.
The company is hoping to produce 100,000 units of its product annually for the next 7 years. With the equipment currently in use, the company’s per-unit cost price breaks down as follows: € 0.14 per unit in direct labour costs, € 0.10 for raw materials and € 0.14 in general costs. The new machine will enable the company to cut direct labour costs to € 0.12 per unit produced. The cost of raw materials will drop to € 0.09 per unit thanks to a reduction in waste. General costs will remain € 0.14 per unit. All other factors will remain unchanged – in particular, supplies, energy consumed and maintenance costs. Profits are taxed at 40%.
(a) Draw up the cash flow schedule for the contemplated investment.
(b) Calculate the payback ratio on this investment.
bad debts currently only account for 1 2 of debts which policy should the company in 539638
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pincer plc is hoping to increase sales by granting its customers longer payment
periods. Its annual sales currently stand at € 1m and it gives its customers an average of 30 days to pay.
(a) The company made the following assumptions when defining its customer credit policy.
|
Extension of payment period (days)
|
Increase in sales (€)
|
|
15
|
400,000
|
|
30
|
600,000
|
|
45
|
700,000
|
|
60
|
750,000
|
The sales price of a manufactured unit is € 4 and the cost price is € 3.2, including € 1 in fixed costs. What policy should the company introduce if it requires a 20% return (before tax) on its capital invested (its inventories are financed through supplier credit)?
(b) Pincer has also made the following forecasts for bad debts:
|
Extension of payment period (days)
|
Bad debts (sales, %)
|
|
15
|
2
|
|
30
|
4.5
|
|
45
|
7
|
|
60
|
12
|
Bad debts currently only account for 1.2% of debts. Which policy should the
company introduce?
how much did wpp pay for tempus the total price for 100 of the shares 539639
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the summer of 2001, the UK advertising group WPP got involved in a stock market battle with Havas Advertising for Tempus, a company listed on the London Stock Exchange. Havas Advertising offered shareholders 541 pence per share, before WPP increased its offer to 555 pence per share. WPP’s offer was accepted. Tempus’s share capital was divided into 77 million shares. Before the takeover bid, WPP held 17 million Tempus shares (22% of the company’s share capital) that it had bought up on the market over the years at an average price of 240 pence per share.
(a) How much did WPP pay for Tempus (the total price for 100% of the shares)?
(b) How much did Havas Advertising and WPP value the shareholders’ equity of
Tempus at?
(c) Do you think that the fact that WPP already held 22% of the share capital of
Tempus which it had acquired relatively cheaply gave it the option of paying
more for the rest of the shares?
using the appropriate table find the compound factor for each of the following combi 539840
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the appropriate table, find the compound factor for each of the following combinations of interest rate per period and number of compounding periods:
|
Number of Periods
|
Interest Rate per Period
|
Compound Factor
|
|
2
|
2%
|
________
|
|
4
|
3%
|
________
|
|
3
|
4%
|
________
|
|
6
|
8%
|
________
|
|
8
|
6%
|
________
|
using the appropriate table find the future value annuity factor for each of the fol 539842
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the appropriate table, find the future value annuity factor for each of the following combinations of interest rate per period and number of payments:
|
Number of Periods
|
Interest Rate per Period
|
Future Value Annuity Factor
|
|
2
|
2%
|
________
|
|
4
|
3%
|
________
|
|
3
|
4%
|
________
|
|
6
|
8%
|
________
|
|
8
|
6%
|
________
|
using the appropriate table find the present value annuity factor for each of the fo 539843
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the appropriate table, find the present value annuity factor for each of the following combinations of interest rate per period and number of payments:
|
Number of Periods
|
Interest Rate per Period
|
Value Annuity Factor
|
|
2
|
2%
|
________
|
|
4
|
3%
|
________
|
|
3
|
4%
|
________
|
|
6
|
8%
|
________
|
|
8
|
6%
|
________
|
the financial statements at the end of wolverine realty s first month of operations 539350
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing amounts from financial statements
The financial statements at the end of Wolverine Realty’s first month of operations are as follows:
|
Wolverine Realty
Income Statement
For the Month Ended April 30, 2014
|
|
Fees earned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (a)
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$300,000
|
|
|
Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
100,000
|
|
|
Supplies expense . . . . . .
|
(b)
|
|
|
Utilities expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
20,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
25,000
|
|
|
Total expenses . . . . . . .
|
475,000
|
|
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$275,000
|
|
Wolverine Realty
Retained Earnings Statement
For the Month Ended April 30, 2014
|
|
Retained earnings, April 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (c)
|
|
Net income for April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (d)
|
|
|
Less dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
125,000
|
|
|
Increase in retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(e)
|
|
Retained earnings, April 30, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (f )
|
|
Wolverine Realty
Balance Sheet
April 30, 2014
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$462,500
|
Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$100,000
|
|
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
12,500
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
150,000
|
Capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$375,000
|
|
Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (g)
|
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(h)
|
| |
|
Total stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . .
|
(i)
|
| |
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ (j)
|
|
Wolverine Realty
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Month Ended April 30, 2014
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
Cash received from customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (k)
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses and payments to creditors . . . . .
|
(387,500)
|
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$(l)
|
|
Cash flows used for investing activities:
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(m)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (n)
|
|
|
Deduct cash dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(o)
|
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(p)
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash and April 30, 2014, cash balance . . . . . . .
|
$(q)
|
Instructions
By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).
amy austin established an insurance agency on march 1 of the current year and comple 539351
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions
Amy Austin established an insurance agency on March 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during March:
a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $50,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Purchased supplies on account, $4,000.
c. Paid creditors on account, $2,300.
d. Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $13,800.
e. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $5,000.
f. Paid automobile expenses for month, $1,150, and miscellaneous expenses, $300.
g. Paid office salaries, $2,500.
h. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $2,700; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,300.
i. Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500.
j. Paid dividends, $3,900.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
-Liabilities+
|
Stockholder’s Equity
|
|
Account
|
|
Accounts
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
Fees
|
|
Rent
|
|
Salaries
|
|
Auto
|
|
Misc.
|
|
cash+ Receivable + Supplies
|
–
|
Payable
|
+
|
Stock
|
–
|
Dividends
|
+
|
Earned
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
2. Briefly explain why the issuance of capital stock and revenues increased stockholders’ equity, while dividends and expenses decreased stockholders’ equity.
3. Determine the net income for March.
4. How much did March’s transactions increase or decrease retained earnings?
on april 1 2014 maria adams established custom realty maria completed the following 539352
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions; financial statements
On April 1, 2014, Maria Adams established Custom Realty. Maria completed the following transactions during the month of April:
1. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $24,000 in exchange for capital stock.
2. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,600.
3. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $1,350, and miscellaneous expenses, $600.
4. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,200.
5. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $19,800.
6. Paid creditor on account, $750.
7. Paid office salaries, $2,500.
8. Paid dividends, $3,500.
9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $300; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $900.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
|
|
|
Cash + Supplies
|
–
|
Accounts Payable
|
+
|
Capital Stock
|
–
|
Dividends
|
+
|
Sales Commissions
|
–
|
Rent Expense
|
–
|
Salaries Expense
|
–
|
Auto Expense
|
–
|
Supplies Expense
|
–
|
Misc. Expense
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Prepare an income statement for April, a retained earnings statement for April, and a balance sheet as of April 30.
bev s dry cleaners is owned and operated by beverly zahn a building and equipment ar 539353
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions; financial statements
Bev’s Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Beverly Zahn. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets, liabilities, and capital stock of the business on November 1, 2014, are as follows: Cash, $39,000; Accounts Receivable, $80,000; Supplies, $11,000; Land, $50,000; Accounts Payable, $31,500; Capital Stock, $50,000. Business transactions during November are summarized as follows:
a. Beverly Zahn invested additional cash in exchange for capital stock with a deposit of $21,000 in the business bank account.
b. Purchased land adjacent to land currently owned by Bev’s Dry Cleaners to use in the future as a parking lot, paying cash of $35,000.
c. Paid rent for the month, $4,000.
d. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $72,000.
e. Paid creditors on account, $20,000.
f. Purchased supplies on account, $8,000.
g. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $38,000.
h. Received cash from customers on account, $77,000.
i. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for November (to be paid on December 10), $29,450.
j. Paid the following: wages expense, $24,000; truck expense, $2,100; utilities expense, $1,800; miscellaneous expense, $1,300.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $11,800; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $7,200.
l. Paid dividends, $5,000.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of retained earnings as of November 1.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of November 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for November, a retained earnings statement for November, and a balance sheet as of November 30.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for November.
the financial statements at the end of atlas realty s first month of operations are 539354
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing amounts from financial statements
The financial statements at the end of Atlas Realty’s first month of operations are shown below.
|
Atlas Realty
Income Statement
For the Month Ended May 31, 2014
|
|
Fees earned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$400,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (a)
|
|
|
Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
48,000
|
|
|
Supplies expense . . . . . .
|
17,600
|
|
|
Utilities expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
14,400
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
4,800
|
|
|
Total expenses . . . . . . .
|
|
288,000
|
|
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$(b)
|
|
Atlas Realty
Retained Earnings Statement
For the Month Ended May 31, 2014
|
|
Retained earnings, May 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (c)
|
|
Net income for April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (d)
|
|
|
Less dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
( e)
|
|
|
Increase in retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(f)
|
|
Retained earnings, May 31, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (g)
|
|
Atlas Realty
Balance Sheet
May 31, 2014
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$123,200
|
Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$48,000
|
|
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
12,800
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(h)
|
Capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$(j)
|
|
Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ (i)
|
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(k)
|
| |
|
Total stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . .
|
(l)
|
| |
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ (m)
|
|
Atlas Realty
|
|
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
|
|
For the Month Ended May 31, 2014
|
|
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$(n)
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses and payments to creditors . . . . .
|
(252,800)
|
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$(o)
|
|
Cash flows used for investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(120,000)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ 160,000
|
|
|
Deduct cash dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(64,000)
|
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
(p)
|
|
Net increase (decrease) in cash and May 31, 2014, cash balance . . . . . . .
|
$(q)
|
Instructions
By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).
Peyton Smith enjoys listening to all types of music and owns countless CDs. Over the years, Peyton has gained a local reputation for knowledge of music from classical to rap and the ability to put together sets of recordings that appeal to all ages.
During the last several months, Peyton served as a guest disc jockey on a local radio station. In addition, Peyton has entertained at several friends’ parties as the host deejay.
On June 1, 2014, Peyton established a corporation known as PS Music. Using an extensive collection of music MP3 files, Peyton will serve as a disc jockey on a fee basis for weddings, college parties, and other events. During June, Peyton entered into the following transactions:
June 1. Deposited $4,000 in a checking account in the name of PS Music in exchange for capital stock.
2. Received $3,500 from a local radio station for serving as the guest disc jockey for June.
2. Agreed to share office space with a local real estate agency, Pinnacle Realty. PS Music will pay one-fourth of the rent. In addition, PS Music agreed to pay a portion of the salary of the receptionist and to pay one-fourth of the utilities. Paid $800 for the rent of the office.
4. Purchased supplies from City Office Supply Co. for $350.Agreed to pay $100 within 10 days and the remainder by July 5, 2014.
6. Paid $500 to a local radio station to advertise the services of PS Music twice daily for two weeks.
8. Paid $675 to a local electronics store for renting digital recording equipment.
12. Paid $350 (music expense) to Cool Music for the use of its current music demos to make various music sets.
13. Paid City Office Supply Co. $100 on account.
16. Received $300 from a dentist for providing two music sets for the dentist to play for her patients.
22. Served as disc jockey for a wedding party. The father of the bride agreed to pay $1,000 in July.
25. Received $500 for serving as the disc jockey for a cancer charity ball hosted by the local hospital.
29. Paid $240 (music expense) to Galaxy Music for the use of its library of music demos.
30. Received $900 for serving as PS disc jockey for a local club’s monthly dance.
30. Paid Pinnacle Realty $400 for PS Music’s share of the receptionist’s salary for June.
30. Paid Pinnacle Realty $300 for PS Music’s share of the utilities for June.
30. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand is $170. Therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $180.
30. Paid for miscellaneous expenses, $415.
30. Paid $1,000 royalties (music expense) to National Music Clearing for use of various artists’ music during the month.
30. Paid dividends of $500.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
-Liabilities+
|
Stockholder’s Equity
|
|
Account
|
|
Accounts
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
Fees
|
|
Rent
|
|
Salaries
|
|
Auto
|
|
Misc.
|
|
cash+ Receivable + Supplies
|
–
|
Payable
|
+
|
Stock
|
–
|
Dividends
|
+
|
Earned
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
2. Prepare an income statement for PS Music for the month ended June 30, 2014.
3. Prepare a retained earnings statement for PS Music for the month ended June 30, 2014.
4. Prepare a balance sheet for PS Music as of June 30, 2014.
colleen fernandez president of rhino enterprises applied for a 175 000 loan from fir 539355
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and professional conduct in business
Group Project
Colleen Fernandez, president of Rhino Enterprises, applied for a $175,000 loan from First Federal Bank. The bank requested financial statements from Rhino Enterprises as a basis for granting the loan. Colleen has told her accountant to provide the bank with a balance sheet. Colleen has decided to omit the other financial statements because there was a net loss during the past year. In groups of three or four, discuss the following questions:
1. Is Colleen behaving in a professional manner by omitting some of the financial statements?
2. a. What types of information about their businesses would owners be willing to provide bankers? What types of information would owners not be willing to provide?
b. What types of information about a business would bankers want before extending a loan?
c. What common interests are shared by bankers and business owners?
on january 1 2013 dr marcie cousins established health wise medical a medical practi 539356
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Net income
On January 1, 2013, Dr. Marcie Cousins established Health-Wise Medical, a medical practice organized as a corporation. The following conversation occurred the following August between
Dr. Cousins and a former medical school classmate,
Dr. Avi Abu, at an American Medical Association convention in Seattle.
Dr. Abu: Marcie, good to see you again. Why didn’t you call when you were in Miami? We could have had dinner together.
Dr. Cousins: Actually, I never made it to Miami this year. My husband and kids went up to our Vail condo twice, but I got stuck in Jacksonville. I opened a new consulting practice this January and haven’t had any time for myself since.
Dr. Abu: I heard about it . . . Health . . . something . . . right?
Dr. Cousins: Yes, Health-Wise Medical. My husband chose the name.
Dr. Abu: I’ve thought about doing something like that. Are you making any money? I mean, is it worth your time?
Dr. Cousins: You wouldn’t believe it. I started by opening a bank account with $25,000, and my July bank statement has a balance of $80,000. Not bad for six months—all pure profit.
Dr. Abu: Maybe I’ll try it in Miami! Let’s have breakfast together tomorrow and you can fill me in on the details. Comment on Dr. Cousins’ statement that the difference between the opening bank balance ($25,000) and the July statement balance ($80,000) is pure profit.
lisa duncan a junior in college has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money a 539357
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions and financial statements
Lisa Duncan, a junior in college, has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money. As an active sports enthusiast, Lisa plays tennis regularly at the Phoenix Tennis Club, where her family has a membership. The president of the club recently approached Lisa with the proposal that she manage the club’s tennis courts. Lisa’s primary duty would be to supervise the operation of the club’s four indoor and 10 outdoor courts, including court reservations.
In return for her services, the club would pay Lisa $325 per week, plus Lisa could keep whatever she earned from lessons. The club and Lisa agreed to a one-month trial, after which both would consider an arrangement for the remaining two years of Lisa’s college career. On this basis, Lisa organized Serve-N-Volley. During September 2014, Lisa managed the tennis courts and entered into the following transactions:
a) Opened a business account by depositing $950.
b) Paid $300 for tennis supplies (practice tennis balls, etc.).
c) Paid $275 for the rental of video equipment to be used in offering lessons during September.
d) Arranged for the rental of two ball machines during September for $250. Paid $100 in advance, with the remaining $150 due October 1.
e) Received $1,750 for lessons given during September.
f) Received $600 in fees from the use of the ball machines during September.
g) Paid $800 for salaries of part-time employees who answered the telephone and took reservations while Lisa was giving lessons.
h) Paid $290 for miscellaneous expenses.
i) Received $1,300 from the club for managing the tennis courts during September.
j) Determined that the cost of supplies on hand at the end of the month totaled $180; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $120.
k) Withdrew $400 for personal use on September 30.
As a friend and accounting student, you have been asked by Lisa to aid her in assessing the venture.
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
Cash + Supplies
|
=
|
Accounts Payable
|
+
|
Lisa Duncan, Capital
|
–
|
Lisa Duncan, Drawing
|
+
|
Fees Earned
|
–
|
Salaries Expense
|
–
|
Rent Expense
|
–
|
Supplies Expense
|
–
|
Misc. Expense
|
1. Prepare an income statement for September.
2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for September. The statement of owner’s equity for a proprietorship is similar to the retained earnings statement for a corporation. The balance of the owner’s capital as of the beginning of the period is listed first. Any investments made by the owner during the period are then listed and the net income (net loss) is added (subtracted) to determine a subtotal. From this subtotal, the owner’s withdrawals are subtracted to determine the increase (decrease) in owner’s equity for the period. This increase ( decrease) is then added to (subtracted from) the beginning
3. Owner’s equity to determine the owner’s equity as of the end of the period.
4. Prepare a balance sheet as of September 30.
5.
a. Assume that Lisa Duncan could earn $10 per hour working 30 hours a week as a waitress. Evaluate which of the two alternatives, working as a waitress or operating Serve-N-Volley, would provide Lisa with the most income per month.
b. Discuss any other factors that you believe Lisa should consider before discussing a long-term arrangement with the Phoenix Tennis Club.
by satisfying certain specific requirements accountants may become certified as publ 539358
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Certification requirements for accountants
By satisfying certain specific requirements, accountants may become certified as public accountants (CPAs), management accountants (CMAs), or internal auditors (CIAs). Find the certification requirements for one of these accounting groups by accessing the appropriate Internet site listed below.
|
Site
|
Description
|
Accounting Institute For Success
|
This site lists the address and/or Internet link for each state’s board of accountancy. Find your state’s requirements.
|
|
http://www.imanet.org
|
This site lists the requirements for becoming a CMA.
|
|
http://www.theiia.org
|
This site lists the requirements for becoming a CIA.
|
amazon com an internet retailer was incorporated and began operation in the mid 90s 539359
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flows
Amazon.com, an Internet retailer, was incorporated and began operation in the mid-90s. On the statement of cash flows, would you expect Amazon.com’s net cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities to be positive or negative for its first three years of operations? Use the following format for your answers, and briefly explain your logic.
| |
First Year
|
Second Year
|
Third Year
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
negative
|
|
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
the now defunct enron corporation once headquartered in houston texas provided produ 539360
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial analysis
The now defunct Enron Corporation, once headquartered in Houston, Texas, provided products and services for natural gas, electricity, and communications to wholesale and retail customers. Enron’s operations were conducted through a variety of subsidiaries and affiliates that involved transporting gas through pipelines, transmitting electricity, and managing energy commodities. The following data were taken from Enron’s financial statements:
| |
In millions
|
|
Total revenues
|
$100,789
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
98,836
|
|
Operating income
|
1,953
|
|
Net income
|
979
|
|
Total assets
|
65,503
|
|
Total liabilities
|
54,033
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
11,470
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
4,779
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(4,264)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
571
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
1,086
|
The market price of Enron’s stock was approximately $83 per share when the prior financial statement data were taken. Before it went bankrupt, Enron’s stock sold for $0.22 per share.
Review the preceding financial statement data and search the Internet for articles on Enron Corporation. Briefly explain why Enron’s stock dropped so dramatically.
two income statements for fuller company are shown on the following page 539382
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal analysis
Two income statements for Fuller Company are shown on the following page
|
Fuller Company
Income Statements
For Years Ended December 31
|
| |
2014
|
2013
|
|
Fees earned
|
$680,000
|
$850,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
541,875
|
637,500
|
|
Net income
|
$138,125
|
$212,500
|
Prepare a horizontal analysis of Fuller Company’s income statements.
two income statements for paragon company are shown below 539383
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal analysis
Two income statements for Paragon Company are shown below.
|
Paragon Company
|
|
Income Statements
|
|
For Years Ended December 31
|
|
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Fees earned
|
$1,416,000
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
1,044,000
|
900,000
|
|
Net income
|
$372,000
|
$300,000
|
Prepare a horizontal analysis of Paragon Company’s income statements.
inners cape interiors is owned and operated by gina kissel an interior decorator in 539385
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chart of accounts
Inners cape Interiors is owned and operated by Gina Kissel, an interior decorator. In the ledger of Inners cape Interiors, the first digit of the account number indicates its major account classification (1—assets, 2—liabilities, 3—stockholders’ equity, 4—revenues, 5—expenses). The second digit of the account number indicates the specific account within each of the preceding major account classifications. Match each account number with its most likely account in the list below. The account numbers are 11, 12, 13, 21, 31, 32, 33, 41, 51, 52, and 53.
|
Accounts Payable
|
Land
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
Capital Stock
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
Cash
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Dividends
|
Wages Expense
|
|
Fees Earned
|
leadco school is a newly organized business that teaches people how to inspire and i 539386
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chart of accounts
LeadCo School is a newly organized business that teaches people how to inspire and influence others. The list of accounts to be opened in the general ledger is as follows:
|
Accounts Payable
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Rent Expense
|
|
Capital Stock
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
Cash
|
Supplies
|
|
Dividends
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Equipment
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
Fees Earned
|
Wages Expense
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
List the accounts in the order in which they should appear in the ledger of LeadCo School and assign account numbers. Each account number is to have two digits: the first digit is to indicate the major classification (1 for assets, etc.), and the second digit is to identify the specific account within each major classification (11 for Cash, etc.).
the following table summarizes the rules of debit and credit for each of the items a 539387
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rules of debit and credit
The following table summarizes the rules of debit and credit. For each of the items (a) through (l), indicate whether the proper answer is a debit or a credit.
| |
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Normal Balance
|
|
Balance sheet accounts:
|
|
|
|
|
Asset
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
Debit
|
|
Liability
|
(c)
|
Debit
|
(d)
|
|
Stockholders’
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Stock
|
Credit
|
(e)
|
(f )
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
(g)
|
(h)
|
Credit
|
|
Dividends
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
(i)
|
|
Income statement
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
(j)
|
(k)
|
Credit
|
|
Expense
|
(l)
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
on may 22 2014 hillcrest co purchased 6 180 of supplies on account in hillcrest co s 539391
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing and posting
On May 22, 2014, Hillcrest Co. purchased $6,180 of supplies on account. In Hillcrest Co.’s chart of accounts, the supplies account is No. 15, and the accounts payable account is No. 21.
a. Journalize the May 22, 2014, transaction on page 19 of Hillcrest Co.’s two-column journal. Include an explanation of the entry.
b. Prepare a four-column account for Supplies. Enter a debit balance of $1,500 as of May 1, 2014. Place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.
c. Prepare a four-column account for Accounts Payable. Enter a credit balance of $16,750 as of May 1, 2014. Place a check mark (?) in the Posting Reference column.
d. Post the May 22, 2014, transaction to the accounts.
e. Do the rules of debit and credit apply to all companies?
the following selected transactions were completed during january of the current yea 539392
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions and T accounts
The following selected transactions were completed during January of the current year:
1. Billed customers for fees earned, $48,600.
2. Purchased supplies on account, $1,975.
3. Received cash from customers on account, $31,400.
4. Paid creditors on account, $1,350.
a. Journalize the above transactions in a two-column journal, using the appropriate number to identify the transactions. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
b. Post the entries prepared in (a) to the following T accounts: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Fees Earned. To the left of each amount posted in the accounts, place the appropriate number to identify the transactions.
c. Assume that the unadjusted trial balance on January 31 shows a credit balance for Accounts Receivable. Does this credit balance mean an error has occurred?
grand canyon tours co is a travel agency the nine transactions recorded by grand can 539396
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying transactions
Grand Canyon Tours Co. is a travel agency. The nine transactions recorded by Grand Canyon Tours during April 2014, its first month of operations, are indicated in the following T accounts:
|
Cash
|
Equipment
|
Dividends
|
|
(1)
|
75,000
|
(2)
|
4,000
|
(3)
|
25,000
|
|
|
(9)
|
5,000
|
|
|
(7)
|
11,000
|
(3)
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(4)
|
2,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(6)
|
9,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(9)
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Accounts Payable
|
Service Revenue
|
|
(5)
|
19,500
|
(7)
|
11,000
|
(6)
|
9,000
|
(3)
|
22,000
|
|
(5)
|
19,500
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
Capital Stock
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
(2)
|
4,000
|
(8)
|
2,000
|
|
|
(1)
|
75,000
|
(4)
|
2,700
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(8)
|
2,000
|
|
Indicate for each debit and each credit: (a) whether an asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, dividends, revenue, or expense account was affected and (b) whether the account was increased (+) or decreased (–). Present your answers in the following form, with transaction (1) given as an example:
|
Account Debited
|
Account Credited
|
|
Transaction
|
Type
|
Effect
|
Type
|
Effect
|
|
(1)
|
assets
|
+
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
+
|
the accounts in the ledger of leaf co as of december 31 2014 are listed in alphabeti 539397
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trial balance
The accounts in the ledger of Leaf Co. as of December 31, 2014, are listed in alphabetical order as follows. All accounts have normal balances. The balance of the cash account has been intentionally omitted.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 23,500
|
Notes Payable
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
38,100
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6,400
|
|
Capital Stock
|
8,000
|
Rent Expense
|
36,000
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
Retained Earnings
|
42,000
|
|
Dividends
|
16,000
|
Supplies
|
3,200
|
|
Fees Earned
|
538,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
9,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
6,000
|
Unearned Rent
|
13,500
|
|
Land
|
40,000
|
Utilities Expense
|
18,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
12,000
|
Wages Expense
|
476,800
|
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance, listing the accounts in their normal order and inserting the missing figure for cash.
a summary of cash flows for sunset travel service for the year ended april 30 2014 i 539317
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cash flows
A summary of cash flows for Sunset Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2014, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock
|
75,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
1,215,000
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
240,000
|
|
Cash paid for dividends
|
66,000
|
The cash balance as of May 1, 2013, was $220,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Sunset Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2014.
a summary of cash flows for sentinel travel service for the year ended august 31 201 539318
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cash flows
A summary of cash flows for Sentinel Travel Service for the year ended August 31, 2014, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$734,000
|
|
Cash received from issuing
|
36,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
745,600
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
50,000
|
|
Cash paid for dividends
|
18,000
|
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Sentinel Travel Service for the year ended August 31, 2014.
the following is a list of well known companies 539321
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Types of businesses
The following is a list of well-known companies.
1. Alcoa Inc.
2. Boeing
3. Caterpillar
4. Citigroup Inc.
5. CVS
6. Dow Chemical Company
7. eBay Inc.
8. FedEx
9. Ford Motor Company
10. Gap Inc.
11. H&R Block
12. Hilton Hospitality,
13. Procter & Gamble
14. SunTrust
15. Walmart Stores, Inc.
a. Indicate whether each of these companies is primarily a service, merchandise, or manufacturing business. If you are unfamiliar with the company, use the Internet to locate the company’s home page or use the finance Web site of Yahoo.
b. For which of the preceding companies is the accounting equation relevant?
ozark sports sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fis 539323
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business entity concept
Ozark Sports sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fishing trips. Ozark Sports is owned and operated by Eric Griffith, a well-known sports enthusiast and hunter. Eric’s wife, Linda, owns and operates Lake Boutique, a women’s clothing store. Eric and Linda have established a trust fund to finance their children’s college education. The trust fund is maintained by Missouri State Bank in the name of the children, Mark and Steffy.
a. For each of the following transactions, identify which of the entities listed should record the transaction in its records.
|
Entities
|
|
L
|
Lake Boutique
|
|
M
|
Missouri State Bank
|
|
O
|
Ozark Sports
|
|
X
|
None of the above
|
1. Linda authorized the trust fund to purchase mutual fund shares.
2. Linda purchased two dozen spring dresses from a St. Louis designer for a special spring sale.
3. Eric paid a breeder’s fee for an English springer spaniel to be used as a hunting guide dog.
4. Linda deposited a $2,000 personal check in the trust fund at Missouri State Bank.
5. Eric paid a local doctor for his annual physical, which was required by the workmen’s compensation insurance policy carried by Ozark Sports.
6. Eric received a cash advance from customers for a guided hunting trip.
7. Linda paid her dues to the YWCA.
8. Linda donated several dresses from inventory for a local charity auction for the benefit of a women’s abuse shelter.
9. Eric paid for dinner and a movie to celebrate their twelfth wedding anniversary.
10. Eric paid for an advertisement in a hunters’ magazine.
b. What is a business transaction?
determine the missing amount for each of the following 539325
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting equation
Determine the missing amount for each of the following:
| |
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
a.
|
X
|
=
|
$118,000
|
+
|
$338,100
|
|
b.
|
$766,750
|
=
|
X
|
+
|
$411,740
|
|
c.
|
$3,250,300
|
=
|
$1,178,100
|
+
|
X
|
mega concepts is a motivational consulting business at the end of its accounting per 539326
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting equation
Mega Concepts is a motivational consulting business. At the end of its accounting period, December 31, 2013, Mega Concepts has assets of $1,250,000 and liabilities of $475,000. Using the accounting equation and considering each case independently, determine the following amounts:
a. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2013.
b. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets increased by $225,000 and liabilities increased by $110,000 during 2014.
c. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets decreased by $300,000 and liabilities increased by $90,000 during 2014.
d. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2014, assuming that assets increased by $550,000 and liabilities decreased by $135,000 during 2014.
e. Net income (or net loss) during 2014, assuming that as of December 31, 2014, assets were $1,500,000, liabilities were $375,000, and no additional capital stock was issued or dividends paid.
the following selected transactions were completed by reuben s delivery service duri 539331
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions
The following selected transactions were completed by Reuben’s Delivery Service during October:
1. Received cash from owner in exchange for capital stock, $20,000.
2. Purchased supplies for cash, $900.
3. Paid rent for October, $3,000.
4. Paid advertising expense, $2,500.
5. Received cash for providing delivery services, $23,100.
6. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $41,750.
7. Paid creditors on account, $4,500.
8. Received cash from customers on account, $36,200.
9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $175 and $725 of supplies had been used during the month.
10. Paid dividends, $1,000.
Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation by listing the numbers identifying the transactions, (1) through (10), in a column, and inserting at the right of each number the appropriate letter from the following list:
a. Increase in an asset, decrease in another asset.
b. Increase in an asset, increase in a liability.
c. Increase in an asset, increase in stockholders’ equity.
d. Decrease in an asset, decrease in a liability.
e. Decrease in an asset, decrease in stockholders’ equity.
angela howard operates her own catering service summary financial data for july are 539332
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nature of transactions
Angela Howard operates her own catering service. Summary financial data for July are presented in equation form as follows. Each line designated by a number indicates the effect of a transaction on the equation. Each increase and decrease in stockholders’ equity, except transaction (5), affects net income.
| |
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
| |
Cash
|
+ Supplies +
|
Land
|
–
|
Accounts Payable
|
+
|
Capital Stock
|
+
|
Retained Earning
|
+
|
Fees Earned
|
–
|
Expenses
|
|
Bal.
|
30,000
|
2,000
|
80,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
30,000
|
|
70,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.
|
+33,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+33,000
|
|
|
|
2.
|
–20,000
|
|
+20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.
|
–24,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-24,000
|
|
4.
|
|
+1,000
|
|
|
+1,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.
|
–3,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.
|
–6,000
|
–1,800
|
|
|
-6,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-18,00
|
|
Bal.
|
10,000
|
1,200
|
100,000
|
|
7,000
|
|
30,000
|
|
70,000
|
|
33,000
|
|
-25,800
|
a. Describe each transaction.
b. What is the amount of the net decrease in cash during the month?
c. What is the amount of the net increase in stockholders’ equity during the month?
d. What is the amount of the net income for the month?
e. How much of the net income for the month was retained in the business?
net income and stockholders equity for four businesses 539334
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Net income and stockholders’ equity for four businesses
Four different corporations, Juliet, Kilo, Lima, and Mike, show the same balance sheet data at the beginning and end of a year. These data, exclusive of the amount of stockholders’ equity, are summarized as follows:
| |
Total Assets
|
Total Liabilities
|
|
Beginning of the year
|
$ 600,000
|
$150,000
|
|
End of the year
|
1,125,000
|
500,000
|
On the basis of the above data and the following additional information for the year, determine the net income (or loss) of each company for the year. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)
Juliet: No additional capital stock was issued, and no dividends were paid.
Kilo: No additional capital stock was issued, but dividends of $55,000 were paid.
Lima: Additional capital stock of $100,000 was issued, but no dividends were paid.
Mike: Additional capital stock of $100,000 was issued, and dividends of $55,000 were paid.
one item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income s 539338
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing amounts from balance sheet and income statement data
One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for the following four different corporations:
| |
Freeman
|
Heyward
|
Jones
|
Ramirez
|
|
Beginning of the year:
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$ 900,000
|
$490,000
|
$115,000
|
(d)
|
|
Liabilities
|
360,000
|
260,000
|
81,000
|
$120,000
|
|
End of the year:
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
1,260,000
|
675,000
|
100,000
|
270,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
330,000
|
220,000
|
80,000
|
136,000
|
|
During the year:
|
|
|
|
|
Additional issuance of
|
(a)
|
150,000
|
10,000
|
55,000
|
|
Dividends
|
75,000
|
32,000
|
(c)
|
39,000
|
|
Revenue
|
570,000
|
(b)
|
115,000
|
115,000
|
|
Expenses
|
240,000
|
128,000
|
122,500
|
128,000
|
Determine the missing amounts, identifying them by letter. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)
financial information related to ebony interiors for february and march 2014 is as f 539339
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheets, net income
Financial information related to Ebony Interiors for February and March 2014 is as follows:
| |
February 28, 2014
|
March 31, 2014
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$310,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
800,000
|
960,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
320,000
|
380,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
?
|
|
Supplies
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
a. Prepare balance sheets for Ebony Interiors as of February 28 and March 31, 2014.
b. Determine the amount of net income for March, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued and no dividends were paid during the month.
c. Determine the amount of net income for March, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued but dividends of $50,000 were paid during the month.
each of the following items is shown in the financial statements of exxon mobil corp 539340
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements
Each of the following items is shown in the financial statements of Exxon Mobil Corporation.
1. Accounts payable
2. Cash equivalents
3. Crude oil inventory
4. Equipment
5. Exploration expenses
6. Income taxes payable
7. Investments
8. Long-term debt
9. Marketable securities
10. Notes and loans payable
11. Notes receivable
12. Operating expenses
13. Prepaid taxes
14. Sales
15. Selling expenses
a. Identify the financial statement (balance sheet or income statement) in which each item would appear.
b. Can an item appear on more than one financial statement?
c. Is the accounting equation relevant for Exxon Mobil Corporation?
a summary of cash flows for ethos consulting group for the year ended may 31 2014 is 539342
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cash flows
A summary of cash flows for Ethos Consulting Group for the year ended May 31, 2014, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$637,500
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock
|
62,500
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
475,000
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
90,000
|
|
Cash paid for dividends
|
17,500
|
The cash balance as of June 1, 2013, was $58,000.
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Ethos Consulting Group for the year ended May 31, 2014.
we sell realty organized august 1 2014 is owned and operated by omar farah how many 539343
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements
We-Sell Realty, organized August 1, 2014, is owned and operated by Omar Farah. How many errors can you find in the following statements for We-Sell Realty, prepared after its first month of operations?
|
We-Sell Realty
Income Statement
August 31, 2014
|
|
Sales commissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
$140,000
|
|
Office salaries expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$87,000
|
|
|
Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
18,000
|
|
|
Automobile expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
7,500
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
2,200
|
|
|
Supplies expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
1,150
|
|
|
Total expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
|
115,850
|
|
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Omar Farah
Retained Earnings Statement
August 31, 2013
|
|
Retained earnings, August 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$0
|
|
Less dividends during August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?
|
10,000
|
| |
$(10,000)
|
|
Additional issuance of capital stock on August 1, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? ?
|
15,000
|
| |
$5,000
|
|
Net income for August . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
25,000
|
|
Retained earnings, August 31, 2014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$30,000
|
|
Balance Sheet
For the Month Ended August 31, 2014
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$ 8,900
|
Accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$38,600
|
|
Accounts payable
|
22,350
|
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
4,000
|
| |
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
| |
|
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
30,000
|
|
Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$31,250
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity . .
|
$72,600
|
the home depot inc is the world s largest home improvement retailer and one of the l 539344
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity
The Home Depot, Inc., is the world’s largest home improvement retailer and one of the largest retailers in the United States based on net sales volume. The Home Depot operates over 2,200 Home Depot® stores that sell a wide assortment of building materials and home improvement and lawn and garden products.
The Home Depot recently reported the following balance sheet data (in millions):
| |
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Total assets
|
$40,125
|
$40,877
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
18,889
|
19,393
|
a. Determine the total liabilities at the end of Years 2 and 1.
b. Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity for Year 2 and Year 1.Round to two decimal places.
c. What conclusions regarding the margin of protection to the creditors can you draw from (b)?
lowe s companies inc a major competitor of the home depot in the home improvement bu 539345
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity
Lowe’s Companies Inc., a major competitor of The Home Depot in the home improvement business, operates over 1,700 stores. Lowe’s recently reported the following balance sheet data (in millions):
| |
Year 2
|
Year 1
|
|
Total assets
|
$33,699
|
$33,005
|
|
Total liabilities
|
15,587
|
13,936
|
a. Determine the total stockholders’ equity as of at the end of Years 2 and 1.
b. Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity for Year 2 and Year 1. Round to two decimal places.
c. What conclusions regarding the risk to the creditors can you draw from (b)?
d. Using the balance sheet data for The Home Depot in Exercise 1-26, how does the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity of Lowe’s compare to that of The Home Depot?
on june 1 of the current year bret eisen established a business to manage rental pro 539346
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions
On June 1 of the current year, Bret Eisen established a business to manage rental property. He completed the following transactions during June:
a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $30,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,200.
c. Received cash from fees earned for managing rental property, $7,200.
d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,000.
e. Paid creditors on account, $750.
f. Billed customers for fees earned for managing rental property, $5,000.
g. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charges) for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $300.
h. Paid office salaries, $1,800.
i. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $700; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $500.
j. Paid dividends $1,500.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
-Liabilities+
|
Stockholder’s Equity
|
|
Account
|
|
Accounts
|
|
Capital
|
|
|
|
Fees
|
|
Rent
|
|
Salaries
|
|
Auto
|
|
Misc.
|
|
cash+ Receivable + Supplies
|
–
|
Payable
|
+
|
Stock
|
–
|
Dividends
|
+
|
Earned
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
–
|
Expense
|
2. Briefly explain why issuance of capital stock and revenues increased stockholders’ equity, while dividends and expenses decreased stockholders’ equity.
3. Determine the net income for June.
4. How much did June’s transactions increase or decrease retained earnings?
following are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of oriental travel agency at 539347
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements
Following are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of Oriental Travel Agency at December 31, 2014, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year. The retained earnings was $400,000 on January 1, 2014, the beginning of the current year. During the current year, dividends of $25,000 were paid.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 115,000
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
$ 7,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
370,000
|
Rent expense
|
150,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
50,000
|
Supplies
|
20,000
|
|
Cash
|
210,000
|
Supplies expense
|
14,000
|
|
Fees earned
|
1,100,000
|
Utilities expense
|
79,000
|
|
Land
|
300,000
|
Wages expense
|
490,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31, 2014.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the current year ended December 31, 2014.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2014.
4. What item appears on both the retained earnings statement and the balance sheet?
on october 1 2014 kevin bosley established sunrise realty kevin completed the follow 539348
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions; financial statements
On October 1, 2014, Kevin Bosley established Sunrise Realty. Kevin completed the following transactions during the month of October:
1. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $18,000 in exchange for capital stock.
2. Purchased office supplies on account, $3,200.
3. Paid creditor on account, $1,800.
4. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $36,750.
5. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.
6. Paid dividends, $3,000.
7. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,500, and miscellaneous expenses, $1,200.
8. Paid office salaries, $3,750.
9. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,550; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,650.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
–
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
|
|
|
Cash + Supplies
|
–
|
Accounts Payable
|
+
|
Capital Stock
|
–
|
Dividends
|
+
|
Sales Commissions
|
–
|
Rent Expense
|
–
|
Salaries Expense
|
–
|
Auto Expense
|
–
|
Supplies Expense
|
–
|
Misc. Expense
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Prepare an income statement for October, a retained earnings statement for October, and a balance sheet as of October 31.
d lite dry cleaners is owned and operated by joel palk a building and equipment are 539349
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions; financial statements
D’Lite Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Joel Palk. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets, liabilities, and capital stock of the business on July 1, 2014, are as follows: Cash, $45,000; Accounts Receivable, $93,000; Supplies, $7,000; Land, $75,000; Accounts Payable, $40,000; Capital Stock, $60,000. Business transactions during July are summarized as follows:
a. Joel Palk invested additional cash in exchange for capital stock with a deposit of $35,000 in the business bank account.
b. Paid $50,000 for the purchase of land adjacent to land currently owned by D’Lite Dry Cleaners as a future building site.
c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $32,125.
d. Paid rent for the month, $6,000.
e. Purchased supplies on account, $2,500.
f. Paid creditors on account, $22,800.
g. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $84,750.
h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for July (to be paid on August 10), $29,500.
i. Paid the following: wages expense, $7,500; truck expense, $2,500; utilities expense, $1,300; miscellaneous expense, $2,700.
j. Received cash from customers on account, $88,000.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $5,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $3,600.
l. Paid dividends, $12,000.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of retained earnings as of July 1 of the current year.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of July 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for July, a retained earnings statement for July, and a balance sheet as of July 31.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for July.
byp18 2 the condensed income statement for the sally and terry partnership for 2012 539066
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP18-2 The condensed income statement for the Sally and Terry partnership for 2012 is as follows.
|
SALLY AND TERRY COMPANY Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Sales (200,000 units)
|
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
800,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
400,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
Selling
|
$280,000
|
|
|
Administrative
|
160,000
|
440,000
|
A cost behavior analysis indicates that 75% of the cost of goods sold are variable, 50% of the selling expenses are variable, and 25% of the administrative expenses are variable.
Instructions
(Round to nearest unit, dollar, and percentage, where necessary. Use the CVP income statement format in computing profits.)
(a) Compute the break-even point in total sales dollars and in units for 2012.
(b) Sally has proposed a plan to get the partnership “out of the red” and improve its profitability. She feels that the quality of the product could be substantially improved by spending $0.25 more per unit on better raw materials. The selling price per unit could be increased to only $6.25 because of competitive pressures. Sally estimates that sales volume will increase by 30%. What effect would Sally’s plan have on the profits and the break-even point in dollars of the partnership? (Round the contribution margin ratio to two decimal places.)
(c) Terry was a marketing major in college. He believes that sales volume can be increased only by intensive advertising and promotional campaigns. He therefore proposed the following plan as an alternative to Sally’s: (1) Increase variable selling expenses to $0.79 per unit, (2) lower the selling price per unit by $0.30, and (3) increase fixed selling expenses by $35,000. Terry quoted an old marketing research report that said that sales volume would increase by 60% if these changes were made. What effect would Terry’s plan have on the profits and the break-even point in dollars of the partnership?
(d) Which plan should be accepted? Explain your answer.
byp18 3 the coca cola company hardly needs an introduction 539067
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP18-3 The Coca-Cola Company hardly needs an introduction. A line taken from the cover of a recent annual report says it all: If you measured time in servings of Coca-Cola, “a billion Coca-Cola’s ago was yesterday morning.” On average, every U.S. citizen drinks 363 8-ounce servings of Coca-Cola products each year. Coca-Cola’s primary line of business is the making and selling of syrup to bottlers. These bottlers then sell the finished bottles and cans of Coca-Cola to the consumer. In the annual report of Coca-Cola, the information shown below was provided.
|
THE COCA-COLA COMPANY
Management Discussion
|
|
Our gross margin declined to 61 percent this year from 62 percent in the prior year, primarily due to costs for materials such as sweeteners and packaging. The increases [in selling expenses] in the last two years were primarily due to higher marketing expenditures in support of our Company’s volume growth. We measure our sales volume in two ways: (1) gallon shipments of concentrates and syrups and (2) unit cases of finished product (bottles and cans of Coke sold by bottlers).
|
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) Are sweeteners and packaging a variable cost or a fixed cost? What is the impact on the contribution margin of an increase in the per unit cost of sweeteners or packaging? What are the implications for profitability?
(b) In your opinion, are marketing expenditures a fixed cost, variable cost, or mixed cost to The Coca-Cola Company? Give justification for your answer.
(c) Which of the two measures cited for measuring volume represents the activity index as defined in this chapter? Why might Coca-Cola use two different measures?
byp18 4 ganong bros ltd located in st stephen new brunswick is canada s oldest 539068
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP18-4 Ganong Bros. Ltd., located in St. Stephen, New Brunswick, is Canada’s oldest independent candy company. Its products are distributed worldwide. In 1885, Ganong invented the popular “chicken bone,” a cinnamon flavored, pink, hard candy jacket over a chocolate center. The home page of Ganong, listed below, includes information about the company and its products.
Address: www.ganong.com/retail/chicken_bones.html , or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel
Instructions
Read the description of “chicken bones” and answer the following.
(a) Describe the steps in making “chicken bones.”
(b) Identify at least two variable and two fixed costs that are likely to affect the production of “chicken bones.”
byp18 6 jimmy hester is an accountant for advanced company early this year jimmy mad 539070
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP18-6 Jimmy Hester is an accountant for Advanced Company. Early this year, Jimmy made a highly favorable projection of sales and profits over the next 3 years for Advanced Company’s hot-selling computer PLEX. As a result of the projections Jimmy presented to senior management, the company decided to expand production in this area. This decision led to dislocations of some plant personnel who were reassigned to one of the company’s newer plants in another state. However, no one was fired, and in fact the company expanded its work force slightly. Unfortunately, Jimmy rechecked his computations on the projections a few months later and found that he had made an error that would have reduced his projections substantially. Luckily, sales of PLEX have exceeded projections so far, and management is satisfied with its decision. Jimmy, however, is not sure what to do. Should he confess his honest mistake and jeopardize his possible promotion? He suspects that no one will catch the error because sales of PLEX have exceeded his projections, and it appears that profits will materialize close to his projections.
Instructions
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
(b) Identify the ethical issues involved in this situation.
(c) What are the possible alternative actions for Jimmy? What would you do in Jimmy’s position?
byp18 7 the purchase of a new car is one of your biggest personal expenditures 539071
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP18-7 The purchase of a new car is one of your biggest personal expenditures. It is important that you carefully analyze your options. Suppose that you are considering the purchase of a hybrid vehicle. Let’s assume the following facts: The hybrid will initially cost an additional $3,000 above the cost of a traditional vehicle. The hybrid will get 40 miles per gallon of gas, and the traditional car will get 30 miles per gallon. Also, assume that the cost of gas is $3 per gallon.
Instructions
Using the facts above, answer the following questions.
(a) What is the variable gasoline cost of going one mile in the hybrid car? What is the variable cost of going one mile in the traditional car?
(b) Using the information in part (a), if “miles” is your unit of measure, what is the “contribution margin” of the hybrid vehicle relative to the traditional vehicle? That is, express the variable cost savings on a per-mile basis.
(c) How many miles would you have to drive in order to break even on your investment in the hybrid car?
(d) What other factors might you want to consider?
the following information is available for chap company 539075
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Chap Company.
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$120,000
|
|
Total fixed expenses
|
$60,000
|
|
Total variable expenses
|
$100,000
|
Which amount would you find on Chap’s CVP income statement?
(a) Contribution margin of $250,000.
(b) Contribution margin of $190,000.
(c) Gross profit of $230,000.
(d) Gross profit of $190,000.
e19 7 quick auto has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide it provide 539124
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-7 Quick Auto has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair. Oil change–related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is, $80,000 per service outlet).
Instructions
(a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.
(b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?
a firm reported the following cash flows 539126
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm reported the following cash flows:
|
Year
|
1999
|
2000
|
2001
|
2002
|
2003
|
2004
|
Average
|
|
S&P500
|
+21.4%
|
-5.7%
|
-12.8%
|
-21.9%
|
+26, 4%
|
+9.0%
|
+2.7%
|
|
Cash Flows
|
+$2, 864
|
+$1, 666
|
-$1, 040
|
+$52
|
+$1, 478
|
-$962
|
+$997
|
(Note that the cash flows are close to nothing in 2002 and even negative in 2004, the latter preventing you from computing percent changes in cash flows.) What cost of capital would you recommend for this firm?
construct a pro forma for the following firm a 3 year project costs 150 year 1 and p 539165
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construct a pro forma for the following firm: A 3-year project costs $150 (year 1), and produces $70 in year 1, $60 in year 2, and $55 in year 3. Depreciation, both real and financial, is 3 years. Projects of this riskiness (and with this term structure of project payoffs) have an 18% cost of capital. The marginal corporate income tax rate is 40%.
a) Assume that the firm is 100% equity financed. Construct the pro forma, and compute expected project cash flows.
b) Compute the Project IRR.
c) Compute the project NPV.
d) Assume that this firm expects to receive an extra bonus of $2 in years 2 and 3 from a benevolent donor.
What would be the project’s cash flows and IRR now?
For the remaining questions, assume that the firm instead has a capital structure financing $50 in debt raised in year 1 at a 10% (expected) interest rate. There is no interest paid in year 1, Justin year’s 2 and 3. The principal is repaid in year 3.
e) Construct the pro forma now. What is the IRR of this project?
f) From the pro forma, what is the NPV of the debt-financed project?
g) Compute the NPV via the APV method.
h) Via the APV method, how much would firm value be if the firm would have taken on not$50 but $40 in debt (assuming the same interest rate of 10%)?
i) How much money must the equity provide in year 1? What is the debt ratio of the firm? Does it stay constant over time? Is this a good candidate firm for the WACC method?
interstate delivery service is owned and operated by katie wyer the following select 539311
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions
Interstate Delivery Service is owned and operated by Katie Wyer. The following selected transactions were completed by Interstate Delivery Service during May:
1. Received cash in exchange for capital stock, $18,000.
2. Paid advertising expense, $4,850.
3. Purchased supplies on account, $2,100.
4. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $14,700.
5. Received cash from customers on account, $8,200.
Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation elements (Assets, Liabilities, Stockholders’ Equity Capital Stock, Dividends, Revenue, and Expense). Also indicate the specific item within the accounting equation element that is affected. To illustrate, the answer to (1) is shown below.
(1) Asset (Cash) increases by $18,000; Stockholders’ Equity (Capital Stock) increases by $18,000.
e18 4 cottonwood furniture corporation incurred the following costs 539038
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E18-4 Cottonwood Furniture Corporation incurred the following costs.
1. Wood used in the production of furniture.
2. Fuel used in delivery trucks.
3. Straight-line depreciation on factory building.
4. Screws used in the production of furniture.
5. Sales staff salaries.
6. Sales commissions.
7. Property taxes.
8. Insurance on buildings.
9. Hourly wages of furniture craftsmen.
10. Salaries of factory supervisors.
11. Utilities expense.
12. Telephone bill.
Instructions
Identify the costs above as variable, fixed, or mixed.
e18 8 green forever provides environmentally friendly lawn services for homeowners 539042
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E18-8 Green Forever provides environmentally friendly lawn services for homeowners. Its operating costs are as follows.
|
Depreciation
|
$1,500 per month
|
|
Advertising
|
$200 per month
|
|
Insurance
|
$2,000 per month
|
|
Weed and feed materials
|
$13 per lawn
|
|
Direct labor
|
$12 per lawn
|
|
Fuel
|
$2 per lawn
|
Green Forever charges $60 per treatment for the average single-family lawn.
Instructions
Determine the company’s break-even point in (a) number of lawns serviced per month and (b) dollars.
the san marcos inn is trying to determine its break even point 539043
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The San Marcos Inn is trying to determine its break-even point. The inn has 50 rooms that it rents at $60 a night. Operating costs are as follows.
|
Salaries
|
$7,200 per month
|
|
Utilities
|
$1,500 per month
|
|
Depreciation
|
$1,200 per month
|
|
Maintenance
|
$300 per month
|
|
Maid service
|
$8 per room
|
|
Other costs
|
$28 per room
|
Instructions
Determine the inn’s break-even point in (1) number of rented rooms per month and (2) dollars
naylor company has the following information available for september 2012 539045
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Naylor Company has the following information available for September 2012.
|
Unit selling price of video game consoles
|
$ 400
|
|
Unit variable costs
|
$ 270
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
$52,000
|
|
Units sold
|
620
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a CVP income statement that shows both total and per unit amounts.
(b) Compute Naylor’s break-even point in units.
(c) Prepare a CVP income statement for the break-even point that shows both total and per unit amounts.
e18 17 hardwood seating co a manufacturer of chairs had the following data for 2012 539051
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E18-17 Hardwood Seating Co., a manufacturer of chairs, had the following data for 2012.
|
Sales
|
2,400 units
|
|
Sales price
|
$40 per unit
|
|
Variable costs
|
$14 per unit
|
|
Fixed costs
|
$19,500
|
Instructions
(a) What is the contribution margin ratio?
(b) What is the break-even point in dollars?
(c) What is the margin of safety in dollars and as a ratio?
(d) If the company wishes to increase its total dollar contribution margin by 40% in 2013, by how much will it need to increase its sales if all other factors remain constant?
p18 1a stephen thorne owns the fredonia barber shop 539052
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P18-1A Stephen Thorne owns the Fredonia Barber Shop. He employs five barbers and pays each a base rate of $1,000 per month. One of the barbers serves as the manager and receives an extra $500 per month. In addition to the base rate, each barber also receives a commission of $5.50 per haircut. Other costs are as follows.
|
Advertising
|
$200 per month
|
|
Rent
|
$900 per month
|
|
Barber supplies
|
$0.30 per haircut
|
|
Utilities
|
$175 per month plus $0.20 per haircut
|
|
Magazines
|
$25 per month
|
Stephen currently charges $10 per haircut.
Instructions
(a) Determine the variable cost per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs.
(b) Compute the break-even point in units and dollars.
(c) Prepare a CVP graph, assuming a maximum of 1,800 haircuts in a month. Use increments of 300 haircuts on the horizontal axis and $3,000 on the vertical axis.
(d) Determine net income, assuming 1,900 haircuts are given in a month.
p18 2a lyman company bottles and distributes livit a diet soft drink 539053
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P18-2A Lyman Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2012, management estimates the following revenues and costs.
|
Net sales
|
$1,800,000
|
Selling expenses—variable
|
$70,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
430,000
|
Selling expenses—fixed
|
65,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
352,000
|
Administrative expenses—variable
|
20,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead—variable
|
316,000
|
Administrative expenses—fixed
|
60,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead—fixed
|
283,000
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a CVP income statement for 2012 based on management’s estimates.
(b) Compute the break-even point in (1) units and (2) dollars.
(c) Compute the contribution margin ratio and the margin of safety ratio. (Round to nearest full percent.)
(d) Determine the sales dollars required to earn net income of $238,000.
p18 3a giere manufacturing s sales slumped badly in 2012 539054
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P18-3A Giere Manufacturing’s sales slumped badly in 2012. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 600,000 units of product: Net sales $2,400,000; total costs and expenses $2,540,000; and net loss $140,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below.
|
|
Total
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$2,100,000
|
$1,440,000
|
$660,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
240,000
|
72,000
|
168,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
200,000
|
48,000
|
152,000
|
|
|
$2,540,000
|
$1,560,000
|
$980,000
|
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2013.
1. Increase unit selling price 20% with no change in costs, expenses, and sales volume.
2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $150,000 to total salaries of $60,000 plus a 5% commission on net sales.
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action.
(Round all ratios to nearest full percent.) Which course of action do you recommend?
p18 4a julie milroy is the advertising manager for value shoe store 539055
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P18-4A Julie Milroy is the advertising manager for Value Shoe Store. She is currently working on a major promotional campaign. Her ideas include the installation of a new lighting system and increased display space that will add $34,000 in fixed costs to the $270,000 currently spent. In addition, Julie is proposing that a 5% price decrease ($40 to $38) will produce a 20% increase in sales volume (20,000 to 24,000). Variable costs will remain at $22 per pair of shoes. Management is impressed with Julie’s ideas but concerned about the effects that these changes will have on the break-even point and the margin of safety.
Instructions
(a) Compute the current break-even point in units, and compare it to the break-even point in units if Julie’s ideas are used.
(b) Compute the margin of safety ratio for current operations and after Julie’s changes are introduced. (Round to nearest full percent.)
(c) Prepare a CVP income statement for current operations and after Julie’s changes are introduced. Would you make the changes suggested?
p18 4b beth howard is the advertising manager for payless shoe store 539061
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P18-3B Denton Manufacturing had a bad year in 2011. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 60,000 units of product: Net sales $1,500,000; total costs and expenses $1,890,000; and net loss $390,000. Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below.
|
|
Total
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$1,350,000
|
$930,000
|
$420,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
420,000
|
65,000
|
355,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
120,000
|
55,000
|
65,000
|
|
|
$1,890,000
|
$1,050,000
|
$840,000
|
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2012.
1. Increase unit selling price 40% with no change in costs, expenses, and sales volume.
2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $200,000 to total salaries of $30,000 plus a 4% commission on net sales.
3. Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50.
Instructions
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action. Which course of action do you recommend?
the may 10 2004 edition of the wall street journal includes an article 538906
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The May 10, 2004, edition of the Wall Street Journalincludes an article by Evan Ramstad entitled “A Tight Squeeze” (page R9).
Instructions
Read the article and answer the following questions.
(a) What is Proview‘s profit margin on computer monitors? Why is the profit margin so thin on computer monitors?
(b) What are some of the steps that Proview International has taken to control costs?
(c) Why does the company continue to build tube-based monitors even as many consumers are moving away from them?
(d) Mr. Wang’s final comment is, “Every aspect of the business is important, but the most important is cost.” Why does he feel this way?
diane barone was a good friend of yours in high school and is from your home town 538907
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Diane Barone was a good friend of yours in high school and is from your home town. While you chose to major in accounting when you both went away to college, she majored in marketing and management. You have recently been promoted to accounting manager for the Snack Foods Division of Melton Enterprises, and your friend was promoted to regional sales manager for the same division of Melton. Diane recently telephoned you. She explained that she was familiar with job cost sheets, which had been used by the Special Projects division where she had formerly worked. She was, however, very uncomfortable with the production cost reports prepared by your division. She emailed you a list of her particular questions:
1. Since Melton occasionally prepares snack foods for special orders in the Snack Foods Division, why don’t we track costs of the orders separately?
2. What is an equivalent unit?
3. Why am I getting four production cost reports? Isn’t there one Work in Process account?
Instructions
Prepare a memo to Diane. Answer her questions, and include any additional information you think would be helpful. You may write informally, but do use proper grammar and punctuation.
hollins inc a manufacturer of computer chips employs activity based costing 538948
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hollins, Inc., a manufacturer of computer chips, employs activity-based costing. The budgeted data for each of the activity cost pools is provided below for the year 2012.
| |
Estimated
|
Expected Use of
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Overhead
|
Cost Drivers per Activity
|
|
Ordering and receiving
|
$90,000
|
12,000 orders
|
|
Etching
|
480,000
|
60,000 machine hours
|
|
Soldering
|
1,760,000
|
440,000 labor hours
|
For 2012, the company had 11,000 orders and used 50,000 machine hours, and labor hours totaled 500,000. What is the total overhead applied?
spin cycle company uses three activity pools to apply overhead to its products 538951
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spin Cycle Company uses three activity pools to apply overhead to its products. Each activity has a cost driver used to allocate the overhead costs to the product. The activities and related overhead costs are as follows: Product design $40,000; Machining $300,000; and Material handling $100,000. The cost drivers and expected use are as follows.
|
|
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers
|
|
Activities
|
Cost Drivers
|
per Activity
|
|
Product design
|
Number of product changes
|
10
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
150,000
|
|
Material handling
|
Number of set ups
|
100
|
(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each activity. (b) Classify each of these activities as unit-level, batch-level, product-level, or facility-level.
flynn industries has three activity cost pools and two products it expects to produc 538953
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flynn Industries has three activity cost pools and two products. It expects to produce 3,000 units of Product BC113 and 1,500 of Product AD908. Having identified its activity cost pools and the cost drivers for each pool, Flynn accumulated the following data relative to those activity cost pools and cost drivers.
|
|
|
Estimated
|
Expected Use of Cost
|
Product
|
Product
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost Drivers
|
Overhead
|
Drivers per Activity
|
BC113
|
AD908
|
|
Machine setup
|
Setups
|
$16,000
|
40
|
25
|
15
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
110,000
|
5,000
|
1,000
|
4,000
|
|
Packing
|
Orders
|
30,000
|
500
|
150
|
350
|
Using the above data, do the following:
(a) Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates per cost driver.
(b) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost to the two products.
(c) Compute the overhead cost per unit for each product. (Round to nearest cent.)
(d) Comment on the comparative overhead cost per product.
wilkins inc has two types of handbags standard and custom 538956
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company’s operations.
|
|
Standard
|
Custom
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
$50,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Setup hours
|
100
|
400
|
Total estimated overhead costs are $270,000. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $170,000, and $100,000 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.
Instructions
(a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plantwide) approach.
(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.
(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.
american fabrics has budgeted overhead costs of 990 000 538958
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
American Fabrics has budgeted overhead costs of $990,000. It has allocated overhead on a plantwide basis to its two products (wool and cotton) using direct labor hours which are estimated to be 450,000 for the current year. The company has decided to experiment with activity-based costing and has created two activity cost pools and related activity cost drivers. These two cost pools are: Cutting (cost driver is machine hours) and Design (cost driver is number of setups). Overhead allocated to the Cutting cost pool is $360,000 and $630,000 is allocated to the Design cost pool. Additional information related to these pools is as follows.
|
|
Wool
|
Cotton
|
Total
|
|
Machine hours
|
100,000
|
100,000
|
200,000
|
|
Number of setups
|
1,000
|
500
|
1,500
|
Instructions
(a) Determine the amount of overhead allocated to the wool product line and the cotton product line using activity-based costing.
(b) What amount of overhead would be allocated to the wool and cotton product lines using the traditional approach, assuming direct labor hours were incurred evenly between the wool and cotton? How does this compare with the amount allocated using ABC in part (a)?
altex inc manufactures two products car wheels and truck wheels 538959
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Altex Inc. manufactures two products: car wheels and truck wheels. To determine the amount of overhead to assign to each product line, the controller, Robert Hermann, has developed the following information.
|
|
Car
|
Truck
|
|
Estimated wheels produced
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
|
Direct labor hours per wheel
|
1
|
3
|
Total estimated overhead costs for the two product lines are $770,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the overhead cost assigned to the car wheels and truck wheels, assuming that direct labor hours is used to allocate overhead costs.
(b) Hermann is not satisfied with the traditional method of allocating overhead because he believes that most of the over he costs relate to the truck wheel product line because of its complexity. He therefore develops the following three activity cost pools and related cost drivers to better understand these costs.
|
|
Expected Use of
|
Estimated Overhead
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Cost Drivers
|
Costs
|
|
Setting up machines
|
1,000 setups
|
$220,000
|
|
Assembling
|
70,000 labor hours
|
280,000
|
|
Inspection
|
1,200 inspections
|
270,000
|
Compute the activity-based overhead rates for these three cost pools.
(c) Compute the cost that is assigned to the car wheels and truck wheels product lines using an activity-based costing system, given the following information.
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product
|
|
|
Car
|
Truck
|
|
Number of setups
|
200
|
800
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
40,000
|
30,000
|
|
Number of inspections
|
100
|
1,100
|
(d) What do you believe Hermann should do?
shady lady sells window coverings to both commercial and residential customers 538960
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shady Lady sells window coverings to both commercial and residential customers. The following information relates to its budgeted operations for the current year.
|
|
|
Commercial
|
|
Residential
|
|
Revenues
|
|
$300,000
|
|
$480,000
|
|
Direct material costs
|
$30,000
|
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
100,000
|
|
300,000
|
|
|
Overhead costs
|
85,000
|
215,000
|
150,000
|
500,000
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
|
$85,000
|
|
($20,000)
|
The controller, Peggy Kingman, is concerned about the residential product line. She cannot understand why this line is not more profitable given that the installations of window coverings are less complex for residential customers. In addition, the residential client base resides in close proximity to the company office, so travel costs are not as expensive
on a per client visit for residential customers. As a result, she has decided to take a closer look at the overhead costs assigned to the two product lines to determine whether a more accurate product costing model can be developed. Here are the three activity cost pools and related information she developed:
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Estimated Overhead
|
Cost Drivers
|
|
Scheduling and travel
|
$105,000
|
Hours of travel
|
|
Setup time
|
70,000
|
Number of setups
|
|
Supervision
|
60,000
|
Direct labor cost
|
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product
|
|
|
Commercial
|
Residential
|
|
Scheduling and travel
|
1,000
|
500
|
|
Setup time
|
450
|
250
|
| |
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rates for each of the three cost pools, and determine the overhead cost assigned to each product line.
(b) Compute the operating income for each product line, using the activity-based overhead rates.
(c) What do you believe Peggy Kingman should do?
healthy products inc uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead co 538968
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Healthy Products, Inc., uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead costs uniformly to all products. To meet Food and Drug Administration requirements and to assure its customers of safe, sanitary, and nutritious food, Healthy engages in a high level of quality control. Healthy assigns its quality-control overhead costs to all products at a rate of 17% of direct labor costs. Its direct labor cost for the month of June for its low-calorie dessert line is $65,000. In response to repeated requests from its financial vice president, Healthy’s management agrees to adopt activity-based costing. Data relating to the low-calorie dessert line for the month of June are as follows.
|
|
|
|
Number of Cost
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Drivers Used
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Cost Drivers
|
Rate
|
per Activity
|
|
Inspections of
|
|
|
|
|
material received
|
Number of pounds
|
$0.80 per pound
|
6,000 pounds
|
|
In-process inspections
|
Number of servings
|
$0.33 per serving
|
10,000 servings
|
|
FDA certification
|
Customer orders
|
$12.00 per order
|
420 orders
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the quality-control overhead cost to be assigned to the low-calorie dessert product line for the month of June: (1) using the traditional product costing system (direct labor cost is the cost driver), and (2) using activity-based costing.
(b) By what amount does the traditional product costing system undercost or overcost the low-calorie dessert line?
(c) Classify each of the activities as value-added or non–value-added.
kinnard electronics manufactures two home theater systems the elite which sells 538976
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kinnard Electronics manufactures two home theater systems: the Elite which sells for $1,400, and a new model, the Preferred, which sells for $1,100. The production cost computed per unit under traditional costing for each model in 2012 was as follows.
|
Traditional Costing
|
Elite
|
Preferred
|
|
Direct materials
|
$600
|
$320
|
|
Direct labor ($20 per hour)
|
100
|
80
|
|
Manufacturing overhead ($35 per DLH)
|
175
|
140
|
|
Total per unit cost
|
$875
|
$540
|
| |
|
|
In 2012, Kinnard manufactured 20,000 units of the Elite and 10,000 units of the Preferred. The overhead rate of $35 per direct labor hour was determined by dividing total expected manufacturing overhead of $4,900,000 by the total direct labor hours (140,000) for the two models. Under traditional costing, the gross profit on the models was: Elite $525 ($1,400 _ $875), and Preferred $560 ($1,100 _ $540). Because of this difference, management is considering phasing out the Elite model and increasing the production of the Preferred model. Before finalizing its decision, management asks Kinnard’s controller to prepare an analysis using activity-based costing (ABC). The controller accumulates the following information about overhead for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
|
|
|
Expected
|
Activity-
|
|
|
|
|
Use of
|
Based
|
|
|
|
Estimated
|
Cost
|
Overhead
|
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Overhead
|
Drivers
|
Rate
|
|
Purchasing
|
Number of orders
|
$ 775,000
|
25,000
|
$31
|
|
Machine setups
|
Number of setups
|
580,000
|
20,000
|
29
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
3,100,000
|
100,000
|
31
|
|
Quality control
|
Number of inspections
|
445,000
|
5,000
|
89
|
The cost drivers used for each product were:
|
Cost Driver
|
Elite
|
Preferred
|
Total
|
|
Purchase orders
|
11,250
|
13,750
|
25,000
|
|
Machine setups
|
11,000
|
9,000
|
20,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
40,000
|
60,000
|
100,000
|
|
Inspections
|
2,750
|
2,250
|
5,000
|
Instructions
(a) Assign the total 2012 manufacturing overhead costs to the two products using activitybased costing (ABC).
(b) What was the cost per unit and gross profit of each model using ABC costing?
(c) Are management’s future plans for the two models sound? Explain.
luxury furniture designs and builds factory made premium wood armoires for homes 538977
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Luxury Furniture designs and builds factory-made, premium, wood armoires for homes. All are of white oak. Its budgeted manufacturing overhead costs for the year 2012 are as follows.
|
Overhead Cost Pools
|
Amount
|
|
Purchasing
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Handling materials
|
50,000
|
|
Production (cutting, milling, finishing)
|
130,000
|
|
Setting up machines
|
85,000
|
|
Inspecting
|
60,000
|
|
Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)
|
80,000
|
|
Utilities
|
100,000
|
|
Total budget overhead costs
|
$550,000
|
For the last 4 years, Luxury Furniture has been charging overhead to products on the basis of materials cost. For the year 2012, materials cost of $500,000 were budgeted. Jim Brigham, owner-manager of Luxury Furniture, recently directed his accountant, Bob Borke, to implement the activity-based costing system that he has repeatedly proposed. At Jim Brigham’s request, Bob and the production foreman identify the following cost drivers and their usage for the previously budgeted overhead cost pools.
| |
|
Expected
|
| |
|
Use of
|
|
Overhead Cost Pools
|
Activity Cost Drivers
|
Cost Drivers
|
|
Purchasing
|
Number of orders
|
500
|
|
Handling materials
|
Number of moves
|
5,000
|
|
Production (cutting, milling, finishing)
|
Direct labor hours
|
65,000
|
|
Setting up machines
|
Number of setups
|
1,000
|
|
Inspecting
|
Number of inspections
|
4,000
|
|
Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)
|
Number of components
|
40,000
|
|
Utilities
|
Square feet occupied
|
50,000
|
Debbie Steiner, sales manager, has received an order for 12 luxury armoires from Thom’s Interior Design. At Debbie’s request, Bob prepares cost estimates for producing 12 armoires so Debbie can submit a contract price per armoire to Thom’s. He accumulates the following data for the production of 12 armoires.
|
Direct materials
|
$5,200
|
|
Direct labor
|
$3,500
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
200
|
|
Number of purchase orders
|
3
|
|
Number of material moves
|
32
|
|
Number of machine setups
|
4
|
|
Number of inspections
|
20
|
|
Number of components
|
640
|
|
Number of square feet occupied
|
320
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate using traditional costing with materials cost as the basis.
(b) What is the manufacturing cost per armoire under traditional costing?
(c) What is the manufacturing cost per armoire under the proposed activity-based costing? (Prepare all of the necessary schedules.)
(d) Which of the two costing systems is preferable in pricing decisions and why?
p17 5b smith and jones is a law firm that serves both individuals and corporations 538979
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P17-5B Smith and Jones is a law firm that serves both individuals and corporations. A controversy has developed between the partners of the two service lines as to who is contributing the greater amount to the bottom line. The area of contention is the assignment of overhead. The individual partners argue for assigning overhead on the basis of 30% of direct labor dollars, while the corporate partners argue for implementing activity-based costing. The partners agree to use next year’s budgeted data for purposes of analysis and comparison. The following overhead data are collected to develop the comparison.
|
|
|
|
Expected
|
Expected Use
|
|
|
|
|
Use of
|
of Cost Drivers
|
|
|
|
Estimated
|
Cost
|
per Service
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost Driver
|
Overhead
|
Drivers
|
Corporate
|
Individual
|
|
Employee training
|
Direct labor dollars
|
$120,000
|
$1,600,000
|
$900,000
|
$700,000
|
|
Typing and
|
Number of reports/
|
|
|
|
|
|
secretarial
|
forms
|
60,000
|
2,000
|
500
|
1,500
|
|
Computing
|
Number of minutes
|
130,000
|
40,000
|
17,000
|
23,000
|
|
Facility rental
|
Number of employees
|
100,000
|
25
|
14
|
11
|
|
Travel
|
Per expense reports
|
70,000
|
Direct
|
48,000
|
22,000
|
|
|
|
$480,000
|
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Using traditional product costing, compute the total overhead cost assigned to both services (individual and corporate) of Smith and Jones.
(b) (1) Using activity-based costing, prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).
(2) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each service based on the use of the cost drivers.
(c) Classify each of the activities as a value-added activity or a non–value-added activity.
(d) Comment on the comparative overhead for the two service lines under both traditional costing and ABC.
there are many resources available on the web to assist people in time management 538986
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are many resources available on the Web to assist people in time management. Some of these resources are designed specifically for college students.
Instructions
Go to http://www.dartmouth.edu/~acskills/videos/video_tm.html (or do an Internet search of Dartmouth’s time-management video). Watch the video and then answer the following questions.
(a) What are the main tools of time management for students, and what is each used for?
(b) At what time of day are students most inclined to waste time? What time of day is the best for studying complex topics?
(c) How can employing time-management practices be a “liberating” experience?
(d) Why is goal-setting important? What are the characteristics of good goals, and what steps should you take to help you develop your goals?
be18 1 monthly production costs in loder company for two levels of production are as 539019
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE18-1 Monthly production costs in Loder Company for two levels of production are as follows.
|
Cost
|
3,000 units
|
6,000 units
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$10,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
4,000
|
7,000
|
Indicate which costs are variable, fixed, and mixed, and give the reason for each answer.
pesaveno company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost using miles 539022
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pesaveno Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using miles as the activity level.
|
|
Miles Driven
|
Total Cost
|
|
Miles Driven
|
Total Cost
|
|
January
|
8,000
|
$14,150
|
March
|
8,500
|
$15,000
|
|
February
|
7,500
|
13,600
|
April
|
8,200
|
14,490
|
Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high-low method.
be18 5 presto corp has collected the following data concerning its maintenance costs 539023
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE18-5 Presto Corp. has collected the following data concerning its maintenance costs for the past 6 months.
|
|
Units Produced
|
Total Cost
|
|
July
|
18,000
|
$32,000
|
|
August
|
32,000
|
48,000
|
|
September
|
36,000
|
55,000
|
|
October
|
22,000
|
38,000
|
|
November
|
40,000
|
65,000
|
|
December
|
38,000
|
62,000
|
Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high-low method.
be18 6 determine the missing amounts 539024
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE18-6 Determine the missing amounts.
|
|
Unit Selling Price
|
Unit Variable Costs
|
Contribution Margin per Unit
|
Contribution Margin Ratio
|
|
1.
|
$640
|
$384
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
|
2.
|
$300
|
(c)
|
$90
|
(d)
|
|
3.
|
(e)
|
(f)
|
$320
|
25%
|
18 1 dousman company reports the following total costs at two levels of production 539031
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
18-1 Dousman Company reports the following total costs at two levels of production.
|
|
5,000 Units
|
10,000 Units
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 6,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
7,000
|
7,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
27,000
|
54,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
22,000
|
44,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
|
Utilities
|
3,000
|
5,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
9,000
|
11,000
|
Classify each cost as variable, fixed, or mixed.
18 2 colter company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost using uni 539032
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
18-2 Colter Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.
|
|
Units Produced
|
Total Cost
|
|
March
|
10,000
|
$18,000
|
|
April
|
9,000
|
16,650
|
|
May
|
10,500
|
18,750
|
|
June
|
8,800
|
16,200
|
|
July
|
9,500
|
17,100
|
(a) Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high-low method.
(b) Estimate the total cost if the company produces 8,500 units.
harrelson company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments 538872
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harrelson Company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments: Cooking and Canning. In each process, materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. For the month of April, the work in process accounts show the following debits.
|
|
Cooking
|
Canning
|
|
Beginning work in process
|
$ –0–
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Materials
|
21,000
|
9,000
|
|
Labor
|
8,500
|
7,000
|
|
Overhead
|
31,500
|
25,800
|
|
Costs transferred in
|
|
53,000
|
Instructions
Journalize the April transactions.
the ledger of custer company has the following work in process account 538873
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5/1
|
Balance
|
3,590
|
5/31
|
Transferred out
|
?
|
|
5/31
|
Materials
|
5,160
|
|
|
|
|
5/31
|
Labor
|
2,740
|
|
|
|
|
5/31
|
Overhead
|
1,380
|
|
|
|
|
5/31
|
Balance
|
?
|
|
|
|
Production records show that there were 400 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,400 units started, and 1,500 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,040 and conversion costs of $1,550. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.
Instructions
(a) How many units are in process at May 31?
(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?
(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?
(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?
schrager manufacturing company has two production departments cutting and assembly 538874
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schrager Manufacturing Company has two production departments: Cutting and Assembly. July 1 inventories are Raw Materials $4,200, Work in Process—Cutting $2,900, Work in Process—Assembly $10,600, and Finished Goods $31,000. During July, the following transactions occurred.
1. Purchased $62,500 of raw materials on account.
2. Incurred $60,000 of factory labor. (Credit Wages Payable.)
3. Incurred $70,000 of manufacturing overhead; $40,000 was paid and the remainder is unpaid.
4. Requisitioned materials for Cutting $15,700 and Assembly $8,900.
5. Used factory labor for Cutting $33,000 and Assembly $27,000.
6. Applied overhead at the rate of $18 per machine hour. Machine hours were Cutting 1,680 and Assembly 1,720.
7. Transferred goods costing $67,600 from the Cutting Department to the Assembly Department.
8. Transferred goods costing $134,900 from Assembly to Finished Goods.
9. Sold goods costing $150,000 for $200,000 on account.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)
in wayne company materials are entered at the beginning of each process work in proc 538875
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In Wayne Company, materials are entered at the beginning of each process. Work in process inventories, with the percentage of work done on conversion costs, and production data for its Sterilizing Department in selected months during 2012 are as follows.
|
|
Beginning
|
|
|
Ending
|
|
|
|
Work in Process
|
Conversion
|
Units
|
Work in Process
|
Conversion
|
|
Month
|
Units
|
Cost%
|
Transferred Out
|
Units
|
Cost%
|
|
January
|
–0–
|
—
|
9,000
|
2,000
|
60
|
|
March
|
–0–
|
—
|
12,000
|
3,000
|
30
|
|
May
|
–0–
|
—
|
16,000
|
7,000
|
80
|
|
July
|
–0–
|
—
|
10,000
|
1,500
|
40
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the physical units for January and May.
(b) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for each month.
the cutting department of cassel manufacturing has the following production and cost 538876
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cutting Department of Cassel Manufacturing has the following production and cost data for July.
|
Production
|
Costs
|
|
1. Transferred out 12,000 units.
|
Beginning work in process
|
$ –0–
|
|
2. Started 3,000 units that are 60% complete as to conversion costs and 100% complete as to materials at July 31.
|
Materials
|
45,000
|
|
|
Labor
|
16,200
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
18,300
|
Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process.
Instructions
(a) Determine the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs.
(b) Compute unit costs and prepare a cost reconciliation schedule.
the blending department of luongo company has the following cost and production data 538878
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Blending Department of Luongo Company has the following cost and production data for the month of April.
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Work in process, April 1
|
|
|
Direct materials: 100% complete
|
$100,000
|
|
Conversion costs: 20% complete
|
70,000
|
|
Cost of work in process, April 1
|
$170,000
|
|
Costs incurred during production in April
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 800,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
365,000
|
|
Costs incurred in April
|
$1,165,000
|
Units transferred out totaled 17,000. Ending work in process was 1,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.
Instructions
(a) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of April.
(b) Compute the unit costs for the month.
(c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process.
kostrivas company has gathered the following information 538879
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kostrivas Company has gathered the following information.
|
Units in beginning work in process
|
0
|
|
Units started into production
|
40,000
|
|
Units in ending work in process
|
6,000
|
|
Percent complete in ending work in process:
|
|
|
Conversion costs
|
40%
|
|
Materials
|
100%
|
|
Costs incurred:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$72,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
$81,000
|
|
Overhead
|
$101,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.
(b) Determine the unit costs of production.
(c) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.
overton company has gathered the following information 538880
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overton Company has gathered the following information.
|
Units in beginning work in process
|
20,000
|
|
Units started into production
|
164,000
|
|
Units in ending work in process
|
24,000
|
|
Percent complete in ending work in process:
|
|
|
Conversion costs
|
60%
|
|
Materials
|
100%
|
|
Costs incurred:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$101,200
|
|
Direct labor
|
$164,800
|
|
Overhead
|
$184,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.
(b) Determine the unit costs of production.
(c) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.
the polishing department of harbin manufacturing company has 538881
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Polishing Department of Harbin Manufacturing Company has the following production and manufacturing cost data for September. Materials are entered at the beginning of the process.
Production: Beginning inventory 1,600 units that are 100% complete as to materials vand 30% complete as to conversion costs; units started during the period are 38,400; ending inventory of 5,000 units 10% complete as to conversion costs.
Manufacturing costs: Beginning inventory costs, comprised of $20,000 of materials and $43,180 of conversion costs; materials costs added in Polishing during the month, $177,200; labor and overhead applied in Polishing during the month, $125,680 and $257,140, respectively.
Instructions
(a) Compute the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs for the month of September.
(b) Compute the unit costs for materials and conversion costs for the month.
(c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.
the cutting department of keigi manufacturing has the following production and cost 538887
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cutting Department of Keigi Manufacturing has the following production and cost data for August.
|
Production
|
Costs
|
|
1. Started and completed 8,000 units.
|
Beginning work in process
|
$ –0–
|
|
2. Started 2,000 units that are 40%
|
Materials
|
45,000
|
|
completed at August 31.
|
Labor
|
14,700
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
16,100
|
Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process. Keigi Manufacturing uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.
Instructions
(a) Determine the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs.
(b) Compute unit costs and show the assignment of manufacturing costs to units transferred out and in work in process.
the smelting department of polzin manufacturing company has the following production 538888
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Smelting Department of Polzin Manufacturing Company has the following production and cost data for September. Production:Beginning work in process 2,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 20% complete as to conversion costs; units started and finished 9,000 units; and ending work in process 1,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.
Manufacturing costs: Work in process, September 1, $15,200; materials added $60,000; labor and overhead $132,000. Polzin uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.
Instructions
(a) Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of September.
(b) Compute the unit costs for the month.
(c) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.
the ledger of hannon company has the following work in process account 538889
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Hannon Company has the following work in process account.
|
3/1
|
Balance
|
3,680
|
3/31
|
Transferred out
|
|
3/31
|
Materials
|
6,600
|
|
|
|
3/31
|
Labor
|
2,500
|
|
|
|
3/31
|
Overhead
|
1,150
|
|
|
|
3/31
|
Balance
|
?
|
|
|
Production records show that there were 800 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,200 units started, and 1,500 units transferred out. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. Hannon uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent units.
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) How many units are in process at March 31?
(b) What is the unit materials cost for March?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for March?
(d) What is the total cost of units started in February and completed in March?
(e) What is the total cost of units started and finished in March?
(f) What is the cost of the March 31 inventory?
the welding department of majestic manufacturing company has the following productio 538890
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Welding Department of Majestic Manufacturing Company has the following production and manufacturing cost data for February 2012. All materials are added at the beginning of the process. Majestic uses the FIFO method to compute equivalent
units.
|
Beginning work in process
|
$ 32,175
|
Beginning work in process
|
15,000 units,
|
|
Costs transferred in
|
135,000
|
|
10% complete
|
|
Materials
|
57,000
|
Units transferred out
|
50,000
|
|
Labor
|
35,100
|
Units transferred in
|
64,000
|
|
Overhead
|
68,400
|
Ending work in process
|
25,000,
|
|
|
|
|
20% complete
|
Instructions
Prepare a production cost report for the Welding Department for the month of February. Transferred-in costs are considered materials costs.
rosenthal company manufactures bowling balls through two processes 538892
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rosenthal Company manufactures bowling balls through two processes: Molding and Packaging. In the Molding Department, the urethane, rubber, plastics, and other materials are molded into bowling balls. In the Packaging Department, the balls are placed in cartons and sent to the finished goods warehouse. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. Labor and manufacturing overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each process. Production and cost data for the Molding Department during June 2012 are presented below.
|
Production Data
|
June
|
|
Beginning work in process units
|
–0–
|
|
Units started into production
|
22,000
|
|
Ending work in process units
|
2,000
|
|
Percent complete—ending inventory
|
40%
|
|
Cost Data
|
|
|
Materials
|
$198,000
|
|
Labor
|
53,600
|
|
Overhead
|
112,800
|
|
Total
|
$364,400
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule showing physical units of production.
(b) Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.
(c) Compute the unit costs of production.
(d) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred and in process for June.
(e) Prepare a production cost report for the Molding Department for the month of June.
seagren industries inc manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes 538893
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seagren Industries Inc. manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.
|
|
Cutting Department
|
|
|
Plant 1
|
Plant 2
|
|
Production Data—July
|
T12-Tables
|
C10-Chairs
|
|
Work in process units, July 1
|
–0–
|
–0–
|
|
Units started into production
|
19,000
|
16,000
|
|
Work in process units, July 31
|
3,000
|
500
|
|
Work in process percent complete
|
60
|
80
|
|
Cost Data—July
|
|
|
|
Work in process, July 1
|
$ –0–
|
$ –0–
|
|
Materials
|
380,000
|
288,000
|
|
Labor
|
234,200
|
110,000
|
|
Overhead
|
104,000
|
96,700
|
|
Total
|
$718,200
|
$494,700
|
Instructions
(a) For each plant:
(1) Compute the physical units of production.
(2) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.
(3) Determine the unit costs of production.
(4) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.
(b) Prepare the production cost report for Plant 1 for July 2012.
rivera company has several processing departments 538894
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rivera Company has several processing departments. Costs charged to the Assembly Department for November 2012 totaled $2,280,000 as follows.
|
Work in process, November 1
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$79,000
|
|
|
Conversion costs
|
48,150
|
$127,150
|
|
Materials added
|
|
1,589,000
|
|
Labor
|
|
225,920
|
|
Overhead
|
|
337,930
|
Production records show that 35,000 units were in beginning work in process 30% complete as to conversion costs, 660,000 units were started into production, and 25,000 units were in ending work in process 40% complete as to conversion costs. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process.
Instructions
(a) Determine the equivalent units of production and the unit production costs for the Assembly Department.
(b) Determine the assignment of costs to goods transferred out and in process.
(c) Prepare a production cost report for the Assembly Department.
wilbury company manufactures a nutrient everlife through two manufacturing processes 538897
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wilbury Company manufactures a nutrient, Everlife, through two manufacturing processes: Blending and Packaging. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. On August 1, 2012, inventories consisted of Raw Materials $5,000, Work in Process—Blending $0, Work in Process—Packaging $3,945, and Finished Goods $7,500. The beginning inventory for Packaging consisted of 500 units, two-fifths complete as to conversion costs and fully complete as to materials. During August, 9,000 units were started into production in Blending, and the following transactions were completed.
1. Purchased $25,000 of raw materials on account.
2. Issued raw materials for production: Blending $18,930 and Packaging $9,140.
3. Incurred labor costs of $25,770.
4. Used factory labor: Blending $15,320 and Packaging $10,450.
5. Incurred $36,500 of manufacturing overhead on account.
6. Applied manufacturing overhead at the rate of $28 per machine hour. Machine hours were Blending 900 and Packaging 300.
7. Transferred 8,200 units from Blending to Packaging at a cost of $44,940.
8. Transferred 8,600 units from Packaging to Finished Goods at a cost of $67,490.
9. Sold goods costing $62,000 for $90,000 on account.
Instructions
Journalize the August transactions.
steiner corporation manufactures water skis through two processes 538898
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Steiner Corporation manufactures water skis through two processes: Molding and Packaging. In the Molding Department, fiberglass is heated and shaped into the form of a ski. In the Packaging Department, the skis are placed in cartons and sent to the finished goods warehouse. Materials are entered at the beginning of both processes. Labor and manufacturing overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each process. Production and cost data for the Molding Department for January 2012 are presented below.
|
|
January
|
|
Production Data
|
–0–
|
|
Beginning work in process units
|
50,000
|
|
Units started into production
|
2,500
|
|
Ending work in process units
|
40%
|
|
Percent complete—ending inventory
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost Data
|
|
|
Materials
|
$510,000
|
|
Labor
|
92,500
|
|
Overhead
|
150,000
|
|
Total
|
$752,500
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the physical units of production.
(b) Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.
(c) Compute the unit costs of production.
(d) Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.
(e) Prepare a production cost report for the Molding Department for the month of January.
florida beach company manufactures suntan lotion called surtan 538904
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Florida Beach Company manufactures suntan lotion, called Surtan, in 11-ounce plastic bottles. Surtan is sold in a competitive market. As a result, management is very cost-conscious. Surtan is manufactured through two processes: mixing and filling. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process, and labor and manufacturing overhead occur uniformly throughout each process. Unit costs are based on the cost per gallon of Surtan using the weighted-average costing approach.
On June 30, 2012, Mary Ritzman, the chief accountant for the past 20 years, opted to take early retirement. Her replacement, Joe Benili, had extensive accounting experience with motels in the area but only limited contact with manufacturing accounting. During July, Joe correctly accumulated the following production quantity and cost data for the Mixing Department. Production quantities:Work in process, July 1, 8,000 gallons 75% complete; started into production 100,000 gallons; work in process, July 31, 5,000 gallons 20% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process. Production costs:Beginning work in process $88,000, comprised of $21,000 of materials costs and $67,000 of conversion costs; incurred in July: materials $573,000, conversion costs $765,000. Joe then prepared a production cost report on the basis of physical units started into production. His report showed a production cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan. The management of Florida Beach was surprised at the high unit cost. The president comes to you, as Mary’s top assistant, to review Joe’s report and prepare a correct report if necessary.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.
(a) Show how Joe arrived at the unit cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan.
(b) What error(s) did Joe make in preparing his production cost report?
(c) Prepare a correct production cost report for July.